Loading...
12.11.18 Town Council Regular Meeting PacketPage 1 of 5 ] Prosper is a place where everyone matters. AGENDA BRIEFING – EXECUTIVE CONFERENCE ROOM 1. Call to Order/Roll Call. 2. Questions about items listed on the Regular Meeting Agenda. 3. Discussion Items: • Modular Building Lease (JC/SB) • Discussion on Park Development Agreements (DR) REGULAR MEETING CONVENES IN COUNCIL CHAMBERS IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING AGENDA BRIEFING 1. Call to Order/Roll Call. 2. Invocation, Pledge of Allegiance and Pledge to the Texas Flag. 3. Announcements of recent and upcoming events. 4. PRESENTATIONS: Presentation of Certificates of Appreciation to members of the Prosper Fire Department who were deployed to California. (SB) 5. CONSENT AGENDA: (Items placed on the Consent Agenda are considered routine in nature and non- controversial. The Consent Agenda can be acted upon in one motion. Items may be removed from the Consent Agenda by the request of Council Members or staff.) 5a. Consider and act upon minutes from the following Town Council meeting. (RB) • Regular Meeting – November 27, 2018 5b. Consider and act upon authorizing the Town Manager to execute a Tower Site Lease Agreement by and between the Town of Prosper, Texas, and T-Mobile West LLC, a Delaware LLC, for the lease of Town property, located at Prosper Trail Elevated Storage Tank (EST), for telecommunications equipment and facilities. (KN) AGENDA Agenda Briefing and Regular Meeting of the Prosper Town Council Prosper Town Hall 200 S. Main Street, Prosper, Texas Tuesday, December 11, 2018 5:45 p.m. Page 2 of 5 5c. Consider and act upon approving an ordinance repealing Division 2, “Marshal,” of Article 9.02, “Law Enforcement,” of Chapter 9, “Personnel,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. (KN) 5d. Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.04, “Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new article 3.04, “Building Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Building Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, removal, and demolition of every building or structure or any appurtenances connected or attached to buildings or structures within the Town of Prosper, Texas. (JW) 5e. Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.05, “Residential Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new article 3.05, “Residential Building Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Residential Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, removal, and demolition of detached one- and two-family dwellings and multiple single-family dwellings (townhouses) not more than three (3) stories in height with a separate means of egress and related accessory structures in the Town of Prosper, Texas. (JW) 5f. Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.06, “Electricity,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.06, “Electricity”; adopting the 2017 edition of the National Electrical Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, removal, use, and maintenance of any electrical wiring, apparatus, device, and/or systems within the Town of Prosper, Texas. (JW) 5g. Consider and act upon an ordinance of the Town of Prosper, Texas, repealing Article 3.07, “Plumbing,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.07, “Plumbing”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Plumbing Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the erection, installation, alteration, repairs, relocation, replacement, addition to, use or maintenance of plumbing systems within the Town of Prosper, Texas. (JW) 5h. Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Energy Conservation Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design of building envelopes for adequate thermal resistance and low air leakage and the design and selection of mechanical, electrical, service water-heating, and illumination systems and equipment which will enable effective use of energy in new building construction within the Town of Prosper, Texas. (JW) Page 3 of 5 5i. Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Mechanical Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design, installation, maintenance, addition, alteration, and inspection of mechanical systems that are permanently installed and utilized to provide control of environmental conditions and related processes within buildings located in the Town of Prosper, Texas. (JW) 5j. Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Fuel Gas Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design, installation, maintenance, addition, alteration, and inspection of fuel gas piping systems, fuel gas utilization equipment, and related accessories within the Town of Prosper, Texas. (JW) 5k. Consider and act upon an ordinance establishing a new Article 3.20, “Existing Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper by adopting the 2015 edition of the International Existing Building Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, removal, and demolition of every existing building or structure or any appurtenances connected or attached to existing buildings or structures within the Town of Prosper, Texas. (JW) 5l. Consider and act upon an ordinance to rezone a portion of Planned Development- 65-Single Family (PD-65-SF) and a portion of Planned Development-65- Commercial (PD-65-C) to Planned Development-92-Commercial (PD-92-C), to allow for development of new automobile sales and leasing dealerships (El Dorado Motors), on 17.8± acres, located on the north side of US 380, west of Mahard Parkway. (Z18-0011). (AG) 5m. Consider and act upon an ordinance rezoning 48.1± acres of Agriculture (A), and 16.4± acres of Single Family-15 (SF-15), to Planned Development-94-Mixed Use (PD-94-MU), in order to facilitate a mixed-use development (WestSide), located on the northeast corner of FM 1385 and US 380. (Z18-0012). (AG) 5n. Consider and act upon an ordinance for “Multifamily Registration and Inspections,” of Article 3.11, “Property Maintenance Code,” of Chapter 3, “Building Regulations,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. (JW) 5o. Consider and act upon an ordinance amending Appendix A, “Fee Schedule,” by adding a new Section XXI, “Multifamily Registration and Inspection Fees.” (JW) 5p. Consider and act upon authorizing the Competitive Sealed Proposal (CSP) procurement method for construction of the State Highway 289 Gateway Monument project. (PN) Page 4 of 5 5q. Consider and act on an ordinance amending Section 8.05.001, “Definitions,” of Article 8.05 “Junked Vehicles,” of Chapter 8, “Offenses and Nuisances,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. (JW) 5r. Consider and act upon whether to direct staff to submit a written notice of appeal on behalf of the Town Council to the Development Services Department, pursuant to Chapter 4, Section 1.5(C)(7) and 1.6(B)(7) of the Town’s Zoning Ordinance, regarding action taken by the Planning & Zoning Commission on any Site Plan or Preliminary Site Plan. (AG) 6. CITIZEN COMMENTS: The public is invited to address the Council on any topic. However, the Council is unable to discuss or take action on any topic not listed on this agenda. Please complete a “Public Meeting Appearance Card” and present it to the Town Secretary prior to the meeting. REGULAR AGENDA: If you wish to address the Council during the regular agenda portion of the meeting, please fill out a “Public Meeting Appearance Card” and present it to the Town Secretary prior to the meeting. Citizens wishing to address the Council for items listed as public hearings will be recognized by the Mayor. Those wishing to speak on a non-public hearing related item will be recognized on a case-by-case basis, at the discretion of the Mayor and Town Council. ITEMS FOR INDIVIDUAL CONSIDERATION: 7. Conduct a Public Hearing, and consider and act upon a request to rezone a portion of Planned Development-17 (PD-17) to Planned Development-Office/Retail (PD-O/R) and to rezone Single Family-15 (SF-15) to Planned Development-Office (PD-O), on 15.2± acres, located on the southwest corner of Broadway Street and Preston Road. (Z18-0007). (AG) 8. Discussion on Draft Downtown Architectural Standards. (JW) 9. Library Services Update. (LS) 10. Consider and act upon amending Ordinance No. 17-65 (FY 2017-2018 Budget). (KN) 11. Consider and act upon amending Ordinance No. 18-71 (FY 2018-2019 Budget) and Capital Improvement Plan. (KN) 12. Consider and act upon awarding Bid No. 2019-04-B, to Landmark Structures I, L.P., related to construction services for the Fishtrap 2.5 Million Gallon (MG) Elevated Storage Tank project; and authorizing the Town Manager to execute a construction agreement for same. (PA) 13. Consider and act upon authorizing the Town Manager to execute a Professional Service Agreement between Halff Associates, Inc., and the Town of Prosper, Texas, related to the design of the Prosper Trail/DNT Intersection Improvements project. (PA) Page 5 of 5 14.EXECUTIVE SESSION: Recess into Closed Session in compliance with Section 551.001 et seq. Texas Government Code, as authorized by the Texas Open Meetings Act, to deliberate regarding: 14a. Section 551.087 – To discuss and consider economic development incentives. 14b. Section 551.072 – To discuss and consider purchase, exchange, lease or value of real property for municipal purposes and all matters incident and related thereto. 14c. Section 551.074 – To discuss and consider personnel matters and all matters incident and related thereto. 15.Reconvene in Regular Session and take any action necessary as a result of the Closed Session. 16.Possibly direct Town staff to schedule topic(s) for discussion at a future meeting. 17.Adjourn. CERTIFICATION I, the undersigned authority, do hereby certify that this Notice of Meeting was posted at Prosper Town Hall, located at 200 S. Main Street, Prosper, Texas 75078, a place convenient and readily accessible to the general public at all times, and said Notice was posted by 6:00 p.m., on Friday, December 7, 2018, and remained so posted at least 72 hours before said meeting was convened. _______________________________ _________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary Date Notice Removed Pursuant to Section 551.071 of the Texas Government Code, the Town Council reserves the right to consult in closed session with its attorney and to receive legal advice regarding any item listed on this agenda. NOTICE Pursuant to Town of Prosper Ordinance No. 13-63, all speakers other than Town of Prosper staff are limited to three (3) minutes per person, per item, which may be extended for an additional two (2) minutes with approval of a majority vote of the Town Council. NOTICE OF ASSISTANCE AT PUBLIC MEETINGS: The Prosper Town Council meetings are wheelchair accessible. For special services or assistance, please contact the Town Secretary’s Office at (972) 569- 1011 at least 48 hours prior to the meeting time. Page 1 of 7 ] Prosper is a place where everyone matters. AGENDA BRIEFING 1.Call to Order/Roll Call. The meeting was called to order at 5:50 p.m. Council Members Present: Mayor Ray Smith Mayor Pro-Tem Curry Vogelsang, Jr. Councilmember Mike Korbuly Councilmember Craig Andres Councilmember Meigs Miller Council Members Absent: Deputy Mayor Pro-Tem Jason Dixon Councilmember Jeff Hodges Staff Members Present: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Terry Welch, Town Attorney Robyn Battle, Town Secretary/PIO Hulon Webb, Executive Director of Development and Community Services John Webb, Development Services Director Alex Glushko, Planning Manager Pete Anaya, Deputy Director of Engineering Services Chuck Springer, Executive Director of Administrative Services Kelly Neal, Finance Director Kala Smith, Human Resources Director Doug Kowalski, Police Chief Stuart Blasingame, Fire Chief 2.Questions about items listed on the Regular Meeting Agenda. Town Manager Harlan Jefferson briefed the Council on Items 7 and 8 on the Regular Agenda. AT&T has approached Prosper ISD about locating a cell tower on school property. While it is too late in the construction process to locate a tower on the new football stadium, the school district indicated they would consider a cell tower at the natatorium site. AT&T has indicated that the process for pursuing a site on school property could delay construction of the tower for up to a year. The Town Council reiterated the need for staff to follow the existing cell tower site map as a guide for the placement of future cell phone towers. The Council directed staff to investigate whether a temporary tower could be placed in Frontier Park while a permanent tower is constructed at the natatorium site. MINUTES Meeting of the Prosper Town Council Prosper Town Hall Council Chambers 200 S. Main Street Prosper, TX 75078 Tuesday, November 27, 2018 Item 5a Page 2 of 7 3. Discussion Items: • Doe Branch Phase 2 Expansion. (HJ) Mr. Jefferson briefed the Council on average daily flow rates to the Upper Trinity Regional Water District Doe Branch Water Reclamation Plant. He reviewed the projected average daily flow from 2018-2022. • Lower Pressure Plane Projects. (HW) Mr. Jefferson introduced Jeff Payne with Freese and Nichols, who reviewed the Town’s future water and wastewater projects. Mr. Payne explained the need for the Town’s third elevated storage tank, which Council will consider for approval at the December 11, 2018, Town Council meeting. Demand for water in the Town’s lower pressure plane on the west side will continue to rise rapidly as development continues to occur. Additionally, the existing 12” pipeline that currently carries water from the east side of Prosper to the west side will be unable to keep up with demand without an additional storage tank. The Agenda Briefing adjourned at 6:20 p.m. REGULAR MEETING CONVENES IN COUNCIL CHAMBERS IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING AGENDA BRIEFING 1. Call to Order/Roll Call. The meeting was called to order at 6:22 p.m. 2. Invocation, Pledge of Allegiance and Pledge to the Texas Flag. Mayor Smith led the invocation. The Pledge of Allegiance and the Pledge to the Texas Flag were recited. 3. Announcements of recent and upcoming events. Councilmember Andres read the following announcements: The public is invited to kick off the Christmas season on Saturday, December 1, at Frontier Park. The Prosper Rotary and Lions Club Christmas Parade starts at 1:30 p.m. and will feature community groups, civic organizations, scout troops, and businesses. Proceeds from the parade will benefit the Cornerstone Christmas Toy Drive. The Annual Prosper Christmas Festival will begin in Frontier Park immediately following the parade. From 2:00-6:00 p.m., families can enjoy a traditional hometown celebration with food trucks, rides, musical performances, Santa’s Workshop, and fireworks. Shuttle service will be provided from the High School to Frontier Park. More information is available at www.prosperchristmasfestival.org On Monday, December 3, the public is invited to a Town Hall Tree Lighting Ceremony at 6pm. Join the Mayor and Town Council members on the grounds of Town Hall for some Item 5a Page 3 of 7 Christmas music, a reading of The Night Before Christmas, complimentary hot chocolate, and the lighting of the Town Christmas Tree by Mayor Smith. 4. CONSENT AGENDA: (Items placed on the Consent Agenda are considered routine in nature and non- controversial. The Consent Agenda can be acted upon in one motion. Items may be removed from the Consent Agenda by the request of Council Members or staff.) 4a. Consider and act upon minutes from the following Town Council meetings. (RB) • Regular Meeting – November 13, 2018 4b. Receive the September Financial Report. (KN) 4c. Receive the Quarterly Investment Report. (KN) 4d. Consider and act upon approving the purchase of a SkyWatch™ Mobile Surveillance Tower for the Police Department, from FLIR Detection, Inc., a sole source provider. (DK) Mayor Pro-Tem Vogelsang made a motion and Councilmember Korbuly seconded the motion to approve all items on the Consent Agenda. The motion was approved by a vote of 5-0. 5. CITIZEN COMMENTS: The public is invited to address the Council on any topic. However, the Council is unable to discuss or take action on any topic not listed on this agenda. Please complete a “Public Meeting Appearance Card” and present it to the Town Secretary prior to the meeting. James Heath, 840 English Ivy Drive, Prosper, spoke regarding traffic accidents on US 380. He stated that a petition has been circulated on change.org for local officials to take action to reduce traffic accidents on US 380. Mr. Heath suggested that the Council work with TxDOT, the Counties, and neighboring cities to reduce the speed limit on US 380 to 60 mph. Canon Cook, a local boy scout, addressed the Council with concerns about the train blocking intersections, especially during the hours before and after school. Carter Lloyd, a local boy scout, addressed the Council and requested a Taco Bell at the Gates of Prosper. There were no other Citizen Comments. REGULAR AGENDA: If you wish to address the Council during the regular agenda portion of the meeting, please fill out a “Public Meeting Appearance Card” and present it to the Town Secretary prior to the meeting. Citizens wishing to address the Council for items listed as public hearings will be recognized by the Mayor. Those wishing to speak Item 5a Page 4 of 7 on a non-public hearing related item will be recognized on a case-by-case basis, at the discretion of the Mayor and Town Council. ITEMS FOR INDIVIDUAL CONSIDERATION: 6. Conduct a Public Hearing, and consider and act upon an ordinance for an extension of a Specific Use Permit (SUP) for a Concrete Batching Plant on 5.0± acres, located on the west side of Dallas Parkway, south of First Street. The property is zoned Planned Development-19-Commercial Corridor (PD-19-CC) and Specific Use Permit-6 (S-6). (S18-0009). (AG) Planning Manager Alex Glushko presented this item before the Town Council. The current SUP for the concrete batching plant expires on January 14, 2019, and requires a renewal for the batch plant to continue to operate. The applicant is requesting the SUP to be extended for another two years. Tony Strickland with Nelson Brothers Ready Mix, the applicant, addressed the Council, and expressed the company’s desire to stay in its current location for as long as possible. Mayor Smith opened the Public Hearing. With no one speaking, Mayor Smith closed the Public Hearing. After discussion, Councilmember Korbuly made a motion and Councilmember Miller seconded the motion to approve Ordinance No. 18-97 for an extension of a Specific Use Permit (SUP) for a Concrete Batching Plant on 5.0± acres, located on the west side of Dallas Parkway, south of First Street, subject to: 1. The SUP expires January 14, 2021, two (2) years after the expiration of the existing ordinance. The applicant may seek a renewal term to the SUP in order to continue the Concrete Batching Plant use. 2. An on-site billing office is required to continue the Concrete Batching Plant use. All concrete deliveries from the physical Prosper location shall be billed as taxable to the Town of Prosper. 3. The Town of Prosper reserves the right to audit books to ensure that Prosper is the primary HUB for tax revenue and upon inspections, if there are any failures to correct errors; Town of Prosper reserves the right to revoke the SUP. The motion was approved by a vote of 5-0. 7. Conduct a Public Hearing, and consider and act upon a request for a Specific Use Permit for a Wireless Communication and Support Structure, on 0.5± acre, located in Frontier Park, on the south side of Frontier Parkway, south and west of Stadium Drive. (S18-0007). (AG) 8. Consider and act upon authorizing the Town Manager to execute a Tower Site Lease Agreement by and between the Town of Prosper, Texas, and New Cingular Wireless PCS, LLC, for the lease of Town property, generally located at 1551 Frontier Parkway in Frontier Park, for a cell tower. (CS) Mayor Smith opened Items 7 and 8 concurrently. Item 5a Page 5 of 7 Mayor Pro-Tem Vogelsang made a motion and Councilmember Miller seconded the motion to table Items 7 and 8 to the February 12, 2019, Town Council meeting. The motion was approved by a vote of 5-0. 9. Conduct a Public Hearing, and consider and act upon a request to rezone a portion of Planned Development-17 (PD-17) to Planned Development-Office/Retail (PD-O/R) and to rezone Single Family-15 (SF-15) to Planned Development-Office (PD-O), on 15.2± acres, located on the southwest corner of Broadway Street and Preston Road. (Z18-0007). (AG) Mayor Pro-Tem Vogelsang made a motion and Councilmember Miller seconded the motion to table Item 9 to the February 12, 2019, Town Council meeting. The motion was approved by a vote of 5-0. 10. Conduct a Public Hearing, and consider and act upon a request to rezone 48.1± acres of Agriculture (A), and 16.4± acres of Single Family-15 (SF-15), to Planned Development-Mixed Use (PD-MU) to facilitate a mixed-use development (WestSide), consisting of Multifamily, Indoor Commercial Amusement, Hotel, Restaurant, Retail, Convenience Store with Gas Pumps, Open Space and related uses, located on the northeast corner of FM 1385 and US 380 (Z18-0012). (AG) Planning Manager Alex Glushko presented this item before the Town Council. The purpose of the request is to rezone property from Agricultural and Single Family-15 to Mixed Use to allow for the development of WestSide. WestSide is a proposed mixed use development consisting of multifamily residential units, indoor commercial amusement, limited service hotel, restaurant, retail, convenience store with gas pumps, and open space. Mike Fannin, the applicant, addressed the Council and provided additional information about the details of the development, which will be constructed in two phases. Brian Moore with GFF Architects and Planners responded to questions about the proposed sintered stone exterior material for the proposed hotel. Mr. Glushko confirmed the development will have rooftop screening of mechanical equipment, and that the buildings will adhere to development regulations regarding tilt wall construction and exterior materials. The Council requested the addition of berming behind the entertainment facility. Mr. Fannin pointed out that he will be providing a significant number of trees to screen the development from the adjacent neighborhood. Mayor Smith opened the Public Hearing. Donny Crawford, 951 English Ivy Drive, Prosper, spoke in favor of the project, noting that the developer has made extensive efforts to address the concerns of the adjacent neighborhood. James Heath, 840 English Ivy Drive, Prosper, spoke in favor of the project, stating that Mr. Fannin has promised to provide trees in the adjacent neighborhood, in addition to the property under development. He noted the importance of walkability between the development and the neighborhood. Mike Hogan, a resident from the adjacent neighborhood, spoke in opposition to the project, noting the negative impacts that the additional traffic, light, and noise will have on the neighborhood. With no one else speaking, Mayor Smith closed the Public Hearing. Item 5a Page 6 of 7 After discussion, Councilmember Miller made a motion and Councilmember Andres seconded the motion to approve a request to rezone 48.1± acres of Agriculture (A), and 16.4± acres of Single Family-15 (SF-15), to Planned Development-Mixed Use (PD-MU) to facilitate a mixed-use development (WestSide), located on the northeast corner of FM 1385 and US 380, subject to: 1. Revising the Development Standards (Exhibit C), regarding the architectural requirements for the indoor commercial amusement building, to allow for a maximum of 80% tilt wall, a maximum of 10% secondary material, and minimum of 10% stone, per elevation. 2. Berming shall be required behind the Entertainment/Indoor Commercial Amusement structure located in Phase 2A as reflected on the Phasing Diagram. The motion was approved by a vote of 5-0. 11. Consider and act upon awarding RFP No. 2019-07-B for Lean (Continuous Process Improvement) Training to QPIC, LLC; and authoring the Town Manager to execute all documents for the same. (CS) Chuck Springer, Executive Director of Administrative Services, presented this item before the Town Council. The FY 2018-19 adopted budget included a one-time supplemental package to give Town staff formalized training and ongoing tools to implement a formal program for continuous process improvement. The goal of this program is to educate and involve Town staff in continuous improvement methods to improve customer service, eliminate waste and reduce costs. The Town requested proposals from qualified firms to train and assist in the implementation of a Lean or Continuous Process Improvement initiative in the Town of Prosper. After discussion, Councilmember Andres made a motion and Councilmember Korbuly seconded the motion to award RFP No. 2019-07-B for Lean (Continuous Process Improvement) Training to QPIC, LLC; and authorize the Town Manager to execute all documents for the same. The motion was approved by a vote of 5-0. 12. Discussion on adopting the 2015 International Code Council (ICC) Series with local amendments and the 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) with local amendments. (JW) Development Services Director John Webb presented this item before the Town Council. The Town currently operates under the 2012 Series of Codes which were adopted in July, 2014. Migrating to the 2015 series of the ICC and the 2017 NEC provides consistency with the adopted codes of the area municipalities. Local amendments are based on the North Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) recommended amendments to ensure there is continuity between the surrounding cities as well as carrying over the administrative amendments from the 2012 series of Codes. Mr. Webb reviewed some of the details of the proposed changes. Proposed ordinances to adopt the various codes will be brought forward for Council consideration at the December 11, 2018, Town Council meeting. No further action was taken. Item 5a Page 7 of 7 13. EXECUTIVE SESSION: Recess into Closed Session in compliance with Section 551.001 et seq. Texas Government Code, as authorized by the Texas Open Meetings Act, to deliberate regarding: 13a. Section 551.087 – To discuss and consider economic development incentives. 13b. Section 551.072 – To discuss and consider purchase, exchange, lease or value of real property for municipal purposes and all matters incident and related thereto. The Town Council recessed into Executive Session at 7:53 p.m. 14. Reconvene in Regular Session and take any action necessary as a result of the Closed Session. The Town Council reconvened the Regular Session at 8:21 p.m. No action was taken as a result of Executive Session. 15. Possibly direct Town staff to schedule topic(s) for discussion at a future meeting. No action was taken on this item. 16. Adjourn. The meeting was adjourned at 8:22 p.m., on Tuesday, November 27, 2018. These minutes approved on the 11th day of December 2018. APPROVED: Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: Robyn Battle, Town Secretary Item 5a Page 1 of 2 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Kelly Neal, CGFO, CPM, Finance Director Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon authorizing the Town Manager to execute a Tower Site Lease Agreement by and between the Town of Prosper, Texas, and T-Mobile West LLC, a Delaware LLC, for the lease of Town property, located at Prosper Trail Elevated Storage Tank (EST), for telecommunications equipment and facilities. Description of Agenda Item: T-Mobile’s representatives approached Town staff to discuss telecommunications equipment and facilities to be located on the Town’s new elevated storage tank located on Prosper Trail. The Tenant is leasing at 102’ centerline of elevation of the water tower and a 10’x20’ portion of real property located at the Town’s Prosper Trail EST located at E. Prosper Trail. The proposed Tower Site Lease Agreement contains an Exhibit B that is a site plan of the property. The Site Lease Agreement requires in Section 9 that T-Mobile (the “Tenant”) must go through the Town’s development process in order to obtain a Specific Use Permit (“SUP”) for all proposed improvements. This section states that the proposed improvements shall be in substantial conformity with Exhibit C. The approval of this Tower Lease Agreement is independent of the Town’s process for consideration of the SUP, this agreement does not guarantee approval of the SUP. The SUP for this applicant is also on this agenda for consideration. The Town currently has five cell tower leases for equipment located on the Town’s elevated water towers. The lease rates on these four agreements range from $21,000 to $34,600 annually. This agreement calls for the Town to receive $34,605 annually in the initial term of the lease. The initial lease shall be five years with automatic renewals of four additional three year terms. Extension term leases shall increase by 3% during the next set of five year term of the lease. Budget Impact: The Town will receive $2,883.75 per month or $34,605 annually in the initial five year term lease and subsequent extensions of five year term leases will increase monthly rent by 3%. Legal Obligations and Review: Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., has reviewed the Tower Site Lease Agreement as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.Tower Site Lease Agreement Prosper is a place where everyone matters. FINANCE Item 5b Page 2 of 2 Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends the Town Council authorize the Town Manager to execute a Tower Site Lease Agreement by and between the Town of Prosper, Texas and T-Mobile West LLC, a Delaware LLC, for the lease of Town property, located at Prosper Trail EST, for telecommunications equipment and facilities. Proposed Motion: I move to authorize the Town Manager to execute a Tower Site Lease Agreement by and between the Town of Prosper, Texas and T-Mobile West LLC, a Delaware LLC, for the lease of Town property, located at Prosper Trail EST, for telecommunications equipment and facilities. Item 5b 1 TOWER SITE LEASE AGREEMENT THIS TOWER SITE LEASE AGREEMENT (this “Lease”) is entered into this ____ day of _______, 20___ (“Execution Date”) by and between the Town of Prosper, Texas, a Texas municipal corporation (“Landlord”), and T-Mobile West LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (“Tenant”). 1.Premises. Subject to the following terms and conditions, Landlord leases to Tenant a portion of the real property (the “Property”) described in Exhibit A, attached hereto and incorporated by reference. Tenant’s use of the Property shall be limited to that portion of the Property, together with temporary easements for access and utilities, described and depicted in the site plan attached hereto as Exhibit B and incorporated by reference (collectively referred to hereinafter as the “Premises”). The Premises, located at 1851 East Prosper Trail in the Town of Prosper, Collin County, Texas, are comprised of approximately 150 square feet. 2.Term. The initial term of this Lease shall be five (5) years, commencing on the date of the issuance of a building permit (the “Commencement Date”) and terminating at Midnight on the last day of the sixtieth (60th) full month following the Commencement Date. This Lease will automatically renew for five (5) additional three (3) year Term(s) (the “Extension Term”), upon the same terms and conditions (except Rent, which shall be subject to Paragraph 6 of this Lease) unless the Tenant notifies the Landlord in writing of Tenant’s intention not to renew this Lease at least ninety (90) days prior to the expiration of the existing Term. 3.Permitted Use. The Premises may be used by Tenant only for permitted uses, which are (i) the transmission and reception of communications signals; (ii) the construction, alteration, maintenance, repair, replacement and relocation of related facilities, antennas and equipment as defined in Paragraph 8; and (iii) activities related to any of the foregoing. Tenant shall obtain (prior to or after the Commencement Date), at Tenant’s expense, all licenses and permits or authorizations required for Tenant’s use of the Premises from all applicable government and/or regulatory entities (the “Governmental Approvals”). Upon execution of the Lease, Landlord shall cooperate with Tenant’s due diligence activities, which shall include, but not be limited to, access to the Property for inspections, testing, and permitting related to the permitted uses. 4.Rent. Within thirty (30) days of the Commencement Date, Tenant shall pay Landlord, as rent, the sum of Two Thousand and Eight Hundred Eighty-Three Dollars and Seventy-Five Cents ($2,883.75) per month (“Rent”). Rent thereafter shall be payable on the first day of each month, in advance, to the Town of Prosper, at Landlord’s address specified in Paragraph 14, below. If the Commencement Date should be other than the first day of a calendar month, Rent shall be prorated to the end of that calendar month. If this Lease is terminated at a time other than on the last day of a month, Rent shall be prorated as of the date of termination for any reason other than a default by Tenant. 5.Holdover Rent. If Tenant shall remain in possession of the Premises at Item 5b 2 the expiration of this Lease or any Renewal without a written agreement, such tenancy shall be deemed a month-to-month tenancy under the same terms and conditions of this Lease, except as to Rent, which shall be fifteen percent (15%) over the most recent Term’s monthly Rent. 6.Extended Term Rent. Upon the extension of this Lease as provided for in Section 2, Rent shall increase by three percent (3%) over the most recent Term’s monthly Rent for each and every Extended Term. 7.Interference. (A)Tenant shall not use the Premises in any way that interferes with the use of the Property by Landlord, or tenants or licensees of Landlord, with rights to the Property prior in time to Tenant’s (subject to Tenant’s rights under this Lease, including non- interference). Such interference shall be deemed by Landlord a material breach and, upon notice to Tenant, may terminate said interference. In the event any such interference does not cease promptly, the pa rties acknowledge that continuing interference may cause irreparable injury and, therefore, Landlord shall have the right, in addition to any rights that it may have at law or in equity, to bring action to enjoin such interference or to terminate this Lease immediately. Landlord makes no warranty or representation, express or implied, that the airspace used by Tenant will be free of electronic or other interference. (B)Landlord shall not use, nor will Landlord permit its employees, tenants, licensees, invitees or agents to use, any portion of the Property in any way that interferes with the operations of Tenant or the rights of Tenant under this Lease, provided none of the users have any right to the Property for such use upon the Commencement Date of this Lease. Landlord shall endeavor to promptly cause any such interference to cease after receipt of notice of interference from Tenant. In the event any such interference to Tenant’s operations does not cease within the Cure Period, as defined in Paragraph 9, then the parties acknowledge that Tenant will have the option to terminate this Lease immediately or enforce its or the Landlord’s rights against third-parties to cease interfering. 9.Specific Use Permit - Requirement. Tenant shall be required to go through the Town’s development process to obtain a Specific Use Permit (the “SUP”) for all proposed improvements. The proposed improvements shall be in substantial conformity to the proposed improvement shown in the rendering attached hereto as Exhib it B. The approval of this Tower Lease Site Agreement is independent of the Town’s process for an SUP. 8.Improvements; Utilities; Access. (A)Tenant shall have the right, at its expense, to erect and maintain on the Premises the following improvements, personal property and facilities only: A 10x15 foot ground space, eight (8) antennas twelve (12) RRU's, two (2) large COVP's on the ground and Item 5b 3 three (3) large COVP's on the tower at a one hundred foot (100') RAD center, related equipment, cables, accessories, improvements, equipment shelters or cabinets, fencing and any other items necessary to the successful and secure use of the Premises (collectively the “Communication Facilities”). Landlord herein approves the equipment and location shown on Exhibit B. Landlord shall approve the location and plans of all improvements. Tenant shall submit the construction plans and specifications to Landlord for Landlord’s approval, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed; however, if Landlord has not responded to Tenant within fourteen (14) days of receipt of such plans and specifications, the plans and specifications shall be deemed disapproved by Landlord. With the prior written consent of Landlord, Tenant shall have the right to replace or upgrade the Communication Facilities at any time during the term of this Lease, subject to the prior written approval of Landlord. However, Tenant may repair its equipment by replacement with similar equipment without Landlord’s consent. Tenant shall cause all construction to occur lien -free and in compliance with all applicable laws and ordinances. The Communication Facilities shall remain the exclusive property of Tenant. Tenant shall have the right to remove the Communication Facilities upon the termination of this Lease; provided , however, that Tenant shall return the Premises to Landlord in the same condition as of the date of this Lease, reasonable wear and tear excepted. (B)Tenant shall, at Tenant’s expense maintain the leased area which includes Tenant’s easements, shelter or platform and ground or tower mounted improvements in good condition and repair. Tenant will also perform all landscape maintenance including planting of trees and shrubs as required by the building code or by Town ordinance or permitting, as it relates to screening for the Tenant’s Premises. Upon termination of this Lease, the Premises shall be returned to Landlord in the same condition except for improved landscaping as of the date of this Lease, reasonable wear and tear and casualty excepted. (C)Tenant shall pay any utility charges due to Tenant ’s use of the Premises. Tenant shall not use utilities installed by or for Landlord. Tenant shall have the right to install utilities, at Tenant’s expense, and to improve the present utilities on the Premises (including, but not limited to the installation of emergency power generators). Upon termination of this Lease, Tenant shall remove all utilities installed for Tenant. (D)As partial consideration for rent paid under this Lease, Landlord hereby grants Tenant a temporary easement (“Easement”) for ingress, egress, utilities, telecommunications services and access (including access as described in Paragraph 1) to the Premises adequate to service the Premises and the Communication Facilities at all times during the term of this Lease. Upon notice, Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord’s sole expense, to relocate the Easement to Tenant, provided such new location shall not materially interfere with Tenant’s operations. Any Easement provided hereunder shall terminate upon the termination of this Lease. (E)Tenant and Landlord shall have 24-hours-a-day, 7-days-a-week access to the Premises at all times during the term of this Lease. Tenant agrees to notify Landlord at phone number 972-569-1056 and email Frank_jaromin@prospertx.gov at least 24 Item 5b 4 hours in advance prior to entering the Communications Facilities for any reason, except in cases of emergency. (F)Landlord reserves the right, at any time, to perform any type of maintenance and/or repair on the Property; provided however, except in emergency situations, if any maintenance and/or repair work will substantially affect Tenant ’s permitted uses of the Premises, Landlord will use its best efforts to provide Tenant with at least thirty (30) days’ prior written notice of the intended repair and/or maintenance work, along with a schedule showing dates and duration of such repair and/or maintenance work. Landlord shall also provide Tenant with the opportunity, at Tenant’s cost and expense, to temporarily relocate and continue to operate its antennas, or otherwise to secure the antennas or the Communication Facilities generally, to protect them from damage. Tenant shall be permitted to install temporary facilities necessary to keep its Communication Facilities operational, subject to Landlord’s prior written consent, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Further, any maintenance will be conducted by Landlord as diligently and expeditiously as possible. If any temporary facilities are installed as a result of this paragraph, Tenant shall remove said temporary facilities immediately upon Landlord’s completion of any maintenance and/or repair work. 9.Termination. If either party breaches any provision of this Agreement, the non-breaching party shall give the other party written notice of the breach. If the breaching party has not cured the breach within thirty (30) days of such notice (“Cure Period”), except as otherwise provided herein, this Lease may be terminated by the non - breaching party, without any penalty or further liability of the non -breaching party, as follows: (A)Failing to pay Rent when due. (B)Failing to pay taxes, assessments, insurance payments or other charges required to be paid by Tenant under this Lease. (C)Failing to use, maintain and operate the Premises as required by this Lease. (D)Assigning or subletting the Premises without the prior written consent of Landlord, except as permitted by Paragraph 17. (E)Committing waste on the Premises. (F)Maintaining, committing or permitting the maintenance or commission of a nuisance on the Premises. (G)Denying Landlord access to the Premises. (H)Using the Premises for any unlawful purpose, whether the purpose is in addition to or in lieu of, the uses specifically permitted by this Lease. (I)Failing to comply with the terms and conditions of this Lease within the Cure Period. Tenant may terminate at the time the Property transfers to a condemning authority, pursuant to a taking of all or a portion of the Property sufficient in Tenant ’s determination to render the Premises unsuitable for Tenant ’s use. Tenant may terminate for cause or no cause with 6 months’ notice to the Landlord. Landlord and Tenant shall each be entitled to pursue their own separate awards with respect to such taking. Item 5b 5 10.Effect of Termination. No termination of this Lease caused by a breach of the lease shall relieve the party in default from paying any sum or sums then due and payable under this Lease, or either party from any claims for damages accruing under this Lease. No termination will prevent either party enforcing payment of the sum or sums or claims for damages by any remedy provided by law. The rights and remedies under this Lease are cumulative and non-exclusive, and the parties may pursue any of those rights and remedies or any other remedies provided by Texas law. 11.Waiver. No waiver by either party of a breach of any provision of this Lease may be deemed or alleged to be a continuing waiver or a waiver of any other breach, whether the same or of any other covenant, condition or restriction of this Lease. 12.Insurance. Tenant, at its own expense, shall provide and maintain in force during the term of this Lease liability insurance (covering bodily injury, including death, and property damage) in the amount of Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) including Landlord as an additional insured, with one (1) or more insurance companies authorized to transact business in Texas. Tenant shall provide Landlord with a certificate of insurance indicating such coverage prior to beginning any activities under this Lease. The certificate shall include assurance that Landlord shall be notified in writing by the insurance company of any cancellation not less than thirty (30) days prior to the effective date of such cancellation. All insurance shall be with companies with a “Best’s” Insurance Rating of A- VII or Better. 13.Hold Harmless/Release. (A)Tenant shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless Landlord and its Town Council members, officers, agents, representatives and employees from any and all claims, demands, liabilities and expenses (including reasonable attorney’s fees and costs of defense) arising from the conduct or management of Tenant ’s business on the Premises or from its use of the Premises; or from any act or negligence of Tenant, its agents, contractors, employees, subtenants or licensees in or about the Premises. If any action or proceeding is brought against Landlord by reason of any such claim, Tenant, upon notice from landlord, will defend the action or proceeding by counsel acceptable to Landlord. (B)Tenant hereby further releases, waives, discharges, holds harmless, indemnifies and agrees not to sue Landlord, its Town Council members, officers, agents, employees, and representatives (hereinafter referred to as the “Releasees”), for any and all rights and claims, including, reasonable attorney fees, to the exte nt caused by or arising out of the negligent acts or omissions or willful misconduct in the operations or activities on the Property by Tenant or its employees, agents, contractors, licensees, tenants and/or subtenants, or a breach of any obligation of Ten ant under this Lease. Landlord shall endeavor to provide prompt written notice to Tenant of any event giving rise to an obligation to indemnify Landlord. The release and waiver shall be binding on Tenant, its officers, directors, agents, employees, representatives, servants and assigns. Item 5b 6 14.Notices. Unless otherwise provided, all notices, requests, demands and other communications hereunder shall be in writing and shall be deemed given if personally delivered or mailed, certified mail, return receipt requested, or sent by overnight carrier to the following: If to Landlord :Town Manager P.O. Box 307 Prosper, Texas 75078 If to Tenant:T-Mobile USA, Inc. 12920 S.E. 38th Street Bellevue, WA 98006 Attn: Lease Compliance/ DA03951A 15.Title and Authority. Landlord covenants and warrants to Tenant that Landlord has the full right, power and authority to execute this Lease; it has good and unencumbered title to the Premises free and clear of any liens or mortgages, except those disclosed to Tenant. Landlord covenants that Tenant may quietly enjoy the premises. 16.Environmental Laws. Landlord and Tenant each represent, warrant and covenant that it will conduct its activities on the Property in compliance with all applicable state and/or federal e nvironmental laws. Landlord and Tenant shall each be responsible for its own environmental liabilities that relate to or arise from its respective activities on the Property to the extent required by law. 17.Assignment and Subleasing. Tenant may assign or sublease this Lease, in whole or in part, without Landlord’s consent, to the Tenant’s principal, affiliates, subsidiaries, subsidiaries of its principal or to any entity which acquires all or substantially all of the Tenant’s assets in the market defined by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) in which the Property is located by reason of a merger, acquisition, or other business reorganization. Tenant may not otherwise assign or sublease this Lease without the prior written approval of Landlord. Additionally, Tenant may, with the prior written consent of Landlord, mortgage or grant a security interest in this Lease and the Communication Facilities. 18.Successors and Assigns. This Lease shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties, their respective successors, personal representatives and assigns. 19.Miscellaneous Provisions. (A)This Lease constitutes the entire agreement and understanding of the parties, and supersedes all offers, negotiations and other agreements. There are no representations or understandings of any kind that are not set forth herein. Any amendments to this Lease must be in writing and executed by both parties. Item 5b 7 (B)If either party is represented by a real estate broker in this transaction, that party shall be fully responsible for any fee due such broker and shall hold the other party harmless from any claims for commission by such broker. (C)This Lease shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas. Exclusive venue shall be in Collin County, Texas. (D)If any term of this Lease is found to be void or invalid, such invalidity shall not affect the remaining terms of this Lease, which shall continue in full force and effect, (E)This Lease may be executed in any number of counterparts and all such counterparts shall be deemed to constitute a single lease, and the execution of one (1) counterpart by any Landlord shall have the same force and effect as if he had signed all the other counterparts. (F)Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, neither Landlord nor Tenant shall be liable for the failure to perform its respective d uties under this Lease if such failure is caused by a catastrophe, riot, war, governmental order or regulation, fire, accident, act of God, or other similar or different contingency beyond the reasonable control of Landlord or Tenant. (G)The parties agree that Landlord has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Lease. (H)Tenant will maintain its equipment in compliance with FCC guidelines. Tenant shall post legally required signs as required and in accordance with the Town of Prosper’s Code of Ordinances, as it exists or may be amended, for the purpose of complying with FCC guidelines. (I)After five (5) years, Tenant may terminate this Lease upon ninety (90) days’ written notice to Landlord. (J)Nothing in this Agreement shall be construed to create any right in any third party not a signatory to this Agreement, and the Parties do not intend to create any third party beneficiaries by entering into this Agreement. (K)The Parties agree that irreparable damage would occur if any of the provisions of this Agreement were not performed in accordance with their specified terms or were otherwise breached. Therefore, the parties agree the Parties shall be entitled to injunctive relief to prevent breaches of the provisions of this Agreement and to enforce specifically the terms and provisions of the Agreement this being in addition to any other remedy to which the Parties are entitled at law or in equity. (L)Each signatory represents this Agreement has been read by the party for which this Agreement is executed and that such party has had an opportunity to confer with its counsel. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Lease to be duly executed Item 5b 8 as of the date first above written. LANDLORD: TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS By: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager, Town of Prosper STATE OF TEXAS § § COUNTY OF COLLIN § This instrument was acknowledged before me on the ___ day of _______________, 20__, by Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager of the Town of Prosper, Texas, on behalf of the Town of Prosper. ________________________________ Notary Public, State of Texas Item 5b 9 TENANT: T-Mobile West LLC By: Name: Title: STATE OF TEXAS § § COUNTY OF COLLIN § This instrument was acknowledged before me on the ___ day of _______________, 20__, by _________________on behalf of T-Mobile West LLC, in the capacity herein stated. ________________________________ Notary Public, State of Texas Item 5b C O L L I N C O U N T Y S C H O O L E L I S H A C H A M B E R S S U R V E Y , A B S T R A C T N O . 1 7 9 L A N D S U R V E Y , A B S T R A C T N O . 1 7 2 WI L L I A M B U T L E R S U R V E Y , AB S T R A C T I N O . 1 1 2 LEGEND EXHIBIT AItem 5b A-1 DA 0 3 9 5 1 A PR O S P E R T R A I L W T SI T E N U M B E R : SI T E N A M E : SI T E A D D R E S S : SHEET #:SHEET NAME: 18 5 1 E A S T P R O S P E R T R A I L PR O S P E R , CO L L I N C O U N T Y , TX 7 5 0 7 8 DR A W N B Y : RE V I E W E D B Y : CH E C K E D B Y : AP P R O V E D B Y : JO B N U M B E R : 76 6 8 W A R R E N P A R K W A Y FR I S C O , T X 7 5 0 3 4 T Mo b i l e ACTION APPROVED DENIED STAFF ________________ ________ P&Z ________________ ________ Neighborhood # _____ SCSP18-00XX SUBSTANTIALLY CONFORMING SITE PLAN DA 0 3 9 5 1 A PR O S P E R T R A I L W T SI T E N U M B E R : SI T E N A M E : SI T E A D D R E S S : SHEET #:SHEET NAME: 18 5 1 E A S T P R O S P E R T R A I L PR O S P E R , CO L L I N C O U N T Y , TX 7 5 0 7 8 DR A W N B Y : RE V I E W E D B Y : CH E C K E D B Y : AP P R O V E D B Y : JO B N U M B E R : 76 6 8 W A R R E N P A R K W A Y FR I S C O , T X 7 5 0 3 4 T Mo b i l e A-2 SCSP18-00XX SUBSTANTIALLY CONFORMING SITE PLAN Item 5b I t e m 5 b Reference:DA03951A/050118.162720 Created on: 09/20/2018 16:57:20 Legal Team: TMO Page 1 LEASING ABSTRACT - NEW LEASE New Lease Reference: DA03951A/050118.162720   Submitter Details Name:  Ashley Watkins Email: ashley@gobroadus.com Phone:  1 Submitter is site acq?: Yes Job Title:  None Firm Name:  None   Site Details Site Number:  DA03951A Site Name:  DA03951A Site Address:1280 N Preston Rd Prosper TEXAS 75078-8798 Site Type:  TBC Market Name:  DALLAS TX Region Name:  SOUTH   Are the above details correct?: No   Updated Site Details Site Addresss:  1851 East Prosper Trail Town/City: Prosper State: TEXAS Zip Code: 75078-8798 Market: DALLAS TX   Request Details Request Type: Site Lease Leasing Document Template: Landlord Project: New Site Development (NSD)   Landlord Information Landlord Entity Name: Town of Prosper, Texas, a Texas municipal corporation Address: P.O. Box 307 Item 5b Reference:DA03951A/050118.162720 Created on: 09/20/2018 16:57:20 Legal Team: TMO Page 2 Town/City:  Prosper State:  Texas Zip Code:  75078 Is T-Mobile paying rent to the above Landlord?:  No Current Landlord Name:  N/A Address:  N/A Town/City:  N/A State:  N/A Zip Code:  N/A Is the Landlord leasing the property?:  No Is the Landlord also the Property Owner?:  Yes   Business Terms How long is the Lease Term?:  5 Years More renewal rights?: 5 # Renewals of: 3 Years Are there options?:  No Monthly Rent Amount $:  $2,883.75 Rent Commencement Criteria:  commencing on the date of the issuance of a building permit Are there other fees/costs?:  No Revenue Share:  No Is a new easement required?:  No     Site Equipment Details  Quantity and Type  Quantity and Type Antennas 8 FHH-65C-R3 MW Hybrid Cables 1 High Cap HCS (1.58”)Junction Box TMA COVP 3 Large RRUs 4 FRIJ, 4 FHFB, 4 AHLOA Other   Significant Risks Are there any significant risks?: No   Signing Authority Level Routing Title Print Name Signature Date RVP     Item 5b Reference:DA03951A/050118.162720 Created on: 09/20/2018 16:57:20 Legal Team: TMO Page 3 RDD (Minimum signing authority) Senior Market Director Market Director Market Manager Senior Managing Engineer Legal Summary Comments Legal Approval Stamp Item 5b Page 1 of 2 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Kelly Neal, CGFO, CPM, Finance Director Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon approving an ordinance repealing Division 2, “Marshal,” of Article 9.02, “Law Enforcement,” of Chapter 9, “Personnel,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. Background/Description: The Town’s Code of Ordinances contains a few provisions that are obsolete, or simply have never been enforced. One of those provisions is found in Division 2, “Marshal,” of Article 9.02, “Law Enforcement,” of Chapter 9, “Personnel,” of the Code of Ordinances. It provides, in part, for the election of a Town Marshal who serves a two-year term, and that Division further provides for the duties of a Marshal, which duties include those currently performed by sworn police personnel. At present, the Town has not had and does not have an elected Marshal and to the best of the Town’s information, such position, as described in that Division, has not been occupied for years. Any Marshal in the future who is retained by the Town will be an employee of the Town, subject to the supervision of the Town Manager, and consequently, those provisions in the Code of Ordinances related to the Marshal should be repealed in their entirety since they are obsolete and possess the potential to cause confusion in the event the Marshal’s status is ever legally challenged. Legal Obligations and Review: Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., has approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.Proposed Ordinance 2.Current Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve an ordinance repealing Division 2, “Marshal,” of Article 9.02, “Law Enforcement,” of Chapter 9, “Personnel,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. FINANCE Item 5c Page 2 of 2 Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance repealing Division 2, “Marshal,” of Article 9.02, “Law Enforcement,” of Chapter 9, “Personnel,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. Item 5c TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, REPEALING IN ITS ENTIRETY DIVISION 2, “MARSHAL,” OF ARTICLE 9.02, “LAW ENFORCEMENT,” OF CHAPTER 9, “PERSONNEL,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; MAKING FINDINGS RELATED THERETO; PROVIDING REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE. WHEREAS, Division 2, “Marshal,” of Article 9.02, “Law Enforcement,” of Chapter 9, “Personnel,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper provides, in part, for the election of a Town Marshal who serves a two-year term, and said Division further provides for the duties of a Marshal, which duties include those currently performed by police personnel; and WHEREAS, the Town has not had and does not have an elected Marshal and to the best of the Town’s information, such position, as described in said Division, has not been occupied for years; and WHEREAS, it is the desire of the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas, to repeal said Division in its entirety and hereby provides that if and when marshal services are needed, the Town Council may make such appropriation for retaining a marshal and the Town Manager shall prescribe the duties for such position. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are hereby found to be true and correct and are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 From and after the effective date of this Ordinance, Division 2, “Marshal,” of Article 9.02, “Law Enforcement,” of Chapter 9, “Personnel,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances is repealed in its entirety. SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason held to be unconstitutional or invalid b a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, Item 5c Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective from and after its adoption. DULY PASSED, APPROVED, AND ADOPTED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: _________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5c CURRENT ORDINANCE Division 2. Marshal Sec. 9.02.031 Elected position The office of marshal of the town is an elected position by the registered voters in the town limits. (Ordinance 98-21, sec. 1, adopted 7/27/98) Sec. 9.02.032 Term of office The office of marshal of the town is for a two-year term. (Ordinance 98-21, sec. 2, adopted 7/27/98) Sec. 9.02.033 Civil position Hereafter, for the remainder of this term ending at election in May of the year 2000, this will be a civil position instead of a certified peace officer position. (Ordinance 98-21, sec. 3, adopted 7/27/98) Sec. 9.02.034 Duties Duties and job description: neighborhood crime watch inside town limits, traffic control at fires, accidents, sports events, etc., general help for public, awareness to the public, assistance to town in civic matters, be present at town functions, and duties council may ask to be performed. Give monthly written report to council at regular meetings. (Ordinance 98-21, sec. 4, adopted 7/27/98) Sec. 9.02.035 Oath Upon approval of the council of the town, the elected official shall take the oath of office as required by law. (Ordinance 98-21, sec. 5, adopted 7/27/98) State constitution reference–Oath of office, Texas Constitution, art. 16, sec. 1. Secs. 9.02.036–9.02.060 Reserved Item 5c Page 1 of 4 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.04, “Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new article 3.04, “Building Code,” adopting the 2015 edition of the International Building Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, removal, and demolition of every building or structure or any appurtenances connected or attached to buildings or structures within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to adopt the later versions of the International Building Codes. On November 27, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the 2015 and 2017 series of codes and list of major changes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.List of Major Changes to all Series of Codes 2. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance repealing Article 3.04, “Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new article 3.04, “Building Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Building Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, removal, and demolition of every building or structure or any appurtenances connected or attached to buildings or structures within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5d Page 2 of 4 Town of Prosper List of Specific Chapters and Sections of the Applicable Codes Regarding Significant Changes. 1) 2015 International Build Code (IBC) 101.4.7 Existing Buildings, Previous 2012 IBC Chapter 34. The requirements (Chapter 34) for existing structures have been removed from the 2015 IBC. All existing construction requirements are now in the 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC). 2) 2015 IBC 423 Storm Shelters, Critical Emergency Operations and group E occupancies. This section applies to the construction of storm shelters constructed as separate detached buildings or constructed as safe rooms within buildings for the purpose of providing safe refuge from storms that produce high winds, such as tornados and hurricanes. Such structures shall be designated to be hurricane shelters, tornado shelters, or combined hurricane and tornado shelters. 3) 2015 IBC 406 “Private Garage,” 406.3.1 “Classification,” 406.3.2 “Clear Height” Private garages are no longer limited to a maximum of 3,000 sq. ft. in a building. Multiple private garages, each a maximum of 1,000 sq. ft., each separated by one-hour fire barriers or horizontal assemblies are now permitted based on their U-occupancy classification. Also, a minimum of 7’ clear height will be required in private garages. 4) 2015 IBC 705.3 Exception #2 “Buildings on the Same Lot Permits a parking garage of Construction Type I or IIA to abut a Group R-2 building with 1½- hour- protected openings (fire doors) in the abutting exterior wall of the garage and no required opening protective(s) in the abutting wall of a sprinklered R-2 building. Previous editions of the Code did not permit any openings in these abutting exterior walls that are at a “0” fire separation distance apart and required a fire wall design between such buildings to be permitted to have openings between the abutting buildings. 5) 2015 IBC 705.6 Exterior Wall- Structural Stability Exterior fire-rated walls that are braced by floor or roof assemblies that have a lesser fire resistance rating are now permitted. Previous editions of the IBC Code required Construction Type III buildings with two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to have floors that support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to be upgraded to the two-hour fire rating. This is a major cost since apartment buildings built of Construction Type III under the legacy codes only required one-hour floor and roof assemblies to support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls. 6) 2015 IBC 717.1.1 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings Ducts will be allowed to leave a fire-rated shaft enclosure, transition horizontally, and then enter another fire-rated shaft if the duct penetrations on each side of the shafts are protected with fire dampers. Note that this is not permitted for clothes dryer exhaust ducts or any other ducts that the I-Codes require to be continuous and uninterrupted. Item 5d Page 3 of 4 7) 2015 IBC 1603.1.8 Special Loads With the increasing use of photovoltaic (solar) panels on rooftops, it has become clear that there is a need for specific code requirements related to these panels. Such panels are considered fixed equipment and as such would fall under the definition of dead load. Rooftop PV panels are considered special loads and their dead load should be indicated on the construction documents. The code language was revised to clarify that the provisions apply to roof loads for the design of the roof structure, not to the design of the photovoltaic panels or modules themselves. 8) 2015 International Residential Code (IRC) R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to doors Glazing installed perpendicular to a door in a closed position and within 24 inches of the door only requires safety glazing if it is on the hinge side of an in-swinging door. 9) 2015 IRC R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to bottom stair landing. This change will limit the requirement for glazing at the bottom of a landing by excluding windows greater than 180 degrees from the bottom face of the landing. 10) 2015 IRC R315 Carbon Monoxide Alarms The carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Section R315 have been reorganized to clarify their application. For example, the carbon monoxide detection system provisions have been placed in a separate Section R315.6 following all of the carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Sections R315.1 through R315.5. In addition, new charging sections have been added to clarify the scope and make the provisions easier to locate. Several technical changes have also occurred. The carbon monoxide alarm provisions have been rewritten to generally align with the smoke alarm provisions. For example, connection to the house wiring system with battery backup is now required for carbon monoxide alarms installed in new dwellings. 11) 2015 IRC Table R602.3(1) Fastening schedule for structural members. IRC Table R602.3(1), wood frame nailing schedule, is reformatted to give typical nailing options and to make the table consistent with 2015 IBC Table 2304.10.1. The change states the minimum size and number of fasteners for each connection. In most cases, the minimum number of box nails previously required is increased by one. 12) 2015 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 605.2.1 Lead content of drinking water pipe and fittings. Pipe, pipe fittings, joints, valves, faucets and fixture fittings utilized to supply water for drinking or cooking purposes shall comply with NSF 372 and shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent or less. 13) 2015 IPC 607.3 Thermal expansion The available method to control closed-system pressure increases caused by the heating of water has been limited to the use of thermal expansion tanks only. Item 5d Page 4 of 4 14) 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 307.6 Condensate pumps. Condensate pumps located in uninhabitable spaces, such as attics and crawl spaces, shall be connected to the appliance or equipment served such that when the pump fails, the appliance or equipment will be prevented from operating. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 15) 2015 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 310.1.1.1 Bonding Jumper length. The length of the bonding jumper between the connection length of the bonding jumper between the connection to a gas piping system and the connection to a grounding electrode system shall not exceed 75 feet. Any additional grounding electrodes used shall be bonded to the electrical service grounding electrode system or, where provided, the lightning protection grounding electrode system. 16) 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) 210.8 Ground-fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel (B) Other than dwelling units. All single-phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50 amps or less and three- phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or less installed in the following locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protections for personnel, (1) Bathrooms (2) Kitchens (3) Rooftops 17) 2017 NEC 210.11 Branch Circuits Required (C) Dwelling Units (4) Garage Branch Circuits In addition to the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20 ampere branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacles outlets in attached garages and in detached garages with electric power. This circuit shall have no other outlets. 18) 2017 NEC 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Protection (A) Dwelling Units AFCI Protection is now required for all 120 volts, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere branch circuits supplying not just outlets but also devices installed in Kitchen and Laundry areas. 19) 2017 NEC 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250 volts non-locking-type receptacles in the areas of Pre- school, elementary education, dental office, outpatient facilities, transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums and dormitories. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 1 of 25 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, REPEALING ARTICLE 3.04, “BUILDING CODE,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW ARTICLE 3.04, “BUILDING CODE”; ADOPTING THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, SAVE AND EXCEPT THE DELETIONS AND AMENDMENTS SET FORTH HEREIN; REGULATING THE CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATION, MOVEMENT, ENLARGEMENT, REPLACEMENT, REPAIR, EQUIPMENT, USE AND OCCUPANCY, LOCATION, MAINTENANCE, REMOVAL, AND DEMOLITION OF EVERY BUILDING OR STRUCTURE OR ANY APPURTENANCES CONNECTED OR ATTACHED TO BUILDINGS OR STRUCTURES WITHIN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to repeal existing Article 3.04, “Building Code,” of the Code or Ordinances and replace it with a new Article 3.04, “Building Code”; and, WHEREAS, the Town Council also has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of the Prosper to adopt the 2015 Edition of the International Building Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Existing Article 3.04, “Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper, Texas, is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Article 3.04, “Building Code,” to read as follows: “ARTICLE 3.04 BUILDING CODE Sec. 3.04.001 Code Adopted; amendments The International Building Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., save and except the deletions and amendments set forth in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes, is hereby adopted as the Building Code for the town, regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, removal, and demolition of every building or structure Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 of 25 or any appurtenances connected or attached to buildings or structures within the Town (the “2015 International Building Code”). The 2015 International Building Code is made a part of this Article as if fully set forth herein. A copy of the International Building Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., is on file in the office of the Town Secretary of Prosper being marked and so designated as the 2015 International Building Code. Sec. 3.04.002 Penalty for violation Any person, firm, corporation, or business entity violating this article shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state and federal law.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause, or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason, held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town of Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one (1) or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective January 1, 2019, after its passage and publication as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 3 of 25 ATTEST: ____________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _____________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 4 of 25 Exhibit A TOWN OF PROSPER AMENDMENTS 2015 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE The following additions, deletions, and amendments to the 2015 International Building Code adopted herein are hereby approved and adopted. Section [A] 101.1 Title of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the Building Code of The Town of Prosper hereinafter referred to as “this code.” Section [A] 101.4 Referenced codes of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 101.4 Referenced codes. The other codes listed in Sections 101.4.1 through 101.4.8 and referenced elsewhere in this Code, when specifically adopted, shall be considered part of the requirements of this Code to the prescribed extent of each such reference. Whenever amendments have been adopted to the referenced codes and standards, each reference to said code and standard shall be considered to reference the amendments as well. Any reference to NFPA 70 or the Electrical Code shall mean the Electrical Code as adopted. Section [A] 101.4 Referenced codes of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding [A] Section 101.4.8 Electrical to read as follows: [A] 101.4.8 Electrical. The provisions of the Electrical Code shall apply to the installation of electrical systems including alterations, repairs, replacement, equipment, appliances, fixtures, fittings, and appurtenances thereto. Section 103 DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING SAFETY and Section [A] 103.1 Creation of enforcement agency of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to insert the Department Name to read as follows: BUILDING INSPECTION DIVISION OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER [A] 103.1 Creation of enforcement agency. The BUILDING INSPECTION DIVISION OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER is hereby created and the official in charge thereof shall be known as the Building Official. Section [A] 105.2 Work exempt from permit of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 105.2 Work exempt from permit. Exemptions from permit requirements of this Code shall not be deemed to grant authorization for any work to be done in any manner in violation of the provisions of this Code or any other laws or ordinances of this jurisdiction. Permits shall not be required for the following: Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 5 of 25 Building: 1. Oil derricks. 2. Retaining walls that are not over four feet (4’) (610 mm) in height measured from the bottom of the footing to the top of the wall, unless supporting a surcharge or impounding Class I, II, or IIIA liquids. 3. Water tanks supported directly on grade if the capacity does not exceed 5,000 gallons (18 925 L) and the ratio of height to diameter or width does not exceed 2:1. 4. Painting, papering, tiling, carpeting, cabinets, counter tops, and similar finish work. 5. Temporary motion picture, television, and theater stage sets and scenery. 6. Prefabricated swimming pools accessory to a Group R-3 occupancy that are less than twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) deep, do not exceed 5,000 gallons (18 925 L), and are installed entirely above ground. 7. Swings and other playground equipment accessory to detached one- and two- family dwellings. 8. Window awnings in Group R-3 and U occupancies, supported by an exterior wall that does not project more than fifty-four inches (54”) (1372 mm) from the exterior wall and does not require additional support. 9. Nonfixed and movable fixtures, cases, racks, counters, and partitions not over five feet, nine inches (5’-9”) (1753 mm) in height. {The remaining paragraphs shall remain unchanged.} Section [A] 105.3.2 Time limitation of application of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 105.3.2 Time limitation of application. An application for a permit for any proposed work shall be deemed to have been abandoned ninety (90) days after the date of filing, unless such application has been pursued in good faith or a permit has been issued; except that the Building Official is authorized to grant one (1) or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding ninety (90) days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable caused demonstrated. Section [A] 107.1 General of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 107.1 General. Submittal documents consisting of construction documents, statement of special inspections, geotechnical report, and other data shall be submitted in two (2) or more sets with each permit application. The construction documents shall be prepared by a registered design professional where required by the statutes of the jurisdiction in which the project is to be constructed. Where special conditions exist, the Building Official is authorized to require additional construction documents to be prepared by a registered design professional. Foundation plans shall be submitted with each application. Foundation plans shall be designed by an engineer licensed by the State of Texas and shall bear said engineer’s seal. Structural framing plans shall be submitted with each new construction or addition application. Structural framing plans shall be designed by a registered design professional licensed by the State of Texas and shall bear said design professional’s seal. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 6 of 25 Exception: The Building Official is authorized to waive the submission of construction documents and other data not required to be prepared by a registered design professional if it is found that the nature of the work applied for is such that reviewing of construction documents is not necessary to obtain compliance with this Code. Section [A] 109.2 Schedule of permit fees of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 109.2 Schedule of permit fees. On buildings, structures, electrical, gas, mechanical, and plumbing systems or alterations requiring a permit, a fee for each permit shall be paid as required, in accordance with the Town of Prosper Fee Schedule as adopted by the Town Council. Section [A] 109.4 Work commencing before permit issuance of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 109.4 Work commencing before permit issuance. Any person who commences any work requiring a permit on a building, structure, electrical, gas, mechanical, or plumbing system before obtaining the necessary permit(s) shall be subject to a penalty of 100% of the usual permit fee in addition to the required permit fees. Section [A] 109.6 Refunds of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 109.6 Refunds. The Building Official is authorized to establish a refund policy. 1. The full amount of any fee paid hereunder that was erroneously paid or collected. 2. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance with this Code. 3. The Code Official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date of fee payment. Section 109 FEES of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [A] 109.7 Re-inspection Fee to read as follows: [A] 109.7 Re-inspection Fee. A fee as established by Town Council resolution may be charged when: 1. The inspection called for is not ready when the inspector arrives; 2. No building address or permit card is clearly posted; 3. Town approved plans are not on the job site available to the inspector; 4. The building is locked or otherwise not available for inspection when called; 5. The job site is disapproved twice for the same item; and/or, 6. Failure to maintain erosion control, trash control, or tree protection. Any re-inspection fees assessed shall be paid before any additional inspections are made on that job site. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 7 of 25 Section 109 FEES of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [A] 109.8 Work without a permit, [A] 109.8.1 Investigation, [A] 109.8.2 Fee, and [A] 109.9 Unauthorized cover up fee to read as follows: 109.8 Work without a permit. 109.8.1 Investigation. Whenever work for which a permit is required by this Code has been commenced without first obtaining a permit, a special investigation shall be made before a permit may be issued for such work. 109.8.2 Fee. An investigation fee, in addition to the permit fee, shall be collected whether or not a permit is subsequently issued. The investigation fee shall be equal to the amount of the permit fee required by this Code or the Town fee schedule, as applicable. The payment of such investigation fee shall not exempt the applicant from compliance with all other provisions of either this Code or the technical codes nor from penalty prescribed by law. 109.9 Unauthorized cover up fee. Any work concealed without first obtaining the required inspection in violation of Section 110 shall be assessed a fee as established by the Town fee schedule. Section [A] 110.3.1 Footing and foundation inspection of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 110.3.1 Footing and foundation inspection. Footing and foundation inspections shall be made after excavations for footings are complete and any required reinforcing steel is in place. For concrete foundations, any required forms shall be in place prior to inspection. Materials for the foundation shall be on the job, except where concrete is ready mixed in accordance with ASTM C 94, the concrete need not be on the job. A registered design professional, or their designated representative, shall perform a pre-pour inspection and provide the Building Official with a signed and sealed document stating that the footing and foundation has been inspected and approved. This inspection shall take place prior to requesting a footing and foundation inspection from the Building Official. Section [A] 110.3.2 Concrete slab and under-floor inspection of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 110.3.2 Concrete slab and under-floor inspection. Concrete slab and under- floor inspections shall be made after in-slab and under-floor reinforcing steel and building service equipment, conduit, piping accessories, and other ancillary equipment items are in place, but before any concrete is placed or floor sheathing installed, including the subfloor. A registered design professional, or their designated representative, shall perform a pre-pour inspection and provide the Building Official with a signed and sealed document stating that the slab and under-floor foundation has been inspected and approved. This inspection shall take place prior to requesting a concrete slab and under-floor foundation inspection from the Building Official. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 8 of 25 Section [A] 110.3.4 Frame inspection of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 110.3.4 Frame inspection. Framing inspections shall be made after the roof deck or sheathing, all framing, fire-blocking, and bracing are in place and pipes, chimneys, and vents to be concealed are complete and the rough electrical, plumbing, heating wires, pipes, and ducts are approved. A registered design professional, or their designated representative, shall perform a structural framing inspection and provide the Building Official with a signed and sealed document stating that the structure’s framing has been inspected and approved. This inspection shall take place prior to requesting a framing inspection from the Building Official. Section 113 BOARD OF APPEALS of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by removing Section 113.1 General and replacing with Section 113.1 Application for appeal to read as follows: [A] 113.1 Application for appeal. Any person shall have the right to appeal a decision of the Code Official to the Board of Appeals as established by ordinance. The Board shall be governed by the Town of Prosper’s enabling ordinance. Section 202 DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Building Code, definition of “AMBULATORY CARE FACILITY” is amended to read as follows: AMBULATORY CARE FACILITY. Buildings or portions thereof used to provide medical, surgical, psychiatric, nursing, or similar care on a less than 24-hour basis to individuals who are rendered incapable of self-preservation by the services provided. This group may include but not be limited to the following: - Dialysis centers - Sedation dentistry - Surgery centers - Colonic centers - Psychiatric centers Section 202 DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Building Code, definition of “ASSISTED LIVING FACILITY” is added to read as follows: ASSISTED LIVING FACILITY. A building or part thereof housing persons, on a 24-hour basis, who because of age, mental disability, or other reasons, live in a supervised residential environment which provides personal care services. The occupants are capable of responding to an emergency situation without physical assistance from staff. Section 202 DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Building Code, definition of “ATRIUM” is amended to read as follows: ATRIUM. An opening connecting three (3) or more stories… {no change to remaining text} Section 202 DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Building Code, definition of “HIGH- RISE BUILDING” is amended to read as follows: Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 9 of 25 HIGH-RISE BUILDING. A building with an occupied floor located more than fifty- five feet (55’) (16,764 mm) above the lowest level of fire department vehicle access. Section 202 DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Building Code, definition of “SPECIAL INSPECTOR” is amended to read as follows: SPECIAL INSPECTOR. A qualified person employed or retained by an approved agency who shall prove to the satisfaction of the registered design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official as having the competence necessary to inspect a particular type of construction requiring special inspection. Section 303.1.3 Associated with Group E occupancies of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 303.1.3 Associated with Group E occupancies. A room or space used for assembly purposes that is associated with a Group E occupancy but is not considered a separate occupancy , except when applying the assembly requirements of Chapters 10 and 11. Section 304.1 Business Group B of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add the following to the list of occupancies: Fire stations Police stations with detention facilities for 5 (five) or less Section [F] 307.1.1 Uses other than Group H of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add the following sentence to Item 4. to read as follows: 4. Cleaning establishments… {no change to text} …with Section 707 or 1-hour horizontal assemblies constructed in accordance with Section 711 or both. See also IFC Chapter 21, Dry Cleaning Plant provisions. Section 403.1 Applicability, Exception 3 of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 3. The open air portion of a building {no change to remaining text} Section [F] 403.3.2 Water supply to required fire pumps of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 403.3.2 Water supply to required fire pumps. In buildings that are more than 120 feet (36.5 m) in building height, required fire pumps shall be supplied by connections to no fewer than two (2) water mains located in different streets. Separate supply piping shall be provided between each connection to the water main and the pumps. Each connection and the supply piping between the connection and the pumps shall be sized to supply the flow and pressure required for the pumps to operate. Exception: {No change to text.} Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 10 of 25 Section 403.5.4 Smokeproof enclosures of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 403.5.4 Smokeproof enclosures. Every required exit stairway serving floors more than fifty-five feet (55’) (16,764 mm) above the lowest level of fire department vehicle access shall be a smokeproof enclosure in accordance with Sections 909.20 and 1023.11. Section 423 Storm Shelters of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section 423.4.1 Required occupant capacity to read as follows: 423.4.1 Required occupant capacity. The required occupant capacity of the storm shelter shall include all of the buildings on the site and shall be the greater the following: 1. The total occupant load of the classrooms, vocational rooms and offices in the group E occupancy. 2. The occupant load of any indoor assembly space that is associated with the group E occupancy. Exceptions: 1. Where a new building is being added on an existing group E site, and where the new building is not of sufficient size to accommodate the required occupant capacity of the storm shelter for all of the buildings on the site, the storm shelter shall at a minimum accommodate the required occupancy for the new building. 2. Where approved by the code official, the required occupant capacity of the shelter shall be permitted to be reduced by the occupant capacity of any existing storm shelters on the site. Section [F] 501.2 Address identification of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 501.2 Address identification. New and existing buildings shall be provided with approved address numbers or letters. Each character shall not be less than six inches (6”) (152 mm) in height and not less than one-half inch (0.5”) (12.7 mm) in width. They shall be installed on a contrasting background and be plainly visible from the street or road fronting the property and from all alleyways, fire lanes, or other vehicle access to the rear or side of the buildings. When required by the Fire Code Official, address numbers shall be provided in additional approved locations to facilitate emergency response. Where access is by means of a private road and the building address cannot be viewed from the public way, a monument, pole, or other approved means shall be used to identify the structure. Address numbers shall be maintained. Section 712.1.9 Two-story openings, Item 4. of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 11 of 25 4. Is not open to a corridor in Group I and H occupancies. Section [F] 903.2.8 Group R of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding an Exception to read as follows: Exception: R-3 occupancies with a gross square foot area of less than 5,500 HVAC space. Section [F] 903.2.9 Group S-1 of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 903.2.9.3 Self-service storage facility to read as follows: [F] 903.2.9.3 Self-service storage facility. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed throughout all self-service storage facilities. Exception: One-story self-service storage facilities that have no interior corridors, a one-hour fire barrier separation wall installed between every storage compartment, and are under 5,000 square foot (gross area) in size. Section [F] 903.2.11.3 Buildings 35 feet or more in height of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 903.2.11.3 Buildings 35 feet or more in height. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed throughout buildings with a floor level having an occupant load of thirty (30) or more that is located thirty-five feet (35’) (10,668 mm) or more above the lowest level of fire department vehicle access. Exception: Open parking structures in compliance with Section 406.5. Section [F] 903.2.11 Specific building areas and hazards of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 903.2.11.7 High-piled combustible storage to read as follows: [F] 903.2.11.7 High-piled combustible storage. For any building with clear height exceeding twelve feet (12’) (3,658 mm), see Chapter 32 of the Fire Code to determine if those provisions apply. Section [F] 903.2.11 Specific building areas and hazards of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 903.2.11.8 Spray booths and rooms to read as follows: [F] 903.2.11.8 Spray booths and rooms. New and existing spray booths and spraying rooms shall be protected by an approved automatic fire-extinguishing system. Section [F] 903.2.11 Specific building areas and hazards of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 903.2.11.9 Buildings over 5,000 square feet to read as follows: [F] 903.2.11.9 Buildings over 5,000 square feet. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed throughout all commercial building with a building area (floor Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 12 of 25 area, gross) over 5,000 square feet. For the purpose of this provision, firewalls shall not define separate buildings. Exception: Open parking garages in compliance with Section 406.5. Section [F] 903.3.1.1.1 Exempt locations of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 903.3.1.1.1 Exempt locations. When approved by the Code Official, automatic sprinklers shall not be required in the following rooms or areas where such rooms or areas are protected with an automatic fire detection system in accordance with Section 907.2 that will respond to visible or invisible particles of combustion. Sprinklers shall not be omitted from any room merely because it is damp, of fire-resistance-rated construction, or contains electrical equipment. 1. Any room where the application of water, or flame and water, constitutes a serious life or fire hazard. 2. Any room or space where sprinklers are considered undesirable because of the nature of the contents, when approved by the Code Official. 3. Generator and transformer rooms, under the direct control of a public utility, separated from the remainder of the building by walls and floor/ceiling or roof/ceiling assemblies having a fire-resistance rating of not less than two (2) hours. 4. {Delete in its entirety.} 5. Elevator machine rooms, machinery spaces, and hoistways, other than pits where such sprinklers would not necessitate shunt trip requirements under any circumstances. 6. {Delete in its entirety.} Section [F] 903.3.1.2 NFPA 13R sprinkler systems of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 903.3.1.2.3 Attics and Attached Garages to read as follows: [F] Section 903.3.1.2.3 Attics and Attached Garages. Sprinkler protection is required in attic spaces of such buildings two (2) or more stories in height, in accordance with NFPA 13 and or NFPA 13R requirements, and attached garages. Section [F] 903.3.1.3 NFPA 13D sprinkler systems of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 903.3.1.3 NFPA 13D sprinkler systems. Automatic sprinkler systems installed in one- and two-family dwellings, Group R-3, Group R-4 Condition 1, and townhouses shall be permitted to be installed throughout in accordance with NFPA 13D or with state law. Section [F] 903.3.1 Standards of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section 903.3.1.4 [F] Freeze Protection, Section [F] 903.3.1.4.1 Attics and Section [F] 903.3.1.4.2 Heat trace/insulation to read as follows: Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 13 of 25 [F] 903.3.1.4 Freeze protection. Freeze protection systems for automatic fire sprinkler systems shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable referenced NFPA standard and this Section. [F] 903.3.1.4.1 Attics. Only dry-pipe, preaction, or listed antifreeze automatic fire sprinkler systems shall be allowed to protect attic spaces. Exception: Wet-pipe fire sprinkler systems shall be allowed to protect non-ventilated attic spaces where: 1. The attic sprinklers are supplied by a separate floor control valve assembly to allow ease of draining the attic system without impairing sprinklers throughout the rest of the building; 2. Adequate heat shall be provided for freeze protection as per the applicable referenced NFPA standard; and, 3. The attic space is a part of the building’s thermal, or heat envelope, such that insulation is provided at the roof deck, rather than at the ceiling level. [F] 903.3.1.4.2 Heat trace/insulation. Heat trace/insulation shall only be allowed where approved by the Fire Code Official for small sections of large diameter water-filled pipe. Section [F] 903.3.5 Water supplies of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add a paragraph to read as follows: [F] Water supply as required for such systems shall be provided in conformance with the supply requirements of the respective standards; however, every water- based fire protection system shall be designed with a ten pounds per square inch (10 psi) safety factor. Reference Section 507.4 for additional design requirements. Section [F] 903.4 Sprinkler system supervision and alarms of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add a paragraph after Exceptions to read as follows: [F] Sprinkler and standpipe system water-flow detectors shall be provided for each floor tap to the sprinkler system and shall cause an alarm upon detection of water flow for more than forty-five (45) seconds. All control valves in the sprinkler and standpipe systems, except for fire department hose connection valves, shall be electrically supervised to initiate a supervisory signal at the central station upon tampering. Section [F] 903.4.2 Alarms of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add a paragraph to read as follows: [F] The alarm device required on the exterior of the building shall be a weatherproof horn/strobe notification appliance with a minimum seventy-five (75) candela strobe rating, installed as close as practicable to the fire department connection. Section [F] 905.2 Installation standard of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add a paragraph to read as follows: Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 14 of 25 [F] 905.2 Installation standard. Standpipe systems shall be installed in accordance with this Section and NFPA 14. Manual dry standpipe systems shall be supervised with a minimum of 10 psig and a maximum of 40 psig air pressure with a high/low alarm. Section [F] 905.3 Required installations of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add Section [F] 905.3.9 Buildings exceeding 10,000 sq. ft. and Exceptions to read as follows: [F] 905.3.9 Buildings exceeding 10,000 sq. ft. In buildings exceeding 10,000 square feet in area per story and where any portion of the building’s interior area is more than 200 feet (60,960 mm) of travel, vertically and horizontally, from the nearest point of fire department vehicle access, Class I automatic wet or manual wet standpipes shall be provided. Exceptions: 1. Automatic dry and semi-automatic dry standpipes are allowed as provided for in NFPA 14. 2. R-2 occupancies of four (4) stories or less in height having no interior corridors. Section [F] 905.4 Location of Class I standpipe hose connections of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to change Items 1., 3., and 5. and add Item 7. to read as follows: [F] 1. In every required exit stairway, a hose connection shall be provided for each story above and below grade plane. Hose connections shall be located at an intermediate landing between stories, unless otherwise approved by the Fire Code Official. 2. {No change to text.} 3. In every exit passageway, at the entrance from the exit passageway to other areas of a building. Exception: Where floor areas adjacent to an exit passageway are reachable from an exit stairway hose connection by a …… {No change to remaining text.} 4. {No change to text.} 5. Where the roof has a slope less than four (4) units vertical in twelve (12) units horizontal (33.3% slope), each standpipe shall be provided with a two-way hose connection located to serve the roof or at the highest landing of an exit stairway with stair access to the roof provided in accordance with Section 1011.12. 6. {No change to text.} 7. When required by this Chapter, standpipe connections shall be placed adjacent to all required exits to the structure and at 200 foot intervals along major corridors thereafter, or as otherwise approved by the Fire Code Official. Section [F] 905.9 Valve supervision of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add a paragraph after Exceptions to read as follows: Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 15 of 25 [F] Sprinkler and standpipe system water-flow detectors shall be provided for each floor tap to the sprinkler system and shall cause an alarm upon detection of water flow for more than forty-five (45) seconds. All control valves in the sprinkler and standpipe systems except for fire department hose connection valves shall be electrically supervised to initiate a supervisory signal at the central station upon tampering. Section [F] 907.1 General of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 907.1.4 Design standards to read as follows: [F] 907.1.4 Design standards. Where a new fire alarm system is installed, the devices shall be addressable. Fire alarm systems utilizing more than twenty (20) smoke detectors shall have analog initiating devices. Section [F] 907.2.1 Group A of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 907.2.1 Group A. A manual fire alarm system that activates the occupant notification system in accordance with Section 907.5 shall be installed in Group A occupancies having an occupant load of 300 or more persons or more than 100 persons above or below the lowest level of exit discharge. Group A occupancies not separated from one another in accordance with Section 707.3.10 shall be considered as a single occupancy for the purposes of applying this Section. Portions of Group E occupancies occupied for assembly purposes shall be provided with a fire alarm system as required for the Group E occupancy. Exception: {No change to text.} Activation of fire alarm notification appliances shall: 1. Cause illumination of the means of egress with light of not less than 1 foot-candle (11 lux) at the walking surface level, and, 2. Stop any conflicting or confusing sounds and visual distractions. Section [F] 907.2.3 Group E of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 907.2.3 Group E. A manual fire alarm system that initiates the occupant notification signal utilizing an emergency voice/alarm communication system meeting the requirements of Section 907.5.2.2 and installed in accordance with Section 907.6 shall be installed in Group E educational occupancies. When automatic sprinkler systems or smoke detectors are installed, such systems or detectors shall be connected to the building fire alarm system. An approved smoke detection system shall be installed in Group E day care occupancies. Unless separated by a minimum of 100 feet of open space, all buildings, whether portable buildings or the main building, will be considered one building for alarm occupant load consideration and interconnection of alarm systems. Exceptions: 1. {No change to text.} 1.1. Residential In-Home day care with not more than twelve (12) children may use interconnected single station detectors in all habitable rooms. (For care of more than five (5) children 2 1/2 or Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 16 of 25 less years of age, see Section 907.2.6.) {No change to remainder of Exceptions.} Section [F] 907.2.13 High-rise buildings, Exception 3 of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 3. Open air portions of buildings with an occupancy in Group A-5 in accordance with Section 303.1; however, this exception does not apply to accessory uses including, but not limited to, sky boxes, restaurants, and similarly enclosed areas. Section [F] 907.4.2 Manual fire alarm boxes of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 907.4.2.7 Type to read as follows: [F] 907.4.2.7 Type. Manual alarm initiating devices shall be an approved double action type. Section [F] 907.6.1 Wiring of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 907.6.1.1 Wiring Installation to read as follows: [F] 907.6.1.1 Wiring Installation. All fire alarm systems shall be installed in such a manner that failure of any single initiating device or single open in an initiating circuit conductor will not interfere with the normal operation of other such devices. All signaling line circuits (SLC) shall be installed in such a way that a single open will not interfere with the operation of any addressable devices (Class A). Outgoing and return SLC conductors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements for Class A circuits and shall have a minimum of four feet (4’) separation horizontal and one foot (1’) vertical between supply and return circuit conductors. The initiating device circuit (IDC) from a signaling line circuit interface device may be wired Class B, provided the distance from the interface device to the initiating device is ten feet (10’) or less. Section [F] 907.6.3 Initiating device identification of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to delete all four (4) Exceptions in its entirety. Section [F] 907.6.6 Monitoring of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding a sentence at the end of the paragraph to read as follows: [F] See Section 907.6.3 for the required information transmitted to the supervising station. Section 909 SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEMS of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 909.22 Stairway or ramp pressurization alternative, Section [F] 909.22.1 Ventilating equipment, Section [F] 909.22.1.1 Ventilation systems, Section [F] 909.22.1.2 Standby power, and Section [F] 909.22.1.3 Acceptance and testing to read as follows: [F] 909.22 Stairway or ramp pressurization alternative. Where the building is equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1 and the stair pressurization alternative is chosen for compliance with Building Code requirements for a smokeproof enclosure, interior exit stairways Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 17 of 25 or ramps shall be pressurized to a minimum of 0.10 inches of water (25 Pa) and a maximum of 0.35 inches of water (87 Pa) in the shaft relative to the building measured with all interior exit stairway and ramp doors closed under maximum anticipated conditions of stack effect and wind effect. Such systems shall comply with Section 909, including the installation of a separate fire-fighter’s smoke control panel as per Section 909.16, and a Smoke Control Permit shall be required from the Fire Department as per Section 105.7. [F] 909.22.1 Ventilating equipment. The activation of ventilating equipment for the stair or ramp pressurization system shall be by smoke detectors installed at each floor level at an approved location at the entrance to the smokeproof enclosure. When the closing device for the stairway or ramp shaft and vestibule doors is activated by smoke detection or power failure, mechanical equipment shall activate and operate at the required performance levels. Smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with Section 907.3. [F] 909.22.1.1 Ventilation systems. Smokeproof enclosure ventilation systems shall be independent of other building ventilation systems. The equipment, control wiring, power wiring and ductwork shall comply with one (1) of the following: 1. Equipment, control wiring, power wiring, and ductwork shall be located exterior to the building and directly connected to the smokeproof enclosure or connected to the smokeproof enclosure by ductwork enclosed by not less than 2-hour fire barriers constructed in accordance with Section 707 of the Building Code or horizontal assemblies constructed in accordance with Section 711 of the Building Code, or both; 2. Equipment, control wiring, power wiring, and ductwork shall be located within the smokeproof enclosure with intake or exhaust directly from and to the outside or through ductwork enclosed by not less than 2-hour barriers constructed in accordance with Section 707 of the Building Code or horizontal assemblies constructed in accordance with Section 711 of the Building Code, or both; or, 3. Equipment, control wiring, power wiring, and ductwork shall be located within the building if separated from the remainder of the building, including other mechanical equipment, by not less than 2-hour fire barriers constructed in accordance with Section 707 of the Building Code or horizontal assemblies constructed in accordance with Section 711 of the Building Code, or both. Exceptions: 1. Control wiring and power wiring utilizing a 2-hour rated cable or cable system; 2. Where encased with not less than two inches (2”) (51 mm) of concrete; 3. Control wiring and power wiring protected by a listed electrical circuit protective systems with a fire-resistance rating of not less than two (2) hours. [F] 909.22.1.2 Standby power. Mechanical vestibule and stairway and ramp shaft ventilation systems and automatic fire detection systems shall be provided with standby power in accordance with Section 2702 of the Building Code. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 18 of 25 [F] 909.22.1.3 Acceptance and testing. Before the mechanical equipment is approved, the system shall be tested in the presence of the Fire Code Official to confirm that the system is operating in compliance with these requirements. Section [F] 910.2 Where required of the 2015 International Building Code Exception 2. and 3. is amended to read as follows: [F] 2. Only manual smoke and heat removal shall be required in areas of buildings equipped with early suppression fast-response (ESFR) sprinklers. Automatic smoke and heat removal is prohibited. 3. Only manual smoke and heat removal shall be required in areas of buildings equipped with control mode special application sprinklers with a response time index of 50 (m*S)1/2 or less that are listed to control a fire in stored commodities with twelve (12) or fewer sprinklers. Automatic smoke and heat removal is prohibited. Section [F] 910.2 Where required of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding 910.2.3 [F] Group H with Exceptions to read as follows: [F] 910.2.3 Group H. Buildings and portions thereof used as a Group H occupancy as follows: 1. In occupancies classified as Group H-2 or H-3, any of which are more than 15,000 square feet (1,394 m2) in single floor area. Exception: Buildings of noncombustible construction containing only noncombustible materials. 2. In areas of buildings in Group H used for storing Class 2, 3, and 4 liquid and solid oxidizers, Class 1 and unclassified detonable organic peroxides, Class 3 and 4 unstable (reactive) materials, or Class 2 or 3 water-reactive materials as required for a high-hazard commodity classification. Exception: Buildings of noncombustible construction containing only noncombustible materials. Section [F] 910.3 Smoke and heat vents of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 910.3.4 Vent operation, Section [F] 910.3.4.1 Sprinklered buildings, and Section [F] 910.3.4.2 Nonsprinklered buildings to read as follows: [F] 910.3.4 Vent operation. Smoke and heat vents shall be capable of being operated by approved automatic and manual means. Automatic operation of smoke and heat vents shall conform to the provisions of Sections 910.3.2.1 through 910.3.2.3. [F] 910.3.4.1 Sprinklered buildings. Where installed in buildings equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler system, smoke and heat vents shall be designed to operate automatically. The automatic operating mechanism of the smoke and heat vents shall operate at a temperature rating at least 100°F (approximately 38°C) greater than the temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 19 of 25 Exception: Manual only system per 910.2. [F] 910.3.4.2 Nonsprinklered buildings. Where installed in buildings not equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler system, smoke and heat vents shall operate automatically by actuation of a heat-responsive device rated at between 100°F (56°C) and 220°F (122°C) above ambient. Exception: Listed gravity-operated drop out vents. Section 910.4.3.1 Makeup air of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 910.4.3.1 Makeup air. Makeup air openings shall be provided within six feet (6’) (1829 mm) of the floor level. Operation of makeup air openings shall be automatic. The minimum gross area of makeup air inlets shall be eight (8) square feet per 1,000 cubic feet per minute (0.74 m2 per 0.4719 m3/s) of smoke exhaust. Section 910.4.4 Acti vation of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [F] 910.4.4 Activation. The mechanical smoke removal system shall be activated automatically by the automatic sprinkler system or by an approved fire detection system. Individual manual controls shall also be provided. Exception: Manual only systems per Section 910.2. Section [F] 912.2 Location of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [F] 912.2.3 Hydrant distance to read as follows: [F] 912.2.3 Hydrant distance. An approved fire hydrant shall be located within 100 feet of the fire department connection as the fire hose lays along an unobstructed path. Section 913.2.1 Protection of fire pump rooms of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add a paragraph and Exception to read as follows: [F] When located on the ground level at an exterior wall, the fire pump room shall be provided with an exterior fire department access door that is not less than three feet (3’) in width and six feet eight inches (6’-8”) in height, regardless of any interior doors that are provided. A key box shall be provided at this door, as required by Section 506.1. Exception: When it is necessary to locate the fire pump room on other levels or not at an exterior wall, the corridor leading to the fire pump room access from the exterior of the building shall be provided with equivalent fire resistance as that required for the pump room, or as approved by the Fire Code Official. Access keys shall be provided in the key box as required by Section 506.1. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 20 of 25 Section 1006.2.2 Egress based on use of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section 1006.2.2.6 Electrical Rooms to read as follows: 1006.2.2.6 Electrical Rooms. For electrical rooms, special exiting requirements may apply. Reference the electrical code as adopted. Section 1009.1 Accessible means of egress required of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Exception 4. to read as follows: Exceptions: 4. Buildings regulated under State Law and built in accordance with State registered plans, including any variances or waivers granted by the State, shall be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of Section 1009. Section 1010.1.9.4 Bolt Locks of the 2015 International Building Code Exception 3. and 4. is amended to read as follows: Exceptions: 3. Where a pair of doors serves an occupant load of less than fifty (50) persons in a Group B, F, M or S occupancy. {no change to remaining text.} 4. Where a pair of doors serves a Group A, B, F, M or S occupancy {no change to remaining text.} Section 1015.8 Window Openings of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1. Operable windows where the top of the sill of the opening is located more than fifty-five feet (55’) (16 764 mm) above the finished grade or other surface below and that are provided with window fall prevention devices that comply with ASTM F 2006. Section 1020.1 Construction of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Exception 6. to read as follows: 6. In group B occupancies, corridor walls and ceilings need not be of fire-resistive construction within a single tenant space when the space is equipped with approved automatic smoke-detection within the corridor. The actuation of any detector shall activate self-annunciating alarms audible in all areas within the corridor. Smoke detectors shall be connected to an approved automatic fire alarm system where such system is provided. Section 1029.1.1.1 Spaces under grandstands and bleachers of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to delete this Section in its entirety. Section 1101.1 Scope of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding an Exception to read as follows: Exception: Components of projects regulated by and registered with Architectural Barriers Division of Texas Department of Licensing and Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 21 of 25 Regulation shall be deemed to be incompliance with the requirements of this Chapter. Section 1203.1 General of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1203.1 General. Buildings shall be provided with natural ventilation in accordance with Section 1203.4, or mechanical ventilation in accordance with the currently adopted International Mechanical Code. Where air infiltration rate in a dwelling unit is five (5) air changes or less per hour when tested with a blower door at a pressure 0.2 inch w.c. (50 Pa) in accordance with Section 402.4.1.2 of the currently adopted International Energy Conservation Code, the dwelling unit shall be ventilated by mechanical means in accordance with Section 403 of the currently adopted International Mechanical Code. Table 1505.1 Minimum Roof Covering Classification for Types of Construction of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to remove footnote c and replace footnote b to read as follows: b. Non-classified roof coverings shall be permitted on buildings of U occupancies having not more than 120 square feet of protected roof area. When exceeding 120 square feet of protected roof area, buildings of U occupancies may use non- rated non-combustible roof coverings. c. {delete in its entirety} Section [BF] 1505.7 Special purpose roofs of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to delete this Section in its entirety. Section [BG] 1510.1 General of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [BG] 1510.1 General. Materials and methods of applications used for recovering or replacing an existing roof covering shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 15. All individual replacement shingles or shakes shall be in compliance with the rating required by Table 1505.1. Section 1612.3 Establishment of flood hazard areas of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1612.3 Establishment of flood hazard areas. To establish flood hazard areas, the applicable governing authority shall adopt a flood hazard map and supporting data. The flood hazard map shall include, at a minimum, areas of special flood hazard as identified by the Federal Emergency Management Agency in an engineering report entitled “The Flood Insurance Study for The Town of Prosper” as amended or revised with the accompanying Flood Insurance Rate Map (FIRM) and Flood Boundary and Floodway Map (FBFM) and related supporting data along with any revisions thereto. The adopted flood hazard map and supporting data are hereby adopted by reference and declared to be part of this Section. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 22 of 25 Section 1704.2 Special inspections and tests of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1704.2 Special inspections and tests. Where application is made to the Building Official for construction as specified in Section 105, the owner or the owner’s authorized agent, or the registered design professional in responsible charge, other than the contractor, shall employ one (1) or more approved agencies to provide special inspections and tests during construction on the types of work listed under Section 1705 and identify the approved agencies to the Building Official. The special inspector shall not be employed by the contractor. These special inspections and tests are in addition to the inspections identified by the Building Official that are identified in Section 110. Section 1704.2.1 Special inspector qualifications of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1704.2.1 Special inspector qualifications. Prior to the start of construction and or upon request, the approved agencies shall provide written documentation to the registered design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official demonstrating the competence and relevant experience or training of the special inspectors who will perform the special inspections and tests during construction. {no change to remaining text.} Section 1704.2.4 Report requirement of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1704.2.4 Report requirement. Approved agencies shall keep records of special inspections and tests. The approved agency shall submit reports of special inspections and tests to the Building Official upon request, and to the registered design professional in responsible charge. Individual inspection reports shall indicate that work inspected or tested was or was not completed in conformance to approved construction documents. {no change to remaining text.} Section 1704.2.5.1, Fabricator approval of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1704.2.5.1 Fabricator approval. Special inspections during fabrications required by Section 1704 are not required where the work is done on the premises of a fabricator registered and approved to perform such work without special inspection. Approval shall be based upon review of the fabricator's written procedural and quality control manuals and periodic auditing of fabrication practices by an approved agency, or a fabricator that is enrolled in a nationally accepted inspections program. At completion of fabrication, the acceptable or approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the owner or the owner’s authorized agent or the registered design professional in responsible charge, stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents. The certificate of compliance shall also be made available to the Building Official upon request. Section 1807.2.2 Design lateral soil loads of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 23 of 25 1807.2.2 Design lateral soil loads. Retaining walls shall be designed for the lateral soil loads set forth in Section 1610. Retaining walls that are not laterally supported at the top and that retain in excess of twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) of unbalanced fill shall be designed to ensure stability against overturning, sliding, excessive foundation pressure, and water uplift. Retaining walls that retain in excess of thirty-six inches (36”) (914 mm) of unbalanced fill shall have a professionally engineered design to ensure stability against overturning, sliding, excessive foundation pressure, and water uplift. For stone mass gravity retaining walls in excess of twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm), minimum foundation embedment shall be no less than twelve inches (12”) (305 mm) into undisturbed or well compacted soil. Section [P] 2901.1 Scope of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: [P] 2901.1 Scope. {no change to existing text} The provisions of this Chapter are meant to work in coordination with the provisions of Chapter 4 of the currently adopted International Plumbing Code. Should any conflicts arise between the two (2) Chapters, the Building Official shall determine which provision applies. Section [P] 2902.1 Minimum number of fixtures of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to add a paragraph to read as follows: In other than E Occupancies, the minimum number of fixtures in Table 2902.1 may be lowered if requested in writing, by the applicant stating reasons for a reduced number, and approved by the Building Official. [P] Table 2902.1 Minimum Number of Required Plumbing Fixtures of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding footnote f to read as follows: f. Drinking fountains are not required in M Occupancies with an occupant load of 100 or less, B Occupancies with an occupant load of twenty-five (25) or less, and for dining and/or drinking establishments. Section [P] 2902.1 Minimum number of fixtures of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section [P] 2902.1.3 Additional fixtures for food preparation facilities, Section [P] 2902.1.3.1 Hand washing lavatory, and Section [P] 2902.1.3.2 Service sink to read as follows: [P] 2902.1.3 Additional fixtures for food preparation facilities. In addition to the fixtures required in this Chapter, all food service facilities shall be provided with additional fixtures set out in this Section. [P] 2902.1.3.1 Hand washing lavatory. At least one (1) hand washing lavatory shall be provided for use by employees that is accessible from food preparation, food dispensing, and ware washing areas. Additional hand washing lavatories may be required based on convenience of use by employees. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 24 of 25 [P] 2902.1.3.2 Service sink. In new or remodeled food service establishments, at least one (1) service sink or one (1) floor sink shall be provided so that it is conveniently located for the cleaning of mops or similar wet floor cleaning tools and for the disposal of mop water and similar liquid waste. The location of the service sink(s) and/or mop sink(s) shall be approved by the Town of Prosper Health Division. Section 3002.1 Hoistway enclosure protection of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Exceptions to read as follows: Exceptions: 1. Elevators wholly located within atriums complying with Section 404 shall not require hoistway enclosure protection. 2. Elevators in open or enclosed parking garages that serve only the parking garage, and complying with Sections 406.5 and 406.6, respectively, shall not require hoistway enclosure protection. Section 3005.4 Machine rooms, control rooms, machinery spaces and control spaces of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 3005.4 Machine rooms, control rooms, machinery spaces and control spaces. Elevator machine rooms, control rooms, control spaces, and machinery spaces shall be enclosed with fire barriers constructed in accordance with Section 707 or horizontal assemblies constructed in accordance with Section 711, or both. {no change to remaining text.} Section 3005 MACHINE ROOMS of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section 3005.7 Fire Protection in machine rooms, control rooms, machinery spaces and control spaces, Section 3005.7.1 Automatic sprinkler system, Section 3005.7.1.1 Prohibited locations, Section 3005.7.2 Sprinkler system monitoring, Section 3005.7.3 Water protection, and Section 3005.7.4 Shunt trip to read as follows: 3005.7 Fire Protection in machine rooms, control rooms, machinery spaces and co ntrol spaces. 3005.7.1 Automatic sprinkler system. The building shall be equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1, except as otherwise permitted by Section 903.3.1.1.1 and as prohibited by Section 3005.7.2.1. 3005.7.1.1 Prohibited locations. Automatic sprinklers shall not be installed in machine rooms, elevator machinery spaces, control rooms, control spaces, and elevator hoist-ways. 3005.7.2 Sprinkler system monitoring. The sprinkler system shall have a sprinkler control valve supervisory switch and water-flow initiating device provided for each floor that is monitored by the building’s fire alarm system. 3005.7.3 Water protection. An approved method to prevent water from infiltrating into the hoistway enclosure from the operation of the automatic sprinkler system outside the elevator lobby shall be provided. Item 5d Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 25 of 25 3005.7.4 Shunt trip. Means for elevator shutdown in accordance with Section 3005.5 shall not be installed. Section 3005 MACHINE ROOMS of the 2015 International Building Code is amended by adding Section 3005.8 Storage to read as follows: 3005.8 Storage. Storage shall not be allowed within the elevator machine room, control room, machinery spaces, and/or control spaces. Provide approved signage at each entry to the above listed locations stating: "No Storage Allowed”. Section 3006.2 Hoistway opening protection required of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 5. The building is a high rise and the elevator hoistway is more than fifty- five feet (55’) (16,764 mm) in height. The height of the hoistway shall be measured from the lowest floor at or above grade to the highest floors served by the hoistway. Section 3109.1 General of the 2015 International Building Code is amended to read as follows: 3109.1 General. Swimming pools shall comply with the requirements of any applicable sections of this Code and with applicable state laws. End of Exhibit “A” Item 5d Page 1 of 4 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.05, “Residential Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new article 3.05, “Residential Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Residential Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, removal, and demolition of detached one- and two-family dwellings and multiple single-family dwellings (townhouses) not more than three (3) stories in height with a separate means of egress and related accessory structures in the Town of Prosper, Texas. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to adopt the later versions of the International Building Codes. On November 27, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the 2015 and 2017 series of codes and list of major changes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.List of Major Changes to all Series of Codes 2. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance repealing Article 3.05, “Residential Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new article 3.05, “Residential Building Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Residential Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, removal, and demolition of detached one- and two-family dwellings and multiple single-family dwellings (townhouses) not more than three (3) stories in height with a separate means of egress and related accessory structures in the Town of Prosper, Texas. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5e Page 2 of 4 Town of Prosper List of Specific Chapters and Sections of the Applicable Codes Regarding Significant Changes. 1) 2015 International Build Code (IBC) 101.4.7 Existing Buildings, Previous 2012 IBC Chapter 34. The requirements (Chapter 34) for existing structures have been removed from the 2015 IBC. All existing construction requirements are now in the 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC). 2) 2015 IBC 423 Storm Shelters, Critical Emergency Operations and group E occupancies. This section applies to the construction of storm shelters constructed as separate detached buildings or constructed as safe rooms within buildings for the purpose of providing safe refuge from storms that produce high winds, such as tornados and hurricanes. Such structures shall be designated to be hurricane shelters, tornado shelters, or combined hurricane and tornado shelters. 3) 2015 IBC 406 “Private Garage,” 406.3.1 “Classification,” 406.3.2 “Clear Height” Private garages are no longer limited to a maximum of 3,000 sq. ft. in a building. Multiple private garages, each a maximum of 1,000 sq. ft., each separated by one-hour fire barriers or horizontal assemblies are now permitted based on their U-occupancy classification. Also, a minimum of 7’ clear height will be required in private garages. 4) 2015 IBC 705.3 Exception #2 “Buildings on the Same Lot Permits a parking garage of Construction Type I or IIA to abut a Group R-2 building with 1½- hour- protected openings (fire doors) in the abutting exterior wall of the garage and no required opening protective(s) in the abutting wall of a sprinklered R-2 building. Previous editions of the Code did not permit any openings in these abutting exterior walls that are at a “0” fire separation distance apart and required a fire wall design between such buildings to be permitted to have openings between the abutting buildings. 5) 2015 IBC 705.6 Exterior Wall- Structural Stability Exterior fire-rated walls that are braced by floor or roof assemblies that have a lesser fire resistance rating are now permitted. Previous editions of the IBC Code required Construction Type III buildings with two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to have floors that support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to be upgraded to the two-hour fire rating. This is a major cost since apartment buildings built of Construction Type III under the legacy codes only required one-hour floor and roof assemblies to support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls. 6) 2015 IBC 717.1.1 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings Ducts will be allowed to leave a fire-rated shaft enclosure, transition horizontally, and then enter another fire-rated shaft if the duct penetrations on each side of the shafts are protected with fire dampers. Note that this is not permitted for clothes dryer exhaust ducts or any other ducts that the I-Codes require to be continuous and uninterrupted. Item 5e Page 3 of 4 7) 2015 IBC 1603.1.8 Special Loads With the increasing use of photovoltaic (solar) panels on rooftops, it has become clear that there is a need for specific code requirements related to these panels. Such panels are considered fixed equipment and as such would fall under the definition of dead load. Rooftop PV panels are considered special loads and their dead load should be indicated on the construction documents. The code language was revised to clarify that the provisions apply to roof loads for the design of the roof structure, not to the design of the photovoltaic panels or modules themselves. 8) 2015 International Residential Code (IRC) R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to doors Glazing installed perpendicular to a door in a closed position and within 24 inches of the door only requires safety glazing if it is on the hinge side of an in-swinging door. 9) 2015 IRC R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to bottom stair landing. This change will limit the requirement for glazing at the bottom of a landing by excluding windows greater than 180 degrees from the bottom face of the landing. 10) 2015 IRC R315 Carbon Monoxide Alarms The carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Section R315 have been reorganized to clarify their application. For example, the carbon monoxide detection system provisions have been placed in a separate Section R315.6 following all of the carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Sections R315.1 through R315.5. In addition, new charging sections have been added to clarify the scope and make the provisions easier to locate. Several technical changes have also occurred. The carbon monoxide alarm provisions have been rewritten to generally align with the smoke alarm provisions. For example, connection to the house wiring system with battery backup is now required for carbon monoxide alarms installed in new dwellings. 11) 2015 IRC Table R602.3(1) Fastening schedule for structural members. IRC Table R602.3(1), wood frame nailing schedule, is reformatted to give typical nailing options and to make the table consistent with 2015 IBC Table 2304.10.1. The change states the minimum size and number of fasteners for each connection. In most cases, the minimum number of box nails previously required is increased by one. 12) 2015 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 605.2.1 Lead content of drinking water pipe and fittings. Pipe, pipe fittings, joints, valves, faucets and fixture fittings utilized to supply water for drinking or cooking purposes shall comply with NSF 372 and shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent or less. 13) 2015 IPC 607.3 Thermal expansion The available method to control closed-system pressure increases caused by the heating of water has been limited to the use of thermal expansion tanks only. Item 5e Page 4 of 4 14) 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 307.6 Condensate pumps. Condensate pumps located in uninhabitable spaces, such as attics and crawl spaces, shall be connected to the appliance or equipment served such that when the pump fails, the appliance or equipment will be prevented from operating. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 15) 2015 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 310.1.1.1 Bonding Jumper length. The length of the bonding jumper between the connection length of the bonding jumper between the connection to a gas piping system and the connection to a grounding electrode system shall not exceed 75 feet. Any additional grounding electrodes used shall be bonded to the electrical service grounding electrode system or, where provided, the lightning protection grounding electrode system. 16) 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) 210.8 Ground-fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel (B) Other than dwelling units. All single-phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50 amps or less and three- phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or less installed in the following locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protections for personnel, (1) Bathrooms (2) Kitchens (3) Rooftops 17) 2017 NEC 210.11 Branch Circuits Required (C) Dwelling Units (4) Garage Branch Circuits In addition to the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20 ampere branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacles outlets in attached garages and in detached garages with electric power. This circuit shall have no other outlets. 18) 2017 NEC 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Protection (A) Dwelling Units AFCI Protection is now required for all 120 volts, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere branch circuits supplying not just outlets but also devices installed in Kitchen and Laundry areas. 19) 2017 NEC 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250 volts non-locking-type receptacles in the areas of Pre- school, elementary education, dental office, outpatient facilities, transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums and dormitories. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 1 of 24 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, REPEALING ARTICLE 3.05, “RESIDENTIAL BUILDING CODE,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW ARTICLE 3.05, “RESIDENTIAL BUILDING CODE”; ADOPTING THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL RESIDENTIAL CODE, SAVE AND EXCEPT THE DELETIONS AND AMENDMENTS SET FORTH HEREIN; REGULATING THE CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATION, MOVEMENT, ENLARGEMENT, REPLACEMENT, REPAIR, EQUIPMENT, USE AND OCCUPANCY, LOCATION, REMOVAL, AND DEMOLITION OF DETACHED ONE- AND TWO-FAMILY DWELLINGS AND MULTIPLE SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLINGS (TOWNHOUSES) NOT MORE THAN THREE (3) STORIES IN HEIGHT WITH A SEPARATE MEANS OF EGRESS AND RELATED ACCESSORY STRUCTURES IN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS, AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to repeal existing Article 3.05, “Residential Building Code,” of the Code or Ordinances and replace it with a new Article 3.05, “Residential Building Code”; and, WHEREAS, the Town Council also has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of the Prosper to adopt the 2015 Edition of the International Residential Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Existing Article 3.05, “Residential Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper, Texas, is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Article 3.05, “Residential Building Code,” to read as follows: “ARTICLE 3.05 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING CODE Sec. 3.05.001 Code Adopted; amendments The International Residential Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., including Appendix G, Appendix K, and Appendix Q save and except the deletions and amendments set forth in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes, is hereby adopted as the Residential Building Code for the Town, regulating the construction, Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 of 24 alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, removal, and demolition of detached one- and two-family dwellings and multiple single- family dwellings (townhouses) not more than three (3) stories in height with a separate means of egress and related accessory structures within the Town (the “2015 International Residential Code”). The 2015 International Residential Code is made a part of this Article as if fully set forth herein. A copy of the International Residential Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., is on file in the office of the Town Secretary of Prosper being marked and so designated as the 2015 International Residential Code. Sec. 3.05.002 Penalty for violation Any person, firm, corporation, or business entity violating this article shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state, and federal law.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason, held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town of Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one (1) or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective January 1, 2019, after its passage and publication as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11th DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 3 of 24 ____________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _____________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 4 of 24 Exhibit A TOWN OF PROSPER AMENDMENTS 2015 INTERNATIONAL RESIDENTIAL CODE The following additions, deletions, and amendments to the 2015 International Residential Code are hereby approved and adopted. Section R101.1 Title of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the Residential Building Code for One- and Two-family Dwellings of the Town of Prosper and shall be cited as such and will be referred to hereinafter as "this code." Section R102.4 Referenced codes and standards of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R102.4 Referenced codes and standards. The codes, when specifically adopted, and standards referenced in this Code shall be considered part of the requirements of this Code to the prescribed extent of each such reference and as further regulated in Sections R102.4.1 and R102.4.2. Whenever amendments have been adopted to the referenced codes and standards, each reference to said code and standard shall be considered to reference the amendments as well. Any reference made to NFPA 70 or the Electrical Code shall mean the Electrical Code as adopted. Exception: Where enforcement of a code provision would violate the conditions of the listing of the equipment or appliance, the conditions of the listing and the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall apply. Section R104.10.1 Flood hazard areas of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to delete this section in its entirety. Section R105.2 Work exempt from permit of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R105.2 Work exempt from permit. Exemption from permit requirements of this code shall not be deemed to grant authorization for any work to be done in any manner in violation of the provisions of this Code or any other laws or ordinances of this jurisdiction. Permits shall not be required for the following: Building: 1. Retaining walls that are not over four feet (4’) (1,219 mm) in height measured from the bottom of the footing to the top of the wall, unless supporting a surcharge. 2. Water tanks supported directly upon grade if the capacity does not exceed 5,000 gallons (18,927 L) and the ratio of height to diameter or width does not exceed 2 to 1. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 5 of 24 3. Painting, papering, tiling, carpeting, cabinets, counter tops, and similar finish work. 4. Prefabricated swimming pools that are less than twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) in depth. 5. Swings and other playground equipment. 6. Window awnings supported by an exterior wall which do not project more than fifty-four inches (54”) (1,372 mm) from the exterior wall and do not require additional support. 7. Decks not exceeding 200 square feet (18.58 m2) in area, that are not more than thirty inches (30”) (762 mm) above grade at any point, are not attached to a dwelling, and do not serve the exit door required by Section R311.4. {The remaining paragraphs, sentences, items and numbering in Section R105.2 shall remain unchanged.} Section R105.3.1.1 Determination of substantially improved or substantially damaged existing buildings in flood hazard areas of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to delete this section in its entirety. Section R105.3.2 Time limitation of application of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R105.3.2 Time limitation of application. An application for a permit for any proposed work shall be deemed to have been abandoned ninety (90) days after the date of filing, unless such application has been pursued in good faith or a permit has been issued; except that the Building Official is authorized to grant one (1) or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding ninety (90) days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section R105.5 Expiration of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R105.5 Expiration. Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after the issuance, or if the work authorized by such permit is suspended, abandoned, or lacks any required inspection for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Building Official is authorized to grant, in writing, one (1) or more extensions of time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section R106.1 Submittal documents of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R106.1 Submittal documents. Submittal documents consisting of construction documents, and other data shall be submitted in two (2) or more sets with each Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 6 of 24 application for a permit. The construction documents shall be prepared by a registered design professional where required by the statutes of the jurisdiction in which the project is to be constructed. Where special conditions exist, the Building Official is authorized to require additional construction documents to be prepared by a registered design professional. Foundation plans shall be submitted with each application. Foundation plans shall be designed by an engineer licensed by the State of Texas and shall bear said engineer’s seal. Structural framing plans shall be submitted with each new construction or addition application. Structural framing plans shall be designed by a registered design professional licensed by the State of Texas and shall bear said design professional’s seal. Exception: The Building Official is authorized to waive the submission of construction documents and other data not required to be prepared by a registered design professional if it is found that the nature of the work applied for is such that reviewing of construction documents is not necessary to obtain compliance with this Code. Section R106.1.4 Information for construction in flood hazard areas of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to delete this section in its entirety. Section R108.2 Schedule of permit fees of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R108.2 Schedule of permit fees. On buildings, structures, electrical, gas, mechanical, and plumbing systems or alterations requiring a permit, a fee for each permit shall be paid as required, in accordance with the schedule as established by the Town of Prosper Fee Schedule as adopted by the Town Council. Section R108.5 Refunds of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R108.5 Refunds. The Building Official is authorized to establish a refund policy. 1. The full amount of any fee paid hereunder that was erroneously paid or collected. 2. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance with this Code. 3. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a plan review fee has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan review effort has been expended. The Building Official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date of fee payment. Section R108.6 Work commencing before permit issuance of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 7 of 24 R108.6 Work commencing before permit issuance. Any person who commences any work requiring a permit on a building, structure, electrical, gas, mechanical, or plumbing system prior to obtaining the necessary permits shall be subject to a fee of 100% of the usual permit fee, in addition to the required permit fees. Section R108 FEES of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding Section R108.7 Re-inspection fee to read as follows: R108.7 Re-inspection fee. A fee as established by Town Council may be charged when: 1. The inspection called for is not ready when the inspector arrives; 2. No building address or permit card is clearly posted; 3. Town-approved plans are not on the job site available to the Inspector; 4. The building is locked or otherwise not available for inspection when called; 5. The job site is disapproved twice for the same item; and/or, 6. Failure to maintain erosion control, trash control, or tree protection. Any re-inspection fees assessed shall be paid before any additional inspections are conducted on said job site. Section R109.1.1 Foundation inspection of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R109.1.1 Foundation inspection. Inspection of the foundation shall be made after poles or piers are set or trenches or basement areas are excavated, any required forms erected, and any required reinforcing steel is in place and supported prior to the placing of concrete. The foundation inspection shall include excavations for thickened slabs intended for the support of bearing walls, partitions, structural supports, or equipment and special requirements for wood foundations. A registered design professional, or their designated representative, shall perform a pre-pour inspection and provide the Building Official with a signed and sealed document stating that the foundation has been inspected and approved. This inspection shall take place prior to requesting a foundation inspection from the Building Official. Section R109.1.4 Frame and masonry inspection of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R109.1.4 Frame and masonry inspection. Inspection of framing and masonry construction shall be made after the roof, masonry, all framing, firestopping, draftstopping, and bracing are in place and after the plumbing, mechanical, and electrical rough inspections are approved. A registered design professional, or their designated representative, shall perform a structural framing inspection and provide the Building Official with a signed and sealed document stating that the structure’s vertical and lateral load-resistance framing design has been inspected and approved. This inspection shall take place prior to requesting a framing inspection from the Building Official. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 8 of 24 Section R110 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY (to include Section R110.1 Use and occupancy, R110.2 Change in use, R110.3 Certificate issued, R110.4 Temporary occupancy and R110.5 Revocation) of the 2015 International Residential Code are amended to delete this section in its entirety. Section R112 BOARD OF APPEALS of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by removing Section R112.1 General, R112.2 Limitations on authority, R112.3 Qualifications and R112.4 Administration and replacing with the following: R112 BOARD OF APPEALS. Any person shall have the right to appeal a decision of the Building Official to the Board of Appeals as established by ordinance. The board shall be governed by the Town of Prosper’s enabling ordinance. Section R202 DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Residential Code, definition of “TOWNHOUSE” is amended to read as follows: TOWNHOUSE. A single-family dwelling unit constructed in a group of three (3) or more attached units, separated by property lines in which each unit extends from foundation to roof, and with a yard or public way on at least two (2) sides. Table R301.2(1) CLIMATIC AND GEOGRAPHIC DESIGN CRITERIA of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by filling in data to read as follows: TABLE R301.2(1) CLIMATIC AND GEOGRAPHIC DESIGN CRITERIA {No changes to footnotes} Section R302.1 Exterior Walls of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding Exception 6. to read as follows: 6. Open non-combustible carport structures may be constructed when also approved within adopted ordinances. Section R302.3 Two-family dwellings of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding Exception 3. to read as follows: GROUND SNOW LOAD WIND DESIGN SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORYf SUBJECT TO DAMAGE FROM WI N T E R D E S I G N TE M P e IC E B A R R I E R UN D E R - LA Y M E N T RE Q U I R E D h FL O O D HA Z A R D S g AI R F R E E Z I N G IN D E X i ME A N A N N U A L TE M P j 5 lbs/ft2 SP E E D d (M P H ) To p o g r a p h i c Ef f e c t s k Sp e c i a l W i n d Re g i o n L Wi n d b o r n e De b r i s Z o n e m A We a t h e r i n g a Fr o s t Li n e D e p t h b Te r m i t e c 220 F NO Local Code 150 64.90 F 115 (3 sec- gust)/ 76 fastest mile) No No No Moderate 6” Very Heavy Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 9 of 24 3. Two-family dwelling units that are also divided by a property line through the structure shall be separated as required for townhouses. Section R303.3 Bathrooms, Exception of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Exception: {existing text remains unchanged with the exception of the last sentence} Exhaust air from the space shall be exhausted directly to the outdoors unless the space contains only a water closet, a lavatory, or a water closet and a lavatory which space may be ventilated with an approved mechanical recirculating fan or similar device designed to remove odors from the air. Section R313.2 One-and two-family dwellings automatic fire systems of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Section R313.2 One- and two-family dwellings automatic fire systems. Automatic fire protection required: Automatic fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA 13D or NFPA 13R shall be provided in all one- and two-family dwellings with a conditioned floor area of 5,500 square feet (511 m2) or greater, dwellings three (3) stories or greater, or dwellings with roof heights exceeding thirty-five feet (35’). In the event that an addition or alteration increases the conditioned floor area from less than 5,500 square feet to equal to or greater than 5,500 square feet, the number of stories from less than three (3) stories to equal to or greater than three (3) stories, or the roof height from thirty-five feet (35’) or less to greater than thirty- five feet (35’) in height, the entire dwelling shall be retrofitted with an automatic fire protection system in accordance with NFPA 13D or NFPA 13R. Where requirements in this section conflict with requirements found in the Fire Code or the Code of Ordinances adopted by the Town of Prosper, the most stringent requirements shall apply. Section R315.2.2 Alterations, repairs and additions, Exception 2. of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: 2. Installation, alteration, or repairs of plumbing or mechanical systems that are electrical powered are exempt from the requirements of this Section. Section R322 FLOOD-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to delete this section in its entirety. Section R401.2 Requirements of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding a sentence at the end of the paragraph to read as follows: Section R401.2 Requirements. {no change to existing text} Every foundation and/or footing, or any size addition to an existing post-tensioned foundation regulated by this Code shall be designed and sealed by a registered engineer for the state of Texas. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 10 of 24 Section R602.6.1 Drilling and notching of top plate of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R602.6.1 Drilling and notching of top plate. When piping or ductwork is placed in or partly in an exterior wall or interior load-bearing wall, necessitating cutting, drilling, or notching of the top plate by more than fifty percent (50%) of its width, a galvanized metal tie not less than 0.054 inch thick (1.37 mm) (16 Ga) and five inches (5”) (127 mm) wide shall be fastened across and to the plate at each side of the opening with not less than eight (8)-10d (0.148-inch diameter) nails having a minimum length of one and one-half inches (1½”) (38 mm) at each side or equivalent. Fasteners shall be offset to prevent splitting of the top plate material. The metal tie shall extend a minimum of six inches (6”) past the opening. See Figure R602.6.1. {no change to remaining text} Figure R602.6.1 of the 2015 International Residential Code is removed and replaced with the following: Figure R602.6.1 TOP PLATE FRAMING TO ACCOMMODATE PIPING Section R703.8.4.1 Size and spacing of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding a paragraph as follows: In stud framed exterior walls, all ties shall be anchored to studs as follows: 1. When studs are sixteen inches (16”) (407 mm) o.c., stud ties shall be spaced no further apart than twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) vertically starting approximately twelve inches (12”) (305 mm) from the foundation; or, Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 11 of 24 2. When studs are twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) o.c., stud ties shall be spaced no further apart than sixteen inches (16”) (407 mm) vertically starting approximately eight inches (8”) (203 mm) from the foundation. Section R902.1 Roofing covering materials of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: R902.1 Roofing covering materials. Roofs shall be covered with materials as set forth in Sections R904 and R905. Class A, B, or C roofing shall be installed. All roof coverings shall be a minimum Class C. All individual replacement shingles or shakes shall be a minimum Class C. Class A, B and C roofing shall be tested in accordance with UL 790 or ASTM E 108. Exceptions: 1. {no change to text} 2. {no change to text} 3. {no change to text} 4. {no change to text} 5. Non-classified roof coverings shall be permitted on one-story detached accessory structures used as tool and storage sheds, playhouses, pool cabanas, and similar uses, provided the floor area does not exceed 120 square feet. Chapter 11 ENERGY EFFICIENCY of the 2015 International Residential Code is deleted in its entirety and replaced to read as follows: Chapter 11 ENERGY EFFICIENCY N1101.1 Scope. This Chapter regulates the energy efficiency for the design and construction of buildings regulated by this Code. N1101.2 Compliance. Compliance shall be demonstrated by meeting the requirements of the residential provisions of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code. Section M1305.1.3 Appliances in attics of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: M1305.1.3 Appliances in attics. Attics containing appliances requiring access shall be provided . . . {bulk of Section unchanged} . . . sides of the appliance where access is required. The clear access opening dimensions shall be a minimum of twenty inches (20”) by thirty inches (30”) (508 mm by 762 mm), or larger and large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance. A walkway to an appliance shall be rated as a floor as approved by the Building Official. As a minimum for access to the attic space, provide one (1) of the following: 1. A permanent stair; 2. A pull down stair with a minimum 300 lb. (136 kg) capacity, with the top stair rung located not more than fourteen inches (14”) from the top Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 12 of 24 surface of the attic platform above; or, 3. An access door from an upper floor level. Exceptions: 1. The passageway and level service space are not required where the appliance can be serviced and removed through the required opening. 2. Where the passageway is unobstructed and not less than six feet (6’) (1,829 mm) high and twenty-two inches (22”) (559 mm) wide for its entire length, the passageway shall be not more than fifty feet (50’) (15,240 mm) long. Section M1411.3 Condensate disposal of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Section M1411.3 Condensate disposal. Condensate from all cooling coils or evaporators shall be conveyed from the drain pan outlet to a sanitary sewer through a trap by means of a direct or indirect drain. {no change to remaining text} Section M1411.3.1 Auxiliary and secondary drain systems of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: M1411.3.1 Auxiliary and secondary drain systems. In addition to the requirements of … {bulk of Section unchanged} … One (1) of the following methods shall be used: 1. {no change to text} 2. {no change to text} 3. An auxiliary drain pan … {bulk of Section unchanged} … with Item 1. of this Section. A water level detection device may be installed only with prior approval of the Building Official. 4. A water level detection device … {bulk of Section unchanged} … overflow rim of such pan. A water level detection device may be installed only with prior approval of the Building Official. Section M1411.3.1.1 Water-level monitoring devices of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding a sentence to the end of the paragraph: {bulk of Section unchanged} A water level detection device may be installed only with prior approval of the Building Official. Section M1503.4 Makeup air required of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 13 of 24 M1503.4 Makeup air required. Exhaust hood systems capable of exhausting in excess of 400 cubic feet per minute (0.19 m3/s) shall be provided with makeup air at a rate approximately equal to the difference between the exhaust air rate and 400 cubic feet per minute. Such makeup air systems shall be equipped with a means of closure and shall be automatically controlled to start and operate simultaneously with the exhaust system. Exception: Where all appliances in the house are of sealed combustion, power-vent, unvented, or electric, the exhaust hood system shall be permitted to exhaust up to 600 cubic feet per minute (0.28 m3/s) without providing makeup air. Exhaust hood systems capable of exhausting in excess of 600 cubic feet per minute (0.28 m3/s) shall be provided with makeup air at a rate approximately equal to the difference between the exhaust air rate and 600 cubic feet per minute. Section M2005.2 Prohibited locations of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: M2005.2 Prohibited locations. Fuel-fired water heaters shall not be installed in a room used as a storage closet. Water heaters located in a bedroom or bathroom shall be installed in a sealed enclosure so that combustion air will not be taken from the living space. Access to such enclosure may be from the bedroom or bathroom when through a solid door, weather-stripped in accordance with the exterior door air leakage requirements of the currently adopted International Energy Conservation Code, and equipped with an approved self-closing device. Installation of direct-vent water heaters within an enclosure is not required. Section G2415.2 (404.2) CSST of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding Section G2415.2.1 (404.2.1) Medium pressure piping identification and Section G2415.2.2 (404.2.2) Minimum tubing size to read as follows: G2415.2.1 (404.2.1) Medium pressure piping identification. Both ends of each section of medium pressure gas piping shall identify its operating gas pressure with an approved tag. The tags are to be composed of aluminum or stainless steel and the following wording shall be stamped into the tag: "WARNING: 1/2 to 5 psi gas pressure - Do Not Remove" G2415.2.2 (404.2.2) Minimum tubing size. Corrugated stainless steel tubing (CSST) shall be a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") (18 EDH) to reduce whistling. Section G2415.12 (404.12) Minimum burial depth of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: G2415.12 (404.12) Minimum burial depth. Underground piping systems shall be installed a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18”) (457 mm) below grade, except as provided for in Section G2415.12.1. Section G2415.12.1 (404.12.1) Individual outside appliances of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 14 of 24 G2415.12.1 (404.12.1) Individual outside appliances. Individual lines to outside lights, grills, or other appliances shall be installed a minimum of twelve inches (12”) (305 mm) below finished grade, provided that such installation is approved and installed in locations not susceptible to physical damage. Section G2417.1 (406.1) General of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Section G2417.1 (406.1) General. Prior to acceptance and initial operation, all piping installations shall be visually inspected and pressure tested to determine that the materials, design, fabrication, and installation practices comply with the requirements of this Code. The permit holder shall make the applicable tests prescribed in Sections G2417.1.1 through G2417.1.5 to determine compliance with the provisions of this Code. The permit holder shall give reasonable advance notice to the Building Official when the piping system is ready for testing. The equipment, material, power, and labor necessary for the inspections and test shall be furnished by the permit holder and the permit holder shall be responsible for determining that the work will withstand the test pressure prescribed in the following tests. Section G2417.4 (406.4) Test pressure measurement of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: G2417.4 (406.4) Test pressure measurement. Test pressure shall be measured with a monometer or with a pressure-measuring device designed and calibrated to read, record, or indicate a pressure loss caused by leakage during the pressure test period. The source of pressure shall be isolated before the pressure tests are made. Section G2417.4.1 (406.4.1) Test Pressure of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Section G2417.4.1 (406.4.1) Test Pressure. The test pressure to be used shall be no less than 3 psig (20 kPa gauge), or at the discretion of the Building Official, the piping and valves may be tested at a pressure of at least six inches (6”) (152 mm) of mercury, measured with a manometer or slope gauge. For tests requiring a pressure of 3 psig, diaphragm gauges shall utilize a dial with a minimum diameter of three and one half inches (3 ½”), a set hand, 1/10 pound incrementation and pressure range not to exceed six pounds per square inch (6 psi) for tests requiring a pressure of 3 psig. For tests requiring a pressure of 10 psig, diaphragm gauges shall utilize a dial with a minimum diameter of three and one-half inches (3 ½”), a set hand, a minimum of 2/10 pound incrementation and a pressure range not to exceed twenty pounds per square inch (20 psi). For welded piping, and for piping carrying gas at pressures in excess of fourteen inches (14”) water column pressure (3.48 kPa) (1/2 psi) and less than 200 inches of water column pressure (52.2 kPa) (7.5 psi), the test pressure shall not be less than ten pounds per square inch (10 psi) (69.6 kPa). For piping carrying gas at a pressure that exceeds 200 inches of water column (52.2 kPa) (7.5 psi), the test Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 15 of 24 pressure shall be not less than one and one-half (1½) times the proposed maximum working pressure. Diaphragm gauges used for testing shall display a current calibration and be in good working condition. The appropriate test shall be applied to the diaphragm gauge used for testing. Section G2417.4.2 (406.4.2) Test duration of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: G2417.4.2 (406.4.2) Test duration. The test duration shall be held for a length of time satisfactory to the Building Official, but in no case for less than fifteen (15) minutes. For welded piping, and for piping carrying gas at pressures in excess of fourteen inches (14”) water column pressure (3.48 kPa), the test duration shall be held for a length of time satisfactory to the Building Official, but in no case for less than thirty (30) minutes. Section G2420.1 (409.1) General of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding Section G2420.1.4 Valves in CSST installations to read as follows: G2420.1.4 (409.1.4) Valves in CSST installations. Shutoff valves installed with corrugated stainless steel (CSST) piping systems shall be supported with an approved termination fitting, or equivalent support, suitable for the size of the valves, of adequate strength and quality, and located at intervals so as to prevent or damp out excessive vibration, but in no case greater than twelve inches (12”) from the center of the valve. Supports shall be installed so as not to interfere with the free expansion and contraction of the system's piping, fittings, and valves between anchors. All valves and supports shall be designed and installed so they will not be disengaged by movement of the supporting piping. Section G2420.5.1 (409.5.1) Located within same room of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: G2420.5.1 (409.5.1) Located within same room. The shutoff valve … {bulk of Section unchanged}…in accordance with the appliance manufacturer’s instructions. A secondary shutoff valve shall be installed within three feet (3’) (914mm) of the firebox if the appliance shutoff is only accessible by reaching inside the firebox. Section G2421.1 (410.1) Pressure regulators of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: G2421.1 (410.1) Pressure regulators. A line pressure regulator shall be … {bulk of Section unchanged} … approved for outdoor installation. Access to regulators shall comply with the requirements for access to appliances as specified in Section M1305. Exception: A passageway or level service space is not required when the regulator is capable of being serviced and removed through the required attic opening. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 16 of 24 Section G2422.1.2.3 (411.1.3.3) Prohibited locations and penetrations, Exceptions of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: Exceptions: 1. Rigid steel pipe connectors shall be permitted to extend through openings in appliance housings. 2. Fireplace inserts that are factory equipped with grommets, sleeves, or other means of protection in accordance with the listing of the appliance. Section G2445.2 (621.2) Prohibited use of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended by adding an Exception to read as follows: Exception: Existing approved unvented room heaters may continue to be used in dwelling units in accordance with the code provisions in effect when installed, when approved by the Building Official, unless an unsafe condition is determined to exist as described in the currently adopted International Fuel Gas Code, Section 108.7. Section G2448.1.1 (624.1.1) Installation requirements of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: G2448.1.1 (624.1.1) Installation requirements. The requirements for water heaters relative to access, sizing, relief valves, drain pans, and scald protection shall be in accordance with this Code. Section P2503.8.2 Testing of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: P2503.8.2 Testing. Reduced pressure principle, double check, double check detector, and pressure vacuum breaker backflow preventer assemblies shall be tested at the time of installation, immediately after repairs or relocation, and at regular intervals as required by the Town of Prosper. Section P2603.5.1 Sewer depth of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: P2603.5.1 Sewer depth. Building sewers that connect to private sewage disposal systems shall be a minimum of twelve inches (12”) (305mm) below finished grade at the point of septic tank connection. Building sewers shall be a minimum of twelve inches (12”) (305 mm) below grade. Section P2801.6.1 Pan size and drain of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: P2801.6.1 Pan size and drain. The pan shall … {no change to text} … of those materials listed in Table 605.4. Multiple pan drains may terminate to a single discharge piping system when approved by the Building Official, when permitted by the manufacturer’s installation instructions, and installed per those instructions. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 17 of 24 Section P2801.7 Water heaters installed in garages of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: P2801.7 Water heaters installed in garages. Water heaters having … {no change to existing text}…above the garage floor. Exceptions: 1. Elevation of the…{no change to existing text}…vapor ignition-resistant. 2. Electric water heaters. Section P2803.6.1 Requirements for discharge piping, Item 10. of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended as follows: 10. Not terminate less than six inches (6”) (152 mm) or more than twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) above grade nor more than six inches (6”) (152 mm) above the waste receptor. Section P2804.6.1 Requirements for discharge pipe of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: P2804.6.1 Requirements for discharge pipe. The discharge piping serving a pressure-relief valve, temperature-relief valve, or combination thereof shall: 1. Not be directly connected to the drainage system; 2. Discharge through an air gap; 3. Not be smaller than the diameter of the outlet of the valve served and shall discharge full size to the air gap; 4. Serve a single relief device and shall not connect to piping serving any other relief device or equipment; Exception: Multiple relief devices may be installed to a single T&P discharge piping system when approved by the Building Official, and when permitted by the manufacturer’s installation instructions, and installed per those instructions. 5. Discharge to an indirect waste receptor or to the outdoors; {Remaining items six through fourteen unchanged} Section P2902.5.3 Lawn irrigation systems of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: P2902.5.3 Lawn irrigation systems. The potable water supply to lawn irrigation systems shall be protected against backflow by an atmospheric-type vacuum breaker, a pressure-type vacuum breaker, a double-check assembly, or a reduced pressure principle backflow preventer. A valve shall not be installed downstream from an atmospheric vacuum breaker. Where chemicals are introduced into the system, the potable water supply shall be Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 18 of 24 protected against backflow by a reduced pressure principle backflow preventer. Section P3003.9.2 Solvent cementing of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: P3003.9.2 Solvent cementing. Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture. A purple primer that conforms to ASTM F 656 shall be applied. Solvent cement not purple in color and conforming to ASTM D 2564, CSA B137.3, CSA B181.1, or CSA B181.2 shall be applied to all joint surfaces. The joint shall be made while the cement is wet and shall be in accordance with ASTM D2855. Solvent cement joints shall be permitted above or below ground. {Exceptions with conditions deleted} Section P3111 COMBINATION WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to delete this section in its entirety. Section P3112.2 Vent connection of the 2015 International Residential Code is removed and replaced with Section P3112.2 Installation to read as follows: P3112.2 Installation. Traps for island sinks and similar equipment shall be roughed in above the floor and may be vented by extending the vent as high as possible, but not less than the drainboard height, and then returning it downward and connecting it to the horizontal sink drain immediately downstream from the vertical fixture drain. The return vent shall be connected to the horizontal drain through a wye-branch fitting and shall, in addition, be provided with a foot vent taken off the vertical fixture vent by means of a wye-branch immediately below the floor and extending to the nearest partition and then through the roof to the open air or may be connected to other vents at a point not less than six inches (6”) (152 mm) above the flood level rim of the fixtures served. Drainage fittings shall be used on all parts of the vent below the floor level and a minimum slope of one-quarter (1/4) inch per foot (20.9 mm/m) back to the drain shall be maintained. The return bend used under the drain-board shall be a one (1) piece fitting or an assembly of a forty-five (45) degree (0.79 radius), a ninety (90) degree (1.6 radius) and a forty- five (45) degree (0.79 radius) elbow in the order named. Pipe sizing shall be as elsewhere required in this Code. The island sink drain, upstream of the return vent, shall serve no other fixtures. An accessible cleanout shall be installed in the vertical portion of the foot vent. Section P3303.1.3 Electrical of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: P3303.1.3 Electrical. Electrical outlets shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the Town of Prosper. Part VIII – Electrical, Chapters 34 - 43 of the 2015 International Residential Code are amended by deleting these Chapters in their entirety and replacing with the 2017 National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the Town of Prosper. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 19 of 24 Appendix Q. Swimming Pools, Spas and Hot Tubs of the 2015 International Residential Code is amended to read as follows: SECTION AQ101 GENERAL Section Q101.1 General. The provisions of this Appendix shall control the design and construction of swimming pools, spas, and hot tubs installed in or on the lot of a one- or two-family dwelling. Q101.2 Pools in flood hazard areas. Pools that are located in flood hazard areas established by Table R301.2(1), including above-ground pools, on-ground pools, and in-ground pools that involve placement of fill, shall comply with Section AQ101.2.1 or AQ101.2.2. Exception: Pools located in riverine flood hazard areas which are outside of designated floodways. Q101.2.1 Pools located in designated floodways. Where pools are located in designated floodways, documentation shall be submitted to the Building Official which demonstrates that the construction of the pool will not increase the design flood elevation at any point within the jurisdiction. Q101.2.2 Pools located where floodways have not been designated. Where pools are located where design flood elevations are specified but floodways have not been designated, the applicant shall provide a floodway analysis that demonstrates that the proposed pool will not increase the design flood elevation more than one foot (1’) (305 mm) at any point within the jurisdiction. SECTION AQ102 DEFINITIONS Q102.1 General. For the purposes of these requirements, the terms used shall be defined as follows and as set forth in Chapter 2. ABOVE-GROUND/ON-GROUND POOL. See "Swimming pool.” BARRIER. A fence, wall, building wall, or combination thereof which completely surrounds the swimming pool and obstructs access to the swimming pool. HOT TUB. See "Swimming pool.” IN-GROUND POOL. See "Swimming pool.” RESIDENTIAL. That which is situated on the premises of a detached one- or two-family dwelling, or a one-family townhouse not more than three (3) stories in height. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 20 of 24 SPA, NONPORTABLE. See "Swimming pool.” SPA, PORTABLE. A nonpermanent structure intended for recreational bathing, in which all controls, water-heating and water-circulating equipment are an integral part of the product. SWIMMING POOL. Any structure intended for swimming or recreational bathing that contains water more than twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) deep. This includes in-ground, above-ground and on-ground swimming pools, hot tubs, and spas. SWIMMING POOL, INDOOR. A swimming pool which is totally contained within a structure and surrounded on all four (4) sides by the walls of the enclosing structure. SWIMMING POOL, OUTDOOR. Any swimming pool which is not an indoor pool. SECTION AG103 SWIMMING POOLS Q103.1 In-ground pools. In-ground pools shall be designed and constructed in compliance with ANSI/NSPI-5. Q103.2 Above-ground and on-ground pools. Above-ground and on-ground pools shall be designed and constructed in compliance with ANSI/NSPI-4. Q103.3 Pools in flood hazard areas. In flood hazard areas established by Table R301.2(1), pools in coastal high-hazard areas shall be designed and constructed in compliance with ASCE 24. SECTION AQ104 SPAS AND HOT TUBS Q104.1 Permanently installed spas and hot tubs. Permanently installed spas and hot tubs shall be designed and constructed in compliance with ANSI/NSPI-3. Q104.2 Portable spas and hot tubs. Portable spas and hot tubs shall be designed and constructed in compliance with ANSI/NSPI-6. SECTION AQ105 BARRIER REQUIREMENTS Q105.1 Application. The provisions of this Appendix shall control the design of barriers for residential swimming pools, spas, and hot tubs. These design controls are intended to provide protection against potential drownings and near- drownings by restricting access to swimming pools, spas, and hot tubs. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 21 of 24 Q105.2 Outdoor swimming pool. An outdoor swimming pool, including an in-ground, above-ground or on-ground pool, hot tub, or spa shall be surrounded by a barrier which shall comply with the following: 1. The top of the barrier shall be at least forty-eight inches (48”) (1,219 mm) above grade measured on the side of the barrier, which faces away from the swimming pool. The maximum vertical clearance between grade and the bottom of the barrier shall be two inches (2”) (51 mm) measured on the side of the barrier, which faces away from the swimming pool. Where the top of the pool structure is above grade, such as an above-ground pool, the barrier may be at ground level, such as the pool structure, or mounted on top of the pool structure. Where the barrier is mounted on top of the pool structure, the maximum vertical clearance between the top of the pool structure and the bottom of the barrier shall be four inches (4”) (102 mm). 2. Openings in the barrier shall not allow passage of a four (4)-inch- diameter (102 mm) sphere. 3. Solid barriers which do not have openings, such as a masonry or stone wall, shall not contain indentations or protrusions except for normal construction tolerances and tooled masonry joints. 4. Where the barrier is composed of horizontal and vertical members and the distance between the tops of the horizontal members is less than forty-five inches (45”) (1,143 mm), the horizontal members shall be located on the swimming pool side of the fence. Spacing between vertical members shall not exceed 1.75 inches (44 mm) in width. Where there are decorative cutouts within vertical members, spacing within the cutouts shall not exceed 1.75 inches (44 mm) in width. 5. Where the barrier is composed of horizontal and vertical members and the distance between the tops of the horizontal members is forty-five inches (45”) (1,143 mm) or more, spacing between vertical members shall not exceed four inches (4”) (102 mm). Where there are decorative cutouts within vertical members, spacing within the cutouts shall not exceed 1.75 inches (44 mm) in width. 6. Maximum mesh size for chain link fences shall be a 2.25-inch (57 mm) square unless the fence is provided with slats fastened at the top or the bottom which reduce the openings to not more than 1.75 inches (44 mm). 7. Where the barrier is composed of diagonal members, such as a lattice fence, the maximum opening formed by the diagonal members shall not be more than 1.75 inches (44 mm). Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 22 of 24 8. Access gates shall comply with the requirements of Section AQ105.2, Items 1 through 7, and shall be equipped to accommodate a locking device. Pedestrian access gates shall open outward away from the pool and shall be self-closing and have a self-latching device. Gates other than pedestrian access gates shall have a self-latching device. Where the release mechanism of the self-latching device is located less than fifty-four inches (54”) (1372 mm) from the bottom of the gate, the release mechanism and openings shall comply with the following: 8.1. The release mechanism shall be located on the pool side of the gate at least three inches (3”) (76 mm) below the top of the gate; and, 8.2. The gate and barrier shall have not opening greater than 0.5 inch (13 mm) within eighteen inches (18”) (457 mm) of the release mechanism. 9. Where a wall of a dwelling serves a part of the barrier one of the following conditions shall be met: 9.1. The pool shall be equipped with a powered safety cover in compliance with ASTM F1346; or, 9.2. Doors with direct access to the pool through that wall shall be equipped with an alarm which produces an audible warning when the door and/or its screen, if present, are opened. The alarm shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 2017. The deactivation switch(es) shall be located at least fifty-four inches (54”) (1,372 mm) above the threshold of the door; or, 9.3. Other means of protection, such as self-closing doors with self-latching devices, which are approved by the governing body, shall be acceptable as long as the degree of protection afforded is not less than the protection afforded by Item 9.1 or 9.2 described above. 10. Where an above-ground pool structure is used as a barrier or where the barrier is mounted on top of the pool structure, and the means of access is a ladder or steps, then: 10.1. The ladder or steps shall be capable of being secured, locked or removed to prevent access; or, 10.2. The ladder or steps shall be surrounded by a barrier which meets the requirements of Section AQ105.2, Items 1 through 9. When the ladder or steps are secured, locked or removed, any opening created shall not allow the passage of a four (4)-inch diameter (102 mm) sphere. Q105.3 Indoor swimming pool. Walls surrounding an indoor swimming pool shall comply with Section AQ105.2, Item 9. Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 23 of 24 Q105.4 Prohibited locations. Barriers shall be located so as to prohibit permanent structures, equipment, or similar objects from being used to climb them. Q105.5 Barrier exceptions. Spas or hot tubs with a safety cover which complies with ASTM F 1346, as listed in Section Q107, shall be exempt from the provisions of this Appendix. SECTION Q106 ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION FOR SWIMMING POOL AND SPA SUCTION OUTLETS Q106.1 General. Suction outlets shall be designed and installed in accordance with ANSI/APSP-7. SECTION Q107 ABBREVIATIONS Q107.1 General. ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street New York, NY 10036 APSP Association of Pool and Spa Professionals NSPI National Spa and Pool Institute 2111 Eisenhower Avenue Alexandria, VA 22314 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, VA 98411-0700 ASTM ASTM International 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken, PA 19428 UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062-2096 SECTION Q108 REFERENCED STANDARDS Q108.1 General. ANSI/NSP ANSI/NSPI-3-99 Standard for Permanently Installed Residential Spas AQ104.1 Item 5e Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 24 of 24 ANSI/NSPI-4-99 Standard for Above-ground/On-ground Residential Swimming Pools AQ103.2 ANSI/NSPI-5-03 Standard for Residential In-ground Swimming Pools AQ103.1 ANSI/NSPI-6-99 Standard for Residential Portable Spas AQ104.2 ANSI/APSP ANSI/APSP-7-06 Standard for Suction Entrapment Avoidance in Swimming Pools, Wading Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs and Catch Basins AQ106.1 ASCE ASCE/SEI-24-05 Flood-resistant Design and Construction AQ103.3 ASTM ASTM F 1346- 91 (2003) Performance Specification for Safety Covers and Labeling Requirements for All Covers for Swimming Pools Spas and Hot Tubs AQ105.2, AQ105.5 UL UL 2017-2000 Standard for General-purpose Signaling Devices and Systems—with revisions through June 2004 AQ105.2 End of Exhibit “A” Item 5e Page 1 of 4 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.06, “Electricity,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.06, “Electricity”; adopting the 2017 edition of the National Electrical Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, removal, use, and maintenance of any electrical wiring, apparatus, device, and/or systems within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to adopt the later versions of the International Building Codes. On November 27, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the 2015 and 2017 series of codes and list of major changes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.List of Major Changes to all Series of Codes 2. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance repealing Article 3.06, “Electricity,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.06, “Electricity”; adopting the 2017 edition of the National Electrical Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, removal, use, and maintenance of any electrical wiring, apparatus, device, and/or systems within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5f Page 2 of 4 Town of Prosper List of Specific Chapters and Sections of the Applicable Codes Regarding Significant Changes. 1) 2015 International Build Code (IBC) 101.4.7 Existing Buildings, Previous 2012 IBC Chapter 34. The requirements (Chapter 34) for existing structures have been removed from the 2015 IBC. All existing construction requirements are now in the 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC). 2) 2015 IBC 423 Storm Shelters, Critical Emergency Operations and group E occupancies. This section applies to the construction of storm shelters constructed as separate detached buildings or constructed as safe rooms within buildings for the purpose of providing safe refuge from storms that produce high winds, such as tornados and hurricanes. Such structures shall be designated to be hurricane shelters, tornado shelters, or combined hurricane and tornado shelters. 3) 2015 IBC 406 “Private Garage,” 406.3.1 “Classification,” 406.3.2 “Clear Height” Private garages are no longer limited to a maximum of 3,000 sq. ft. in a building. Multiple private garages, each a maximum of 1,000 sq. ft., each separated by one-hour fire barriers or horizontal assemblies are now permitted based on their U-occupancy classification. Also, a minimum of 7’ clear height will be required in private garages. 4) 2015 IBC 705.3 Exception #2 “Buildings on the Same Lot Permits a parking garage of Construction Type I or IIA to abut a Group R-2 building with 1½- hour- protected openings (fire doors) in the abutting exterior wall of the garage and no required opening protective(s) in the abutting wall of a sprinklered R-2 building. Previous editions of the Code did not permit any openings in these abutting exterior walls that are at a “0” fire separation distance apart and required a fire wall design between such buildings to be permitted to have openings between the abutting buildings. 5) 2015 IBC 705.6 Exterior Wall- Structural Stability Exterior fire-rated walls that are braced by floor or roof assemblies that have a lesser fire resistance rating are now permitted. Previous editions of the IBC Code required Construction Type III buildings with two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to have floors that support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to be upgraded to the two-hour fire rating. This is a major cost since apartment buildings built of Construction Type III under the legacy codes only required one-hour floor and roof assemblies to support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls. 6) 2015 IBC 717.1.1 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings Ducts will be allowed to leave a fire-rated shaft enclosure, transition horizontally, and then enter another fire-rated shaft if the duct penetrations on each side of the shafts are protected with fire dampers. Note that this is not permitted for clothes dryer exhaust ducts or any other ducts that the I-Codes require to be continuous and uninterrupted. Item 5f Page 3 of 4 7) 2015 IBC 1603.1.8 Special Loads With the increasing use of photovoltaic (solar) panels on rooftops, it has become clear that there is a need for specific code requirements related to these panels. Such panels are considered fixed equipment and as such would fall under the definition of dead load. Rooftop PV panels are considered special loads and their dead load should be indicated on the construction documents. The code language was revised to clarify that the provisions apply to roof loads for the design of the roof structure, not to the design of the photovoltaic panels or modules themselves. 8) 2015 International Residential Code (IRC) R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to doors Glazing installed perpendicular to a door in a closed position and within 24 inches of the door only requires safety glazing if it is on the hinge side of an in-swinging door. 9) 2015 IRC R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to bottom stair landing. This change will limit the requirement for glazing at the bottom of a landing by excluding windows greater than 180 degrees from the bottom face of the landing. 10) 2015 IRC R315 Carbon Monoxide Alarms The carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Section R315 have been reorganized to clarify their application. For example, the carbon monoxide detection system provisions have been placed in a separate Section R315.6 following all of the carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Sections R315.1 through R315.5. In addition, new charging sections have been added to clarify the scope and make the provisions easier to locate. Several technical changes have also occurred. The carbon monoxide alarm provisions have been rewritten to generally align with the smoke alarm provisions. For example, connection to the house wiring system with battery backup is now required for carbon monoxide alarms installed in new dwellings. 11) 2015 IRC Table R602.3(1) Fastening schedule for structural members. IRC Table R602.3(1), wood frame nailing schedule, is reformatted to give typical nailing options and to make the table consistent with 2015 IBC Table 2304.10.1. The change states the minimum size and number of fasteners for each connection. In most cases, the minimum number of box nails previously required is increased by one. 12) 2015 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 605.2.1 Lead content of drinking water pipe and fittings. Pipe, pipe fittings, joints, valves, faucets and fixture fittings utilized to supply water for drinking or cooking purposes shall comply with NSF 372 and shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent or less. 13) 2015 IPC 607.3 Thermal expansion The available method to control closed-system pressure increases caused by the heating of water has been limited to the use of thermal expansion tanks only. Item 5f Page 4 of 4 14) 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 307.6 Condensate pumps. Condensate pumps located in uninhabitable spaces, such as attics and crawl spaces, shall be connected to the appliance or equipment served such that when the pump fails, the appliance or equipment will be prevented from operating. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 15) 2015 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 310.1.1.1 Bonding Jumper length. The length of the bonding jumper between the connection length of the bonding jumper between the connection to a gas piping system and the connection to a grounding electrode system shall not exceed 75 feet. Any additional grounding electrodes used shall be bonded to the electrical service grounding electrode system or, where provided, the lightning protection grounding electrode system. 16) 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) 210.8 Ground-fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel (B) Other than dwelling units. All single-phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50 amps or less and three- phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or less installed in the following locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protections for personnel, (1) Bathrooms (2) Kitchens (3) Rooftops 17) 2017 NEC 210.11 Branch Circuits Required (C) Dwelling Units (4) Garage Branch Circuits In addition to the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20 ampere branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacles outlets in attached garages and in detached garages with electric power. This circuit shall have no other outlets. 18) 2017 NEC 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Protection (A) Dwelling Units AFCI Protection is now required for all 120 volts, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere branch circuits supplying not just outlets but also devices installed in Kitchen and Laundry areas. 19) 2017 NEC 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250 volts non-locking-type receptacles in the areas of Pre- school, elementary education, dental office, outpatient facilities, transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums and dormitories. Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 1 of 14 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, REPEALING ARTICLE 3.06, “ELECTRICITY,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW ARTICLE 3.06, “ELECTRICITY”; ADOPTING THE 2017 EDITION OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, SAVE AND EXCEPT THE DELETIONS AND AMENDMENTS SET FORTH HEREIN; REGULATING THE CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATION, REMOVAL, USE, AND MAINTENANCE OF ANY ELECTRICAL WIRING, APPARATUS, DEVICE, AND/OR SYSTEMS WITHIN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS, AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to repeal existing Article 3.06, “Electricity,” of the Code or Ordinances and replace it with a new Article 3.06, “Electricity”; and, WHEREAS, the Town Council also has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of the Prosper to adopt the 2017 Edition of the National Electrical Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Existing Article 3.06, “Electricity,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper, Texas, is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Article 3.06, “Electricity,” to read as follows: “ARTICLE 3.06 ELECTRICITY Sec. 3.06.001 Code Adopted; amendments The National Electrical Code, 2017 Edition, copyrighted by the National Fire Protection Association, including Annex H, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes, is hereby adopted as the Electrical Code for the Town, regulating the construction, alteration, removal, use, and/or maintenance of any electrical wiring, apparatus, device, or system within the Town (the “2017 National Electrical Code”). The 2017 National Electrical Code is made a part of this Article as if fully set forth herein. A copy of the National Electrical Code, 2017 Edition, copyrighted by the Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 of 14 National Fire Protection Association, is on file in the office of the Town Secretary of Prosper being marked and so designated as the 2017 National Electrical Code. Sec. 3.06.002 Penalty for violation Any person, firm, corporation, or business entity violating this Article shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state, and federal law.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause, or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason, held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town of Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause, or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one (1) or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective January 1, 2019, after its passage and publication as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11th DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 3 of 14 ____________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _____________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 4 of 14 Exhibit A TOWN OF PROSPER AMENDMENTS 2017 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE The following additions, deletions, and amendments to the 2017 National Electrical Code adopted herein are hereby approved and adopted. Article 100 Definitions of the 2017 National Electrical Code, definition of “ENGINEERING SUPERVISION” is added to read as follows: ENGINEERING SUPERVISION. Supervision by a qualified State of Texas licensed professional engineer engaged primarily in the design and/or maintenance of electrical installations. Article 110.2 Approval of the 2017 National Electrical Code is amended to read as follows: 110.2 Approval. The conductors and equipment required or permitted by this Code shall be acceptable only if approved. Approval of equipment may be evident by listing and labeling of equipment by a Nationally Recognized Testing Lab (NRTL) with a certification mark of that laboratory or a qualified third party inspection agency approved by the AHJ. Exception: Unlisted equipment that is relocated to another location within a jurisdiction or is field modified is subject to the approval by the AHJ. This approval may be by a field evaluation by a NRTL or a qualified third party inspection agency approved by the AHJ. Informational Note No. 1: See 90.7, Examination of Equipment for Safety, and 110.3, Examination, Identification, Installation, and Use of Equipment. See definitions of Approved, Identified, Labeled, and Listed. Informational Note No. 2: Manufacturer’s self-certification of equipment may not necessarily comply with U.S. product safety standards as certified by an NRTL. Informational Note No. 3: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 790 and 791 provide an example of an approved method for qualifying a third party inspection agency. Article 500.8 Equipment of the 2017 National Electrical Code is amended to read as follows: 500.8 Equipment. Articles 500 through 504 require equipment construction and installation that ensure safe performance under conditions of proper use and maintenance. Informational Note No. 1: It is important that inspection authorities and users exercise more than ordinary care with regard to installation and maintenance. Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 5 of 14 Informational Note No. 2: Since there is no consistent relationship between explosion properties and ignition temperature, the two are independent requirements. Informational Note No. 3: Low ambient conditions require special consideration. Explosion proof or dust-ignition proof equipment may not be suitable for use at temperatures lower than -25°C (-13°F) unless they are identified for low- temperature service. However, at low ambient temperatures, flammable concentrations of vapors may not exist in a location classified as Class I, Division 1 at normal ambient temperature. (A) Suitability. Suitability of identified equipment shall be determined by one (1) of the following: (1) Equipment listing or labeling; (2) Evidence of equipment evaluation from a qualified testing laboratory or inspection agency concerned with product evaluation; or, (3) Evidence acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction such as a manufacturer's self-evaluation or an engineering judgment signed and sealed by a qualified licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas. Informational Note: Additional documentation for equipment may include certificates demonstrating compliance with applicable equipment standards, indicating special conditions of use, and other pertinent information. Article 505.7 Special Precaution of the 2017 National Electrical Code is amended to read as follows: Article 505.7 Special Precaution. Article 505 requires… {no change to existing text}…normal ambient temperature. (A) Implementation of Zone Classification System. Classification of areas, engineering and design, selection of equipment and wiring methods, installation, and inspection shall be performed by a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas. Article 600.6 (A) (1) At Point of Entry to a Sign, Exceptions of the 2017 National Electrical Code is amended to read as follows: Exception No.1: A disconnect shall not be required for branch circuits(s) or feeder conductor(s) passing through the sign where enclosed in a Chapter 3 listed raceway or metal-jacketed cable identified for the location. The conductor(s) shall not serve the sign body or sign enclosure where passing through. Exception No. 2: A disconnect shall not be required at the point of entry to a sign body, sign enclosure, or pole for branch circuit conductor(s). The conductors shall be enclosed in a Chapter 3 listed raceway or metal-jacketed cable identified for the location. The conductor(s) shall be routed to a device box which contains the disconnect. A field-applied permanent warning label that is visible during servicing shall be applied to the raceway at or near the point of entry into the sign enclosure Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 6 of 14 or sign body. The warning label shall comply with Section 110.21(B) and state the following: “Danger. This raceway contains energized conductors.” The marking shall include the location of the disconnecting means for the energized conductor(s). The disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open position in accordance with Section 110.25. Exception No. 3: A disconnect shall not be required at the point of entry to a sign enclosure or sign body for branch circuit(s) or feeder conductor(s) that supply an internal panelboard(s) in a sign enclosure or sign body. The conductors shall be enclosed in a Chapter 3 listed raceway or metal-jacketed cable identified for the location. A field-applied permanent warning label that is visible during servicing shall be applied to the raceway at or near the point of entry into the sign enclosure or sign body. The warning label shall comply with Section 110.21(B) and state the following: “Danger. This raceway contains energized conductors.” The marking shall include the location of the disconnecting means for the energized conductor(s). The disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open position in accordance with Section 110.25. Informational Note: The location of the disconnect is intended to allow service or maintenance personnel complete and local control of the disconnecting means. Informative Annex H Administration and Enforcement of the 2017 National Electrical Code is amended to read as follows: SCOPE, APPLICATION AND ADMINISTRATION SECTION 101 GENERAL [AH] 101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the Electrical Code of the Town of Prosper hereinafter referred to as “this code.” [AH] 101.2 Scope. The provisions of this Code shall apply to the erection, installation, alteration, repairs, relocation, replacement, addition to, use, or maintenance of electrical systems within this jurisdiction. This Code shall also regulate the installation of electrical conductors, equipment, and raceways; signaling and communications conductors, equipment, and raceways; and optical fiber cables and raceways as identified in Article 90 of this Code. Provisions in the appendices shall not apply unless specifically adopted. Exception: Detached one- and two -family dwellings and multiple single-family dwellings (townhouses) not more than three (3) stories high with separate means of egress and their accessory structures shall comply with the currently adopted International Residential Code. [AH] 101.3 Intent. The purpose of this Code is to provide minimum standards to safeguard life or limb, health, property, and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, construction, installation, quality of materials, location, operation and maintenance, or use of electrical systems and equipment. [AH] 101.4 Severability. If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Code is for any reason held to be unconstitutional, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Code. SECTION 102 APPLICABILITY [AH] 102.1 General. Where there is a conflict between a general requirement and a specific requirement, the specific requirement shall govern. Where, in any specific case, different sections of this code specify different materials, methods of construction, or other requirements, the most restrictive shall govern. [AH] 102.2 Existing installations. Electrical systems lawfully in existence at the time of the adoption of this Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 7 of 14 Code shall be permitted to have their use and maintenance continued if the use, maintenance, or repair is in accordance with the original design and no hazard to life, health, or property is created by such electrical system. [AH] 102.3 Maintenance. All electrical systems, materials and appurtenances, both existing and new, and all parts thereof, shall be maintained in proper operating condition in accordance with the original design in a safe condition. All devices or safeguards required by this Code shall be maintained in compliance with the code edition under which they were installed. The owner or the owner’s designated agent shall be responsible for maintenance of electrical systems. To determine compliance with this provision, the Code Official shall have the authority to require any electrical system to be reinspected. [AH] 102.4 Additions, alterations or repairs. Additions, alterations, renovations, or repairs to any electrical system shall conform to that required for a new electrical system without requiring the existing electrical system to comply with all the requirements of this Code unless determined by the Code Official that it is necessary to change part of or all of the existing electrical system to safeguard life or limb, health, property, and public welfare. Additions, alterations, or repairs shall not cause an existing system to become unsafe, insanitary, or overloaded. Minor additions, alterations, renovations, and repairs to existing electrical systems shall meet the provisions for new construction, unless such work is done in the same manner and arrangement as was in the existing system, is not hazardous and is approved. [AH] 102.5 Change in occupancy. It shall be unlawful to make any change in the occupancy of any structure that will subject the structure to any special provision of this Code applicable to the new occupancy without approval of the Code Official. The Code Official shall certify that such structure meets the intent of the provisions of law governing building construction for the proposed new occupancy and that such change of occupancy does not result in any hazard to the public health, safety, or welfare. [AH] 102.6 Historic buildings. The provisions of this Code relating to the construction, alteration, repair, enlargement, restoration, relocation, or moving of buildings or structures shall not be mandatory for existing buildings or structures identified and classified by the state or local jurisdiction as historic buildings when such buildings or structures are judged by the Code Official to be safe and in the public interest of health, safety, and welfare regarding any proposed construction, alteration, repair, enlargement, restoration, relocation, or moving of buildings. [AH] 102.7 Moved buildings. Except as determined by Section 102.2, electrical systems that are a part of buildings or structures moved into or within the jurisdiction shall comply with the provisions of this Code for new installations. [AH] 102.8 Referenced codes and standards. The codes and standards referenced in this Code, when specifically adopted, shall be considered as part of the requirements of this Code to the prescribed extent of each such reference. Where the differences occur between provisions of this Code and the referenced standards, the provisions of this Code shall be the minimum requirements. Whenever amendments have been adopted to the referenced codes and standards, each reference to said code and standard shall be considered to reference the amendments as well. [AH] 102.8.1 Conflicts. Where conflicts occur between provisions of this Code and the referenced standards, the provisions of this code shall apply. [AH] 102.8.2 Provisions in referenced codes and standards. Where the extent of the reference to a referenced code or standard includes subject matter that is within the scope of this Code, the provisions of this Code, as applicable, shall take precedence over the provisions in the referenced code or standard. [AH] 102.9 Requirements not covered by code. Any requirements necessary for the strength, stability, or proper operation of an existing or proposed electrical system, or for the public safety, health, and general welfare, not specifically covered by this code shall be determined by the Code Official. [AH] 102.10 Other laws. The provisions of this Code shall not be deemed to nullify any provisions of local, state, or federal law. [AH] 102.11 Application of references. Reference to chapter section numbers, or to provisions not specifically identified by number, shall be construed to refer to such chapter, section, or provision of this Code. SECTION 103 DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL INSPECTION [AH] 103.1 General. The department of electrical inspection is hereby created and the executive official in charge thereof shall be known as the Code Official. Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 8 of 14 [AH] 103.2 Appointment. The Code Official shall be appointed by the chief appointing authority of the jurisdiction. [AH] 103.3 Deputies. In accordance with the prescribed procedures of this jurisdiction and with the concurrence of the appointing authority, the Code Official shall have the authority to appoint a Deputy Code Official, other related technical officers, inspectors, and other employees. Such employees shall have powers as delegated by the Code Official. [AH] 103.4 Liability. The Code Official, member of the Board of Appeals, or employee charged with the enforcement of this code, while acting for the jurisdiction in good faith and without malice in the discharge of the duties required by this code or other pertinent law or ordinance, shall not thereby be rendered liable personally, and is hereby relieved from all personal liability for any damage accruing to persons or property as a result of any act or by reason of an act or omission in the discharge of official duties. Any suit instituted against any officer or employee because of an act performed by that officer or employee in the lawful discharge of duties and under the provisions of this Code shall be defended by the legal representative of the jurisdiction until the final termination of the proceedings. The Code Official or any subordinate shall not be liable for costs in any action, suit, or proceeding that is instituted in pursuance of the provisions of this Code. SECTION 104 DUTIES AND POWERS OF THE CODE OFFICIAL [AH] 104.1 General. The Code Official is hereby authorized and directed to enforce the provisions of this Code. The Code Official shall have the authority to render interpretations of this Code and to adopt policies and procedures in order to clarify the application of its provisions. Such interpretations, policies, and procedures shall be in compliance with the intent and purpose of this Code. Such policies and procedures shall not have the effect of waiving requirements specifically provided for in this Code. [AH] 104.2 Applications and permits. The Code Official shall receive applications, review construction documents, and issue permits for the installation and alteration of electrical systems, inspect the premises for which such permits have been issued, and enforce compliance with the provisions of this Code. [AH] 104.3 Inspections. The Code Official shall make all the required inspections, or shall accept reports of inspection by approved agencies or individuals. All reports of such inspections shall be in writing and be certified by a responsible officer of such approved agency or by the responsible individual. The Code Official is authorized to engage such expert opinion as deemed necessary to report on unusual technical issues that arise, subject to the approval of the appointing authority. [AH] 104.4 Right of entry. Whenever it is necessary to make an inspection to enforce the provisions of this Code, or whenever the Code Official has reasonable cause to believe that there exists in any building or upon any premises any conditions or violations of this Code that make the building or premises unsafe, dangerous, or hazardous, the Code Official shall have the authority to enter the building or premises at all reasonable times to inspect or to perform the duties imposed upon the Code Official by this Code. If such building or premises is occupied, the Code Official shall present credentials to the occupant and request entry. If such building or premises is unoccupied, the Code Official shall first make a reasonable effort to locate the owner or other person having charge or control of the building or premises and request entry. If entry is refused, the Code Official shall have recourse to every remedy provided by law to secure entry. When the Code Official shall have first obtained a proper inspection warrant or other remedy provided by law to secure entry, no owner, occupant, or person having charge, care, or control of any building or premises shall fail or neglect, after proper request is made as herein provided, to promptly permit entry therein by the Code Official for the purpose of inspection and examination pursuant to this Code. [AH] 104.5 Identification. The Code Official shall carry proper identification when inspecting structures or premises in the performance of duties under this Code. [AH] 104.6 Notices and orders. The Code Official shall issue all necessary notices or orders to ensure compliance with this Code. [AH] 104.7 Department records. The Code Official shall keep official records of applications received, permits and certificates issued, fees collected, reports of inspections, and notices and orders issued. Such records shall be retained in the official records for the period required for the retention of public records. SECTION 105 APPROVAL Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 9 of 14 [AH] 105.1 Modifications. Whenever there are practical difficulties involved in carrying out the provisions of this Code, the Code Official shall have the authority to grant modifications for individual cases, upon application of the owner or owner’s representative, provided the Code Official shall first find that special individual reason makes the strict letter of this Code impractical, the modification conforms to the intent and purpose of this Code, and that such modification does not lessen health, life, and fire safety requirements. The details of action granting modifications shall be recorded and entered in the files of the electrical inspection department. [AH] 105.2 Alternative materials, methods and equipment. The provisions of this Code are not intended to prevent the installation of any material or to prohibit any method of construction not specifically prescribed by this Code, provided that any such alternative has been approved. An alternative material or method of construction shall be approved when the Code Official finds that the proposed alternative material, method, or equipment complies with the intent of the provisions of this Code and is at least the equivalent of that prescribed in this Code. [AH] 105.2.1 Research reports. Supporting data, where necessary to assist in the approval of materials or assemblies not specifically provided for in this Code, shall consist of valid research reports from approved sources. [AH] 105.3 Required testing. Whenever there is insufficient evidence of compliance with the provisions of this Code, evidence that a material or method does not conform to the requirements of this Code, or in order to substantiate claims for alternate materials or methods, the Code Official shall have the authority to require tests as evidence of compliance to be made at no expense to the jurisdiction. [AH] 105.3.1 Test methods. Test methods shall be as specified in this Code or by other recognized test standards. In the absence of recognized and accepted test methods, the Code Official shall approve the testing procedures. [AH] 105.3.2 Testing agency. All tests shall be performed by an approved agency. [AH] 105.3.3 Test reports. Reports of tests shall be retained by the Code Official for the period required for retention of public records. [AH] 105.4 Approved materials and equipment. Materials, equipment, and devices approved by the Code Official shall be constructed and installed in accordance with such approval. [AH] 105.4.1 Material and equipment reuse. Materials, equipment, and devices shall not be reused unless such elements have been reconditioned, tested, placed in good and proper working condition, and approved. SECTION 106 PERMITS [AH] 106.1 When required. Any owner, authorized agent, or contractor who desires to construct, enlarge, alter, repair, move, demolish, or change the occupancy of a building or structure, or to erect, install, enlarge, alter, repair, remove, convert, or replace any electrical system, the installation of which is regulated by this Code, or to cause any such work to be done, shall first make application to the Code Official and obtain the required permit for the work. [AH] 106.2 Exempt work. The following work shall be exempt from the requirement for a permit: 1. The work identified in Article 90.2(B) as not being covered by this Code. [AH] 106.3 Application for permit. Each application for a permit, with the required fee, shall be filed with the Code Official on a form furnished for that purpose and shall contain a general description of the proposed work and its location. The application shall be signed by the owner or an authorized agent. The permit application shall indicate the proposed occupancy of all parts of the building and of that portion of the site or lot, if any, not covered by the building or structure and shall contain such other information required by the Code Official. [AH] 106.3.1 Construction documents. Construction documents, engineering calculations, diagrams and other such data shall be submitted, as required by the Code Official, with each application for a permit. The Code Official shall require construction documents, computations, and specifications to be prepared and designed by a registered design professional, when required by state law. Construction documents shall be drawn to scale and shall be of sufficient clarity to indicate the location, nature, and extent of the work proposed and show in detail that the work conforms to the provisions of this Code. Construction documents for buildings more than two (2) stories in height shall indicate where penetrations will be made for pipes, Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 10 of 14 conduits, wiring, equipment, fittings, and components and shall indicate the materials and methods for maintaining required structural safety, fire-resistance rating, and fireblocking. Exception: The Code Official shall have the authority to waive the submission of construction documents, calculations, or other data if the nature of the work applied for is such that reviewing of construction documents is not necessary to determine compliance with this Code. [AH] 106.3.2 Preliminary inspection. Before a permit is issued, the Code Official is authorized to inspect and evaluate the systems, equipment, buildings, devices, premises, and spaces, or areas to be used. [AH] 106.3.3 Time limitation of application. An application for a permit for any proposed work shall be deemed to have been abandoned ninety (90) days after the date of filing, unless such application has been pursued in good faith or a permit has been issued; except that the Code Official shall have the authority to grant one (1) or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding ninety (90) days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. [AH] 106.4 By whom application is made. Application for a permit shall be made by the person or agent to install all or part of any electrical system. The applicant shall meet all qualifications established by statute, by rules promulgated by this Code, by Ordinance, or by Resolution. The full name and address of the applicant shall be stated in the application. [AH] 106.5 Permit issuance. The application, construction documents, and other data filed by an applicant for permit shall be reviewed by the Code Official. If the Code Official finds that the proposed work conforms to the requirements of this Code and all laws and ordinances applicable thereto, and that the fees specified in Section 106.6 have been paid, a permit shall be issued to the applicant. [AH] 106.5.1 Approved construction documents. When the Code Official issues the permit where construction documents are required, the construction documents shall be endorsed in writing and stamped “APPROVED.” Such approved construction documents shall not be changed, modified, or altered without authorization from the Code Official. All work shall be done in accordance with the approved construction documents. The Code Official shall have the authority to issue a permit for the construction of a part of an electrical system before the entire construction documents for the whole system have been submitted or approved, provided adequate information and detailed statements have been filed complying with all pertinent requirements of this Code. The holders of such permit shall proceed at their own risk without assurance that the permit for the entire electrical system will be granted. [AH] 106.5.2 Validity. The issuance of a permit or approval of construction documents shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of this Code or any other ordinance of the jurisdiction. No permit presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this Code shall be valid. The issuance of a permit based upon construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Code Official from thereafter requiring the correction of errors in said construction documents and other data or from preventing building operations being carried on thereunder when in violation of this Code or of other ordinances of this jurisdiction. [AH] 106.5.3 Expiration. Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after the issuance, or if the work authorized by such permit is suspended, abandoned, or lacks any required inspection for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Code Official is authorized to grant, in writing, one (1) or more extensions of time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. [AH] 106.5.4 Extensions. Any permittee holding an unexpired permit shall have the right to apply for an extension of the time within which the permittee will commence work under said permit when work is unable to be commenced within the time required by this Section for good and satisfactory reasons. The Code Official shall extend the time for action by the permittee for a period not exceeding 180 days if there is reasonable cause. No permit shall be extended more than once. The fee for an extension shall be one-half (1/2) the amount required for a new permit for such work. [AH] 106.5.5 Suspension or revocation of permit. The Code Official shall have the authority to suspend or revoke a permit issued under the provisions of this Code wherever the permit is issued in error or on the basis of incorrect, inaccurate, or incomplete Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 11 of 14 information, or in violation of any ordinance, regulation or any of the provisions of this Code. [AH] 106.5.6 Retention of construction documents. One (1) set of approved construction documents shall be retained by the Code Official for a period of not less than 180 days from date of completion of the permitted work, or as required by state or local laws. One (1) set of approved construction documents shall be returned to the applicant, and said set shall be kept on the site of the building or work at all times during which the work authorized thereby is in progress. [AH] 106.5.7 Previous approvals. This Code shall not require changes in the construction documents, construction, or designated occupancy of a structure for which a lawful permit has been heretofore issued or otherwise lawfully authorized, and the construction of which has been pursued in good faith within 180 days after the effective date of this Code and has not been abandoned. [AH] 106.5.8 Posting of permit. The permit or a copy shall be kept on the site of the work until the completion of the project. [AH] 106.6 Fees. A permit shall not be issued until the fees prescribed in Section 106.6.2 have been paid, and an amendment to a permit shall not be released until the additional fee, if any, due to an increase of the electrical systems, has been paid. [AH] 106.6.1 Work commencing before permit issuance. Any person who commences any work on an electrical system prior to obtaining the necessary permits shall be subject to 100% of the usual permit fee in addition to the required permit fees. [AH] 106.6.2 Fee schedule. The fees for all electrical work shall be as indicated in the Town of Prosper Fee Schedule as adopted by the City Council. [AH] 106.6.3 Fee refunds. The Code Official shall authorize the refunding of fees as follows: 1. The full amount of any fee paid hereunder that was erroneously paid or collected. 2. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance with this Code. 3. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a plan review fee has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan review effort has been expended. The Code Official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date of fee payment. SECTION 107 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING [AH] 107.1 General. The Code Official is authorized to conduct such inspections as are deemed necessary to determine compliance with the provisions of this Code. Construction or work for which a permit is required shall be subject to inspection by the Code Official, and such construction or work shall remain accessible and exposed for inspection purposes until approved. Approval as a result of an inspection shall not be construed to be an approval of a violation of the provisions of this Code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction. Inspections presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this Code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction shall not be valid. It shall be the duty of the permit applicant to cause the work to remain accessible and exposed for inspection purposes. Neither the Code Official nor the jurisdiction shall be liable for expenses entailed in the removal or replacement of any material required to allow inspection. [AH] 107.2 Required inspections and testing. The Code Official, upon notification from the permit holder or the permit holder’s agent, shall make the following inspections, such other inspections as necessary, and shall either release that portion of the construction or shall notify the permit holder or an agent of any violations that shall be corrected. The holder of the permit shall be responsible for the scheduling of such inspections. 1. Underground inspection shall be made after trenches or ditches are excavated and bedded, piping and conduit installed, and before any backfill is put in place. 2. Rough-in inspection shall be made after the roof, framing, fireblocking, firestopping, draftstopping, and bracing is in place, all electrical systems are roughed-in, and prior to the installation of wall or ceiling membranes. 3. Final inspection shall be made after the building is complete, all electrical fixtures are in place and properly connected, and the structure is ready for occupancy. Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 12 of 14 [AH] 107.2.1 Other inspections. In addition to the inspections specified above, the Code Official is authorized to make or require other inspections of any construction work to ascertain compliance with the provisions of this Code and other laws that are enforced. [AH] 107.2.2 Inspection requests. It shall be the duty of the holder of the permit or their duly authorized agent to notify the Code Official when work is ready for inspection. It shall be the duty of the permit holder to provide access to and means for inspections of such work that are required by this Code. [AH] 107.2.3 Approval required. Work shall not be done beyond the point indicated in each successive inspection without first obtaining the approval of the Code Official. The Code Official, upon notification, shall make the requested inspections and shall either indicate the portion of the construction that is satisfactory as completed, or notify the permit holder or his or her agent wherein the same fails to comply with this Code. Any portions that do not comply shall be corrected and such portion shall not be covered or concealed until authorized by the Code Official. [AH] 107.2.4 Approved agencies. The Code Official is authorized to accept reports of approved inspection agencies, provided that such agencies satisfy the requirements as to qualifications and reliability. [AH] 107.2.5 Evaluation and follow-up inspection services. Prior to the approval of a closed, prefabricated electrical system and the issuance of an electrical permit, the Code Official may require the submittal of an evaluation report on each prefabricated electrical system indicating the complete details of the electrical system, including a description of the system and its components, the basis upon which the electrical system is being evaluated, test results and similar information, and other data as necessary for the Code Official to determine conformance to this Code. [AH] 107.2.5.1 Evaluation service. The Code Official shall designate the evaluation service of an approved agency as the evaluation agency, and review such agency’s evaluation report for adequacy and conformance to this Code. [AH] 107.2.5.2 Follow-up inspection. Except where ready access is provided to all electrical systems, service equipment, and accessories for complete inspection at the site without disassembly or dismantling, the Code Official shall conduct the frequency of in-plant inspections necessary to ensure conformance to the approved evaluation report or shall designate an independent, approved inspection agency to conduct such inspections. The inspection agency shall furnish the Code Official with the follow-up inspection manual and a report of inspections upon request, and the electrical system shall have an identifying label permanently affixed to the system indicating that factory inspections have been performed. [AH] 107.2.5.3 Test and inspection records. All required test and inspection records shall be available to the Code Official at all times during the fabrication of the electrical system and the erection of the building, or such records as the Code Official designates shall be filed. [AH] 107.3 Special inspections. Special inspections of alternative engineered design electrical systems shall be conducted in accordance with Sections 107.3.1 and 107.3.2. [AH] 107.3.1 Periodic inspection. The registered design professional or designated inspector shall periodically inspect and observe the alternative engineered design to determine that the installation is in accordance with the approved construction documents. All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the electrical contractor for correction. Records shall be kept of all inspections. [AH] 107.3.2 Written report. The registered design professional shall submit a final report in writing to the Code Official upon completion of the installation, certifying that the alternative engineered design conforms to the approved construction documents. A notice of approval for the electrical system shall not be issued until a written certification has been submitted. [AH] 107.4 Testing. Electrical work and systems shall be tested as required by this Code and in accordance with Sections 107.4.1 through 107.4.3. Tests shall be made by the permit holder and observed by the Code Official. [AH] 107.4.1 New, altered, extended or repaired systems. New electrical systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired shall be inspected and tested as required by the Code Official. [AH] 107.4.2 Equipment, material and labor for tests. All equipment, material, and labor required for testing an electrical system or part thereof shall be furnished by the permit holder. Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 13 of 14 [AH] 107.4.3 Reinspection and testing. Where any work or installation does not pass any initial test or inspection, the necessary corrections shall be made to comply with this Code. The work or installation shall then be resubmitted to the Code Official for inspection and testing. [AH] 107.5 Approval. After the prescribed tests and inspections indicate that the work complies in all respects with this Code, a notice of approval shall be issued by the Code Official. [AH] 107.5.1 Revocation. The Code Official is authorized to, in writing, suspend or revoke a notice of approval issued under the provisions of this Code wherever the notice is issued in error, on the basis of incorrect information supplied, or where it is determined that the building or structure, premise or portion thereof is in violation of any ordinance or regulation or any of the provisions of this Code. [AH] 107.6 Temporary connection. The Code Official shall have the authority to authorize the temporary connection of the building or system to the utility source for the purpose of testing electrical systems or for use under a temporary certificate of occupancy. [AH] 107.7 Connection of service utilities. A person shall not make connections from a utility, source of energy, or power system to any building or system that is regulated by this Code for which a permit is required until authorized by the Code Official. SECTION 108 VIOLATIONS [AH] 108.1 Unlawful acts. It shall be unlawful for any person, firm, or corporation to erect, construct, alter, repair, remove, demolish, or utilize any electrical system, or cause same to be done, in conflict with or in violation of any of the provisions of this Code. [AH] 108.2 Notice of violation. The Code Official shall serve a notice of violation or order to the person responsible for the erection, installation, alteration, extension, repair, removal, or demolition of electrical work in violation of the provisions of this Code, in violation of a detail statement or the approved construction documents thereunder, or in violation of a permit or certificate issued under the provisions of this Code. Such order shall direct the discontinuance of the illegal action or condition and the abatement of the violation. [AH] 108.3 Prosecution of violation. If the notice of violation is not complied with promptly, the Code Official shall request the legal counsel of the jurisdiction to institute the appropriate proceeding at law or in equity to restrain, correct, or abate such violation, or to require the removal or termination of the unlawful occupancy of the structure in violation of the provisions of this Code or of the order or direction made pursuant thereto. [AH] 108.4 Violation penalties. Any person who shall violate a provision of this Code or shall fail to comply with any of the requirements thereof or who shall erect, install, alter, or repair electrical work in violation of the approved construction documents, directive of the Code Official, or of a permit or certificate issued under the provisions of this Code, shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and upon conviction may be fined up to the maximum amount allowed by Texas law. Each day that a violation continues after due notice has been served shall be deemed a separate offense. [AH] 108.5 Stop work orders. Upon notice from the Code Official, work on any electrical system that is being done contrary to the provisions of this Code or in a dangerous or unsafe manner shall immediately cease. Such notice shall be in writing and shall be given to the owner of the property, the owner’s agent, or to the person doing the work. The notice shall state the conditions under which work is authorized to resume. Where an emergency exists, the Code Official shall not be required to give a written notice prior to stopping the work. Any person who shall continue any work in or about the structure after having been served with a stop work order, except such work as that person is directed to perform to remove a violation or unsafe condition, shall be liable to a fine as required herein by this Code. [AH] 108.6 Abatement of violation. The imposition of the penalties herein prescribed shall not preclude the legal officer of the jurisdiction from instituting appropriate action to prevent unlawful construction or to restrain, correct, or abate a violation, to prevent illegal occupancy of a building, structure, or premises, or to stop an illegal act, conduct, business, or utilization of the electrical system on or about any premises. [AH] 108.7 Unsafe Electrical Systems. Any electrical systems regulated by this Code that is unsafe, that constitutes a fire or health hazard, or is otherwise dangerous to human life is hereby declared unsafe. Any use of electrical systems regulated by this Code constituting a hazard to safety, health, or public Item 5f Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 14 of 14 welfare by reason of inadequate maintenance, dilapidation, obsolescence, fire hazard, disaster, damage, or abandonment is hereby declared an unsafe use. Any such unsafe electrical system is hereby declared to be a public nuisance and shall be abated by repair, rehabilitation, demolition, or removal. [AH] 108.7.1 Authority to condemn equipment. Whenever the Code Official determines that any electrical system, or portion thereof, regulated by this Code has become hazardous to life, health, or property the Code Official shall order in writing that such electrical system either be removed or restored to a safe condition. A time limit for compliance with such order shall be specified in the written notice. No person shall use or maintain a defective electrical system after receiving such notice. When such electrical system is to be disconnected, written notice as prescribed in Section 108.2 shall be given. In cases of immediate danger to life or property, such disconnection shall be made immediately without such notice. [AH] 108.7.2 Authority to disconnect service utilities. The Code Official shall have the authority to authorize disconnection of utility service to the building, structure, or system regulated by the technical codes in case of an emergency, where necessary, to eliminate an immediate danger to life or property. Where possible, the owner and occupant of the building, structure, or service system shall be notified of the decision to disconnect utility service prior to taking such action. If not notified prior to disconnecting, the owner or occupant of the building, structure, or service systems shall be notified in writing, as soon as practical thereafter. [AH] 108.7.3 Connection after order to disconnect. No person shall make connections from any energy or power supply system or supply energy or power supply to any equipment regulated by this Code that has been disconnected, ordered to be disconnected by the Code Official, or the use of which has been ordered to be discontinued by the Code Official until the Code Official authorizes the reconnection and use of such equipment. When any electrical system is maintained in violation of this Code, and in violation of any notice issued pursuant to the provisions of this Section, the Code Official shall institute any appropriate action to prevent, restrain, correct, or abate the violation. SECTION 109 MEANS OF APPEAL [AH] 109.1 Application for appeal. Any person shall have the right to appeal a decision of the Code Official to the Board of Appeals as established by ordinance. The board shall be governed by the Town of Prosper’s enabling ordinance. End of Exhibit “A” Item 5f Page 1 of 4 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.07, “Plumbing,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.07, “Plumbing”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Plumbing Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the erection, installation, alteration, repairs, relocation, replacement, addition to, use or maintenance of plumbing systems within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to adopt the later versions of the International Building Codes. On November 27, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the 2015 and 2017 series of codes and list of major changes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.List of Major Changes to all Series of Codes 2. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance repealing Article 3.07, “Plumbing,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.07, “Plumbing”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Plumbing Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the erection, installation, alteration, repairs, relocation, replacement, addition to, use or maintenance of plumbing systems within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5g Page 2 of 4 Town of Prosper List of Specific Chapters and Sections of the Applicable Codes Regarding Significant Changes. 1) 2015 International Build Code (IBC) 101.4.7 Existing Buildings, Previous 2012 IBC Chapter 34. The requirements (Chapter 34) for existing structures have been removed from the 2015 IBC. All existing construction requirements are now in the 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC). 2) 2015 IBC 423 Storm Shelters, Critical Emergency Operations and group E occupancies. This section applies to the construction of storm shelters constructed as separate detached buildings or constructed as safe rooms within buildings for the purpose of providing safe refuge from storms that produce high winds, such as tornados and hurricanes. Such structures shall be designated to be hurricane shelters, tornado shelters, or combined hurricane and tornado shelters. 3) 2015 IBC 406 “Private Garage,” 406.3.1 “Classification,” 406.3.2 “Clear Height” Private garages are no longer limited to a maximum of 3,000 sq. ft. in a building. Multiple private garages, each a maximum of 1,000 sq. ft., each separated by one-hour fire barriers or horizontal assemblies are now permitted based on their U-occupancy classification. Also, a minimum of 7’ clear height will be required in private garages. 4) 2015 IBC 705.3 Exception #2 “Buildings on the Same Lot Permits a parking garage of Construction Type I or IIA to abut a Group R-2 building with 1½- hour- protected openings (fire doors) in the abutting exterior wall of the garage and no required opening protective(s) in the abutting wall of a sprinklered R-2 building. Previous editions of the Code did not permit any openings in these abutting exterior walls that are at a “0” fire separation distance apart and required a fire wall design between such buildings to be permitted to have openings between the abutting buildings. 5) 2015 IBC 705.6 Exterior Wall- Structural Stability Exterior fire-rated walls that are braced by floor or roof assemblies that have a lesser fire resistance rating are now permitted. Previous editions of the IBC Code required Construction Type III buildings with two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to have floors that support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to be upgraded to the two-hour fire rating. This is a major cost since apartment buildings built of Construction Type III under the legacy codes only required one-hour floor and roof assemblies to support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls. 6) 2015 IBC 717.1.1 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings Ducts will be allowed to leave a fire-rated shaft enclosure, transition horizontally, and then enter another fire-rated shaft if the duct penetrations on each side of the shafts are protected with fire dampers. Note that this is not permitted for clothes dryer exhaust ducts or any other ducts that the I-Codes require to be continuous and uninterrupted. Item 5g Page 3 of 4 7) 2015 IBC 1603.1.8 Special Loads With the increasing use of photovoltaic (solar) panels on rooftops, it has become clear that there is a need for specific code requirements related to these panels. Such panels are considered fixed equipment and as such would fall under the definition of dead load. Rooftop PV panels are considered special loads and their dead load should be indicated on the construction documents. The code language was revised to clarify that the provisions apply to roof loads for the design of the roof structure, not to the design of the photovoltaic panels or modules themselves. 8) 2015 International Residential Code (IRC) R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to doors Glazing installed perpendicular to a door in a closed position and within 24 inches of the door only requires safety glazing if it is on the hinge side of an in-swinging door. 9) 2015 IRC R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to bottom stair landing. This change will limit the requirement for glazing at the bottom of a landing by excluding windows greater than 180 degrees from the bottom face of the landing. 10) 2015 IRC R315 Carbon Monoxide Alarms The carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Section R315 have been reorganized to clarify their application. For example, the carbon monoxide detection system provisions have been placed in a separate Section R315.6 following all of the carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Sections R315.1 through R315.5. In addition, new charging sections have been added to clarify the scope and make the provisions easier to locate. Several technical changes have also occurred. The carbon monoxide alarm provisions have been rewritten to generally align with the smoke alarm provisions. For example, connection to the house wiring system with battery backup is now required for carbon monoxide alarms installed in new dwellings. 11) 2015 IRC Table R602.3(1) Fastening schedule for structural members. IRC Table R602.3(1), wood frame nailing schedule, is reformatted to give typical nailing options and to make the table consistent with 2015 IBC Table 2304.10.1. The change states the minimum size and number of fasteners for each connection. In most cases, the minimum number of box nails previously required is increased by one. 12) 2015 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 605.2.1 Lead content of drinking water pipe and fittings. Pipe, pipe fittings, joints, valves, faucets and fixture fittings utilized to supply water for drinking or cooking purposes shall comply with NSF 372 and shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent or less. 13) 2015 IPC 607.3 Thermal expansion The available method to control closed-system pressure increases caused by the heating of water has been limited to the use of thermal expansion tanks only. Item 5g Page 4 of 4 14) 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 307.6 Condensate pumps. Condensate pumps located in uninhabitable spaces, such as attics and crawl spaces, shall be connected to the appliance or equipment served such that when the pump fails, the appliance or equipment will be prevented from operating. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 15) 2015 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 310.1.1.1 Bonding Jumper length. The length of the bonding jumper between the connection length of the bonding jumper between the connection to a gas piping system and the connection to a grounding electrode system shall not exceed 75 feet. Any additional grounding electrodes used shall be bonded to the electrical service grounding electrode system or, where provided, the lightning protection grounding electrode system. 16) 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) 210.8 Ground-fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel (B) Other than dwelling units. All single-phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50 amps or less and three- phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or less installed in the following locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protections for personnel, (1) Bathrooms (2) Kitchens (3) Rooftops 17) 2017 NEC 210.11 Branch Circuits Required (C) Dwelling Units (4) Garage Branch Circuits In addition to the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20 ampere branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacles outlets in attached garages and in detached garages with electric power. This circuit shall have no other outlets. 18) 2017 NEC 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Protection (A) Dwelling Units AFCI Protection is now required for all 120 volts, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere branch circuits supplying not just outlets but also devices installed in Kitchen and Laundry areas. 19) 2017 NEC 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250 volts non-locking-type receptacles in the areas of Pre- school, elementary education, dental office, outpatient facilities, transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums and dormitories. Item 5g Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 1 of 7 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, REPEALING ARTICLE 3.07, “PLUMBING,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW ARTICLE 3.07, “PLUMBING”; ADOPTING THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE, SAVE AND EXCEPT THE DELETIONS AND AMENDMENTS SET FORTH HEREIN; REGULATING THE ERECTION, INSTALLATION, ALTERATION, REPAIRS, RELOCATION, REPLACEMENT, ADDITION TO, USE OR MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS WITHIN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS, AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to repeal existing Article 3.07, “Plumbing,” of the Code or Ordinances and replace it with a new Article 3.07, “Plumbing”; and, WHEREAS, the Town Council also has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of the Prosper to adopt the 2015 Edition of the International Plumbing Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Existing Article 3.07, “Plumbing,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper, Texas, is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Article 3.07, “Plumbing,” to read as follows: “ARTICLE 3.07 PLUMBING Sec. 3.07.001 Code Adopted; amendments The International Plumbing Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., save and except the deletions and amendments set forth in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes, is hereby adopted as the Plumbing Code for the Town, regulating the erection, installation, alteration, repairs, relocation, replacement, addition to, use or maintenance of plumbing systems within the Town (the “2015 International Plumbing Code”). The 2015 International Plumbing Code is made a part of this article as if fully set forth herein. A copy of the International Plumbing Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Item 5g Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 of 7 Inc., is on file in the office of the Town Secretary of Prosper being marked and so designated as the 2015 International Plumbing Code. Sec. 3.07.002 Penalty for violation Any person, firm, corporation, or business entity violating this Article shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state and federal law.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason, held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town of Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one (1) or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective January 1, 2019, after its passage and publication as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor Item 5g Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 3 of 7 ATTEST: ____________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _____________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5g Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 4 of 7 Exhibit A TOWN OF PROSPER AMENDMENTS 2015 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE The following additions, deletions, and amendments to the 2015 International Plumbing Code adopted herein are hereby approved and adopted. Section [A] 101.1 Title of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the Plumbing Code of the Town of Prosper hereinafter referred to as “this code.” Section [A] 102.8 Referenced codes and standards of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 102.8 Referenced codes and standards. The codes and standards referenced in this Code shall be those that are listed in Chapter 14 and such codes, when specifically adopted, and standards shall be considered as part of the requirements of this Code to the prescribed extent of each such reference. Where the differences occur between provisions of this Code and the referenced standards, the provisions of this Code shall be the minimum requirements. Whenever amendments have been adopted to the referenced codes and standards, each reference to said code and standard shall be considered to reference the amendments as well. Any reference to NFPA 70 or the ICC Electrical Code shall mean the Electrical Code as adopted. Exception: Where enforcement of a code provision would violate the conditions of the listing of the equipment or appliance, the conditions of the listing and the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall apply. Section [A] 106.3.3 Time limitation of application of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.3.3 Time limitation of application. An application for a permit for any proposed work shall be deemed to have been abandoned ninety (90) days after the date of filing, unless such application has been pursued in good faith or a permit has been issued; except that the Code Official shall have the authority to grant one (1) or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding ninety (90) days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable caused demonstrated. Section [A] 106.5.3 Expiration of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.5.3 Expiration. Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after the issuance, or if the work authorized by such permit is suspended, abandoned, or lacks any required inspection for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. Item 5g Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 5 of 7 The Code Official is authorized to grant, in writing, one (1) or more extensions of time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section [A] 106.6.2 Fee Schedule of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.6.2 Fee Schedule. The fee schedule for all plumbing work shall be as indicated in the Town of Prosper Fee Schedule as adopted by the Town Council. Section [A] 106.6.3 Fee refunds of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.6.3 Fee refunds. The Code Official shall authorize the refunding of fees as follows: 1. The full amount of any fee paid hereunder that was erroneously paid or collected. 2. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance with this Code. 3. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a plan review fee has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan review effort has been expended. The Code Official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date of fee payment. Section [A] 108.4 Violation penalties of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 108.4 Violation penalties. Any person who shall violate a provision of this Code, shall fail to comply with any of the requirements thereof, or who shall erect, install, alter or repair plumbing work in violation of the approved construction documents or directive of the Code Official, or of a permit or certificate issued under the provisions of this Code, shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and upon conviction may be fined up to the maximum amount allowed by Texas law. Each day that a violation continues after due notice has been served shall be deemed a separate offense. Section [A] 108.5 Stop work orders of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 108.5 Stop work orders. Upon notice from the Code Official, work on any plumbing system that is being done contrary to the provisions of this Code or in a dangerous or unsafe manner shall immediately cease. Such notice shall be in writing and shall be given to the owner of the property, the owner’s agent, or to the person doing the work. The notice shall state the conditions under which work is authorized to resume. Where an emergency exits, the Code Official shall not be required to give notice prior to stopping the work. Any person who shall continue Item 5g Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 6 of 7 any work in or about the structure after having been served with a stop work order, except such work as that person is directed to perform to remove a violation or unsafe condition, shall be liable to a fine as required herein by this Code. Section [A] 109.1 Application for appeal of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 109.1 Application for appeal. Any person shall have the right to appeal a decision of the Code Official to the Board of Appeals, as established by ordinance. The Board shall be governed by the Town of Prosper’s enabling ordinance. Section 202 GENERAL DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Plumbing Code, definition of “SERVICE SINK”” is added to read as follows: SERVICE SINK: A type of sink suitable for janitorial and building maintenance purposes. Service sinks include mop sinks/basins, utility tubs/ sinks, and janitor sinks. Section 305.4.1 Sewer depth of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: 305.4.1 Sewer depth. Building sewers that connect to private sewage disposal systems shall be installed not less than twelve inches (12”) (305 mm) below finished grade at the point of septic tank connection. Building sewers shall be installed not less than twelve inches (12”) (305 mm) below grade. Section 312.10.1 Inspections of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: 312.10.1 Inspections. Inspections, as required by the Town of Prosper, shall be made of all backflow prevention assemblies and air gaps to determine whether they are operable. In absence of local provisions, the owner is responsible to ensure that testing is performed. Section 312.10.2 Testing of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: 312.10.2 Testing. Reduced pressure principle, double check-valve, pressure vacuum breaker, reduced pressure detector fire protection, double check detector fire protection, and spill resistant vacuum breaker backflow preventer assemblies and hose connection backflow preventers shall be tested at the time of installation, immediately after repairs or relocation as required by the Town of Prosper. The testing procedure shall be performed in accordance with one (1) of the following standards: ASSE 5013, ASSE 5015, ASSE 5020, ASSE 5047, ASSE 5048, ASSE 5052, ASSE 5056, CSA B64.10, or CSA B64.10.1. Section 314.2.1 Condensate disposal of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: 314.2.1 Condensate disposal. Condensate from all cooling coils and evaporators shall be conveyed from the drain pan outlet to the sanitary sewer Item 5g Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 7 of 7 unless prior approval is granted from the Building Official... {bulk of Section unchanged} ... Condensate shall not discharge into a street, alley, sidewalk, rooftop, or other area so as to cause a nuisance. Section 502.3 Water heaters installed in attics of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: 502.3 Water heaters installed in attics. Attics containing water heaters shall be provided with an opening and unobstructed passageway large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance. The passageway shall not be less than thirty inches (30”) (762 mm) high and twenty-two inches (22”) (559 mm) wide and not more than twenty (20) feet (6096 mm) in length measured along the center line of the passageway from the opening to the water heater. The passageway shall have continuous unobstructed solid flooring not less than twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) wide. A level service space not less than thirty inches (30”) (762 mm) deep and thirty inches (30”) (762 mm) wide shall be present at the front or service side of the water heater. The clear access opening dimensions shall be a minimum of twenty inches (20”) by thirty inches (30”) (508 mm by 762 mm) or larger, and large enough to allow removal of the largest water heater. As a minimum, access to the attic space shall be provided by one (1) of the following: 1. Permanent stairs or ladder fastened to the building; 2. A pull down stair with a 300 lb. rating; or 3. An access door from an upper floor. Section 504.6 Requirements for discharge piping, Item 10. of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: 10. Not terminate less than six inches (6”) (152 mm) or more than twenty-four inches (24”) (610 mm) above grade nor more than six inches (6”) (152 mm) above the waste receptor. Section 903.1 Roof extension of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended to read as follows: 903.1 Roof extension. Open vent pipes that extend through a roof shall be terminated not less than six inches (6”) (152 mm) above the roof, except that where a roof is to be used for any purpose other than weather protection, the vent extensions shall terminate not less than seven feet (7’) (2,134 mm) above the roof. Section 1003.3 Grease interceptors of the 2015 International Plumbing Code is amended by adding Section 1003.3.8 Location of grease interceptors to read as follows: 1003.3.8; Location of grease interceptors. Grease interceptors covered under Section 1003.3 shall not be located inside buildings without written permission from the Town’s Health Division. All grease interceptors installed on the exterior of a building shall be located in ground. Grease interceptors shall not be located in heavy or vehicular traffic areas without written permission from the Code Official. End of Exhibit “A” Item 5g Page 1 of 4 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Energy Conservation Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design of building envelopes for adequate thermal resistance and low air leakage and the design and selection of mechanical, electrical, service water-heating, and illumination systems and equipment which will enable effective use of energy in new building construction within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to adopt the later versions of the International Building Codes. On November 27, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the 2015 and 2017 series of codes and list of major changes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.List of Major Changes to all Series of Codes 2. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance repealing Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Energy Conservation Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design of building envelopes for adequate thermal resistance and low air leakage and the design and selection of mechanical, electrical, service water-heating, and illumination systems and equipment which will enable effective use of energy in new building construction within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5h Page 2 of 4 Town of Prosper List of Specific Chapters and Sections of the Applicable Codes Regarding Significant Changes. 1) 2015 International Build Code (IBC) 101.4.7 Existing Buildings, Previous 2012 IBC Chapter 34. The requirements (Chapter 34) for existing structures have been removed from the 2015 IBC. All existing construction requirements are now in the 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC). 2) 2015 IBC 423 Storm Shelters, Critical Emergency Operations and group E occupancies. This section applies to the construction of storm shelters constructed as separate detached buildings or constructed as safe rooms within buildings for the purpose of providing safe refuge from storms that produce high winds, such as tornados and hurricanes. Such structures shall be designated to be hurricane shelters, tornado shelters, or combined hurricane and tornado shelters. 3) 2015 IBC 406 “Private Garage,” 406.3.1 “Classification,” 406.3.2 “Clear Height” Private garages are no longer limited to a maximum of 3,000 sq. ft. in a building. Multiple private garages, each a maximum of 1,000 sq. ft., each separated by one-hour fire barriers or horizontal assemblies are now permitted based on their U-occupancy classification. Also, a minimum of 7’ clear height will be required in private garages. 4) 2015 IBC 705.3 Exception #2 “Buildings on the Same Lot Permits a parking garage of Construction Type I or IIA to abut a Group R-2 building with 1½- hour- protected openings (fire doors) in the abutting exterior wall of the garage and no required opening protective(s) in the abutting wall of a sprinklered R-2 building. Previous editions of the Code did not permit any openings in these abutting exterior walls that are at a “0” fire separation distance apart and required a fire wall design between such buildings to be permitted to have openings between the abutting buildings. 5) 2015 IBC 705.6 Exterior Wall- Structural Stability Exterior fire-rated walls that are braced by floor or roof assemblies that have a lesser fire resistance rating are now permitted. Previous editions of the IBC Code required Construction Type III buildings with two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to have floors that support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to be upgraded to the two-hour fire rating. This is a major cost since apartment buildings built of Construction Type III under the legacy codes only required one-hour floor and roof assemblies to support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls. 6) 2015 IBC 717.1.1 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings Ducts will be allowed to leave a fire-rated shaft enclosure, transition horizontally, and then enter another fire-rated shaft if the duct penetrations on each side of the shafts are protected with fire dampers. Note that this is not permitted for clothes dryer exhaust ducts or any other ducts that the I-Codes require to be continuous and uninterrupted. Item 5h Page 3 of 4 7) 2015 IBC 1603.1.8 Special Loads With the increasing use of photovoltaic (solar) panels on rooftops, it has become clear that there is a need for specific code requirements related to these panels. Such panels are considered fixed equipment and as such would fall under the definition of dead load. Rooftop PV panels are considered special loads and their dead load should be indicated on the construction documents. The code language was revised to clarify that the provisions apply to roof loads for the design of the roof structure, not to the design of the photovoltaic panels or modules themselves. 8) 2015 International Residential Code (IRC) R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to doors Glazing installed perpendicular to a door in a closed position and within 24 inches of the door only requires safety glazing if it is on the hinge side of an in-swinging door. 9) 2015 IRC R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to bottom stair landing. This change will limit the requirement for glazing at the bottom of a landing by excluding windows greater than 180 degrees from the bottom face of the landing. 10) 2015 IRC R315 Carbon Monoxide Alarms The carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Section R315 have been reorganized to clarify their application. For example, the carbon monoxide detection system provisions have been placed in a separate Section R315.6 following all of the carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Sections R315.1 through R315.5. In addition, new charging sections have been added to clarify the scope and make the provisions easier to locate. Several technical changes have also occurred. The carbon monoxide alarm provisions have been rewritten to generally align with the smoke alarm provisions. For example, connection to the house wiring system with battery backup is now required for carbon monoxide alarms installed in new dwellings. 11) 2015 IRC Table R602.3(1) Fastening schedule for structural members. IRC Table R602.3(1), wood frame nailing schedule, is reformatted to give typical nailing options and to make the table consistent with 2015 IBC Table 2304.10.1. The change states the minimum size and number of fasteners for each connection. In most cases, the minimum number of box nails previously required is increased by one. 12) 2015 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 605.2.1 Lead content of drinking water pipe and fittings. Pipe, pipe fittings, joints, valves, faucets and fixture fittings utilized to supply water for drinking or cooking purposes shall comply with NSF 372 and shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent or less. 13) 2015 IPC 607.3 Thermal expansion The available method to control closed-system pressure increases caused by the heating of water has been limited to the use of thermal expansion tanks only. Item 5h Page 4 of 4 14) 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 307.6 Condensate pumps. Condensate pumps located in uninhabitable spaces, such as attics and crawl spaces, shall be connected to the appliance or equipment served such that when the pump fails, the appliance or equipment will be prevented from operating. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 15) 2015 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 310.1.1.1 Bonding Jumper length. The length of the bonding jumper between the connection length of the bonding jumper between the connection to a gas piping system and the connection to a grounding electrode system shall not exceed 75 feet. Any additional grounding electrodes used shall be bonded to the electrical service grounding electrode system or, where provided, the lightning protection grounding electrode system. 16) 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) 210.8 Ground-fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel (B) Other than dwelling units. All single-phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50 amps or less and three- phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or less installed in the following locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protections for personnel, (1) Bathrooms (2) Kitchens (3) Rooftops 17) 2017 NEC 210.11 Branch Circuits Required (C) Dwelling Units (4) Garage Branch Circuits In addition to the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20 ampere branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacles outlets in attached garages and in detached garages with electric power. This circuit shall have no other outlets. 18) 2017 NEC 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Protection (A) Dwelling Units AFCI Protection is now required for all 120 volts, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere branch circuits supplying not just outlets but also devices installed in Kitchen and Laundry areas. 19) 2017 NEC 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250 volts non-locking-type receptacles in the areas of Pre- school, elementary education, dental office, outpatient facilities, transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums and dormitories. Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 1 of 9 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, REPEALING ARTICLE 3.08, “ENERGY CONSERVATION,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW ARTICLE 3.08, “ENERGY CONSERVATION”; ADOPTING THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE, SAVE AND EXCEPT THE DELETIONS AND AMENDMENTS SET FORTH HEREIN; REGULATING THE DESIGN OF BUILDING ENVELOPES FOR ADEQUATE THERMAL RESISTANCE AND LOW AIR LEAKAGE AND THE DESIGN AND SELECTION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, SERVICE WATER-HEATING, AND ILLUMINATION SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT WHICH WILL ENABLE EFFECTIVE USE OF ENERGY IN NEW BUILDING CONSTRUCTION WITHIN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to repeal existing Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation,” of the Code or Ordinances and replace it with a new Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation”; and, WHEREAS, the Town Council also has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of the Prosper to adopt the 2015 Edition of the International Energy Conservation Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Existing Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper, Texas, is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Article 3.08, “Energy Conservation,” to read as follows: “ARTICLE 3.08 ENERGY CONSERVATION Sec. 3.08.001 Code Adopted; amendments The International Energy Conservation Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., save and except the deletions and amendments set forth in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes, is hereby adopted as the Energy Conservation Code for the Town, regulating the design of building envelopes for adequate thermal resistance Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 of 9 and low air leakage and the design and selection of mechanical, electrical, service water-heating, and illumination systems and equipment which will enable effective use of energy in new building construction within the Town (the “2015 International Energy Conservation Code”). The 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is made a part of this Article as if fully set forth herein. A copy of the International Energy Conservation Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., is on file in the office of the Town Secretary of Prosper being marked and so designated as the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code. Sec. 3.08.002 Penalty for violation Any person, firm, corporation, or business entity violating this Article shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state, and federal law.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason, held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town of Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one (1) or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective January 1, 2019, after its passage and publication as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 3 of 9 ____________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _____________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 4 of 9 Exhibit A TOWN OF PROSPER AMENDMENTS 2015 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE The following additions, deletions, and amendments to the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code adopted herein are hereby approved and adopted. Section C101.1 Title of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: C101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the Energy Conservation Code of The Town of Prosper hereinafter referred to as “this code.” Section C102.1 General of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by adding Section C102.1.2 Alternative compliance to read as follows: C102.1.2 Alternative compliance. A building certified by a national, state, or local accredited energy efficiency program and determined by the Energy Systems Laboratory to be in compliance with the energy efficiency requirements of this Section may, at the option of the Code Official, be considered in compliance. The United States Environmental Protection Agency's Energy Star Program certification of energy code equivalency shall be considered in compliance. Section C106.1 Referenced codes and standards of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: C106.1 Referenced codes and standards. The codes, when specifically adopted, and standards referenced in this code shall be those that are listed in Chapter 5 and such codes and standards shall be considered part of the requirements of this code to the prescribed extent of each such reference and as further regulated in Sections C106.1.1 and C106.1.2. Whenever amendments have been adopted to the reference codes and standards, each reference to said code and standard shall be considered to reference the amendments as well. Any reference made to NFPA 70 or the ICC Electrical Code shall mean the Electrical Code as adopted. Exception: Where enforcement of a code provision would violate the conditions of the listing of the equipment or appliance, the conditions of the listing and the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall apply. Section C107.2 Schedule of permit fees of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: C107.2 Schedule of permit fees. The fee schedule for all Energy Conservation Code work shall be as indicated in the Town of Prosper Fee Schedule as adopted by the Town Council. Section C107.3 Work commencing before permit issuance of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 5 of 9 C107.3 Work commencing before permit issuance. Any person who commences any work before obtaining the necessary permits shall be subject to a penalty of 100% of the usual permit fee in addition to the required permit fees. Section C107.5 Refunds of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: C107.5 Refunds. The Code Official shall authorize the refunding of fees as follows: 1. The full amount of any fee paid hereunder that was erroneously paid or collected. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance with this Code. 2. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a plan review fee has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan review effort has been expended. 3. The Code Official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date of fee payment. Section C108.4 Failure to comply of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: C108.4 Failure to comply. Any person who shall continue any work after having been served with a stop work order, except such work as that person is directed to perform to remove a violation or unsafe condition, shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and, upon conviction, may be fined up to the maximum amount allowed by Texas law. Each day that a violation continues after due notice has been served shall be deemed a separate offense. Section C109 BOARD OF APPEALS of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to remove Section C109.1 General and replace with Section C109.1 Board of Appeals to read as follows: C109.1 Board of Appeals. Any person shall have the right to appeal a decision of the Code Official to the Board of Appeals, as established by ordinance. The board shall be governed by the Town of Prosper’s enabling ordinance. Section C202 GENERAL DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code, definition of “PROJECTION FACTOR” is added to read as follows: PROJECTION FACTOR. The ratio of the horizontal depth of the overhang, eave or permanently attached shading device, divided by the distance measured vertically from the bottom of the fenestration glazing to the underside of the overhang, eave, or permanently attached shading device. Section C402.2 Specific building thermal envelope insulation requirements (Prescriptive) of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by adding Section C402.2.7 Insulation installed in walls read as follows: Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 6 of 9 Section C402.2.7 Insulation installed in walls. To ensure that insulation remains in place, insulation installed in walls shall be totally enclosed on all sides consisting of framing lumber, gypsum, sheathing, wood structural panel sheathing, netting, or other equivalent material approved by the Building Official. Section R101.1 Title of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: R101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the Energy Conservation Code of The Town of Prosper hereinafter referred to as “this code.” Section R102.1 General of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by adding R102.1.2 Alternative compliance to read as follows: R102.1.2 Alternative compliance. A building certified by a national, state, or local accredited energy efficiency program and determined by the Energy Systems Laboratory to be in compliance with the energy efficiency requirements of this section may, at the option of the Code Official, be considered in compliance. The United States Environmental Protection Agency's Energy Star Program certification of energy code equivalency shall be considered in compliance. Regardless of the program or the path to compliance, each 1- and 2-family dwelling shall be tested for air and duct leakage as prescribed in Section R402.4 and R403.3.3 respectively. Section R106.1 Referenced codes and standards of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: R106.1 Referenced codes and standards. The codes, when specifically adopted, and standards referenced in this Code shall be those that are listed in Chapter 5 and such codes and standards shall be considered part of the requirements of this Code to the prescribed extent of each such reference and as further regulated in Sections R106.1.1 and R106.1.2. Whenever amendments have been adopted to the reference codes and standards, each reference to said code and standard shall be considered to reference the amendments as well. Any reference made to NFPA 70 or the ICC Electrical Code shall mean the Electrical Code as adopted. Exception: Where enforcement of a code provision would violate the conditions of the listing of the equipment or appliance, the conditions of the listing and the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall apply. Section R107.2 Schedule of permit fees of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: R107.2 Schedule of permit fees. The fees schedule for all Energy Conservation Code work shall be as indicated in the Town of Prosper Fee Schedule as adopted by the Town Council. Section R107.3 Work commencing before permit issuance of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 7 of 9 R107.3 Work commencing before permit issuance. Any person who commences any work prior to obtaining the necessary permits shall be subject to a penalty of 100% of the usual permit fee in addition to the required permit fees. Section R107.5 Refunds of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: R107.5 Refunds. The Code Official shall authorize the refunding of fees as follows: 1. The full amount of any fee paid hereunder that was erroneously paid or collected. 2. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance with this Code. 3. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a plan review fee has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan review effort has been expended. The Code Official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date of fee payment. Section R108.4 Failure to comply of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: R108.4 Failure to comply. Any person who shall continue any work after having been served with a stop work order, except such work as that person is directed to perform to remove a violation or unsafe condition, shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and, upon conviction, may be fined up to the maximum amount allowed by Texas law. Each day that a violation continues after due notice has been served shall be deemed a separate offence. Section R109 BOARD OF APPEALS of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by removing Section R109.1 General and replacing with Section R109.1 Board of Appeals to read as follows: R109.1 Board of Appeals. Any person shall have the right to appeal a decision of the Code Official to the Board of Appeals, as established by ordinance. The board shall be governed by the Town of Prosper’s enabling ordinance. Section R202 GENERAL DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code, definitions of “DYNAMIC GLAZING” and “PROJECTION FACTOR” are added to read as follows: DYNAMIC GLAZING. Any fenestration product that has the fully reversible ability to change its performance properties, including U-factor, solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC), or visible transmittance (VT). PROJECTION FACTOR. The ratio of the horizontal depth of the overhang, eave, or permanently attached shading device, divided by the distance measured vertically from the bottom of the fenestration glazing to the underside of the overhang, eave, or permanently attached shading device. Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 8 of 9 Section R402.2 Specific insulation requirements (Prescriptive) of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by adding Section R402.2.14 Insulation installed in walls to read as follows: R402.2.14 Insulation installed in walls. To ensure that insulation remains in place, insulation batts installed in walls shall be totally secured by an enclosure on all sides consisting of framing lumber, gypsum, sheathing, wood structural panel sheathing, netting, or other equivalent material approved by the Building Official. Section R402.3.2 Glazed fenestration SHGC of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by adding a paragraph and table following the Exception to read as follows: Where vertical fenestration is shaded by an overhang, eave, or permanently attached shading device, the SHGC required in Table R402.1.2 shall be reduced by using the multipliers in Table R402.3.2 SHGC Multipliers for Permanent Projections. Table R402.3.2 SHGC Multipliers for Permanent Projections a Projection Factor SHGC Multiplier (all Other Orientation) SHGC Multiplier (North Oriented) 0 - 0.10 1.00 1.00 >0.10 – 0.20 0.91 0.95 >0.20 – 0.30 0.82 0.91 >0.30 – 0.40 0.74 0.87 >0.40 – 0.50 0.67 0.84 >0.50 – 0.60 0.61 0.81 >0.60 – 0.70 0.56 0.78 >0.70 – 0.80 0.51 0.76 >0.80 – 0.90 0.47 0.75 >0.90 – 1.00 0.44 0.73 a North oriented means within 45 degrees of true north. Section R402.4.1.2 Testing of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: R402.4.1.2 Testing. The building or dwelling unit shall be tested and verified as having an air leakage rate of not exceeding five (5) air changes per hour in Climate Zone 3. {Remainder of text unchanged} Section R402.4.1.2 Testing of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by adding a paragraph to read as follows: Mandatory testing shall only be performed by individuals that are certified to perform air infiltration testing by national or state organizations as approved by the Building Official. The certified individual(s) shall be an independent third-party entity, and may not be employed or have any financial interest in the company that constructs the structure. Item 5h Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 9 of 9 R403.3.3 Duct Testing (Mandatory) of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by adding a paragraph to read as follows: Mandatory testing shall only be performed by individuals that are certified to perform duct testing leakage testing by national or state organizations as approved by the Building Official. The certified individual(s) shall be an independent third- party entity, and may not be employed or have any financial interest in the company that constructs the structure. Section R405.6.2 Specific approval of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended by adding a sentence to read as follows: Acceptable performance software simulation tools may include, but are not limited to, REM RateTM, Energy Gauge and IC3. Other performance software programs accredited by RESNET BESTEST and having the ability to provide a report as outlined in Section R405.4.2 may also be deemed acceptable performance simulation programs and may be considered by the Building Official. TABLE R406.4 Maximum Energy Rating Index of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code is amended to read as follows: TABLE R406.41 MAXIMUM ENERGY RATING INDEX CLIMATE ZONE ENERGY RATING INDEX 3 65 1 This table is effective until August 31, 2019. TABLE R406.42 MAXIMUM ENERGY RATING INDEX CLIMATE ZONE ENERGY RATING INDEX 3 63 2 The table is effective from September 1, 2019 to August 31, 2022. TABLE R406.43 MAXIMUM ENERGY RATING INDEX CLIMATE ZONE ENERGY RATING INDEX 3 59 3 This table is effective on or after September 1, 2022. End of Exhibit “A” Item 5h Page 1 of 4 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Mechanical Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design, installation, maintenance, addition, alteration, and inspection of mechanical systems that are permanently installed and utilized to provide control of environmental conditions and related processes within buildings located in the Town of Prosper, Texas. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to adopt the later versions of the International Building Codes. On November 27, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the 2015 and 2017 series of codes and list of major changes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.List of Major Changes to all Series of Codes 2. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance repealing Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Mechanical Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design, installation, maintenance, addition, alteration, and inspection of mechanical systems that are permanently installed and utilized to provide control of environmental conditions and related processes within buildings located in the Town of Prosper, Texas. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5i Page 2 of 4 Town of Prosper List of Specific Chapters and Sections of the Applicable Codes Regarding Significant Changes. 1) 2015 International Build Code (IBC) 101.4.7 Existing Buildings, Previous 2012 IBC Chapter 34. The requirements (Chapter 34) for existing structures have been removed from the 2015 IBC. All existing construction requirements are now in the 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC). 2) 2015 IBC 423 Storm Shelters, Critical Emergency Operations and group E occupancies. This section applies to the construction of storm shelters constructed as separate detached buildings or constructed as safe rooms within buildings for the purpose of providing safe refuge from storms that produce high winds, such as tornados and hurricanes. Such structures shall be designated to be hurricane shelters, tornado shelters, or combined hurricane and tornado shelters. 3) 2015 IBC 406 “Private Garage,” 406.3.1 “Classification,” 406.3.2 “Clear Height” Private garages are no longer limited to a maximum of 3,000 sq. ft. in a building. Multiple private garages, each a maximum of 1,000 sq. ft., each separated by one-hour fire barriers or horizontal assemblies are now permitted based on their U-occupancy classification. Also, a minimum of 7’ clear height will be required in private garages. 4) 2015 IBC 705.3 Exception #2 “Buildings on the Same Lot Permits a parking garage of Construction Type I or IIA to abut a Group R-2 building with 1½- hour- protected openings (fire doors) in the abutting exterior wall of the garage and no required opening protective(s) in the abutting wall of a sprinklered R-2 building. Previous editions of the Code did not permit any openings in these abutting exterior walls that are at a “0” fire separation distance apart and required a fire wall design between such buildings to be permitted to have openings between the abutting buildings. 5) 2015 IBC 705.6 Exterior Wall- Structural Stability Exterior fire-rated walls that are braced by floor or roof assemblies that have a lesser fire resistance rating are now permitted. Previous editions of the IBC Code required Construction Type III buildings with two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to have floors that support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to be upgraded to the two-hour fire rating. This is a major cost since apartment buildings built of Construction Type III under the legacy codes only required one-hour floor and roof assemblies to support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls. 6) 2015 IBC 717.1.1 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings Ducts will be allowed to leave a fire-rated shaft enclosure, transition horizontally, and then enter another fire-rated shaft if the duct penetrations on each side of the shafts are protected with fire dampers. Note that this is not permitted for clothes dryer exhaust ducts or any other ducts that the I-Codes require to be continuous and uninterrupted. Item 5i Page 3 of 4 7) 2015 IBC 1603.1.8 Special Loads With the increasing use of photovoltaic (solar) panels on rooftops, it has become clear that there is a need for specific code requirements related to these panels. Such panels are considered fixed equipment and as such would fall under the definition of dead load. Rooftop PV panels are considered special loads and their dead load should be indicated on the construction documents. The code language was revised to clarify that the provisions apply to roof loads for the design of the roof structure, not to the design of the photovoltaic panels or modules themselves. 8) 2015 International Residential Code (IRC) R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to doors Glazing installed perpendicular to a door in a closed position and within 24 inches of the door only requires safety glazing if it is on the hinge side of an in-swinging door. 9) 2015 IRC R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to bottom stair landing. This change will limit the requirement for glazing at the bottom of a landing by excluding windows greater than 180 degrees from the bottom face of the landing. 10) 2015 IRC R315 Carbon Monoxide Alarms The carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Section R315 have been reorganized to clarify their application. For example, the carbon monoxide detection system provisions have been placed in a separate Section R315.6 following all of the carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Sections R315.1 through R315.5. In addition, new charging sections have been added to clarify the scope and make the provisions easier to locate. Several technical changes have also occurred. The carbon monoxide alarm provisions have been rewritten to generally align with the smoke alarm provisions. For example, connection to the house wiring system with battery backup is now required for carbon monoxide alarms installed in new dwellings. 11) 2015 IRC Table R602.3(1) Fastening schedule for structural members. IRC Table R602.3(1), wood frame nailing schedule, is reformatted to give typical nailing options and to make the table consistent with 2015 IBC Table 2304.10.1. The change states the minimum size and number of fasteners for each connection. In most cases, the minimum number of box nails previously required is increased by one. 12) 2015 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 605.2.1 Lead content of drinking water pipe and fittings. Pipe, pipe fittings, joints, valves, faucets and fixture fittings utilized to supply water for drinking or cooking purposes shall comply with NSF 372 and shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent or less. 13) 2015 IPC 607.3 Thermal expansion The available method to control closed-system pressure increases caused by the heating of water has been limited to the use of thermal expansion tanks only. Item 5i Page 4 of 4 14) 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 307.6 Condensate pumps. Condensate pumps located in uninhabitable spaces, such as attics and crawl spaces, shall be connected to the appliance or equipment served such that when the pump fails, the appliance or equipment will be prevented from operating. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 15) 2015 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 310.1.1.1 Bonding Jumper length. The length of the bonding jumper between the connection length of the bonding jumper between the connection to a gas piping system and the connection to a grounding electrode system shall not exceed 75 feet. Any additional grounding electrodes used shall be bonded to the electrical service grounding electrode system or, where provided, the lightning protection grounding electrode system. 16) 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) 210.8 Ground-fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel (B) Other than dwelling units. All single-phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50 amps or less and three- phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or less installed in the following locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protections for personnel, (1) Bathrooms (2) Kitchens (3) Rooftops 17) 2017 NEC 210.11 Branch Circuits Required (C) Dwelling Units (4) Garage Branch Circuits In addition to the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20 ampere branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacles outlets in attached garages and in detached garages with electric power. This circuit shall have no other outlets. 18) 2017 NEC 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Protection (A) Dwelling Units AFCI Protection is now required for all 120 volts, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere branch circuits supplying not just outlets but also devices installed in Kitchen and Laundry areas. 19) 2017 NEC 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250 volts non-locking-type receptacles in the areas of Pre- school, elementary education, dental office, outpatient facilities, transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums and dormitories. Item 5i Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 1 of 8 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, REPEALING ARTICLE 3.09, “MECHANICAL CODE,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW ARTICLE 3.09, “MECHANICAL CODE”; ADOPTING THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE, SAVE AND EXCEPT THE DELETIONS AND AMENDMENTS SET FORTH HEREIN; REGULATING THE DESIGN, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, ADDITION, ALTERATION, AND INSPECTION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS THAT ARE PERMANENTLY INSTALLED AND UTILIZED TO PROVIDE CONTROL OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AND RELATED PROCESSES WITHIN BUILDINGS LOCATED IN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS, AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to repeal existing Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code,” of the Code or Ordinances and replace it with a new Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code”; and, WHEREAS, the Town Council also has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of the Prosper to adopt the 2015 Edition of the International Mechanical Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Existing Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper, Texas, is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Article 3.09, “Mechanical Code,” to read as follows: “ARTICLE 3.09 MECHANICAL CODE Sec. 3.09.001 Code Adopted; amendments The International Mechanical Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., save and except the deletions and amendments set forth in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes, is hereby adopted as the Mechanical Code for the Town, regulating the design, installation, maintenance, addition, alteration, and inspection of mechanical systems that are permanently installed and utilized to provide control of environmental conditions and related processes within the Town (the “2015 International Mechanical Code”). The 2015 Item 5i Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 of 8 International Mechanical Code is made a part of this Article as if fully set forth herein. A copy of the International Mechanical Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., is on file in the office of the Town Secretary of Prosper being marked and so designated as the 2015 International Mechanical Code. Sec. 3.09.002 Penalty for violation Any person, firm, corporation, or business entity violating this article shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state, and federal law.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason, held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town of Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one (1) or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective January 1, 2019, after its passage and publication as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor Item 5i Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 3 of 8 ATTEST: ____________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _____________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5i Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 4 of 8 Exhibit A TOWN OF PROSPER AMENDMENTS 2015 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE The following additions, deletions, and amendments to the 2015 International Mechanical Code are hereby approved and adopted. Section [A] 101.1 Title of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the Mechanical Code of The Town of Prosper hereinafter referred to as “this code.” Section [A] 102.8 Referenced codes and standards of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 102.8 Referenced codes and standards. The codes and standards referenced herein shall be those that are listed in Chapter 15 and such codes, when specifically adopted, and standards shall be considered part of the requirements of this Code to the prescribed extent of each such reference. Where differences occur between provisions of this Code and the referenced standards, the provisions of this Code shall apply. Whenever amendments have been adopted to the referenced codes and standards, each reference to said code and standard shall be considered to reference the amendments as well. Any reference to NFPA 70 or the ICC Electrical Code shall mean the Electrical Code as adopted. Exception: Where enforcement of a code provision would violate the conditions of the listing of the equipment or appliance, the conditions of the listing and the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall apply. Section [A] 106.3.3 Time limitation of application of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.3.3 Time limitation of application. An application for a permit for any proposed work shall be deemed to have been abandoned ninety (90) days after the date of filing, unless such application has been pursued in good faith or a permit has been issued; except that the Code Official shall have the authority to grant one (1) or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding ninety (90) days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable caused demonstrated. Section [A] 106.4.3 Expiration of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.4.3 Expiration. Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after the issuance, or if the work authorized by such permit is suspended, abandoned, or lacks any required inspection for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Code Official is authorized to grant, in writing, one (1) or more extensions of Item 5i Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 5 of 8 time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section [A] 106.5.2 Fee schedule of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.5.2 Fee schedule. The fee schedule for all mechanical work shall be as indicated in the Town of Prosper Fee Schedule as adopted by the City Council. Section [A] 106.5.3 Fee refunds of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.5.3 Fee refunds. The Code Official shall authorize the refunding of fees as follows: 1. The full amount of any fee paid hereunder that was erroneously paid or collected. 2. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance with this Code. 3. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a plan review fee has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan review effort has been expended. The Code Official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date of fee payment. Section [A] 108.4 Violation penalties of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 108.4 Violation penalties. Any person who shall violate a provision of this Code or shall fail to comply with any of the requirements thereof or who shall erect, install, alter, or repair mechanical work in violation of the approved construction documents or directive of the Code Official, or of a permit or certificate issued under the provisions of this Code, shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and upon conviction may be fined up to the maximum amount allowed by Texas law. Each day that a violation continues after due notice has been served shall be deemed a separate offence. Section [A] 108.5 Stop work orders of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 108.5 Stop work orders. Upon notice from the Code Official, work on any mechanical system that is being done contrary to the provisions of this Code or in a dangerous or unsafe manner shall immediately cease. Such notice shall be in writing and shall be given to the owner of the property, the owner’s agent, or to the person doing the work. The notice shall state the conditions under which work is authorized to resume. Where an emergency exists, the Code Official shall not be required to give notice prior to stopping the work. Any person who shall continue any work in or about the structure after having been served with a stop work order, except such work as that person is directed to perform to remove a violation or unsafe condition, shall be liable to a fine as required herein by this Code. Item 5i Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 6 of 8 Section [A] 109.1 Application for appeal of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 109.1 Application for appeal. Any person shall have the right to appeal a decision of the Code Official to the Board of Appeals, as established by ordinance. The Board shall be governed by the Town of Prosper’s enabling ordinance. Section 306.3 Appliances in attics of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: 306.3 Appliances in Attics. Attics containing appliances shall be provided . . . {bulk of Section unchanged} . . . side of the appliance. The clear access opening dimensions shall be a minimum of twenty inches (20”) by thirty inches (30”) (508 mm by 762 mm), or larger where such dimensions are not large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance. A walkway to an appliance shall be rated as a floor as approved by the Building Official. As a minimum, for access to the attic space, provide one (1) of the following: 1. A permanent stair; 2. A pull down stair with a minimum 300 lb. (136 kg) capacity; 3. An access door from an upper floor level; or, 4. Access Panel may be used in lieu of items 1, 2, and 3 with prior approval of the Code Official due to building conditions. Exceptions: 1. The passageway and level service space are not required where the appliance is capable of being serviced and removed… {no change to remaining text} 2. Where the passageway is unobstructed and not less than six feet (6’) (1,829 mm) high and twenty-two inches (22”) (559 mm) wide for its entire length, the passageway shall be not greater than fifty feet (50’) (15,240 mm) in length. Section 306.5 Equipment and appliances on roofs or elevated structures of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: 306.5 Equipment and appliances on roofs or elevated structures. Where equipment requiring access or appliances are located on an elevated structure or the roof of a building such that personnel will have to climb higher than sixteen feet (16’) (4,877 mm) above grade to access, a permanent interior or exterior means of access shall be provided. Permanent exterior ladders providing roof access need not extend closer than twelve feet (12’) (3,657 mm) to the finish grade or floor level below and shall extend to the equipment and appliances' level service space. Such access shall . . . {bulk of Section unchanged} . . . on roofs having a slope greater than four (4) units vertical in twelve (12) units horizontal (33% slope).... {bulk of Section unchanged}. Section 306.5.1 Sloped roofs of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: 306.5.1 Sloped Roofs. Where appliances, equipment, fans or other components that require service are installed on a roof having a slope of three (3) units vertical Item 5i Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 7 of 8 in twelve (12) units horizontal (25% slope) or greater and having an edge more than thirty inches (30”) (762 mm) above grade at such edge, a catwalk at least sixteen inches (16”) in width with substantial cleats spaced not more than sixteen inches (16”) apart shall be provided from the roof access to a level platform at the appliance. The level platform shall be provided on each side of the appliance to which access is required for service, repair, or maintenance. The platform shall be not less than thirty inches (30”) (762 mm) in any dimension and shall be provided with guards. The guards shall extend not less than forty-two inches (42”) (1,067 mm) above the platform, shall be constructed so as to prevent the passage of a twenty-one inch (21”) diameter (533 mm) sphere and shall comply with the loading requirements for guards specified in the currently adopted International Building Code. Section 306 ACCESS AND SERVICE SPACE of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended by adding Section 306.6 Water heaters above ground or floor and an Exception to read as follows: 306.6 Water heaters above ground or floor. When the mezzanine or platform in which a water heater is installed is more than eight feet (8’) (2,438 mm) above the ground or floor level, it shall be made accessible by a stairway or permanent ladder fastened to the building. Exception: A maximum ten (10) gallon water heater (or larger with approval) is capable of being accessed through a lay-in ceiling and the water heater installed is not more than ten feet (10’) (3,048 mm) above the ground or floor level and may be reached with a portable ladder. Section 307.2.3 Auxiliary and secondary drain systems 2. of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: 2. A separate overflow drain line shall be connected to the drain pan provided with the equipment. Such overflow drain shall discharge to a conspicuous point of disposal to alert occupants in the event of a stoppage of the primary drain. The overflow drain line shall connect to the drain pan at a higher level than the primary drain connection. However, the conspicuous point shall not create a hazard such as dripping over a walking surface or other areas so as to create a nuisance. Section 403.2.1 Recirculation of air of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended by adding 5. to read as follows: 5. Toilet rooms within private dwellings that contain only a water closet, lavatory, or combination thereof may be ventilated with an approved mechanical recirculating fan or similar device designed to remove odors from the air. Section 501.3 Exhaust discharge of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended by adding an Exception 4. to read as follows: Exception: 4. Toilet room exhaust ducts may terminate in a warehouse or shop area when infiltration of outside air is present. Item 5i Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 8 of 8 Section 607.5.1 Fire walls of the 2015 International Mechanical Code is amended to read as follows: 607.5.1 Fire Walls. Ducts and air transfer openings permitted in fire walls in accordance with Section 705.11 of the currently adopted International Building Code shall be protected with listed fire dampers installed in accordance with their listing. For hazardous exhaust systems see Section 510.1-510.9. End of Exhibit “A” Item 5i Page 1 of 4 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance repealing Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Fuel Gas Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design, installation, maintenance, addition, alteration, and inspection of fuel gas piping systems, fuel gas utilization equipment, and related accessories within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to adopt the later versions of the International Building Codes. On November 27, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the 2015 and 2017 series of codes and list of major changes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1.List of Major Changes to all Series of Codes 2. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance repealing Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper and replacing it with a new Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code”; adopting the 2015 edition of the International Fuel Gas Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the design, installation, maintenance, addition, alteration, and inspection of fuel gas piping systems, fuel gas utilization equipment, and related accessories within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5j Page 2 of 4 Town of Prosper List of Specific Chapters and Sections of the Applicable Codes Regarding Significant Changes. 1) 2015 International Build Code (IBC) 101.4.7 Existing Buildings, Previous 2012 IBC Chapter 34. The requirements (Chapter 34) for existing structures have been removed from the 2015 IBC. All existing construction requirements are now in the 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC). 2) 2015 IBC 423 Storm Shelters, Critical Emergency Operations and group E occupancies. This section applies to the construction of storm shelters constructed as separate detached buildings or constructed as safe rooms within buildings for the purpose of providing safe refuge from storms that produce high winds, such as tornados and hurricanes. Such structures shall be designated to be hurricane shelters, tornado shelters, or combined hurricane and tornado shelters. 3) 2015 IBC 406 “Private Garage,” 406.3.1 “Classification,” 406.3.2 “Clear Height” Private garages are no longer limited to a maximum of 3,000 sq. ft. in a building. Multiple private garages, each a maximum of 1,000 sq. ft., each separated by one-hour fire barriers or horizontal assemblies are now permitted based on their U-occupancy classification. Also, a minimum of 7’ clear height will be required in private garages. 4) 2015 IBC 705.3 Exception #2 “Buildings on the Same Lot Permits a parking garage of Construction Type I or IIA to abut a Group R-2 building with 1½- hour- protected openings (fire doors) in the abutting exterior wall of the garage and no required opening protective(s) in the abutting wall of a sprinklered R-2 building. Previous editions of the Code did not permit any openings in these abutting exterior walls that are at a “0” fire separation distance apart and required a fire wall design between such buildings to be permitted to have openings between the abutting buildings. 5) 2015 IBC 705.6 Exterior Wall- Structural Stability Exterior fire-rated walls that are braced by floor or roof assemblies that have a lesser fire resistance rating are now permitted. Previous editions of the IBC Code required Construction Type III buildings with two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to have floors that support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to be upgraded to the two-hour fire rating. This is a major cost since apartment buildings built of Construction Type III under the legacy codes only required one-hour floor and roof assemblies to support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls. 6) 2015 IBC 717.1.1 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings Ducts will be allowed to leave a fire-rated shaft enclosure, transition horizontally, and then enter another fire-rated shaft if the duct penetrations on each side of the shafts are protected with fire dampers. Note that this is not permitted for clothes dryer exhaust ducts or any other ducts that the I-Codes require to be continuous and uninterrupted. Item 5j Page 3 of 4 7) 2015 IBC 1603.1.8 Special Loads With the increasing use of photovoltaic (solar) panels on rooftops, it has become clear that there is a need for specific code requirements related to these panels. Such panels are considered fixed equipment and as such would fall under the definition of dead load. Rooftop PV panels are considered special loads and their dead load should be indicated on the construction documents. The code language was revised to clarify that the provisions apply to roof loads for the design of the roof structure, not to the design of the photovoltaic panels or modules themselves. 8) 2015 International Residential Code (IRC) R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to doors Glazing installed perpendicular to a door in a closed position and within 24 inches of the door only requires safety glazing if it is on the hinge side of an in-swinging door. 9) 2015 IRC R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to bottom stair landing. This change will limit the requirement for glazing at the bottom of a landing by excluding windows greater than 180 degrees from the bottom face of the landing. 10) 2015 IRC R315 Carbon Monoxide Alarms The carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Section R315 have been reorganized to clarify their application. For example, the carbon monoxide detection system provisions have been placed in a separate Section R315.6 following all of the carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Sections R315.1 through R315.5. In addition, new charging sections have been added to clarify the scope and make the provisions easier to locate. Several technical changes have also occurred. The carbon monoxide alarm provisions have been rewritten to generally align with the smoke alarm provisions. For example, connection to the house wiring system with battery backup is now required for carbon monoxide alarms installed in new dwellings. 11) 2015 IRC Table R602.3(1) Fastening schedule for structural members. IRC Table R602.3(1), wood frame nailing schedule, is reformatted to give typical nailing options and to make the table consistent with 2015 IBC Table 2304.10.1. The change states the minimum size and number of fasteners for each connection. In most cases, the minimum number of box nails previously required is increased by one. 12) 2015 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 605.2.1 Lead content of drinking water pipe and fittings. Pipe, pipe fittings, joints, valves, faucets and fixture fittings utilized to supply water for drinking or cooking purposes shall comply with NSF 372 and shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent or less. 13) 2015 IPC 607.3 Thermal expansion The available method to control closed-system pressure increases caused by the heating of water has been limited to the use of thermal expansion tanks only. Item 5j Page 4 of 4 14) 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 307.6 Condensate pumps. Condensate pumps located in uninhabitable spaces, such as attics and crawl spaces, shall be connected to the appliance or equipment served such that when the pump fails, the appliance or equipment will be prevented from operating. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 15) 2015 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 310.1.1.1 Bonding Jumper length. The length of the bonding jumper between the connection length of the bonding jumper between the connection to a gas piping system and the connection to a grounding electrode system shall not exceed 75 feet. Any additional grounding electrodes used shall be bonded to the electrical service grounding electrode system or, where provided, the lightning protection grounding electrode system. 16) 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) 210.8 Ground-fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel (B) Other than dwelling units. All single-phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50 amps or less and three- phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or less installed in the following locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protections for personnel, (1) Bathrooms (2) Kitchens (3) Rooftops 17) 2017 NEC 210.11 Branch Circuits Required (C) Dwelling Units (4) Garage Branch Circuits In addition to the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20 ampere branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacles outlets in attached garages and in detached garages with electric power. This circuit shall have no other outlets. 18) 2017 NEC 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Protection (A) Dwelling Units AFCI Protection is now required for all 120 volts, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere branch circuits supplying not just outlets but also devices installed in Kitchen and Laundry areas. 19) 2017 NEC 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250 volts non-locking-type receptacles in the areas of Pre- school, elementary education, dental office, outpatient facilities, transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums and dormitories. Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 1 of 9 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, REPEALING ARTICLE 3.10, “FUEL GAS CODE” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW ARTICLE 3.10, “FUEL GAS CODE”; ADOPTING THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE, SAVE AND EXCEPT THE DELETIONS AND AMENDMENTS SET FORTH HEREIN; REGULATING THE DESIGN, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, ADDITION, ALTERATION, AND INSPECTION OF FUEL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS, FUEL GAS UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT, AND RELATED ACCESSORIES WITHIN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS, AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to repeal existing Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code,” of the Code or Ordinances and replace it with a new Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code”; and, WHEREAS, the Town Council also has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of the Prosper to adopt the 2015 Edition of the International Fuel Gas Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Existing Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper, Texas, is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Article 3.10, “Fuel Gas Code,” to read as follows: “ARTICLE 3.10 FUEL GAS CODE Sec. 3.10.001 Code Adopted; amendments The International Fuel Gas Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., save and except the deletions and amendments set forth in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes, is hereby adopted as the Fuel Gas Code for the Town, regulating the design, installation, maintenance, addition, alteration, and inspection of fuel gas systems that are permanently installed and utilized to provide control of environmental conditions and related processes within the Town (the “2015 International Fuel Gas Code”). The 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is made a part of this Article as if fully set forth herein. A copy of the Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 of 9 International Fuel Gas Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., is on file in the office of the Town Secretary of Prosper being marked and so designated as the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code. Sec. 3.10.002 Penalty for violation Any person, firm, corporation, or business entity violating this Article shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state, and federal law.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason, held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town of Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one (1) or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective January 1, 2019, after its passage and publication as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 3 of 9 ____________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _____________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 4 of 9 Exhibit A TOWN OF PROSPER AMENDMENTS 2015 INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE The following additions, deletions, and amendments to the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code adopted herein are hereby approved and adopted. Section [A] 101.1 Title of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the Fuel Gas Code of the Town of Prosper hereinafter referred to as “this code.” Section [A] 102.8 Referenced codes and standards of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 102.8 Referenced codes and standards. The codes, when specifically adopted, and standards referenced in this Code shall be those that are listed in Chapter 8 and such codes and standards shall be considered part of the requirements of this Code to the prescribed extent of each such reference and as further regulated in Sections 102.8.1 and 102.8.2. Whenever amendments have been adopted to the reference codes and standards, each reference to said code and standard shall be considered to reference the amendments as well. Any reference made to NFPA 70 or the ICC Electrical Code shall mean the Electrical Code as adopted. Exception: Where enforcement of a code provision would violate the conditions of the listing of the equipment or appliance, the conditions of the listing and the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall apply. Section [A] 106.3.2 Time limitation of application of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.3.2 Time limitation of application. An application for a permit for any proposed work shall be deemed to have been abandoned ninety (90) days after the date of filing, unless such application has been pursued in good faith or a permit has been issued; except that the Code Official shall have the authority to grant one (1) or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding ninety (90) days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable caused demonstrated. Section [A] 106.5.3 Expiration of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.5.3 Expiration. Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after the issuance, or if the work authorized by such permit is suspended, abandoned, or lacks any required inspection, for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Code Official is authorized to grant, in writing, one (1) or more extensions of Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 5 of 9 time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section [A] 106.6.2 Fee schedule of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.6.2 Fee schedule. The fee schedule for all fuel gas work shall be as indicated in the Town of Prosper Fee Schedule as adopted by the Town Council. Section [A] 106.6.3 Fee refunds of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 106.6.3 Fee refunds. The Code Official shall authorize the refunding of fees as follows: 1. The full amount of any fee paid hereunder that was erroneously paid or collected. 2. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued in accordance with this Code. 3. Not more than eighty percent (80%) of the plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a plan review fee has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan review effort has been expended. The Code Official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days after the date of fee payment. Section [A] 108.4 Violation penalties of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 108.4 Violation penalties. Any person who shall violate a provision of this Code or shall fail to comply with any of the requirements thereof or who shall erect, install, alter, or repair fuel gas work in violation of the approved construction documents or directive of the Code Official, or of a permit or certificate issued under the provisions of this Code shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and upon conviction may be fined up to the maximum amount allowed by Texas law. Each day that a violation continues after due notice has been served shall be deemed a separate offense. Section [A] 108.5 Stop work orders of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 108.5 Stop work orders. Upon notice from the Code Official, work on any fuel gas system that is being done contrary to the provisions of this Code or in a dangerous or unsafe manner shall immediately cease. Such notice shall be in writing and shall be given to the owner of the property, the owner’s agent, or to the person doing the work. The notice shall state the conditions under which work is authorized to resume. Where an emergency exists, the Code Official shall not be required to give notice prior to stopping the work. Any person who shall continue any work in or about the structure after having been served with a stop work order, Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 6 of 9 except such work as that person is directed to perform to remove a violation or unsafe condition, shall be liable to a fine as required herein by this Code. Section [A] 109.1 Application for appeal of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 109.1 Application for appeal. Any person shall have the right to appeal a decision of the Code Official to the Board of Appeals, as established by ordinance. The Board shall be governed by the Town of Prosper’s enabling ordinance. Section [M] 306.3 Appliances in attics of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [M] 306.3 Appliances in attics. Attics containing appliances shall be provided . . . {bulk of Section unchanged} . . . side of the appliance. The clear access opening dimensions shall be a minimum of twenty inches (20”) by thirty inches (30”) (508 mm by 762 mm), or larger where such dimensions are not large enough to allow removal of the largest appliance. A walkway to an appliance shall be rated as a floor as approved by the Building Official. As a minimum, for access to the attic space, provide one (1) of the following: 1. A permanent stair; 2. A pull down stair with a minimum 300 lb. (136 kg) capacity; 3. An access door from an upper floor level; or, 4. Access Panel may be used in lieu of items 1, 2, and 3 with prior approval of the Code Official due to building conditions. Exceptions: 1. The passageway and level service space are not required where the appliance is capable of being serviced and removed through the required opening. 2. Where the passageway is not less than … {bulk of Section unchanged}. Section [M] 306.5 Equipment and appliances on roofs or elevated structures of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [M] 306.5 Equipment and appliances on roofs or elevated structures. Where equipment requiring access or appliances are located on an elevated structure or the roof of a building such that personnel will have to climb higher than sixteen feet (16’) (4,877 mm) above grade to access, a permanent interior or exterior means of access shall be provided. Permanent exterior ladders providing roof access need not extend closer than twelve feet (12’) (3,658 mm) to the finish grade or floor level below and shall extend to the equipment and appliances' level service space. Such access shall . . . {bulk of section to read the same}. . . on roofs having a slope greater than four (4) units vertical in twelve (12) units horizontal (33% slope).... {bulk of Section unchanged}. Section [M] 306.5.1 Sloped roofs of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: [M] 306.5.1 Sloped roofs. Where appliances, equipment, fans, or other components that require service are installed on a roof having a slope of three (3) Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 7 of 9 units vertical in twelve (12) units horizontal (25% slope) or greater and having an edge more than thirty inches (30”) (762 mm) above grade at such edge, a catwalk of at least sixteen inches (16”) in width with substantial cleats spaced not more than sixteen inches (16”) apart shall be provided from the roof access to a level platform at the appliance. The level platform shall be provided on each side of the appliance to which access is required for service, repair, or maintenance. The platform shall be not less than thirty inches (30”) (762 mm) in any dimension and shall be provided with guards. The guards shall extend not less than forty-two inches (42”) (1,067 mm) above the platform, shall be constructed so as to prevent the passage of a twenty-one inch (21”) diameter (533 mm) sphere, and shall comply with the loading requirements for guards specified in the currently adopted International Building Code. Section 306 ACCESS AND SERVICE SPACE of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended by adding Section [M] 306.7 Water heaters above ground or floor to read as follows: [M] 306.7 Water heaters above ground or floor. When the attic, roof, mezzanine, or platform in which a water heater is installed is more than eight feet (8’) (2,438 mm) above the ground or floor level, it shall be made accessible by a stairway or permanent ladder fastened to the building. Section 401.5 Identification of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended by adding a second paragraph to read as follows: Both ends of each section of medium pressure gas piping shall identify its operating gas pressure with an approved tag. The tags are to be composed of aluminum or stainless steel and the following wording shall be stamped into the tag: "WARNING 1/2 to 5 psi gas pressure Do Not Remove" Section 402.3 Sizing of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended by adding an Exception to read as follows: Exception: Corrugated stainless steel tubing (CSST) shall be a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") (18 EHD). Section 404.12 Minimum burial depth of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: 404.12 Minimum burial depth. Underground piping systems shall be installed a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18”) (458 mm) top of pipe below grade. Section 406.1 General of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: 406.1 General. Prior to acceptance and initial operation, all piping installations shall be inspected and pressure tested to determine that the materials, design, Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 8 of 9 fabrication, and installation practices comply with the requirements of this Code. The permit holder shall make the applicable tests prescribed in Sections 406.1.1 through 406.1.5 to determine compliance with the provisions of this Code. The permit holder shall give reasonable advance notice to the Code Official when the piping system is ready for testing. The equipment, material, power, and labor necessary for the inspections and test shall be furnished by the permit holder and the permit holder shall be responsible for determining that the work will withstand the test pressure prescribed in the following tests. Section 406.4 Test pressure measurement of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: 406.4 Test pressure measurement. Test pressure shall be measured with a monometer or with a pressure-measuring device designed and calibrated to read, record, or indicate a pressure loss caused by leakage during the pressure test period. The source of pressure shall be isolated before the pressure tests are made. Section 406.4.1 Test pressure of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: 406.4.1 Test pressure. The test pressure to be used shall be no less than 3 psig (20 kPa gauge), or at the discretion of the Code Official, the piping and valves may be tested at a pressure of at least six inches (6”) (152 mm) of mercury, measured with a manometer or slope gauge. For tests requiring a pressure of 3 psig, diaphragm gauges shall utilize a dial with a minimum diameter of three and one half inches (3 ½”), a set hand, 1/10 pound incrementation and pressure range not to exceed 6 psi for tests requiring a pressure of 3 psig. For tests requiring a pressure of 10 psig, diaphragm gauges shall utilize a dial with a minimum diameter of three and one-half inches (3 ½”), a set hand, a minimum of 2/10 pound incrementation and a pressure range not to exceed 20 psi. For welded piping, and for piping carrying gas at pressures in excess of fourteen (14) inches water column pressure (3.48 kPa) (1/2 psi) and less than 200 inches of water column pressure (52.2 kPa) (7.5 psi), the test pressure shall not be less than ten pounds per square inch (10 psi) (69.6 kPa). For piping carrying gas at a pressure that exceeds 200 inches of water column (52.2 kPa) (7.5 psi), the test pressure shall be not less than one and one-half (1 ½) times the proposed maximum working pressure. Diaphragm gauges used for testing shall display a current calibration and be in good working condition. The appropriate test shall be applied to the diaphragm gauge used for testing. Section 406.4.2 Test duration of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended to read as follows: 406.4.2 Test duration. Test duration shall be held for a length of time satisfactory to the Code Official, but in no case for less than fifteen (15) minutes. For welded piping, and for piping carrying gas at pressures in excess of fourteen inches (14”) water column pressure (3.48 kPa), the test duration shall be held for a length of time satisfactory to the Code Official, but in no case for less than thirty (30) minutes. {delete remainder of Section in its entirety.} Item 5j Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 9 of 9 Section 409.1 General of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended by adding Section 409.1.4 Valves in CSST installations to read as follows: 409.1.4 Valves in CSST installations. Shutoff valves installed with corrugated stainless steel (CSST) piping systems shall be supported with an approved termination fitting, or equivalent support, suitable for the size of the valves, of adequate strength and quality, and located at intervals so as to prevent or damp out excessive vibration, but in no case greater than twelve inches (12”) from the center of the valve. Supports shall be installed so as not to interfere with the free expansion and contraction of the system's piping, fittings, and valves between anchors. All valves and supports shall be designed and installed so they will not be disengaged by movement of the supporting piping. Section 410.1 Pressure regulators of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended by adding a second paragraph and Exception to read as follows: Access to regulators shall comply with the requirements for access to appliances as specified in Section 306. Exception: A passageway or level service space is not required when the regulator is capable of being serviced and removed through the required attic opening. Section 621.2 Prohibited use of the 2015 International Fuel Gas Code is amended by adding an Exception to read as follows: 621.2 Prohibited use. One (1) or more unvented room heaters shall not be used as the sole source of comfort heating in a dwelling unit. Exception: Existing approved unvented heaters may continue to be used in dwelling units, in accordance with the code provisions in effect when installed, when approved by the Code Official, unless an unsafe condition is determined to exist as described in Section 108.7. End of Exhibit “A” Item 5j Page 1 of 4 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance establishing a new Article 3.20, “Existing Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper by adopting the 2015 edition of the International Existing Building Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, removal, and demolition of every existing building or structure or any appurtenances connected or attached to existing buildings or structures within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to adopt the later versions of the International Building Codes. On November 27, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the 2015 and 2017 series of codes and list of major changes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. List of Major Changes to all Series of Codes 2. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance establishing a new Article 3.20, “Existing Building Code,” of the Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper by adopting the 2015 edition of the International Existing Building Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth herein; regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, removal, and demolition of every existing building or structure or any appurtenances connected or attached to existing buildings or structures within the Town of Prosper, Texas. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5k Page 2 of 4 Town of Prosper List of Specific Chapters and Sections of the Applicable Codes Regarding Significant Changes. 1) 2015 International Build Code (IBC) 101.4.7 Existing Buildings, Previous 2012 IBC Chapter 34. The requirements (Chapter 34) for existing structures have been removed from the 2015 IBC. All existing construction requirements are now in the 2015 International Existing Building Code (IEBC). 2) 2015 IBC 423 Storm Shelters, Critical Emergency Operations and group E occupancies. This section applies to the construction of storm shelters constructed as separate detached buildings or constructed as safe rooms within buildings for the purpose of providing safe refuge from storms that produce high winds, such as tornados and hurricanes. Such structures shall be designated to be hurricane shelters, tornado shelters, or combined hurricane and tornado shelters. 3) 2015 IBC 406 “Private Garage,” 406.3.1 “Classification,” 406.3.2 “Clear Height” Private garages are no longer limited to a maximum of 3,000 sq. ft. in a building. Multiple private garages, each a maximum of 1,000 sq. ft., each separated by one-hour fire barriers or horizontal assemblies are now permitted based on their U-occupancy classification. Also, a minimum of 7’ clear height will be required in private garages. 4) 2015 IBC 705.3 Exception #2 “Buildings on the Same Lot Permits a parking garage of Construction Type I or IIA to abut a Group R-2 building with 1½- hour- protected openings (fire doors) in the abutting exterior wall of the garage and no required opening protective(s) in the abutting wall of a sprinklered R-2 building. Previous editions of the Code did not permit any openings in these abutting exterior walls that are at a “0” fire separation distance apart and required a fire wall design between such buildings to be permitted to have openings between the abutting buildings. 5) 2015 IBC 705.6 Exterior Wall- Structural Stability Exterior fire-rated walls that are braced by floor or roof assemblies that have a lesser fire resistance rating are now permitted. Previous editions of the IBC Code required Construction Type III buildings with two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to have floors that support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls to be upgraded to the two-hour fire rating. This is a major cost since apartment buildings built of Construction Type III under the legacy codes only required one-hour floor and roof assemblies to support the two-hour fire-rated exterior walls. 6) 2015 IBC 717.1.1 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings Ducts will be allowed to leave a fire-rated shaft enclosure, transition horizontally, and then enter another fire-rated shaft if the duct penetrations on each side of the shafts are protected with fire dampers. Note that this is not permitted for clothes dryer exhaust ducts or any other ducts that the I-Codes require to be continuous and uninterrupted. Item 5k Page 3 of 4 7) 2015 IBC 1603.1.8 Special Loads With the increasing use of photovoltaic (solar) panels on rooftops, it has become clear that there is a need for specific code requirements related to these panels. Such panels are considered fixed equipment and as such would fall under the definition of dead load. Rooftop PV panels are considered special loads and their dead load should be indicated on the construction documents. The code language was revised to clarify that the provisions apply to roof loads for the design of the roof structure, not to the design of the photovoltaic panels or modules themselves. 8) 2015 International Residential Code (IRC) R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to doors Glazing installed perpendicular to a door in a closed position and within 24 inches of the door only requires safety glazing if it is on the hinge side of an in-swinging door. 9) 2015 IRC R308.4.7 Glazing adjacent to bottom stair landing. This change will limit the requirement for glazing at the bottom of a landing by excluding windows greater than 180 degrees from the bottom face of the landing. 10) 2015 IRC R315 Carbon Monoxide Alarms The carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Section R315 have been reorganized to clarify their application. For example, the carbon monoxide detection system provisions have been placed in a separate Section R315.6 following all of the carbon monoxide alarm provisions in Sections R315.1 through R315.5. In addition, new charging sections have been added to clarify the scope and make the provisions easier to locate. Several technical changes have also occurred. The carbon monoxide alarm provisions have been rewritten to generally align with the smoke alarm provisions. For example, connection to the house wiring system with battery backup is now required for carbon monoxide alarms installed in new dwellings. 11) 2015 IRC Table R602.3(1) Fastening schedule for structural members. IRC Table R602.3(1), wood frame nailing schedule, is reformatted to give typical nailing options and to make the table consistent with 2015 IBC Table 2304.10.1. The change states the minimum size and number of fasteners for each connection. In most cases, the minimum number of box nails previously required is increased by one. 12) 2015 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 605.2.1 Lead content of drinking water pipe and fittings. Pipe, pipe fittings, joints, valves, faucets and fixture fittings utilized to supply water for drinking or cooking purposes shall comply with NSF 372 and shall have a weighted average lead content of 0.25 percent or less. 13) 2015 IPC 607.3 Thermal expansion The available method to control closed-system pressure increases caused by the heating of water has been limited to the use of thermal expansion tanks only. Item 5k Page 4 of 4 14) 2015 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 307.6 Condensate pumps. Condensate pumps located in uninhabitable spaces, such as attics and crawl spaces, shall be connected to the appliance or equipment served such that when the pump fails, the appliance or equipment will be prevented from operating. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 15) 2015 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 310.1.1.1 Bonding Jumper length. The length of the bonding jumper between the connection length of the bonding jumper between the connection to a gas piping system and the connection to a grounding electrode system shall not exceed 75 feet. Any additional grounding electrodes used shall be bonded to the electrical service grounding electrode system or, where provided, the lightning protection grounding electrode system. 16) 2017 National Electrical Code (NEC) 210.8 Ground-fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel (B) Other than dwelling units. All single-phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 50 amps or less and three- phase receptacles rated 150 volts to ground or less, 100 amperes or less installed in the following locations shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protections for personnel, (1) Bathrooms (2) Kitchens (3) Rooftops 17) 2017 NEC 210.11 Branch Circuits Required (C) Dwelling Units (4) Garage Branch Circuits In addition to the number of branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least one 120-volt, 20 ampere branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacles outlets in attached garages and in detached garages with electric power. This circuit shall have no other outlets. 18) 2017 NEC 210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Protection (A) Dwelling Units AFCI Protection is now required for all 120 volts, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere branch circuits supplying not just outlets but also devices installed in Kitchen and Laundry areas. 19) 2017 NEC 406.12 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250 volts non-locking-type receptacles in the areas of Pre- school, elementary education, dental office, outpatient facilities, transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums and dormitories. Item 5k Ordinance No. 18- __, Page 1 of 8 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ESTABLISHING A NEW ARTICLE 3.20, “EXISTING BUILDING CODE,” OF THE CODE OF ORDINANCES OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, BY ADOPTING THE 2015 EDITION OF THE INTERNATIONAL EXISTING BUILDING CODE, SAVE AND EXCEPT THE DELETIONS AND AMENDMENTS SET FORTH HEREIN; REGULATING THE CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATION, MOVEMENT, ENLARGEMENT, REPLACEMENT, REPAIR, EQUIPMENT, USE AND OCCUPANCY, LOCATION, MAINTENANCE, REMOVAL, AND DEMOLITION OF EVERY EXISTING BUILDING OR STRUCTURE OR ANY APPURTENANCES CONNECTED OR ATTACHED TO EXISTING BUILDINGS OR STRUCTURES WITHIN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to adopt a new Article 3.20, “Existing Building Code”; and, WHEREAS, the Town Council also has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of the Prosper to adopt the 2015 Edition of the International Existing Building Code, save and except the deletions and amendments set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 The Code of Ordinances of the Town of Prosper is hereby amended by adding a new Article 3.20, “Existing Building Code,” to read as follows: “ARTICLE 3.20 EXISTING BUILDING CODE Sec. 3.20.001 Code Adopted; amendments The International Existing Building Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., save and except the deletions and amendments set forth in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes, is hereby adopted as the Existing Building Code for the Town, regulating the construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, removal, and Item 5k Ordinance No. 18- __, Page 2 of 8 demolition of every existing building or structure or any appurtenances connected or attached to existing buildings or structures within the Town (the “2015 International Existing Building Code”). The 2015 International Existing Building Code is made a part of this Article as if fully set forth herein. A copy of the International Existing Building Code, 2015 Edition, copyrighted by the International Code Council, Inc., is on file in the office of the Town Secretary of Prosper being marked and so designated as the 2015 International Existing Building Code. Sec. 3.20.002 Penalty for violation Any person, firm, corporation, or business entity violating this Article shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state and federal law.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason, held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town of Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective January 1, 2019, after its passage and publication as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor Item 5k Ordinance No. 18- __, Page 3 of 8 ATTEST: ____________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _____________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5k Ordinance No. 18- __, Page 4 of 8 Exhibit A TOWN OF PROSPER AMENDMENTS 2015 INTERNATIONAL EXISTING BUILDING CODE The following additions, deletions, and amendments to the 2015 International Existing Building Code adopted herein are hereby approved and adopted. Section [A] 102.4 Referenced codes and standards of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: [A] 102.4 Referenced codes and standards. The codes, when specifically adopted, and standards referenced in this code shall be considered part of the requirements of this code to the prescribed extent of each such reference and as further regulated in Sections 102.4.1 and 102.4.2. Section 202 GENERAL DEFINITIONS of the 2015 International Existing Building Code, definition of “EXISTING BUILDING” is amended to read as follows: [A] EXISTING BUILDING - A building, structure, or space, with an approved final inspection issued under a code edition which is at least two (2) published code editions preceding the currently adopted building code; or a change of occupancy. Sections 405.1.2 Existing fire escapes of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 405.1.2 Existing fire escapes. Existing fire escapes shall continue to be accepted as a component in the means of egress in existing buildings only. Existing fire escapes shall be permitted to be repaired or replaced. Section 405.1.3 New fire escapes of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to delete this Section in its entirety. Section 406.2 Replacement window opening control devices of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 406.2 Replacement window opening control devices. In Group R-2 or R-3 buildings containing dwelling units, window opening control devices complying with ASTM F 2090 shall be installed where an existing window is replaced and where all of the following apply to the replacement window . . . The window opening control device, after operation to release the control device allowing the window to fully open, shall not reduce the minimum net clear opening area of the window unit to less than the area required by Section 1030.2. {no change to remaining text.} Section 406.3 Replacement window emergency escape and rescue openings of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5k Ordinance No. 18- __, Page 5 of 8 406.3 Replacement window emergency escape and rescue openings. Where windows are required to provide emergency escape and rescue openings in Group R-2 and R-3 occupancies, replacement windows shall be exempt from the requirements of Sections 1030.2, 1030.3, and 1030.5 provided the replacement window meets the following conditions: {no change to remaining text} Section 409.1 Conformance of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding an Exception to read as follows: Exception: Moved historic buildings need not be brought into compliance with the exception of new construction features required as the result of such movement including, but not limited to, foundations and/or other structural elements. Section 410.1 Scope of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding an Exception to read as follows: Exception: Components of projects regulated by and registered with the Architectural Barriers Division of the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation shall be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of this Chapter. Section 410.4.2 Complete change of occupancy of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding 7. to the list of requirements to read as follows: 7. At least one (1) accessible family or assisted use toilet room shall be provided in accordance with Chapter 11. Section 602.3 Glazing in hazardous locations of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding a code reference to read as follows: 602.3 Glazing in hazardous locations. Replacement glazing in hazardous locations shall comply with the safety glazing requirements of the 2015 International Existing Building Code, the currently adopted International Energy Conservation Code, or the currently adopted International Residential Code, as applicable. Section 607.1 Material of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 607.1 Material. Existing electrical wiring and equipment undergoing repair shall be allowed to be repaired or replaced with like material, in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. Section 702.6 Materials and methods of the 2015 International Existing Building Code Item 5k Ordinance No. 18- __, Page 6 of 8 is amended to read as follows: 702.6 Materials and methods. All new work shall comply with the materials and methods requirements in the 2015 International Existing Building Code, the currently adopted International Energy Conservation Code, the currently adopted International Mechanical Code, the currently adopted National Electrical Code, and the currently adopted International Plumbing Code, as applicable, that specify material standards, detail of installation and connection, joints, penetrations, and continuity of any element, component, or system in the building. Section 802.1 General of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 802.1 General. Alteration of buildings classified as special use and occupancy as described in Chapter 4 shall comply with the requirements of Section 801.1 and the scoping provisions of Chapter 1, where applicable. Section 803.5.1 Minimum requirement of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 803.5.1 Minimum requirement. Every portion of open-sided walking surfaces, including mezzanines, equipment platforms, aisles, stairs, ramps and landings that are not provided with guards, or those in which the existing guards are judged to be in danger of collapsing, shall be provided with guards. Section 804.1 Scope of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding a sentence to read as follows: For the purpose of fire sprinkler protection and fire alarm requirements included in this Section, the work area shall be extended to include at least the entire tenant space or spaces bound by walls capable of resisting the passage of smoke containing the subject work area, and if the work area includes a corridor, hallway, or other exit access, then such corridor, hallway, or other exit access shall be protected in its entirety on that particular floor level. Section 804.2.2 Groups A, B, E, F-1, H, I, M, R-1, R-2, R-4, S-1 and S-2 of the 2015 International Existing Building Code 2. Exception is amended to read as follows: Exception: Where the building does not have sufficient municipal water supply for design of a fire sprinkler system available to the floor without installation of a new fire pump, fire sprinkler protection shall not be required. Section 804.2.5 Supervision of the 2015 International Existing Building Code Exception is amended to read as follows: Exception: Supervision is not required where the Fire Code does not require such for new construction. Section 804.3 Standpipes of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: Item 5k Ordinance No. 18- __, Page 7 of 8 804.3 Standpipes. Refer to Section 1103.6 of the Fire Code for retroactive standpipe requirements. Section 805.2 General of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to remove Exception 1. in its entirety. Section 805.3.1.1 Single-exit buildings of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to remove 4. in its entirety. Section 805.3.1.2 Fire escapes required of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 805.3.1.2 Fire escapes required. For other than Group I-2, where more than one (1) exit is required, an existing fire escape complying with Section 805.3.1.2.1 shall be accepted as providing one (1) of the required means of egress. Section 805.3.1.2.1 Fire escape access and details of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 805.3.1.2.1 Fire Escape access and details. 1. {no change to text.} 2. Access to a fire escape shall be through a door. 3. {delete in its entirety.} 4. {no change to text.} 5. In all buildings of Group E occupancy up to and including the 12th grade, buildings of Group I occupancy, boarding houses, and childcare centers, ladders of any type are prohibited on fire escapes used as a required means of egress. Section 805.3.1.2.2 Construction of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to delete this Section in its entirety. Section 805.3.1.2.3 Dimensions of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to delete this Section in its entirety. Section 805.5.2 Transoms of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding a sentence to read as follows: B and E occupancies are not included in the list and consideration should be given to adding them depending on existing buildings stock. Section 806.2 Stairways and escalators in existing buildings of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding an Exception to read as follows: Exception: Components of projects regulated by and registered with the Architectural Barriers Division of the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation shall be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of this Chapter. Item 5k Ordinance No. 18- __, Page 8 of 8 Section 904.1 Automatic sprinkler systems of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding add a sentence to read as follows: For the purpose of fire sprinkler protection and fire alarm requirements included in this Section, the work area shall be extended to include at least the entire tenant space or spaces bounded by walls containing the subject work area. If the work area includes a corridor, hallway, or other exit access, then such corridor, hallway, or other exit access shall be protected in its entirety on that particular floor level. Section 904.1.1 High-rise buildings of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended by adding a sentence to read as follows: 904.1.1 High-rise buildings. An automatic sprinkler system shall be provided in work areas of high-rise buildings. Section 1401.2 Applicability of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1401.2 Applicability. Structures existing prior to the date of an approved final inspection issued under a code edition which is at least two (2) published code editions preceding the currently adopted building code; or a change of occupancy, {no change to remaining text.} Section 1401.3.2 Compliance with other codes of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: 1401.3.2 Compliance with other codes. Buildings that are evaluated in accordance with this Section shall comply with the currently adopted International Fire Code. Chapter 16 – Referenced Standards of the 2015 International Existing Building Code is amended to read as follows: IECC Edition as adopted by the State of Texas International Energy Conservation Code®. 301.2, 702.6, 708.1, 811.1, 908.1 End of Exhibit “A” Item 5k Page 1 of 1 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Alex Glushko, AICP, Planning Manager Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance to rezone a portion of Planned Development-65-Single Family (PD-65-SF) and a portion of Planned Development-65-Commercial (PD-65-C) to Planned Development-92-Commercial (PD-92-C), to allow for development of new automobile sales and leasing dealerships (El Dorado Motors), on 17.8± acres, located on the north side of US 380, west of Mahard Parkway. (Z18-0011). Description: On October 23, 2018, the Town Council approved the proposed rezoning request by a vote of 6- 0; an ordinance has been prepared accordingly. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., has approved the standard ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. Ordinance 2.PD Exhibits A, B, C, D, E, F, and G Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance to rezone a portion of Planned Development-65-Single Family (PD-65-SF) and a portion of Planned Development-65-Commercial (PD-65-C) to Planned Development-92-Commercial (PD-92-C), to allow for development of new automobile sales and leasing dealerships (El Dorado Motors), on 17.8± acres, located on the north side of US 380, west of Mahard Parkway. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. PLANNING Item 5l TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-___ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, AMEN DING PROSPER’S ZONING ORDINANCE BY REZONING A TRACT OF LAND CONSISTING OF 17.79 ACRES, SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 962, IN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, COLLIN COUNTY AND DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS FROM PLANNED DEVELOPMENT-65 (PD-65) TO PLANNED DEVELOPMENT-92 (PD-92); DESCRIBING THE TRACT TO BE REZONED; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVING AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE; AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (the “Town Council”) has investigated and determined that the Zoning Ordinance should be amended; and WHEREAS, the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”) has received a request from Eldorado Motors (“Applicant”), to rezone 17.79 acres of land, more or less, in the L. Netherly Survey, Abstract No. 962, in the Town of Prosper, Collin County and Denton County, Texas, from Planned Development-65 to Planned Development-92 (PD-92) and being more particularly described in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes; and WHEREAS, the Town Council has investigated and determined that the facts contained in the request are true and correct; and WHEREAS, all legal notices required for rezoning have been given in the manner and form set forth by law, Public Hearings have been held, and all other requirements of notice and completion of such procedures have been fulfilled; and WHEREAS, the Town Council has further investigated into and determined that it will be advantageous and beneficial to Prosper and its inhabitants to rezone this property as set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS: SECTION 1 Findings Incorporated. The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Amendment to the Town’s Zoning Ordinance. The Town’s Zoning Ordinance, adopted by Ordinance No. 05-20, and Ordinance No. 14-23, are amended as follows: The zoning designation of the below described property containing 17.79 acres of land, more or less, in the L. Netherly Survey, Abstract No. 962, in the Town of Prosper, Collin County and Denton County, Texas, (the “Property”) and all streets, roads, and alleyways contiguous and/or adjacent thereto is hereby zoned as Planned Development-92 and being more particularly described in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes as if set forth verbatim. Item 5l Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 2 The development plans, standards, and uses for the Property in this Planned Development District shall conform to, and comply with 1) the Statement of Intent and Purpose, attached hereto as Exhibit B; 2) the Planned Development Standards, attached hereto as Exhibit C; 3) the Site Plan, attached hereto as Exhibit D; 4) the Development Schedule, attached hereto as Exhibit E; 5) the Façade Plans, attached hereto as Exhibit F; and 6) the Landscape Plans, attached hereto as Exhibit G; which are incorporated herein for all purposes as if set forth verbatim. Except as amended by this Ordinance, the development of the Property within this Planned Development District must comply with the requirements of all ordinances, rules, and regulations of Prosper, as they currently exist or may be amended. Two (2) original, official, and identical copies of the zoning exhibit map are hereby adopted and shall be filed and maintained as follows: a. One (1) copy shall be filed with the Town Secretary and retained as an original record and shall not be changed in any manner. b. One (1) copy shall be filed with the Building Official and shall be maintained up-to- date by posting thereon all changes and subsequent amendments for observation, issuing building permits, certificates of compliance and occupancy, and enforcing the zoning ordinance. Reproduction for information purposes may from time-to-time be made of the official zoning district map. SECTION 3 No Vested Interest/Repeal. No developer or property owner shall acquire any vested interest in this Ordinance or in any other specific regulations contained herein. Any portion of this Ordinance may be repealed by the Town Council in the manner provided for by law. SECTION 4 Unlawful Use of Premises. It shall be unlawful for any person, firm or corporation to make use of said premises in some manner other than as authorized by this Ordinance, and shall be unlawful for any person, firm or corporation to construct on said premises any building that is not in conformity with the permissible uses under this Zoning Ordinance. SECTION 5 Penalty. Any person, firm, corporation or business entity violating this Ordinance or any provision of Prosper’s Zoning Ordinance No. 05-20, or as amended, shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction thereof shall be fined any sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00). Each continuing day’s violation under this Ordinance shall constitute a separate offense. The penal provisions imposed under this Ordinance shall not preclude Prosper from filing suit to enjoin the violation. Prosper retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state and federal law. SECTION 6 Severability. Should any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance be declared unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, it is Item 5l Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 3 expressly provided that any and all remaining portions of this Ordinance shall remain in full force and effect. Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses and phrases be declared unconstitutional or invalid. SECTION 7 Savings/Repealing Clause. Prosper’s Zoning Ordinance No. 05-20 shall remain in full force and effect, save and except as amended by this or any other Ordinance. All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the appeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repealing of the ordinance. Any remaining portions of said ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 8 Effective Date. This Ordinance shall become effective from and after its adoption and publications as required by law. DULY PASSED, APPROVED, AND ADOPTED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. ______________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: _________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5l 1/2" IRF 6 0 9 6 1 0 6 1 1 6 1 2 60 9 BM2 MAG NAIL Z=609.64 A P A R T O F A T R A C T O F LA N D D E S C R I B E D I N A D E E D TO P R O S P E R C J D R L L C CC F # 2 0 1 4 - 2 9 7 2 5 R. P . R . D . C . T . 75' PIPELINE EASEMENT PROBATE CAUSE # ED-2000-06222 15' WATER LINE EASEMENT CCF # 2012-123503 R.P.R.D.C.T. 50' TEMP. CONSTRUCTION EASEMENT PROBATE CAUSE # ED-2000-06222 75 ' 15 ' 50 ' 6 0 8 T.B.M.#2 MAG NAIL SET Z=609.64 CAP/IRF "SPIARS" 6 0 9 A T R A C T O F LA N D D E S C R I B E D I N A D E E D T O FO R D L E N D I N G D E V E L O P M E N T C O M P A N Y L L C . CC F # 2 0 1 5 0 8 0 3 0 0 0 9 6 5 4 8 0 R. P . R . C . C . T . COLLIN CO U N T Y SCHOOL L A N D S U R V E Y , ABSTRACT # 1 4 7 COLLIN CO U N T Y , T E X A S 15' WATER LINE EASEMENT TOWN OF PROSPER CCF# 2012030001379470 & CCF# 2012-123503 1 5 . 0 ' U.S. HIGHWAY 380 84' CONCRETE VARIABLE R.O.W. PER PLAT EX. LAND USE:UNDEVELOPED PROP. LAND USE: AUTOMOBILE SALES/LEASING EX. ZONING:SF / PD-65 PROP. ZONING:C / PD-65 EX. LAND USE:UNDEVELOPED EX. ZONING:SF / PD-65 EX . L A N D U S E : UN D E V E L O P E D EX . Z O N I N G : CC / P D - 4 3 30 ' L A N D S C A P E EA S E M E N T 5' LANDSCAPE SETBACK 15 ' L A N D S C A P E SE T B A C K 1,605' TO LEGACY DR 3,390' TO CR26 EX . L A N D U S E : A U T O M O B I L E S A L E S / L E A S I N G EX . Z O N I N G : C / P D - 8 5 REMAINDER OF TRACT 2 BLOCK D, LOT 1R PROSPER CENTER DOC # 2016-2248 P.R.D.C.T. S 87°27'46" W 53.43' N 85°57'20" E 56.37' N 85°48'19" E 55.01' N 85°48'43" E 55.00' N 85°17'07" E 55.00' S 89°57'41" W 792.71' S 0 0 ° 0 1 ' 5 9 " E 4 3 9 . 6 7 ' S 89°58'01" W 557.59' N 0 1 ° 2 2 ' 2 7 " W 4 4 0 . 0 0 ' POB N 88°44'07" E 9.93' S 89°34'20" W 108.83'S 88°35'49" W 206.94' S 89°02'58" W 166.57' N 0 0 ° 0 2 ' 2 8 " W 2 9 7 . 6 2 ' 5' LANDSCAPE SETBACK L. NETHER L Y S U R V E Y , ABSTRACT # 9 6 2 DENTON C O U N T Y , T E X A S DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 PH O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 PRELIMINARY CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING MAM 9/25/2018 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S EX H I B I T A SP-1 0 GRAPHIC SCALE 1 inch = ft. 50 50 100 50 25 LEGEND PROPERTY BOUNDARY ADJACENT PROPERTY LINE EASEMENT LINE ACCORDING TO MAP NO. 48121C0430G, DATED APRIL 18, 2011 OF THE NATIONAL FLOOD INSURANCE PROGRAM MAP, FLOOD INSURANCE RATE MAP OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS, FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY, FEDERAL INSURANCE ADMINISTRATION, THIS PROPERTY IS WITHIN ZONE "X" (UNSHADED) AND IS NOT WITHIN A SPECIAL FLOOD HAZARD AREA. FLOODPLAIN NOTE PROJECT BENCHMARK #1: MAG NAIL SET ON NORTH EDGE OF PAVEMENT OF US HIGHWAY 380. ELEVATION = 607.02' PROJECT BENCHMARK #1: MAG NAIL SET ON NORTH EDGE OF PAVEMENT OF US HIGHWAY 380. ELEVATION = 609.64' NOTE: THE THOROUGHFARE ALIGNMENT(S) SHOWN ON THIS EXHIBIT ARE FOR ILLUSTRATION PURPOSES AND DOES NOT SET THE ALIGNMENT. THE ALIGNMENT IS DETERMINED AT TIME OF FINAL PLAT. VICINITY MAP N.T.S. U.S. HIGHWAY 380 C. R . 2 6 LE G A C Y D R FISHTRAP RD SITE COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY Item 5l Z18-0011 EXHIBIT B STATEMENT OF INTENT AND PURPOSE A portion of the subject tract is currently zoned Planned Development-65-Commercial (PD-65-C) which requires a Specific Use Permit for automobile sales. The remaining portion of the tract is zoned Planned Development-65-Single Family Residential (PD-65-SF), which does not permit any type of commercial uses. This rezoning will combine the two tracts into one Planned Development-Commercial zoning district which will allow new automobile sales and leasing as a permitted use. There are two proposed automobile dealerships which are shown conceptually as a 50,000 square feet building and a 40,000 square feet building. The specific development standards requested as part of this submittal are further detailed in the attached Exhibit C. Item 5l Z18-0011 EXHIBIT C PLANNED DEVELOPMENT STANDARDS The proposed development will conform to the development standards of the Commercial (C) District of the Town of Prosper’s Zoning Ordinance, as it exists or may be amended, and Subdivision Ordinance, as it exists or may be amended, except as otherwise set forth in these Development Standards. 1.Except as noted below, the Tract shall develop in accordance with the Commercial (C) District requirements of the Town of Prosper’s Zoning Ordinance, as it exists or may be amended. 2.Development Plans a.Site Plan: The tract shall be developed in general accordance with the attached concept plan, set forth in Exhibit D. b.Elevations: The tract shall be developed in general accordance with the attached elevations, set forth in Exhibits F. c.Landscape Plan: The tract shall be developed in general accordance with the attached landscape plan, set forth in Exhibit G. 3.Uses. Uses shall be permitted in accordance with the Commercial (C) District exception a as follows a.New Automobile Sales and Leasing shall be permitted on the subject property. b.The primary use of each building on the subject property shall be New Automobile Sales/Leasing. Used Automobile Sales shall only be permitted as a secondary, incidental use within each building on the subject property. 4.Regulations: a.The requirement for a Wet Pond/Retention Pond found in Subsection 6.09, C. “Wet/Retention Pond Criteria,” of Section 6, “Drainage System Design Requirements,” of the Town of Prosper Engineering Design Standards, shall not apply to this development. All other requirements of Section 6 and the Engineering Design Standards shall apply to this development. b.Outdoor intercoms, speakers, or sound amplification devices shall not be permitted. c.All garage bay doors shall have electric motors for automatic closing. d.All exterior lighting shall be reduced to a ten (10) percent level at the daily close of business. e.At such time the acquisition of additional right-of-way within the subject property is required by TxDOT for roadway improvements along US 380, the proposed landscape berms and buffer shall be reestablished and located outside of the proposed right-of-way dedication area in order to maintain the character of the landscaping provided in the attached exhibits. f.Site plans, façade elevations, and landscape plans shall be required to be approved by the Planning & Zoning Commission and Town Council. 5.Parking: Required parking shall be as follows: a.Inventory parking shall be permitted to provide three consecutive rows. Item 5l X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X IN V E N T O R Y X X X X X X X IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y 4 10 10 6 10 13 IN V E N T O R Y 10 DISPLAY AREA 1/2" IRF 6 0 9 6 1 0 6 1 1 6 1 2 60 9 75' PIPELINE EASEMENT PROBATE CAUSE # ED-2000-06222 15' WATER LINE EASEMENT CCF # 2012-123503 R.P.R.D.C.T. 50' TEMP. CONSTRUCTION EASEMENT PROBATE CAUSE # ED-2000-06222 75 ' 15 ' 50 ' 6 0 8 T.B.M.#2 MAG NAIL SET Z=609.64 CAP/IRF "SPIARS" 6 0 9 15' WATER LINE EASEMENT TOWN OF PROSPER CCF# 2012030001379470 & CCF# 2012-123503 1 5 . 0 ' U.S. HIGHWAY 380 84' CONCRETE VARIABLE R.O.W. PER PLAT PROPOSED USE: AUTOMOTIVE DEALERSHIP BUILDING SIZE: 50,307 SQ.FT. (1 - STORY) PROPOSED USE: AUTOMOTIVE DEALERSHIP BUILDING SIZE: 40,198 SQ.FT. (1 - STORY) 2 0 ' 2 4 ' 2 0 ' 2 0 ' 2 4 ' 2 0 ' 2 0 ' 2 4 ' 20'20'24'20'20'24'20' 20'20'24'20'20'24'20' DRY DETENTION POND RIGHT TURN LANE EXISTING EDGE OF PAVEMENT EXISTING EDGE OF PAVEMENT FIRE LANE AND ACCESS EASMENT FIRE LANE AND ACCESS EASMENT FIRE LANE AND ACCESS EASMENT FI R E L A N E AN D A C C E S S E A S M E N T FI R E L A N E AN D A C C E S S E A S M E N T 1'-6" PIPE RAIL FENCE 6' PIPE RAIL FENCE FH FH FHFH FH FH FH FH FH FH 8' MASONRY SCREEN WALL 6' PIPE RAIL FENCE 6' PIPE RAIL FENCE REMAINDER OF TRACT 2 BLOCK D, LOT 1R PROSPER CENTER DOC # 2016-2248 P.R.D.C.T. 15 . 5 ' 9 ' 9 ' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9 ' 9 ' 2 8 5 . 3 ' 27" HIGH BERM27" HIGH BERM 3 0 ' 2 0 ' 5 9 . 9 ' 5 4 . 1 ' 3 0 ' 24' 30' 9 ' 2 4 ' 2 0 ' 2 0 ' 2 4 ' 2 0 ' 20'24' 9.5' 19.5' 9.5' 9' 9 ' 9 ' 9' 2 0 ' 2 4 ' 2 0 ' 3 0 ' 30 ' 20 ' 20 ' 24 ' 20 ' 36 . 1 ' 24 ' 47 . 8 ' 2 0 ' 3 8 . 9 ' 2 4 ' 4 7 . 8 ' 2 4 ' 2 0 ' 2 0 ' 3 0 ' 2 0 ' 1 0 ' 24' 20'24'13.5' 24' 24' 2 4 ' 1 5 ' L A N D S C A P E S E T B A C K 5' LANDSCAPE SETBACK 3 0 ' L A N D S C A P E E A S E M E N T 5' LANDSCAPE SETBACK 9' FH 11'11' 1 1 ' 1 1 ' 11'9'11' 11' 11' 1 1 ' 1 1 ' 1 1 ' FIRE LANE BFR 5' BFR BFR 1 3 ' 3 6 . 5 ' 2 0 ' R= 3 0 . 0 'R =3 0 .0 'R = 3 0 . 0 ' R =3 0 .0 ' R =3 0 .0 ' R=30.0'R=30.0'R=30.0' R =3 0 .0 ' R =3 0 .0 ' R = 3 0.0'R =3 0 .0 'R=30.0'R=30.0' 6 ' 6 ' SIDEWALKSIDEWALK BFR 9' 9' R=10.0'R=3.0' R=10.0' R=3.0' R=10.0'R=3.0' R =2 0 .0 ' R=3.0' R=3.0' R=10.0' R=3.0' R=3.0'R=10.0' R=3.0' R=10.0'R=3.0' R=3.0' R=3.0' R=10.0' 11' 24'20' 3 . 8 ' 27.3'20'30'20'28.8' 20'30'20'8.6'6.5' 9 ' 9' ENCLOSED TRASH ENCLOSURE BFR BFR BFRBFR SIDEWALK TO CONNECT TO EX. RAMP 3 6 . 2 ' 3 6 . 2 ' 2 0 ' 6 . 3 ' R =20. 0 ' R = 20.0' DELIVERY AREA DELIVERY AREA INVENTORY IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y INVENTORY IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORYINVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY IN V E N T O R Y INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORYINVENTORYINVENTORY IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORYINVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORYINVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORYINVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY INVENTORY EMPLOYEE EMPLOYEE EM P L O Y E E IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y EMPLOYEE EMPLOYEE EMPLOYEE EMPLOYEE IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y IN V E N T O R Y CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CU S T O M E R CUSTOMERCUSTOMERCUSTOMERCUSTOMER EM P L O Y E E 1 1 ' 1'-6" PIPE RAIL FENCE BFR BFR BFR BFR TURN LANE UNDER SEPARATE PLAN DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 PH O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 PRELIMINARY CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING MAM 9/25/2018 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S EX H I B I T D SP-1 0 GRAPHIC SCALE 1 inch = ft. 50 0 100 50 25 PROJECT BENCHMARK #1: MAG NAIL SET ON NORTH EDGE OF PAVEMENT OF US HIGHWAY 380. ELEVATION = 607.02' PROJECT BENCHMARK #2: MAG NAIL SET ON NORTH EDGE OF PAVEMENT OF US HIGHWAY 380. ELEVATION = 609.64' COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS ACCORDING TO MAP NO. 48121C0430G, DATED APRIL 18, 2011 OF THE NATIONAL FLOOD INSURANCE PROGRAM MAP, FLOOD INSURANCE RATE MAP OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS, FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY, FEDERAL INSURANCE ADMINISTRATION, THIS PROPERTY IS WITHIN ZONE "X" (UNSHADED) AND IS NOT WITHIN A SPECIAL FLOOD HAZARD AREA. FLOODPLAIN NOTE VICINITY MAP N.T.S. U.S. HIGHWAY 380 C. R . 2 6 LE G A C Y D R FISHTRAP RD SITE NOTE: 1. PARKING OF DISPLAY AND INVENTORY VEHICLES ON LANDSCAPE EASEMENTS AND PARKING ISLANDS IS PROHIBITED. TOWN OF PROSPER SITE PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 1. DUMPSTERS AND TRASH COMPACTORS SHALL BE SCREENED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ZONING ORDINANCE. 2. OPEN STORAGE, WHERE PERMITTED, SHALL BE SCREENED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ZONING ORDINANCE. 3. OUTDOOR LIGHTING SHALL COMPLY WITH THE LIGHTING AND GLARE STANDARDS CONTAINED WITHIN THE ZONING ORDINANCE AND SUBDIVISION ORDINANCE. 4. LANDSCAPING SHALL CONFORM TO LANDSCAPE PLANS APPROVED BY THE TOWN. 5. ALL ELEVATIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE STANDARDS CONTAINED WITHIN THE ZONING ORDINANCE. 6. BUILDINGS OF 5,000 SQUARE FEET OR GREATER SHALL BE 100% FIRE SPRINKLED. ALTERNATIVE FIRE PROTECTION MEASURES MAY BE APPROVED BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT. 7. FIRE LANES SHALL BE DESIGNED AND CONSTRUCTED PER TOWN STANDARDS OR AS DIRECTED BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT. 8. TWO POINTS OF ACCESS SHALL BE MAINTAINED FOR THE PROPERTY AT ALL TIMES. 9. SPEED BUMPS/HUMPS ARE NOT PERMITTED WITHIN A FIRE LANE. 10. HANDICAPPED PARKING AREAS AND BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY SHALL CONFORM TO THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) AND WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENT, ADOPTED BUILDING CODE. 11. ALL SIGNAGE IS SUBJECT TO BUILDING OFFICIAL APPROVAL. 12. ALL FENCES AND RETAINING WALLS SHALL BE SHOWN ON THE SITE PLAN AND ARE SUBJECT TO BUILDING OFFICIAL APPROVAL. 13. ALL EXTERIOR BUILDING MATERIALS ARE SUBJECT TO BUILDING OFFICIAL APPROVAL AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE APPROVED FAÇADE PLAN. 14.SIDEWALKS OF NOT LESS THAN SIX (6’) FEET IN WIDTH ALONG THOROUGHFARES AND COLLECTORS AND FIVE (5’) IN WIDTH ALONG RESIDENTIAL STREETS, AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS AT ALL CURB CROSSINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED PER TOWN STANDARDS. 15. APPROVAL OF THE SITE PLAN IS NOT FINAL UNTIL ALL ENGINEERING PLANS ARE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. 16. SITE PLAN APPROVAL IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO GRADING RELEASE. 17. ALL NEW ELECTRICAL LINES SHALL BE INSTALLED AND/OR RELOCATED UNDERGROUND. 18. ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE SCREENED FROM PUBLIC VIEW IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ZONING ORDINANCE. 19. ALL LANDSCAPE EASEMENTS MUST BE EXCLUSIVE OF ANY OTHER TYPE OF EASEMENT. 20. IMPACT FEES WILL BE ASSESSED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAND USE CLASSIFICATION(S) IDENTIFIED ON THE SITE DATA SUMMARY TABLE; HOWEVER, CHANGES TO THE PROPOSED LAND USE AT THE TIME CO AND/OR FINISH-OUT PERMIT MAY RESULT IN ADDITIONAL IMPACT FEES AND/OR PARKING REQUIREMENTS. 21. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF CURB UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 22. THE APPROVAL OF A SITE PLAN SHALL BE EFFECTIVE FOR A PERIOD OF EIGHTEEN (18) MONTHS FROM THE DATE OF APPROVAL BY THE PLANNING & ZONING COMMISSION, AT THE END OF WHICH TIME THE APPLICANT MUST HAVE SUBMITTED AND RECEIVED APPROVAL OF ENGINEERING PLANS AND BUILDING PERMITS. IF THE ENGINEERING PLANS AND BUILDING PERMITS ARE NOT APPROVED, THE SITE PLAN APPROVAL, TOGETHER WITH ANY PRELIMINARY SITE PLAN FOR THE PROPERTY, IS NULL AND VOID. PARKING SUMMARY TABLE REQUIRED AUTOMOTIVE SALES/LEASING (1 SPACE PER 500 SF) 90,505 SF 182 (6 ADA) PROVIDED EMPLOYEE / CUSTOMER PARKING PROVIDED 185 (10 ADA) INVENTORY PARKING PARKING PROVIDED 777 TOTAL PARKING PROVIDED 962 LEGEND PROPERTY LINE EASEMENT/SETBACK (AS NOTED) FIRE LANE DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY Item 5l Z18-00011 EXHIBIT E DEVELOPMENT SCHEDULE Below is an anticipated project schedule for the proposed Graff El Dorado Motors development. This schedule is conceptual and subject to change based on permitting/entitlements. The proposed developer is working on obtaining the required manufacturer approvals for the subject tract. Once obtained, then the permitting approvals will start with the Town. • Zoning Submittal to Town – June 2018 • Zoning Approval from Town – November 2018 • Final Site Plan Submittal to Town – TBD • Final Site Plan Approval from Town – TBD • Submit Building Permit – TBD • Final Engineering Approval from Town – TBD • TXDOT Permit – TBD • Building Permit Issuance – TBD • Start Construction – TBD • Construction Complete – TBD Item 5l 23 ' - 4 " 25 ' - 4 " ROOF ELEVATION: 19' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 27' - 0" 292' - 0 7/8" 3 OVERHEAD DOORS MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREY MANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE 25 ' - 4 " 16 ' - 0 " ROOF ELEVATION: 19' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 27' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 15' - 0" OVERHEAD DOORSCOILING DOOR COILING DOOR 75' - 3 1/4"36' - 10 1/8"68' - 9 3/8" MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAMALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREY MANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE 16 ' - 0 " ROOF ELEVATION: 19' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 27' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 15' - 0" OVERHEAD DOORCOILING DOOR 20' - 0"68' - 9 3/8"112' - 1 3/8" MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREYMANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE ROOF ELEVATION: 19' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 27' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 15' - 0" 16 ' - 0 " 7 ' - 4 " 134' - 2 1/8"100' - 0"72' - 6" MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREY MANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL, BLACK MANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE MODULAR BRICK, WHITE CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREY MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM 1. This Conceptual Elevation is for conceptual purposes only. All building plans require review and approval from the Building Inspection Division” 2. All mechanical equipment shall be screened from public view in accordance with the Zoning Ordinance" 3. When permitted, exposed utility boxes and conduits shall be painted to match the building” 4. All signage areas and locations are subject to approval by the Building Inspection Department" 5. Windows shall have a maximum exterior visible reflectivity of ten (10) percent.” ELEVATION NOTES FACADE CALCULATIONS Director VLK Architects, Inc. 2821 W 7th Street , Suite 300 SHEET NO. COPYRIGHT © 2018 VLK ARCHITECTS NOT FOR REGULATORY APPROVAL, PERMITTING OR CONSTRUCTION. PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE JAMES A. STEPHENSON TEXAS LICENSE #9475 SHEET TITLE PROJECT NO. REVISIONS ARCHITECT Revision No. Drawn By Designer Quality Control Proj. Arch. Fort Worth, TX 76107 Main Phone: 817.633.1600 www.vlkarchitects.com Claymoore Engineering, Inc. 1903 Central Drive , Suite #406 CIVIL ENGINEER Bedford , TX 76201 Main Phone: 817.281.0572 www.claymooreeng.com CO N C E P T U A L E L E V A T I O N S T U D I E S JAS JAS VLK LMB ELEVATIONS 9/13/2018 1856.00 A3.01 PR O S P E R , T E X A S QC PRELIMINARY DESIGN SCALE:3/32" = 1'-0"1 SOUTH ELEVATION 50,000 SF BUILDING SCALE:3/32" = 1'-0"2 EAST ELEVATION 50,000 SF BUILDING SCALE:3/32" = 1'-0"4 WEST ELEVATION 50,000 SF BUILDING SCALE:3/32" = 1'-0"3 NORTH ELEVATION 50,000 SF BUILDING NORTH (SF) NORTH (%) SOUTH (SF) SOUTH (%) EAST (SF) EAST (%) WEST (SF) WEST (%) 5555.81 59.94% 296.92 4.48% 1489.46 24.84% 1489.46 25.78% 99.88 1.08% 647.48 9.77% 194.17 3.24% 191.55 3.32% 9268.28 100% 6624.40 100% 5995.65 100% 5777.34 100% FACADE BRICK METAL TOTALSTONE 3612.59 38.97% 5680.03 85.74% 4312.02 71.91% 4096.33 70.90% EXHIBIT F Item 5l ROOF ELEVATION: 19' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 27' - 0" 3 OVERHEAD DOORS 186' - 1 5/8"46' - 11"14' - 7 1/4" MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREY MANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE 16 ' - 0 " ROOF ELEVATION: 19' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 27' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 15' - 0" OVERHEAD DOOR COILING DOOR 74' - 8"36' - 10 1/2" MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREYMANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE ROOF ELEVATION: 19' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 27' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 15' - 0" 75' - 1 7/8"100' - 0"72' - 6" MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREY MANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE 23 ' - 4 " ROOF ELEVATION: 19' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 27' - 0" ROOF ELEVATION: 15' - 0" COILING DOORCOILING DOOR OVERHEAD DOOR 20' - 0"69' - 4 3/8"36' - 3 1/8"75' - 3 1/4"16' - 6 5/8" MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAMMANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREYMANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL, BLACK MANUFACTURED STONE, LUEDERS BLUE MODULAR BRICK, WHITE CAST STONE WATER TABLE, ONYX GREY MANUFACTURED STONE, AUSTIN CREAM 1. This Conceptual Elevation is for conceptual purposes only. All building plans require review and approval from the Building Inspection Division” 2. All mechanical equipment shall be screened from public view in accordance with the Zoning Ordinance" 3. When permitted, exposed utility boxes and conduits shall be painted to match the building” 4. All signage areas and locations are subject to approval by the Building Inspection Department" 5. Windows shall have a maximum exterior visible reflectivity of ten (10) percent.” ELEVATION NOTES FACADE CALCULATIONS Director VLK Architects, Inc. 2821 W 7th Street , Suite 300 SHEET NO. COPYRIGHT © 2018 VLK ARCHITECTS NOT FOR REGULATORY APPROVAL, PERMITTING OR CONSTRUCTION. PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE JAMES A. STEPHENSON TEXAS LICENSE #9475 SHEET TITLE PROJECT NO. REVISIONS ARCHITECT Revision No. Drawn By Designer Quality Control Proj. Arch. Fort Worth, TX 76107 Main Phone: 817.633.1600 www.vlkarchitects.com Claymoore Engineering, Inc. 1903 Central Drive , Suite #406 CIVIL ENGINEER Bedford , TX 76201 Main Phone: 817.281.0572 www.claymooreeng.com CO N C E P T U A L E L E V A T I O N S T U D I E S JAS JAS VLK LMB ELEVATIONS 9/13/2018 1856.00 A3.02 PR O S P E R , T E X A S QC PRELIMINARY DESIGN SCALE:3/32" = 1'-0"1 SOUTH ELEVATION 40,000 SF BUILDING SCALE:3/32" = 1'-0"2 EAST ELEVATION 40,000 SF BUILDING SCALE:3/32" = 1'-0"3 NORTH ELEVATION 40,000 SF BUILDING SCALE:3/32" = 1'-0"4 WEST ELEVATION 40,000 SF BUILDING NORTH (SF) NORTH (%) SOUTH (SF) SOUTH (%) EAST (SF) EAST (%) WEST (SF) WEST (%) 4507.57 61.42% 296.92 5.73% 1478.52 24.93% 1478.52 25.10% 0 0% 440.78 8.51% 102.88 1.73% 104.59 1.78% 7338.49 100% 5177.87 100% 5931.80 100% 5890.51 100% FACADE BRICK METAL TOTALSTONE 2830.92 38.57% 4440.17 85.75% 4350.40 73.34% 4307.40 73.12% EXHIBIT F Item 5l CO CO CO CO CO CO CE CE CE CE CE CE AC ACACACACACACAC WM WM WM WM WM WM WM CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR WM WM WM WM WM WM WM WM WM WM WM WM CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR WM LO LO LO LO LO LOLOLO LO LO LO LO LE LE LE LE LE LE CE CE CE LE LE LE CE CE CE CE LO LO LO LO DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB P P P P P P P P P P P P P CECECE AC ACACACACACACAC Hydromulch Sahara Bermuda Hydromulch Sahara Bermuda Hydromulch Sahara Bermuda CE LO 1/2" IRF P.R.D.C.T. POINT POINT POINT POINT POINT POINT 1ƒ ( X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X WMWMWMWMWMWMCRCRCRCRCRCRCRCRCRCRCRCRCRCR DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY L-1 LA N D S C A P E P L A N H .U H N M O SA J ET S T A 3 O F 9 7 ET X R F P Y MA T C H L I N E - R E F E R T O S H E E T L - 2 F O R C O N T I N U A T I O N O F P L A N MATCHLINE - REFER TO SHEET L-3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PLAN CR Crapemyrtle TREE LEGEND Canopy Trees Ornamental Trees LO Live Oak SO Shumard Oak CE Cedar Elm CR Pink Crapemyrtle SHRUB LEGEND Install 4" Benda Board edging between all shrub beds and grass areas. Install 4" layer of shredded hardwood mulch to all planting beds. The project will have an undergound automatic irrigation system to water all new plantings. LANDSCAPE NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4.Shrub beds to have 12 inches of prepared planting mix (75% import topsoil, 15% composted amendment, 10% washed sand. 5.Shredded hardwood mulch must be contain long strands along with double shred finer material obtained from a local source. 6.Install 4 inches of clean topsoil in all areas of the site disturbed by grading and construction operations. Topsoil shall be free from sticks, debris and rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter and have an organic matter level of 3 percent minimum and a pH range between 5.5 and 7.4 percent. Provide soil test analysis from a soil test laboratory showing soil makeup and organic percentage. 7.Hydromulch or solid sod all areas disturbed by construction TY Tree Yaupon HATCH LEGEND Solid Sod Bermuda Grass activities as shown on plan. CO Chinquapin Oak Dwarf Burford Holly Dwarf Abelia Compact Nandina Barberry Red Yucca Dwarf Indian Hawthorne DB DA CN BA RY DIH Chinese Fringe ShrubLP Texas SageTX Giant LiriopeGL Dwarf YauponDY LE Lacebark Elm AC Arizona Cypress LA Lacey Oak p WM Wax Myrtle 0 GRAPHIC SCALE 1 inch = ft. 15 30 603030 VICINITY MAP N.T.S. U.S. HIGHWAY 380 C. R . 2 6 LE G A C Y D R FISHTRAP RD SITE TA Texas Ash Decomposed granite EXHIBIT G Item 5l CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY TY CO CO CO CO CO CO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO CE CE CE CE CE CE CE CE CE CE SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB ACACACACACACACACACACACACACACACACAC LO LO LE LE LE LE LE LE CE CE CE CE LE CE CE CE CE CE CE DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB CE CE LE LE LE LE AC ACACACACACACACACACACACACACACAC AC Hydromulch Sahara Bermuda Hydromulch Sahara Bermuda 5/8" CIRF "KHA" POINT A PART OF A TRACT OF LAND DESCRIBED IN A DEED TO FORD LEASING DEVELOPMENT COMPANY, LLC CCF# 20150803000965480 R.P.R.D.C.T. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY L-2 LA N D S C A P E P L A N H .U H N M O SA J ET S T A 3 O F 9 7 ET X R F P Y MA T C H L I N E - R E F E R T O S H E E T L - 1 F O R C O N T I N U A T I O N O F P L A N MATCHLINE - REFER TO SHEET L-4 FOR CONTINUATION OF PLAN CR Crapemyrtle TREE LEGEND Canopy Trees Ornamental Trees LO Live Oak SO Shumard Oak CE Cedar Elm CR Pink Crapemyrtle SHRUB LEGEND Install 4" Benda Board edging between all shrub beds and grass areas. Install 4" layer of shredded hardwood mulch to all planting beds. The project will have an undergound automatic irrigation system to water all new plantings. LANDSCAPE NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4.Shrub beds to have 12 inches of prepared planting mix (75% import topsoil, 15% composted amendment, 10% washed sand. 5.Shredded hardwood mulch must be contain long strands along with double shred finer material obtained from a local source. 6.Install 4 inches of clean topsoil in all areas of the site disturbed by grading and construction operations. Topsoil shall be free from sticks, debris and rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter and have an organic matter level of 3 percent minimum and a pH range between 5.5 and 7.4 percent. Provide soil test analysis from a soil test laboratory showing soil makeup and organic percentage. 7.Hydromulch or solid sod all areas disturbed by construction TY Tree Yaupon HATCH LEGEND activities as shown on plan. CO Chinquapin Oak Dwarf Burford Holly Dwarf Abelia Compact Nandina Barberry Red Yucca Dwarf Indian Hawthorne DB DA CN BA RY DIH Chinese Fringe ShrubLP Texas SageTX Giant LiriopeGL Dwarf YauponDY LE Lacebark Elm AC Arizona Cypress LA Lacey Oak p WM Wax Myrtle VICINITY MAP N.T.S. U.S. HIGHWAY 380 C. R . 2 6 LE G A C Y D R FISHTRAP RD SITE 0 GRAPHIC SCALE 1 inch = ft. 30 30 60 30 15 TA Texas Ash Solid Sod Bermuda Grass Decomposed granite EXHIBIT G Item 5l LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE TATATATATA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR WM LA LA LA LA LA LA LA LA SO SO SO SO LA CO CO CO COCO CO CO CE DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA TX DA DA DA DADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADADA DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY DY TXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTXTX CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN DIH DIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIHDIH DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB P P P P P P P P TA TALE DA DA DA BA BA BA DA DA DA BA BA BA DY DY DY TXTXTX DY DY DY TXTXTX DY DY TXTXTXDADA BA BA DA BA BM2 MAG NAIL Z=609.64 T.B.M.#2 MAG NAIL SET Z=609.64 BM2 MAG NAIL Z=609.64 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY L-3 LA N D S C A P E P L A N H .U H N M O SA J ET S T A 3 O F 9 7 ET X R F P Y MA T C H L I N E - R E F E R T O S H E E T L - 4 F O R C O N T I N U A T I O N O F P L A N MATCHLINE - REFER TO SHEET L-1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PLAN CR Crapemyrtle TREE LEGEND Canopy Trees Ornamental Trees LO Live Oak SO Shumard Oak CE Cedar Elm CR Pink Crapemyrtle SHRUB LEGEND Install 4" Benda Board edging between all shrub beds and grass areas. Install 4" layer of shredded hardwood mulch to all planting beds. The project will have an undergound automatic irrigation system to water all new plantings. LANDSCAPE NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4.Shrub beds to have 12 inches of prepared planting mix (75% import topsoil, 15% composted amendment, 10% washed sand. 5.Shredded hardwood mulch must be contain long strands along with double shred finer material obtained from a local source. 6.Install 4 inches of clean topsoil in all areas of the site disturbed by grading and construction operations. Topsoil shall be free from sticks, debris and rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter and have an organic matter level of 3 percent minimum and a pH range between 5.5 and 7.4 percent. Provide soil test analysis from a soil test laboratory showing soil makeup and organic percentage. 7.Hydromulch or solid sod all areas disturbed by construction TY Tree Yaupon HATCH LEGEND activities as shown on plan. CO Chinquapin Oak Dwarf Burford Holly Dwarf Abelia Compact Nandina Barberry Red Yucca Dwarf Indian Hawthorne DB DA CN BA RY DIH Chinese Fringe ShrubLP Texas SageTX Giant LiriopeGL Dwarf YauponDY LE Lacebark Elm AC Arizona Cypress LA Lacey Oak p WM Wax Myrtle VICINITY MAP N.T.S. U.S. HIGHWAY 380 C. R . 2 6 LE G A C Y D R FISHTRAP RD SITE 0 GRAPHIC SCALE 1 inch = ft. 30 30 60 30 15 TA Texas Ash Solid Sod Bermuda Grass Decomposed granite EXHIBIT G Item 5l CR CR CR CR TY TY TY CR CR DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB DB LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA LA LA LA LA LA LA LA CO COCOCO DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DIH DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DA RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BAGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGLGL BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN DA DA DA DA DA DA DA DADADADADADADA CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN DA CE CE CO CO LP LP LP LP CN CN CN CN DIH DIH DIH GL GL GLCN LP DIHRYRY CN CN RY RY CN CN LE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY L-4 LA N D S C A P E P L A N H .U H N M O SA J ET S T A 3 O F 9 7 ET X R F P Y CR Crapemyrtle TREE LEGEND Canopy Trees Ornamental Trees LO Live Oak SO Shumard Oak CE Cedar Elm CR Pink Crapemyrtle SHRUB LEGEND Install 4" Benda Board edging between all shrub beds and grass areas. Install 4" layer of shredded hardwood mulch to all planting beds. The project will have an undergound automatic irrigation system to water all new plantings. LANDSCAPE NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4.Shrub beds to have 12 inches of prepared planting mix (75% import topsoil, 15% composted amendment, 10% washed sand. 5.Shredded hardwood mulch must be contain long strands along with double shred finer material obtained from a local source. 6.Install 4 inches of clean topsoil in all areas of the site disturbed by grading and construction operations. Topsoil shall be free from sticks, debris and rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter and have an organic matter level of 3 percent minimum and a pH range between 5.5 and 7.4 percent. Provide soil test analysis from a soil test laboratory showing soil makeup and organic percentage. 7.Hydromulch or solid sod all areas disturbed by construction TY Tree Yaupon HATCH LEGEND activities as shown on plan. CO Chinquapin Oak MA T C H L I N E - R E F E R T O S H E E T L - 3 F O R C O N T I N U A T I O N O F P L A N MATCHLINE - REFER TO SHEET L-2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PLAN Dwarf Burford Holly Dwarf Abelia Compact Nandina Barberry Red Yucca Dwarf Indian Hawthorne DB DA CN BA RY DIH Chinese Fringe ShrubLP Texas SageTX Giant LiriopeGL Dwarf YauponDY LE Lacebark Elm AC Arizona Cypress LA Lacey Oak p WM Wax Myrtle VICINITY MAP N.T.S. U.S. HIGHWAY 380 C. R . 2 6 LE G A C Y D R FISHTRAP RD SITE 0 GRAPHIC SCALE 1 inch = ft. 30 30 60 30 15 TA Texas Ash Solid Sod Bermuda Grass Decomposed granite EXHIBIT G Item 5l DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY Landscape Plan is conceptual in nature. Must meet all required Zoning requirements Landscape Calculations Town of Prosper, Texas 35 trees Interior Landscape Area Provided 1 tree per 15 spaces Required 963 spaces 1 tree per 30 LF 1039.93 LF 36 trees 65 trees ProvidedRequired 126 trees Street Landscape Area US Hwy 380 At least 1 tree within 150' of each parking space. 15 shrubs per 30 LF 520 shrubs 556 shrubs 15 sf area for each parking space 14,445 SF 27,725 SF Tree Yaupon Cedar Elm Ilex vomitoria Ulmus crassifolia 30 gal. 8' ht. 3" cal. multi-trunk female 30 gal. 8' ht. 3 trunk 3" cal. min.Lagerstroemia indica 'Basham Pink' Pink Crapemyrtle 5 gal. 36" ocIlex chinensis burfordi 'Nana'Dwarf Burford Holly 5 gal. 36" ocAbelia x grandiflora 'Ed. Goucher' Dwarf Abelia 5 gal. 36" ocNandina domestica 'Compacta'Compact Nandina 5 gal. 36" ocBerberis thunbergii 'Atropurpurea' Barberry 5 gal. 36" ocHesperaloe parvifloraRed Yucca Chinquapin Oak Quercus muhlenbergii Shumard Oak Quercus shumardii 5 gal. 36" ocRaphiolepis indica 'Clara' Dwarf Indian Hawthorne TY CE CR DB DA CN BA RY CO SO DIH 10 gal. 36" htLoropetalum 'Ruby'Chinese Fringe ShrubLP ORNAMENTAL TREES SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS PLANT LIST CANOPY TREES Perimeter Landscape ProvidedRequired 1 tree and 1 shrub per 15 LF 49 orn. trees 49 shrubs West property line 49 orn. trees East property line 50 shrubs 50 trees 50 shrubs 727.44 LF 737.48 LF 50 trees 54 shrubs 30 gal. 8' ht. 3" cal. min.Myrica ceriferaWax MyrtleWM Live Oak Quercus virginianaLO 3" cal. B&B 11' ht. 5' spread 3" cal. B&B 11' ht. 5' spread 3" cal. B&B 11' ht. 5' spread 3" cal. B&B 11' ht. 5' spread 72 orn. trees 72 shrubs North property line 25 canopy trees 72 shrubs 1067.33LF 30 gal. 8' ht. 3 trunk 3" cal. min.Lagerstroemia indica 'Dynamite' Red CrapemyrtleCR 5 gal. 36" ocLeucophyllum frutescens 'silverado'Texas SageTX Lacey Oak Quercus shumardiiLA Arizona Cypress Quercus virginianaAC 3" cal. B&B 11' ht. 5' spread 3" cal. B&B 11' ht. 5' spread Lacebark Elm Ulmus parvifolia LE 3" cal. B&B 11' ht. 5' spread P 5 gal. 36" ocLIriope giganteaGiant LiriopeGL 5 gal. 36" ocIlex vomitoria 'Nana'Dwarf YauponDY DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. CHECKED: ASD/HCV DRAWN:ASD/HCV DESIGN: 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 P H O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 9/26/2018 MAM TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 EL D O R A D O M O T O R S US H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 PR O S P E R , T E X A S COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY 962, 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 SURVEYOR: EAGLE SURVEYING 210 S. ELM STREET, SUITE: 104 DENTON, TEXAS 76201 PH: 940.222.3009 STAN GRAFF 8901 GOVERNOR'S ROW DALLAS, TX 75254 CASE #: Z18-0011 EL DORADO MOTORS CONTACT NAME: STAN GRAFF CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE CONTACT NAME: KIRK ROSS DENTON & COLLIN BEING A 17.79 AC TRACT OF LAND SITUATED IN THE L. NETHERLY SURVEY, ABSTRACT NUMBER 962, TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY TEXAS, AND BEING A PORTION OF TRACT 2, LOT 1R, BLOCK D, PROSPER CENTER, AS SHOWN BY THE REVISED CONVEYANCE PLAT THEREOF RECORDED IN DOCUMENT NO. 2016-2248 OF THE PLAT RECORDS OF DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS. PORTION OF SITE ALSO LOCATED WITHIN COLLIN COUNTY, L. NETHERLY COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY L-5 LA N D S C A P E D E T A I L S H .U H N M O SA J ET S T A 3 O F 9 7 ET X R F P Y WATER BASIN SHRUB PLANTING SEE PLAN TRIANGULAR SPACING SCALE: NONE EQUAL MULTI-TRUNK PLANTING PREPARE SOIL MIX AND FERTILIZER PER SPECS. TOP OF BALL OR ROOT CROWN 1" ABOVE FIN. STEEL EDGING SEE PLAN GRADE PLACING PREPARED MIX SCARIFY BOTTOM OF PLANTING BED BEFORE EQ U A L PREPARED SOIL MIX AND FERTILIZER (SEE SPECS) 12" 4" MULCH LAYER SCALE: NONE 4" NATIVE SOIL 4" MULCH LAYER 4" MULCH LAYER 12" DEPTH OF PLANTING MIX TRIANGULAR SPACING EQ U A L EQUAL SCALE: NONE GROUNDCOVER PLANTING234 8" DETAIL FOR ARBOR-GUY REFER TO ANCHORING STEEL EDGING SEE PLAN CANOPY TREE PLANTING SCALE: NONE1 TREE STAKE SOLUTIONS LLC 9973 FM 521 ROAD ROSHARON, TX 77583 PHONE: (281) 778-1400 FAX: (281) 778-1425 www.treestakesolutions.comŒSolutions UNDISTURBED SOIL NAIL STAKE ROOT ANCHOR U-BRACKET ROOTBALL PLANTING HOLE UNDISTURBED SOIL ROOT ANCHOR U-BRACKET ROOTBALL PLANTING HOLE TREE TREE NAIL STAKE PLANTING HOLE TREE U-BRACKET ROOT ANCHOR TREE TRUNK ROOTBALL 1. WITH TREE IN A STRAIGHT & PLUMB POSITION, CENTER THE APPROPRIATE ROOT ANCHOR SAFETY STAKE AROUND THE TRUNK, WITH RINGS LAYING FLAT AGAINST ROOTBALL, U-BRACKETS FACING UP. 2. INSERT 1 OF 3 NAIL STAKES THROUGH EACH OF THE U-BRACKETS. NAILS SHOULD REST IN THE UNDISTURBED SOIL AT THE BOTTOM OF THE TREE PIT. ALL NAILS SHOULD FIT SNUG AGAINST THE SIDE OF THE ROOTBALL. (FOR HAND OR MACHINE DUG TREES, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO PENETRATE 1" - 4" OF OUTER AREA OF THE ROOTBALL WITH THE NAIL.) 3. NAIL STAKES SHOULD BE DRIVEN STRAIGHT DOWN INTO THE UNDISTURBED SOIL BELOW THE ROOTBALL. THE NAILS ARE NOW CAGING THE ROOTBALL IN PLACE, WHILE THE TOP BRACKET PINS THE ROOTBALL DOWN. AFTER THE TREE STAKE IS INSTALLED, A LAYER OF MULCH CAN BE ADDED OVER THE STAKE. REMOVE ROOT ANCHOR AFTER TREE IS ESTABLISHED. ITEM # 5 BG 15 BG 30 BG 45/65 BG DESCRIPTION 5 GALLON OR 10" ROOTBALL 10/15 GALLON OR 17" ROOTBALL 20/30 GALLON OR 22" ROOTBALL 45/65 GALLON OR 27-30" ROOTBALL NAIL LENGTH X 3PC (INCLUDED) #4 X 24" #4 X 36" #4 X 36" #4 X 48" ITEM # 100 BG 150 BG 200 BG 300 BG DESCRIPTION 95/100 GALLON OR 36" ROOTBALL 150 GALLON OR 42" ROOTBALL 200 GALLON OR 48" ROOTBALL 300 GALLON OR 58" ROOTBALL NAIL LENGTH X 3PC (INCLUDED) #5 X 48" #5 X 60" #5 X 72" #5 X 72" ROOT ANCHORTM BELOW GRADE SAFETY STAKE SIZING CHART 26 42 21 176 96 84 53 35 25 24 69 33 27 19 45 53 16 49 39 54 79 Town of Prosper Notes Texas Ash Fraxinus texensisTA 3" cal. B&B 11' ht. 5' spread22 EXHIBIT G Item 5l Page 1 of 1 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Alex Glushko, AICP, Planning Manager Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance rezoning 48.1± acres of Agriculture (A), and 16.4± acres of Single Family-15 (SF-15), to Planned Development-94-Mixed Use (PD-94-MU), in order to facilitate a mixed-use development (WestSide), located on the northeast corner of FM 1385 and US 380. (Z18-0012). Description: On November 27, 2018, the Town Council approved the rezoning request, by a vote of 5-0, subject to: 1.Revising the Development Standards (Exhibit C), regarding the architectural requirements for the indoor commercial amusement building, to allow for a maximum of 80% tilt wall, a maximum of 10% secondary material, and minimum of 10% stone, per elevation; and 2.Berming shall be required behind the Entertainment/Indoor Commercial Amusement structure located in Phase 2A as reflected on the Phasing Diagram. Since the meeting, the applicant has revised the zoning request per the Town Council’s conditions of approval, and an ordinance has been prepared accordingly. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., has approved the standard ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. Ordinance 2.Ordinance Exhibits A-G Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance rezoning 48.1± acres of Agriculture (A), and 16.4± acres of Single Family-15 (SF-15), to Planned Development-94-Mixed Use (PD-94-MU), in order to facilitate a mixed-use development (WestSide), located on the northeast corner of FM 1385 and US 380. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. PLANNING Item 5m TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE AMENDING PROSPER’S ZONING ORDINANCE NO. 05-20; REZONING A TRACT OF LAND CONSISTING OF 64.501 ACRE S, MORE OR LESS, SITUATED IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593, THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT 447, THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79, THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671, THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573, AND THE A. JAMISON SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 672, IN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS, HERETOFORE ZONED AGRICULTURAL (A) AND SINGLE FAMILY- 15 (SF-15) IS HEREBY REZONED AND PLACED IN THE ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF PLANNED DEVELOPMENT-94-MIXED USE (PD-94- MU); DESCRIBING THE TRACT TO BE REZONED; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVING AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE; AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (the “Town Council”), has investigated and determined that the Town’s Zoning Ordinance should be amended; and WHEREAS, the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), received a request from MCF Investments (“Applicant”), to rezone 64.501 acres of land, more or less, situated in the B. Hodges Survey, Abstract No. 593, the J. Gonzalez Survey, Abstract 447, the P. Barnes Survey, Abstract No. 79, the R. Taylor Survey, Abstract No. 1671, the J. Haynes Survey, Abstract No. 573, and the A. Jamison Survey, Abstract No. 672, in the Town of Prosper, Denton County, Texas; and WHEREAS, the Town Council has investigated into and determined that the facts contained in the request are true and correct; and WHEREAS, all legal notices required for rezoning have been given in the manner and form set forth by law, and public hearings have been held on the proposed rezoning and all other requirements of notice and completion of such zoning procedures have been fulfilled; and WHEREAS, the Town Council has further investigated into and determined that it will be advantageous and beneficial to Prosper and its inhabitants to rezone this property as set forth below. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 Findings Incorporated. The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Amendments to the Town’s Zoning Ordinance. The Town’s Zoning Ordinance, adopted by Ordinance No. 05-20 is amended as follows: The zoning designation of the below-described Item 5m Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 property containing 64.501 acres of land, more or less, situated in the B. Hodges Survey, Abstract No. 593, the J. Gonzalez Survey, Abstract 447, the P. Barnes Survey, Abstract No. 79, the R. Taylor Survey, Abstract No. 1671, the J. Haynes Survey, Abstract No. 573, and the A. Jamison Survey, Abstract No. 672, in the Town of Prosper, Denton County, Texas, (the “Property”) and all streets, roads and alleyways contiguous and/or adjacent thereto is hereby rezoned as Planned Development-94-Mixed Use (PD-94-MU). The property as a whole and the boundaries for each zoning classification are more particularly described in Exhibit “A” attached hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes as if set forth verbatim. The development plans, standards, and uses for the Property in this Planned Development District shall conform to, and comply with 1) the Statement of Intent and Purpose, attached hereto as Exhibit “B”; 2) the Planned Development Standards, attached hereto as Exhibit “C”; 3) the Site Plan, attached hereto as Exhibit “D”; 4) the Development Schedule and Phasing Plan, attached hereto as Exhibit “E”; 5) the Elevations, attached hereto as Exhibit “F”; and 6) the Landscape Plan, attached hereto as Exhibit “G”; which are incorporated herein for all purposes as if set forth verbatim. All development plans, standards, and uses for the Property shall comply fully with the requirements of all ordinances, rules, and regulations of the Town of Prosper, as they currently exist or may be amended. Two (2) original, official, and identical copies of the zoning exhibit map are hereby adopted and shall be filed and maintained as follows: a. One (1) copy shall be filed with the Town Secretary and retained as an original record and shall not be changed in any manner. b. One (1) copy shall be filed with the Building Official and shall be maintained up-to- date by posting thereon all changes and subsequent amendments for observation, issuing building permits, certificates of compliance and occupancy, and enforcing the zoning ordinance. Reproduction for information purposes may from time-to-time be made of the official zoning district map. SECTION 3 No Vested Interest/Repeal. No developer or property owner shall acquire any vested interest in this Ordinance or in any other specific regulations contained herein. Any portion of this Ordinance may be repealed by the Town Council in the manner provided for by law. SECTION 4 Unlawful Use of Premises. It shall be unlawful for any person, firm or corporation to make use of said premises in some manner other than as authorized by this Ordinance, and shall be unlawful for any person, firm or corporation to construct on said premises any building that is not in conformity with the permissible uses under this Zoning Ordinance. SECTION 5 Penalty. Any person, firm, corporation or business entity violating this Ordinance shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction thereof shall be fined any sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00). Each continuing day’s violation under this Item 5m Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 3 Ordinance shall constitute a separate offense. The penal provisions imposed under this Ordinance shall not preclude Prosper from filing suit to enjoin the violation. Prosper retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state and federal law. SECTION 6 Severability. Should any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance be declared unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, it is expressly provided that any and all remaining portions of this Ordinance shall remain in full force and effect. Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses and phrases be declared unconstitutional or invalid. SECTION 7 Savings/Repealing Clause. Prosper’s Zoning Ordinance shall remain in full force and effect, save and except as amended by this or any other Ordinance. All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the appeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repealing of the ordinance. Any remaining portions of said ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 8 Effective Date. This Ordinance shall become effective from and after its adoption and publications as required by law. DULY PASSED, APPROVED, AND ADOPTED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. ______________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: _________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: _________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5m Scale: 1"=100' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 LOCATION MAP 1" = 2000' PROJECT LOCATION METES AND BOUNDS DESCRIPTION TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit A WestSide BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 POINT OF BEGINNING 50' R. O . W . 50 ' R . O . W . 50' R. O . W . 64.051 Acres ( 2,790,075 Sq. Ft.) Cab. X , P g . 7 1 7 P R D C T va r . w i d t h R . O . W . variable width R.O.W. Doc. No. 2012-59927 OPRDCT 50' R. O . W . 50 ' R . O . W . Doc. No. 2012-59927 OPRDCT Doc. No. 2001-66260 OPRDCT Item 5m Z18-0012 EXHIBIT B STATEMENT OF INTENT AND PURPOSE WESTSIDE 1. Statement of Intent A. Overall Intent The purpose of this project is to create a walkable urban neighborhood using a horizontal mix of uses. Access to shopping, housing, community retail and park land promotes a quality of life that nurtures the public health, safety, comfort, convenience, prosperity and general welfare of the immediate community, as well as to assist in the orderly and controlled growth and development of the land area described within this document. B. Description of Property The subject property comprises approximately 64 acres of vacant land at the northeast corner of U.S. Highway 380 and F.M. 1385 in Prosper, Texas. It is additionally bounded by the Glenbrooke single family neighborhood to the north and Doe Branch Creek to the east. An existing trail exists along the property’s north boundary and currently serves the adjacent single family neighborhood. This trail may extend into the Doe Branch drainage system and be part of the larger Town of Prosper Trails Plan. C. Description of Proposed Property The subject property as depicted in Exhibit “D” has been divided into two distinct sub-districts. The purpose of sub-district requirements is to define the character of new development within each sub-district. They have been carefully designed to allow enough flexibility for creative building solutions, while being prescriptive in areas necessary to preserve consistency throughout the development. Given that the subject property resides at the hard corner of two major thoroughfares and will serve as a gateway to the Town of Prosper, a portion of land with a size yet to be determined, will be set aside as a signage easement for a Town gateway sign near the intersection of U.S. 380 and F.M. 1385. 2. Current Zoning and Land Uses A. Current Zoning The subject property comprises land that fall under two distinct zoning classifications. At the intersection of U.S. 380 and F.M. 1385 is a small portion of acreage that zoned for Single Family. The remainder of the property is zoned for Agriculture. B. Future Land Use Plan The Future Land Use Plan designates the entire subject property as US 380 District, which is defined as having a variety of uses, such as big box development, hotels, banks, gas/convenience and residential that serves as a buffer between the commercial and nearby single family. Item 5m 1 Z18-0012 EXHIBIT C DEVELOPMENT STANDARDS WESTSIDE Conformance with the Town’s Zoning Ordinance and Subdivision Ordinance: Except as otherwise set forth in these Development Standards, the regulations of the Town’s Zoning Ordinance, as it exists or may be amended, and the Subdivision Ordinance, as it exists or may be amended, shall apply. Tract A – Retail District A1. Except as noted below, the Tract shall develop in accordance with the Retail District as it exists or may be amended. A2. Uses. Uses shall be permitted in accordance with the Retail District with the exception of the following: Permitted Uses 1. Restaurant (with Drive-Through) a. A restaurant with drive-through shall be permitted by right in accordance with the Conditional Development Standards, outlined in the Zoning Ordinance. A maximum of two (2) noncontiguous drive-through restaurants shall be permitted along US 380, and a maximum of two (2) drive-through restaurants shall be permitted along FM 1385, as shown on Exhibit D. 2. Hotel, Limited Service a. A maximum of two (2) limited service hotels shall be permitted by right on the subject property, as shown on Exhibit D, and shall otherwise be permitted in accordance with the Conditional Development Standards, outlined in the Zoning Ordinance. Prohibited Uses: 1. Athletic Stadium or Field, Public 2. Automobile Parking Lot/Garage 3. Automobile Paid Parking Lot/Garage 4. Recycling Collection Point 5. School District Bus Yard A3. Regulations. Regulations shall be permitted in accordance with the Retail District with the exception of the following: 1. Maximum Height a. Commercial Amusement, Indoor: Two (2) stories, no greater than fifty (50) feet at the parapet height, with an additional twenty (20) feet above the parapet for a marquee. b. Hotel, Limited Service: Five (5) stories, no greater than seventy-five (75) feet. i. Minimum height of four (4) stories. A4. Design Guidelines 1. Elevation Review and Approval a. Conceptual Elevations, conforming to Exhibit F, shall be submitted at the time of Preliminary Site Plan, subject to approval by the Planning & Zoning Commission. Item 5m 2 b. Detailed Façade Plans conforming to the Conceptual Elevations shall be submitted for each building at the time of Site Plan, subject to approval by the Planning & Zoning Commission. Façade Plans for the Limited Service Hotels and the Indoor Commercial Amusement uses shall also be subject to Town Council approval. 2. Architectural Standards a. At least eighty percent (80%) of each building’s façade (excluding doors and windows) shall be finished in one of the following materials: Masonry (brick or stone) i. Commercial Amusement, Indoor may utilize architectural finished concrete as a primary masonry material, and may be used for up to one hundred percent (80%) of a building elevation, as shown on Exhibit F. In addition, a maximum of ten percent (10%) secondary material, and minimum of ten percent (10%) stone, per elevation, shall be required for Commercial Amusement, Indoor. ii. Limited Service Hotels may utilize sintered stone as a primary masonry material, as shown on Exhibit F. b. For retail/restaurant uses, no more than thirty percent (30%) of each façade elevation shall use wood-based high pressure laminate (i.e. Prodema, Trespa, CompactWood), as shown on Exhibit F. c. No more than fifteen percent (15%) of each façade elevation may use a combination of accent materials such as cedar or similar quality decorative wood, architectural metal panel, tile, stucco, or Exterior Insulating Finishing System (EIFS). Stucco and EIFS may only be used eight feet (8’) above the ground floor and is prohibited on all building elevations with the exception of its use for exterior trim and molding features. Commercial Amusement, Indoor shall be limited to a maximum ten percent (10%). d. Architectural embellishments not intended for human occupancy that are integral to the architectural style of the buildings, including spires, belfries, towers, cupolas, domes, marquees and roof forms whose area in plan is no greater than fifteen percent (15%) of the ground floor footprint may exceed the height limits by up to ten feet (10’). e. No single material shall exceed eighty percent (80%) percent of an elevation area. Except for Commercial Amusement, Indoor, a minimum of twenty percent (20%) of the front façade and all facades facing public right-of-way shall be natural or manufactured stone. A minimum of ten percent (10%) of all other facades shall be natural or manufactured stone. Commercial Amusement, Indoor shall require a minimum ten percent (10%) stone, per elevation. i. All buildings shall be designed to incorporate a form of architectural articulation every thirty feet (30’), both horizontally along each wall’s length and vertically along each wall’s height. Acceptable articulation may include the following: ii. Canopies, awnings, or porticos; iii. Recesses/projections; iv. Arcades; v. Arches; vi. Display windows, including a minimum sill height of thirty (30) inches; vii. Architectural details (such as tile work and moldings) integrated into the building facade; viii. Articulated ground floor levels or base; ix. Articulated cornice line; x. Integrated planters or wing walls that incorporate landscape and sitting areas; xi. Offsets, reveals or projecting rib used to express architectural or structural bays; or xii. Varied roof heights; Item 5m 3 f. All buildings shall be architecturally finished on all four (4) sides with same materials, detailing, and features. g. Except for the Commercial Amusement, Indoor, all primary and secondary exterior building materials (exclusive of glass) shall be of natural texture and shall be neutrals, creams, or other similar, non-reflective earth tone colors. Bright, reflective, pure tone primary or secondary colors, such as red, orange, yellow, blue, violet, or green are not permitted. h. Corporate identities that conflict with the building design criteria shall be reviewed on a case-by-case basis and approved by the Director of Development Services or his/her designee. The applicant may appeal the decision to the Planning & Zoning Commission and Town Council using the appeal procedure in Chapter 4, Section 1 of the Town’s Zoning Ordinance. i. Exposed conduit, ladders, utility boxes, and drain spouts shall be painted to match the color of the building or an accent color. Natural metal finishes (patina) are an acceptable alternative to paint. j. All retail/commercial buildings with facades greater than two hundred feet (200’) in length shall incorporate wall plane projections or recesses that are at least six feet (6’) deep. Projections/recesses must be at least twenty five percent (25%) of the length of the facade. Except for Commercial Amusement, Indoor, no uninterrupted length of facade may exceed one hundred feet (100’) in length. 3. Windows and Doors a. All ground floor front facades of buildings along streets or public ways with on-street parking or that face directly onto Open Space and contain non-residential uses shall have transparent storefront windows covering no less than thirty percent (30%) of the façade area. Hotels shall have no less than ten percent (10%) of the façade. i. Clear glass is required in all non-residential storefronts. Smoked, reflective, or black glass that blocks two-way visibility is only permitted above the first story. Windows shall have a maximum exterior visible reflectivity of thirty percent (30%). b. At the time of Site Plan in conjunction with the detailed Façade Plans for a Limited Service Hotel, window detailing shall be provided, including but not limited to articulations, recesses, and/or projections. 4. Awning, Canopies, Arcades, and Overhangs a. Awnings shall not be internally illuminated. b. Canopies shall not exceed one hundred linear feet (100’) without a break of at least five feet (5’). c. Awnings and canopies shall not extend beyond ten feet (10’) from the main building façade. A5. Additional Standards 1. Open Space a. Urban Open Space i. An open space as depicted on the Landscape Plan (Exhibit G) shall comprise a minimum of one (1) acre of useable land area that will serve as the central park to the commercial development. A minimum of one (1) pedestrian connection shall be required from the Urban Open Space to the Rural Open Space; a minimum of one (1) pedestrian connection shall be required from the Urban Open Space to the Glenbrooke neighborhood via Kent Drive. Gates and/or fencing on any pedestrian or vehicular way accessing Kent Drive shall be prohibited. Item 5m 4 ii. The urban park open space shall be constructed at the time of construction of phase 1. The urban park open space shall be constructed at the developer’s cost. iii. The hike and bike trail system and trailhead shall be constructed at the time of construction of phase 1B. The hike and bike trail system shall be constructed at the developer’s cost. b. Rural Open Space i. An open space as depicted on the Landscape Plan (Exhibit G) shall comprise a minimum of nine (9) acres of useable land area that will serve the greater community with both active and passive open space. c. Combined Urban Open Space and Rural Open Space shall collectively satisfy all Open Space requirements for both Tract A and Tract B as required by the Town of Prosper Zoning Ordinance. 2. Landscape Screening and Buffering a. A thirty-foot (30’) landscape easement shall be required along roadways when an adjacent building sides or backs the road. The landscape buffer shall consist of a minimum three- foot (3’) foot berm. b. A minimum of twenty feet (20’) of landscape easement shall be exclusive of all utility easements, right turn lanes, drainage easements, and rights-of-way. None of the required trees and/or shrubs shall be located within any utility easement. c. A minimum ten-foot (10’) landscape buffer is required adjacent to Urban and Rural Open Space. d. Berming shall be required behind the Entertainment/Indoor Commercial Amusement structure located in Phase 2A as reflected on the Phasing Diagram. 3. Lot Frontage a. Lots are not required to front on a public right-of-way, provided an access easement is established by plat prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy (CO) for any building on a lot not fronting on right-of-way. Tract B – Multifamily District B1. Except as noted below, the Tract shall develop in accordance with the Multifamily District as it exists or may be amended. B2. Multifamily Construction 1. For Phase 1B, as shown on Exhibit E2, which consists of a maximum of 243 units, construction may not commence until construction of the first floor framing has begun on the restaurant/retail building as shown on Lot 8 on Exhibit D and the Limited Service Hotel on Lot 15 on Exhibit D. 2. For Phase 2B, as shown on Exhibit E2, which consists of a maximum of 237 units, construction may not commence until vertical construction has begun on a minimum fifty thousand (50,000) square foot Indoor Commercial Amusement building or similar size retail building. B3. Regulations. Regulations shall be permitted in accordance with the Multifamily District with the exception of the following: 1. Maximum Number of Units: Four hundred and eighty (480) units. Item 5m 5 2. Maximum Height: a. Two (2) stories, no greater than forty feet (40’) for buildings within one hundred (100) feet of a single family zoning district. b. Three (3) stories, no greater than fifty feet (50’). c. Four (4) stories, no greater than sixty-five feet (65’). 3. Size of Yards a. In accordance with Exhibit D. 4. Minimum Dwelling Area a. One (1) bedroom: 650 square feet b. Two (2) bedroom: 925 square feet c. Three (3) bedroom: 1,150 square feet 5. Lot Coverage: Maximum fifty percent (50%) B4. Design Guidelines 1. Elevation Review and Approval a. Conceptual Elevations, conforming to Exhibit F, shall be submitted at the time of Preliminary Site Plan, subject to approval by the Planning & Zoning Commission. b. Detailed Façade Plans conforming to the Conceptual Elevations shall be submitted for each building at the time of Site Plan, subject to approval by the Planning & Zoning Commission. 2. Architectural Standards a. At least eighty percent (80%) of each building’s façade (excluding doors and windows) shall be finished in one of the following materials: Masonry (brick and stone). b. No more than fifteen percent (15%) of each façade elevation shall use a combination of accent materials such as cedar or similar quality decorative wood, fiber cement siding, resin- impregnated wood panel system, cementitious-fiber clapboard (not sheet) with at least a fifty (50) year warranty, architectural metal panel, split-face concrete block, tile, stucco, or Exterior Insulating Finishing System (EIFS). Stucco and EIFS may only be used eight feet (8’) above the ground floor and is prohibited on all building elevations with the exception of its use for exterior trim and molding features. c. Any enclosed one or two-car garage shall be designed and constructed of the same material as the primary building. B5. Additional Standards 1. Open Space a. Urban Open Space i. An open space as depicted on the Landscape Plan (Exhibit G) shall comprise a minimum of one (1) acre of useable land area that will serve as the central park to the commercial development. A minimum of one (1) pedestrian connection shall be required from the Urban Open Space to the Rural Open Space; a minimum of one (1) pedestrian connection shall be required from the Urban Open Space to the Glenbrooke neighborhood via Kent Drive. Gates and/or fencing on any pedestrian or vehicular way accessing Kent Drive shall be prohibited. ii. The urban park open space shall be constructed at the time of construction of Phase 1. The urban park open space shall be constructed at the developer’s cost. Item 5m 6 iii. The hike and bike trail system and trailhead shall be constructed at the time of construction of phase 1B. The hike and bike trail system shall be constructed at the developer’s cost. b. Rural Open Space i. An open space as depicted on the Landscape Plan (Exhibit G) shall comprise a minimum of nine (9) acres of useable land area that will serve the greater community with both active and passive open space. c. Combined Urban Open Space and Rural Open Space shall collectively satisfy all Open Space requirements for both Tract A and Tract B as required by the Town of Prosper Zoning Ordinance. 2. Landscape Screening and Buffering a. As depicted on the Landscape Plan (Exhibit G), two (2) rows of minimum three inch (3”) caliper trees every fifty feet (50’) on center, offset, shall be planted along the northern property line. b. A minimum of twenty feet (20’) of landscape easement shall be exclusive of all utility easements, right turn lanes, drainage easements, and rights-of-way. None of the required trees and/or shrubs shall be located within any utility easement, except for the twenty-five foot (25’) UTRWD utility easement that currently resides immediately south of the property’s north property line. c. A minimum ten-foot (10’) landscape buffer is required adjacent to Rural Open Space. 3. Lot Frontage a. Lots are not required to front on a public right-of-way, provided an access easement is established by plat prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy (CO) for any building on a lot not fronting on right-of-way. 4. Parking a. Minimum “Off-Street” Parking. For the purpose of this ordinance, off-street parking shall mean any parking not located immediately adjacent to and along public drives (i.e. parallel parking) used for internal circulation throughout the development. i. One (1) and two (2) bedroom units: 1.8 parking spaces per unit. ii. Three (3) bedroom units: 2.0 parking spaces per unit. b. Tandem parking shall count towards the parking provided for each designated tract or phase that the parking resides within. c. Surface parallel parking that is provided along interior drives shall count towards the parking provided for each designated tract or phase that the parking resides within. 5. The provisions of Chapter 4, Section 9.14 (Non-Residential and Multifamily Development Adjacent to a Major Creek) shall apply to the proposed development. 6. The provisions of Chapter 4, Section 9.16 (Residential Open Space) shall apply to the proposed development. 7. The provision of Chapter 4, Section 9.17 (Multifamily Site Design) shall not apply to the proposed development. Item 5m Scale: 1"=100' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 SHT. 1 OF 8 TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit D Conceptual Plan WestSide BLOCK A, LOTS 1-19 BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS LOCATION MAP 1" = 2000' PROJECT LOCATION APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 va r . w i d t h R . O . W . variable width R.O.W. Doc. No. 2012-59927 OPRDCT 50' R. O . W . 50 ' R . O . W . Doc. No. 2012-59927 OPRDCT Cab. X , P g . 7 1 7 P R D C T Cab. X , P g . 7 1 7 P R D C T 50' R. O . W . va r . w i d t h R . O . W . Item 5m Scale: 1"=50' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 SHT. 2 OF 8 TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit D Conceptual Plan WestSide BLOCK A, LOTS 1-19 BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS LOCATION MAP 1" = 2000' PROJECT LOCATION M A T C H L I N E S H T . 5 M A T C H L I N E SHT. 3 APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 variable width R.O.W. Item 5m SHT. 3 OF 8 TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit D Conceptual Plan WestSide BLOCK A, LOTS 1-19 BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS M A T C H L I N E S H T . 6 M A T C H L I N E SHT. 2 APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 Scale: 1"=50' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 4 va r . w i d t h R . O . W . va r . w i d t h R . O . W . Item 5m SHT. 4 OF 8 TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit D Conceptual Plan WestSide BLOCK A, LOTS 1-19 BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS M A T C H L I N E S H T . 7 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 3 APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 Scale: 1"=50' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 va r . w i d t h R . O . W . 50' R. O . W . 50 ' R . O . W . Cab. X , P g . 7 1 7 P R D C T Item 5m SHT. 5 OF 8 TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit D Conceptual Plan WestSide BLOCK A, LOTS 1-19 BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS M A T C H L I N E SHT. 6 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 2 APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 Scale: 1"=50' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 M A T C H L I N E SHT. 8 Doc. No. 2012-59927 OPRDCT variable width R.O.W. Item 5m SHT. 6 OF 8 TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit D Conceptual Plan WestSide BLOCK A, LOTS 1-19 BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS M A T C H L I N E S H T . 7 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 3 APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 Scale: 1"=50' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 M A T C H L I N E SHT. 5 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 8 Item 5m SHT. 7 OF 8 TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit D Conceptual Plan WestSide BLOCK A, LOTS 1-19 BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS M A T C H L I N E S H T . 6 APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 Scale: 1"=50' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 4 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 8 50 ' R . O . W . Cab. X , P g . 7 1 7 P R D C T 50' R. O . W . Item 5m SHT. 8 OF 8 TOWN OF PROSPER CASE NO. Z18-0012 Exhibit D Conceptual Plan WestSide BLOCK A, LOTS 1-19 BEING 64.501 ACRES OF LAND (GROSS) 63.858 ACRES OF LAND (NET) IN THE B. HODGES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 593 & IN THE J. GONZALEZ SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 447 & IN THE P. BARNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 79 & IN THE R. TAYLOR SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 1671 & IN THE J. HAYNES SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 573 & IN THE ANGUS JAMISON SURVEY TOWN OF PROSPER, DENTON COUNTY, TEXASM A T C H L I N E SHT. 5 APPLICANT MCF Investments 15700 S.H. 121 Frisco, Texas 75035 Telephone (214) 619-4930 Contact: Mike Fannin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: Kevin Wier OWNER Taylor Hansel P.O. Box 770 Frisco, Texas 75034 Scale: 1"=50' September, 2018 SEI Job No. 17-219 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 7 M A T C H L I N E S H T . 6 Doc. No. 2012-59927 OPRDCT Doc. No. 2001-66260 OPRDCT Item 5m Z18-0012 EXHIBIT E DEVELOPMENT SCHEDULE WESTSIDE The phasing and development of this project is dependent upon both market conditions and the individual developers’ timing. The anticipated schedule for the buildout will likely include a division of developmental increments. Upon commencement of development, the project construction is expected to require between 18 – 60 months. See Exhibit E2 for a graphic depiction. Phase 1A: The central core of the property coupled with the construction of the central park. It would comprise both the physical heart of the project, plus individual pads inside the retail development. Vehicular access to the property will mostly be included in this phase. Depending on the schedule of the multi-family developer, Phase 1B could be developed in conjunction with Phase 1A. Phase 1B: The initial phase of a two phase multi-family development. Phase 2A: The second phase of a two phase commercial development, including retail/restaurant and entertainment uses to the west of the central park. Phase 2B: The second phase of a multi-family development, located to the north of Phase 2A. Phase 2B could be developed in conjunction with Phase 2A. Item 5m 2 2 7 H O T E L R E S T A U R A N T 7 , 7 0 0 S F 6,500 SF R E S T A U R A N T REST/RETAIL 60,000 SF ENTERTAINMENT 3 , 7 5 0 S F E X I S T I N G F.M. 1385 1 0 0 Y E A R F L O O D P L A I N A R E A O F F L O O D P L A I N 8 . 3 A C R E S E X I S T I N G S I N G L E F A M I L Y S I N G L E F A M I L Y D O E B R A N C H U . S . H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 ( U N I V E R S I T Y D R I V E ) L O T 1 5 LOT 4LOT 5 L O T 1 7 L O T 1 9 L O T 1 4 H O T E L 7 , 4 0 0 S F 1 1 0 R O O M S 2,900 SF REST/RETAIL L O T 1 8 L O T 1 6 LOT 3 7 , 4 0 0 S F LOT 12 L O T 1 3 9 0 R O O M S L O T 9 4 , 8 0 0 S F 3 , 0 0 0 S F R E S T / R E T A I L R E S T / R E T A I L L O T 1 0 R E S T / R E T A I L R E S T / R E T A I L L O T 8 L O T 1 1 6 , 3 5 0 S F L O T 7 R E S T / R E T A I L REST/RETAIL LOT 6REST/RETAIL2,900 SF 4,500 SF 3,200 SF LOT 2 LOT 1REST/RETAIL10,900 SF 9 2 S P A C E S 1 , 3 8 0 S F O F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A R E Q U I R E D 1 2 , 4 3 0 S F S F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A P R O V I D E D GAS/CONVENIENCE U R B A N R E S I D E N T I A L G A T E G A T E 1 A C R E P U B L I C O P E N S P A C E U R B A N R E S I D E N T I A L U R B A N R E S I D E N T I A L UR B A N RESID E N T I A L 1 3 9 S P A C E S 2, 1 6 0 S F O F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A R E Q U I R E D 2, 5 0 0 S F S F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A P R O V I D E D 2 1 3 S P A C E S 2 , 5 5 0 S F O F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A R E Q U I R E D 8 , 0 0 0 S F S F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A P R O V I D E D 1 4 3 S P A C E S 1 , 7 5 5 S F O F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A R E Q U I R E D 2 , 5 0 0 S F S F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A P R O V I D E D 6 7 S P A C E S 1 , 5 9 0 S F O F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A R E Q U I R E D 2 , 5 0 0 S F S F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A P R O V I D E D U R B A N R E S I D E N T I A L U R B A N R E S I D E N T I A L 485 SPACES7,950 SF OF INTERNAL LANDSCAPE AREA REQUIRED10,000 SF SF INTERNAL LANDSCAPE AREA PROVIDED 7 9 S P A C E S 1 , 5 8 0 S F O F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A R E Q U I R E D 1 , 5 8 0 S F S F I N T E R N A L L A N D S C A P E A R E A P R O V I D E D U R B A N R E S I D E N T I A L URBANRESIDENTIALURBANRESIDENTIAL 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 F e e t N J o b # : F i l e N a m e : D a t e : D r a w n b y : B E M , R R , P A F o r S t a f f U s e 1 7 1 7 3 . 0 2 L a n d s c a p e S i t e - 2 0 1 8 - 1 0 1 6 . d w g 1 0 / 2 2 / 1 8 E X H I B I T " G " U S 3 8 0 / F M 1 3 8 5 N E C P r o s p e r , T e x a s 6 3 . 9 0 5 A c r e s D a l l a s F o r t W o r t h A u s t i n O w n e r : G F 3 P a r t n e r s h i p , L L C C o n t a c t : M i c h a e l C . F a n n i n 1 5 7 0 0 S t a t e H i g h w a y 1 2 1 F r i s c o , T e x a s 7 5 0 3 5 9 7 2 . 7 4 7 . 9 2 3 3 m c f a n n i n @ g m a i l . c o m I t e m 5 m 2808 Fairmount Street,Suite 300 Dallas, Texas 75201 |214.303.15003300 West 7th Street,Suite 110 Fort Worth, Texas 76107 |817.303.1500 1 3/ 3 2 " = 1 ' - 0 " EA S T E L E V A T I O N 2 3/ 3 2 " = 1 ' - 0 " WE S T E L E V A T I O N 3 3/ 3 2 " = 1 ' - 0 " NO R T H E L E V A T I O N 4 3/ 3 2 " = 1 ' - 0 " SO U T H E L E V A T I O N Item 5m 4 1 2 3 EA S T E L E V A T I O N 1/ 8 ” = 1 ’ - 0 ” 1GR O U N D 0' - 0 " 2n d F L O O R 14 ' - 6 " 3rd F L O O R 25 ' - 4 1 / 2 " 4th F L O O R 36 ' - 3 " TR U S S B E A R I N G 45 ' - 3 " T.O . R E A R S T A I R T O W E R 56 ' - 3 " T.O . E N T R Y T O W E R 64 ' - 2 " 1 4 4 4 3 SO U T H E L E V A T I O N 1/ 8 ” = 1 ’ - 0 ” 2GR O U N D 0' - 0 " 2n d F L O O R 14 ' - 6 " 3rd F L O O R 25 ' - 4 1 / 2 " 4th F L O O R 36 ' - 3 " TR U S S B E A R I N G 45 ' - 3 " T.O . R E A R S T A I R T O W E R 56 ' - 3 " T.O . E N T R Y T O W E R 64 ' - 2 " 3 4 4 4 NO R T H E L E V A T I O N 1/ 8 ” = 1 ’ - 0 ” 3GR O U N D 0' - 0 " 2n d F L O O R 14 ' - 6 " 3r d F L O O R 25 ' - 4 1 / 2 " 4th F L O O R 36 ' - 3 " TR U S S B E A R I N G 45 ' - 3 " T.O . R E A R S T A I R T O W E R 56 ' - 3 " T.O . E N T R Y T O W E R 64 ' - 2 " 3 4 1 2 3 WE S T E L E V A T I O N 1/ 8 ” = 1 ’ - 0 ” 43r d F L O O R 25 ' - 4 1 / 2 " 45 ' - 3 " T.O . R E A R S T A I R T O W E R 56 ' - 3 " 0'- 0 " 14 ' - 6 " GR O U N D 4th F L O O R 2n d F L O O R TR U S S B E A R I N G 36 ' - 3 " T.O . E N T R Y T O W E R 64 ' - 2 " facade material analysis 1 - east elevation material area (sf)% stone 2256 26% brick 2965 33% neolith sintered stone 3627 38% aluminum 130 2% total 9500 100% 2 - south elevation material area (SF)% stone 1448 39% brick 116 1% neolith sintered stone 2382 64% aluminum 46 2% total 3700 100% 3 - north elevation stone 520 2% brick 570 2% neolith sintered stone 2436 79% aluminum 22 1% total 3000 100% 4 - west elevation stone 6653 71% brick 2204 23% neolith sintered stone 1427 15% aluminum 94 1% total 9400 100%notes 1 T h i s C o n c e p t u a l E l e v a t i o n i s f o r c o n c e p t u a l p u r p o s e s o n l y . a l l b u i l d i n g p l a n s r e q u i r e r e v i e w a n d a p p r o v a l f r o m t h e Builiding Inspection Division.2 A l l m e c h a n i c a l e q u i p e m e n t s h a l l b e s c r e e n e d f r o m p u b l i c v i e w i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h Zoning Ordinance.3 W h e n p e r m i t t e d , e x p o s e d u t i l i t y b o x e s a n d c o n d u l t s s h a l l b e p a i n t e d t o m a t c h t h e b u i l d i n g . 4 a l l s i g n a g e a r e a s a n d l o c a t i o n s a r e s u b j e c t t o a p p r o v a l b y t h e B u i l d i n g I n s p e c t i o n D e p a r t m e n t . 5 W i n d o w s s h a l l h a v e a m a x i m u m e x t e r i o r v i s i b l e r e f l e c t i v i t y o f ( 1 0 ) p e r c e n t . for staff usematerial table stone BRICK #2 NEOLITH SINTERED STONE ALUMINIUM ARCHITECT +ASSOCIATES INC.EXHIBIT “F”US 380 /FM 1385 NEC PROSPER, TEXAS665371%2204 23%1 2 3 4Item 5m FACADE MATERIAL ANALYSIS D1 NORTH ELEVATION-AREA 'B'MATERIAL AREA (SF)%2 1/2" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE 0 00 STAINLESS STEEL TILE-T11 00 0 STUCCO FINISH-PAINT P5 0 00 EXPOSED TILT WALL PANEL; TEXTURED PAINT 5827 100 4" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE 0 00 5827 TOTAL 100 C1 NORTH ELEVATION-AREA 'A'MATERIAL AREA (SF)%1910 18.5 0 00 0 00 8389 81.5 0 0.00 10,299 TOTAL 100 B1 SOUTH ELEVATION-AREA 'A'MATERIAL AREA (SF)%5091 80.2 0 00 718 11.3 0 00 542 8.5 6351 TOTAL 100 A1 SOUTH ELEVATION-AREA 'B'MATERIAL AREA (SF) % 2929 3 2 . 5 0 00 0 00 3961 43.9 2113 23.5 9,003 TOTAL 1002 1/2" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE STAINLESS STEEL TILE-T11 STUCCO FINISH-PAINT P5 EXPOSED TILT WALL PANEL; TEXTURED PAINT 4" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE 2 1/2" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE STAINLESS STEEL TILE-T11 STUCCO FINISH-PAINT P5 EXPOSED TILT WALL PANEL; TEXTURED PAINT 4" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE 2 1/2" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE STAINLESS STEEL TILE-T11 STUCCO FINISH-PAINT P5 EXPOSED TILT WALL PANEL; TEXTURED PAINT 4" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETEItem 5m FACADE MATERIAL ANALYSIS B1 WEST ELEVATION MATERIAL AREA (SF)%3415 42.9 488 6.1 236 3 3812 48 0 0 TOTAL 7,951 100 A1 EAST ELEVATION MATERIAL AREA (SF)%0 0 0 0 746 8.7 7799 91.3 0 0 TOTAL 8,545 1002 1/2" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE STAINLESS STEEL TILE-T11 STUCCO FINISH-PAINT P5 EXPOSED TILT WALL PANEL;TEXTURED PAINT 4" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE2 1/2" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETE STAINLESS STEEL TILE-T11 STUCCO FINISH-PAINT P5 EXPOSED TILT WALL PANEL;TEXTURED PAINT 4" ARCHITECTURALLY FINISHED CONCRETEItem 5m Item 5m  5 ( 1 ' ( 5 , 1 * $ 1 ' ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 6 2 1 6 + ( ( 7 6 5    5   $ 1 ' 5   $ 5 ( 5 ( 3 5 ( 6 ( 1 7 $ 7 , 9 (  7+ ( % 8 , / ' , 1 * ' 2 1 2 7 ( ; $ & 7 / < 5 ( ) / ( & 7 7 + 2 6 ( 2) 7 + ( 3 5 2 3 2 6 ( ' 3 5 2 - ( & 7  % 8 7 $ 5 ( , 1 ' , & $ 7 , 9 ( 2) ' ( 6 , * 1 , 1 7 ( 1 7 $ 1 ' 6 , 0 , / $ 5 & 2 1 ' , 7 , 2 1 6  5( $ 5  , 1 7 ( 5 , 2 5 ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 5( $ 5  , 1 7 ( 5 , 2 5 ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 5  5  Item 5m   5 ( 1 ' ( 5 , 1 * $ 1 ' ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 6 2 1 6 + ( ( 7 6 5    5   $ 1 ' 5   $ 5 ( 5 ( 3 5 ( 6 ( 1 7 $ 7 , 9 (  7+ ( % 8 , / ' , 1 * ' 2 1 2 7 ( ; $ & 7 / < 5 ( ) / ( & 7 7 + 2 6 ( 2) 7 + ( 3 5 2 3 2 6 ( ' 3 5 2 - ( & 7  % 8 7 $ 5 ( , 1 ' , & $ 7 , 9 ( 2) ' ( 6 , * 1 , 1 7 ( 1 7 $ 1 ' 6 , 0 , / $ 5 & 2 1 ' , 7 , 2 1 6  )5 2 1 7 ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 )5 2 1 7 ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 5  5  Item 5m   5 ( 1 ' ( 5 , 1 * $ 1 ' ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 6 2 1 6 + ( ( 7 6 5    5   $ 1 ' 5   $ 5 ( 5 ( 3 5 ( 6 ( 1 7 $ 7 , 9 (  7+ ( % 8 , / ' , 1 * ' 2 1 2 7 ( ; $ & 7 / < 5 ( ) / ( & 7 7 + 2 6 ( 2) 7 + ( 3 5 2 3 2 6 ( ' 3 5 2 - ( & 7  % 8 7 $ 5 ( , 1 ' , & $ 7 , 9 ( 2) ' ( 6 , * 1 , 1 7 ( 1 7 $ 1 ' 6 , 0 , / $ 5 & 2 1 ' , 7 , 2 1 6  )5 2 1 7 ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 )5 2 1 7 ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 2 1 5  5  )5 2 17 ( / ( 9 $ 7 , 21 5  Item 5m 22 UTRWD 60' UTILITY EASEMENTOPEN SPACE (OUTSIDE OF FLOODPLAIN)2.8 ACRES AP P R O X I M A T E AL I G N M E N T O F MA G N O L I A B O U L E V A R D UTRWD 25' UTILITY EASEMENT 7 CONNECTION TO WESTFORK CROSSING TRAILHEADPROPOSED EXPANSION OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER TRAIL SYSTEM SE C U R I T Y G A T E 3" C A L I P E R E V E R G R E E N T R E E - T Y P E I I 3" C A L I P E R T R E E - T Y P E I 33 T R E E S T Y P E 1 33 T R E E S T Y P E 2 15 G A L L O N S H R U B HO T E L RE S T A U R A N T 7, 7 0 0 S F 6, 5 0 0 S F RE S T A U R A N T RE S T / R E T A I L 60 , 0 0 0 S F EN T E R T A I N M E N T 3, 7 5 0 S F EX I S T I N G F . M . 1 3 8 5 100 YEAR FLOODPLAIN AREA OF FLOODPLAIN 8.3 ACRES EX I S T I N G SI N G L E F A M I L Y SI N G L E F A M I L Y DOE BRANCH U. S . H I G H W A Y 3 8 0 (U N I V E R S I T Y D R I V E ) LO T 1 5 LO T 4 LO T 5 LOT 19 LO T 1 4 HO T E L 7, 4 0 0 S F 11 0 R O O M S 2, 9 0 0 S F RE S T / R E T A I L LO T 1 8 LO T 1 6 LO T 3 7, 4 0 0 S F LO T 1 2 LO T 1 3 90 R O O M S LO T 9 4, 8 0 0 S F 3, 0 0 0 S F RE S T / R E T A I L RE S T / R E T A I L LO T 1 0 RE S T / R E T A I L RE S T / R E T A I L LO T 8 LO T 1 1 6, 3 5 0 S F LO T 7 RE S T / R E T A I L RE S T / R E T A I L LO T 6 RE S T / R E T A I L 2, 9 0 0 S F 4, 5 0 0 S F 3, 2 0 0 S F LO T 2 LO T 1 RE S T / R E T A I L 10 , 9 0 0 S F 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 F e e t N Item 5m Page 1 of 1 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance for “Multifamily Registration and Inspections,” of Article 3.11, “Property Maintenance Code,” of Chapter 3, “Building Regulations,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to implement a multifamily rental inspection program. On November 13, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the proposed program. The ordinance establishing the fee schedule for the registration and inspection of the multifamily complexes is a companion item on this agenda. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance for “Multifamily Registration and Inspections,” of Article 3.11, “Property Maintenance Code,” of Chapter 3, “Building Regulations,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5n TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, AMENDING SECTION 3.11.002, “PENALTY FOR VIOLATION,” OF ARTICLE 3.11, “PROPERTY MAINTENANCE CODE,” OF CHAPER 3, “BUILDING REGULATIONS,” OF THE TOWN’S CODE OF ORDINANCES BY REPEALING SAID SECTION IN ITS ENTIRETY AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW SECTION 3.11.002, “MULTIFAMILY REGISTRATION AND INSPECTIONS,” OF ARTICLE 3.11, “PROPERTY MAINTENANCE CODE,” OF CHAP TER 3, “BUILDING REGULATIONS,” BY ESTABLISHING PROCEDURES FOR THE REGISTRATION AND INSPECTIONS OF MULTIFAMILY COMPLEXES AND ASSOCIATED DWELLINGS; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE; AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Town Council”), has investigated and determined that it is necessary to ensure the public health, safety, and welfare of the occupants of multifamily dwellings of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), for the continued use and occupancy regardless of the date of the construction; WHEREAS, the Town Council has further investigated and determined there is a need to preserve property values and promote the economic vitality, continued maintenance, and investments in existing and future multifamily complexes and associated dwelling units; and WHEREAS, the Town Council has further investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to require the registration and inspections of multifamily complexes and the associated dwelling units in the existing property maintenance code contained in Article 3.11, “Property Maintenance Code,” of Chapter 3, “Building Regulations,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 From and after the effective date of this Ordinance, existing Section 3.11.002, “Penalty for Violation,” of Article 3.11, “Property Maintenance Code,” of Chapter 3, “Building Regulations,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Section 3.11.002, “Multifamily Registration and Inspections,” of Article 3.11, “Property Maintenance Code,” of Chapter 3, “Building Regulations,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances to read as follows: Item 5n Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 2 “Sec. 3.11.002 Multifamily Registration and Inspections (a) Definitions Building code. The building code adopted by the Town in section 3.04. Bedroom. Any room or space used or intended to be used for sleeping purposes in either a dwelling or sleeping unit and meeting the requirements of section 3.11. Clean. Free from dirt, impurities or multiple stains; hygienic conditions and practices that serve to promote or preserve health. Common area. Communal areas of the complex, including, but not limited to hallways, stairways, lobby areas, laundry rooms, pool facilities, green spaces, recreation rooms and parking lots. Dwelling unit. A building or portion of a building which is arranged, occupied, or intended to be occupied as living quarters of a family and includes facilities for food preparation, sleeping and sanitation. Exterior property. The open space on the premises and on adjoining property under the control of owners or operators of such premises. Hot water. Water supplied to plumbing fixtures at a temperature of not less than 110 degrees Fahrenheit. Landlord. The owner, operator, lessor, management company, managing agent or on- site manager of a multifamly dwelling. Multifamily complex: Any and all property, structures, common areas, open space, recreation areas, swimming pools, and parking and drive aisle areas associated with a multifamily development. Multifamily dwelling. A building or buildings containing three (3) or more dwelling units. Occupant. Any individual living or sleeping in a building, or having possession of a space within a building. Premises. A lot, parcel, tract or plot of land, with the buildings and structures. Property manager. A person who, for any form of consideration, has managing control of a premises. Representative sample. Any number of dwelling units at the multifamily establishment as determined by the Town Manager or the Town Manager’s designated representative. Tenant. A person, corporation, partnership or group other than the legal owner of record, occupying a building or portion thereof as a unit. Town. The Town of Prosper, Texas. Town staff. The staff of the Town of Prosper, Texas duly authorized to enforce the provisions of this ordinance as it exists or is amended. (b) Registration Required. (1) The landlord of a multifamily dwelling complex that is one (1) year or older with (3) or more dwelling units shall annually register the complex with the Department of Development Services of the Town. For newly constructed multifamily dwelling complexes, the landlord shall register the complex on or before the one (1) year Item 5n Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 3 anniversary of the issuance of the first certificate of occupancy for the first building intended for occupancy. (2) A registration is valid for one (1) calendar year, unless the ownership of the complex changes. (3) If a change in ownership of the complex occurs during the period that a registration is otherwise valid, the landlord of the complex shall have thirty (30) days from the date the change of ownership occurred to file a new registration with the Department of Development Services. (4) Town staff shall provide notice of the requirement to submit the required initial and/or annual registration and fee as established below to the property owner as identified on the tax roll and to the landlord, if known. Notice shall be provided via the United States mail. (5) Notice of the first, initial registration shall be provided to the property owner and landlord, if known, a minimum of sixty (60) calendar days prior to the deadline to submit the completed registration and fees. (6) Notice of subsequent annual, renewal registrations shall be provided to the owner and landlord, if known, a minimum of thirty (30) calendar days prior to the deadline to submit the completed registration and fees. (7) Annual registration or renewals postmarked or received after the identified deadline date shall be assessed an additional fee increase of: (A) Ten percent (10%) if received within thirty (30) calendar days after the due date; (B) Thirty percent (30%) if received within thirty-one (31) to sixty (60) calendar days after the due date; or (C) Fifty percent (50%) if received more than sixty-one (61) days after the due date. (8) All fees must be current with the Town prior to the renewal of a registration certificate. (9) The fees are established in Appendix A to this code, as it exists or may be amended. (10) The registration shall be on a form prescribed by the Department of Development Services and shall at a minimum contain the following information about the complex: (A) The trade name, physical address, business mailing address and total number of residential units; (B) The names of designated employees or authorized representatives who shall be assigned to respond to emergency conditions and a telephone number where said employees can be contacted during any twenty-four (24) hour period. Emergency conditions shall include fire, natural disaster, flood, burst pipes, collapse hazard and violent crime; (C) The names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the property owner, property manager, resident manager, registered agent, and the type of business entity which owns the complex; and (D) The names, addresses and telephone numbers of any mortgage lienholders. Item 5n Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 4 (11) A landlord commits an offense if the landlord operates a multifamly dwelling complex which is not currently registered with the Town as prescribed. (12) Posting of the registration in the primary leasing office, and visible to the public, is required and is non-transferable. (c) Inspection. (1) To determine compliance with minimum building and property maintenance standards in accordance with the International Property Maintenance Code and other applicable Town codes and to determine compliance with this article, Town staff shall conduct scheduled inspections of the premise. (2) Inspections required. An inspection of the multifamily complex by the Town staff to determine compliance with applicable state and local law including periodic inspections, follow-up inspections, and inspections based on indications of code violations, including complaints filed with the Town Manager or Town Manager’s designated representative. (3) Inspections by Town staff are intended to identify and abate issues identified in the list of “Multifamily Rental Inspection Components” as maintained and periodically updated by the Town. Inspection of the premise shall include, (A) All building exteriors; (B) All exterior and interiors of common areas; (C) Vacant dwelling units; (D) Outdoor and any unenclosed areas on the premise; and (E) Representative sample of ten percent (10%) with a minimum of five (5) occupied dwelling units upon receipt of consent by the unit’s tenant or other recourse as provided by law. (4) Town staff may inspect portions of a multifamly complex as frequently as the Town Manager, Building Official, Fire Marshal or their designated representatives deem necessary. (5) Town staff shall make follow-up inspections of a multifamly complex which fails a periodic inspection and to inspect all areas included in the periodic inspection until such time as the violations are abated. (5) Offenses. A landlord commits an offense if the landlord: (1) Operates a multifamly dwelling complex which is not currently registered with the Town of Prosper as required by this article; (2) Fails to pay administrative fees as required by this article; (3) Maintains a property in violation of the Town’s Property Maintenance Code; or (4) Commits any other violation of this article.” Item 5n Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 5 SECTION 3 Any person, firm, corporation or business entity violating this Ordinance shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state and federal law. SECTION 4 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 5 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 6 This Ordinance shall become effective after its passage and publication, as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: ___________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary Item 5n Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 6 APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: __________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5n Page 1 of 1 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance amending Appendix A, “Fee Schedule,” by adding a new Section XXI, “Multifamily Registration and Inspection Fees.” Background/Description: One of the Town Council’s Major Initiatives within the goal of “Ensure Quality Development,” is to implement a multifamily rental inspection program. On November 13, 2018, the Town Council received a briefing regarding the proposed program. The ordinance adopting the program is a companion item on this agenda. This ordinance establishes the fee schedule for the registration and inspection of the multifamily complexes. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance amending Appendix A, “Fee Schedule,” by adding a new Section XXI, “Multifamily Registration and Inspection Fees.” Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5o TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18___ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, AMENDING APPENDIX A, “FEE SCHEDULE,” TO THE TOWN’S CODE OF ORDINANCES BY ADDING THERETO A NEW SECTION XXI, “MULTIFAMILY REGISTRATION AND INSPECTION FEES”; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE; AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE CAPTION HEREOF. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Town Council”) has investigated and determined that it would be advantageous and beneficial to the citizens of Prosper to require the registration and inspections of multifamily complexes and the associated dwelling units, and WHEREAS, the Town Council hereby finds and determines that it will be advantageous, beneficial and in the best interests of the citizens of the Town to adopt certain fees imposed by the Town that reflect actual and reasonable costs, as hereinafter referenced. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 From and after the effective date of this Ordinance, Appendix A, “Fee Schedule,” to the Town’s Code of Ordinances is hereby amended by adding thereto a new Section XXI, “Multifamily Registration and Inspection Fees,” to read as follows: “Sec. XXI Multifamily Registration and Inspection Fees (1) The landlord of a multifamly dwelling complex shall annually pay the Town a fee which includes registration and inspection fees. (2) A fee of ten dollars ($10.00) per dwelling unit with a minimum of two hundred dollars ($200) per year shall be submitted annually with the required registration form as provided by the Town. (3) Annual registration or renewals postmarked or received after the identified deadline date shall be assessed an additional fee increase of: (A) ten percent (10%) if received within thirty (30) calendar days after the due date, (B) thirty percent (30%) if received within thirty-one (31) to sixty (60) calendar days after the due date; or (C) fifty percent (50% if received more than sixty-one (61) days after the due date. (4) Cost of initial inspection and first re-inspection: No fee. Item 5o Ordinance No. 18-__, Page 2 (5) Second re-inspection if required: $150.00 per residential unit or per any other area of the multifamily complex. (6) Third and any subsequent re-inspections if required: $300.00 per residential unit or per any other area of the multifamily complex.” SECTION 3 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. SECTION 5 This Ordinance shall become effective and be in full force from and after its passage and publication, as provided by the Revised Civil Statues of the State of Texas and the Home Rule Charter of the Town of Prosper, Texas. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: ___________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: __________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5o Page 1 of 1 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Paul Naughton, RLA, Landscape Architect Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon authorizing the Competitive Sealed Proposal (CSP) procurement method for construction of the State Highway 289 Gateway Monument project. Description of Agenda Item: On November 14, 2018, the Town Council discussed the entry monument sign with staff and next steps to take after the bids received were over budget. It was discussed that the best option would be to value engineer the project, and solicit bids using the Competitive Sealed Proposal (CSP) procurement method. This is an alternative procurement method by which a governmental entity may request proposals and pricing information based on the scope of work provided, and then award the project to the contractor that offers the best value proposal based on a set of criteria. The Town intends to use the following evaluation criteria: •Firm's overall ability to meet the Town's objectives (20%) •Experience with similar facility construction (20%) •References (10%) •Cost Proposal (50%) Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends the Town Council approve the Competitive Sealed Proposal (CSP) procurement method for construction of the State Highway 289 Gateway Monument project. Proposed Motion: I move to approve the Competitive Sealed Proposal (CSP) procurement method for construction of the State Highway 289 Gateway Monument project. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. PARKS AND RECREATION Item 5p Page 1 of 1 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon an ordinance amending Section 8.05.001, “Definitions,” of Article 8.05, “Junked Vehicles,” of Chapter 8, “Offenses and Nuisances,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. Background/Description: Previously, per State Law, in order for a municipality to determine that a motor vehicle was a “junked” vehicle for the purpose of requiring the removal of the vehicle, the vehicle had to display an expired or missing license plate and an expired or missing inspection sticker in addition to being inoperable or wrecked. With the transition of no longer requiring the display of an inspection windshield sticker, the definition of a junked vehicle needs to be amended to reflect that only the missing or expired license plate in addition to being inoperable or wrecked is required. Legal Obligations and Review: Town Attorney, Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., approved the ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council approve the ordinance. Proposed Motion: I move to approve an ordinance amending Section 8.05.001, “Definitions,” of Article 8.05, “Junked Vehicles,” of Chapter 8, “Offenses and Nuisances,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 5q TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, AMENDING SECTION 8.05.001, “DEFINITIONS,” OF ARTICLE 8.05, “JUNKED VEHICLES,” OF CHAPTER 8, “OFFENSES AND NUISANCES,” OF THE TOWN’S CODE OF ORDINANCES BY REPEALING SAID SECTION IN ITS ENTIRETY AND REPLACING IT WITH A NEW SECTION 8.05.001, “DEFINITIONS,” OF ARTICLE 8.05, “JUNKED VEHICLES,” OF CHAPTER 8, “OFFENSES AND NUISANCES,” OF THE TOWN’S CODE OF ORDINANCES BY AMENDING THE DEFINITION OF A JUNKED VEHICLE TO ELIMINATE THE REQUIREMENT OF DISPLAYING AN EXPIRED MOTOR VEHICLE INSPECTION CERTIFICATE; PROVIDING FOR A PENALTY FOR THE VIOLATION OF THIS ORDINANCE; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE; AND PROVIDING FOR THE PUBLICATION. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Town Council”), has investigated and determined that it is necessary to amend the definition of a junked vehicle to ensure the public health, safety, and welfare; NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 From and after the effective date of this Ordinance, existing Section 8.05.001, “Definitions,” of Article 8.05, “Junked Vehicles,” of Chapter 8, “Offenses and Nuisances,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances is hereby repealed in its entirety and replaced with a new Section 8.05.001, “Definitions,” of Article 8.05, “Junked Vehicles,” of Chapter 8, “Offenses and Nuisances,” of the Town’s Code of Ordinances to read as follows: “Sec. 8.05.001 Definitions For the purposes of this article, the following definitions apply: Antique vehicle. A passenger car or truck manufactured at least twenty-five (25) years ago. Demolisher. A person with a business that converts a motor vehicle into processed scrap metal, or otherwise wrecks or dismantles motor vehicles. Junked vehicle. A motor vehicle as defined in V.T.C.A., Transportation Code, chapter 683, that is a self-propelled vehicle, or part thereof, that: (1) Displays an expired license plate or does not display a license plate; and (2) Is: Item 5q Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 2 (A) Wrecked, dismantled or partially dismantled, or discarded; or (B) Inoperable and has remained inoperable for more than: (i) Seventy-two (72) consecutive hours, if the vehicle is on public property; or (ii) Thirty (30) consecutive days, if the vehicle is on private property. Special interest vehicle. A motor vehicle of any age without alteration or modification from original manufacturer's specifications that, because of its historic interest, is preserved by hobbyists. Vehicle collector. An antique or special vehicle owner who, for personal use, collects, purchases, acquires, trades, or disposes of antique or special interest vehicles, or their parts, in order to restore, preserve, and maintain an antique or special vehicle for historic interest.” SECTION 3 Any person, firm, corporation or business entity violating this Ordinance shall be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor, and upon conviction therefore, shall be fined a sum not exceeding Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00), and each and every day that such violation continues shall be considered a separate offense; provided, however, that such penal provision shall not preclude a suit to enjoin such violation. The Town retains all legal rights and remedies available to it pursuant to local, state and federal law. SECTION 4 All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed to the extent they are in conflict; but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent a prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the ordinance. Any remaining portion of conf licting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 5 If any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason held to be unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions of this Ordinance. The Town hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, and phrases be declared unconstitutional. Item 5q Ordinance No. 18-___, Page 3 SECTION 6 This Ordinance shall become effective after its passage and publication, as required by law. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. APPROVED: ________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST: ___________________________________ Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: __________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 5q Page 1 of 2 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Alex Glushko, AICP, Planning Manager Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon whether to direct staff to submit a written notice of appeal on behalf of the Town Council to the Development Services Department, pursuant to Chapter 4, Section 1.5(C)(7) and 1.6(B)(7) of the Town’s Zoning Ordinance, regarding action taken by the Planning & Zoning Commission on any Site Plan or Preliminary Site Plan. Description of Agenda Item: Attached are the Site Plans that were acted on by the Planning & Zoning Commission at their December 4, 2018, meeting. Per the Zoning Ordinance, the Town Council has the ability to direct staff to submit a written notice of appeal on behalf of the Town Council to the Development Services Department for any Preliminary Site Plan or Site Plan acted on by the Planning & Zoning Commission. Attached Documents: 1.Site Plan for 608 E. First Street 2.Site Plan for All Storage 3.Site Plan for Chick-fil-A (Windsong Ranch Marketplace) 4.Site Plan for Lakes at Legacy Amenity Center 5.Site Plan for Lakes at Legacy Homebuilder Marketing Center 6.Site Plan for T-Mobile (Prosper Trail Elevated Storage Tank) Attachment Summary: Project Name Type Location Building Size Existing/ Proposed Uses Known Tenant(s) 608 E. First Street Site Plan North side of First Street, West of Craig Road 2,200 sq. ft. Catering Unknown All Storage Site Plan East side of Cook Lane, South of Prosper Trail 201,900 sq. ft. Mini- Warehouse All Storage Chick-fil-A Site Plan Northwest Corner of US 380 and Windsong Parkway 4,996 sq. ft. Drive-Through Restaurant Chick-fil-A Prosper is a place where everyone matters. PLANNING Item 5r Page 2 of 2 Project Name Type Location Building Size Existing/ Proposed Uses Known Tenant(s) Lakes at Legacy Site Plan West of Legacy Drive, South of Prairie Drive 6,850 sq. ft. Amenity Center N/A Lakes at Legacy Site Plan West of Legacy Drive, South of Prairie Drive 1,595 sq. ft. Homebuilder Marketing Center N/A T-Mobile Site Plan North of Prosper Trail, East of Shasta Lane N/A Wireless Antenna T-Mobile Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council take no action on this item. Item 5r S0°25'29"E295.34' S8 9 ° 4 6 ' 4 7 " W 75 . 0 0 ' N0°25'29"W296.15' S8 9 ° 3 6 ' 0 2 " E 75 . 0 0 ' 1S T S T R E E T EXISTING 2-STORY BUILDING TO REMAIN 2,200 SF APPROX. EXISTING METAL BUILDING TO REMAIN EXISTING BUILDING TO BE REMOVED EXISTING PAVEMENT TO REMAIN EXISTING PAVEMENT TO REMAIN 2 0 ' 9' PROPOSED BFR ROBERT H. WILLIS, ET UX "1 2 ACRE" V.1054, PG. 280 DR EX. ZONING: SF-15 REC. 0.51 AC V.2762, PG. 262 LR EX. EX. ZONING: SF-15 PR O S P E R I . S . D . V. 1 7 2 3 , P G . 8 6 8 D R EX . Z O N I N G : S F - 1 5 EXISTING STRUCTURE TO BE REMOVED 4 . 4 ' EX. EDGE OF PAVEMENT EX. 20' EASEMENT V. 728, P. 632DR 9' PROPOSED PAINT STRIPE PROPOSED PAINT STRIPE 5' 2 0 ' 2 5 . 3 ' 2 3 . 8 ' 1 5 ' EX. DRIVE TO REMAIN EX. DRIVE TO REMAIN EX. EDGE OF PAVEMENT PROPOSED ADA SPACE 9'11' 2 4 ' 1 8 ' DA T E No . RE V I S I O N BY DATE: SHEET File No. 2018-120 CHECKED: HCV DRAWN:HCV DESIGN: 60 8 1 S T S T R E E T PR O S P E R , T E X A S TO W N C A S E # : 19 0 3 C E N T R A L D R I V E , S U I T E # 4 0 6 PH O N E : 8 1 7 . 2 8 1 . 0 5 7 2 BE D F O R D , T X 7 6 0 2 1 W W W . C L A Y M O O R E E N G . C O M TEXAS REGISTRATION #14199 PRELIMINARY CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING MAM 11/20/2018 SI T E P L A N SP-1 0 GRAPHIC SCALE 1 inch = ft. 20 20 40 20 10 COUNTY SURVEY:ABSTRACT NO. COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL 147 CITY:STATE: TOWN OF PROSPER TEXAS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: OWNER: APPLICANT: CLAYMOORE ENGINEERING, INC. 1903 CENTRAL DRIVE, SUITE #406 BEDFORD, TX 76021 PH: 817.281.0572 PETTIS UNDER CONSTRUCTION, LLC 509 E 1ST STREET PROSPER, TX 75078 PHONE: 972-979-9708 CASE #: D18-0115 608 1ST STREET CONTACT NAME: MIKE PETTIS CONTACT NAME: MATT MOORE NO PORTION OF THIS TRACT LIES WITHIN A 100-YEAR FLOOD PLAIN, OR IN A FLOOD HAZARD AREA ACCORDING TO THE NATIONAL FLOOD INSURANCE PROGRAM, FLOOD INSURANCE RATE MAP NUMBER 48085C0235J, WITH EFFECTIVE DATE OF JUNE 2, 2009 FLOODPLAIN NOTE TOWN OF PROSPER SITE PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 1. DUMPSTERS AND TRASH COMPACTORS SHALL BE SCREENED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ZONING ORDINANCE. 2. OPEN STORAGE, WHERE PERMITTED, SHALL BE SCREENED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ZONING ORDINANCE. 3. OUTDOOR LIGHTING SHALL COMPLY WITH THE LIGHTING AND GLARE STANDARDS CONTAINED WITHIN THE ZONING ORDINANCE AND SUBDIVISION ORDINANCE. 4. LANDSCAPING SHALL CONFORM TO LANDSCAPE PLANS APPROVED BY THE TOWN. 5. ALL ELEVATIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE STANDARDS CONTAINED WITHIN THE ZONING ORDINANCE. 6. BUILDINGS OF 5,000 SQUARE FEET OR GREATER SHALL BE 100% FIRE SPRINKLED. ALTERNATIVE FIRE PROTECTION MEASURES MAY BE APPROVED BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT. 7. FIRE LANES SHALL BE DESIGNED AND CONSTRUCTED PER TOWN STANDARDS OR AS DIRECTED BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT. 8. TWO POINTS OF ACCESS SHALL BE MAINTAINED FOR THE PROPERTY AT ALL TIMES. 9. SPEED BUMPS/HUMPS ARE NOT PERMITTED WITHIN A FIRE LANE. 10. HANDICAPPED PARKING AREAS AND BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY SHALL CONFORM TO THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) AND WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENT, ADOPTED BUILDING CODE. 11. ALL SIGNAGE IS SUBJECT TO BUILDING OFFICIAL APPROVAL. 12. ALL FENCES AND RETAINING WALLS SHALL BE SHOWN ON THE SITE PLAN AND ARE SUBJECT TO BUILDING OFFICIAL APPROVAL. 13. ALL EXTERIOR BUILDING MATERIALS ARE SUBJECT TO BUILDING OFFICIAL APPROVAL AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE APPROVED FAÇADE PLAN. 14.SIDEWALKS OF NOT LESS THAN SIX (6’) FEET IN WIDTH ALONG THOROUGHFARES AND COLLECTORS AND FIVE (5’) IN WIDTH ALONG RESIDENTIAL STREETS, AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS AT ALL CURB CROSSINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED PER TOWN STANDARDS. 15. APPROVAL OF THE SITE PLAN IS NOT FINAL UNTIL ALL ENGINEERING PLANS ARE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. 16. SITE PLAN APPROVAL IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO GRADING RELEASE. 17. ALL NEW ELECTRICAL LINES SHALL BE INSTALLED AND/OR RELOCATED UNDERGROUND. 18. ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE SCREENED FROM PUBLIC VIEW IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ZONING ORDINANCE. 19. ALL LANDSCAPE EASEMENTS MUST BE EXCLUSIVE OF ANY OTHER TYPE OF EASEMENT. 20. IMPACT FEES WILL BE ASSESSED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAND USE CLASSIFICATION(S) IDENTIFIED ON THE SITE DATA SUMMARY TABLE; HOWEVER, CHANGES TO THE PROPOSED LAND USE AT THE TIME CO AND/OR FINISH-OUT PERMIT MAY RESULT IN ADDITIONAL IMPACT FEES AND/OR PARKING REQUIREMENTS. 21. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF CURB UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 22. THE APPROVAL OF A SITE PLAN SHALL BE EFFECTIVE FOR A PERIOD OF EIGHTEEN (18) MONTHS FROM THE DATE OF APPROVAL BY THE PLANNING & ZONING COMMISSION, AT THE END OF WHICH TIME THE APPLICANT MUST HAVE SUBMITTED AND RECEIVED APPROVAL OF ENGINEERING PLANS AND BUILDING PERMITS. IF THE ENGINEERING PLANS AND BUILDING PERMITS ARE NOT APPROVED, THE SITE PLAN APPROVAL, TOGETHER WITH ANY PRELIMINARY SITE PLAN FOR THE PROPERTY, IS NULL AND VOID. LEGEND PROPERTY LINE EASEMENT/SETBACK (AS NOTED) PROPOSED CONCRETE PAVEMENT COLLIN ALL THAT CERTAIN TRACT OR PARCEL OF LAND LYING AND BEING SITUATED IN THE CITY OF PROSPER , COLLIN COUNTY, TEXAS, AND BEING A PART OF THE COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 147, AND BEING AND INCLUDING ALL THAT IS CERTAIN TRACT SAID TO CONTAIN 0.516 ACRES AS DESCRIBED IN A DEED TO SHERRI PHILLIPS AS RECORDED IN VOLUME 5191, PAGE 3019 OF THE COLLIN COUNTY DEED RECORDS. VICINITY MAP N.T.S. E FIRST ST S C H U R C H S T S C R A I G R D S C O L E M A N S T S P R E S T O N R D SITE PARKING COUNT PARKING SUMMARY TABLE REQUIRED BUSINESS OR PROFESSIONAL OFFICE(GENERAL) (1 SPACE PER 350 SF) 2,200 SF 7 (1 ADA) PROVIDED TOTAL PARKING PROVIDED 8 (1 ADA) Item 5r N O R T H 25'25'25' LEGEND SITE PLAN FOR PROSPER ADDITION LOT 1, BLOCK A PROSPER PROJECT NO. D18-0091 NOVEMBER 20, 2018 N O R T H Walls & Associates SHEET 1 OF 1 Item 5r Item 5r 8 H / C 9 H / C 10 S u b m i t t a l 1 1 / 2 1 / 2 0 1 8 L O C A T I O N M A P N O T T O S C A L E S P 1 * H A N D I C A P P A R K I N G I S P R O V I D E D I N A C C O R D A N C E W I T H A D A S T A N D A R D S W A T E R M E T E R S C H E D U L E B L O C K F , L O T 2 X S I T E I N F O R M A T I O N Z O N I N G : P D - 6 5 P R O P O S E D U S E : P R I V A T E R E C R E A T I O N C E N T E R L A N D A R E A : 7 5 , 3 1 7 S . F . O R 1 . 7 2 9 A C R E S B U I L D I N G A R E A : 6 , 8 5 0 S F B U I L D I N G B U I L D I N G H E I G H T S : 2 3 ' - 6 " ( 1 S T O R Y ) F L O O R T O A R E A : 0 . 0 9 0 9 : 1 [ 6 , 8 5 0 / 7 5 , 3 1 7 ] L O T C O V E R A G E : 9 . 0 9 % P A R K I N G R E Q U I R E D : 1 0 P A R K I N G S T A L L S + 1 S T A L L P E R 3 0 0 s f O V E R 2 , 0 0 0 s f O F B U I L D I N G ( C H A P T E R 4 , S E C T I O N 4 . 5 ) P A R K I N G P R O V I D E D : 2 7 T O T A L , ( w / 2 H A N D I C A P ) I N T E R I O R L A N D S C A P E R E Q U I R E D : ( L O T A R E A X 1 0 % ) 7 , 5 3 1 S F I N T E R I O R L A N D S C A P E P R O V I D E D : 3 7 , 0 6 7 S F T O T A L I M P E R V I O U S S U R F A C E : 3 8 , 2 5 0 S F , 5 1 . 1 % O P E N S P A C E R E Q U I R E D : ( L O T A R E A X 7 % ) 5 , 2 7 2 S F O P E N S P A C E P R O V I D E D : 2 6 , 5 4 3 S F * A 2 " T O 1 " R E D U C E R S H A L L B E P L A C E D O N W A T E R S E R V I C E L I N E P R I O R T O W A T E R M E T E R I N S T A L L A T I O N . S I T E P L A N L A K E S A T L E G A C Y , P H . 1 L o t 2 X , B l o c k F ~ A M E N I T Y C E N T E R ~ C A S E # D 1 8 - 0 0 8 8 L A N D S C A P E A R C H I T E C T : S T U D I O 1 3 D E S I G N G R O U P , P L L C . 3 8 6 W . M A I N S T R E E T L E W I S V I L L E , T E X A S 7 5 0 5 7 P H . ( 4 6 9 ) 6 3 5 - 1 9 0 0 C O N T A C T : L E O N A R D R E E V E S , R L A , L I O W N E R / D E V E L O P E R : P R O S P E R P A R T N E R S , L . P . 1 0 9 5 0 R E S E A R C H R O A D F R I S C O , T E X A S 7 5 0 3 3 P H . ( 2 1 4 ) 3 8 7 - 3 9 1 3 C O N T A C T : C L I N T R I C H A R D S O N C I V I L E N G I N E E R : K I M L E Y - H O R N & A S S O C I A T E S , I N C . 5 7 5 0 G E N E S I S C O U R T , S U I T E 2 0 0 F R I S C O , T E X A S 7 5 0 3 4 P H . ( 9 7 2 ) 3 3 5 - 3 5 8 0 C O N T A C T : T H O M A S L . F L E T C H E R , P E T O W N O F P R O S P E R S I T E P L A N N O T E S : A N Y R E V I S I O N T O T H I S P L A N W I L L R E Q U I R E T O W N A P P R O V A L A N D W I L L R E Q U I R E R E V I S I O N S T O A N Y C O R R E S P O N D I N G P L A N S T O A V O I D C O N F L I C T S B E T W E E N P L A N S . · D U M P S T E R S A N D T R A S H C O M P A C T O R S S H A L L B E S C R E E N E D I N A C C O R D A N C E W I T H T H E Z O N I N G O R D I N A N C E . · O P E N S T O R A G E , W H E R E P E R M I T T E D , S H A L L B E S C R E E N E D I N A C C O R D A N C E · W I T H T H E Z O N I N G O R D I N A N C E . · O U T D O O R L I G H T I N G S H A L L C O M P L Y W I T H T H E L I G H T I N G A N D G L A R E · S T A N D A R D S C O N T A I N E D W I T H I N T H E Z O N I N G O R D I N A N C E A N D · S U B D I V I S I O N O R D I N A N C E . · L A N D S C A P E S H A L L C O N F O R M T O L A N D S C A P E P L A N S A P P R O V E D B Y T H E T O W N . · A L L E L E V A T I O N S S H A L L C O M P L Y W I T H T H E S T A N D A R D S C O N T A I N E D W I T H I N · T H E Z O N I N G O R D I N A N C E . · B U I L D I N G S O F 5 , 0 0 0 S Q U A R E F E E T O R G R E A T E R S H A L L B E 1 0 0 % F I R E · S P R I N K L E D . A L T E R N A T I V E F I R E P R O T E C T I O N M E A S U R E S M A Y B E A P P R O V E D · B Y T H E F I R E D E P A R T M E N T . · F I R E L A N E S S H A L L B E D E S I G N E D A N D C O N S T R U C T E D P E R T O W N S T A N D A R D S · O R A S D I R E C T E D B Y T H E F I R E D E P A R T M E N T . · T W O P O I N T S O F A C C E S S S H A L L B E M A I N T A I N E D F O R T H E P R O P E R T Y A T A L L T I M E S . · S P E E D B U M P S / H U M P S A R E N O T P E R M I T T E D W I T H I N A F I R E L A N E . · H A N D I C A P P E D P A R K I N G A R E A S A N D B U I L D I N G A C C E S S I B I L I T Y S H A L L C O N F O R M T O T H E A M E R I C A N S W I T H D I S A B I L I T I E S A C T ( A D A ) A N D W I T H T H E R E Q U I R E M E N T S O F T H E C U R R E N T A D O P T E D B U I L D I N G C O D E . · A L L S I G N A G E I S S U B J E C T T O B U I L D I N G O F F I C I A L A P P R O V A L . · A L L F E N C E S A N D R E T A I N I N G W A L L S S H A L L B E S H O W N O N T H E S I T E P L A N A N D A R E S U B J E C T T O B U I L D I N G O F F I C I A L A P P R O V A L . · A L L E X T E R I O R B U I L D I N G M A T E R I A L S A R E S U B J E C T T O B U I L D I N G O F F I C I A L A P P R O V A L A N D S H A L L C O N F O R M T O T H E A P P R O V E D F A C A D E P L A N . · S I D E W A L K S O F N O T L E S S T H A N S I X ( 6 ' ) F E E T I N W I D T H A L O N G T H O R O U G H F A R E S A N D C O L L E C T O R S A N D F I V E ( 5 ' ) F E E T I N W I D T H A L O N G R E S I D E N T I A L S T R E E T S , A N D B A R R I E R F R E E R A M P S A T A L L C U R B C R O S S I N G S S H A L L B E P R O V I D E D P E R T O W N S T A N D A R D S . · A P P R O V A L O F T H E S I T E P L A N I S N O T F I N A L U N T I L A L L E N G I N E E R I N G P L A N S A R E A P P R O V E D B Y T H E T O W N E N G I N E E R . · S I T E P L A N A P P R O V A L I S R E Q U I R E D P R I O R T O G R A D I N G R E L E A S E . · A L L N E W E L E C T R I C A L L I N E S S H A L L B E I N S T A L L E D A N D / O R R E L O C A T E D U N D E R G R O U N D . · A L L M E C H A N I C A L E Q U I P M E N T S H A L L B E S C R E E N E D F R O M P U B L I C V I E W I N A C C O R D A N C E W I T H T H E Z O N I N G O R D I N A N C E . · A L L L A N D S C A P E E A S E M E N T S M U S T B E E X C L U S I V E O F A N Y O T H E R T Y P E O F E A S E M E N T . · I M P A C T F E E S W I L L B E A S S E S S E D I N A C C O R D A N C E W I T H T H E L A N D U S E C L A S S I F I C A T I O N ( S ) I D E N T I F I E D O N T H E S I T E D A T E S U M M A R Y T A B L E ; H O W E V E R , C H A N G E S T O T H E P R O P O S E D L A N D U S E A T T H E T I M E O F C O A N D / O R F I N I S H - O U T P E R M I T M A Y R E S U L T I N A D D I T I O N A L I M P A C T F E E S A N D / O R P A R K I N G R E Q U I R E M E N T S . · T H E A P P R O V A L O F A S I T E P L A N S H A L L B E E F F E C T I V E F O R A P E R I O D O F E I G H T E E N ( 1 8 ) M O N T H S F R O M T H E D A T E O F A P P R O V A L B Y T H E P L A N N I N G & Z O N I N G C O M M I S S I O N , A T T H E E N D O F W H I C H T I M E T H E A P P L I C A N T M U S T H A V E S U B M I T T E D A N D R E C E I V E D A P P R O V A L O F E N G I N E E R I N G P L A N S A N D B U I L D I N G P E R M I T S . I F T H E E N G I N E E R I N G P L A N S A N D B U I L D I N G P E R M I T S A R E N O T A P P R O V E D , T H E S I T E P L A N A P P R O V A L , T O G E T H E R W I T H A N Y P R E L I M I N A R Y S I T E P L A N F O R T H E P R O P E R T Y , I S N U L L A N D V O I D . N O T E : N O F L O O D P L A I N E X I S T S O N T H E S I T E C O N C R E T E S I D E W A L K P E R T O W N O F P R O S P E R S T A N D A R D S - W I D T H V A R I E S L E G E N D F I N I S H E D F L O O R E L E V A T I O N F F E 5 9 9 . 5 0 6 ' - 0 " H T . S C R E E N I N G W A L L ( M A S O N R Y F A C A D E ) S C R E E N I N G W A L L S H A L L A C T A S P O O L E Q U I P M E N T A N D T R A S H T O T E E N C L O S U R E . 6 ' - 0 " H T . O R N A M E N T A L M E T A L F E N C E 1 - 4 ' - 0 " W I D T H S E L F L A T C H I N G , S E L F C L O S I N G M E T A L G A T E B A R R I E R F R E E R A M P P R O P O S E D P A R K I N G C O U N T E X I S T I N G F I R E H Y D R A N T H A N D I C A P P A R K I N G S P A C E B F R E X I S T I N G W A T E R M A I N W / V A L V E E X I S T I N G S A N I T A R Y S E W E R M A N H O L E E X I S T I N G S A N I T A R Y S E W E R E X I S T I N G S T O R M R I G H T - O F - W A Y 8 H / C E X I S T I N G C U R B I N L E T S S S M H F H V A R I A B L E H T . R E T A I N I N G W A L L O R S E A T W A L L ( M A S O N R Y F A C A D E ) U T I L I T Y & S I D E W A L K E A S E M E N T U . E . / S . W . E . G BFR F D C BFR BFRBFR E X I S T I N G B A R R I E R F R E E R A M P B F R P R O P O S E D D O M E S T I C W A T E R M E T E R P R O P O S E D B A R R I E R F R E E R A M P B F R I t e m 5 r It e m 5r It e m 5r A-1 DA 0 3 9 5 1 A PR O S P E R T R A I L W T SI T E N U M B E R : SI T E N A M E : SI T E A D D R E S S : SHEET #:SHEET NAME: 18 5 1 E A S T P R O S P E R T R A I L PR O S P E R , CO L L I N C O U N T Y , TX 7 5 0 7 8 DR A W N B Y : RE V I E W E D B Y : CH E C K E D B Y : AP P R O V E D B Y : JO B N U M B E R : 76 6 8 W A R R E N P A R K W A Y FR I S C O , T X 7 5 0 3 4 T Mo b i l e ACTION APPROVED DENIED STAFF ________________ ________ P&Z ________________ ________ Neighborhood # _____ SCSP18-00XX SUBSTANTIALLY CONFORMING SITE PLAN DA 0 3 9 5 1 A PR O S P E R T R A I L W T SI T E N U M B E R : SI T E N A M E : SI T E A D D R E S S : SHEET #:SHEET NAME: 18 5 1 E A S T P R O S P E R T R A I L PR O S P E R , CO L L I N C O U N T Y , TX 7 5 0 7 8 DR A W N B Y : RE V I E W E D B Y : CH E C K E D B Y : AP P R O V E D B Y : JO B N U M B E R : 76 6 8 W A R R E N P A R K W A Y FR I S C O , T X 7 5 0 3 4 T Mo b i l e A-2 SCSP18-00XX SUBSTANTIALLY CONFORMING SITE PLAN Item 5r To: Mayor and Town Council From: Alex Glushko, AICP, Planning Manager Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Conduct a Public Hearing, and consider and act upon a request to rezone a portion of Planned Development-17 (PD-17) to Planned Development-Office/Retail (PD-O/R) and to rezone Single Family-15 (SF-15) to Planned Development-Office (PD-O), on 15.2± acres, located on the southwest corner of Broadway Street and Preston Road. (Z18-0007). History: This item was tabled at the November 27, 2018, Town Council, per a request by the applicant. Description of Agenda Item: The zoning and land use of the surrounding properties are as follows: Zoning Current Land Use Future Land Use Plan Subject Property Single Family-15 & Planned Development-17 Undeveloped Old Town District – Retail and Office North Single Family-15, Planned Development-21 & Retail Undeveloped Old Town District – Office and Retail East Planned Development-7 Commercial (Prosper Town Center) Retail & Neighborhood Services South Planned Development-17 Bank/Office (Texas Bank) Old Town District – Retail West Single Family-15 Residential Old Town District – Single Family and Office The primary purpose of the proposed PD is to rezone a portion of residentially zoned property, SF-15, located along the east side of Craig Road, south of Broadway, to Office, in accordance Prosper is a place where everyone matters. PLANNING Item 7 with the Comprehensive Plan, and to rezone the remainder of the subject property, from Planned Development-17 to Planned Development-Office/Retail, in order to allow for the construction of an office and retail development. The proposed zoning permits an office development on the entire tract and limits retail uses to a minimum of 250 feet from Craig Road, in accordance with the Future Land Use Plan. As shown on Exhibit D, the development consists of thirteen (13) office buildings, totaling 86,587 square feet, and two (2) retail buildings, totaling 22,968 square feet. The applicant is also proposing building elevations for the proposed development. As shown on Exhibit F, the office and retail buildings are proposed to consist of both pitched roof and flat roof architecture and will be constructed of brick and stone. The proposed elevations comply with the Zoning Ordinance requirements. Staff is in support of the proposed request to rezone the property to Office and Retail and the proposed building elevations. In conjunction with the rezoning request, the applicant is also seeking relief from the Town’s Engineering Design Standards and is requesting a waiver to the requirement for wet/retention ponds, for the proposed detention pond located in the northeast corner of the property, at the intersection of Preston Road and Broadway Street. Essentially, this will be a deep, dry pit. The requirement for wet/retention ponds, which was adopted by Town Council on October 10, 2017, states: “1. Wet ponds, aka Retention Ponds, are required in the Town of Prosper to satisfy detention requirements. Wet ponds provide amenities and increased water quality functions as compared to dry ponds.” The requirement for wet ponds provides for a waiver process, which states, “if a development is unable to utilize either retention or underground detention due to physical constraints, hydraulic limitations or other hardships, the use of a dry detention pond will require Town Council approval.” The applicant has provided the following statement to substantiate their request for a waiver of the requirement for a wet/retention pond: “This request is…to remove the requirement for above ground detention pond to be a “wet pond” or “retention pond” for this site. The existing drainage onsite is approximately 12- 14 feet below the Preston Road curb elevation. In order to accomplish an above ground pond, the normal water level would be at or below this elevation, 12-14 feet below the roadway, and practically invisible as an amenity, unless viewed from directly next to the pond. Additionally, Town standards requiring six feet of standing water in a retention pond increases the cost of the retaining walls substantially, while not adding a tangible benefit to the Town. This applicant suggests adding a civic monument or other feature as an amenity, to be coordinated with Town staff and stakeholders, in lieu of the retention pond.” Based on a preliminary analysis, Town Engineering staff believes a retention pond could have a water surface of approximately seven feet (7’) below the elevation of Preston Road at the downstream (north) end of the pond, and approximately nine feet (9’) near the upstream (south) end of the pond. The width of the pond would then be a function of how much volume is needed to be detained. Engineering staff has also indicated the proposed detention pond is an “on-channel” pond, which means that the pond has been placed in the path of the drainage channel that flows through the site. Item 7 This channel also carries the drainage for portions of Broadway Street and Preston Road. While the Town does not have any restrictions for it, on-channel detention can be problematic for environmental and maintenance reasons. However, the applicant has not been able to provide support material that justifies any physical constraints, hydraulic limitations or other restrictions that would prevent them from providing a wet or underground pond. To address the proposed dry pond the applicant is proposing to screen it with a wall. As shown on Exhibit H, the applicant is proposing a four-foot (4’) screening wall, with an attached monument. The screening wall is proposed to be constructed of brick and stone to match the buildings within the development, and would include signage with the name of the development. In addition, the proposed monument is proposed to be constructed of brick and stone to match the buildings within the development, and would include entry signage for downtown Prosper. The proposed signage associated with the screening wall and monument are not included with this request and would require approval of a building permit and/or Town Council approval of a Special Purpose Sign District in the future. The applicant has also included examples of future monument signage for reference only, to show how the proposed signage, screening wall, and monument are consistent with the buildings within the development. From a technical standpoint, the screening wall and monument are not located within public right-of- way or existing public easements, are proposed within the required building and landscape setbacks, but are located outside of the required visibility triangle at the intersection of Broadway Street and Preston Road. In general, staff is supportive of the proposed rezoning request, with regard to permitted uses, site layout, building elevations, and landscaping. However, staff does not support the request for a dry detention pond, due to the fact that the proposed detention pond is located at such a prominent location within the Town, and specifically at a key gateway into the downtown. Future Land Use Plan – The Old Town insert of the Future Land Use Plan recommends Retail and Office for the property; the proposed development conforms to the Future Land Use Plan. Thoroughfare Plan – The property has direct access to existing Broadway Street, an ultimate four- lane divided thoroughfare, Preston Road, an existing six-lane divided thoroughfare, and Craig Road, a two-lane commercial collector. The zoning exhibit complies with the Thoroughfare Plan. Water and Sanitary Sewer Services – Water and sanitary sewer services are directly adjacent to the property. Access and Circulation – The property has access from Broadway Street, Preston Road, and Craig Road. Adequate access is provided to the property. Schools – This property is served by the Prosper Independent School District. It is not anticipated that a school site will be needed on this property. Parks – It is not anticipated that this property will be needed for the development of a park. Environmental Considerations – No 100-year floodplain exists on the property. Item 7 Legal Obligations and Review: Notification was provided to neighboring property owners, as required by state law. Town staff has not received any Public Hearing Notice Reply Forms. Attached Documents: 1. Location and Zoning Maps 2. Proposed Exhibits A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H 3. Project Renderings (for informational purposes only) Planning & Zoning Commission Recommendation: At their November 6, 2018 meeting, the Planning & Zoning Commission recommended the Town Council approve the request by a vote of 6-1, as presented by the applicant with the following conditions of approval: 1. That the dry detention pond be approved by the Town Council; and 2. That the design of the proposed monument be approved by Town staff and the Town Council. Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends the Town Council approve the request to rezone the property, subject to the following: 1. Requiring a wet/retention pond as required by Section 6.09 “Detention/Retention Basin Design,” of Section 6, “Drainage System Design Requirements” of the Town’s Engineering Design Standards, as it exists or may be amended. Proposed Motion: I move to approve the rezoning of a portion of Planned Development-17 (PD-17) to Planned Development-Office/Retail (PD-O/R) and to rezone Single Family-15 (SF-15) to Planned Development-Office (PD-O), on 15.2± acres, located on the southwest corner of Broadway Street and Preston Road. (The proposed motion may include the above-noted staff stipulation). Item 7 THIRD ST FIRST ST CR A I G R D BROADWAY ST FIFTH STPA R V I N S T LA N E S T THIRD ST ST O N E C R E E K D R FI E L D S T WILLOWMIST DR WILLOWGATE DR SEVENTH ST W I L L O W R I D G E D R S T O N E H O L L O W C T PA R V I N S T PR E S T O N R D FI E L D S T Z18-0007 ±0 180 360 54090Feet Item 7 THIRD ST FIRST ST CR A I G R D BROADWAY ST FIFTH STPA R V I N S T LA N E S T THIRD ST ST O N E C R E E K D R FI E L D S T WILLOWMIST DR WILLOWGATE DR SEVENTH ST W I L L O W R I D G E D R S T O N E H O L L O W C T PA R V I N S T PR E S T O N R D FI E L D S T Z18-0007 S-3 S-5 PD-7 PD-2PD-67 PD-17 PD-62 PD-17 PD-21 PD-21 PD-3 PD-17 CSF-15 R R/C/O SF-10 SF-10 R SF-15 SF-15 SF-15 R O R R R O SF-15 DTO DTO SF-15 SF-15 SF-15 DTO SF-15 DTODTO DTO DTO DTO DTO DTO C ±0 180 360 54090Feet Item 7 15.229 Ac. / 663,363 Sq. Ft. (Gross) Doc. No. 20160725000952110 DRCCT Land Use: Vacant Zoning: PD-17-R, SF-15 Doc. No. 2018-23 PRCCT Land Use: Bank Zoning: R, PD-17 Inst. No. 20170811001072350 DRCCT Land Use: Bank Zoning: R, PD-17 Vo l . 6 , P g . 7 6 D R C C T La n d U s e : S i n g l e F a m i l y Zo n i n g : S F - 1 5 variable width R.O.W. va r i a b l e w i d t h R . O . W . (a l s o k n o w n a s P r e s t o n R o a d ) va r i a b l e w i d t h R . O . W . 11.821 Acres ( 514,904 Sq. Ft.) Vol. 2529, Pg. 871 DRCCT Land Use: Vacant Zoning: O/R, PD-21 Doc. No. 96-0025732 DRCCT Land Use: Vacant Zoning: R va r i a b l e w i d t h R . O . W . Vo l . 5 5 6 1 , P g . 2 3 1 D R C C T La n d U s e : V a c a n t Zo n i n g : O , P D - 1 7 Doc. No. 2008-119 PRCCT Land Use: Retail Zoning: C, PD-17 Doc. No. DRCCT Land Use: Vacant Zoning: C, PD-17 Existing R.O.W. POINT OF BEGINNING Ex . Z o n i n g : S F - 1 5 Ex . Z o n i n g : P D - 1 7 - R H TRO N                EXHIBIT 'A'                WINIKATES TRACT COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY, ABSTRACT NO. 147 IN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, COLLIN COUNTY, TEXAS 15.229 ACRES Current Zoning: PD-17-R, SF-15 Requested Zoning: PD-17 Town Case #Z18-0007 Scale: 1" = 50' June, 2018 SEI Job No. 18-065 NOTES: OWNER / APPLICANT Bg-Gbt Broadway & Preston LP 9550 John W Elliot Drive, Ste 106 Frisco, Texas 75033 Telephone (214) 975-0842 Contact: Teague Griffin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 / TBPLS No. F-10043100 Contact: David Bond LOCATION MAP 1" = 1000' PROJECT LOCATION METES AND BOUNDS DESCRIPTION ACCESS EASEMENT LANDSCAPE EASEMENT Item 7 Exhibit B Statement of Intent and Purpose The purpose is to rezone a portion of Planned Development-17 to Planned Development- Office/Retail and to rezone a property zoned Single Family-15 to Planned Development-Office. The proposed plan calls for office and medical office developments on the western portion of the site in the existing single family zoning area, with retail occurring along the Preston Road frontage, in accordance with the comprehensive plan and the existing Planned Development. Item 7 Z18-0007 EXHIBIT C PLANNED DEVELOPMENT STANDARDS The proposed development will conform to the development standards of the Office (O) District of the Town of Prosper’s Zoning Ordinance, as it exists or may be amended, and Subdivision Ordinance, as it exists or may be amended, except as otherwise set forth in these Development Standards. 1. Except as noted below, the Tract shall develop in accordance with the Office (O) District requirements of the Town of Prosper’s Zoning Ordinance, as it exists or may be amended. 2. Development Plans a. Concept Plan: The tract shall be developed in general accordance with the attached concept plan, set forth in Exhibits D. b. Elevations: The tract shall be developed in general accordance with the attached elevations, set forth in Exhibits F. c. Landscape Plan: The tract shall be developed in general accordance with the attached landscape plan, set forth in Exhibit G. 3. Uses. Uses shall be permitted in accordance with the Office (O) District exception as follows: a. Retail (R) District uses shall be permitted on the subject property, provided they are not located within 250’ of Craig Road. 4. Regulations: a. The requirement for a Wet Pond/Retention Pond found in Subsection 6.09, C. “Wet/Retention Pond Criteria,” of Section 6, “Drainage System Design Requirements,” of the Town of Prosper Engineering Design Standards, shall not apply to this development. All other requirements of Section 6 and the Engineering Design Standards shall apply to this development. b. The proposed development monument may be located within the required landscape easements and building setbacks for Broadway Street and Preston Road as shown on Exhibit D. Item 7 Scale: 1"=50' October, 2018 SEI Job No. 18-065 Town Case No. Z18-0007                EXHIBIT 'D'             WINIKATES TRACT BLOCK A, LOTS 1 & 2 IN THE TOWN OF PROSPER, COLLIN COUNTY, TEXAS COLLIN COUNTY SCHOOL LAND SURVEY, ABST. NO. 147 514,604 Sq. Ft./11.821 Acres Current Zoning: PD-17-RETAIL & SF-15 OWNER / APPLICANT BG-GBT Preston & Broadway, LP 9550 John W. Elliott Dr., Suite 106 Frisco, TX 75033 Telephone: (972) 347-9900 Contact: Teague Griffin ENGINEER / SURVEYOR Spiars Engineering, Inc. 765 Custer Road, Suite 100 Plano, TX 75075 Telephone: (972) 422-0077 TBPE No. F-2121 Contact: David Bond LOCATION MAP 1" = 1000' PROJECT LOCATION variable width R.O.W. Doc. No. 20080620000752430 DRCCT re m a i n d e r o f 2 . 7 4 9 A c . Vo l . 1 3 0 0 , P g . 1 0 9 D R C C T remainder of 3.934 Ac. Vol. 684, Pg. 178 DRCCT Vo l . 6 , P g . 7 6 D R C C T va r i a b l e w i d t h R . O . W . (a l s o k n o w n a s P r e s t o n R o a d ) Do c . N o . 9 4 - 0 0 9 4 5 1 2 D R C C T va r i a b l e w i d t h R . O . W . Item 7 Exhibit E Conceptual Development Schedule A conceptual development schedule for the Winikates Tract is as follows: • October 2018 – Obtain Zoning Approval • December 2018 – Begin Construction on Phase 1 (Buildings B/C, M, N) • October 2019 – Phase 1 Tenants move in • October 2019 – Phase 2 Construction Begins (West side of Site, Retail Buildings along Preston) • December 2020 – Completion of site construction Item 7 3' - 3"2' - 3"27' - 0"25' - 0"38' - 8"11' - 8"3' - 3"11' - 8"25' - 0"27' - 0"29' - 0"SHEET CONTENT PROJECT No.DESIGNED BY :DRAWN BY :DATE ISSUED :SHEET No.PROJECT DESCRIPTIONREVISIONSTAGREVISIONDATEREVISIONDESCRIPTION123-BUILDING PERMIT COMMENTARCHITECT LLC 1615 BARCLAY DRIVE CARROLLTON, TEXAS 75007 COPYRIGHT C TL SULLIVAN ARCHITECTS 2 3 4 5 D C B A D C B A 1 2 3 4 5 1 TLS 214 533 9899 tlsarch@aol.com214 682 0307 jcabaya@live.comTERRY SULLIVAN JO ABAYA A - 902----WINIKATES BUILDINGS A & P -CORNER OF PRESTON AND BROADWAY--0000 ---JC ABAYA JC ABAYA 2018.09.20 MA T E R I A L T A B U L A T I O N NO R T H E L E V A T I O N C O V E R A G E P E R C E N T BR I C K ST O N E MI S C . ( T R I M , S O F F I T , E T C . ) TO T A L sq . f t . sq . f t . sq . f t . sq . f t . %%%% 40 53 7 10 0 MA T E R I A L L I S T BR K 1 CO M P MA SF D ST C T R I M 1 L I G H T B R I C K CO M P O S I T I O N R O O F S H I N G L E ME T A L A W N I N G ST U C C O F O A M D E T A I L ST U C C O T R I M D A R K G R A Y ST C ST U C C O L I G H T G R A Y SF ST O R E F R O N T D O O R / W I N D O W IM D IS U L A T E D M E T A L D O O R GR A Y S T A N D I N G S E A M O N M E T A L F R A M E AW CS CA S T S T O N E H E A D E R 1 / 8 " = 1 ' - 0 " 2 Bu i l d i n g A 1 / 8 " = 1 ' - 0 " 1 Bu i l d i n g P MA T E R I A L T A B U L A T I O N NO R T H E L E V A T I O N C O V E R A G E P E R C E N T MA T E R I A L L I S T BR K 1 CO M P MA SF D ST C T R I M 1 L I G H T B R I C K CO M P O S I T I O N R O O F S H I N G L E ME T A L A W N I N G ST U C C O F O A M D E T A I L ST U C C O T R I M D A R K G R A Y ST C ST U C C O L I G H T G R A Y SF ST O R E F R O N T D O O R / W I N D O W IM D IS U L A T E D M E T A L D O O R GR A Y S T A N D I N G S E A M O N M E T A L F R A M E AW CS CA S T S T O N E H E A D E R ST N BU F F E D A U S T I N S T O N E ST N BU F F E D A U S T I N S T O N E 1, 8 5 2 2, 4 4 6 28 0 4, 5 7 8 BR I C K ST O N E MI S C . ( T R I M , S O F F I T , E T C . ) TO T A L sq . f t . sq . f t . sq . f t . sq . f t . %%%% 58 35 7 10 0 1, 8 5 2 1, 0 9 8 22 3 3, 1 7 3 AW BR K 1 ST N SF D IM D CS MA ST C T R I M 1 CO M P SC DR SF BR K 1 ST N CS IM D SF MA SC SO L D I E R C O U R S E S I L L DO U B L E R O W -LO C K DR SC SO L D I E R C O U R S E S I L L DO U B L E R O W -LO C K DR SC DR SF D ST C T R I M 1 IM D SC DR CSItem 7 10' - 0"12' - 0"11' - 0"17' - 0"31' - 6"2' - 3" 1 1 ' - 0 " 2 ' - 3 " 3 ' - 3 " 3 1 ' - 0 " 1 9 ' - 0 " 1 7 ' - 0 " 1 2 ' - 0 " 1 0 ' - 0 " SHEET CONTENT PROJECT No.DESIGNED BY :DRAWN BY :DATE ISSUED :SHEET No.PROJECT DESCRIPTIONREVISIONSTAGREVISIONDATEREVISIONDESCRIPTION123-BUILDING PERMIT COMMENTARCHITECT LLC 1615 BARCLAY DRIVE CARROLLTON, TEXAS 75007 COPYRIGHT C TL SULLIVAN ARCHITECTS 2 3 4 5 D C B A D C B A 1 2 3 4 5 1 TLS 214 533 9899 tlsarch@aol.com214 682 0307 jcabaya@live.comTERRY SULLIVAN JO ABAYA A - 401WINIKATESBUILDING D & I -CORNER OF PRESTON AND BROADWAY--0000 ---JC ABAYA JC ABAYA 2018.09.20 MA T E R I A L T A B U L A T I O N NO R T H E L E V A T I O N C O V E R A G E P E R C E N T BR I C K ST O N E MI S C . ( T R I M , S O F F I T , E T C . ) TO T A L sq . f t . sq . f t . sq . f t . sq . f t . 83 8 25 1 10 2 11 9 1 %%%% 70 21 9 10 0 M A T E R I A L T A B U L A T I O N NO R T H E L E V A T I O N C O V E R A G E P E R C E N T BR I C K ST O N E MI S C . ( T R I M , S O F F I T , E T C . ) TO T A L sq . f t . sq . f t . sq . f t . sq . f t . 52 3 15 7 67 74 7 %%%% 70 21 9 10 0 1 / 8 " = 1 ' - 0 " 1 Bu i l d i n g I 1 / 8 " = 1 ' - 0 " 2 Bu i l d i n g D ST N BR K 1 DR SC CS CO M P IM D SF D CS ST N BRK 1 IMD SC SC DRCOMP MA T E R I A L L I S T BR K 1 CO M P MA SF D ST C T R I M 1 L I G H T B R I C K CO M P O S I T I O N R O O F S H I N G L E ME T A L A W N I N G ST U C C O F O A M D E T A I L ST U C C O T R I M D A R K G R A Y ST C ST U C C O L I G H T G R A Y SF ST O R E F R O N T D O O R / W I N D O W IM D IS U L A T E D M E T A L D O O R GR A Y S T A N D I N G S E A M O N M E T A L F R A M E AW CS CA S T S T O N E H E A D E R ST N BU F F E D A U S T I N S T O N E SC SO L D I E R C O U R S E S I L L DO U B L E R O W -LO C K DR MATERIAL LIST BRK 1 COMP MA SFD STC TRIM 1 LIGHT BRICK COMPOSITION ROOF SHINGLE METAL AWNING STUCCO FOAM DETAIL STUCCO TRIM DARK GRAYSTC STUCCO LIGHT GRAYSFSTORE FRONT DOOR / WINDOWIMDISULATED METAL DOORGRAY STANDING SEAM ON METAL FRAME AW CS CAST STONE HEADER STN BUFFED AUSTIN STONESCSOLDIER COURSE SILLDOUBLE ROW -LOCK DRItem 7 Item 7 Item 7 Item 7 FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY (PROPOSED MONUMENT HAS BEEN UPDATED SINCE THIS EXHIBIT WAS ORIGINALLY PREPARED) Item 7 FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY (PROPOSED MONUMENT HAS BEEN UPDATED SINCE THIS EXHIBIT WAS ORIGINALLY PREPARED) Item 7 FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY (PROPOSED MONUMENT HAS BEEN UPDATED SINCE THIS EXHIBIT WAS ORIGINALLY PREPARED) Item 7 FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY (PROPOSED MONUMENT HAS BEEN UPDATED SINCE THIS EXHIBIT WAS ORIGINALLY PREPARED) Item 7 Page 1 of 7 To: Mayor and Town Council From: John Webb, AICP, Director of Development Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Discussion on Draft Downtown Architectural Standards. Background/Description of Agenda Item: On August 28, 2018, the Town Council authorized the Town Manager to execute a Professional Services Agreement between the Town and Kimley Horn and Associates, Inc., related to the Phase 2 Prosper Old Town Area Assessment Project. The purpose of this project is to prepare detailed architectural standards in both written and graphic format for the Old Town commercial core area. In addition, the consultant will update the Old Town street cross sections in regard to travel lanes, medians, on-street parking, underground utilities, and amenity zones. The purpose of this agenda item is to convey the stakeholder feedback received to date and receive direction from the Town Council on the attached images prior to codifying the standards. In November, the consultant team met with Matt Savoy, Teague Griffin, Luke Brown, and Mike Pettis to receive their comments and recommendations on future design standards for the Downtown. The theme of their comments included, •“As long as it works well together, introduce a variety of building materials, other than just brick and stone, such as metal and wood. The silo is the downtown’s “skyline” and it’s not brick. •Let the market dictate building heights. •Permit roof-top dining/entertainment such as Urban Crust in downtown Plano. •Flat, non-pitched roofs with parapets on the front of buildings. •Roll-up/fold-up doors and windows. •Buildings should invite people to walk around.” Visual Preference Images The stakeholders reviewed and supported the following images and components: Prosper is a place where everyone matters. DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Item 8 Page 2 of 7 Variety of Materials, Windows & Awnings Item 8 Page 3 of 7 Variety but Compatible Materials Item 8 Page 4 of 7 Fold-up Windows and Doors Item 8 Page 5 of 7 Roof Top Uses and Contrasting Materials Item 8 Page 6 of 7 Limited Use of Unique Venues Item 8 Page 7 of 7 Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends the Town Council provide feedback to the consulting team in order to develop the necessary standards. Item 8 Page 1 of 1 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Leslie Scott, Director of Library Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Library Services Update. Description of Agenda Item: A year in review will be presented to the Town Council and includes topics such as circulation, programs, moving to the new facility, and maintaining state accreditation. Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council provide feedback on the Library Services Update. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. LIBRARY SERVICES Item 9 Page 1 of 3 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Kelly Neal, CGFO, CPM, Finance Director Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon amending Ordinance No. 17-65 (FY 2017-2018 Budget). Description of Agenda Item: The proposed ordinance is amending final department balances for the FY 2017-2018 Budget. TIRZ #1 The TIRZ #1 Fund includes all identified revenue outlined in the development and financing agreement with the Town and Blue Star Land, LP. The TIRZ # 1 Fund received revenue of $600,838 above the budget. This revenue was reimbursed back to the developer totaling an additional $600,838 in expenditures based on the agreement between such parties. The revenue and expenditures exceeded the FY 2017-2018 adopted budget projected in the TIRZ #1 Fund related to the received revenue. Therefore, the adopted budget will increase the revenue and expenditures by $600,838 from $1,245,915 to $1,846,753. Debt Service Fund: The Debt Service Fund accounts for the property tax revenues and the payment of general long- term debt principal and interest along with the cost of bond issuance. The revenue received from property tax revenues increased the budget from $5,023,025 to $5,121,000. Due to the bond issuance of the 2018 GO and CO bonds, the administrative fees exceeded projected costs. Professional services exceeded budget due to arbitrage calculations required under the IRS Code. Bond interest expense exceeded budget due to estimated interest exceeding actual interest on the 2017 bond issuance. The expenditures increased by $21,242 from $4,718,308 to $4,739,550. Wastewater Impact Fee Fund: The Fund was established to ensure funding is provided for major capital projects for the wastewater system. As noted on the monthly financial report, the revenue received for Wastewater Impact Fees has exceeded the adopted budget. Expenditures were paid for developer agreements approved for reimbursement. The revenue received will increase the budget from $610,000 to $982,145 and the expenditure budget increased by $38,900 from $705,825 to $744,725. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. FINANCE DEPARTMENT Item 10 Page 2 of 3 East Thoroughfare Impact Fee Fund: The fund was established to ensure funding is provided for major capital projects needed due to development. The East Thoroughfare Impact Fee Fund accounts for roadway capital improvement projects shown on the Town’s adopted Thoroughfare Plan East of Preston Road. The approved capital budget exceeded the adopted budget due to the Coit Road (First – Frontier) project by $600,000. There was an amendment to the project which caused the funds to exceed the adopted budget. The adopted revenue budget will decrease from $2,820,200 to $2,210,620 and expenditures will increase by $433,821 from $7,676,738 to $8,110,559. The difference will come from fund balance. Special Revenue Funds: The Special Revenue Funds include specific revenue sources that are legally restricted for specific purposes. Some examples include escrow funds and donations funds. The Escrow Fund includes payments from developers held in escrow for development. A budget amendment is requested to increase the transfer out from the Special Revenue Fund for $66,345 and to establish revenue of $23,244 for the tree mitigation program. The total revenues will increase from $57,860 to $81,104 and expenditures will increase by $66,345 from $71,618 to $137,963. The difference will come from fund balance. Water and Sewer Fund: The Water and Sewer Fund is an enterprise fund for providing services to the citizens for water and sewer needs through user fees. Due to the volume of usage for water and sewer services, the actual water and sewer revenue was $2,760,308 in excess of budgeted revenue. In relation to the expenditures for the purchase of water, a budget amendment is needed to increase the water purchases by $645,530 from $4,201,075 to $4,846,605. The Water-Sewer Fund also incurred additional debt service expense due to the issuance of the 2018 CO bond. The budget amendment is needed to increase debt service by $143,274 from $2,973,872 to $3,117,146. The Water-Sewer Fund increased revenue offsets the increased expenditures and the remainder of funds are rolled into fund balance. Budget Impact: The Budget amendment is addressing expenditures only as outlined in the Town’s Financial Management Policy, Budgetary Control. The Special Revenue Funds will increase expenditures by $1,139,904; the Debt Service Fund will increase expenditures by $21,242; and Water-Sewer Fund will increase expenditures by $788,804. Legal Obligations and Review: Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., has reviewed and approved the budget amendment ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. Ordinance Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends approval of amending Ordinance No. 17-65 (FY 2017-2018 Budget) to fund increased revenues, transfers in, transfer out, and expenditures in the Special Revenue Funds including TIRZ # 1, Wastewater Impact Fee Fund, East Thoroughfare Impact Fee Fund; Debt Service Fund; and Water-Sewer Fund. Item 10 Page 3 of 3 Recommended Motion: I move to approve amending Ordinance No. 17-65 (FY 2017-2018 Budget) to fund increased revenues, transfers in, transfer out, and expenditures in the Special Revenue Funds including TIRZ # 1, Wastewater Impact Fee Fund, East Thoroughfare Impact Fee Fund; Debt Service Fund; and Water-Sewer Fund. Item 10 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18- AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, AMENDING ORDINANCE NO. 17-65 (FY 2017-2018 BUDGET) AND ALLOCATING FUNDS TO FUND EXPENDITURES OF $600,838 IN THE TIRZ #1 FUND BUDGET; INCREASED EXPENDITURES OF $21,242 IN THE DEBT SERVICE FUND BUDGET; INCREASED EXPENDITURES OF $38,900 IN THE WASTEWATER IMPACT FEE FUND; INCREASED EXPENDITURES IN THE EAST THOROROUGHFARE IMPACT FEE FUND OF $433,821; INCREASED EXPENDITURES OF $66,345 IN THE SPECIAL REVENUE FUND BUDGET; INCREASED EXPENDITURES OF $788,804 IN THE WATER-SEWER FUND BUDGET; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; AND PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Town Council”), has investigated and determined that it will be beneficial and advantageous to the residents of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), to amend Ordinance No. 17-65 (FY 2017-2018 Budget) for the purposes listed in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference; and WHEREAS, the changes will result in budgeted funds being reallocated among different funds and departments and an overall net increase in the budget for funding from fund balance in the East Thoroughfare Impact Fee fund and Special Revenue fund. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 Findings Incorporated. The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Amendment to Ordinance No. 17-65 (FY 2017-2018 Budget). Ordinance No. 17-65 (FY 2017-2018 Budget) is hereby amended to allow for increases to revenues and appropriations as shown in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference. SECTION 3 Savings/Repealing Clause. All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed, but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed Ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the Ordinance. Any remaining portions of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 Severability. Should any section, subsection, sentence, clause, or phrase of this Ordinance be declared unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, it is expressly provided that any and all remaining portions of this Ordinance shall remain in full force and effect. Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, Item 10 Ordinance No. 18- , Page 2 subsection, sentence, clause, or phrase thereof irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, or phrases be declared unconstitutional or invalid. SECTION 5 Effective Date. This Ordinance shall become effective immediately upon its passage. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST TO: Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: ________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 10 TIRZ #1 Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues $ 1,251,956 $ 1,251,956 $ 1,852,794 $ 600,838 Total $ 1,251,956 $ 1,251,956 $ 1,852,794 $ 600,838 Total Expenditures $ 1,245,915 $ 1,245,915 $ 1,846,753 $ 600,838 Total $ 1,245,915 $ 1,245,915 $ 1,846,753 $ 600,838 Debt Service Fund Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues $ 5,023,025 $ 5,023,025 $ 5,121,000 $ 97,975 Total $ 5,023,025 $ 5,023,025 $ 5,121,000 $ 97,975 Total Expenditures $ 4,718,308 $ 4,718,308 $ 4,739,550 $ 21,242 Total $ 4,718,308 $ 4,718,308 $ 4,739,550 $ 21,242 Wastewater Impact Fee Fund Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues $ 610,000 $ 610,000 $ 982,145 $ 372,145 Total $ 610,000 $ 610,000 $ 982,145 $ 372,145 Total Expenditures $ 519,555 $ 705,825 $ 744,725 $ 38,900 Total $ 519,555 $ 705,825 $ 744,725 $ 38,900 East Thoroughfare Impact Fee Fund Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues $ 2,820,000 $ 2,820,000 $ 2,210,620 $ (609,380) Total $ 2,820,000 $ 2,820,000 $ 2,210,620 $ (609,380) Total Expenditures $ 6,910,000 $ 7,676,738 $ 8,110,559 $ 433,821 Total $ 6,910,000 $ 7,676,738 $ 8,110,559 $ 433,821 EXHIBIT "A" BUDGET AMENDMENT FISCAL YEAR 2017-2018 December 11, 2018 1 Item 10 EXHIBIT "A" BUDGET AMENDMENT FISCAL YEAR 2017-2018 December 11, 2018 Special Revenue Funds Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues $ 57,860 $ 57,860 $ 81,104 $ 23,244 Total $ 57,860 $ 57,860 $ 81,104 $ 23,244 Total Expenditures $ 45,099 $ 71,618 $ 137,963 $ 66,345 Total $ 45,099 $ 71,618 $ 137,963 $ 66,345 Water-Sewer Fund Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues 16,768,903 16,816,392 19,576,700 2,760,308 Total $ 16,768,903 $ 16,816,392 $ 19,576,700 $ 2,760,308 Expenditures: Administration $ 3,993,280 $ 3,997,633 $ 3,997,633 $ - Debt Service 2,973,872 2,973,872 3,117,146 143,274 Water Purchases 4,153,586 4,201,075 4,846,605 645,530 Public Works 6,895,211 7,388,058 7,388,058 - Total $ 18,015,949 $ 18,560,638 $ 19,349,442 $ 788,804 Total Revenue 3,245,130$ Total Expenditures 1,949,950 Net Effect All Funds 1,295,180$ 2 Item 10 Page 1 of 2 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Kelly Neal, CGFO, CPM, Finance Director Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon amending Ordinance No. 18-71 (FY 2018-2019 Budget) and Capital Improvement Plan. Description of Agenda Item: The proposed ordinance is amending the following balances for the FY 2018-2019 Budget and Capital Improvement Plan. CIP First Street (DNT-Coleman) The General Fund was supplemented in the FY 2017-2018 budget for First Street ROW acquisitions. These funds in the amount of $1,303,915 were transferred to the CIP fund but were not added to the Capital Improvement Plan during the FY 2018-2019 CIP adoption. Town staff is increasing project 1512-ST as well as funds encumbered in the Engineering budget for easement and ROW acquisition services of $60,000 that have been transferred to the CIP fund. First Street/DNT Intersection Improvements The General Fund supplemented this project of $150,000 and the CIP reflects in FY 2018-2019 $1,250,000 for the construction of the improvements. Engineering entered into a contract for professional engineering services and the savings of $13,000 from these services is being transferred to Prosper Trail/DNT Intersection Improvements. Therefore, Town staff is reducing 1820-ST by $13,000 and increasing project 1830-ST by $13,000. Highway 289 Gateway Monument The Parks department in the General Fund has expended funds in the amount of $54,752 for professional engineering services for the gateway monument. The General Fund has funded this project of $250,000 for the construction of the project. Town staff is adusting the Capital Improvement Plan to reflect the professional engineering services for project 1723-PK. US 380 Green Ribbon Landscape Irrigation The Capital Improvement Plan reflects $750,000 of interlocal funds in FY 2018-2019. The Parks Department has expended funds in the amount of $59,250 for the professional engineering services for project 1813-PK. Town staff is adjusting the Capital Improvement Plan to reflect the professional engineering services. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. FINANCE DEPARTMENT Item 11 Page 2 of 2 Public Safety Facility At the November 13, 2018 meeting, the Town Council was updated on the cost of the approved alternates. To reflect this year’s CIP correctly, the budgeting reallocation will need to be revised by reducing development costs by $300,000 for project 1901-FC; increasing construction of facility by $635,000 for project 1905-FC; and reducing FFE by $335,000 for project 1906-FC. The total funding for this project did not change. Fishtrap EST (South) The savings from the Water Supply Line Phase I Easement costs of $343,000 from project 1716- WA is being transferred to Fishtrap EST project 1715-WA for the construction of the Elevated Storage Tank on Fishtrap. PO Roll Forward The Town of Prosper continues to utilize the purchase order system to encumber funds and at the end of September 30, 2018, the balances of open purchase orders require an amendment to the FY 2018-2019 budget by increasing the relevant line items in the new year by shifting budget authority from last fiscal year to the new fiscal year. The net effect is lowering expenditures in FY 2017-2018 and rolling forward those available funds to the current year. This is required under current generally accepted accounting principles. Capital projects encumbrances are excluded from the budget amendment because Capital Project Fund monies are multi-year appropriations. The total amount of General Fund encumbrances to be brought forward is $253,124.55; the total encumbrances for the Water and Sewer Utility Fund to be brought forward is $202,523.93; and VERF Fund encumbrances to be brought forward is $2,775.00. Budget Impact: The General Fund expenditures will increase $253,124.55; the Water and Sewer Fund expenditures will increase $202,523.93; and VERF Fund expenditures will increase $2,775.00 in FY 2018-2019. The net effect is lower expenditures in FY 2017-2018 and rolling the funding to FY 2018-2019’s budget. The Capital Improvement Plan will increase $1,477,917 to reflect operating funds used to fund capital projects. Legal Obligations and Review: Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., has reviewed and approved the budget amendment ordinance as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. Ordinance 2. CIP Plan 3. Detailed list of Purchase Order Roll Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends approval of amending Ordinance No. 18-71 (FY 2018-2019 Budget) and Capital Improvement Plan to provide funding increase expenditures in the General Fund, Water- Sewer Utility Fund, and VERF Fund. Recommended Motion: I move to approve amending Ordinance No. 18-71 (FY 2018-2019 Budget) and Capital Improvement Plan to provide funding increase expenditures in the General Fund, Water-Sewer Utility Fund, and VERF Fund. Item 11 TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ORDINANCE NO. 18-__ AN ORDINANCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, AMENDING ORDINANCE NO. 18-71 (FY 2018-2019 BUDGET) AND ALLOCATING FUNDS TO FUND INCREASED EXPENDITURES OF $253,124.55 IN THE GENERAL FUND BUDGET; INCREASED EXPENDITURES OF $202,523.93 IN THE WATER-SEWER FUND BUDGET; AND INCREASED EXPENDITURES OF $2,775.00 IN THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT FUND BUDGET; PROVIDING FOR REPEALING, SAVINGS AND SEVERABILITY CLAUSES; AND PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS ORDINANCE. WHEREAS, the Town Council of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Town Council”), has investigated and determined that it will be beneficial and advantageous to the residents of the Town of Prosper, Texas (“Prosper”), to amend Ordinance No. 18-71 (FY 2018-2019 Budget) for the purposes listed in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference; and WHEREAS, the changes will result in budgeted funds being reallocated among different funds and departments and an overall net increase in the budget for funding from fund balance. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1 Findings Incorporated. The findings set forth above are incorporated into the body of this Ordinance as if fully set forth herein. SECTION 2 Amendment to Ordinance No. 18-71 (FY 2018-2019 Budget). Ordinance No. 18-71 (FY 2018-2019 Budget) is hereby amended to allow for increases to appropriations as shown in Exhibit “A,” attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference. SECTION 3 Savings/Repealing Clause. All provisions of any ordinance in conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed, but such repeal shall not abate any pending prosecution for violation of the repealed Ordinance, nor shall the repeal prevent prosecution from being commenced for any violation if occurring prior to the repeal of the Ordinance. Any remaining portions of conflicting ordinances shall remain in full force and effect. SECTION 4 Severability. Should any section, subsection, sentence, clause, or phrase of this Ordinance be declared unconstitutional or invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, it is expressly provided that any and all remaining portions of this Ordinance shall remain in full force and effect. Prosper hereby declares that it would have passed this Ordinance, and each section, subsection, sentence, clause, or phrase thereof irrespective of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences, clauses, or phrases be declared unconstitutional or invalid. Item 11 Ordinance No. 17-89, Page 2 SECTION 5 Effective Date. This Ordinance shall become effective immediately upon its passage. DULY PASSED AND APPROVED BY THE TOWN COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS, ON THIS 11TH DAY OF DECEMBER, 2018. TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS ___________________________________ Ray Smith, Mayor ATTEST TO: Robyn Battle, Town Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: ________________________________ Terrence S. Welch, Town Attorney Item 11 General Fund Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues: $ 27,877,145 $ 27,877,145 $ 27,877,145 $ - Total $ 27,877,145 $ 27,877,145 $ 27,877,145 $ - Expenditures: Administration 6,122,012$ 6,122,012$ 6,122,012$ -$ Police Services 4,742,276 4,742,276 4,793,966 51,689.55 Fire Services 7,675,378 7,675,378 7,675,378 - Public Works 3,698,019 3,698,019 3,808,430 110,411.00 Community Services 3,951,808 3,951,808 3,951,808 - Development Services 3,028,688 3,028,688 3,098,212 69,524.00 Engineering 1,236,308 1,236,308 1,257,808 21,500.00 Total $ 30,454,489 $ 30,454,489 $ 30,707,614 253,124.55 Water-Sewer Utility Fund Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues:20,022,105$ 20,022,105$ 20,022,105$ -$ Total 20,022,105$ 20,022,105$ 20,022,105$ -$ Expenditures: Administration 2,121,521$ 2,121,521$ 2,121,521$ -$ Debt Service 3,493,726$ 3,493,726$ 3,493,726$ -$ Water Purchases 5,349,510$ 5,349,510$ 5,349,510$ -$ Public Works 9,586,605$ 9,586,605$ 9,789,129$ 202,523.93$ Total 20,551,362$ 20,551,362$ 20,753,886$ 202,523.93$ VERF Fund Original Budget Current Budget Amended Budget Increase (Decrease) Total Revenues:1,642,961$ 1,642,961$ 1,642,961$ -$ Total 1,642,961$ 1,642,961$ 1,642,961$ -$ Expenditures: Technology Expenses 85,870$ 85,870$ 85,870$ -$ Equipment Expenses 277,336$ 277,336$ 277,336$ -$ Vehicle Expenses 532,339$ 532,339$ 535,114$ 2,775$ Total 532,339$ 532,339$ 535,114$ 2,775$ Total Revenue -$ Total Expenditures 458,423.48$ Net Effect All Funds (458,423.48)$ EXHIBIT "A" BUDGET AMENDMENT FISCAL YEAR 2018-2019 December 11, 2018 Item 11 Total Issued Debt Unissued Debt Unissued Debt Reimbursement Issued Prior Years 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Cost Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Resolution 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 01 1412-ST Downtown Enhancements (Broadway) 200,000 2,365,959 2,565,959 2,320,686 D 245,589 01 02 1512-ST First Street (DNT - Coleman) 1,076,000 1,363,915 8,000,000 10,439,915 2,439,915 A, D 8,000,000 8,000,000 02 03 1507-ST West Prosper Road Improvements 6,000,000 6,781,000 3,100,000 15,881,000 9,516,000 B,C 4,265,000 2,100,000 2,100,000 03 04 1622-ST Main Street (First - Broadway) 625,000 625,000 400,000 E 225,000 04 05 Gates of Prosper, TIRZ No. 1 (Richland, Lovers Lane, Detention) 1,214,388 2,079,632 2,532,536 5,826,556 5,826,556 H 05 06 Matthews Southwest, TIRZ No. 2 188,352 440,601 628,953 628,953 J 06 07 1511-ST Prosper Trail (Kroger - Coit) 305,000 4,457,308 4,762,308 4,557,000 A,D 205,308 07 08 1721-ST Windsong Road Repairs, Phase 1 & 2 Acacia Parkway (Gee Road - Windsong Parkway) 1,022,782 1,022,782 1,022,782 D 08 09 1812-ST Windsong Road Repairs (Uretek) 920,000 920,000 920,000 D,Z 09 10 1817-ST Windsong Road Repairs, Phase 3 710,000 710,000 710,000 710,000 10 11 US 380 (Denton County Line - Lovers Lane) 59,000,000 59,000,000 59,000,000 X 11 12 1709-ST Prosper Trail (Coit - Custer) - 4 lanes 610,000 200,000 11,755,000 12,565,000 810,000 A 11,755,000 11,755,000 12 13 1710-ST Coit Road (First - Frontier) - 4 lanes 689,900 600,000 14,000,000 15,289,900 1,289,900 A 14,000,000 14,000,000 13 14 1307-ST Frontier Parkway (BNSF Overpass) 20,345,000 2,210,000 22,555,000 20,375,000 A,X 949,004 720,996 510,000 365,000 1,230,996 14 15 DNT Southbound Frontage Road 17,000,000 17,000,000 17,000,000 X 15 16 Teel Parkway (DCFWSD#10), Phase 2 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 X 16 17 1513-ST Old Town Streets 2015 (Fifth, McKinley) 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 17 18 1803-ST Fifth Street (Coleman - Church) 375,000 375,000 375,000 375,000 18 19 1804-ST Third Street (Main - Coleman) 250,000 250,000 250,000 250,000 19 20 1701-ST Eighth Street (Church - PISD Admin) 260,000 260,000 260,000 260,000 20 21 1702-ST Field Street (First - Broadway) 250,000 250,000 250,000 250,000 21 22 1708-ST E-W Collector (Cook Lane - DNT); design done w/ Cook Lane 125,000 1,250,000 1,375,000 1,375,000 A 22 23 1820-ST First Street/DNT Intersection Improvements 137,000 1,250,000 1,387,000 1,387,000 D 23 24 1823-ST Victory Way (Coleman - Frontier) - 2 lanes of 4 lane ultimate 250,000 2,250,000 2,500,000 250,000 D 385,000 1,865,000 2,250,000 24 25 1830-ST Prosper Trail/DNT Intersection Improvements 13,000 75,000 88,000 88,000 A,D 25 26 1831-ST First Street/BNSF RR Overpass Study 40,000 40,000 40,000 D 26 27 1832-ST Prosper Trail/BNSF RR Overpass Study 40,000 40,000 40,000 D 27 28 1824-ST Fishtrap (Teel Intersection Improvements) 150,000 1,350,000 1,500,000 150,000 D 1,350,000 1,350,000 28 29 1708-ST Cook Lane (First - End) 150,000 2,100,000 2,250,000 150,000 A 2,100,000 2,100,000 29 30 1825-ST Coleman Street (Gorgeous - Prosper Trail) - 4 lanes 375,000 2,125,000 2,500,000 375,000 D 2,125,000 2,125,000 30 31 FM 2478 (US 380 - FM 1461) 80,000 169,000 69,000 56,500,000 56,818,000 56,818,000 A,X 31 32 Coleman Street (at Prosper HS) 700,000 700,000 700,000 C 32 33 1908-ST Fifth Street (Parvin - Craig) 400,000 400,000 400,000 D 33 34 1908-ST Lane Street (First - Third) 225,000 225,000 225,000 D 34 35 1908-ST North Street (Seventh - Eighth) 175,000 175,000 175,000 D 35 36 1908-ST Pecan Street (First - End) 200,000 200,000 200,000 D 36 37 Craig Street (Preston - First) 750,000 750,000 750,000 750,000 37 38 Craig Street (First - Broadway) 350,000 350,000 350,000 350,000 38 39 Craig Street (Broadway - Fifth) 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 39 40 DNT Overpass at US380 8,000,000 92,000,000 100,000,000 96,000,000 D,J, X 4,000,000 4,000,000 40 41 US 380 (US 377 - Denton County Line) 129,728,061 129,728,061 129,728,061 X 41 42 DNT Main Lane (US 380 - FM 428) 87,500,000 262,500,000 350,000,000 350,000,000 X 42 43 Crown Colony (Meadow Run - Bradford) 465,000 465,000 53,816 411,184 465,000 43 44 Crown Colony (Bradford - High Point) 500,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 44 45 Ridgewood (Hays - Crown Colony) 560,000 560,000 560,000 560,000 45 46 Waterwood (Ridgewood - End) 150,000 150,000 150,000 150,000 46 47 Colonial (Ridgewood - End)150,000 150,000 150,000 150,000 47 48 Shady Oaks Lane (Ridgewood - End)150,000 150,000 150,000 150,000 48 49 Riverhill (Ridgewood - End)150,000 150,000 150,000 150,000 49 50 Plymouth Colony (Bradford - High Point)400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 50 51 Plymouth Colony Circle (Plymouth Colony - End)200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 51 52 Prestonview (Hays - Betts)750,000 750,000 750,000 750,000 52 53 Betts Lane (Prestonview - High Point)250,000 250,000 250,000 250,000 53 54 High Point Drive (Hays - Betts)725,000 725,000 725,000 725,000 54 55 West Yorkshire Drive (High Point - Bradford)250,000 250,000 250,000 250,000 55 56 Bradford Drive (West Yorkshire-Plymonth Colony)600,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 56 57 Chandler Circle (Preston Road-Hays)700,000 700,000 700,000 700,000 57 58 1703-ST Parvin Road (Good Hope - FM 1385) 270,000 270,000 270,000 270,000 58 59 1704-ST Pasewark (Preston - Hickory) 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 59 60 FM 1461 (SH 289 - CR 165) 53,000,000 53,000,000 53,000,000 X 60 61 Coleman Street (Prosper Trail - Preston) - 4 lanes 6,000,000 6,000,000 700,000 A 5,300,000 5,300,000 61 62 Fishtrap (Teel - DNT) - 4 lanes 13,500,000 13,500,000 1,250,000 A 12,250,000 12,250,000 62 63 Teel Parkway (US 380 - Fishtrap) - Add 2 lanes to make 4 4,500,000 4,500,000 500,000 A 4,000,000 4,000,000 63 69,908,640 61,526,197 15,791,536 12,819,000 278,228,061 87,500,000 0 382,050,000 907,823,434 820,657,853 8,734,901 2,459,812 75,971,184 365,000 2,845,000 5,580,996 8,750,000 0 0 0 64,100,000 A Impact Fees G Park Development Fund B Grant and Interlocal Funds H TIRZ #1 C Developer Agreements J TIRZ #2 D General Fund K Escrows E Water / Wastewater Fund X Non-Cash Contributions F Stormwater Drainage Fund Z Other Sources (See Detail) 01 I n d e x Unissued Debt Schedule Description Codes - Other Sources Funding Sources Other Sources Summary of Capital Improvement Program - 12/11 FINAL General Fund Projects I n d e x Street Projects Subtotal EXHIBIT B - CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PLAN Item 11 Funding Sources Total Other Issued Debt Unissued Debt Unissued Debt Reimbursement Issued Prior Years 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Cost Sources Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Resolution 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 01 1827-TR Median Lighting - US 380 (Denton County - Custer)485,000 485,000 485,000 D 01 02 Median Lighting - Coit Road (First - Frontier)1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 D 02 03 Median Lighting - First Street (Craig - Coit)625,000 625,000 625,000 D 03 04 Median Lighting - Prosper Trail (Dallas Pkwy - Preston)825,000 825,000 825,000 D 04 05 Median Lighting - Prosper Trail (Preston - Coit 625,000 625,000 625,000 D 05 06 Traffic Signal - FM 1461 & Coit Rd 125,000 125,000 125,000 X 06 07 Traffic Signal - FM 1461 & FM 2478 (Custer Rd)125,000 125,000 125,000 X 07 08 Traffic Signal - FM 2478 (Custer Rd) & Prosper Trail 125,000 125,000 125,000 X 08 09 Traffic Signal - SH 289 & Coleman Rd 220,000 220,000 220,000 X 09 10 1909-TR Traffic Signal - Coit Rd & First Street 250,000 250,000 250,000 A 10 11 Traffic Signal - DNT & Frontier: (Collin County)400,000 400,000 400,000 X 11 12 Traffic Signal - DNT & Prosper Trail: (Collin County)400,000 400,000 400,000 X 12 13 Traffic Signal - Coit Rd & Richland Boulevard 250,000 250,000 250,000 A 13 14 Traffic Signal - Fishtrap & Gee Road 250,000 250,000 250,000 A 14 15 Traffic Signal - Fishtrap & Teel Parkway 250,000 250,000 250,000 A 15 16 Traffic Signal - Fishtrap & Windsong Parkway 250,000 250,000 250,000 A 16 17 Traffic Signal - FM 1385 & Fishtrap 125,000 125,000 125,000 X 17 18 Traffic Signal - SH 289 & Lovers Lane 220,000 220,000 220,000 H 18 595,000 1,535,000 1,345,000 0 0 0 3,075,000 6,550,000 6,550,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Funding Sources Total Other Issued Debt Unissued Debt Unissued Debt Reimbursement Issued Prior Years 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Cost Sources Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Resolution 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Neighborhood Park 01 1806-PK Star Trail Park #1 (7.5 Acres / No Lights)985,000 985,000 985,000 C, G 01 02 Lakewood Preserve (22 Acres / No Lights)483,000 483,000 966,000 966,000 C 02 03 1802-PK Hays Park (2 Acres / No Lights)50,000 300,000 350,000 350,000 G 03 04 Prairie Park (6.7 Acres / No Lights)300,000 300,000 300,000 C 04 05 Tanners Mill Park 468,000 500,000 968,000 468,000 C 500,000 500,000 05 06 Town Hall Open Space Park 55,000 2,000,000 2,055,000 55,000 D 2,000,000 2,000,000 07 Pecan Grove Irrigation (21.5 Acres / No Lights)75,000 75,000 75,000 D 07 08 Star Trail Park #2 (7.5 Acres / No Lights)1,393,000 1,393,000 535,000 C 858,000 858,000 08 09 Windsong Ranch Neighborhood Park #2 (7.5 Acres / No Lights)1,100,000 1,100,000 510,000 C, G 590,000 590,000 09 10 Pecan Grove Phase 2 (21.5 Acres / No Lights) (basketball, pavilion, parking, security lighting) 67,500 675,000 742,500 250,000 G 492,500 67,000 425,500 10 11 Park Operations Park (Convert area where Ops is into park) (17 Acres / No Lights) 50,000 425,000 475,000 475,000 50,000 425,000 11 12 Windsong Ranch Neighborhood Park #3 (7.5 Acres / No Lights)1,200,000 1,200,000 260,000 C 940,000 940,000 12 13 Star Trail Park #3 7.5 Acres / No Lights)1,160,000 1,160,000 785,000 C, G 375,000 375,000 13 14 Cedar Grove Park Phase 2 (9.8 Acres / No Lights)300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 14 15 1303-PK Cockrell Park (8.4 Acres / No Lights)90,000 1,012,640 1,102,640 90,000 G 1,012,640 1,012,640 15 Trails 16 1801-PK Whitley Place H&BTrail Extension 70,000 500,000 570,000 70,000 G 500,000 500,000 16 17 Windsong H&B Trail Phases 3C,5,6A, 6B, 7, 8, and 9.450,524 450,524 450,524 450,524 450,524 2,252,620 2,252,620 C 17 18 1910-PK Hike and Bike Master Plan 35,000 35,000 35,000 D 18 19 1911-PK Pecan Grove H&B Trail 30,000 410,000 440,000 250,000 G 190,000 190,000 19 20 Star Trail H&B Trail Phases 1, 2, 3, and 4.100,000 100,000 1,000,000 1,200,000 1,200,000 C 20 21 Whitley Place H&B Trail (Power line Easement)280,000 280,000 280,000 280,000 21 22 H&B Trail Heads / H&B Trail Gateways 100,000 100,000 500,000 700,000 700,000 100,000 100,000 500,000 22 23 Future unnamed H&B Trail 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 23 Community Park 24 1603-PK Frontier Park - North Field Improvements (17 Acres / Lights)11,360,815 31,195 11,392,010 1,834,590 B,G 9,557,420 24 25 1808-PK West Park Land (200 Acres / Lights)50,000 50,000 50,000 D 25 26 Town Lake Improvements (24 Acres / Lights)15,000 300,000 315,000 315,000 15,000 300,000 26 27 Sexton Park (69 Acres / Lights) (Sports Fields)7,650,000 7,650,000 7,650,000 7,650,000 27 28 Sexton Park Phase 2 (Lights) (Additional Sports Fields)15,000,000 15,000,000 15,000,000 15,000,000 28 29 Windsong Ranch Community Park (51 Acres / Lights)17,000,000 17,000,000 17,000,000 17,000,000 29 30 Prosper Center Community Park ( 30 Acres / no lights)15,000,000 15,000,000 15,000,000 15,000,000 30 31 Star Trail Park Community Park (30 Acres / Lights)15,000,000 15,000,000 15,000,000 15,000,000 31 Medians 31 1417-PK Richland Boulevard Median Landscaping 5,000 170,000 175,000 175,000 D 31 32 1723-PK State Highway 289 Gateway Monument 304,752 304,752 304,752 D 32 33 1818-PK Additional Turf Irrigation SH 289 80,000 80,000 80,000 D 33 34 1813-PK SH 289/US 380 Green Ribbon Landscape Irrigation 59,250 750,000 809,250 809,250 B,D 34 11,455,815 1,578,721 4,156,524 4,291,024 1,475,524 3,835,524 0 75,632,640 102,425,772 12,690,212 9,557,420 0 80,178,140 0 0 500,000 1,910,000 1,905,500 1,400,000 0 74,462,640 Funding Sources Total Other Issued Debt Unissued Debt Unissued Debt Reimbursement Issued Prior Years 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Cost Sources Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Resolution 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 01 1402-FC Town Hall - Professional Services 2,040,695 200,845 2,241,540 845 Z 2,240,695 1,250,000 379,195 01 02 1514-ST Town Hall - Offsite Infrastructure 1,307,400 1,307,400 32,400 F 1,275,000 02 03 1601-FC Town Hall - Construction 19,597,691 457,454 20,055,145 65,454 Z 19,989,691 10,451,732 03 04 1714-FC Town Hall - Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment 1,362,000 1,362,000 1,362,000 1,362,000 04 05 1713-FC Police Station and Dispatch - Professional Services 59,696 1,000,000 385,000 1,444,696 59,696 D 1,000,000 385,000 1,000,000 385,000 05 06 1904-FC Police Station and Dispatch - Development Costs 550,000 550,000 550,000 550,000 06 07 1905-FC Police Station and Dispatch - Construction 11,400,000 11,400,000 335,000 D 11,065,000 11,065,000 07 08 1906-FC Police Station and Dispatch - Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment 1,165,000 1,165,000 1,165,000 D 08 09 1809-FC Parks Operations and Public Works Complex 3,650,000 10,900,000 14,550,000 2,750,000 E, G 900,000 10,900,000 900,000 10,900,000 09 10 Westside Radio Tower for Public Safety 500,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 10 11 Central Fire Station Administration 2,546,000 2,546,000 2,546,000 2,546,000 11 12 Central Fire Station, Phase II (Bunk Gear Climate Storage)850,000 850,000 850,000 850,000 12 13 Eastside Fire Station 5,625,000 5,625,000 5,625,000 5,625,000 13 14 1901-EQ Ladder Truck 1,650,000 1,650,000 1,650,000 D 1,650,000 14 15 Recreation Center 15,000,000 15,000,000 15,000,000 15,000,000 15 16 Senior Facility 9,000,000 9,000,000 9,000,000 9,000,000 16 24,367,482 5,308,299 15,150,000 500,000 0 0 0 43,921,000 89,246,781 6,058,395 26,767,386 0 56,421,000 1,250,000 14,092,927 12,000,000 500,000 0 0 0 45,571,000 105,731,937 69,008,217 36,633,060 18,955,024 279,703,585 91,335,524 0 504,678,640 1,106,045,987 845,956,460 45,059,707 2,459,812 212,570,324 1,615,000 16,937,927 18,080,996 11,160,000 1,905,500 1,400,000 0 184,133,640 I n d e x I n d e x I n d e x Unissued Debt Schedule Unissued Debt Schedule Unissued Debt Schedule 02 Subtotal I n d e x Park Projects I n d e x Facility Projects Subtotal Grand Total General Fund Subtotal I n d e x Summary of Capital Improvement Program - 12/11 FINAL General Fund Projects Traffic Projects Item 11 Funding Sources Total Other Issued Debt Unissued Debt Unissued Debt Reimbursement Issued Prior Years 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Cost Sources Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Resolution 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 01 1508-WA BNSF Railroad PRV's 175,000 175,000 175,000 01 02 1719-WA Custer Road Pump Station Expansion (Additional Pump)134,100 829,350 963,450 963,450 A 02 03 1822-WA Glennbrooke Water Meter PRV's 407,200 407,200 407,200 03 04 1715-WA Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank Site Acquisition 300,000 300,000 300,000 A 04 05 1902-WA Custer Road Meter Station and Water Line Relocations 290,325 1,905,200 2,195,525 2,195,525 E 05 06 1715-WA Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank 325,700 5,758,000 6,083,700 3,168,700 A 2,707,500 207,500 2,707,500 207,500 06 07 1716-WA Water Supply Line Phase 1 829,850 2,000,000 7,694,479 10,524,329 829,850 A 5,369,667 4,324,812 4,324,813 4,324,812 07 08 1716-WA Water Supply Line Phase 1 Easement Costs 1,941,500 1,857,000 3,798,500 1,857,000 A 1,941,500 1,941,500 08 09 1501-WA Lower Pressure Plane Pump Station and Transmission Line 185,100 1,250,000 14,250,000 15,685,100 4,127,081 A 1,308,019 10,250,000 1,250,000 5,125,000 5,125,000 09 10 1810-WA LPP Phase 2 Pipeline Easement Costs 1,487,150 1,487,150 1,487,150 A 10 11 1708-WA E-W Collector (Cook Lane - DNT) Water Line 250,000 250,000 250,000 E 11 12 1708-WA Cook Lane (First - End)400,000 400,000 400,000 E 12 13 1513-WA Old Town Streets 2015 (Fifth, McKinley) 350,000 350,000 350,000 E 13 14 Lower Pressure Plane Future Expansion (2025)14,000,000 14,000,000 14,000,000 14,000,000 14 1,649,750 7,078,050 17,336,954 16,555,200 0 0 0 14,000,000 56,619,954 15,928,756 0 11,908,886 0 28,782,312 0 10,223,813 4,532,312 5,125,000 5,125,000 0 0 14,000,000 Funding Sources Total Other Issued Debt Unissued Debt Unissued Debt Reimbursement Issued Prior Years 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Cost Sources Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Resolution 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 01 Gates of Prosper, TIRZ No. 1 (Middle Doe Branch Line) 5,764,238 38,644 0 5,802,882 5,802,882 H 01 02 Matthews Southwest, TIRZ No. 2 (Lower Doe Branch Line) 1,166,922 166,492 0 1,333,414 1,333,414 J 02 03 1834-WW Public Works WWTP Decommission 65,000 900,000 965,000 965,000 A,E 03 04 1907-WW Doe Branch WWTP 0.25 MGD Expansion (2018)3,625,000 3,625,000 3,625,000 3,625,000 04 05 1903-WW Church / Parvin Wastewater Reconstruction 100,000 100,000 100,000 E 05 06 Doe Branch Parallel Interceptor (2021)5,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 06 07 Doe Branch WWTP 1.5 MGD Expansion (2024)24,190,495 24,190,495 24,190,495 24,190,495 07 6,931,161 270,136 4,625,000 0 5,000,000 0 0 24,190,495 41,016,791 8,201,296 0 0 32,815,495 0 0 3,625,000 0 5,000,000 0 0 24,190,495 Funding Sources Total Other Issued Debt Unissued Debt Unissued Debt Reimbursement Issued Prior Years 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Cost Sources Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Resolution 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 01 1717-DR Old Town Drainage - First & Main Trunk Main 800,000 800,000 800,000 01 02 1616-DR Old Town Drainage - McKinley & Broadway Trunk Main 600,000 600,000 600,000 02 03 1614-DR Coleman Street Channel Improvements 17,500 290,979 308,479 17,500 F 290,979 03 04 1613-DR Old Town Drainage - Church & Parvin Drainage Impr.40,000 460,000 500,000 40,000 F 460,000 04 05 1718-DR Old Town Regional Retention - Broadway (Design & Constr.)25,000 216,149 550,000 791,149 241,149 550,000 550,000 05 06 1615-DR Old Town Regional Detention/Retention - Land Acquisition 540,000 385,000 925,000 540,000 385,000 385,000 06 07 1811-DR Old Town Drainage - Fifth Street Trunk Main 400,000 400,000 400,000 07 08 Old Town Drainage - Detention Pond Improvements 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 08 2,022,500 216,149 1,700,979 0 385,000 0 0 1,000,000 5,324,628 57,500 3,332,128 0 1,935,000 0 0 550,000 0 385,000 0 0 1,000,000 10,603,411 7,564,335 23,662,933 16,555,200 5,385,000 0 0 39,190,495 102,961,373 24,187,552 15,241,014 0 63,532,807 0 10,223,813 8,707,312 5,125,000 10,510,000 0 0 39,190,495 A Impact Fees B Grant and Interlocal Funds C Developer Agreements D General Fund E Water / Wastewater Fund F Stormwater Drainage Fund G Park Development Fund H TIRZ #1 J TIRZ #2 K Escrows X Non-Cash Contributions Z Other Sources (See Detail) Funding Sources Total Other Issued Debt Unissued Debt Unissued Debt Reimbursement Prior Years 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 Cost Sources Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Resolution 2017-2018 2018-2019 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2028 105,731,937 69,008,217 36,633,060 18,955,024 279,703,585 91,335,524 0 504,678,640 1,106,045,987 845,956,460 45,059,707 2,459,812 212,570,324 1,615,000 16,937,927 18,080,996 11,160,000 1,905,500 1,400,000 0 184,133,640 10,603,411 7,564,335 23,662,933 16,555,200 5,385,000 0 0 39,190,495 102,961,373 24,187,552 15,241,014 0 63,532,807 0 10,223,813 8,707,312 5,125,000 10,510,000 0 0 39,190,495 116,335,348 76,572,552 60,295,993 35,510,224 285,088,585 91,335,524 0 543,869,135 1,209,007,360 870,144,012 60,300,721 2,459,812 276,103,131 1,615,000 27,161,740 26,788,308 16,285,000 12,415,500 1,400,000 0 223,324,135 I n d e x 03 I n d e x Water Projects Summary of Capital Improvement Program - 12/11 FINAL Enterprise Fund Projects Grand Total Enterprise Funds Wastewater Projects Drainage Projects Summary of Capital Improvement Program - 12/11 FINAL Capital Improvement Program Summary I n d e x I n d e x I n d e x I n d e x Unissued Debt Schedule Unissued Debt Schedule I n d e x Grand Total Capital Improvement Program General Fund Enterprise Funds Unissued Debt Schedule Description Codes - Other Sources Subtotal Subtotal Capital Improvement Program Summary Subtotal Item 11 Department PO #Date Issued Account Number Line Balance Description Status 750-5419-10-00-1511-ST 17,500.00$ 750-5419-10-00-1511-ST 415.00$ 750-5419-10-00-1512-ST 68,458.49$ 750-5419-10-00-1512-ST 24,305.50$ 750-5419-10-00-1512-ST 30,782.50$ 07/06/15 750-6610-10-00-1714-FC 1,535.29$ 750-6610-10-00-1714-FC 5,637.94$ Engineering 15126 07/06/15 760-5419-10-00-0407-WA 9,650.00$ Professional Services for Prosper Trail Elevated Storage Tank No invoices paid in FY 2018; Project completed, but invoice submitted FY 2019; need to roll forward, pay invoice, and close PO. 11/16/15 750-6610-10-00-1507-ST 4,836,881.54$ 750-6610-10-00-1507-ST (250,000.00)$ 750-6610-10-00-1507-ST (9,100.00)$ 750-6610-10-00-1507-ST (2,450.00)$ 750-6610-10-00-1507-ST (106,728.89)$ Engineering 16105 02/26/16 760-6610-10-00-1613-DR 8,800.00$ Professional Services Agreement for the Old Town Drainage - Church & Parvin Drainage Improvements Project Last invoice date May 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. 09/27/16 750-6610-10-00-1412-ST 2,000.00$ 750-6610-10-00-1412-ST 1,000.00$ 750-6610-10-00-1412-ST 6,000.00$ Engineering 17068 12/27/16 750-6610-10-00-1601-FC 44,636.84$ CSP No. 2015-51-B CMAR Town Hall Construction Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. 01/30/17 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 204,412.40$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 20,000.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 60,500.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 24,000.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 10,230.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 37,430.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 110,000.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 12,720.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 95,000.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 19,280.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 80,000.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 83,000.00$ 03/13/17 660-6610-50-00-1709-ST 32,766.60$ 660-6610-50-00-1709-ST 145,346.00$ 660-6610-50-00-1709-ST 24,096.37$ 660-6610-50-00-1709-ST 5,000.00$ 03/20/17 750-5410-10-00-1723-PK 2,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1723-PK 2,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1723-PK 1,600.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1723-PK 1,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1723-PK (2,000.00)$ 750-5410-10-00-1723-PK 500.00$ 04/20/17 630-6610-50-00-1715-WA 9,992.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1715-WA 87,100.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1715-WA 1,500.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1715-WA 5,213.21$ Engineering 15124 Professional Services for Town Hall/Multi-Purpose Facility Last invoice date April 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 15116 06/02/15 Professional Services for Prosper Trail (1,000 E of Preston Rd to Coit Rd) Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 16256 Professional Engineering Services for Downtown Enhancement Project Last invoice date August 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 17088 Professional Engineering Services for Paving & Drainage Improvements for Coit Rd. from E. First St. to Frontier Pkwy Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 16049 Road Improvements and Construction between Town, TVG Texas I, LLC, M/I Homes of DFW, LLC, and Prosper EDC Last invoice date January 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. **Need to verify total invoices made under TVG Texas I, LLC Engineering 17122 Professional Engineering Services Prosper Trail from East of Coit Road to West of Custer Road Project Last invoice date August 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Last invoice date June 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 17143 Professional Engineering Services for Lower Pressure Plane Elevated Storage Tank Project Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Parks & Rec Admin 17127 Professional Engineering Services Prosper Gateway Monument Design Project EXHIBIT C - PO ROLLL FORWARD DETAIL LIST Item 11 Department PO #Date Issued Account Number Line Balance Description Status 04/20/17 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 5,380.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 8,230.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 11,190.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 114,234.91$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 3,977.51$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 36,431.95$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 3,948.43$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 5,465.39$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 35,017.50$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 26,880.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 10,500.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 5,500.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 3,360.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 6,580.00$ Engineering 17148 05/08/17 630-6610-50-00-1719-WA 16,614.91$ Professional Engineering Services for Custer Road Pump Station Expansion Project Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. 08/29/17 750-5405-10-00-1512-ST 41,300.00$ 750-5405-10-00-1512-ST 14,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1615-DR 10,000.00$ 10/27/17 410-6160-20-01 2,025.00$ 410-6160-20-01 750.00$ 11/02/17 750-6610-10-00-1513-ST 1,200.00$ 750-6610-10-00-1513-ST 7,000.00$ 12/21/17 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 123,495.44$ 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 39,532.00$ 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 4,294.70$ 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 3,920.24$ 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 1,018.00$ 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 4,176.00$ 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 992.00$ 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 1,160.00$ 12/27/17 620-6610-60-00-1801-PK 1,700.00$ 620-6610-60-00-1801-PK 34,390.00$ 620-6610-60-00-1801-PK 2,750.00$ 620-6610-60-00-1801-PK 11,000.00$ 620-6610-60-00-1801-PK 900.00$ 620-6610-60-00-1801-PK 6,500.00$ 620-6610-60-00-1801-PK 750.00$ 01/29/18 100-5630-20-01 675.00$ 100-5630-20-01 250.00$ Last invoice date November 2017; inquired with Police Department. Partial order received Oct 2017. Three body cameras and trigger boxes are on back order due to equipment restructing; anticipated ship date is Dec 2018. Department requested to roll forward. Engineering 18062 Professional Engineering Services for the Old Town Streets 2015 (Fifth, McKinley) Project Last invoice date July 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. VERF/Police 18054 Camera System and Trigger Box Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 17195 Easement and ROW Acquisition Services - First Street (DNT- Coleman), Old Town Regional Detention/Retention, and Additional ROW Acquisition Services Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 17144 Professional Engineering Services for Lower Pressure Plane Water Supply - Pipeline Project Phase 1 Last invoice date February 2018; inquired with Police Department. Partial order received Feb 2018. One body camera and trigger box are on back order due to equipment restructing; anticipated ship date is Dec 2018. Department requested to roll forward. Police 18120 Camera System and Trigger Box Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Parks & Rec Admin Engineering 18106 Professional Engineering Services for Whitley Place Trail Extension Project 18105 Professional Engineering Services for Cook Land and E-W Collector Project Item 11 Department PO #Date Issued Account Number Line Balance Description Status 03/01/18 100-5410-60-01-1813-PK 2,215.98$ 100-5410-60-01-1813-PK 2,500.00$ 100-5410-60-01-1813-PK 3,500.00$ 100-5410-60-01-1813-PK 2,500.00$ 100-5410-60-01-1813-PK 1,000.00$ 100-5410-60-01-1813-PK 5,743.46$ 03/13/18 200-6125-50-02 40,300.00$ 200-6125-50-02 1,200.00$ 04/02/18 750-6610-10-00-1412-ST 1,368,222.05$ 750-6610-10-00-1412-ST 243,264.50$ Engineering 18182 04/18/18 630-6610-50-00-1719-WA 570,718.56$ Bid No. 2018-57-B Custer Road Pump Station Expansion Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 18197 05/11/18 750-6610-10-00-1714-FC 4,435.00$ Interior Design Services for Town Hall Last invoice date August 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. 05/16/18 760-6610-10-00-1718-DR 250.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1718-DR 4,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1718-DR 10,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1718-DR 8,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1718-DR 8,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1718-DR 5,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1718-DR 6,000.00$ 05/23/18 750-6610-10-00-1701-ST 202,735.55$ 750-6610-10-00-1702-ST 132,241.54$ 750-6610-10-00-1803-ST 20,166.44$ 750-6610-10-00-1804-ST 40,338.75$ Engineering 18225 06/29/18 750-6610-10-00-1511-ST 3,809,774.10$ Bid No. 2018-75-B Paving and Drainage Improvements, Prosper Trail (Kroger-Coit) Last invoice date October 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. 07/31/18 750-5410-10-00-1820-ST 1,300.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1820-ST 3,375.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1820-ST 28,910.00$ 08/17/18 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 97,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 77,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 27,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 3,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 5,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 8,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 16,800.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 6,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 5,300.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 2,500.00$ Police 18251 08/20/18 100-6110-20-01 49,988.62$ Old Town Hall Renovations Phase II Project just completed; Roll forward PO to receive invoice and close PO. 08/28/18 100-5480-50-01 14,500.00$ 100-5480-50-01 6,300.00$ 100-5410-98-01 21,500.00$ 08/28/18 200-6610-10-99-1513-WA 143,273.93$ 750-6610-10-00-1513-ST 758,211.14$ 760-6610-10-00-1811-DR 272,962.18$ Engineering 18172 Bid No. 2018-37-B Downtown Enhancements Last invoice date October 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 18201 Professional Engineering Services for the Old Town Drainage - Broadway & Church Retention Pond Improvements Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Public Works Water 18158 DCU Retrofit Project No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Parks & Rec Admin 18152 Professional Engineering Services for US 380 Green Ribbon Landscape Design Project Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. Engineering 18259 Bid No. 2018-72-B Old Town Streets Last invoice date October 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering/Streets 18258 Professional Engineering Services for Preston Road Signal Timing Project Last invoice date October 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. Public Works Water 18205 Bid No. 2018-60-B Prosper Road Improvement Projects 2018, Eight, Fifth, Third and Field Streets Last invoice date August 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. Engineering 18248 Professional Engineering Services for Victory Way (N. Coleman to Frontier Parkway) No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Streets 18240 Professional Engineering Services for Fishtrap/First Street Intersection Improvements at Dallas North Tollway Item 11 Department PO #Date Issued Account Number Line Balance Description Status 08/28/18 750-6610-10-00-1713-FC 900,905.00$ 750-6610-10-00-1713-FC 19,921.69$ Parks & Rec Admin 18261 08/28/18 750-6610-10-00-1410-TR 22,708.65$ Decorative Monument Sign Electrical Work No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Public Works Water 18265 09/04/18 200-6140-50-02 9,750.00$ Craig St. Elevated Scada Upgrade and Electrical for new Clay Val Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. Streets 18266 09/04/18 100-5480-50-01 81,611.00$ Bid No. 2018-81-B Prosper Trail Patching Coit Road to Custer Road No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. Engineering 18269 09/06/18 760-6610-10-00-1716-WA 1,720,684.19$ Bid No. 2018-79-B Lower Pressure Plane Water Line (BNSF Railroad to Preston Road) No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. 09/06/18 750-5410-10-00-1824-ST 3,000.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1824-ST 10,800.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1824-ST 17,720.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1824-ST 8,480.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1824-ST 4,972.72$ Streets 18277 09/14/18 100-5480-50-01 8,000.00$ Geotechnical Reiew of Town of Prosper Draft Pavement Design Manual No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. 09/17/18 760-6610-10-00-1822-WA 60,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1822-WA 30,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1822-WA 60,000.00$ Engineering 18282 09/17/18 750-6610-10-00-1713-FC 30,000.00$ Pre-Construction Services for Prosper Public Safety Complex Phase 1 No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Public Works Water 18283 09/17/18 750-6610-10-00-1817-ST 618,385.00$ Bid No. 2018-82-B Prosper Road Improvement Project 2018 Windsong Ranch Phase III Miscellaneous Road Repairs No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. 09/17/18 200-5480-50-02 5,000.00$ 200-5480-50-02 3,000.00$ 09/17/18 100-5410-40-03 6,324.00$ 100-5410-40-03 8,200.00$ 100-5410-40-03 7,900.00$ 100-5410-40-03 8,900.00$ 100-5410-40-03 28,600.00$ 100-5410-40-03 4,800.00$ 100-5410-40-03 4,800.00$ Police 18289 09/25/18 100-6110-20-01 775.93$ Locks for PD Lockers There was an issue with the locks received. Currently working with the vendor to remedy the issue. Request to roll forward. Total 2017-2018 Open Encumbrances $18,094,364.75 Operating Accounts 100-5410-40-03 69,524.00$ 100-5410-98-01 21,500.00$ 100-5480-50-01 110,411.00$ 100-5630-20-01 925.00$ 100-6110-20-01 50,764.55$ 200-5480-50-02 8,000.00$ 200-6125-50-02 41,500.00$ 200-6140-50-02 9,750.00$ 200-6610-10-99-1513-WA 143,273.93$ 410-6160-20-01 2,775.00$ Total 458,423.48$ No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. Planning 18285 Professional Services for Phase 2 Prosper Old Town Area Assessment Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Public Works Water 18284 Insurance Certificate Tracking Program Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 18270 Professional Surveying and Engineering Design Services for Fishtrap Rd and Teel Pkwy Intersection Improvements Last invoice date September 2018; Ongoing project, department requested to roll forward. Engineering 18260 Professional Architectural and Engineering Services for Public Safety Facility Phase 1 (Police Station and Dispatch) Engineering 18280 Bid No. 2018-88-B Glenbrooke Estates Pressure Reducing Valve Installation Project No invoices paid in FY 2018; Ongoing project; department requested to roll forward. Item 11 Department PO #Date Issued Account Number Line Balance Description Status Multi-Year Accounts 620-6610-60-00-1801-PK 57,990.00$ 630-6610-50-00-1715-WA 103,805.21$ 630-6610-50-00-1716-WA 276,695.69$ 630-6610-50-00-1719-WA 587,333.47$ 660-6610-50-00-1709-ST 207,208.97$ 660-6610-50-00-1710-ST 756,572.40$ 680-6610-50-00-1708-ST 178,588.38$ 750-5405-10-00-1512-ST 55,300.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1723-PK 5,100.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1813-PK 17,459.44$ 750-5410-10-00-1820-ST 33,585.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1823-ST 247,600.00$ 750-5410-10-00-1824-ST 44,972.72$ 750-5419-10-00-1511-ST 17,915.00$ 750-5419-10-00-1512-ST 123,546.49$ 750-6610-10-00-1410-TR 22,708.65$ 750-6610-10-00-1412-ST 1,620,486.55$ 750-6610-10-00-1507-ST 4,468,602.65$ 750-6610-10-00-1511-ST 3,809,774.10$ 750-6610-10-00-1513-ST 766,411.14$ 750-6610-10-00-1601-FC 44,636.84$ 750-6610-10-00-1701-ST 202,735.55$ 750-6610-10-00-1702-ST 132,241.54$ 750-6610-10-00-1713-FC 950,826.69$ 750-6610-10-00-1714-FC 11,608.23$ 750-6610-10-00-1803-ST 20,166.44$ 750-6610-10-00-1804-ST 40,338.75$ 750-6610-10-00-1817-ST 618,385.00$ 760-5419-10-00-0407-WA 9,650.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1613-DR 8,800.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1615-DR 10,000.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1716-WA 1,720,684.19$ 760-6610-10-00-1718-DR 41,250.00$ 760-6610-10-00-1811-DR 272,962.18$ 760-6610-10-00-1822-WA 150,000.00$ Total 17,635,941.27$ 18,094,364.75$ Item 11 Page 1 of 2 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Pete Anaya, P. E., Deputy Director of Engineering Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon awarding Bid No. 2019-04-B to Landmark Structures I, L.P., related to construction services for the Fishtrap 2.5 Million Gallon (MG) Elevated Storage Tank project; and authorizing the Town Manager to execute a construction agreement for same. Description of Agenda Item: On October 30, 2018, at 2:00 PM, two bids were opened for the Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank project. The verified bid totals ranged between $5,758,000 and $7,563,000. The Engineer's Estimate was $6,968,500. Landmark Structures I, L.P. was the low bidder with a bid total of $5,758,000, which is 17% less than the Engineer’s Estimate. Landmark Structures, I, L.P., constructed the Prosper Trail Elevated Storage Tank, and has recently been awarded a bid by the City of Celina for an elevated storage tank . The Town of Prosper is served by a single delivery point from the North Texas Municipal Water District (NTMWD) at the Custer Road Pump Station (CRPS) located within the Town’s Upper Pressure Plane. The Town has two pressure planes with the BNSF railroad acting as the dividing line. The Lower Pressure Plane is served by the CRPS through a pressure reducing valve located along US 380 as well as the two existing elevated storage tanks in the Upper Pressure Plane. The continued growth within the Lower Pressure Plane requires system improvements into the Lower Pressure Plane. This project will be the 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank (EST) associated with the first phase of the Lower Pressure Plane Water System Improvements. The 2.5 MG EST will be located along Fishtrap Road west of Harper Road. A small section of pipeline will be included to connect the EST into the existing 20-inch water line along Fishtrap Road. Site improvements at the proposed EST site will include yard piping, landscape screening, grading, driveway, fencing, drainage, lighting and irrigation. The contract specifies a substantial completion time of 520 calendar days, or approximately 17 months. Staff anticipates issuing a notice to proceed on this contract effective in January 2019, which would result in a substantial completion date in June 2020. This schedule is designed to have the tank in service prior to peak water demands in Summer 2020. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. ENGINEERING Item 12 Page 2 of 2 Budget Impact: The FY 2018-2019 Capital Improvement Program includes $5,758,000 for the Fishtrap Elevated Storage Tank project. The funding source is Account No. 760-6610-10-00-1715-WA. Legal Obligations and Review: Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., has approved the standard construction agreement as to form and legality. Attached Documents: 1. Location Map 2. Bid Tabulation Summary 3. Contract Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council Award Bid No. 2019-04-B to Landmark Structures I, L.P., related to construction services for the Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank project; and authorize the Town Manager to execute a construction agreement for same. Proposed Motion: I move to award Bid No. 2019-04-B to Landmark Structures I, L.P., related to construction services for the Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank project; and authorize the Town Manager to execute a construction agreement for same. Item 12 LOCATION MAP Proposed Tank Site Fishtrap Rd. Te e l P k w y Item 12 TO W N O F P R O S P E R BI D T A B U L A T I O N S U M M A R Y Bi d N o . 2 0 1 9 - 0 4 - B F i s h t r a p 2 . 5 M i l l io n G a l l o n E l e v a t e d S t o r a g e T a n k Bi d O p e n i n g : 1 0 / 3 0 / 2 0 1 8 a t 2 : 0 0 P M G r a n d T o t a l La n d m a r k S t r u c t u r e s I , L . P . $ 5, 7 5 8 , 0 0 0 . 0 0 Ca l d w e l l T a n k s , I n c . $ 7, 5 6 3 , 0 0 0 . 0 0 Ce r t i f i e d B y : J a n u a r y M . C o o k , C P P O , C P P B Da t e : 1 0 / 3 0 / 2 0 1 8 Pu r c h a s i n g A g e n t To w n o f P r o s p e r , T e x a s ** Al l b i d s / p r o p o s a l s s u b m i t t e d f o r t h e d e s i g n a t e d p r o j e c t a r e r e f l e c t e d on t h i s t a b u l a t i o n s h e e t . H o w e v e r , t h e l i s t i n g o f t h e b i d / p r o p o s a l o n th i s t a b u l a t i o n s h e e t s h a l l n o t b e c o n s t r u e d a s a c o m m e n t o n t h e r e s p o n s iv e n e s s o f s u c h b i d / p r o p o s a l o r a s a n y i n d i c a t i o n t h a t t h e a g e n c y ac c e p t s s u c h b i d / p r o p o s a l a s b e i n g r e s p o n s i v e . T h e a g e n c y w i l l ma k e a d e t e r m i n a t i o n a s t o t h e r e s p o n s i v e n e s s o f t h e v e n d o r r e s p o n s e s su b m i t t e d b a s e d u p o n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h a l l a p p l i c a b l e l a w s , p u r c h a s i n g g u i d e l i n e s a n d p r o j e c t d o c u m e n t s , i n c l u d i n g b u t n o t l i m i t e d t o t h e pr o j e c t s p e c i f i c a t i o n s a n d c o n t r a c t d o c u m e n t s . T h e a g e n c y w i l l n o t i f y t h e s u c c e s s f u l v e n d o r u p o n a w a r d o f t h e c o n t r a c t a n d , a s a c c o r d i n g t o th e l a w , a l l b i d / p r o p o s a l r e s p o n s e s r e c e i v e d w i l l b e a v a i l a b l e f o r i n s p e c t i o n a t t h a t t i m e . Attachment 2 Item 12 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B TOWN OF PROSPER COLLIN COUNTY, TEXAS TOWN OFFICIALS Ray Smith, Mayor Curry Vogelsang, Jr., Mayor Pro-Tem Jason Dixon, Deputy Mayor Pro-Tem Michael Korbuly, Place 1 Craig Andres, Place 2 Meigs Miller, Place 4 Jeff Hodges, Place 5 Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Attachment 3Item 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT LANK Attachment 3Item 12 Specification Seals Town of Prosper Bid No. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEV ATED STORAGE TANK DIVISION 00 CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 03 CONCRETE DIVISION 09 FINISHES DIVISION 22 PLUMBING DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 33 UTILITIES DIVISION 26 DIVISION 40 ELECTRICAL PROCESS INTEGRATION 09/19/2018 9-20-18 Attachment 3Item 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT LANK Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................. 1 LEGAL NOTICE .............................................................................................................. 4 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ...................................................................................... 5 BID PROPOSAL FORM .................................................................................................. 6 BID BOND ..................................................................................................................... 12 OUT-OF-STATE CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW .............................. 14 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT .................................................................................. 15 PERFORMANCE BOND ............................................................................................... 28 PAYMENT BOND.......................................................................................................... 31 MAINTENANCE BOND ................................................................................................. 34 GENERAL CONDITIONS .............................................................................................. 37 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................................ 54 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................... 55 DIVISION 00 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Section 00 43 43 Wage Rates DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 13 Project Coordination 01 31 13.13 Forms 01 32 17 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 34 Video and Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00.01 Table of Required Submittals 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 16 Definitions 01 57 00 Temporary Controls 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 74 23 Final Cleaning 01 75 00 Starting and Adjusting 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data DIVISION 03 CONCRETE Section 03 30 53 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 2 DIVISION 09 FINISHES Section 09 95 00 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks DIVISION 22 PLUMBING Section 22 05 19 Meters & Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 10 00.01 Miscellaneous Piping and Appurtenances DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hanger and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.01 Conduits 26 05 33.03 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.04 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 50 Electrical Equipment 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power System Studies 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 24 16.02 Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 41 13 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 50 00 Lighting DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Section 31 05 13 Soils for Earthwork 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 31 23 10 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 23.33 Flowable Fill 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfill 31 23.33.14 Trench Safety 31 32 13.19 Lime Soil Stabilization DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 01 29 Rigid Paving Repair 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Gates 32 84 23 Landscape Irrigation 32 91 19.13 Topsoil Placement and Grading 32 92 13 Hydro-Mulching and Sodding Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 3 DIVISION 33 UTILITIES Section 33 05 01.02 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.07 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.09 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings 33 05 23.33 Pipeline Crossing [Highways, Streets and Railroads by Boring, Tunneling or Open Cut] 33 10 13 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution 33 12 16.13 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.23 Gate Valves 33 12 16.26 Butterfly Valves 33 12 19 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants 33 16 19.13 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tanks 33 49 00 Storm Drainage Structures DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION Section 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 40 90 01 Instrumentation 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition APPENDIX A FAA DETERMINATION OF NO HAZARD TO AIR NAVIGATION APPENDIX B GEOTECHNICAL REPORT APPENDIX C TCEQ APPROVAL LETTER END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 4 LEGAL NOTICE The Town of Prosper is accepting sealed bids for BID NO. 2019-04-B Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank. Bids will be accepted until 2:00 P.M. on Thursday, October 18, 2018 in the Purchasing Office, located in the 3rd Floor Finance Suite in Town Hall, 200 S. Main St., Prosper, Texas 75078. Any bids received after this time will not be accepted, and will be returned unopened. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud in the Finance Conference Room, located in the 3rd Floor Finance Suite in Town Hall, 200 S. Main St., Prosper, Texas 75078, immediately following the bid deadline. The Project consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials (except as otherwise specified), and performing all work necessary for the construction of 2.5 million gallon composite elevated potable water storage tank in place with all associated appurtenances, systems and site improvements. Each bid submitted shall be accompanied by a cashier's check in the amount of 5% of the maximum amount bid, payable without recourse to the Town of Prosper, or a Bid Bond in the same amount from a reliable surety company as a guarantee that, if awarded the contract, the Bidder will execute a Construction Agreement with the Town, including all required bonds and other documents. The successful bidder shall furnish a Performance Bond in the amount of 115% of the contract amount, and a Payment Bond in the amount of 100% of the contract amount, as well as evidence of all required insurance coverage within ten (10) calendar days of notice of award. The successful bidder shall also furnish a Maintenance Bond in the amount of 100% of the contract amount covering defects of material and workmanship for two calendar years following the Town's approval and acceptance of the construction. An approved surety company, licensed in the State of Texas, shall issue all bonds in accordance with Texas law. Copies of Plans, Specifications, and Contract Documents may be examined at Freese and Nichols (Engineer) office located at 5805 Main Street, Suite B, Frisco, TX 75034; (972) 624- 9201 without charge. These documents may be acquired from that office for the non-refundable purchase price of $125.00 per set, payable to the Town of Prosper. Copies of Plans, Specifications, and Contract Documents may also be downloaded free of charge from Current Bidding Opportunities, at the following link: http://www.prospertx.gov/business/bid-opportunities/. Questions and requests for clarifications in regards to this bid should be emailed directly to January Cook, CPPO, CPPB, Purchasing Agent, at january_cook@prospertx.gov. Friday, October 12, 2018 at 12:00 P.M. will be the deadline for receipt of questions and requests for clarifications. After that day and time, no further questions or requests for clarifications will be accepted or answered by the Engineer or Town. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Submittal Deadline: Bids will be accepted until 2:00 P.M. on Thursday, October 18, 2018. 2. Submittal Location: Bids will be accepted in the Purchasing Office, located in the 3rd Floor Finance Suite in Town Hall, 200 S. Main St., Prosper, Texas 75078. 3. Submittal Requirements: Each Bidder shall submit one (1) original and one (1) copy of their bid, along with their bid security and Out of State Contractor Compliance (if necessary), in a sealed envelope clearly marked with their name and BID NO. 2019-04-B, FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK. 4. Bid Opening: Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud in the Finance Conference Room, located in the 3rd Floor Finance Suite in Town Hall, 200 S. Main St., Prosper, Texas 75078, immediately following the bid deadline. 5. Bidding Documents: Copies of Plans, Specifications, and Contract Documents may be examined without charge at the following location: Freese and Nichols, Inc. (Engineer) 5805 Main Street, Suite B Frisco, TX 75034 (972) 624-9201 Documents may be acquired for the non-refundable purchase price of $125 per set payable to Freese and Nichols, Inc. or Download free of charge from Current Bidding Opportunities, at the following link: http://www.prospertx.gov/business/bid-opportunities/. 6. Questions and Requests for Clarification: Questions and requests for clarifications in regards to this bid should be emailed directly to January Cook, CPPO, CPPB, Purchasing Agent, at january_cook@prospertx.gov. Friday, October 12, 2018 at 12:00 P.M. will be the deadline for receipt of questions and requests for clarifications. After that day and time, no further questions or requests for clarifications will be accepted or answered by the Engineer or Town. 7. Addenda: If it becomes necessary to provide additional information to potential Bidders, the Town of Prosper will issue an addendum containing the necessary information. 8. Pre-Bid Meeting: A pre-bid meeting will not be held for this project. 9. Site Visit: A site visit will not be held for this project. Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 15 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS ) ) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF COLLIN ) This Construction Agreement (the "Agreement") is made by and between Landmark Structures I, L.P., a Texas limited partnership (the "Contractor") and the Town of Prosper, Texas, a municipal corporation (the "Owner"). For and in considerat ion of the payment, agreements and conditions hereinafter mentioned, and under the conditions expressed in the bonds herein, Contractor hereby agrees to complete the construction of improvements described as follows: BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK in the Town of Prosper, Texas, and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the terms of this Contract, including all Contract Documents incorporated herein; and at his, her or their own proper cost and expense to furnish all superintendence, labor, insurance, equipment, tools and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with all the Contract Documents, incorporated herein as if written word for word, and in accordance with the Plans, which include all maps, plats, blueprints, and other drawings and printed or written explanatory manner therefore, and the Specifications as prepared by Town of Prosper or its consultant hereinafter called Engineer, who has been identified by the endorsement of the Contractor's written proposal, the General Conditions of this Contract, the Special Conditions of this Contract, the payment, performance, and maintenance bonds hereto attached; all of which are made a part hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire Contract. A. Contract Documents and Order of Precedence The Contract Documents shall consist of the following documents: 1. this Construction Agreement; 2. properly authorized change orders; 3. the Special Conditions of this Contract; 4. the General Conditions of this Contract; 5. the Technical Specifications & Construction Drawings of this Contract; 6. the OWNER's Standard Construction Details; 7. the OWNER's Standard Construction Specifications; 8. the OWNER’s written notice to proceed to the CONTRACTOR; Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 16 9. the Contractor’s Bid Proposal; 10. any listed and numbered addenda; 11. the Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds; and, 12. any other bid materials distributed by the Owner that relate to the Project. These Contract Documents are incorporated by reference into this Construction Agreement as if set out here in their entirety. The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary; what is called for by one document shall be as binding as if called for by all Contract Documents. It is specifically provided, however, that in the event of any inconsistency in the Contract Documents, the inconsistency shall be resolved by giving precedence to the Contract Documents in the order in which they are listed herein above. If, however, there exists a conflict or inconsistency between the Technical Specifications and the Construction Drawings it shall be the Contractor’s obligation to seek clarification as to which requirements or provisions control before undertaking any work on that component of the project. Should the Contractor fail or refuse to seek a clarification of such conflicting or inconsistent requirements or provisions prior to any work on that component of the project, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the costs and expenses - including additional time - necessary to cure, repair and/or correct that component of the project. B. Total of Payments Due Contractor For performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds an amount not to exceed Five Million Seven Hundred Fifty- Eight Thousand Dollars and zero cents ($ 5,758,000.00). This amount is subject to adjustment by change order in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Dates to Start and Complete Work Contractor shall begin work within ten (10) calendar days after receiving a written Notice to Proceed or written Work Order from the Owner. All Work required under the Contract Documents shall be substantially completed within 520 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed for the base bid. Within 45 additional calendar days after Substantial Completion, all outstanding issues shall be addressed and ready for final payment. Under this Construction Agreement, all references to “day” are to be considered “calendar days” unless noted otherwise. D. CONTRACTOR'S INDEMNITY TO THE OWNER AND OTHERS CONTRACTOR DOES HEREBY AGREE TO WAIVE ALL CLAIMS, RELEASE, INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE TOWN OF PROSPER (OWNER) TOGETHER WITH ITS MAYOR AND TOWN COUNCIL AND ALL OF ITS OFFICIALS, OFFICERS, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES, IN BOTH THEIR PUBLIC AND PRIVATE CAPACITIES, FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CITATIONS, CLAIMS, COSTS, DAMAGES, DEMANDS, EXPENSES, FINES, JUDGMENTS, LIABILITY, LOSSES, PENALTIES, SUITS OR CAUSES OF ACTION OF EVERY KIND INCLUDING ALL EXPENSES OF LITIGATION AND/OR SETTLEMENT, COURT COSTS AND ATTORNEY FEES WHICH MAY Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 17 ARISE BY REASON OF INJURY TO OR DEATH OF ANY PERSON OR FOR LOSS OF, DAMAGE TO, OR LOSS OF USE OF ANY PROPERTY OCCASIONED BY ERROR, OMISSION, OR NEGLIGENT ACT OF CONTRACTOR, ITS SUBCONTRACTORS, ANY OFFICERS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OF CONTRACTOR OR ANY SUBCONTRACTORS, INVITEES, AND ANY OTHER THIRD PARTIES OR PERSONS FOR WHOM OR WHICH CONTRACTOR IS LEGALLY RESPONSIBLE, IN ANY WAY ARISING OUT OF, RELATING TO, RESULTING FROM, OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT, AND CONTRACTOR WILL AT HIS OR HER OWN COST AND EXPENSE DEFEND AND PROTECT TOWN OF PROSPER (OWNER) FROM ANY AND ALL SUCH CLAIMS AND DEMANDS. CONTRACTOR DOES HEREBY AGREE TO WAIVE ALL CLAIMS, RELEASE, INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS TOWN OF PROSPER (OWNER) TOGETHER WITH ITS MAYOR AND TOWN COUNCIL AND ALL OF ITS OFFICIALS, OFFICERS, AGENTS, AND EMPLOYEES, FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CITATIONS, CLAIMS, COSTS, DAMAGES, DEMANDS, EXPENSES, FINES, JUDGMENTS, LIABILITY, LOSSES, PENALTIES, SUITS OR CAUSES OF ACTION OF EVERY KIND INCLUDING ALL EXPENSES OF LITIGATION AND/OR SETTLEMENT, COURT COSTS AND ATTORNEYS FEES FOR INJURY OR DEATH OF ANY PERSON OR FOR LOSS OF, DAMAGES TO, OR LOSS OF USE OF ANY PROPERTY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. SUCH INDEMNITY SHALL APPLY WHETHER THE CITATIONS, CLAIMS, COSTS, DAMAGES, DEMANDS, EXPENSES, FINES, JUDGMENTS, LIABILITY, LOSSES, PENALTIES, SUITS OR CAUSES OF ACTION ARISE IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE NEGLIGENCE OF THE TOWN OF PROSPER (OWNER), ITS MAYOR AND TOWN COUNCIL, OFFICERS, OFFICIALS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES. IT IS THE EXPRESS INTENTION OF THE PARTIES HERETO THAT THE INDEMNITY PROVIDED FOR IN THIS PARAGRAPH IS INDEMNITY BY CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY AND PROTECT TOWN OF PROSPER (OWNER) FROM THE CONSEQUENCES OF TOWN OF PROSPER’S (OWNER'S) OWN NEGLIGENCE, WHETHER THAT NEGLIGENCE IS A SOLE OR CONCURRING CAUSE OF THE INJURY, DEATH OR DAMAGE. IN ANY AND ALL CLAIMS AGAINST ANY PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER BY ANY EMPLOYEE OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUB-CONTRACTOR, ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, THE INDEMNIFICATION OBLIGATION HEREIN PROVIDED SHALL NOT BE LIMITED IN ANY WAY BY ANY LIMITATION ON THE AMOUNT OR TYPE OF DAMAGES, COMPENSATION OR BENEFITS PAYABLE BY OR FOR THE CONTRACTOR OR ANY SUB- CONTRACTOR UNDER WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION OR OTHER EMPLOYEE BENEFIT ACTS. INDEMNIFIED ITEMS SHALL INCLUDE ATTORNEYS' FEES AND COSTS, COURT COSTS, AND SETTLEMENT COSTS. INDEMNIFIED ITEMS SHALL ALSO INCLUDE ANY EXPENSES, INCLUDING ATTORNEYS' FEES AND EXPENSES, INCURRED BY AN INDEMNIFIED INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY IN ATTEMPTING TO ENFORCE THIS INDEMNITY. In its sole discretion, the Owner shall have the right to approve counsel to be retained by Contractor in fulfilling its obligation to defend and indemnify the Owner. Contractor shall retain approved counsel for the Owner within seven (7) business days after receiving written notice from the Owner that it is invoking its right to indemnification under this Construction Agreement. If Contractor does not retain counsel for the Owner within the required time, then the Owner shall have the right to retain counsel and the Contractor shall pay these attorneys' fees and expenses. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 18 The Owner retains the right to provide and pay for any or all costs of defending indemnified items, but it shall not be required to do so. To the extent that Owner elects to provide and pay for any such costs, Contractor shall indemnify and reimburse Owner for such costs. (Please note that this “broad-form” indemnification clause is not prohibited by Chapter 151 of the Texas Insurance Code as it falls within one of the exclusions contained in Section 151.105 of the Texas Insurance Code.) E. Insurance Requirements 1. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, procure, pay for and maintain the following insurance coverage written by companies approved by the State of Texas and acceptable to the Town of Prosper. The Contractor shall furnish to the Town of Prosper Purchasing Agent certificates of insurance executed by the insurer or its authorized agent stating the type of coverages, limits of each such coverage, expiration dates and compliance with all applicable required provisions. Certificates shall reference the project/contract number and be addressed as follows: BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK Attn: Purchasing Agent 200 S. Main St. P.O. Box 307 Prosper, Texas 75078 (a) Commercial General Liability insurance, including, but not limited to Premises/Operations, Personal & Advertising Injury, Products/Completed Operations, Independent Contractors and Contractual Liability, with minimum combined single limits of $1,000,000 per-occurrence, $1,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate and $2,000,000 general aggregate. If high risk or dangerous activities are included in the Work, explosion, collapse and underground (XCU) coverage is also required. Coverage must be written on an occurrence form. The General Aggregate shall apply on a per project basis. (b) Workers’ Compensation insurance with statutory limits; and Employers’ Liability coverage with minimum limits for bodily injury: a) by accident, $100,000 each accident, b) by disease, $100,000 per employee with a per policy aggregate of $500,000. (c) Umbrella or Excess Liability insurance with minimum limits of $2,000,000 each occurrence and annual aggregate for bodily injury and property damage, that follows form and applies in excess of the above indicated primary coverage in subparagraphs a and b. The total limits required may be satisfied by any combination of primary, excess or umbrella liability insurance provided all policies comply with all requirements. The Contractor may maintain reasonable deductibles, subject to approval by the Owner. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 19 2. With reference to the foregoing required insurance, the Contractor shall endorse applicable insurance policies as follows: (a) A waiver of subrogation in favor of Town of Prosper, its officials, employees, and officers shall be contained in the Workers’ Compensation insurance policy. (b) The Town of Prosper, its officials, employees and officers shall be named as additional insureds on the Commercial General Liability policy, by using endorsement CG2026 or broader. (Please note that this “additional insured” coverage requirement is not prohibited by Chapter 151 of the Texas Insurance Code as it falls within one of the exclusions contained in Section 151.105 of the Texas Insurance Code.) (c) All insurance policies shall be endorsed to the effect that Town of Prosper will receive at least thirty (30) days’ notice prior to cancellation, non- renewal, termination, or material change of the policies. 3. All insurance shall be purchased from an insurance company that meets a financial rating of “A” or better as assigned by the A.M. BEST Company or equivalent. 4. With respect to Workers’ Compensation insurance, the Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable provisions of 28 Tex. Admin Code § 110.110, “Reporting Requirements for Building or Construction Projects for Governmental Entities,” as such provision may be amended, and as set forth in Paragraph F following. F. Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate")- A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 20 materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 21 its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 22 contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds The Contractor shall procure and pay for a Performance Bond applicable to the work in the amount of one hundred fifteen percent (115%) of the total bid price, and a Payment Bond applicable to the work in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total bid price. The Contractor shall also procure and pay for a Maintenance Bond applicable to the work in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total bid price. T he period of the Maintenance Bond shall be two years from the date of acceptance of all work done under the contract, to cover the guarantee as set forth in this Construction Agreement. The performance, payment and maintenance bonds shall be issued in the form attached to this Construction Agreement as Exhibits B, C and D. Other performance, payment and maintenance bond forms shall not be accepted. Among other things, these bonds shall apply to any work performed during the two-year warranty period after acceptance as described in this Construction Agreement. The performance, payment and maintenance bonds shall be issued by a corporate surety, acceptable to and approved by the Town, authorized to do business in the State of Texas, pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Further, the Contractor shall supply capital and surplus information concerning the surety and reinsurance information concerning the performance, payment and maintenance bonds upon Town request. In addition to the foregoing requirements, if the amount of the bond exceeds One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) the bond must be issued by a surety that is qualified as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law as indicated by publication of the surety’s name in the current U.S. Treasury Department Circular 570. In the alternative, an otherwise acceptable surety company (not qualified on federal obligations) that is authorized and admitted to write surety bonds in Texas must obtain reinsurance on any amounts in excess of One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in Texas who also qualifies as a surety or reinsurer on federal obligations as indicated by publication of the surety’s or reinsurer’s name in the current U.S. Treasury Department Circular 570. H. Progress Payments and Retainage As it completes portions of the Work, the Contractor may request progress payments from the Owner. Progress payments shall be made by the Owner based on the Owner's estimate of the value of the Work properly completed by the Contractor since the time the last progress payment was made. The "estimate of the value of the work properly completed" shall include the net invoice value of acceptable, non-perishable materials actually delivered to and currently at the job site only if the Contractor provides to the Owner satisfactory evidence that material suppliers have been paid for these materials. No progress payment shall be due to the Contractor until the Contractor furnishes to the Owner: 1. copies of documents reasonably necessary to aid the Owner in preparing an estimate of the value of Work properly completed; Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 23 2. full or partial releases of liens, including releases from subcontractors providing materials or delivery services relating to the Work, in a form acceptable to the Owner releasing all liens or claims relating to goods and services provided up to the date of the most recent previous progress payment; 3. an updated and current schedule clearly detailing the project’s critical path elements; and 4. any other documents required under the Contract Documents. Progress payments shall not be made more frequently than once every thirty (30) calendar days unless the Owner determines that more frequent payments are appropriate. Further, progress payments are to be based on estimates and these estimates are subject to correction through the adjustment of subsequent progress payments and the final payment to Contractor. If the Owner determines after final payment that it has overpaid the Contractor, then Contractor agrees to pay to the Owner the overpayment amount specified by the Owner within thirty (30) calendar days after it receives written demand from the Owner. The fact that the Owner makes a progress payment shall not be deemed to be an admission by the Owner concerning the quantity, quality or sufficiency of the Contractor's work. Progress payments shall not be deemed to be acceptance of the Work nor shall a progress payment release the Contractor from any of its responsibilities under the Contract Documents. After determining the amount of a progress payment to be made to the Contractor, the Owner shall withhold a percentage of the progress payment as retainage. The amount of retainage withheld from each progress payment shall be set at five percent (5%). Retainage shall be withheld and may be paid to: a. ensure proper completion of the Work. The Owner may use retained funds to pay replacement or substitute contractors to complete unfinished or defective work; b. ensure timely completion of the Work. The Owner may use retained funds to pay liquidated damages; and c. provide an additional source of funds to pay claims for which the Owner is entitled to indemnification from Contractor under the Contract Documents. Retained funds shall be held by the Owner in accounts that shall not bear interest. Retainage not otherwise withheld in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be returned to the Contractor as part of the final payment. I. Withholding Payments to Contractor The Owner may withhold payment of some or all of any progress or final payment that would otherwise be due if the Owner determines, in its discretion, that the Work has not been performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner may use these funds to pay replacement or substitute contractors to complete unfinished or defective Work. The Owner may withhold payment of some or all of any progress or final payment that would otherwise be due if the Owner determines, in its discretion, that it is necessary and proper Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 24 to provide an additional source of funds to pay claims for which the Owner is entitled to indemnification from Contractor under the Contract Documents. Amounts withheld under this section shall be in addition to any retainage. J. Acceptance of the Work When the Work is completed, the Contractor shall request that the Owner perform a final inspection. The Owner shall inspect the Work. If the Owner determines that the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, it shall issue a written notice of acceptance of the Work. If the Owner determines that the Work has not been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, then it shall provide the Contractor with a verbal or written list of items to be completed before another final inspection shall be scheduled. It is specifically provided that Work shall be deemed accepted on the date specified in the Owner's written notice of acceptance of the Work. The Work shall not be deemed to be accepted based on "substantial completion" of the Work, use or occupancy of the Work, or for any reason other than the Owner's written Notice of Acceptance. Further, the issuance of a certificate of occupancy for all or any part of the Work shall not constitute a Notice of Acceptance for that Work. In its discretion, the Owner may issue a Notice of Acceptance covering only a portion of the Work. In this event, the notice shall state specifically what portion of the Work is accepted. K. Acceptance of Erosion Control Measures When the erosion control measures have been completed, the Contractor shall request that the Owner perform a final inspection. The Owner shall inspect the Work. If the Owner determines that the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and per TPDES General Construction Permit, it shall issue a written Notice of Acceptance of the Work. If the Owner determines that the Work has not been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents or TPDES General Construction Permit, then it shall provide the Contractor with a verbal or written list of items to be completed before another final inspection shall be scheduled. L. Final Payment After all Work required under the Contract Documents has been completed, inspected, and accepted, the Town shall calculate the final payment amount promptly after necessary measurements and computations are made. The final payment amount shall be calculated to: 1. include the estimate of the value of Work properly completed since the date of the most recent previous progress payment; 2. correct prior progress payments; and 3. include retainage or other amounts previously withheld that are to be returned to Contractor, if any. Final payment to the Contractor shall not be due until the Contractor provides original full releases of liens from the Contractor and its subcontractors, or other evidence satisfactory to the Owner to show that all sums due for labor, services, and materials furnished for or used in Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 25 connection with the Work have been paid or shall be paid with the final payment. To ensure this result, Contractor consents to the issuance of the final payment in the form of joint checks made payable to Contractor and others. The Owner may, but is not obligated to issue final payment using joint checks. Final payment to the Contractor shall not be due until the Contractor has supplied to the Owner original copies of all documents that the Owner determines are reasonably necessary to ensure both that the final payment amount is properly calculated and that the Owner has satisfied its obligation to administer the Construction Agreement in accordance with applicable law. The following documents shall, at a minimum, be required to be submitted prior to final payment being due: redline as-built construction plans; consent of surety to final payment; public infrastructure inventory; affidavit of value for public infrastructure; and, final change order(s). “Redline as-built construction plans” shall include, but are not limited to markups for change orders, field revisions, and quantity overruns as applicable. The list of documents contained in this provision is not an exhaustive and exclusive list for every project performed pursuant to these Contract Documents and Contractor shall provide such other and further documents as may be requested and required by the Owner to close out a particular project. Subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the Final Payment within thirty (30) calendar days after the date specified in the Notice of Acceptance. This provision shall apply only after all Work called for by the Contract Documents has been accepted. M. Contractor’s Warranty For a two-year period after the date specified in a written notice of acceptance of Work, Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor and materials that the Owner determines are necessary to correct all defects in the Work arising because of defective materials or workmanship supplied or provided by Contractor or any subcontractor. This shall also include areas of vegetation that did meet TPDES General Construction Permit during final close out but have since become noncompliant. Forty-five (45) to sixty (60) calendar days before the end of the two-year warranty period, the Owner may make a warranty inspection of the Work. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of the date and time of this inspection so that a Contractor representative may be present. After the warranty inspection, and before the end of the two-year warranty period, the Owner shall mail to the Contractor a written notice that specifies the defects in the Work that are to be corrected. The Contractor shall begin the remedial work within ten (10) calendar days after receiving the written notice from the Town. If the Contractor does not begin the remedial work timely or prosecute it diligently, then the Owner may pay for necessary labor and materials to effect repairs and these expenses shall be paid by the Contractor, the performance bond surety, or both. If the Owner determines that a hazard exists because of defective materials and workmanship, then the Owner may take steps to alleviate the hazard, including making repairs. These steps may be taken without prior notice either to the Contractor or its surety. Expenses incurred by the Owner to alleviate the hazard shall be paid by the Contractor, the performance bond surety, or both. Any Work performed by or for the Contractor to fulfill its warranty obligations shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. By way of example only, this is to ensure Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 26 that Work performed during the warranty period is performed with required insurance and the performance and payment bonds still in effect. Work performed during the two-year warranty period shall itself be subject to a one-year warranty. This warranty shall be the same as described in this section. The Owner may make as many warranty inspections as it deems appropriate. N. Compliance with Laws The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that it and any subcontractors performing any portion of the Work required under the Contract Documents comply with all applicable federal, state, county, and municipal laws, regulations, and rules that relate in any way to the performance and completion of the Work. This provision applies whether or not a legal requirement is described or referred to in the Contract Documents. Ancillary/Integral Professional Services: In selecting an architect, engineer, land surveyor, or other professional to provide professional services, if any, that are required by the Contract Documents, Contractor shall not do so on the basis of competitive bids but shall make such selection on the basis of demonstrated competence and qualifications to perform the services in the manner provided by Section 2254.004 of the Texas Government Code and shall so certify to the Town the Contractor's agreement to comply with this provision with Contractor's bid. O. Other Items The Contractor shall sign the Construction Agreement, and deliver signed performance, payment and maintenance bonds and proper insurance policy endorsements (and/or other evidence of coverage) within ten (10) calendar days after the Owner makes available to the Contractor copies of the Contract Documents for signature. Six (6) copies of the Contract Documents shall be signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor and returned to the Town. The Construction Agreement "effective date" shall be the date on which the Town Council acts to approve the award of the Contract for the Work to Contractor. It is expressly provided, however, that the Town Council delegates the authority to the Town Manager or his designee to rescind the Contract award to Contractor at any time before the Owner delivers to the Contractor a copy of this Construction Agreement that bears the signature of the Town Manager and Town Secretary or their authorized designees. The purpose of this provision is to ensure: 1. that Contractor timely delivers to the Owner all bonds and insurance documents; and 2. that the Owner retains the discretion not to proceed if the Town Manager or his designee determines that information indicates that the Contractor was not the lowest responsible bidder or that the Contractor cannot perform all of its obligations under the Contract Documents. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT IT SHALL HAVE NO CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION OF ANY KIND AGAINST OWNER, INCLUDING A CLAIM FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, NOR SHALL THE OWNER BE REQUIRED TO PERFORM UNDER THE Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 27 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, UNTIL THE DATE THE OWNER DELIVERS TO THE CONTRACTOR A COPY OF THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BEARING THE SIGNATURES JUST SPECIFIED. The Contract Documents shall be construed and interpreted by applying Texas law. Exclusive venue for any litigation concerning the Contract Documents shall be Collin County, Texas. Although the Construction Agreement has been drafted by the Owner, should any portion of the Construction Agreement be disputed, the Owner and Contractor agree that it shall not be construed more favorably for either party. The Contract Documents are binding upon the Owner and Contractor and shall insure to their benefit and as well as that of their respective successors and assigns. If Town Council approval is not required for the Construction Agreement under applicable law, then the Construction Agreement "effective date" shall be the date on which the Town Manager and Town Secretary or their designees have signed the Construction Agreement. If the Town Manager and Town Secretary sign on different dates, then the later date shall be the effective date. LANDMARK STRUCTURES I, L.P. TOWN OF PROSPER, TEXAS By: By: HARLAN JEFFERSON Title: Title: Town Manager Date: Date: Address: 1665 Harmon Rd. Fort Worth, Texas 76177 Phone: (817) 230-8842 Address: 200 S. Main St. Prosper, Texas 75078 Phone: (972) 346 - 2640 ATTEST: ROBYN BATTLE Town Secretary Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 28 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS ) ) COUNTY OF COLLIN ) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That __________________ whose address is __________________________________________________________________________, hereinafter called Principal, and __________________________________________________________, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ______________________________, and fully licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the TOWN OF PROSPER, a home-rule municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinafter called “Beneficiary”, in the penal sum of __________________ Dollars ($____________) plus fifteen percent (15%) of the stated penal sum as an additional sum of money representing additional court expenses, attorneys’ fees, and liquidated damages arising out of or connected with the below identified Contract in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Collin County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The penal sum of this Bond shall automatically be increased by the amount of any Change Order or Supplemental Agreement, which increases the Contract price, but in no event shall a Change Order or Supplemental Agreement, which reduces the Contract price, decrease the penal sum of this Bond. THE OBLIGATION TO PAY SAME is conditioned as follows: Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain Contract with the Town of Prosper, the Beneficiary, dated on or about the _________ day of ___________________, A.D. 20____, a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, to furnish all materials, equipment, labor, supervision, and other accessories necessary for the construction of: BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK in the Town of Prosper, Texas, as more par ticularly described and designated in the above -referenced contract such contract being incorporated herein and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if written herein word for word. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform and fulfill all of the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Contract in accordance with the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents during the original term thereof and any extension thereof which may be granted by the Beneficiary, with or without notice to the Surety, and during the life of any guaranty or warranty required under this Contract, and shall also well and truly perform and fulfill all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreem ents of any and all duly authorized modifications of said Contract that may hereafter be made, notice of which modifications to the Surety being hereby waived; and, if the Principal shall repair and/or replace all defects due to faulty materials and workmanship that appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final completion and final acceptance of the Work by Owner; and, if the Principal shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Beneficiary from and against all costs and Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 29 damages which Beneficiary may suffer by reason of failure to so perform herein and shall fully reimburse and repay Beneficiary all outlay and expense which the Beneficiary may incur in making good any default or deficiency, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action were filed on this Bond, exclusive Venue shall lie in Collin County, Texas. AND PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Plans, Specifications and Drawings, etc., accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work or to the Specifications. This Bond is given pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, and any other applicable statutes of the State of Texas. The undersigned and designated agent is hereby designated by the Surety herein as the Resident Agent in Collin County or Dallas County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship, as provided by Article 7.19-1 of the Insurance Code, Vernon’s Annotated Civil Statutes of the State of Texas. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three copies, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this, the ________ day of ________________, 20____. ATTEST: PRINCIPAL: ___________________________________ Company Name By: _________________________________ By: ________________________________ Signature Signature ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Typed/Printed Name Typed/Printed Name ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Title Title ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Address Address ____________________________________ ___________________________________ City State Zip City State Zip ___________________________________ ___________________________________ Phone Fax Phone Fax [Signatures continued on following page.] Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 30 ATTEST: SURETY: By: _________________________________ By: ________________________________ Signature Signature ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Printed Name Printed Name ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Title Title ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Address Address ____________________________________ ___________________________________ City State Zip City State Zip ___________________________________ ___________________________________ Phone Fax Phone Fax The Resident Agent of the Surety in Collin County or Dallas County, Texas, for delivery of notice and service of the process is: NAME: STREET ADDRESS: CITY, STATE, ZIP: NOTE: Date on Page 1 of Performance Bond must be same date as Contract. Date on Page 2 of Performance Bond must be after date of Contract. If Resident Agent is not a corporation, give a person’s name. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 31 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS ) ) COUNTY OF COLLIN ) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That __________________ whose address is ____________________________________________________________________________, hereinafter called Principal, and__________________________________________________________, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ______________________________, and fully licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the TOWN OF PROSPER, a home-rule municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinafter called “Owner”, and unto all persons, firms, and corporations who may furnish materials for, or perform labor upon the building or improveme nts hereinafter referred to in the penal sum of ___________________________________ DOLLARS ($_______________) (one hundred percent (100%) of the total bid price) in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Collin County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The penal sum of this Bond shall automatically be increased by the amount of any Change Order or Supplemental Agreement, which increases the Contract price, but in no event shall a Change Order or Supplemental Agreement, which reduces the Contract price, decrease the penal sum of this Bond. THE OBLIGATION TO PAY SAME is conditioned as follows: Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain Contract with the Town of Prosper, the Owner, dated on or about the __________ day of _________________, A.D. 20___, a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, to furnish all materials, equipment, labor, supervision, and other accessories necessary for the construction of: BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties and make prompt payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, corporations and claimants supplying labor and/or material in the prosecution of the Work provided for in the above-referenced Contract and any and all duly authorized modifications of said Contract that may hereafter be made, notice of which modification to the Surety is hereby expressly waived, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action were filed on this Bond, exclusive venue shall lie in Collin County, Texas. AND PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the Plans, Specifications, Drawings, etc., accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 32 This Bond is given pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, and any other applicable statutes of the State of Texas. The undersigned and designated agent is hereby designated by the Surety herein as t he Resident Agent in Collin County or Dallas County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship, as provided by Article 7.19-1 of the Insurance Code, Vernon’s Annotated Civil Statutes of the State of Texas. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three copies, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this, the _______ day of _________________, 20___. ATTEST: PRINCIPAL: ___________________________________ Company Name By: _________________________________ By: ________________________________ Signature Signature ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Typed/Printed Name Typed/Printed Name ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Title Title ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Address Address ____________________________________ ___________________________________ City State Zip City State Zip ___________________________________ ___________________________________ Phone Fax Phone Fax [Signatures continued on following page.] Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 33 ATTEST: SURETY: By: _________________________________ By: ________________________________ Signature Signature ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Printed Name Printed Name ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Title Title ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Address Address ____________________________________ ___________________________________ City State Zip City State Zip ___________________________________ ___________________________________ Phone Fax Phone Fax The Resident Agent of the Surety in Collin County or Dallas County, Texas, for delivery of notice and service of the process is: NAME: STREET ADDRESS: CITY, STATE, ZIP: NOTE: Date on Page 1 of Performance Bond must be same date as Contract. Date on Page 2 of Performance Bond must be after date of Contract. If Resident Agent is not a corporation, give a person’s name. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 34 MAINTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS ) ) COUNTY OF COLLIN ) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That _______________________________ whose address is________________________________________________, hereinafter referred to as “Principal,” and ___________________________________, a corporate surety/sureties organized under the laws of the State of ____________ and fully licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, as Surety, hereinafter referred to as “Surety” (whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the TOWN OF PROSPER, a Texas municipal corporation, hereinafter referred to as “Owner,” in the penal sum of ___________________________________ DOLLARS ($_______________) (one hundred percent (100%) of the total bid price), in lawful money of the United States to be paid to Owner, its successors and assigns, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our successors, heirs, executors, administrators and successors and assigns, jointly and severally; and firmly by these presents, the condition of this obligation is such that: WHEREAS, Principal entered into a certain written Contract with the Town of Prosper, dated on or about the _____ day of ________________________, 20____, to furnish all permits, licenses, bonds, insurance, products, materials, equipment, labor, supervision, and other accessories necessary for the construction of: BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK in the Town of Prosper, Texas, as more particularly described and designated in the above - referenced contract, such contract being incorporated herein and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if written herein word for word: WHEREAS, in said Contract, the Principal binds itself to use first class materials and workmanship and of such kind and quality that for a period of two (2) years from the completion and final acceptance of the improvements by Owner the said improvements shall require no repairs, the necessity for which shall be occasioned by defects in workmanship or materials and during the period of two (2) years following the date of final acceptance of the Work by Owner, Principal binds itself to repair or reconstruct said improvements in whole or in part at any time within said period of time from the date of such notice as the Town Manager or his designee shall determine to be necessary for the preservation of the public health, safety or welfare. If Principal does not repair or reconstruct the improvements within the time period designated, Owner shall be entitled to have said repairs made and charge Principal and/or Surety the cost of same under the terms of this Maintenance Bond. NOW, THEREFORE, if Principal will maintain and keep in good repair the Work herein contracted to be done and performed for a period of two (2) years from the date of final acceptance and do and perform all necessary work and repair any defective condition (it being understood that the purpose of this section is to cover all defective conditions arising by reason of defective materials, work or labor performed by Principal) then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 35 shall remain in full force and effect and Owner shall have and recover from Principal and its Surety damages in the premises as provided in the Plans and Specifications and Contract. PROVIDED, however, that Principal hereby holds harmless and indemnifies Owner from and against any claim or liability for personal injury or property damage caused by and occurring during the performance of said maintenance and repair operation. PROVIDED, further, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, exclusive venue shall lie in Collin County, Texas. AND PROVIDED FURTHER, Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work performed thereunder, or the Plans, Specifications, Drawings, etc. accompanying same shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder. The undersigned and designated agent is hereby designated by Surety as the resident agent in either Collin or Dallas Counties to whom all requisite notice may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of this suretyship. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three copies, each one of which shall be deemed an original, on this the _____ day of ____________, 20____. ATTEST: PRINCIPAL: ___________________________________ Company Name By: _________________________________ By: ________________________________ Signature Signature ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Typed/Printed Name Typed/Printed Name ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Title Title ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Address Address ____________________________________ ___________________________________ City State Zip City State Zip ___________________________________ ___________________________________ Phone Fax Phone Fax [Signatures continued on following page.] Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 36 ATTEST: SURETY: By: _________________________________ By: ________________________________ Signature Signature ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Printed Name Printed Name ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Title Title ____________________________________ ___________________________________ Address Address ____________________________________ ___________________________________ City State Zip City State Zip ___________________________________ ___________________________________ Phone Fax Phone Fax Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 37 GENERAL CONDITIONS GC.01 PURPOSE: The General Conditions contained herein set forth conditions or requirements common to this Contract and all other construction contracts issued by the Town of Prosper. GC.02 DEFINITIONS: The following words and expressions, or pronouns used in their place, shall wherever they appear in this Contract, be construed as follows, unless a different meaning is clear from the context: CALENDAR DAY: Any days of the week or month, no days being excepted. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: All of the written, printed, typed, and drawn instruments that comprise and govern the performance of the contract as defined by the Construction Agreement. ENGINEER: The ENGINEER of the OWNER or his designee. EXTRA WORK: Work required by the OWNER other than that which is expressly or impliedly required by the Contract Documents at the time of execution of the Contract. HOLIDAYS: The ten official holidays observed are New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Day After Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Eve, and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. OWNER: The Town of Prosper, Texas, acting through the Town Manager under authority granted by the Town Council. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: The Executive Director of Development and Community Services of the Town of Prosper or his designee. SUB-CONTRACTOR: Any persons, firm or corporation, other than employees of the CONTRACTOR, who or which contracts with the CONTRACTOR to furnish, or who actually furnishes, labor and/or materials and equipment at or about the site. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETE: The condition upon which the Work has been made suitable for use and may serve its intended purpose but may still require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. WORK: All work to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of the Contract, including the furnishing of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, submittals, services, insurance, permits, certificates, licenses, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation, facilities, and other incidentals. WRITTEN NOTICE: Notice required by the Contract shall be served concurrently to the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, ENGINEER, and/or CONTRACTOR. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 38 Notice delivered by mail shall be effective on the postmark date, notice delivered by hand shall be effective the date of delivery, and notice delivered by facsimile or e-mail shall be effective the date of transmission, provided that any notice served after 5 PM or on a weekend or holiday shall be effective the following business day. GC.03 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND UNDERSTANDINGS: (a) Intent of Contract Documents: The intent of the Contract Documents is to prescribe a complete work or improvement, which the CONTRACTOR undertakes to do in full compliance with the plans, specifications, special provisions, proposal and contract. The CONTRACTOR shall do all work as provided in the plans, specifications, special provisions, proposal and contract, and shall do such additional extra work as may be considered necessary to complete the work in satisfactory and acceptable manner. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment and incidentals necessary to the satisfactory prosecution and completion of the work. (b) No Waiver of Legal Right: Inspection by the OWNER or ENGINEER, any order, measurement, or certificate by OWNER or ENGINEER, any order by the OWNER for payment of money, any payment for or acceptance of any work, or any extension of time, or any possession taken by the OWNER, shall not operate as a waiver of any provisions of the Contract Documents or any power therein reserved to the OWNER of any rights or damages therein provided. Any waiver of any breach of contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other subsequent breach. The OWNER deserves the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any estimate that may have been paid and to adjust the same to meet the requirements of the contract and specifications. The OWNER reserves the right to claim and recover by process of law sums as may be sufficient to correct any error or make good any deficiency in the work resulting from such error, dishonesty or collusion, upon the conclusive proof of collusion or dishonesty by the CONTRACTOR or his agents and the ENGINEER or his assistants, discovered in the work after the final payment has been made. (c) Changes and Alterations: The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the OWNER or ENGINEER may make such changes and alterations as the OWNER may see fit, in the line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompany Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages for anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If the amount of work is increased, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the OWNER shall recompense the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 39 (d) Discrepancies and Omissions: It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice, and in the event of any discrepancies between the separate contract documents, the priority of interpretation defined by the Construction Agreement shall govern. In the event that there is still any doubt as to the meaning and intent of any portion of the contract, specifications or drawings, the ENGINEER shall define which is intended to apply to the work. (e) Plans and Specifications: The OWNER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with an adequate and reasonable number of copies of all plans and specifications without expense to him, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one copy of the same constantly accessible on the work, with the latest revisions noted thereon. (f) Ownership of Drawings: All drawings, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work, and, with the exception of the signed contract sets, are to be returned to him on request, at the completion of the work. All models are the property of the OWNER. (g) Adequacy of Design: It is understood that the OWNER believes it has employed competent engineers and designers. It is, therefore, agreed that, as to the CONTRACTOR only, the OWNER shall be responsible for the adequacy of the design, sufficiency of the Contract Documents, and the practicability of the operations of the completed project; provided the CONTRACTOR has complied with the requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof, and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the said requirements of the Contract Documents, approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations thereto. (h) Line and Grade: The ENGINEER will furnish control benchmarks for the construction of the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall use the control benchmarks and data shown on the drawings. No construction staking will be provided by the ENGINEER or owner for this project. Any restaking, and all construction staking, required shall be at the sole cost of the CONTRACTOR. (i) Right of Way and Easements: The OWNER will obtain all necessary right of ways and easements required for the completion of the Work. No work shall be undertaken on nor shall men, tools, equipment, or other supplies occupy any ground outside right of ways and easements. If Contractor wants to work outside right of ways and easements and is able to make an agreement with the Property Owner, then the agreement should be documented and signed by the Property Owner and CONTRACTOR with a copy submitted to the OWNER before work off the easement commences. The OWNER will obtain permits and/or license agreements necessary for work to be performed on right of ways or easements owned by other agencies including, but not limited to, the Texas Departments of Transportation, North Texas Tollway Authority, BNSF Railway, and utility companies. The CONTRACTOR shall comply Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 40 with the conditions of these permits and/or license agreements as if they were a part of the Contract Documents. (j) Existing Utilities and Structures: The location of existing utilities shown on the plans are based on the interpretation of the best available information and are not warranted by the OWNER or ENGINEER. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to verify and/or locate the various locations of pertinent utilities prior to or during construction. If any utility or irrigation system is broken by the Contractor, it shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to repair, at his own expense, the damaged line and restore it to its functional use. (k) Right of Entry: The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the works herein contracted for are to be constructed or installed, by such agent or agents as he may elect, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of constructing or installing such collateral work as said OWNER may desire. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct his work so as not to impede unnecessarily any work being done by others on or adjacent to the site. (l) Collateral Contracts: The OWNER agrees to provide by separate contract or otherwise, all labor and material essential to the completion of the work specifically excluded from this contract, in such manner as not to delay the progress of the work or damage said CONTRACTOR, except where such delays are specifically mentioned elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (m) Objections and Determinations: The ENGINEER shall determine all claims disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. The ENGINEER'S decision shall be rendered in writing within a reasonable time and shall be binding. (n) Owner-Engineer Relationship: The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the ENGINEER during construction are as set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended or limited without written consent of the OWNER and ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will advise and consult with the OWNER, and OWNER'S instructions to the CONTRACTOR may be issued through the ENGINEER as if they were issued by the OWNER directly. GC.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES: (a) Contractor Independence: The CONTRACTOR is and at all times shall remain an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing his work under this contract, with full power and authority to select the means, method and manner of performing such work, so long as such methods do not adversely affect the completed improvements, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Contract Documents. (b) Assignment and Subletting: The CONTRACTOR agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract and that he will not assign by Power of Attorney, or otherwise, or sublet said Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 41 contract without the written consent of the OWNER or ENGINEER, and that no part or feature of the work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his full obligations to the OWNER, as provided by this Agreement. (c) Contractor’s Understanding: It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this contact, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. (d) Duty of Contractor: The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and other persons, as well as for the protection of the safety of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use, or non-use, of all items and methods incident to performance of the contract, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, and similar items or devices used by him during construction (e) Supervision by Contractor: The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. (f) Character of Workmen: The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the OWNER or ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the OWNER’S or ENGINEER'S written consent. (g) Contractor’s Buildings: The building of structures or the erection of tents or other forms of protection will be permitted only for use as temporary office space or for storage of materials, equipment, and supplies and only at such places as the OWNER or ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the OWNER or ENGINEER. At no time shall employees or agents of the CONTRACTOR occupy such facilities except in conjunction with performance of the Work. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 42 (h) Protection of Site: The Contractor shall protect all structures, walks, pipe lines, trees, shrubbery, lawns and other improvements during the progress of his work and shall remove from the site all debris and unused materials. (i) Sanitation: Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. (j) Equipment, Materials, and Construction Plant: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, protection and replacement of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, or whether OWNER has taken possession of completed portions of such work, until the entire work is completed and accepted. (k) Losses from Natural Causes: Unless otherwise specified, all loss or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance in the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. GC.05 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY: (a) Protection Against Claims: If any person files a claim against the OWNER, OWNER’s Agent or CONTRACTOR for personal injury or property damage resulting from, arising out of, or caused by, the operations of t he CONTRACTOR, or any Work within the limits of the Project, the CONTRACTOR must either submit to the OWNER a duly executed full release within thirty (30) calendar days from the date of written claim, or immediately report the claim to his liability insur ance carrier for their action in adjusting the claim. If the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with this provision within the stipulated time limit, it will be automatically deemed that the CONTRACTOR has appointed the OWNER as its irrevocable Attorney In Fact authorizing the OWNER to report the claim directly with the CONTRACTOR’s liability insurance carrier. This provision is in and of itself a Power of Attorney from the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER, which authorizes the OWNER to take said action on behalf of the CONTRACTOR without the necessity of the execution of any other document. If the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the provisions of this item, the OWNER, at its own discretion, may terminate this contract or take any other actions it deems appropriate. Any payment or portion thereof due the CONTRACTOR, whether it is a final payment, progress payment, payment out of retainage or refund payment may be withheld by the OWNER. Bankruptcy, insolvency or denial of liability by the CONTRACTOR’s insurance carrier shall not exonerate the CONTRACTOR from liability. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 43 As a result of the additional work created to OWNER due to non-response of claims for damages by CONTRACTOR to third parties, CONTRACTOR shall incur penalties for failure to abide by this Special Condition. The CONTRACTOR shall respond to the claimant in writing regarding the status of the claim, including whether CONTRACTOR disputes the claim, wishes to settle, or will notify its liability insurance carrier regarding the claim. CONTRACTOR will be assessed a penalty by OWNER of $75.00 per claim, for its failure to respond to the claimant as described above within thirty (30) calendar days of its written notice of claim by the City. To ensure CONTRACTOR compliance, the OWNER shall be notified, by copied correspondence of responses or settlement by CONTRACTOR. (b) Protection Against Accidents to Employees and the Public: The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, and Municipal safety laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General contractors of America except where incompatible with Federal, State, or Municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide such machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, and other safety devices. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, acting at his discretion as an independent contractor. (c) Protection of Adjoining Property: The CONTRACTOR shall take proper means to communicate with the adjacent or adjoining property owners and protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjoining property. (d) Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention: The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner. (e) Threats to Persons or Property: The CONTRACTOR shall respond promptly to any imminent threat to persons or property arising from or in relation to performance of the Work. Failure to promptly correct any threat to persons or property may result in a temporary suspension of work until such time as the threat is resolved. GC.06 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS: (a) Time and Order of Completion: It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his work in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 44 construction; provided however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the Proposal; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the work done under this contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized. The CONTRACTOR shall submit prior to beginning work, with each pay estimate, and at other such times as may reasonably be requested by the OWNER or ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. (b) Working Hours: Permissible working hours are 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM Monday through Saturday, excluding holidays. Working hours are enforced by the Town of Prosper Police Department. Any variance to these working hours must be requested by the CONTRACTOR in writing at least two weeks in advance and will require approval from the OWNER upon positive recommendation of the ENGINEER. (c) Extension of Time: Should the CONTRACTOR be delayed in the completion of the work by any act or neglect of the OWNER or ENGINEER, or of any employee of either, or by other contractors employed by the OWNER, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strikes, lockouts, fires, and unusual delays by common carriers, or uncontrollable cause or causes beyond the CONTRACTOR'S control, and the OW NER and ENGINEER decides such cause justifies the delay, then an extension of time sufficient to compensate for the delay as determined by the OWNER or ENGINEER shall be allowed for completing the work; provided, however, that the CONTRACTOR shall give the OWNER or ENGINEER prompt notice in writing of the cause of such delay. (d) Hindrances and Delays: No claims shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages resulting from hindrances or delays from any cause (except where the work is stopped by order of the OWNER) during the progress of any portion of the work embraced in this contract. In case said work shall be stopped by the act of the OWNER, then such expense as in the judgment of the ENGINEER is caused by such stoppage of said work shall be paid by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR. (e) Liquidated Damages: The time of completion is of the essence for this Contract. For each day that any work shall remain uncompleted after the time specified in the Contract or in an executed Change Order, including milestone completion dates, substantial completion, and final completion, the OWNER may deduct the following sum from monies due to the CONTRACTOR for each day the work remains uncompleted: GC.07 Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 45 Amount of Contract Amount of Liquidated Damages Less than $50,000 $100 per day $50,000 to $100,000 $150 per day $100,000 to $500,000 $200 per day $500,000 to $1,000,000 $250 per day $1,000,000 to $5,000,000 $500 per day Greater than $5,000,000 $750 per day GC.08 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIAL: (a) Shop Drawings and Submittals: The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER or ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other contractor, four (4) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades, and the OWNER or ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, noting desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the OWNER or ENGINEER, file with him two corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The OWNER’S or ENGINEER'S approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called the OWNER’S or ENGINEER'S attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required contract work in accordance with the plans and specifications and within the contract time. Such review by the OWNER or ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the plans and specifications, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the OWNER or ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR'S performance hereunder. (b) Temporary Traffic Control: Where the Work is carried on, in or adjacent to any road, alley, sidewalk, trail, or other public space, the CONTRACTOR shall at his own cost and expense furnish, erect and maintain temporary traffic control devices and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and of the Work as are necessary. A sufficient number and arrangement of temporary traffic control devices shall be erected to keep vehicles and persons from entering on or into any work under construction. The CONTRACTOR's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs and lights, and for providing watchmen, shall not cease until the project has been accepted by the Owner. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 46 All temporary traffic control devices shall be clearly visible at all times of day and night. Signs and barricades shall constructed of retro-reflective sheeting, and cones and other channelizing devices shall have retro-reflective banding. All temporary traffic control devices shall comply with and have the meanings prescribed by the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. The Contractor shall at all times coordinate the closing of any section of road, alley, sidewalk, trail, or other public space with the OWNER or ENGINEER. When such a closing is anticipated to have a duration longer than one (1) hour, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a traffic control plan at least 72 hours in advance to the OWNER or ENGINEER for review and approval. The CONTRACTOR shall be held responsible for all damage to the Work due to failure of barricades, signs, to protect it, and whenever evidence is found of such damage, the OWNER or ENGINEER may order the damaged portion immediately removed and replaced by the CONTRACTOR at his cost and expense. (c) Public Convenience: Materials stored about the Work shall be so placed, and the Work shall at all times to be so conducted, as to cause no greater obstruction to the traveling public than is considered necessary by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall make provisions at all roads, alleys, sidewalks, trails, and private driveways for the free passage of pedestrians and vehicles provided that where free passage is impractical or unnecessary in the opinion of the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR may make arrangements satisfactory to the OWNER for the diversion of traffic and shall, at his own expense, provide all material and perform all work necessary for the construction and maintenance of such diversions. The materials excavated, and the construction materials or plant used in the construction of the Work, shall be placed so as not to endanger the Work or prevent free access to all public and private utilities and related appurtenances. The OWNER reserves the right to remedy any neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR as regards to the public convenience and safety which may come to its attention after twenty-four (24) hours notice in writing the CONTRACTOR, save in cases of emergency, when it shall have the right to remedy any neglect without notice; and in either case, the cost of such work done by the OWNER shall be deducted from monies due or to become due to the Contractor. (d) Testing of Materials: Testing and inspection of materials required by the specifications shall be performed by a commercial testing laboratory select ed by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER. Except as otherwise noted, the costs of laboratory tests will be paid by the CONTRACTOR, including any materials or specimens for testing. Any testing of material or workmanship required due to failure will be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. This payment will be made direct to the testing laboratory by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish at his own expense, suitable evidence that the materials he proposes to incorporate into the work are in accordance with the specifications. Mill tests for reinforcing steel and cement will be acceptable if it is definite that the test sheets apply to the material being furnished. Manufacturer's or supplier's test results will be acceptable for such items as pipe, valves, hydrants Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 47 when it is definite that the material being furnished is in accordance with the manufacturer's or supplier's specifications to which the test results apply. Supplier's evidence of quality and gradation of asphaltic material will be acceptable as long as the material is secured from the sources to which the evidence applies. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to provide the above information, or should the validity of the above information be called into question, the OWNER shall have the right to require tests to be made by the OWNER's laboratory to obtain this information and the cost therefore shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR or deducted from monies owed by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR. (e) Trench Excavation Protection: It is the sole duty, responsibility, and prerogative of the CONTRACTOR, not the OWNER or ENGINEER, to determine the specific applicability of a trench safety system to each field condition encountered on the project as required by Part 1926, Sub-part P-Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's Standards and Interpretations. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to identify the soil type and to accurately adjust his trench safety methods according to the OSHA requirements. (f) Explosives: The use of explosives shall not be permitted. GC.09 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE: (a) Inspection of Work: Inspection will be performed by representatives of the OWNER, ENGINEER, other reviewing agencies, and their designees. It is the intent of the OWNER to inspect all work on this project. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for verifying with the OWNER, ENGINEER, or other reviewing agencies when an inspector is and is not required. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the OWNER, ENGINEER, other reviewing agencies, and their designees reasonable access and facilities for inspecting the Work and determining whether or not the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs associated with verifying the acceptability of work completed without proper inspection, as directed by the OWNER, ENGINEER, or other reviewing agency. If deemed to be unacceptable, the work may be ordered removed at the CONTRACTOR's expense. (b) Inspection Overtime: The OWNER and ENGINEER will provide inspection staff on weekdays between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM. Inspection performed outside these hours or on weekends or holidays may be subject to an inspection overtime fee determined by the OWNER and ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for determining inspection overtime rules of other reviewing agencies. (c) Use of Completed Portions: The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the work, notwithstanding the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired. Such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall the risk of loss change from CONTRACTOR to OWNER. If Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 48 such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to such extra compensation, or extension of time, or both, as the OWNER or ENGINEER may determine. (d) Defects and their Remedies: If the Work or any portion thereof, or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the OWNER or ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the OWNER or ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. (e) Preliminary Final Inspection: Upon substantial completion of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall request a preliminary final inspection of the Work by representatives of the OWNER, ENGINEER, and other reviewing agencies. The OWNER or ENGINEER will provide written notice of any defects to the CONTRACTOR and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remedy such defects in accordance with the Contract Documents. (f) Final Inspection: Upon completion of all items identified on the punch list, the CONTRACTOR shall request a final inspection of the Work by representatives of the OWNER, ENGINEER, and other reviewing agencies. If additional defects are noted, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remedy such defects and repeat this process. If the Work is found to be acceptable, the OWNER or ENGINEER will provide written notice of Completion of the Work to the CONTRACTOR. (g) Acceptance: Upon Completion, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER or ENGINEER such documentation as is necessary to insure that the work has been completed, subcontractors and suppliers have been paid, any claims received have been settled, and other documentation as required by the OWNER or ENGINEER. If the documentation is found to be acceptable, the OWNER or ENGINEER will issue a written notice of Acceptance of the Work to the CONTRACTOR. GC.10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: (a) Estimated Quantities: The quantities of each item on the bid proposal blank represent the approximate amount of work to be done. Final quantities actually built will be determined and paid for by actual measurements on the ground of the final work completed. Bidders are especially notified that no incidental items of work will be paid for unless there appears an item in the proposal blank for such work. It must be strictly understood that the prices bid are for complete and acceptable work. (b) Measurement: Quantities of individual items of work shall be based on the final, in- place quantity of the item of work, measured or computed using the units specified in the Proposal. Where a discrepancy in measured or computed quantities occurs among the OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR, the parties attempt to reconcile the discrepancy. If no reconciliation is possible, the determination of the ENGINEER shall be used. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 49 (c) Progress Payments: As close as practical to the end of each month in which work has been performed, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the OWNER an application for payment showing as completely as practicable the total value of the work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the last day immediately preceding the date of such application and the value of all sound materials delivered on the site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE and/or ENGINEER shall promptly review CONTRACTOR'S application for payment, shall either approve or modify the total value of the work done by CONTRACTOR and the value of materials delivered on the site, and shall submit to OWNER such application for payment as approved or modified with OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE'S and/or ENGINEER'S recommendation affixed thereto within ten (10) business days following the receipt of the application from CONTRACTOR. The OW NER shall pay the CONTRACTOR within thirty (30) days following receipt of the application from CONTRACTOR, less any amount held for retainage or outstanding claims or defective work. (d) Payment Withheld: The OWNER may withhold any payment otherwise due to the CONTRACTOR. The amount of any withheld payment shall be as necessary to protect the OWNER's interest in the following circumstances: (i) unsatisfactory progress of the Work within the CONTRACTOR's control; (ii) reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance; (iii) failure of the CONTRACTOR to carry out orders of the OWNER; (iv) defective work not remedied; (v) the filing of a claim against the CONTRACTOR or reasonable evidence that a claim will be filled against the CONTRACTOR; (vi) failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payment to subcontractors or suppliers for material and labor used in performance of the Work; (vii) unsafe working conditions or threats to persons or property allowed to persist by the CONTRACTOR; (viii) failure of the CONTRACTOR to provide work schedules, invoices, or other records requested by the OWNER; (ix) use of subcontractors without the consent of the ENGINEER or OWNER; (x) or, failure of the CONTRACTOR to keep current redline as-built drawings at the job site or to turn redline as-built drawings over to the OWNER. GC.11 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS: (a) Change Orders: Without invalidating this Agreement, the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the work; such changes will be authorized by written Change Order prepared by the OWNER for execution by the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in contract price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in contract time which may result from the change. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall refuse to execute a Change Order which has been prepared by the OWNER, the OWNER may in writing instruct the Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 50 CONTRACTOR to proceed with the work as set forth in the Change Order and the CONTRACTOR may make claim against the OWNER for Extra Work involved therein, as hereinafter provided. (b) Minor Changes: The OWNER or ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor change or alteration authorized by the OWNER or ENGINEER involves Extra Work and entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price, the CONTRACTOR shall make written request to the OWNER or ENGINEER for a written Field Order. Any request by the CONTRACTOR for a change in Contract Price shall be made in writing in accordance with the provisions of this section prior to beginning the work covered by the proposed change. (c) Extra Work: It is agreed that the basis of compensation to the CONTRACTOR for work either added or deleted by a Change Order or for which a claim for Extra Work is made shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "actual field cost" of the work, plus fifteen (15) percent. In the event said Extra Work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workmen, such as foreman, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, also all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and, a ratable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by any law or ordinance, or directed by the OWNER, or by them agreed to. The OWNER or ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "actual field cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the OWNER or ENGINEER. The OWNER or ENGINEER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100 percent, unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practicable the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written Change Order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the "actual field cost" to be paid the CONTRACTOR shall Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 51 cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "actual field cost" as herein defined; save that where the CONTRACTOR'S Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the OWNER or ENGINEER. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the OWNER or ENGINEER for written order authorizing such Extra Work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute Extra Work, or as to the payment therefore, and the OWNER or ENGINEER insists upon its performance, the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep an accurate account of the "actual field cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). The CONTRACTOR will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to a court of general jurisdiction to decide the matter, otherwise the CONTRACTOR shall waive all claims for payment for Extra Work. GC.12 CONTRACT TERMINATION (a) Abandonment by CONTRACTOR: In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the OWNER or ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the OWNER or ENGINEER, when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, then, and in that case, where performance and payment bonds exist, the Sureties on these bonds shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the CONTRACTOR shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under contract for the work, may be held for use on the work by the OWNER or the Surety on the performance bond, or another contractor in completion of the work; and the CONTRACTOR shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under Section 6, Extra Work and Claims), it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for, within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: The OWNER may employ such force of men and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said OWNER may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 52 materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER; or The OWNER under sealed bids, after five (5) days’ notice published one or more times in a newspaper having general circulation in the county of the location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In the case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this contract, the CONTRACTOR and/his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed the CONTRACTOR and his Surety shall be so notified and Certificates of Completion and Acceptance shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by the OWNER or ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his Surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety, or the OWNER as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement, within fifteen (15) days after the date of such Certificate of Completion. After final completion of the work and in the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this contract; or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his Surety subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the OWNER may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his Surety. Such sale may Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 53 be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies, which remain on the work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his Surety, to their proper owners. (b) Abandonment by OWNER: In case the OWNER shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract within ten (10) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been wrought into the work. Thereupon the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said CONTRACTOR, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the items of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement and shall certify same to the OWNER who shall pay to the CONTRACTOR on or before thirty (30) days after the date of delivery to OWNER of such certified final statement. (c) Termination of Contract in Case of National Emergency: Whenever, because of a national emergency, so declared by the President of the United States or other lawful authority, it becomes impossible for the Contractor to obtain all of the necessary labor, material and equipment for the prosecution of the work with reasonable continuity for a period of two (2) months, the Contractor shall within seven (7) days notify the Owner in writing, giving a detailed statement of the efforts which have been made and listing all necessary items of labor, material and equipment not obtainable. If, after investigation, the Owner finds that such conditions exist and that the inability of the Contractor to proceed is not attributable in whole or in part to the fault or neglect of the Contract, then if the Owner cannot after reasonable effort assist the Contractor in procuring and making available the necessary labor, materials, and equipment within thirty (30) days, the Contractor may request the Owner to terminate the contract and the Owner shall within thirty (30) days comply with the request, and the termination shall be based on a final settlement, which shall include, but not be limited to, the payment for all work executed. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 54 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC.01 PURPOSE: The Special Conditions contained herein set forth conditions or requirements particular to this Contract: BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK The Special Conditions supplement the General Conditions and the Standard Specifications and take precedence over any conditions or requirements of the General Conditions and the Standard Specifications with which they are in conflict. SC.02 DEFINITIONS: The following words and expressions, or pronouns used in their place, shall wherever they appear in this Contract, be construed as follows, unless a different meaning is clear from the context: ENGINEER: The Engineer of Record as shown on the Construction Drawings: Michael R. Hagen, P.E., Freese and Nichols, Inc., 5805 Main Street Suite B, Frisco TX 75034, or his designee. Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 55 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 56 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT LANK Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 00 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Wage Rates 00 43 43 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 00 43 43 WAGE RATES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 PAYMENT OF PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. 1.02 RECORDS A. In accordance with Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.024, the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 1.03 LIABILITY; PENALTY; CRIMINAL OFFENSE A. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.003 – Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.053(b) – Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258, shall pay to the Owner, on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed or each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.058 – Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed six months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 1.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. Prevailing wage rates shall not be less than (1) the federally determined prevailing wage rates as issued by the U.S. Department of Labor, or (2) the prevailing wages for Colling County as published by The Associate General Contractors of Texas, whichever rate is higher. Notwithstanding the foregoing prevailing wage rates, Bidder shall base bids on the wage rates Bidder expects to pay, and if in excess of those rates listed, the Town will not Attachment 3Item 12 Wage Rates 00 43 43 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B consider claims for extra payment on account of payment of wages higher than those required. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully operable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. Provide the civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and all other Work required for a complete and operable Project. 4. Test and place the completed Project in operation. 5. Provide the special tools, spare parts, lubricants, supplies, or other materials as indicated in Contract Documents for the operation and maintenance of the Project. 6. Install Owner provided products and place in operation. 7. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements apply to each Section of the Specifications. B. Comply with all applicable state and local codes and regulations pertaining to the nature and character of the Work being performed. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: Design and Construction of one 2.5 million gallon composite elevated water storage tank and associated site improvements and appurtenances. Landscaping improvements to the elevated water storage tank site. 1.04 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling, testing, and startup: 1. Lower Pressure Plane Water Line Project. 2. Custer Road Pump Station Expansion Project. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Bid on the most expensive listing. Attachment 3Item 12 Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. D. Coordinate construction activities through the Owner. E. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Utility companies or their contractors will provide new or enhanced utilities for this Project. Coordinate with others performing Work associated with this Project. B. Power and Electrical Services: 1. Contractor shall provide permanent power connections for the Site through the power utility unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. 2. Cost for providing permanent power shall be paid for by the Contractor. 3. Contractor is required to coordinate and cooperate with others performing this Work. 4. Power utility will provide the construction to the property line. 5. Provide conduit, conductors, pull boxes, manholes, and other appurtenances for the installation of power cable between the property line and the transformer and between the transformer and the main power switch. 6. Test conductors in accordance with Section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements” and coordinate with the power utility to energize the system when ready. 7. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection, fees and permits. 8. When permanent power is available at the Site, the Contractor may use this power source in lieu of temporary power source previously used. Notify Engineer and Owner of intent to use the permanent power source. Arrange with the power utility and pay the charges for connections and monthly charges for use of this power. 9. Pay for the power consumed until the Project has been accepted as substantially complete. 1.06 OCCUPANCY A. As soon as any portion of the structure and equipment are ready for use, the Owner shall have the right to occupy or operate that portion upon written notice to the Contractor. B. Testing of equipment and appurtenances including specified test periods, training, and startup does not constitute acceptance for operation. C. Owner may accept the facility for continued use after startup and testing at the option of the Owner. If acceptance is delayed at the option of the Owner, shut down facilities per approved Operation and Maintenance procedures. Attachment 3Item 12 Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. The execution of bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions. E. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting occupancy of the structures and use of equipment during the remaining period of construction. F. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and products per the individual Sections of the Specifications. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Payments for Work shall conform to the provisions of the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Section. Apply provisions for payments in the Section to all Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. Submit Applications for Payment at the amounts indicated in the Agreement: 1. Amounts for each item in the Agreement shall include but not be limited to cost for: a. Mobilization, demobilization, cleanup, bonds, and insurance. b. Professional services including but not limited to engineering and legal fees. c. The products to be permanently incorporated into the Project. d. The products consumed during the construction of the Project. e. The labor and supervision to complete the Project. f. The equipment, including tools, machinery, and appliances required to complete the Project. g. The field and home office administration and overhead costs related directly or indirectly to the Project. h. Any and all kinds, amount or class of excavation, backfilling, pumping or drainage, sheeting, shoring and bracing, disposal of any and all surplus materials, permanent protection of all overhead, surface or underground structures; removal and replacement of any poles, conduits, pipelines, fences, appurtenances and connections, cleaning up, overhead expense, bond, public liability and compensation and property damage insurance, patent fees, and royalties, risk due to the elements, and profits, unless otherwise specified. 2. Provide Work not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system. These items are a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and are to be included in the Cost of Work. 3. Payment will be made for materials on hand. a. Store materials properly on Site per Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination.” 1). Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2). Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the materials-on-hand tabulation. b. Provide documentation of payment for materials-on-hand with the next payment request. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the materials on hand tabulation if this documentation is not provided so payment will not be made. Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. Payment for materials-on-hand is provided for the convenience of the Contractor and does not constitute acceptance of the product. 4. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND PAYMENTS A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work to be performed on the project. 1. Submit schedule within 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. 2. Line items in the Agreement are to be used as line items in the schedule. 3. Payment will be made on the quantity of Work completed per Contract Documents during the payment period and as measured per this Section. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Agreement. b. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. c. Partial payments will be made for lump sum line items in the Agreement. 1). Lump sum line items in the Agreement are to be divided into smaller unit prices to allow more accurate determination of the percentage of the item that has been completed. a). Provide adequate detail to allow more accurate determination of the percentage of Work completed for each item. b). Provide amounts for items that do not exceed $50,000.00. An exception may be made for equipment packages that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. c). Separate product costs and installation costs. (1). Product costs include cost for product, delivery and unloading costs, royalties and patent fees, taxes, and other cost paid directly to the Subcontractor or Supplier. (2). Installation costs include cost for the supervision, labor and equipment for field fabrication, erection, installation, start-up, initial operation and overhead and profit. d). Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units. (1). The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. (2). Payment will be made for all of the lump sum line item amount. e). Include a directly proportional amount of overhead and profit for each line item. f). Divide principal subcontract amounts into an adequate number of line items to allow determination of the percentage of Work completed for each item. Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2). These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 3). Correlate line items with other administrative schedules and forms: a). Progress schedule. b). List of Subcontractors. c). Schedule of allowances. d). Schedule of alternatives. e). List of products and principal Suppliers. f). Schedule of Submittals. 4). Costs for mobilization/demobilization are to be listed as a separate line item and includes the actual cost for: a). Bonds and insurance. b). Transportation and setup for equipment. c). Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds and storage facilities. d). Salaries for preparation of submittals required before the first Application for Payment. e). Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization/demobilization of the Project. f). Transportation, breakdown/loading, and removal of equipment. g). Transportation and/or disassembly of all temporary facilities erected for construction. h). Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Cost for mobilization may be submitted only for Work completed. 5). The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract amount. 4. Submit a schedule indicating the anticipated schedule of payments to be made by the Owner. Schedule shall indicate: a. The Application for Payment number. b. Date the request is to be submitted. c. Anticipated amount of payment to be requested. 5. Update the Schedule of Values quarterly or more often if necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds that the Owner will need to have available to make payment to the Contractor for the Work performed. B. Provide written approval of the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment by the Surety Company providing performance, and bonds prior to Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. 1.03 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Submit Applications for Payment per the procedures indicated in Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” Submit a Schedule of Values in the Application for Payment format to be used. B. Applications for Payment may be submitted on a pre-printed form as indicated in Section 01 31 13.13 “Forms” or may be generated by computer. Computer generated payment requests must have the same format and information indicated in the pre-printed form and be approved by the Engineer. 1. Indicate the total contract amount and the Work completed to date on the Tabulation of Values for Original Contract Performed (Attachment “A.”). 2. Include only approved Change Order items in the Tabulation of Extra Work on Approved Change Orders (Attachment “B.”). 3. List all materials on hand that are presented for payment on the Tabulation of Materials on Hand (Attachment “C.”) Once an item has been entered on the tabulation it is not to be removed. 4. Include the Project Summary Report (Attachment “D”) with each Application for Payment. Data included in the Project Summary Report are to be taken from the other tabulations. Include a completed summary as indicated in with each Applications for Payment submitted. a. Number each application sequentially and indicate the payment period. Revised Applications for Payment will be resubmitted as A, B, C and so forth to note changes in content. b. Show the total amounts for value of original Contract performed, extra Work on approved Change Orders, and materials on hand on the Project Summary Report. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. c. Note the number of pages in tabulations in the blank space on the Project Summary Report to allow a determination that all sheets have been submitted. d. Execute Contractor’s certification by the Contractor’s agent of authority and notarize for each Application for Payment. 5. Do not alter the schedule of values and the form for the submission of requests without the written approval of the Engineer once these have been approved by the Engineer. 6. Final payment requires additional procedures and documentation per Section 01 70 00 “Execution and Closeout Requirements.” C. Progress payments shall be made as the Work progresses on a monthly basis. 1. End the payment period on the day indicated in the Agreement and submit an Application for Payment for Work completed and materials received since the end of the last payment period. Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. At the end of the payment period, submit a draft copy of the Application for Payment for that month to the Engineer. Agreement is to be reached on: a. The percentage of Work completed for each lump sum item. b. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. c. The percentage of Work completed for each approved Change Order item. d. The amount of materials-on-hand. 3. On the basis of these agreements the Contractor is to prepare a final copy of the Application for Payment and submit it to the Engineer for approval. 4. The Engineer will review the Application for Payment and if appropriate will recommend payment of the application to the Owner. D. Provide a revised and up-to-date Progress Schedule per Section 01 32 16 “Construction Progress Schedules” with each Application for Payment. E. Provide project photographs and video per Section 01 32 34 “Video and Photographic Documentation” with each Application for Payment. 1.04 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES (NOT USED) 1.05 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES A. Measure the Work described in the Agreement for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight, unless otherwise specifically provided. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed. 1.06 BASIS OF PAYMENT A. The Basis of Payment will be established based on Bid Items shown and described in the Contract Documents. 2.01 BID ITEMS 1. Bid Item A1 – 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank a. Payment will be made per lump sum complete and in place unit. Payment shall be at the bid price and shall be full compensation for supplying all labor, equipment, and materials and installing the elevated storage tank, including soil foundation, tank foundation, design of elevated storage tank, design of tank slab and soil foundations, supply and erection of foundation, tank pedestal, tank bowl, tank roof, all piping interior and exterior of tank, overflow facilities, interconnects, and drain, tank altitude and position/flow control valve, interior and exterior isolation and bypass valves, bowl inlet and outlet valves, mixing system, vents, manways, hatches, ladders with fall safety, platforms, railing, pedestal floor drain/trench system, drain sump and pumping system, antenna mounting rings and accessories, finish coating and painting interior and exterior, bowl painting including logo and painted bands, personnel and vehicular access doors, testing, disinfection, and all other appurtenances and items related to the work and not included in the other bid items. The bid price shall also include any supplemental geotechnical engineering Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B the Contractor chooses to perform the supplement the Geotechnical report included in the specifications. B. SUPPORTING ITEMS 1. Bid Item B1 – Mobilization a. Payment for mobilization shall be at the unit cost bid per lump sum and shall be full compensation for those items noted above in Paragraph 1.02A.3.c.4. 2. Bid Item B2 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Erosion Control a. Payment for mobilization shall be at the unit cost bid per lump sum and shall be full compensation for preparation of the SWPPP by a registered engineer, submission of all forms for both the Town and the Contractor, posting of documentation, required inspections and reports, and adjustments to the SWPPP where required. It shall also include furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sediment control structures and procedures for the duration of the construction period, and the proper removal when no longer required. 3. Bid Item B3 – Site Preparation and Grading a. Payment shall be at the unit price bid per lump sum, and shall be full compensation for site grading, including all earthwork, clearing and grubbing, removal of trees and vegetation, excavation, cut and fill material, and compaction necessary to obtain the contours indicated on the plans for the tank site, entrance roads- construction and permanent access, and ditch work including any material hauling and disposal costs. No payment will be made for clearing and grubbing in the borrow or waste disposal areas, and all costs thereof shall be included in the appropriate bid price of the type of work involved. 4. Bid Item B4 – 8’ Tall Ornamental Iron Fence, with Personnel Access Gate, and Automatic Vehicular Access Sliding Gate a. Measurement shall be actual length of fence and gates installed, no greater than the length indicated on the plans, unless accepted by the Owner. Payment shall be at the unit price bid per linear foot for this item, and shall be full compensation for providing and installing all fence materials, mow strip, posts, gates, post and column embedment, access stand and all other appurtenances, post and gate design drawing preparation, and items related to the work. 5. Bid Item B5 – Ornamental Stone Fence Columns a. Payment will be made at the price bid per each column and shall be full compensation for column design and drawing preparation, and supplying all labor, equipment and incidentals for installing all precast columns, deep foundations, column embedment, connections to fence, finishing and all other appurtenances and items related to the work per Contract Documents. 6. Bid Item B6 – 8’ Tall Board on Board Wood Fence a. Measurement shall be actual length of fence installed, no greater than the length indicated on the plans, unless accepted by the Owner. Payment shall be at the unit price bid per linear foot for this item, and shall be full compensation for removing and disposing existing fencing in entirety, and providing and installing all new fence Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B materials, posts, post and column embedment, mow strip, and all other appurtenances and items related to the work. 7. Bid Item B7 – 24” Ductile Iron (Class 300) Waterline, Fittings, Adapters, and Appurtenances a. The waterline shall be measured horizontally from center of fitting to center of fitting or end of pipe without any deduction for the length of intermediate fittings, specials or valves. The pipe shown on the plans shall be the basis of payment. Payment shall not be made for a different class unless the Owner approves a different class. Payment made at the unit price bid per linear foot shall include furnishing, hauling and laying of pipe shown on the plans, thrust blocking, restraints and megalugs, fittings, specials, and appurtenances, all adapters, pumping where necessary; trench excavation, and backfilling, including embedment material as specified, replacement of top soil, protecting or replacing existing structures or utilities, disinfection, testing, disposal of surplus materials, cleaning up and maintenance, any incidental work and materials not otherwise provided for these specifications, all in strict accordance with the plans and specifications. Payment for the waterline shall include any and all extra precautions or construction requirements necessary to adequately protect and support existing utilities. Payment for the waterline shall also include costs to field verify and note existing subsurface utilities in the areas affected by and under Construction whether shown on Drawings or not. Payment for the waterline shall include all costs required to have utility companies repair any damage inflicted to their lines by the Contractor and any cleanup, property damages, fines, etc. resulting from damage inflicted to any utility line by the Contractor. 8. Bi Item B8 - Connect to Existing 20” Waterline (DR18 PVC) a. Connection to existing water line shall be measured per each connection complete in place. Payment for connection to the existing water line shall be at the unit price bid for each connection. Payment shall be full compensation for providing one tapping sleeve or cutting in new Tee per Drawings, remove and make connections to existing lines, and install all pipe, fittings, valves, and coordinate waterline shutdowns, disinfection, testing, and all other items necessary to complete the work. Bid price for this item shall include all coordination, temporary blocking and restraint, adaptors, specials, and fittings to make the connection at any time during the elevated tank construction contract. 9. Bid Item B9 – 20” Butterfly Valve Assemblies a. 20” butterfly valves shall be measured by the number of units complete in place. Payment for butterfly valves shall be at the unit price per each valve assembly and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing butterfly valves per the Contract Documents; including all appurtenances, access outlets on main line, shut- off valves, reinforced concrete supports, reinforced concrete pads, valve boxes, riser piping, operators, stems and extensions, backfill and all other items required for complete installation. Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 8 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 10. Bid Item B10 – 24” Butterfly Valve Assemblies a. 24” butterfly valves shall be measured by the number of units complete in place. Payment for butterfly valves shall be at the unit price per each valve assembly and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing butterfly valves per the Contract Documents; including all appurtenances, access outlets on main line, shut- off valves, reinforced concrete supports, reinforced concrete pads, valve boxes, riser piping, operators, stems and extensions, backfill and all other items required for complete installation. 11. Bid Item B11 – 36” Steel Casing by Open Cut a. Payment for the 36” casing by open cut shall be made at the unit price bid per linear foot for the crossings identified in the Contract Drawings and as Specified. Payment for crossings shall include all costs required to install the casing and all other items for the casing as shown on the Contract Drawings and required for installation. Payment for the carrier pipe inside the casing is not included in this bit item. 12. Bid Item B12 – 36” Steel Casing by Bore a. Payment for the 36” casing by bore shall be made at the unit price bid per linear foot for the crossings by bore method identified in the Contract Drawings and as Specified. Payment for crossings shall include all costs required to install the casing by bore and all other items for the casing as shown on the Contract Drawings and required for installation. Payment for the carrier pipe inside the casing is not included in this bit item. 13. Bid Item B13 – Trench Safety a. Payment for trench safety shall be made at the price bid per linear foot for this item shall be full compensation for trench safety as outlined in the Specifications. The Contractor shall determine the amount of trench safety required for his means and methods of construction and fill in his quantity and price accordingly. Partial payment for trench safety shall be based on the total amount of trench safety installed. 14. Bid Item B14 – Fire Hydrant Assembly a. Measurement for fire hydrant assemblies shall be per each installed complete and in place. Payment for fire hydrant assemblies shall be made at the unit price bid per each and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing fire hydrant assemblies as indicated in the Contract Documents, including all trenching, pipe, pipe placement, 6” isolation gate valves, valve boxes, concrete pads, embedment, backfill, connections to water main, bollards, and all other items required for installation. 15. Bid Item B15 – 12” Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) Culvert and Storm Drain a. Measurement for RCP culvert shall be per linear foot installed complete and in place. Payment for RCP culvert shall be made a the unit price per bid per linear foot and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing RCP pipe in trench along with excavation, embedment, backfill, compaction and grading, headwalls and wingwalls, joints and all other accessories required for installation. Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 9 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 16. Bid Item B16 – 8” Concrete Access Drive and Parking on Tank Site a. Payment for the 8” concrete access drive shall be at the unit cost bid per square yard at the depth specified on Contract Drawings and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing reinforced concrete pavement /drive including testing, grading, subgrade preparation, special backfill, temporary backfill, forms, geogrid, flexbase, grading, rebar, pour and finishing and all other items complete in place installed per the project plans and specifications. This bid item shall include all costs for labor, material, and coordination to cut-in, repair, or transition to the other proposed pavements and grading on site. 17. Bid Item B17 – Gravel Access Road a. Payment for the gravel drive shall be at the unit cost bid per square yard and shall be full compensation for subgrade preparation complete with excavation, backfill, compaction and grading, geogrid placement, and gravel drive installation per the project plans and specification. This bid item shall include all costs of labor, material, and coordination to cut-in, repair, or transition to the other proposed pavements and grading on site. 18. Bid Item B18 – Concrete Apron a. Payment for the concrete apron shall be at the unit cost bid per square yard and shall be full compensation for subgrade preparation and concrete pavement (described above) installed per project plans and specification. This bid item shall include all the costs of labor, material and coordination to cut-in, repair, or transition to the other proposed roads, pavements and grading on site, and transition to existing pavement at the entry to the site. 19. Bid Item B-19 – Concrete Sidewalks and Walkways a. Payment for concrete sidewalks shall be made at the unit price bid per square yard at depth shown in the Contract Drawings and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing concrete sidewalk and access walkways, including concrete, reinforcing, formwork, subgrade preparation, lime stabilization or recommended earthwork (excavation and compacted fill), grading and all other items required. 20. Bid Item B20 – Hydromulch Seeding a. Payment for hydromulch shall be at the unit cost bid per square yard installed and shall be full compensation for hydromulch installed per the project plans and specifications and in all areas disturbed by construction. Payment shall include labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install the hydromulch, care for, and maintain the areas hydromulched until grass is established. Areas disturbed outside those indicated will not be measured but are required to be restored and hydromulched under the price bid for this item 21. Bit Item B21 – Block Sodding a. Payment for block sod shall be per square yard, and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing a warm season sod, topsoil, fertilizer and watering until grass roots become established as indicated by the Owner, and all other appurtenant work required, complete in place. Block sod shall be used in areas as Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 10 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B indicated on the Contract Documents. Replaced sod shall match existing sod in area where disturbed. 22. Bid Item B22 – Trees and Planting a. Payment for planting shall be at the lump sum cost bid for landscaping and planting the trees and vegetation installed per project plans and specifications. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to plant and care for the new landscaping indicated on the Contract Drawings, including trees, excavation, planting, topsoil backfill, mulch, fertilizer, watering, pruning, restoration and all other items necessary for this work. Payment will only be made for landscaping of the size and type indicated, and that are healthy and in good condition at final completion at the EST site. 23. Bid Item B23 – Landscape Irrigation System a. Payment for the landscape irrigation system shall be at the lump sum cost bid and shall be full compensation for the design and installation of the system per the project plans and specifications. Price shall include skilled labor, materials, and equipment for a complete operable irrigation system as specified, and as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Provide Irrigation system to fully irrigate all turf, shrubs and trees. 24. Bid Item B24 – Rock Rip Rap a. Payment for rock riprap shall be at the unit cost bid per square yard and shall be full compensation for grouted rock riprap and toe walls placed in accordance with the details and dimension shown on the plans, or established by the Engineer, or as specified in TxDOT 432.4 and Town Standards. 25. Bid Item B25 – Flowable Fill Encasement a. Measurement for flowable fill encasement shall be per linear foot of flowable fill encasement installed as detailed in the Contract Drawings for areas indicated in the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Payment for flowable fill encasement shall be made at the unit price bid per linear foot and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing the flowable fill encasement to the trench dimensions shown in the Contract Drawings. No additional payment will be made for additional flowable fill encasement quantities resulting from over- excavated trenches. 26. Bid Item B-26 – Project Signs a. Project sign shall be measured by the number of units complete in place. Payment for project signs shall be at the unit price per each and shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to provide the project logo and signage in accordance with the Contract Documents and regulatory requirements. 27. Bid Item B-27 – Utility Markers a. Measurement and Payment shall be per number of units complete in place. Payment for markers shall be at the unit price per each and shall include material and labor as necessary to provide utility markers at pipeline, hydrants, and valves as required by the Owner’s ordinances Contract documents. Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 11 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 28. Bid Item B-28 – Traffic Control Plan and Execution a. Measurement and Payment shall be based on a complete traffic control plan designed and executed during the Construction period. Payment for traffic control plan shall include a proper design of traffic control suitable for the thoroughfare affected by Construction activity, and provisions of labor, materials and equipment to execute the plan including barricades, flags, signage, traffic cones, blocks, lighting and all other accessories for an effective and functional traffic plan. 29. Bid Item B29 – Tank and Site Electrical Payment made at the lump sum price bid shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and installation of all electrical and lighting on the tank site and tank structure (exterior and interior), including coordination with the electrical utility company for establishment of permanent power to site, connections to the utility and the site appurtenances, transformers, appurtenances, conduits, duct banks, conductors, cables and cable trays/raceways for instrumentation and power, panels and panelboards, switches, contactors, lights/light fixtures and poles, supports and attachments, obstruction lights and control panels, automatic gate/entry system with key pad and loop detection, tank instruments, coordination with controls and instrumentation, grounding, lightning protection, heat trace systems, manholes, testing, start-up, and all other miscellaneous items and accessories related to the work. 30. Bid Item B30 – SCADA System (Supplied By Others) a. Payment made at the lump sum price provided in the bid proposal and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and installation of the items indicated, including specific instrumentation equipment per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall install SCADA panels, PLC, UPS system, radio and antenna equipment supplied by/acquired from the Town’s SCADA equipment supplier and system integrator – D&H Automation, as shown on Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall obtain and include the cost to furnish SCADA equipment, perform system integration, and programming from D&H Automation and include in the bid proposal. 3.00 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 4.00 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 12 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT LANK Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish equipment, manpower, products, and other items necessary to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality and within the Contract time. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. B. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. C. Provide labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. D. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth as required in Section 01 57 00 “Temporary Controls.” F. Cost for Project Management and Coordination as described in this section are to be included in the Contract Price. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents as determined by the Engineer and Owner. B. Remove defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the Engineer to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark the Work as "defective" until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” 1. Provide copies of Supplier’s printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. Maintain one copy of these documents at the Site until the Project is complete. Incorporate this information into submittals. 2. Incorporate field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the Contractor in Record Drawings. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Perform Work to comply with local, State and Federal ordinances and regulations. B. Provide materials and equipment that has National Science Foundation 60/61 approval for use in potable water supply systems. Advise the Engineer of any material requirements in Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B these Contract Documents that conflict with National Science Foundation 60/61requirements. 1.05 PERMITS A. Obtain a building permit for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Building permit fees will be waived by the Owner. B. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license, including additional insurance requirements. C. Obtain and pay for all other necessary permits including any and all necessary highway, street and road permits for transporting pipe and/or heavy equipment necessary for construction of the Project. D. Obtain and pay for other permits necessary to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. 1.06 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Assume sole responsibility for safety at the Site. Protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide and maintain barricades, guard rails, covered walkways, and other protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other regulatory agencies in performing Work. D. Cooperate with accident investigations related to the Site. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, if requested by the Owner, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death on the Site to the Engineer as Record Data per Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work of various trades having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing equipment in service. B. Coordinate requests for substitutions to provide compatibility of space, operating elements, effect on the Work of other trades, and on the Work scheduled for early completion. C. Coordinate the use of Project space and the sequence of installation of equipment, elevators, walks, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, or other Work that is indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. 1. Follow routings shown for tubes, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other items as closely as practical, with due allowance for available physical space. 2. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for Owner’s maintenance and repairs. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Schematics are diagrammatic in nature. Adjust routing of piping, ductwork, utilities, and location of equipment as/if needed to resolve spatial conflicts between the various trades. Document the actual routing accurately on the Record Drawings. D. Conceal ducts, pipes, wiring, and other non-finish items in finished areas, except as otherwise shown. Coordinate locations of concealed items with finish elements. E. Coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plans the exact location and dimensioning of items which occur within hung ceilings. Request clarification from the Engineer prior to proceeding with fabrication or installation if a conflict exists. F. Schedule construction activities in sequence required to obtain best results where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation. G. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation, including: 1. Accepted alternates. 2. Installation of products purchased with allowances. 3. Work by others. 4. Owner-supplied, Contractor-installed items. H. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical, electrical, and other systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical and electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in cast- in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Install systems, materials, and equipment as permitted by codes to provide the maximum headroom possible where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned. 6. Coordinate the connection of systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with the requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to the greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Adjust routing of piping, ductwork, utilities, and location of equipment as needed to resolve spatial conflicts between the various trades. Document changes in the indicated routings on the Record Drawings. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. As much as practical, connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. 10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 1.08 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. Coordinate the use of the premises with the Engineer. B. Repair or correct any damage to existing facilities, including contamination, caused by the Contractor’s personnel, visitors, materials, or equipment. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures as discussed in Section 01 57 00 “Temporary Controls.” E. Park employees’ vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner’s property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped or soiled clothing to be worn on the project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons permanently and immediately from the Site. 1.09 ACCESS TO THE SITE A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe temporary walks or other structures to allow access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. D.Use State, County, or City roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. State, County, or City roadways may not all be approved for construction traffic. Obtain written approval to use State, County, City or private roads to deliver pipe and/or heavy equipment to the Site. Copies of the written approvals must be furnished to the Owner as Record Data before Work begins. No additional compensation will be paid because the Contractor is unable to gain access to the easement from public roadways. 1.10 PROPERTY PROVISIONS A. Make adequate provisions to maintain the flow of storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drains and water courses encountered during the construction. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not curtailed. Restore structures which may have been disturbed during construction to their original position as soon as construction in the area is completed. B. Protect trees, fences, signs, poles, guy wires, and all other property unless their removal is authorized. Restore any property damaged to equal or better condition per Paragraph 1.11 of this Section. 1.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report these to the Engineer before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action per Section 01 35 00 “Special Procedures.” Coordinate Work with Contractor, local utility company and others. Include cost of demolition and replacement, restoration or relocation of these structures in the Cost of Work. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damage to items to be protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer, utility owner and Owner without additional compensation from the Owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Engineer. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines or other obstructions. Include the cost of relocation and permits required to move existing utilities in the Cost of Work. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the site. 1. Visit the Site with Engineer to identify trees that may be removed during construction. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. F. Protect buildings from damage when handling material or equipment. Protect finished surfaces, including floors, doors, and jambs. Remove doors and install temporary wood protective coverings over jambs. 1.12 DISRUPTION TO SERVICES / CONTINUED OPERATIONS A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner or utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services shall be kept to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves, operators, or electrical panels. 2. Do not store material or products inside structures. 3. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 4. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action in accordance with Section 01 35 00 “Special Procedures” if facilities must be taken out of operation. 1.13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Perform complete field measurements for products required to fit existing conditions prior to purchasing products or beginning construction. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Verify pipe class, equipment capacities, existing electrical systems and power sources for existing conditions. D. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. E. Include field measurements in Record Drawings as required in Section 01 31 13 “Project Coordination.” 1.14 REFERENCE DATA AND CONTROL POINTS A. The Engineer will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. 3. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Do not change or relocate points without prior Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B approval of the Engineer. Notify Engineer when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms, tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record data and measurements per standards. 1.15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Deliver products that are too large to fit through openings to the Site in advance of the time enclosing walls and roofs are erected. Set in place, raised above floor on cribs. D. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. E. Store products at locations acceptable to the Engineer and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. F. Store products in accordance with the Supplier’s storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. Arrange storage to allow access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. G. Obtain and pay for the use of any additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier’s instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. H. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. I. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 8 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Cover products subject to dislocation or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. J. Protect and maintain mechanical and electrical equipment in storage. 1. Provide Supplier’s service instructions on the exterior of the package. 2. Service equipment on a regular basis as recommended by the Supplier. Maintain a log of maintenance services. Submit the log as Record Data at the completion of the Project. 3. Provide power to and energize space heaters for all equipment for which these devices are provided. 4. Provide temporary enclosures for all electrical equipment, including electrical systems on mechanical devices. Provide and maintain heat in the enclosures until equipment is energized. K. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements. 2. Supplier’s required environmental conditions are continually maintained. 3. Surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected. L. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. M. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 1.16 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 9 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti-pollution laws. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private dumping areas. 1.17 MAINTENANCE OF ROADS, DRIVEWAYS, AND ACCESS A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicle during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Submit a written request for Owner’s approval of a street closing. The request shall state: 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. 4. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction, with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. C. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 1.18 BLASTING A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 1.19 ARCHAEOLOGICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if an historical or archaeological find is made during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological Sites have been identified at the Site. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the Owner, Texas Water Development Board and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb Archaeological Sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit Archaeological Work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 10 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract time will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation shall be paid for delays. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching required to complete the Work or to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of new Work or the correction of defective Work. 2. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing Work. 3. Uncover Work that has been covered prior to observation by the Engineer. B. Submit written notification to the Engineer in advance of performing any cutting which affects: 1. Work of any other Contractor or the Owner. 2. Structural integrity of any structure or system of the project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather exposed or moisture resistant structure or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of any structure or system. 5. Appearance of any structure or surfaces exposed occasionally or constantly to view. C. The notification shall include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Reason for cutting, alteration, or excavation. 4. Effect on the Work of any separate contractor or Owner. 5. Effect on the structural or weatherproof integrity of the project. 6. Description of proposed Work, including: a. Scope of cutting, patching, or alteration. b. Trades that will perform the Work. c. Products proposed for use. d. Extent of refinishing to be performed. e. Cost proposal, when applicable. 7. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 8. Written authorization from any separate Contractor whose Work would be affected. 9. Date and time Work will be uncovered or altered. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 11 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Examine the existing conditions, including structures subject to damage or to movement during cutting or patching. 1. Inspect conditions affecting installation of products or performance of the Work after uncovering the Work. 2. Provide a written report of unacceptable or questionable conditions to the Engineer. The Contractor shall not proceed with Work until Engineer has provided further instructions. Beginning Work will constitute acceptance of existing conditions by the Contractor. E. Protect the structure and other parts of the Work and provide adequate support to maintain the structural integrity of the affected portions of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect adjacent Work and other portions of the Project from damage. Provide protection from the weather for portions of the Project that may be exposed by cutting and patching Work. F. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other Work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. G. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. H. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to, the removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the modified Work. I. Restore Work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed Work per the Contract Documents. J. Fit Work air-tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through the surfaces. Where fire rated separations are penetrated, fill the space around the pipe or insert with materials with physical characteristics equivalent to fire resistance requirements of penetrated surface. K. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new products specified for the original installation. L. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to the nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 1.21 PRELIMINARY OCCUPANCY A. Owner may deliver, install and connect equipment, furnishings, or other apparatus in buildings or other structures. These actions do not indicate acceptance of any part of the building or structure and does not affect the start of warranties or correction periods. B. Protect the Owner’s property after installation is complete. C. Owner or Engineer may use any product for testing or determine that the product meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. This use does not constitute acceptance by either Attachment 3Item 12 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 12 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B the Owner or Engineer. These actions do not indicate acceptance of any part of the product and does not affect the start of warranties or correction periods. 1.22 INITIAL MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION A. Maintain equipment until the Project is accepted by the Owner. Ensure that mechanical equipment is properly maintained as recommended by the Supplier. B. Do not operate air handling equipment unless filters are in place and are clean. Change filters weekly during construction. C. Provide maintenance and start-up services prior to acceptance of equipment, per Section 01 75 00 “Starting and Adjusting.” D. Remove and clean screens and strainers in piping systems. E. Clean insects from intake louver screens. F. Provide documentation of maintenance and operations when Owner takes over operation and control of the Project. 1.23 ENDANGERED SPECIES RESOURCES A. No activity is authorized that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. If a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction, the Contractor shall immediately cease Work in the area of the encounter and notify the Owner, who will immediately implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. These actions shall include reporting the encounter to the Texas Water Development Board, the U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service, and the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department, obtaining any necessary approvals or permits to enable the Work to continue, or implement other mitigative actions. The Contractor shall not resume construction in the area of the encounter until authorized to do so by the Owner. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials in accordance with the requirements of the individual Sections. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE OF WORK A. Perform the Work per the Supplier’s published instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically exempted or modified by Field Order. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Administer contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the Engineer or Owner. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” 1.03 COMMUNICATION DURING THE PROJECT A. The Engineer is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this project. B. The Engineer will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Submittals, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The Engineer will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the Engineer at the address indicated at the Pre- construction Conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. E. Submit communications on the forms referenced in this Section or in Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” 1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Pre-construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the Engineer. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the Engineer but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The Owner, Engineer, Contractor’s project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Section 01 32 16 “Construction Progress Schedule.” b. Preliminary submittal schedule per Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” c. Schedule of values and anticipated schedule of payments per Section 01 29 00 “Payment Procedures.” d. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. e. Contractor’s organizational chart as it relates to this Project. f. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents, contract modifications and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the Engineer and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the Engineer to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. c. Contractor’s superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the Engineer of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the Engineer or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall project schedule. b. Contractor’s detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of submittals. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. Engineer will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies within ten days of the date of the meeting Attachment 3Item 12 Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the ten days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. A construction conference shall be held prior to the application of the interior coating system. The meeting will be onsite and will include the Owner, Contractor, painting superintendent, Engineer, Owner’s representative and Coating Manufacturer’s Representative. At this meeting the coating plan and schedule will be reviewed in detail. D. Pre-submittal and Pre-installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the Engineer (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph [1.07] for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. Engineer and Owner must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the Engineer and Owner for review. Owner and Engineer will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within ten days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the ten days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 1.05 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the Engineer to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided by the Engineer. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. Engineer will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will initiate a Contract Modification Request per Paragraph 1.08 if the RFI indicates that a contract modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in Accordance with Paragraph 1.06. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.06 PROJECT ISSUES LOG A.Engineer will maintain a project issues log to document key decisions made at meeting and track action on these issues: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the Engineer. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 1.04 to allow Engineer to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. B. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a contract modification as an action items if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Change Order or Field Order. 1.07 NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Notify the Engineer of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by Engineer or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow Owner and Engineer time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use “Notification by Contractor” form provided by the Engineer. 1.08 REQUESTS FOR MODIFICATIONS A. Submit a request to the Engineer for any change in the Contract Documents. 1. Use the “Contract Modification Request” (CMR) form provided by the Engineer. 2. Assign a number to the Contract Modification Request when issued. 3. Include with the Contract Modification Request: a. A complete description of the proposed modification. b. The reason the modification is requested. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change (necessary only if the modification requires a change in contract amount). The itemized breakdown is to include: 1). List of materials and equipment to be installed. 2). Man hours for labor by classification. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3). Equipment used in construction. 4).Consumable supplies, fuels, and materials. 5). Royalties and patent fees. 6). Bonds and insurance. 7). Overhead and profit. 8). Field office costs. 9). Home office cost. 10).Other items of cost. d. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Provide a revised schedule indicating the effect on the critical path for the Project and a statement of the number of days the Project may be delayed by the modification. 4. Submit a Contract Modification Request to the Engineer to request a field change. 5. A Contract Modification Request is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. 6. Engineer will evaluate the request for a contract modification. B. Owner will initiate changes through the Engineer. 1. Engineer will prepare a description of proposed modifications to the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer will use the Contract Modification Request form. Engineer will assign a number to the Contract Modification Request when issued. 3. Return the Contract Modification Request with a proposal to incorporate the requested change. Include a breakdown of costs into materials and labor in detail outline above to allow evaluation by the Engineer. C. Engineer will issue a Field Order or a Change Order per the General Conditions if a contract modification is appropriate. 1. Modifications to the contract can only be made by a Field Order or a Change Order. 2. Changes in the Project will be documented by a Field Order or by a Change Order. 3. Field Orders may be issued by the Engineer for contract modifications that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Time. 4. Any modifications that require a change in Contract Price or Contract Time can only be approved by Change Order. a. Proposals issued by the Contractor in response to a Contract Modification Request will be evaluated by the Engineer. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. If a Change Order is recommended, the Engineer will prepare the Change Order. c.The Change Order will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. d. Change Orders can only be approved by the Owner. 1). Work performed on the proposed contract modifications prior to the approval of the Change Order will be performed at the Contractor’s risk. 2). No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders until approved by the Owner. D. The Contractor may be informed that the Contract Modification Request is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.09 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain at the site one complete record copy of: 1. Drawings in Paper and Electronic (PDF) Formats. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Contract modifications. 5. Approved Shop Drawings and record data. 6. One set of construction photographs. 7. Test records. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store documents and Samples in the Contractor’s field office. 1. Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. Do not use these documents for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the Engineer and Owner. C. Marking Drawings: 1. Label each document as “Project Record” in large printed letters. 2. Record information as construction is being performed. a. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. b. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: Attachment 3Item 12 Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1). Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. 2). Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. 3). Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction. Refer measurements to permanent structure on the surface. Include the following equipment: a). Piping. b). Ductwork. c). Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. d). Valves, unions, traps, and tanks. e). Services entrance. f). Feeders. g). Outlets. 4). Changes of dimension and detail. 5). Changes made by Field Order and Change Order. 6). Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 7). Including the issued RFI responses; change, modifications and clarification memos are not acceptable in lieu of as-built Drawing markups by Contractor. c. Mark Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided. 1). Record product name, trade name, catalog number, and each Supplier (with address and phone number) of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2). Record changes made by Field Order and Change Order. d. Mark additional Work or information in erasable pencil. 1). Use red for new or revised indication. 2). Use purple for Work deleted or not installed (lines to be removed). 3). Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in yellow. e. Submit record documents to Engineer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to final completion of the Project. 1). Provide one set of marked up Drawings in paper and electronic (PDF) formats. 2). Provide six sets of Specifications. D. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if record documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete record documents. Attachment 3Item 12 Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 8 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Forms 01 31 13.13 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 31 13.13 FORMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT FORMS A. Use the forms provided in this Section for contract administration, submittals and documentation of test results. A disk with these forms in Microsoft Word or Excel will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. Forms included are listed below: B. Contract Administration Forms: 1. Request for Information. 2. Notification by Contractor. 3. Contractor’s Modification Request. C. Payment Request Forms: 1. Consent of Surety Company to Payment Procedures. 2. Payment Request forms. D. Submittal Forms: 1. Submittal transmittal. 2. Shop Drawing Deviation Request. 3. Concrete Mix Design: a. Attachment “A” – Basis for Mix Design – Field Strength Test Record. b. Attachment “B” – Basis for Mix Design – Trial Mixture. E. Testing Forms: 1. Pipeline Test Report Exfiltration Test Report. 2. Pressure Pipe Test Report. 3. Protective Coatings Test Reports. F. Valves and Equipment Installation and Documentation Forms: 1. Equipment Installation Reports. 2. O&M Manual Review Report. G. Project Closeout Forms: 1. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment. 2. Consent of Surety Company to Reduction of or Partial Release of Retainage. 3. Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. 4. Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor the work progress, to anticipate the time and amount of progress payments, and to relate submittal processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of submittals and the dates when submittals must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Take into consideration when preparing schedule the requirements of Section 01 35 00 “Special Procedures.” 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit progress schedules in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” Submit schedules within the following times: 1. Preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. 2. Detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. B. Submit Progress Schedules with requests for partial payment. Schedules may be used to evaluate the requests for partial payment. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of progress payments. 1.03 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work. 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers. 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work. 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract and project schedule. 5. Assist the Owner in review of Contractor's monthly payment requests. B. Provide personnel with 5 years’ minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: Attachment 3Item 12 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2.Require that detailed plans for the execution of the Work be prepared in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish inter-relationships of significant planned work activities and provide a logical sequence of interdependence of planned work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit preparation of new schedules when an existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. The schedule is to be accompanied by a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work. 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work. 4. The activity start and stop dates. 5. The activity duration. 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity. Group related activities or use lines to indicate relationships. 7. A clearly indicated critical path. Indicate only one critical path on the schedule. The subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path where several subsystem each have a critical path. Float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. E. Submit a separate submittal schedule indicating the dates when the submittals are to be sent to the Engineer. 1. List specific dates submittal is to be sent to the Engineer. 2. List specific dates submittal must be processed in order to meet the proposed schedule. 3. Allow a reasonable time to review submittals, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the submittal, the submission of other submittals, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of the submittals for each item. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous submittals and for time lost when submittals are submitted for products that do not meet specification requirements. F. Update the schedule at the end of each monthly partial payment period to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Attachment 3Item 12 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.04 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A.Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule. c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in contract time approved by Change Order. 1. Revised schedule is to be included with Contract Modification Request and in response to Proposed Contract Modifications by the Owner and Engineer for which an extension of time is requested. 2. Failure to submit a revised schedule indicates that the modification shall have no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project on time and that the cost associated with the change of additional plant or work force have been included in the cost proposed for the modification. C. Updating the project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the project schedule. D. Payment estimates may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractors plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 1.05 FLOAT TIME A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract time cannot be changed by the submission of this schedule. Contract time can only be modified by approved Change Order. E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the contract completion date is to be indicated as float time. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Video and Photographic Documentation 01 32 34 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 32 34 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way) including but not limited to streets, curb and gutter, utilities, driveways, fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the Construction Manager before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the Construction Manager if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the Construction Manager to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit photographic documentation as record data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as record data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” Attachment 3Item 12 Video and Photographic Documentation 01 32 34 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the Owner. C. Provide a digital copy on a DVD of the photographs taken. 2.02 VIDEO RECORDING A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area (100-foot maximum interval). F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. I. Pump Stations, Ground Storage tanks, water treatment plants and other Site components shall be video recorded in an organized sequential order with major components identified. J. Submit DVD in a hard plastic case, clearly label the date(s) the DVD was made, the project name and Owner’s project number. If more than one DVD then indicate number as 1 of 2, 2 of 2, etc. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the Owner and Engineer to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner. 2. Provide information for operation and maintenance of the Project. 3. Provide information for the administration of the Contract. 4. Allow the Engineer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general, to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the Engineer’s review of submittals. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 1.02 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review and certify all submittals prior to submission. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction requirements. 3. Location of all existing structures, utilities and equipment related to the submittals. 4. Submittals are complete for their intended purpose. 5. Conflicts between the submittals related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. 6. Quantities and dimensions shown on the submittals. C. Submit information per the procedures described in this section and the Specifications. D. Furnish the following submittals: 1. As specified in the attached Submittal Schedule or as specified in the individual Specification Sections. 2. Schedules, data and other documentation as described in detail in this section or referenced in the General Conditions and Contract Documents. 3. Documentation required for the administration of the Contract per Section 01 31 13 “Project Coordination.” 4. Shop Drawings required for consideration of a contract modification per Paragraph 1.08. 5. Submittals as required in the Specifications. 6. Submittals not required will be returned without Engineer’s review. Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. Submit a schedule indicating the date submittals will be sent to the Engineer and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. Make submittals promptly in accordance with the schedule to cause no delay in the Project. 1. Send submittals to the Engineer allowing a reasonable time for delivery, review and marking submittals. Include time for review of a resubmission if necessary. Allow adequate time for the submittal review process, ordering, fabrication, and delivery of the product to not delay progress on the Project. 2. Schedule submittal to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. No review will be performed on submittals requiring coordination with other submittals. Engineer will return submittals for resubmission as a complete package. F. Submit information for all of the components and related equipment required for a complete and operational system in the same submittal. 1. Include electrical, mechanical, and other information required to indicate how the various components of the system function. 2. Provide certifications, warranties, and written guarantees with the submittal package for review when they are required. 3. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor’s risk. Products not meeting the requirements of Contract Documents are defective and may be rejected at the Owner’s option. G. Payment will not be made for products for which submittals are required until the submittals have been received. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Engineer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Submittals not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents including Drawings and Specifications as modified by Addenda, Field Orders, and Change Orders. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the submittal. 1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit an electronic copy of each submittal through the Project portal (website) provided by the Engineer. The Contractor will be provided access to log onto the website to post submittal documents and check the status of submittals. 1. The complete contents of each submittal, including associated drawings product data, etc., shall be submitted in Portable Document Format (PDF.) Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 papers. Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Create and submit color PDF documents where color is important to the evaluation of the submittal and / or where comments will be lost if only black and white PDF documents are provided. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 1.04.H. B. Transmit all submittals, with a properly completed Submittal Transmittal Form as provided by the Engineer. 1. Use a separate transmittal form for each specific product, class of material, and equipment system. 2. Submit items specified in different sections of the Specifications separately unless they are part of an integrated system. C. Assign a submittal number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the submittal during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator PR Payment Request Contractor CO Change Order Engineer CMR Contract Modification Request Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor EIR Equipment Installation Report Contractor FO Field Order Engineer NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor O&M Operation & Maintenance Manuals Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SAM Sample Contractor SD Shop Drawing and Product Data Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of submittal. 3.Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original submittal followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same submittal has been sent to the Engineer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents shop drawing number 25 and the letter “A” designates this is the second time this submittal has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the submittal number on each page or sheet of the submittal. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different submittal types are processed in different ways. Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Submit documents with uniform markings. 1.Mark submittals to: a. Highlight Contractor’s corrections in green. b. Highlight items pertinent to the products being furnished in yellow and delete items that are not when the Supplier’s standard drawings or information sheets are provided. c. Cloud items and highlight in yellow where selections by the Engineer or Owner are required. d. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. e. Provide an 8-by-3-inch blank space for Contractor’s and Engineer’s stamp. Contractor may use a digital certification if this is preferred. The certification must bear a digital signature. 2. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. E. Mark submittals to reference the Drawing number and applicable Section/s of the Specifications, detail designation, schedule or location that corresponds with the data submitted. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. F. Deliver Samples required by the Specifications to the Site. Provide a minimum of two Samples. G. Construct mock-ups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specifications. H. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture or finish selection. 1. Submit all color charts and Samples at one time. 2. Do not submit color charts and Samples until all record data have been submitted or Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 3. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the schedule for construction of the Project. I. Submit Contract Modification Request per Section 01 31 13 “Project Coordination” to request modifications to the Contract Documents. J. For non-electrical submittals, the number of copies of each submittal to be sent by the Contractor and the number of copies of each submittal to be returned are: Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Prefix Description No. of Copies Sent No. of Copies Returned PR Payment Request 4 1 O&M Final O&M Manuals 4 0 SAM Sample 2 0 K. Submit an electronic copy of each submittal to the Owner. The complete contents of each submittal, including associated drawings, Product Data, etc., shall be submitted in Adobe Acrobat PDF format, or other format approved by Engineer. 1.05 REVIEW PROCEDURES A. Shop drawings are reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor request that a different priority be assigned. B. Mark a submittal as “Priority” to place the review for this submittal ahead of submittals previously delivered. Priority submittals will be reviewed before other submittals for this Project which have been received but not reviewed. Use discretion in the use of “Priority” submittals as this may delay the review of submittals previously submitted. Revise the Schedule of Contractor’s Submittals for substantial deviations from the previous schedule. C. Review procedures vary with the type of submittal as described in Paragraph 1.06. 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. 1. Shop Drawings are requested so that the Engineer can: a. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures or other aesthetic features. b. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features so as to advise the Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. c. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified so as to advise the Owner that it appears that the product will meet the designed performance criteria. d. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Certify on the Contractor’s stamp that the Contractor has reviewed the Shop Drawings and made all necessary corrections such that the products, when installed, will be in full compliance with the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings submitted without this certification will be returned without review. 3. Submit Shop Drawings for: a. Products indicated in the submittal schedule following this section and as specified in the individual Specification Sections. Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. When a substitution or equal product is proposed in accordance with Paragraph 1.08 of this Section. 4. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished. Information is to include: a. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, model number, and operational parameters of the components. b. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required. c. Performance characteristics, capacities, engineering data, motor curves, and other information necessary to allow a complete evaluation of mechanical components. d. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers. e. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings. f. Wiring and piping diagrams and related controls. g. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project. h. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 5. Provide all required statements of certification, guarantees, extended service agreements, and other related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of these documents shall be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. 6. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Engineer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Engineer do not constitute a blanket review of the submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. a. Submittals that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following designations: 1). Approved: Submittal is found to be acceptable as submitted. 2). Approved as Noted: Submittal is acceptable with corrections or notations made by Engineer and may be used as corrected. 3). Revise and Resubmit: Submittal has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. 4). Not Approved: Products are not acceptable. b. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked “Approved as Noted” and “Revise and Resubmit.” These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the submittal. c. Dimensions or other data that do not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as “At Variance With” (AVW) the Contract Documents or other Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with Contract Documents. B. Certifications, Warranties and Service Agreements include documents as specified in the individual Specifications, as shown in the submittal schedule, or as follows: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications (refer to Section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements.”). 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Extended Warranty (EW): A guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the normal 1 year warranty described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. 4. Extended Service Agreement (ESA): A contract to provide maintenance beyond that required to fulfill requirements for warranty repairs, or to perform routine maintenance for a definite period beyond the warranty period. Issue the service agreement in the name of the Owner. 5. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product’s intended use. 6. Certification of Applicator/Subcontractor (CSQ): A certified letter stating that the Applicator or Subcontractor proposed to perform a specified function is duly designated as factory authorized and trained for the application of the specified product. C. Submit record data to provide information to allow the Owner to adequately identify the products incorporated into the Project and allow replacement or repair at some future date. 1. Provide record data for all products per the submittal schedule or as specified in the individual Specification Sections. Record data is not required for items for which Shop Drawings and/or operations and maintenance manuals are required. 2. Provide information only on the specified products. Submit a Contract Modification Request for approval of deviations or substitutions and obtain approval by Field Order or Change Order prior to submitting record data. 3. Provide the same information required for Shop Drawings. 4. Record data will be received by the Engineer, logged, and provided to Owner for the Project record. a. Record data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Inadequate drawings may be returned as unacceptable. Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 8 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. Record data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. D. Provide Samples for comparison with products delivered to the Site for use on the Project. 1. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 3. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved, and disposal is requested by the Engineer. At Owner’s option Samples will become the property of the Owner. E. Construct mock-ups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mock-ups of the size or area indicated in the detailed Specifications. 2. Construct mock-ups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 3. Protect mock-ups until Work has been completed and accepted by the Owner. 4. Dispose of mock-ups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Engineer. F. Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals (O&M) for all equipment, mechanical devices, or components described in the Contract Documents per Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data.” Include copies of final approved Shop Drawings reflecting as-built data in the manual. G. Submit Request for Information (RFI) in accordance with Section 01 31 13 “Project Coordination.” H. Submit a Schedule of Values and Payment Request (PR) in accordance with Section 01 29 00 “Payment Procedures.” I. Submit Progress Schedules (SCH) in accordance with Section 01 32 16 “Construction Progress Schedule.” J. Submit Certified Test Reports (CTR) from independent testing laboratories in accordance with Section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements.” 1. Submit test reports for material fabricated for this Project with Shop Drawings for that product. 2. Submit test reports produced at the point of production for standard production products with the record data for that product. K. Submit a list of Suppliers and Subcontractors as record data in accordance with Section 01 31 13 “Project Coordination.” L. Submit Equipment Installation Reports (EIR) in accordance with Section 01 75 00 “Starting and Adjusting.” M. Submit Notifications by Contractor (NBC) in accordance with Section 01 31 13 “Project Coordination.” Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 9 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B N. Submit Photographic Documentation (PD) in accordance with Section 01 32 34 “Video and Photographic Documentation.” O. Submit Process Performance Bonds (PPB) in accordance with Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions” and the detailed equipment specifications. 1.07 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT A. Furnish the following Submittals: 1. Products as indicated in Section 01 33 00.01 “Table of Required Submittals.” 2. When a substitution or equal product is proposed in accordance with Paragraph 1.08, 1.09, and 1.10 of this Section. 1.08 REQUESTS FOR DEVIATION A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit request by Contract Modification Request (CMR) per Section 01 31 13 “Project Coordination.” Identify the deviations and the reason the change is requested. C. Include the amount of cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. A Change Order or Field Order will be issued by the Engineer for deviations approved by the Owner. Deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 1.09 SUBMITTALS FOR EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS A. The products of the listed suppliers are to be furnished where detailed specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list “or equal” or “or approved equal” products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution and must be approved prior to submittals per Paragraph 1.09 and 1.10. Substitution requests for such will not be considered during the submittal review phase. B. Contractor may submit other manufacturers’ products that are in full compliance with the specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase “or equal” or “or approved equal.” 1. Submit Shop Drawings of adequate detail to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the Engineer’s responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer’s published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the submittal. c. The decision of the Engineer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. Engineer will consider proposed ease of function, aesthetic qualities, materials Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 10 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B of manufacture, past performance history of the product and manufacturer, quality of manufacture, and any other factors as he may in his sole opinion consider relevant in examining proposed alternatives as equals. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 4. A modification request is not required for any product that is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.10 SUBMITTALS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. B. Submit the following for consideration of approval of a Supplier or product which is not specified: 1. Contract Modification Request (CMR) for deviation from the Contract Documents per Paragraph 1.08. 2. Unless substitutions are approved prior to the bid opening, in accordance with the directions given in the Instructions to Bidders, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to supply documentation as to the cost of the specified alternate and the proposed substituted alternate. In the event that the Contractor chooses to use a more expensive material and/or method, and said material or method is approved, any additional costs will be borne exclusively by the Contractor. In the event that a less expensive alternate is chosen and approved, the City reserves the right to require that a change order be issued, reducing the overall costs of the contract by an amount equal to 50% of the calculated, provable difference in costs between the two alternates. Suitable documentation shall include written estimates, invoices and other approved documents. 3. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Engineer’s responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 11 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the submittal. c. The decision of the Engineer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. Engineer will consider proposed ease of function, aesthetic qualities, materials of manufacture, past performance history of the product and manufacturer, quality of manufacture, and nay other factors he may in his sole opinion consider relevant in examining proposed alternatives and substitutions. 4. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request, the Contractor: a. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. b. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the Manufacturer of the specified product. c. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. d. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. C. Pay engineering cost for review of substitutions. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual hours required for the review and marking of Shop Drawings by Engineer and in accordance with the rates listed in Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions.” 2. Cost for the additional review shall be paid to the Owner by the Contractor on a monthly basis. 1.11 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Submit warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents with the Shop Drawings or record data. B. Provide additional copies for equipment and include this additional copy in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data.” C. Provide a separate manual for warranties and guarantees. 1. Provide a log of all products for which warranties or guarantees are provided, and for all equipment. Index the log by Specification section number on forms provided by the Engineer. 2. Indicate the start date, warranty or guarantee period and the date upon which the warranty or guarantee expires for products or equipment for which a warranty or guarantee is required. 3. Indicate the date for the start of the correction period specified in the General Conditions for each piece of equipment and the date on which the specified correction period expires. 4. Provide a copy of the warranty or guarantee under a tab indexed to the log. Attachment 3Item 12 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 12 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A.Make all corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Engineer and resubmit until approved. B. For Shop Drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original submittal. 2. Highlight in yellow those revisions which have been made in response to the first review by the Engineer. 3. Highlight in blue any new revisions which have been made or additional details of information that has been added since the previous review by the Engineer. C. For Samples: 1. Submit new Samples as required for the initial Sample. 2. Remove Samples which have been rejected. D. For mock-ups: 1. Construct a new mock-up as initially required. 2. Dispose of mock-ups which have been rejected. E. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual hours required for the review and marking of Shop Drawings by Engineer and in accordance with the rates listed in Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions.” 3. Pay cost for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis as billed by the Owner. 4. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Engineer’s review of submittals, will not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract Time. All costs associated with such delays shall be at the Contractor’s expense. 1.13 ENGINEER’S DUTIES A. Review the submittals and return with reasonable promptness. B. Affix stamp, indicate approval, rejection, and the need for resubmittal. C. Distribute documents. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Table of Required Submittals 01 33 00.01 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 33 00.01 TABLE OF REQUIRED SUBMITTALS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS A. The following tabulation list the submittals required for each Submittal Section. Each Specification section may provide more detailed information regarding the data to be provided for each product, materials, equipment or component required by the specification. Provide additional documentation as required by the Contract Documents in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures”, 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data”, and each Specification section, and as reasonably requested by the Owner, Construction Manager and Engineer. B. In addition to the schedule below submit all information required by the individual Specification Sections; Submit materials, shop drawings, and product data sheets as required for the installations in accordance with the specifications on Drawings and Details. C. Incorporate each submittal in the Construction Schedule and Indicate the date each submittal is anticipated to be submitted. Contractor shall provide monthly updates to the submittal schedule. Contractor shall also maintain a submittal log for tracking purpose. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) Attachment 3Item 12 Table of Required Submittals 01 33 00.01 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE Spec Number Description Sh o p D r a w i n g Sa m p l e Ce r t i f i e d T e s t R e p o r t Ce r t i f i c a t i o n o f L o c a l F i e l d S e r v i c e Ex t e n d e d W a r r a n t y Ex t e n d e d S e r v i c e A g r e e m e n t Ce r t i f i c a t e o f A d e q u a c y o f D e s i g n Ce r t i f i c a t i o n o f A p p l i c a t o r / S u b c o n t r a c t o r Re c o r d D a t a Op e r a t i o n a n d M a i n t e n a n c e M a n u a l s Eq u i p m e n t I n s t a l l a t i o n R e p o r t Pr o c e s s P e r f o r m a n c e B o n d 03 30 53 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete X X X 03 45 13 Faced Architectural Precast Concrete X X X X 09 95 00 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks X X X X X X 22 05 19 Meters & Gauges for Plumbing Piping X 22 10 00.01 Miscellaneous Piping and Appurtenances X X 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables X X X 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems X 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems X 26 05 33.01 Conduits X 26 05 33.03 Outlet Boxes X 26 05 33.04 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems X 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems X X X 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power System Studies X X X 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices Attachment 3Item 12 Table of Required Submittals 01 33 00.01 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE Spec Number Description Sh o p D r a w i n g Sa m p l e Ce r t i f i e d T e s t R e p o r t Ce r t i f i c a t i o n o f L o c a l F i e l d S e r v i c e Ex t e n d e d W a r r a n t y Ex t e n d e d S e r v i c e A g r e e m e n t Ce r t i f i c a t e o f A d e q u a c y o f D e s i g n Ce r t i f i c a t i o n o f A p p l i c a t o r / S u b c o n t r a c t o r Re c o r d D a t a Op e r a t i o n a n d M a i n t e n a n c e M a n u a l s Eq u i p m e n t I n s t a l l a t i o n R e p o r t Pr o c e s s P e r f o r m a n c e B o n d 26 24 16.02 Lighting and Branch Panelboards X X 26 27 26 Wiring Devices X 26 41 13 Lightning Protection for Structures X X X 26 50 00 Lighting X 31 05 13 Soils for Earthwork X 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 31 23 10 Structural Excavation and Backfill X 31 23 23.33 Flowable Fill X 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfill X 31 23 33.14 Trench Safety 31 32 13.19 Lime Soil Stabilization X 32 01 29 Rigid Paving Repair X X 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses X X 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving X X 32 13 13 Concrete Paving X X X Attachment 3Item 12 Table of Required Submittals 01 33 00.01 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE Spec Number Description Sh o p D r a w i n g Sa m p l e Ce r t i f i e d T e s t R e p o r t Ce r t i f i c a t i o n o f L o c a l F i e l d S e r v i c e Ex t e n d e d W a r r a n t y Ex t e n d e d S e r v i c e A g r e e m e n t Ce r t i f i c a t e o f A d e q u a c y o f D e s i g n Ce r t i f i c a t i o n o f A p p l i c a t o r / S u b c o n t r a c t o r Re c o r d D a t a Op e r a t i o n a n d M a i n t e n a n c e M a n u a l s Eq u i p m e n t I n s t a l l a t i o n R e p o r t Pr o c e s s P e r f o r m a n c e B o n d 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Gates X X X 32 84 23 Landscape Irrigation X X X X 32 91 19.13 Topsoil Placement and Grading 32 92 13 Hydro-Mulching X 33 05 01.02 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings X X X 33 05 01.07 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe X X 33 05 01.09 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings X X X 33 05 01.12 Sanitary Sewer Pipe (PVC)X 33 05 23.33 Pipeline Crossing [Hwys, Streets, and R.R.'s by Boring, Tunneling, or Open Cut]X X 33 10 13 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution X 33 12 16.13 Miscellaneous Valves X X X 33 12 16.23 Gate Valves X X X 33 12 16.26 Butterfly Valves X X X 33 12 19 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants X X X Attachment 3Item 12 Table of Required Submittals 01 33 00.01 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE Spec Number Description Sh o p D r a w i n g Sa m p l e Ce r t i f i e d T e s t R e p o r t Ce r t i f i c a t i o n o f L o c a l F i e l d S e r v i c e Ex t e n d e d W a r r a n t y Ex t e n d e d S e r v i c e A g r e e m e n t Ce r t i f i c a t e o f A d e q u a c y o f D e s i g n Ce r t i f i c a t i o n o f A p p l i c a t o r / S u b c o n t r a c t o r Re c o r d D a t a Op e r a t i o n a n d M a i n t e n a n c e M a n u a l s Eq u i p m e n t I n s t a l l a t i o n R e p o r t Pr o c e s s P e r f o r m a n c e B o n d 33 16 19.13 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tanks X X X X X X X X 33 49 00 Storm Drainage Structures X 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems X X X 40 90 01 Instrumentation X X 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition X X X END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 A t t a c h m e n t 3 I t e m 1 2 Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 1 PRP17369 – 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the contract time and in the sequence stipulated below: 1. Construct and place proposed 2.5 MG EST in service and complete associated yard piping, EST overflow and storm drain improvements concurrently, if desired. B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time 20-inch water line connection 4 hours C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the contract time. 1.02 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum out of service time and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Critical Operation Maximum Time Out of Operation Hours Operation Can be Shut Down Liquidated Damages (Dollars per Hour) 20-inch water line connection 4 hours 9:00 AM to 3:00 PM Monday-Friday $2,500 B. Submit a written plan of action for approval for critical operations. 1. Describe the following in the plan of action: a. Construction necessary. b. Utilities, piping, or services affected. c. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed. d. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work. e. Plan of action to handle emergencies. f. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met. g. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies. Identify backups for key pieces of equipment such as excavators and pumps and key personnel such as welders. Attachment 3Item 12 Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 2 PRP17369 – 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank 2. Plan must be received by the Owner 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner’s normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. E. Include the cost for Work affecting critical operations in the contract price. F. Liquidated damages will be assessed if Work on critical operations is not completed within the time indicated. 1. These items are critical to the for operation of the existing distribution system a20-inch water line connection to existing water line. 2. Loss of operation of the existing distribution system can subject the Owner to loss of revenue, additional operations cost, and fines from regulatory agencies. 3. Liquidated damages have been established for each critical operation. G. Designated Critical Operations are described in more detail as follows: 1. Critical Operation 1 Title from Table Above – Connection to existing 20-inch water line. 1.03 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. The Owner will assist the Contractor in draining the existing pipelines as much as possible through existing blow-off valves. The Contractor will be responsible for providing dewatering pumps, etc. required to completely dewater the facilities and handle any leakage past closed valves, gates or adjacent structures. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers. Correct defective Work. 2. Inspect products and materials to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers of raw materials, parts, components, assemblies, and other products have adequate quality control system to ensure that quality products are produced. Provide only products that comply with the Contract Documents. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner to insure that products proposed for use fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide all facilities and calibrated equipment required for quality control tests. 5. Provide consumable construction materials of adequate quality to provide a finished product that complies with the Contract Documents. 6. Perform tests as indicated in this and other sections of the Specifications. Schedule the time and sequence of testing with the Construction Manager. All quality control testing is to be observed by the Construction Manager or designated representative. 7. Maintain complete inspection and testing records at the Site and make them available to Owner, Engineer and Construction Manager. B. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner to insure that Work fully complies with the Contract Documents. Provide services of a testing laboratory capable of performing a full range of testing procedures complying with the standards for testing procedures specified. Provide personnel certified to perform the test required. Obtain Owners’ approval for the testing laboratory before testing is performed. C. Technical specifications govern if any requirements of this section conflicts with the requirements of the technical specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES BY THE OWNER A. Owner may perform its own quality assurance test independent of the Contractor’s Quality Control Program or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. Provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and related items for testing by the Owner including, but not limited to temporary construction required for testing and operation of new and existing utilities. Assist the Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager, and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities. 1. Provide access to the Work and to the Supplier’s operations at all times Work is in progress. Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Cooperate fully in the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing. 3.Furnish labor and facilities to: a. Provide access to the Work to be tested. b. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the source of the product to be tested. c. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the Owner’s use. d. Facilitate inspections and tests. e. Provide adequate lighting to allow Owner observations. f. Store and cure test Samples. 4. Furnish copies of the tests performed on materials and products. 5. Provide adequate quantities of representative product to be tested to the laboratory at the designated location. 6. Give the Construction Manager adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with testing. 7. Notify the Construction Manager and the testing laboratory prior to the time that testing is required. Lead time is to be adequate to allow arrangements to be made for testing. 8. Do not proceed with any Work until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable. 9. Provide complete access to the Site and make Contract Documents available. 10. Provide personnel and equipment needed to perform sampling or to assist in making the field tests. 11. Quality assurance testing performed by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing performed by the Owner, which shall be paid for by the Contractor as described in Paragraph 1.06. B. Quality assurance activities of the Owner, Engineer or Construction Manager through their own forces or through contracts with materials testing laboratories and survey crews are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor’s Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Quality assurance activities of the Owner and Engineer or non-performance of quality assurance activities: 1. Do not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to perform Work and furnish materials and products and constructed Work conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Do not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures. 3. Do not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of the material, product or Work before Owner’s acceptance. Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. Do not constitute or imply Owner’s acceptance. 5.Do not affect the continuing rights of the Owner after Owner’s acceptance of the completed Work. D. The presence or absence of the Owner’s Resident Representative or Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from any contract requirement, nor is the Owner’s Resident Representative or Engineer authorized to change any term or condition of the Contract Documents without the Owner’s written authorization in a Field Order or Change Order. E. Failure on the part of the Owner, Engineer or Construction Manager to perform or test products or constructed Works in no way relieves the Contractor of the obligation to perform Work and furnish materials conforming to the Contract Documents. F. All materials and products are subject to Owner’s quality assurance observations or testing at any time during preparation or use. Material or products which have been tested or observed or approved by Owner at a supply source or staging area may be re-observed or re-tested by Owner before or during or after incorporation into the Work, and rejected if they do not comply with the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. A written Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this program as Record Data. 2. A Statement of Qualifications for the proposed testing laboratory. The statement of qualifications is to include a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, equipment used with date of last certification and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Test reports per Paragraph 1.07 of this Specification. Reports are to certify that products or constructed Works are in full compliance with the Contract Documents or indicate that they are not in compliance and describe how they are not in compliance. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports on materials or products to be incorporated into the Project. Reports are to indicate that material or products are in full compliance with the Contract Documents or indicate that they are not in compliance and describe how they are not in compliance. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a testing laboratory that complies with the ACIL (American Council of Independent Laboratories) “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications.” B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. 1.06 VERIFICATION TESTING A. Provide verification testing when tests indicate that materials or the results of construction activities are not in conformance with Contract Documents. B. Verification testing is to be provided at the Contractor’s expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been made. C. Tests must comply with recognized methods or with methods recommended by the testing laboratory and approved by the Engineer. 1.07 TEST REPORTS A. Test reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, project title and number, equipment installer and general contractor. b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number. c. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test. d. Description of the product being sampled or tested. e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing. f. Date the report was issued. g. Description of the test performed. h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling. i. Location at the Site or structure where the test was taken. j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test. k. A description of the results of the test. l. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents. m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor or his suppliers or vendors on the forms provided by the Engineer. 3. Engineer will prepare test reports on test performed by the Engineer. B. Distribute copies of the test reports to the Construction Manager within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. Hard copies of test reports are to be distributed to individuals designated at the pre-construction conference: Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Recipient No. of Copies Owner 2 Engineer 1 Construction Manager 1 Contractor 1 C. Payment for Work subject to testing may be withheld until the Contractor’s quality control test reports of the Work are submitted to the Engineer or the Owner’s Resident Representative. 1.08 NON-CONFORMING WORK A. Immediately correct any Work that does not comply with the Contract Documents or submit a written explanation of why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action to the Work will be performed. B. Payment for non-conforming Work shall be withheld until Work is brought into compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.09 LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY OF THE TESTING LABORATORY A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing consultation on the test performed and to an advisory capacity. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor. 4. Stop the Work. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Submit Contractor’s Quality Control Plan that identifies personnel, procedures, control, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the Quality Control Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of Work to be started. Work outside of the features of Work included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a Quality Control Plan or another interim plan containing the additional features of Work to be started. B. Content of the Quality Control Plan. The Quality Control Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following to address all construction operations, both on-site and off-site, including work by Subcontractors and Suppliers: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgement that the quality control staff shall implement the quality control program for all aspects of the Work specified. Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a quality control function. 3. A copy of the letter to the Quality Control Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the Quality Control Manager, including authority to stop Work which does not comply with the Contract Documents or will result in Work that does not comply with the Contract Documents. The Quality Control Manager shall issue letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities, and responsibilities. Copies of these letters shall also be furnished to the Construction Manager. 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of Subcontractors and Suppliers. 5. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test is to include the test name, specification paragraph requiring test, feature of Work to be tested, test frequency, person responsible for each test, applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test. 6. Procedures for tracking phases of quality control, verification, and acceptance tests including documentation. 7. Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 8. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats. 9. The name of the proposed testing laboratory along with documentation of qualifications, a list of tests that can be performed, and a list of recent projects for which similar testing has been performed with references from those projects. C. Notification of Changes. After submittal of the Quality Control Plan, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of any proposed changes. D. Coordination Meeting. After the Pre-construction Meeting and before start of construction, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner, Engineer and Construction Manager to discuss the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. The Quality Control Plan shall be submitted a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details shall be developed, including the forms for recording the Quality Control operations, testing, administration of the system for both on- site and off-site Work, and the interrelationship of Contractor’s management and control with the Owner’s Quality Assurance. Revise the Quality Management Plan to reflect comments and recommended changes resulting from this meeting. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING APPARATUS A. Furnish testing apparatus and related accessories necessary to perform the tests. Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide a quality control program that includes the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the contract drawings. b. Review submittals and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to submittals, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates submittal comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the Construction Manager. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the Construction Manager, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the Construction Manager at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 8 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal non-conforming Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work 1 month prior to the expiration of the correction period prescribed in the General Conditions with the Owner and Construction Manager. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable. 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or work crew. 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity. 4. Other quality problems develop. 3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TESTING A. Test cast-in-place concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 “Cast-In-Place Concrete.” 3.03 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Test protective coatings per Section 09 95 00 “Coatings for Water Storage Tanks.” 3.04 LEAKAGE TESTS FOR STRUCTURES A. Test structures that will contain water on a full time or intermittent basis for leaks. Perform tests in accordance with AWWA D100, Section 11, “Inspection” and AWWA D107, Section 9, “Inspection and Testing”. In the event that the structure fails to pass the test, drain the structure, repair the leaks, re-fill, and re-test the structure. Repeat tests until the structure passes the test. The Owner may repeat the test at any time during the correction period established in the General Conditions. 3.05 PIPING SYSTEMS A. Test Requirements: 1. Perform test on piping systems including piping installed between or connected to existing pipe. Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 9 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Conduct tests on buried pipe to be hydrostatically tested after the trench is completely backfilled. If field conditions permit and if approved by the Engineer, partially backfill the trench and leave the joints open for inspection and conducting of the initial service leak test. Do not conduct the acceptance test until backfilling is complete. 3. Conduct the test on exposed piping after the piping is completely installed, including supports, hangers, and anchors, but prior to insulation and coating application. 4. Do not perform testing on pipe with concrete thrust blocking until the concrete has cured at least 5 days. 5. Determine and remedy the cause of the excessive leakage for any pipe failing to meet the specified requirements for water or air tightness. 6. Tests must be successfully completed and reports filed before piping is accepted. 7. Submit a comprehensive plan and schedule for testing to the Engineer for review at least 10 days prior to starting each type of testing. 8. Remove and dispose of temporary blocking material and equipment after completion and acceptance of the piping test. 9. Repair any damage to the pipe coating. 10. Clean pipelines so they are totally free flowing prior to final acceptance. 11. Test piping independently from tests on structures. 12. Test method and test pressure depend upon the application of the piping. a. Pressure pipe is defined as piping that is part of a pumped or pressurized system. Perform test for pressure pipe per the procedures indicated in Paragraph 3.05.B. b. Gravity pipe is defined as piping that depends upon the force of gravity for flow through the pipe, with the exception of process piping described in Paragraph 3.05.A.13.d. c. Chemical processing lines are to be tested as pressure pipe regardless of the operating conditions. The test pressure is to be 1.5 times the pressure rating of the pipe. B. Pressure and Leakage Tests of Pressure Piping: 1. Perform hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests using methods, and per performance requirements of Section 5 of AWWA C600 regardless of pipe material tested. All water lines shall be pressure tested to minimum of 250 psi Or as specified below, whichever is higher, at a minimum for a four (4) hour continuous period. See Drawings and Pipe specifications for specific pipe pressure ratings and additional testing requirements. There shall be no visible leaks in any piping. a. Plastic piping shall be tested at the pressure rating of the pipe. b. For all other materials, the pressure required for hydrostatic pressure test shall be 50 percent above the normal working pressure. If the normal working pressure cannot be determined, use the pipe pressure rating as the normal working pressure. c. Provide temporary plugs and blocking necessary to maintain the required test pressure. Where piping is cast in the walls for a structure, brace the walls prior to Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 10 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B testing as required to prevent load of test pressure from being imposed upon the structure. d. Provide corporation cocks at least 3/4 inch in diameter, pipe riser, and angle globe valves at each pipe dead-end in order to bleed air from the line. e. Duration of pressure test shall be at least 4 hours. f. Repair any visible leaks regardless of the total leakage shown by the test. g. Repair pipelines which fail to meet the test and retest as necessary until the results conform to the test requirements. h. Remove and replace defective materials, pipes, valves, and accessories. i. Test the pipelines in sections by shutting valves or installing temporary plugs as necessary. j. Fill the pipeline with water and remove the air. k. Maintain the test pressure in the pipe for the entire test period by means of a force pump. l. Accurately measure the water required to maintain the pressure. The amount of water required is a measure of the leakage. 2. The maximum allowable leakage is determined by the following formula: �= ��(�)1 2� Equation Term Represents Measure L Maximum allowable leakage gallons per hour S Length of pipe tested feet D Nominal diameter of the pipe inches P Test pressure pounds per square inch gauge Pipe factor Use 148,000 Ductile Iron Pipe and PVC Pipe.F Use 133,200 for all other pipe types. a. Leakage is defined as the volume of water provided to maintain the test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water, the air expelled and the pipe brought to test pressure. b. Pipe with visible leaks or leakage exceeding the maximum allowable leakage is considered defective and must be corrected. 3.06 ELECTRICAL TESTING A. Qualifications: Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 11 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Perform testing using qualified personnel with a minimum of 5 years’ experience installing and testing electrical equipment and machinery, unless otherwise specified. 2. Use testing firms or individuals to perform tests that have not provided services or materials used on the Project or are otherwise related or affiliated with other Contractors or Suppliers for this Project unless permitted by the Owner. B. Report Forms: Complete appropriate test report neatly and in ink for the items being tested. Note listed data that is not applicable or cannot be obtained as “N/A” or document with an explanation for the omission. Incomplete test forms will not be witnessed by the Construction Manager. Repeat tests not accepted. Substitute forms recording similar data and test equipment as that specified may be used if approved by the Engineer. C. Test Equipment: 1. Provide test equipment and materials necessary to perform the requested tests. 2. Test equipment and apparatus shall be appropriate for the full range and duration of the test to be performed. 3. Demonstrate that the test equipment is functioning properly, prior to the commencement of the test. Suspend the test and repair or replace the equipment if test equipment fails during any portion of a test. Repeat the test in its entirety or as otherwise required by the Construction Manager. 4. Provide a copy of the test equipment calibration certificate to the Construction Manager prior to the commencement of the test. Provide test equipment that has been calibrated within 6 months of the date of the test using methods approved by the National Institute of Standards and Technology. D. Execution: 1. Make appropriate repairs or replacements if the circuit, equipment or machinery being tested does not pass. Repeat test as directed by the Construction Manager. 2. If test procedures or equipment conflicts occur between the various sections of the Specifications and/or Supplier’s recommendations, the more rigid requirement prevails. E. Electrical Cable: 1. Communication Cable and Conductors - Submit test forms to the Owner for approval prior to performing the following tests: a. Test shielded pair, telephone, paging, signaling and computer cables for continuity, short circuits and grounds with a low voltage source, not to exceed the insulation rating of the conductors or jacket. b. Test fiber-optic cable between terminating ends for each circuit per the Supplier’s recommendation. Cables, splices (where permitted), and connectors shall be tested for continuity, band width (maximum), and attenuation losses. 2. 600-Volt Cable and Conductors: a. Test power and control conductors rated at 600 volts with an insulation resistance tester at 1000 volts, with respect to ground, and at 1000 volts with respect to all other conductors in each circuit. Attachment 3Item 12 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 12 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. Verify suitable ground connections are provided and maintained throughout the test. c.Perform tests and record results as required by the “600-Volt Cable Test Report” or form provided by the Engineer. d. Test each circuit and record the results for continuity between terminating ends with a low voltage source. F. Transformers: 1. Test single and three-phase, liquid filled and dry transformers rated 5 KVA and larger in accordance with the “Transformer Test Report” form. 2. Record the following information and attach to the test report. a. Verify proper operation of all fans, alarms, and other auxiliary and monitoring devices. b. Verify “tap changer” operation, if applicable, in all positions. Set and secure “tap changer” to position recommended by the Construction Manager or Engineer. c. Obtain insulating liquid sample from all liquid filled transformers. Submit sample to testing laboratory, approved by the Owner for analysis. Perform standard insulating liquid tests as required by the Construction Manager or Engineer. Deliver test results to the Owner within 30 days after sampling. d. Perform insulation resistance tests at the test values shown below for the following equipment. e. Perform tests from each winding to ground and winding to winding. Primary and secondary sections shall be tested separately. f. Do not exceed the Supplier’s recommended maximum test values or procedures. Transformer Coil Rating Test Voltage 0-600 volts 1000 volts 601-5000 volts 2500 volts 5001-15,000 volts 5000 volts 15,001-39,000 volts 10,000 volts g. Provide additional tests and checks as recommended by the Supplier before energizing. h. Energize transformer. Measure and record primary and secondary volts and amps under no load and connected load conditions. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Definitions 01 42 16 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 42 16 DEFINITIONS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SPECIFICATION TERMINOLOGY A. "Engineer" or "Landscape Architect" means Freese and Nichols, Inc., Architects and Engineers, 5805 Main Street, Ste. B, Frisco, Texas 75034, or its designated representative. B. "Furnish" means to supply, deliver and unload materials and equipment at the project site ready to install. C. "Install" means the operations at the project site including unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, training and similar operations required to prepare the materials and equipment for use, verify conformance with Contract Documents and prepare for acceptance and operation by the Owner. D. "Provide" means to furnish and install materials and equipment. E. "Perform" means to complete the operations necessary to comply with the Contract Documents. F. "Indicated" means graphic representations, notes, or schedules on drawings, or other requirements in Contract Documents. Words such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", are used to help locate the reference. No limitation on the location is intended unless specifically noted. G. "Specified" means written representations in the bid documents or the technical specifications. H. "Regulation" means laws, statutes, ordinances, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as, rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of work, whether they are lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not. I. "Installer" means an entity engaged by Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor to install materials and/or equipment. Installers are to have successfully completed a minimum of five projects similar in size and scope to this project, have a minimum of 5 years’ of experience in the installation of similar materials and equipment, and comply with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. J. "Manufacturer" means an entity engaged by Contractor, as a subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor to furnish materials and/or equipment. Manufacturers are to have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the manufacture of materials and equipment similar in size, capacity and scope to the specified materials and equipment. K. "Project site" means the space available to perform the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing construction at the project site. L. "Testing laboratory" means an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and interpret the results of those inspections or tests. Attachment 3Item 12 Definitions 01 42 16 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B M. "Listed" means equipment is included in a list published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of production of such equipment and states that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner. N. "Labeled" means equipment that embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and production is periodically inspected in accordance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner. O. "Certified" used in context with materials and equipment means the material and equipment has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet specification requirements, or nationally recognized standards if requirements are not specified, and is safe for use in the specified manner. Production of the equipment must be periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and the equipment must bear a label, tag, or other record of certification. P. "Certified" used in context with labor performance or ability to install materials and equipment means that the abilities of the proposed installer have been tested by a representative of the specified testing agency authorized to issue certificates of competency and has met the prescribed standards for certification. Q. "Certified" used in context with test reports, payment requests or other statements of fact means that the statements made on the document are a true statement as attested to by the certifying entity. 1.02 SPECIFICATION SENTENCE STRUCTURE A. Specifications are written in modified brief style. Requirements apply to all work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. B. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish", "install", "provide", or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. C. It is understood that the words "directed", "designated", "requested", "authorized", "approved", "selected", or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "by the Engineer" after these words unless otherwise stated. Use of these words does not extend the Engineer's responsibility for construction supervision or responsibilities beyond those defined in the General Conditions. D. "At no additional cost to Owner", "With no extra compensation to Contractor", "At Contractor's own expense", or similar words mean that the Contractor will perform or provide specified operation of work without any increase in the Contract Amount. It is understood that the cost for performing all work is included in the amount bid and will be performed at no additional cost to the Owner unless specifically stated otherwise. 1.03 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION A. The contract requirements described in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 apply to each and all specification sections unless specifically noted otherwise. Attachment 3Item 12 Definitions 01 42 16 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. Organization of Contract Documents is not intended to control or to lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing work among subcontractors, or to establish the extent of work to be performed by any trade, subcontractor or vendor. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each specification or drawing. Items shown in the contract documents are applicable regardless of location in the Contract Documents. C. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict specification text. D. Capitalizing words in the text does not mean that these words convey special or unique meanings or have precedence over other parts of the Contract Documents. Specification text governs over titling and it is understood that the specification is to be interpreted as a whole. E. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. Provide any work, materials or equipment required for a complete and functional system even if they are not detailed or specified. 1.04 INTERPRETATIONS OF DOCUMENTS A. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, unless Contract Documents indicate otherwise. 1. Quantity or quality level shown or indicated shall be minimum to be provided or performed in every instance. 2. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quality indicated, or it may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. 3. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for context of requirements. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Engineer for a decision before proceeding. B. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the drawings but are not included in the specifications. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable construction industry standards as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents regardless of lack of reference in the Contract Documents. Apply provisions of the Contract Documents where Contract Documents include more stringent requirements than the referenced standards. 1. Standards referenced directly in the Contract Documents take precedence over standards that are not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as applicable. Attachment 3Item 12 Definitions 01 42 16 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Comply with standards not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as applicable for performance of the work except as otherwise limited by the Contract Documents. The Engineer determines whether code or standard is applicable, or which of several are applicable. B. Consider a referenced standard to be the latest edition with supplements or amendments when a standard is referred to in an individual specification section but is not listed by title and date. C. Trade association names and title of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Acronyms or abbreviations used in the Contract Documents mean the recognized name of trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable in the context of the Contract Documents. Refer to "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Company. D. Make copies of reference standards available as requested by Engineer or Owner. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND EQUAL PRODUCTS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by the entities specifically listed in each technical specification section. Submit a Contract Modification Request per Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for substitution of materials and equipment of manufacturers not specifically listed or for materials and equipment that does not strictly comply with the Contract Documents. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS AND EQUAL PRODUCTS A. Contractor may provide "equal" products manufactured by manufacturers other than those specifically listed in the technical specification section unless it is specifically stated that only the materials and equipment of the specified manufacturers shall be provided. Provide Submittals for proposed “equal” non-specified products per Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for any materials or equipment not specifically listed. Submit a Contract Modification Request for substitution of materials and equipment of other manufacturers or for materials and equipment that does not strictly comply with the Contract Documents. A Field Order or Change Order will be issued if the contract modification is approved. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan in accordance with TCEQ General Permit TXR150000, file required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity, where applicable. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent storm water pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any storm water system, including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent storm water pollution. E. Cost for Temporary Controls as described in this Section and provided by Suppliers and Subcontractors as described in this Section are to be included in the Cost of Work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and requiring minimal maintenance that will disrupt construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide copies of notices, records and reports required by the Contract Documents or regulations as Record Data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” B. Provide documents requiring approval by the Owner or Engineer as Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a storm water pollution prevention plan that complies with Local, State, and Federal requirements. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit (TXR150000) for storm water discharges from construction activities under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) program, where applicable. Attachment 3Item 12 Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. Perform Work to comply with “Best Practice” as established by the North Central Texas Council Of Governments (NCTCOG) integrated Storm Water Management (iSWM) Design Manual for Construction or the local agency of jurisdiction. 1.05 PERMITS A. Where applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving storm water discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction project has been completed and stabilized. B. Where applicable, post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and Local, State, and Federal authorities prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Where applicable, maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the storm water pollution prevention plan (SWPPP) required under the TPDES General Permit (TXR150000) for Storm Water Discharges from Construction Activities for all projects. 1.06 STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR15000 (General Storm Water Permit) set forth by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality for the duration of the Project: 1. Develop a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan meeting all requirements of the General Storm Water Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. 5. Submit reports to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality as required as a condition of the permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Engineer as Record Data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the Owner or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by regulations. Attachment 3Item 12 Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 8. Pay all costs associated with complying with the provisions of the General Storm Water Permit. Assume solely responsible for implementing, updating, and modifying the General Storm Water Permit per regulatory requirements the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan prior to submitting the Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent, Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, and any other pertinent Texas Commission on Environmental Quality submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre-construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the General Storm Water Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the General Storm Water Permit for 3 years from date of final completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with local, State and Federal regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be Attachment 3Item 12 Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the Engineer. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Pay cost for disposal unless otherwise noted. Provide written approval by the property owner for all disposal on private property, and approval by the Owner if such disposal affects the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials meeting regulatory requirements. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS Attachment 3Item 12 Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with regulatory requirements. B.Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary control when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls before the point where they are no longer required. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Comply with requirements of the General Conditions and specified administrative procedures in closing out the Construction Contract. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit affidavits and releases on forms provided by the Engineer. B. Other Close-Out submittals as specified herein. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Submit written notification that the Work or designated portion of the Work is substantially complete to the Engineer when the Work is considered to be substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. B. Engineer shall visit the Site to observe the Work within a reasonable time after notification is received to determine the status of completion. C. Engineer shall issue notification to the Contractor that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project may be considered substantially complete. 1. Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing of items that must be completed before the Project can be considered substantially complete. a. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. b. Issue a second written notice with a revised list of deficiencies when Work has been completed. c. Engineer shall revisit the Site and the procedure shall begin again. 2. Engineer shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Owner when the Project is considered to be substantially complete. Certificate shall include a tentative list of items to be corrected before final payment. a. Owner will review and revise the list of items and notify the Engineer of any objections or other items that are to be included in the list. b. Engineer shall prepare and send to the Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be corrected or completed. c. Review the list and notify the Engineer in writing of any objections within 10 days of receipt of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Attachment 3Item 12 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.04 FINAL INSPECTION A.Submit written certification in the form provided by the Engineer when the Project is complete and: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational. 4. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed. 5. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided. 6. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. Engineer shall make an inspection with the Owner and appropriate regulatory agencies to determine the status of completeness within a reasonable time after the receipt of the Certificate. C. Engineer shall issue notice that the Project is complete or notify the Contractor that Work is not complete or is defective. 1. Submit the request for final payment with Closeout submittals described in Paragraph 1.07 if notified that the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. 2. Upon receipt of notification from the Engineer that Work is incomplete or defective, take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies. Send a second certification to the Engineer when Work has been completed or corrected. 3. Engineer shall re-visit the Site and the procedure will begin again. 1.05 REINSPECTION FEES A. Pay fees to the Owner to compensate the Engineer for reinspection of the Work required by the failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor. B. Owner may withhold the amount of these fees from the Contractor’s final payment. C. Cost for additional inspections will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual hours required for the reinspection and preparation of related reports in accordance with the rates provided in the Supplemental Conditions. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO THE ENGINEER A. Record Drawings per Section 01 31 00 “Project Coordination.” B. Keys and keying schedule. C. Warranties and bonds. D. Evidence of payment or release of liens on the forms provided by the Engineer and as required by the General Conditions. Attachment 3Item 12 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. Consent from Surety to Final Payment. F.Equipment installation reports on equipment. G. Shop drawings, record data, installation and testing reports, Operations and Maintenance Manuals, and other submittals as required by the Contract Documents. H. Specified spare parts and special tools. I. Certificates of Occupancy, operating certificates, or other similar releases required to allow the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. J. Evidence of final, continuing insurance, and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. K. Final Video and Photographs per Section 01 32 33 “Video and Photographic Documentation.” 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT REQUEST A. Submit a preliminary final Application for Payment. This application is to include adjustments to the Contract Amount for: 1. Approved Change Orders. 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order. 3. Unit prices. 4. Deductions for defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner. 5. Penalties and bonuses. 6. Deductions for liquidated damages. 7. Deductions for reinspection payments per Paragraph 1.05. 8. Other adjustments. B. Engineer shall prepare a final Change Order, reflecting the approved adjustments to the contract amount which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders. C. Submit the final Application for Payment per the General Conditions, including the final Change Order. 1.08 TRANSFER OF UTILITIES A. Transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued, final cleaning has been completed per Section 01 74 23 “Final Cleaning,” and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work area. 1.09 WARRANTIES, BONDS, AND SERVICES AGREEMENTS A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” or by the individual sections of the Specifications. Attachment 3Item 12 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the General Conditions. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Each document is to be signed by the respective Supplier or Subcontractor. 2. Each document is to include: a. The product or Work item description. b. The firm, with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number. c. Scope of warranty, bond or services agreement. d. Date, duration, and expiration date for each warranty bond and service agreement. e. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure. f. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit two copies of each document to the Engineer for review and transmittal to the Owner. 1. Submit duplicate sets. 2. Documents are to be submitted on 8-1/2 x 11 paper, punched for a standard three-ring binder. 3. Submit each set in a commercial quality three-ring binder with a durable and cleanable plastic cover. The title “Warranties, Bonds, and Services Agreements”, the Project name and the name of the Contractor are to be typed and affixed to the cover. E. Submit warranties, bonds and services agreements: 1. At the time of final completion and before final payment. 2. Within 10 days after inspection and acceptance for equipment or components placed in service during the progress of construction. 1.10 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. Claims and disputes must be resolved prior to recommendations of final Application for Payment. Acceptance and final payment by the Contractor will indicate that any outstanding claims or disputed issues have been resolved to the full satisfaction of the Contractor. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Final Cleaning 01 74 23 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 74 23 FINAL CLEANING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at Substantial Completion. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Perform a thorough cleaning of the Site, buildings, or other structures prior to Owner occupancy of the buildings, and prior to Final Completion. Leave the Project clean and ready for occupancy. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide data for maintenance per Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data.” 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Furnish the labor and products needed for cleaning and finishing as recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material being cleaned. B. Use cleaning products only on the surfaces recommended by the Supplier. C. Use only those cleaning products which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for occupancy. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water truck or hose down paved site to like new appearance. B. Clean floors and inspect for damage. 1. Remove oil, grease, paint drippings, and other contaminants from floors, then mop repeatedly until thoroughly clean. Replace damaged flooring. Attachment 3Item 12 Final Cleaning 01 74 23 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Clean resilient flooring with an approved cleaner and provide one coat liquid floor polish as recommended by the flooring Supplier. Polish to a buffed appearance with powered floor buffer. 3. Vacuum all carpets with powered floor sweeper to remove dirt and dust. Remove glue or other substances from nap of carpet. C. Clean and polish inside and outside glass surfaces. Wash with window cleaner and water, apply a coat of high quality glass polish and wipe clean. Do not scratch or otherwise mar glass surfaces. D. Clean wall surfaces to remove dirt or scuff marks. Remove excess adhesive along top edges of wall base. Remove adhesive from surfaces of vinyl wall coverings. E. Align tile to fit properly in grid and replace cracked or damaged tile. Remove smear marks and other dirt from tile and clean surface of grid system. F. Spot paint nicks and other damage. If spot-painting does not blend into the existing color and texture of the surrounding surfaces, repaint wall from inside corner to inside corner. Touch up damaged surfaces on factory finished equipment using special paint furnished by the Manufacturer. G. Clean plumbing fixtures, valves, and trim. Clean toilet seats and covers. Remove labels and adhesive from fixtures. Remove floor drains and clean baskets or buckets. Polish strainers and exposed chrome or brass. H. Remove dirt, oil, grease, dust and other contaminants from floors, equipment and apparatus in mechanical and electrical rooms with vacuum. I. Clean and polish ceramic tile floors and wall surfaces to remove mildew or other stains. Tuck point defective joints. J. Inspect exterior painted surfaces. Spot paint any damaged surfaces. K. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters on heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. L. Clean roof areas of debris; flush roof drainage systems with water until clear. M. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. N. Clean and polish all electrical equipment and exposed conduits. Remove paint overspray. Provide a blemish free appearance on all exposed equipment and conduits. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Starting and Adjusting 01 75 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide step-by-step procedures for starting provided systems, including equipment, pumps and processes. B. Provide pre-start up inspections by equipment manufacturers. C. Provide instruction and demonstration of operation, adjustment, and maintenance of each system and the component parts. D. Place each system in service and operate the system to prove performance and to provide for initial correction of defects in workmanship, calibration, and operation. E. Provide for initial maintenance and operation. F. Cost for Starting and Adjusting provided by Suppliers and Subcontractors as described in this section are to be included in the Cost of Work. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures,” and shall include: 1. A Plan of Action for testing, checking, and starting major equipment and process piping systems. Submit reports as required by this specification. 2. Equipment Installation Reports on the forms shown in Section 01 31 13.13 “Forms” per Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals per Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data.” 1.03 STANDARDS A. Comply with any standards associated with the testing or start-up of equipment, as listed in the various sections of the Specifications. 1.04 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not start or test any apparatus until the complete unit has been installed and thoroughly checked. B. A representative of the Supplier shall be in attendance of tests and start-up procedures when required by these Specifications. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING INSTRUMENTATION A. Furnish any instrumentation or other testing devices needed to conduct tests. Attachment 3Item 12 Starting and Adjusting 01 75 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF SUPPLIER’S REPRESENTATIVES A. The Supplier’s representative for inspection, supervision of installation, and training must be an experienced and competent technical (not sales) representative of the manufacturer or Supplier. B. Perform installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment under the direct supervision of the Supplier’s representative where specified. C. The Supplier’s representative is to instruct the Owner or his authorized personnel on operational procedures and maintenance requirements. D. Include the cost of the services of the Supplier’s representative in the equipment price. 3.02 INSPECTION AND START UP A. Inspect equipment prior to placing any equipment or system into operation. Make adjustments as necessary for proper operation. 1. Check for adequate and proper lubrication. 2. Determine that parts or components are free from undue stress from structural members, piping or anchorage. 3. Adjust equipment for proper balance and operations. 4. Determine that vibrations are within acceptable limits. 5. Determine that equipment operates properly under full load conditions. 6. Determine that the equipment is in true alignment. B. Have the Supplier’s representative present when the equipment is placed in operation. 1. The Representative is to be on-site as often as necessary for proper and trouble free operation. 2. Ensure that the proper procedure is employed in start up of systems. C. Provide Equipment Installation Reports for Equipment on the form indicated by Engineer. 1. Certify that the equipment and related appurtenances have been thoroughly examined and approved for start-up and operation. 2. Include the date when Owner’s personnel were instructed in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment in the report. 3.03 STARTING REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to the individual sections of the specifications for specific start up procedures. 3.04 INITIAL OPERATION A. Start, test, and place equipment and systems into operation for 30 days to allow the Owner and Engineer to observe the operation and overall performance of the equipment and to determine that controls function as intended. Attachment 3Item 12 Starting and Adjusting 01 75 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. Equipment which operates on a limited or part-time basis shall be operated in the presence of the Engineer to demonstrate that controls function as specified. C. Perform acceptance test as specified in individual specification sections. Demonstrate that equipment and systems meet the specified performance criteria. D. Unless specifically stated otherwise in the individual equipment specifications, equipment and systems are not substantially complete until the end of this initial operation period. If an exception to this requirement is specifically noted in an individual equipment specification, the exception shall only apply to that particular piece of equipment and not to the remaining components provided under the Project. 3.05 OPERATOR TRAINING A. Provide instruction and demonstration of the care and operation of the equipment to the Owner’s personnel. Instruction is to include classroom and hands-on training. B. Provide training in adequate detail to ensure that the trainees who complete the program will be qualified and capable of operating and maintaining the equipment, products, and systems provided. C. Operations Training is to include but not be limited to: 1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem configuration and operation. 2. Terminology, nomenclature, and display symbols. 3. Operations theory. 4. Equipment appearance, functions, concepts, and operation. 5. Operating modes, practices and procedures under normal, diminished, and emergency conditions. 6. Start-up and shutdown procedures. 7. Safety Precautions. 8. On-the-job operating experience for monitoring functions, supervisory, or command activities. Include functions and activities associated with diminished operating modes, failure recognition, and responses to system/subsystem and recovery procedures. 9. Content and use of Operation and Maintenance manuals and related reference materials. D. Provide training for performing on-site routine, preventive, and remedial maintenance of the equipment, product, or system. Maintenance training is to include but not be limited to: 1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem concept, configuration, and operation. 2. Operations theory and interfaces. 3. Instructions necessary to ensure a basic theoretical and practical understanding of equipment appearance, layout and functions. 4. Safety precautions. Attachment 3Item 12 Starting and Adjusting 01 75 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 5. Use of standard and special tools and test equipment. 6.Adjustment, calibration, and use of related test equipment. 7. Detailed preventive maintenance activities. 8. Troubleshooting, diagnostics, and testing. 9. Equipment assembly and disassembly. 10. Repair and parts replacement and related schedules. 11. Parts ordering practices and storage. 12. Failure and recovery procedures. 13. Cabling and/or interface connectors. 14. Content and use of Operation and Maintenance manuals and related reference materials. 15. Procedures for warranty repairs. 16. Lubrication. 17. Procedures, practices, documentation, and materials required to commence system maintenance. E. Provide a training plan that indicates the schedule and sequence of the training programs. The training plan is to include for each course: 1. Number of hours for the course. 2. Agenda and narrative description, including the defined objectives for each lesson. 3. Draft copy of training handbooks. 4. A descriptive listing of suggested reference publications. 5. Audio-visual equipment required for training. 6. Type and number of tools or test equipment required for each training session. F. Provide and use training aids to complement the instruction and enhance learning. 1. Provide training handbooks for use in both the classroom and the hands-on phases of training for each course. 2. Instructional materials shall include references to the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and identify and explain the use of the manual. 3. Provide a copy of all audio/visual training materials used in the presentations. G. Provide qualified instructors to conduct the training. 1. Instructors must have knowledge of the theory of operation and practical experience with the equipment, product, or system. 2. Instructors must have successfully conducted similar training courses. H. Training may be recorded by the Owner or its consultants for use in future training. Provide legal releases or pay additional fees required to allow training by the manufacturer to be recorded. Attachment 3Item 12 Starting and Adjusting 01 75 00 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B I. Schedule for training is to be approved by Owner. 1.Schedule training and start-up operations for no more than one piece of equipment or system at a time. 2. Owner may require re-scheduling of training if operations personnel are not available for training on a scheduled date. 3. Provide a minimum of 2 weeks’ notice if training must be rescheduled. 4. Training is to be limited to 24 hours per week. 5. Time required for training is to be considered in the development of the Project schedule. J. Schedule and coordinate training for equipment, products, or systems which depend upon other equipment or systems for proper operation so that trainees can be made familiar with the operation and maintenance of the entire operating system. K. Conduct a training course for the equipment products and systems provided for the Project. Training is to be adequate to meet the training objectives described above. Details for training will be established in the project specifications for that equipment. Cost for training and start up will be included in the Cost of Work for each equipment package. 3.06 INITIAL MAINTENANCE A. Maintain equipment until the Project is accepted by the Owner. 1. Insure that mechanical equipment is properly greased, oiled, or otherwise cared for as recommended by the Supplier. 2. Operate air handling equipment only when filters are in place and are clean. Change filters weekly during construction. B. Service equipment per the Supplier’s instructions immediately before releasing the equipment to the Owner. 1. Replace replaceable filters and clean permanent filters associated with air handling units or other packaged equipment. 2. Remove and clean screens at strainers in piping systems. 3. Clean insects from intakes/ louvers/ screens. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare a complete and detailed Operation and Maintenance Manual for each type and model of equipment or product furnished and installed under this Contract. B. Prepare the manuals in the form of an instruction manual for the Owner. The manual is to be suitable for use in providing operation and maintenance instruction as required by Section 01 75 00 “Starting and Adjusting.” C. Provide complete and detailed information specifically for the products or systems provided for this Project. Include the information required to operate and maintain the product or system. D. Manuals are to be in addition to any information packed with or attached to the product when delivered. This information is to be taken from the product and provided as an attachment to the manual. E. Cost for O&M Manuals provided by Suppliers and Subcontractors as described in this section are to be included in the Cost of Work. Contractor efforts are included in the Contractor’s fee for Construction Phase Services. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manuals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” Attach to each manual a copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual Review Form as shown in Section 01 31 13.13 “Forms” with pertinent information completed. 1.03 GUARANTEES A. Provide copies of the Manufacturer’s warranties, guarantees, or service agreements in accordance with Section 01 70 00 “Execution and Closeout Requirements.” 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Print manuals on heavy, first quality paper. 1. Paper shall be 8-1/2 x 11 paper. a. Reduce drawings and diagrams to 8-1/2 x 11 paper size. b. When reduction is not practical, fold drawings and place each separately in a clear, super heavy weight, top loading polypropylene sheet protector designed for ring binder use. Provide a typed identification label on each sheet protector. 2. Punch paper for standard three-ring binders. B. Place manuals in Wilson Jones 385 Line D-Ring Dublock Presentation Binders. 1. Binders are to have clear front, back, and spine covers. Attachment 3Item 12 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Sheet lifters are to be provided. 3.Minimum size is 2-inch capacity. Maximum size is 3-inch capacity. C. Provide tab indexes for each section of the manual. 1. Indexes are to be constructed of heavy-duty paper with a reinforced binding edge and punched with 9/32-inch holes to fit the binders. 2. Index is to have clear insertable tabs for a typed insert. 2.02 ELECTRONIC MANUAL FORMAT A. Manual contents to be provided on compact disc (CD) or USB Flash Drive or Memory Stick. 1. Minimum CD storage capacity is 1400 MB. Minimum USB/Memory Stick capacity is 1 GB. 2. CD to have read/write capability. B. Provide individual electronic files for each manual. 1. Maximum file size is 5MB. If manual is greater than maximum allowable file size, provide individual files for each major section of manual. 2. Acceptable file types for written documents are Portable Document File (PDF) or Microsoft Word formats. Acceptable file types for drawing files are PDF formats. All files shall be compatible with the latest software version available. 3. Filename shall identify the equipment Tag No., plant site, plant area, equipment manufacturer and product, and date equipment placed in service. As an example i.e. TNK-CV-Valve Manufacturer-200503.pdf. 4. Each electronic file shall contain a table of contents at the beginning of the file which includes hypertext links or bookmarks to navigate the file contents per section/chapter and sub-sections. Drawings and diagrams shall be bookmarked separately. 5. Scanned images of written documents are not acceptable. Document must allow character selection. Text within a file shall be transferable to other documents. 6. Drawing files shall have the ability to turn on/off drawing layers within the file. 7. Submit a preliminary version of the electronic format of the manual for review. Upon approval of the preliminary submittal, the Contractor shall provide four copies of the electronic manual to the Owner. C. Manuals and submittals not formatted as described below OR missing any content as required per PART 3.00 EXECUTION will Not be reviewed and returned as rejected (i.e. NOT APPROVED) by the Engineer. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUAL ORGANIZATION AND CONTENTS A. Provide a Table of Contents listing each section of the manual for each product or system. 1. Identify each product or system using the nomenclature shown in the Contract Documents. Include complete name tags for equipment and components. Attachment 3Item 12 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Assign a number and letter to each section in the manual. a.Assign a number to each product or system. The number is to correspond to the Owner’s equipment numbering system or other system designated by the Engineer. b. A cross reference is to be provided for the Owner’s numbering system and designations for equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. c. The letter assigned will represent the part of the manual, consistent with the manual contents as required by Paragraphs 3.02, 3.03, and 3.04. 3. Provide index tabs for each section and fly sheets for sub-sections in the manual. 4. The designation on each index tab is to correspond to the number and letter assigned in the Table of Contents. B. Include a complete organized and compiled version of the Final Approved Submittal/s including Product Data, Shop Drawings, Diagrams, Technical Information, and Contractor’s Coordination Layouts. All final submittals and shop drawings included in the O&M Manual shall reflect as-built information. C. Include only the information that pertains to the product described. Manufacturer’s standard data for family or series of products not tailored specifically to the project will not be acceptable. Annotate each sheet to: 1. Clearly identify the specific product or component installed. 2. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. 3. Delete and/or clearly strikethrough reference to inapplicable information, data and illustrations . D. Supplement manual information with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, and control and flow diagrams. E. Identify each manual by placing a printed cover sheet in the front cover of the binder and as the first page in the manual. The first page is to be placed in a clear polypropylene sheet protector. The information on first page and the cover page are to include: 1. Name of Owner. 2. Project Name. 3. Manufacturer Name. 4. Equipment Name and Tag followed by text “Operation and Maintenance Manual” 5. Project Specification Section/s. 6. Volume number. 7. The Table of Contents for that volume. F. Insert the Table of Contents into the spine of each manual. G. Manuals for several products or systems may be provided in the same binder. 1. Sections for each product or system must be included in the same binder. 2. Sections must be in numerical order from volume to volume. Attachment 3Item 12 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B H. Correlate the data into related groups when multiple binders are used. I.Fill binders to only three-fourths of its indicated capacity to allow for addition of materials to each binder by the Owner. 3.02 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MANUAL CONTENT A. Manual shall provide the following information: 1. A description of the unit and component parts. 2. Operating instructions for startup, normal operations, regulation, control, shutdown, emergency conditions, and limiting operating conditions. 3. Maintenance instructions including assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. 4. Lubrication schedule and lubrication procedures. Include a cross reference for recommended lubrication products. 5. Troubleshooting guide. 6. Schedule of routine maintenance requirements. 7. Description of sequence of operation by the Control Manufacturer. 8. Warnings for detrimental maintenance practices. 9. Parts lists including: a. Part numbers for ordering new parts. b. Assembly illustrations showing an exploded view of the complex parts of the product. c. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. d. Separate lists of the Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts AND Contract spare parts, along with current prices with effective date and number of parts recommended for storage . e. Directory of a local source of supply for parts with company name, address, and telephone number. f. Complete nomenclature and list of commercial replacement parts. 10. Outline, cross section and assembly drawings, engineering data, test data, and performance curves. 11. Control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams prepared for field installation, including circuit directories of panel boards and terminal strips. 12. List of identification nameplates installed on equipment and valve identification per the Contract Documents. 13. Equipment manuals shall include startup and testing reports. 14. Warranties and bonds as specified. 15. Other information as may be required by the individual sections of the Specifications. Attachment 3Item 12 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.03 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS MANUAL A.Manual shall provide the following information: 1. A description of the systems and component parts. 2. Control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams prepared for field installation. Include circuit directories of panel boards and terminal strips and as installed color coded wiring diagrams. 3. Operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and the Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. 4. List of the Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts, current prices with effective date, and number of parts recommended for storage. 5. Other information as may be required by the individual sections of the Specifications. 3.04 ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS MANUAL A. Manual shall provide the following information: 1. Information required for ordering replacement products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. 3. List of the Manufacturer’s recommended lubricants. 4. The Manufacturer’s recommendations for types of cleaning agents and methods. 5. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to the product. 6. Recommended maintenance and cleaning schedule. B. Final balancing reports for mechanical systems. C. Other information as may be required by the individual sections of the Specifications. 3.05 LIST OF SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS A. Provide a directory of authorized service organizations with company name, address, telephone number, e-mail address and the contact person for warranty repair and contacts to local shops for spare parts. 3.06 FINAL MANUAL COPIES A. Final Approved copies of the complete O&M Manuals shall be submitted in Electronic PDF format along with 4 Paper copies. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 03 CONCRETE Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes and applies to concrete used for mow strips, sidewalks, driveways, flumes, and other miscellaneous concrete items. This specification does not include requirements for the EST pedestal. Concrete for the tank pedestal shall be per Section 33 16 19.13 COMPOSITE ELEVATED WATER UTILITY STORAGE TANK. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1. Submit mix design supporting documentation and calculations as required. 2. Complete the form “Concrete Mix Design” and one of the following forms: “Documentation of Average Strength – Field Strength Test Record” or “Documentation of Average Strength – Trial Mixtures”. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.” Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing materials. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Joint-filler strips. 12. Repair materials. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association’s Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer’s plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Comply with ACI 301, “Specification for Structural Concrete,” including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. “General Requirements.” 2. “Formwork and Formwork Accessories.” 3. “Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports.” 4. “Concrete Mixtures.” 5. “Handling, Placing, and Constructing.” D. Comply with ACI 117, “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.” 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. 2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. Provide only in locations specifically allowed. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A775/A775M; with ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F. No more than 20 percent of the cement may be replaced with fly ash. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, graded, uniformly graded, of the size scheduled and as follows: 1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. C. Fine Aggregate: 1. Washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones; conforming to ASTM C33. The gradation in ASTM C33 is: Sieve Size Percent Retained Percent Passing 3/8” 0 100 #4 0-5 95-100 #8 0-20 80-100 #16 15-50 50-85 #30 40-75 25-60 #50 70-90 10-30 #100 90-98 2-10 2. Fine aggregate shall have not more than 45 percent retained between any two consecutive sieves. Its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. D. Water: ASTM C94/C94M; potable. 2.05 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. Water-Reducing Admixture ASTM C494/C494M, Type A Retarding Admixture ASTM C494/C494M, Type B Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture ASTM C494/C494M, Type D Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture ASTM C494/C494M, Type F High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture ASTM C494/C494M, Type G Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II 2.06 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb. 2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell without center bulb. 3. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. 4. Profile: Ribbed without center bulb. 5. Profile: As indicated. B. Manufacturers: 1. PVC Waterstops: a. Greenstreak. b. Meadows: W. R. Meadows, Inc. c. Murphy: Paul Murphy Plastics Co. d. Progress Unlimited Inc. e. Sternson Group. f. Tamms Industries Co.; Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals North America, Inc. g. Vinylex Corporation. h. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc. C. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Self-expanding strip waterstops shall be used only where specifically indicated. Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete. 1. Products: a. Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co. b. Swellseal Joint; De Neef Construction Chemicals (U.S.) Inc. c. Adeka Ultra Seal; Mitsubishi International Corporation. 2.07 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D2240. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Zinc Rich Primer: Aluminum surfaces which contact or are embedded in concrete shall be coated with zinc rich primer. Primer shall be Tneme-Zinc. 2.08 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109/C109M. 2.09 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases according to the provisions of ACI 318. B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. C. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. D. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows: Use Min. 28-Day Compressive Strength (psi) Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate Maximum Water/Cement Ratio Maximum Slump (in.) Minimum Sacks of Cement per cubic yard General 3600 1-1/2” 0.47 4 5.75 Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Paving and Miscellaneous Structural 4000 1” 0.45 4 6 Pipe blocking, lean concrete 2000 1-1/2” 0.70 --- --- 1. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: 1. Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 2. When air temperature is above 90 F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. 3.02 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Granular fill below the vapor retarder shall be smoothed and free of protrusions that might damage or rupture the polyethylene film. Completely cover porous fill with film. Lap film not less than 6 inches at all joints, with the top placed in the direction of concrete spreading. Use pressure-sensitive tape at all laps of vapor barrier. Lap reinforcement directly over film before placing concrete, taking precautions to prevent film punctures. Carefully cut film around pipes and wiring outlets, and then apply pressure sensitive tape around these protrusions to insure maximum barrier effectiveness. 3.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. General: Comply with ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement” for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.04 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. D. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at the Site, or during placement. C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. D. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306.1 for cold-weather placement, and ACI 305R for hot-weather placement. 3.06 BLOCKING OF PIPE FITTINGS A. Concrete blocking shall be placed at bends, tees, wyes, crosses, plugs, etc. The concrete blocking shall be placed so as to rest against firm undisturbed trench walls. The supporting area for each block shall be sufficient to withstand the thrusts, shall rest on a firm, undisturbed earth. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. The concrete blocking shall be placed against undisturbed trench walls, with a minimum of 18 inches between trench wall and pipe. Blocking shall extend a minimum of 0.75 x pipe diameter below and above the centerline of pipe and shall not extend beyond any joints. C. If requested by the Owner’s representative or where upward thrusts are present, the ends of the thrust blocks shall be contained in wood or metal forms. 3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. No Finish: After forms are removed, repair or patch tie holes and defects. Otherwise, no additional finish is required. Apply to surfaces which are not visible from the inside or outside of the completed structure or less than 12 inches below finish grade (i.e. back of retaining walls below embankment, etc.). B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to view. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.08 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. C. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view except for exterior traffic surfaces. D. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete traffic surfaces. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 3.09 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb./sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer’s written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 53 - 9 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Curing Methods: 1. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least 7 days by one or a combination of the following methods: 2. Moisture Curing: a. Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following materials: 1). Water. 2). Continuous water-fog spray. 3). Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 3.10 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least 6 months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least two inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 1. Testing Frequency: One composite Sample shall be obtained for each day’s pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cubic yards but less than 25 cubic yards, plus one set for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. 3.12 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 09 FINISHES Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 09 95 00 COATINGS FOR WATER STORAGE TANKS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to apply protective coatings to material and equipment as specified herein, including the preparation of surfaces prior to application of coatings. B. Protective coatings shall be applied to the following surfaces: 1. Tank interior and exterior surfaces. 2. Above grade piping and valves on the tank. 3. Exterior electrical as determined by the Engineer during construction. 4. Stainless Steel Piping inside of the tank. C. The following shall not be coated and shall be protected from drips, overspray, etc. unless indicated otherwise: 1. Stainless steel piping, materials and equipment. 2. Galvanized steel piping, materials and equipment. 3. Aluminum materials and equipment. 4. Safety climb devices. 5. Interior electrical items. D. Special applications for painting include the following: 1. Buried pipe and valves shall receive a shop applied protective coating as described in the appropriate Section of the Specifications. E. Contain, treat, and dispose of any dust, spray, drainage, or spillage resulting from coating operations. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to determine if the materials to be disposed of are classified as Hazardous Waste. Disposal of waste, hazardous or otherwise, shall be in accordance with applicable regulations. The Contractor shall be aware of and understand the regulations concerning disposal of waste generated by coating operations. 1.02 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall acquaint himself with the hazards of the work including, but not limited to: corroded components, high wind velocity, fire potentials caused by sparks from Contractor’s torches, spark damage to property, and the proximity to overhead electrical lines, to residences, businesses, streets, etc. Failure to do so will not relieve the Contractor from all obligations described in the Drawings or Specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Products which comply with the Contract Documents and are manufactured by the following companies will be acceptable. Products from other coating manufacturers shall not be submitted and will not be considered. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Tnemec Company, Inc. 2. Carboline. 3. The Sherwin-Williams Company. 4. PPG Industries. B. Contractor’s Qualifications: Contractors must be qualified in this line of work and have a minimum of 5 years’ experience coating potable water storage tanks and in the application of the protective coatings of the types specified herein. Submit a list of recent projects and names of references for those projects. C. Contractor shall hold current SSPC QP 2 certification for Field Application to Complex Industrial and Marine Structures. Contractor shall submit QP 2 certification documents as Record Data. D. Contractor’s Superintendent/Foreman shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience with coating storage tanks. Superintendent/Foreman shall be onsite at all times while Work indicated within this Section is underway. Submit a list of recent projects and names of references for those projects. E. The Contractor shall provide workers who perform professional and quality work and who are experienced and knowledgeable in surface preparation, mixing and application of high performance coating systems. F. Coating manufacturer shall provide on-site training in the presence of the Engineer on the application of the 100 percent solids coating system. Mock panels shall be provided and coated during the training to demonstrate the application. If employees are added to the Project during construction, coating manufacturer shall provide additional onsite training. G. Product Quality: 1. Use only the coatings specified in this Section. Use only those thinners and solvents recommended by the manufacturer, only in the amounts necessary to produce the manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate, and in amounts not exceeding the maximum quantities stated in the manufacturer’s literature. 2. The coating material shall not show excessive settling in a freshly opened full can and shall be easily re-dispersed with a paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state. It shall show no curdling, livering, caking, or color separation and shall be free of lumps or skim surfaces. H. Testing: Protective coatings shall be applied under quality control procedures, which include inspection of surface preparation and for each coat applied. Do not proceed with the next step until the Owner’s representative has approved the previous step. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for testing for this Section, at no further cost to the Owner. The Owner’s representative shall also make such tests, if it is considered necessary. Cooperate with the Owner, providing equipment, scaffolds, and other equipment as requested by the Owner’s Representative. I. Testing Equipment: Furnish the testing apparatus necessary for testing surface preparation, environmental conditions and coatings as specified. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B J. Testing Equipment: Contractor shall furnish and have the following testing apparatuses on- site during construction for the Owner’s use: 1. One set of U.S. Department of Commerce thickness calibration plates, certified by the National Bureau of Standards, to test dry film thickness. 2. Wet-film thickness gauges. Provide two to Owner’s representative. Each painter shall keep one to test paint as it is applied. 3. One dry-film thickness gauge, Mikrotest III, 0 - 40 mils with calibration standard approved by the Bureau of Standards. 4. One Bacharach Sling Psychrometer, Model 12-7011. 5. One Tinker and Rasor Model M 1 Holiday Detector and recommended wetting agent. 6. One set of SSPC VIS 1, 3 and 4 - Visual Standards as applicable. K. The Contractor shall schedule a construction conference prior to any field work being completed. The meeting will be onsite and will include the Owner, Contractor, painting superintendent, Engineer, Owner’s representative and Coating Manufacturer’s Representative. At this meeting the coating plan and schedule will be reviewed in detail. 1.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Surface Profile Testing: 1. Provide a minimum of three sets of profile readings for the first 1000 square feet. 2. Provide a minimum of two sets of profile readings for each additional 1000 square feet. B. Wet Film and Dry Film Thickness Testing: 1. Provide wet film tests during painting operations to assure proper thicknesses of coating are being applied. 2. The dry-film thickness for each coat shall be tested and be in conformance with SSPC- PA-2 with a Type 2 Electronic Gauge. Apply additional coats until the specified thickness is reached or exceeded for all coats. C. Holiday Testing: 1. Contractor shall conduct holiday testing in the presence of the Owner’s representative. 2. Holiday Testing shall be conducted using a wet sponge low voltage holiday detector in accordance with ASTM D5162. 3. One holiday test shall be performed on 100 percent of the interior coating system following the application of the final coat and after all work is completed inside of the reservoir. 4. During the wet sponge testing, defective areas shall be marked for repair and re-tested after repair work has been completed. 5. All touched up pinholes and re-coated areas shall cure for a minimum of 7 days prior to re-testing for holidays. 6. Holiday testing and re-testing shall continue until the interior surfaces are found to be holiday free. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 7. The coating system must pass the holiday test regardless of the mil thickness existing. D. Contractor shall monitor and record ambient climatic conditions and interior reservoir conditions during surface preparation and coating as follows: 1. Temperature of both the sunny side and shady side of the reservoir shall be recorded periodically each day. The reservoir surface temperatures, relative humidity, dry bulb, wet bulb and dew point temperatures, both interior and exterior (as appropriate), are to be recorded at least every 3 hours. 2. The dew point shall be measured by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables or with an electronic climate monitoring system approved by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall use a form approved by the Owner for recording this data. The completed forms shall be kept on the Site at all times from the time coating is first applied until the coating system is complete. E. All Work, including observations, shall be recorded daily by the Contractor. A copy of each daily report/log shall be placed in a file kept on the Site and submitted to the Owner at the end of each day. The reports shall include the following: 1. Date. 2. Project Manager’s Name. 3. Contractor and Subcontractor name (where applicable). 4. Contractor’s and or Owner’s representatives name (where applicable). 5. Project Name. 6. Work Identification including: a. Type of Work performed. b. Location of Work performed, indicated on generalized drawings of the reservoir, drawings shall include estimated ft2 area blasted and/or painted and approximate percentage of total ft2 area of surface being prepared and painted. Generalized drawings shall include: 1) Plan view of reservoir. 2) Profile view of reservoir. 3) Plate location. 4) North arrow. 5) Any other drawings that will help to indicate location of Work performed. 7. Time of day each portion of the Work was started and finished. 8. Weather conditions, including corresponding time of day, before during and after Work begins including: a. Temperature (air and surface). b. Humidity/dew point. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. Wind velocity/direction. d. Remarks and results of Work. 9. QC results for completed Work, including: a. Compressed air blotter test performed at the start of each day and every 4 hours per ASTM D4285. b. Surface preparation visual checks. c. Profile checks utilizing replica tape. d. Documentation of DFT’s and areas tested per SSPC PA-2, Type 2 Gauge. e. Locations of holidays, repairs and touchups required, including documentation of the repair completion. 10. Contractor signature. 1.05 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” B. The following Record Data is due prior to ordering the materials: 1. Products and Manufacturer’s Information: a. Coating Manufacturer’s color selection literature for coating materials and caulk. b. Sample warranty document for products. c. Provide certification from the manufacturer that all coatings will not contain more than 0.06 percent by weight of lead in the cured coating for each coat applied. d. Coating Manufacturer’s Product Information and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each coating and caulk material. Product Information shall include the following: 1) The Manufacturer’s published instructions for use in specifying and applying all proposed coatings. 2) Application instructions written and published by the Coating Manufacturer. 3) All limitations, precautions and requirements that may adversely affect the coating, that may cause unsatisfactory results after the application or that may cause the coating not to serve the purpose for which it was intended, shall be clearly and completely stated in the instructions. Limitations and requirements shall include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: a). Surface preparation. b). Method(s) of application. c). Thickness of each coat (maximum and minimum DFT). d). Drying and curing time of each coat. e). Time (minimum and maximum) allowed between coats. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B f). Thinner and use of thinner. g). Proper mixing of coating before application. h). Weather limitations during and after application (temperature and humidity, time weighted). i). Physical properties of coating, including percent solids content by volume. j). Equipment settings (air cap, fluid tip, equipment pressure settings, etc.). k). Pot life at various temperature and humidity conditions. l). Provide documentation that interior coating system is compatible with the cathodic protection system. C. The following Samples are required prior to ordering the materials: 1. Three samples of selected coating colors for approval on 6-inch by 6-inch swatches. Label each swatch with the manufacturer’s name, coating name/type, color name and number. D. The following Record Data is required prior to coating work: 1. Coating Plan: a. Anticipated coating process schedule by date, including dates when hold-point inspections are anticipated. Schedule shall indicate detailed activities on a daily basis. b. Detailed procedures and schedule for all pre-cleaning, surface preparation and application of coating, including touch-up and repair procedures for all coating systems. c. Recoat schedule on the submitted coating materials. d. Data sheets complete with a graduated scale or curve, produced by the Coating Manufacturer, with curing characteristics and recommendations regarding complete coating curing. The data sheets and scales or curves shall include specific cure times over a wide range of temperatures and humidity. e. Provide a written plan documenting how spent cleaning debris and/or paint over spray or droplets will be contained/confined to the jobsite and tank site during the surface preparation and coating application operations. Reasonable care shall be exercised by the Contractor to prevent damage, nuisance, or hazardous conditions to adjacent or nearby property Owners. Include all materials and method to be used for protection of exterior surfaces, and allow for recovery and disposal of paint scraps and blast media. f. Provide written plan documenting how paint and/or abrasive damage to automobiles and property will be addressed, including a process for quick removal of the paint or abrasive, and how the Work will be accomplished (this shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of setting claims for damage, but is intended to expedite and minimize said claims). 2. Provide documentation on proposed containment system for blasting and coating operations. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Provide documentation on heating or dehumidification system: a. Calculations for dehumidification and ventilation requirements. b. Fans and their locations. c. Dimensions of equipment. d. Maximum capacities of equipment. e. Emission control devices. f. Method of filtration of exhausted tank air. g. EMD- continuous electronic monitoring device. 4. Provide documentation on ventilation and filtration system: a. Calculations for ventilation requirements. b. Fans and their locations. c. Dimensions of equipment. d. Maximum capacities of equipment. e. Emission control devices. f. Method of filtration of exhausted tank air. 5. The Contractor shall submit evidence of notification of the appropriate office of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) prior to abrasive blasting as required. Submit copies of any obtained permits. 6. Coating Manifest: Within 48 hours of coating delivery to the Site, the Contractor shall record the batch number stamped on each coating container and submit a typed list to the Owner’s representative. Minimum information required is listed below. a. Date of delivery to job site. b. Name and signature of Superintendent recording the data. c. List of batch number including corresponding coating identification, color, date of manufacture and volume of each container. E. The following Certified Test Report(s) are required prior to coating work: 1. Atomic absorption testing for lead, chromium, cadmium, and arsenic if ferrous metal abrasives are to be used. Multiple tests may be required for shop and field blasting operations. 2. MSDS sheets for all abrasive to be used on the Project. F. Provide the following Record Data during the construction of the Project: 1. On a weekly basis, submit Contractor’s Daily Reports. 2. Provide submittal for tank coating record decal. G. Provide the following materials to the Owner prior to final completion: 1. Liquid cleaner for removal of graffiti from treated surfaces. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.06 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety. Adhere to the latest standards and codes published by the following organizations: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. ANSI/NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water Components. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM D523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss ASTM D610 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Rusted on Painted Surfaces ASTM D2244 Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates ASTM D4214 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films ASTM D4285 Standard Test Method of Indicating Oil and Water in Compressed Air ASTM E337 Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer ASTM E84-03 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM D4541 Standard Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Testing Adhesion of Applied Coating Using Portable adhesion Tester 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): AWWA D100 Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage AWWA D102 Coating Steel Water Storage Tanks AWWA D107 Composite Elevated Tanks for Water Storage AWWA C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities 4. Consumer Product Safety Act, Part 1303. 5. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE International): NACE TPC2 Coating and Lining for Immersion Service: Chapter Safety, Chapter 2 Surface Preparation, Chapter 3 Curing, and Chapter 4 Inspection NACE SP0178 Fabrication Details, Surface Finish Requirements, and Proper Design Considerations for Tanks and Vessels to be Lined for Immersion Service NACE SP0388 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection of Internal Submerged Surfaces of Carbon Steel Water Storage Tanks NACE RP0178 Plastic Weld Comparator NACE RP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates NACE RP0287 Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces Using a Replica Tape Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 9 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 6. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA): 1915.35 Standards - 29CFR Painting 1926.62 Standards – 29 CFR Lead 7. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): SSPC-VIS 1 Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning SSPC-VIS 3 Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Power and Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC-VIS 4 Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Waterjetting SSPC Vol. 1 Good Painting Practices SSPC-AB1 Mineral and Slag Abrasives SSPC-AB2 Cleanliness of Recycled Ferrous Metallic Abrasives SSPC-AB3 Ferrous Metallic Abrasives SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP7 Brush - Off Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP10 Near - White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete SSPC-SP WJ-1 Low-Pressure Water Cleaning (LP WC) water performed at pressures less than 34-MPa (5,000 psig) SSPC-SP WJ-2 High-Pressure Water Cleaning (HP WC) performed at pressures from 34 to 70-MPa (5,000 to 10,000 psig) SSPC-SP WJ-3 High-Pressure Waterjetting (HP WJ) performed at pressures from 70 to 210-MPa (10,000 to 30,000 psig) SSPC-SP WJ-4 Ultra High-Pressure Waterjetting (UHP WJ) performed at pressures greater than 210-MPa (30,000 psig) SSPC-PA-1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting SSPC-PA-2 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness with Magnetic Gages SSPC-PA-3 Guide to Safety in Paint Application SSPC-Guide 6 (CON) Guide for Containing Surface Preparation Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations SSPC-Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 10 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 8. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ): a. 30 TAC Chapter 111, Subchapter A, Division 3, Abrasive Blasting of Water Storage Tanks Performed by Portable Operations. b. 30 TAC Chapter 290 Subchapter D, Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems. B. In the event of a conflict between the published standards, codes, and this Section, the more stringent requirement shall govern. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver coating products to the Site in original unopened containers, with manufacturer’s label and batch number attached. Do not apply products until the Owner’s field representative has approved the product for use. B. Use one location at each site for the storage of coating products. Protect the floor from spills and other damage. Protect the products from extreme heat or cold. Keep containers covered. Keep the storage rooms clean of trash and debris. Dispose of oily or used rags daily. Take precautions to prevent fires. The storage of flammable liquids shall comply with the City, State, or other fire codes. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL CONDITIONS: A. Do not apply coatings under conditions that are unsuitable for the production of good results. Remove trash and debris from enclosed buildings and thoroughly clean prior to application of coatings. Do not begin application of coatings in areas where other trades are working, or where construction activities result in airborne dust or other debris. Do not apply coatings in conditions which do not conform to the recommendations of the coatings manufacturer. B. Coatings shall only be applied when conditions fall within the parameters listed in the manufacturer’s printed data. C. Do not apply any coatings when weather conditions are unfavorable. In the event that climatic conditions are not conducive for best results, postpone application of coatings until conditions conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations and the provisions of this Section. D. Do not apply coatings to a wet or damp surface in wet or damp weather conditions, or when there is dust in the air. Surfaces exposed to direct sunlight shall be shaded by awnings or other protective devices while coatings are being applied. When necessary, provide temporary heating devices of a type that produces no fumes which will discolor the paint system. E. Heating and Dehumidification: 1. Dehumidification equipment may be used to control the environment in the reservoir wet area during surface preparation, coating application and coating cure. 2. Approved automatic real time monitoring equipment shall be provided. This equipment shall be used when no Contractor personnel are on site. 3. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, fabrication and quality control inspections, and all other incidentals required to control and maintain the Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 11 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B environment of the reservoir within the parameters stated in this Section and shall incorporate these and any other expenses into his bid. 4. The Owner reserves the rights, in the event the dehumidification equipment is not performing to the minimum requirements stated in this specification, to require the Contractor to modify and or add additional equipment to satisfy the conditions of this specification, at the sole cost to the Contractor. 5. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide adequate dehumidification equipment to meet this specification and Coating Manufacturer’s requirements. 6. In lieu of dehumidification, Corrline CorrX products may be utilized per the manufacturer’s written specifications. F. Force Ventilation: 1. Continuous forced fresh air ventilation shall be provided from beginning of the reservoir interior wet area surface preparation through final coating operations and coating curing. 2. Forced ventilation shall be supplied to the interior of the tank per the recoat time required by the coating manufacturer and at least 48 hours after the final coat has been applied. 3. Unless dehumidification equipment is used to provide ventilation of the reservoir interior, the roof vents and hatches shall be kept open and clear. 4. All reservoir, pedestal, dry riser and dry well openings susceptible to emissions during blasting, cleaning, and coating operations shall be properly fitted and secured with suitable dust collection devices to reduce the release of emissions. 5. From the beginning of interior wet and/or dry coating application and until this coating is cured, the Contractor shall monitor the air for the lower explosion limit (LEL) as published in the Coating Manufacturer’s product MSDS. 6. During coating curing and when no coatings are being applied inside the reservoir, the equipment shall be sized so that it is capable of changing the volume of air inside the entire reservoir a minimum of 1.5 to 2.0 times per hour. 7. Throughout the duration of ventilation, containment of blasting abrasives, removed coating, and applied coatings shall be maintained by use of proper filtration. 8. The ventilation system shall be in accordance with AWWA D102 and submitted to the Owner. 9. Contractor is responsible for supplying, installing and maintaining the forced ventilation system. 10. Ventilation during interior abrasive blasting can be limited to one air exchange per hour. 11. The above ventilation requirements are minimum requirements. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that the flow rate provided through the tank meets the curing requirements of the Coating Manufacturer and those of the Owner. Should additional ventilation be required by the Coating Manufacturer, the Contractor shall furnish additional ventilation at his expense. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 12 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B G. Containment System: 1. Private residences and public areas exist within 500 feet of the water storage tank site. Emissions from abrasive blasting operations shall be controlled as required by TAC 30, Chapter 111, Subchapter A, Division 3. 2. Provide a minimum SSPC Guide 6 (CON) Class 3A containment system when dry abrasive blasting at the tank site. 3. The ground surrounding the tank shall be protected from all debris, emissions, dust, and other materials generated in the cleaning operations with a minimum of two layers of polyethylene covered with plywood or the same material used for the perimeter containment system. Provide documentation that these requirements have been adhered to. 4. Containment is not required when blasting on the interior of a completely enclosed tank (i.e. roof is in place) as long as no visible emissions are created. 5. The Contractor shall ensure that no spent cleaning/blasting debris, dust, overspray, coating droplets, or emissions of any kind, escape to the atmosphere, the base of the tank, or adjacent buildings, private property, work sites, parking lots, etc. 6. The Owner reserves the right to stop Work or require containment, additional containment or different containment methods if the Contractor’s operations create a nuisance beyond the tank site property line in the sole opinion of the Owner, the Engineer, the Owner’s representative, any regulatory agency, or neighbor. All costs of providing an adequate containment system shall be included by the Contractor in the Base Bid. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials that are used and for any apparatus used to contain dust emissions, debris, overspray, and coating droplets. The containment system attachments to the tank shall be designed by a licensed professional engineer (P.E.) registered in the State of Texas not to impose excessive loading on the tank. The Contractor shall submit the P.E. designed, stamped, and signed details of the containment system on the tank. The containment system will place additional loads on the tank that the tank was not originally designed for. The Contractor shall reinforce the tank as necessary to prevent permanent deformation and to assure that no damage occurs to the tank. Any damage to the tank as a direct or indirect result of the containment system shall be repaired or sections replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Neither the Owner nor the Owner’s Engineer assumes any responsibility for the structural ability of the tank to support the containment system. 8. If complete containment of the tank is utilized to contain all cleaning dust, debris, emissions, paint droplets, and paint overspray, the complete containment shall include a full bonnet. 9. If tarps are used as part of the containment system, the tarps shall be an impervious, solid, flame-resistant material, reinforced with a fiber mesh and shall allow as much light as possible to pass through the material. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 13 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 10. If robotic or creeper-type cleaning devices are used, the robotic or creeper-type device shall meet the same containment criteria as that of the types of containment (lack of emissions). All overspray and paint droplets shall be contained on the tank site. 11. Review of the containment system for containing the spent cleaning dust, debris, emissions, overspray, and coating droplets shall not warrant the structural integrity of the containment system and shall not warrant the structural integrity of the tank to support the containment system. Nor shall review of the containment system warrant the ability of the system to contain spent cleaning dust, debris, emissions, and overspray. 12. Damage Contingency Plan: Prior to construction, the Contractor shall present a written plan for review by the Owner and Consultant concerning how dust and debris damage to automobiles will be removed. Approval of this plan shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility of settling claims, but is intended as an avenue to expedite and minimize such claims. H. Dust Collection: 1. The dust collection system shall at a minimum meet the requirements of a Type J1 Air Filtration system, as specified in Section 5.4.5.1 of the SSPC-Guide 6 (CON). 2. Contractor shall design, furnish and maintain dust collection measures for the Project as required creating a negative pressure within the containment system and/or adequate air flow within the tank interior. 3. The dust collection shall be operated during all abrasive blast cleaning and until the area is clean enough for coating application. The Contractor shall be responsible for all sizing, design of ductwork, etc., based upon the Contractor’s operations, number of blasters, duration of blasting, etc. 4. The Contractor shall also take precautions to avoid a vacuum from developing inside the tank. I. Working Conditions: 1. Provide adequate lighting at any location that coatings are being applied or testing is performed. Illumination shall be of sufficient intensity to achieve good results. Provide explosion-proof lighting when required. 2. Temporary ladders and scaffolds shall conform to applicable safety requirements. Erect temporary scaffolds where needed to cover large areas. Provide ladders or scaffolding during testing procedures. 1.09 GUARANTEES A. Protective coating shall be guaranteed for a period of 2 year from the date of the Owner’s acceptance of the Project. B. Coating Manufacturer shall issue to the Owner, 2 year warranty for materials. C. A warranty inspection shall be conducted in the eleventh and twenty third month following the Project’s Substantial Completion date. Any defective work discovered at this date shall be corrected by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents at no additional cost to the Owner. Other corrective measures may be required during the 1 year warranty Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 14 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B period and the Owner may request corrective measures any time during the warranty period. Owner is only required to contact Contractor to initiate warranty work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL COATING REQUIREMENTS A. All coatings shall be free of heavy metals such as arsenic, barium, chromium, selenium, silver, lead, mercury and cadmium. B. All interior coatings and products used on interior wet surfaces (all surfaces within the tank bowl) shall be certified by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), standard 61, for direct contact with potable water. C. All coatings shall be applied in strict conformance with the Coating Manufacturer’s published specifications and with this Section. D. To insure coating compatibility, Contractor shall use products of a single Coating Manufacturer for all coatings applied to the reservoir and/or its components, unless prior approvals are obtained in writing from the Owner and the Coating Manufacturer. E. All materials shall be delivered to the Site in original sealed containers with the date of manufacture and batch number stamped thereon by the Coating Manufacturer. Materials shall be subject to random observations by the Owner’s representative at the Site. F. No coating submitted or used on this Project shall have a VOC (volatile organic content) in excess of 360 grams/liter or 3.0 lbs./gal. G. Primers factory-applied shall be those specified. Notify manufacturers which shop prime coats will be required in order to be compatible with field-applied finish coats. Where equipment is purchased which has the manufacturer’s standard primer or a factory finish which is other than as specified in this Section, remove the factory-applied paint system or apply passivators or other special coatings as required to make the surface compatible with the finish coat specified. 2.02 COATING SCHEDULES A. IW-01 Tank Interior Wet Coating System: 1. Surface preparation: Field applied prime coat on new and existing steel: NACE No. 2/SSPC-SP 10 – Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning. 2. Application Method(s): Spray. All weld seams, gaps, edges, bolts and difficult areas to coat shall receive a stripe coat. 3. Preconstruction Priming: a. Preconstruction priming shall be in accordance with AWWA D102. Full removal of construction primer is not required if: 1) The primer is fully compatible with the specified paint system primer. A letter from the paint manufacturer certifying compatibility shall be submitted with coating submittal. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 15 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2) The primer has been tested and certified for potable water contact in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61. b. Weld seams and bare steel shall be cleaned to NACE No. 2/SSPC-SP 10 – Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning. c. Areas with adherent preconstruction primer shall be cleaned to NACE No. 4/SSPC SP-7 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. d. A full field coat of the specified prime coat shall be applied over the spot-cleaned bare steel and remaining preconstruction primer. e. Coating submittal shall include documentation from coating manufacturer indicating compatibility of preconstruction primer with specified coating system. 4. NSF 61 certified system (including all thinners and additives) to be one of the following and of the same manufacturer of all other coating products used on this Project: a. Sherwin-Williams: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Macropoxy 646 PW 3 - 6 mils Mill White Stripe Coat Macropoxy 646 PW 2 - 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat Macropoxy 646 PW 4 - 6 mils Light Blue Finish Coat Macropoxy 646 PW 5 - 6 mils Mill White Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 - 18 mils b. Carboline: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Carboguard 61 3 - 6 mils Mill White Stripe Coat Carboguard 61 2 - 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat Carboguard 61 4 - 6 mils Light Blue Finish Coat Carboguard 61 5 - 6 mils Mill White Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 - 18 mils c. PPG: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Amerlock 2 4 - 6 mils Mill White Stripe Coat Amerlock 2 2 - 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat Amerlock 2 4 - 6 mils Light Blue Finish Coat Amerlock 2 4 - 6 mils Mill White Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 - 18 mils d. Tnemec: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 16 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat N140 Pota-Pox Plus 3 - 6 mils Mill White Stripe Coat N140 Pota-Pox Plus 2 - 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat N140 Pota-Pox Plus 4 - 6 mils Light Blue Finish Coat N140 Pota-Pox Plus 5 - 6 mils Mill White Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 - 18 mils B. B. B. B. B. B. B. B. B. B. B. B. EN - 03 Tank Exterior System: 1. Finish coat shall be high gloss. 2. Surface Preparation: NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. 3. Application Method(s): Spray or Roller as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Brush shall only be used for touch up and stripe coating. Finish coat shall be sprayed, roller application will not be accepted. 4. Organic zinc-rich primer shall be minimum 80 percent zinc by weight. 5. Preconstruction Priming: a. Preconstruction priming shall be in accordance with AWWA D102. Full removal of construction primer is not required if the primer is fully compatible with the specified paint system primer. A letter from the paint manufacturer certifying compatibility shall be submitted with coating submittal. b. Weld seams and bare steel shall be cleaned to NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. c. Areas with adherent preconstruction primer shall be cleaned to NACE No. 4/SSPC SP-7 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. d. A full field coat of the specified prime coat shall be applied over the spot-cleaned bare steel and remaining preconstruction primer. 6. Three-coat system to be one of the following and of the same Manufacturer of all other coating products used on this Project: a. Sherwin-Williams: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Corothane I Galvapac 3 - 4 mils Gray Stripe Coat Acrolon 218 HS Beige Intermediate Coat Acrolon 218 HS 3 - 6 mils Beige Finish Coat FluoroKem HS 3.5 - 5 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 9.5 - 15 mils Logo FluoroKem HS 3.5 - 5 mils T.B.D. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 17 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. Carboline: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Carbozinc 859 4 - 6 mils Gray Stripe Coat Carbothane 133 HB Beige Intermediate Coat Carbothane 133 HB 3 - 5 mils Beige Finish Coat Carboxane 950 2 - 3 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 10 - 14 mils Logo Carboxane 950 2 - 3 mils T.B.D. c. PPG: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Amercoat 68HS 4 - 5 mils Gray Stripe Coat Amercoat 450HS Beige Intermediate Coat Amercoat 450HS 2 - 3 mils Beige Finish Coat Coraflon ADS Intermix 1.5 - 2.2 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 7.5 - 10.2 mils Logo Coraflon ADS Intermix 1.5 - 2.2 mils T.B.D. d. Tnemec: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Tneme-Zinc 90-97 2.5 - 3.5 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Endura-Shield Series 73 Beige Intermediate Coat: Endura-Shield Series 73 2.5 - 4.5 mils Beige Finish Coat: Series 700 Hydroflon 2.5 - 4 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 7.5 - 12 mils Logo: Series 700 Hydroflon 2.5 - 4 mils T.B.D. C. SS - 01 Interior/Exterior Equipment, Pumps, Motors, Valves and Piping that are shop primed with epoxy, alkyd, acrylic, or unknown primer type. 1. Finish Coat Colors: a. Potable water piping and valves - Light Blue. b. Valve hand wheels - Red. c. Overflow Drain Flap Valve - Gray. 2. Finish coat shall be high gloss. 3. Surface Preparation: a. Uncoated Pipe - Clean per SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning and then clean per NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 18 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. Field preparation of Shop Primed Surfaces: 1) Slag and weld metal accumulations and splatters not removed by the fabricator shall be removed in the field by chipping or grinding. Sharp edges shall be peened, ground or otherwise blunted. 2) Clean per SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. 3) Areas adjacent to welds or any area where shop primer has been damaged shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning and SSPC SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning preparation and re-primed. All edges adjacent to damaged primer shall be feathered. 4) If damage is too extensive or uneconomical to touch up or if the existing primer shows signs of wear or weathering, the entire item shall be re-cleaned and coated in accordance with NACE No. 4/SSPC-SP 7 - Brust Off Blasting using fine (30 to 100 mesh) abrasive. Welds and irregular surfaces shall receive a stripe coat of the specified primer prior to the application of the first field coat. 5) 100 to 200 grit sandpaper shall be used to roughen the surface and feather edges of the existing coating system. 6) Coatings and edges of metal to be coated shall be rounded to a minimum of 1/16 inch radius of chamfered a minimum of 1/16 inch at an angle of 45- degrees. 7) Provide final solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP 1, after SSPC SP2, SP3 and SP7 preparation prior to coating. 8) Motors, electrical, etc. shall be protected from damage during abrasive blasting. 4. Application Method(s): Spray or brush. Brush shall be used for touch up and stripe coating. 5. Three-coat system to be one of the following and of the same Manufacturer of all other coating products used on this Project: a. Sherwin-Williams: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Epoxy Mastic II 4 –6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat Macropoxy 646 Beige Intermediate Coat Macropoxy 646 5 - 10 mils Beige Finish Coat Hi-Solids Polyurethane 3 - 5 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 13 - 25 mils b. Carboline: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Carbomastic 15 4 - 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat Carboguard 60 Beige Intermediate Coat Carboguard 60 4 - 6 mils Beige Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 19 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Finish Coat Carbothane 134HG 2 - 4 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 10 - 16 mils c. PPG: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Amerlock 2/400 AL 5 - 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat Amerlock 2/400 Beige Intermediate Coat Amerlock 2/400 5 - 6 mils Beige Finish Coat Amercoat 450HS 2 - 3 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 - 15 mils d. Tnemec: Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Chembuild Series 135 4 - 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II Beige Intermediate Coat N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 4 - 6 mils Beige Finish Coat 1074 Endura-Shield II 2 - 5 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 10 - 17 mils 2.03 COATING REPAIR A. 100 percent solids epoxy gels may be used for spot repairs for areas where a faster cure or moisture cured application requires it. B. All repairs in contact with potable water shall be NSF 61 approved. C. Repair products and procedures shall be approved by the coating manufacturer and submitted to the engineer. D. Acceptable Products: 1. Raven Lining System, Aquata Poxy A-6 applied at 10 - 12 mils. 2. Approved Equal. 2.04 CAULK SCHEDULE A. IC – 01 Tank Interior/Exterior System: 1. Sika Flex 1A or Approved Equal. 2. Product shall be NSF 61 approved for contact with potable water. 3. Color: a. Caulking within the interior of the tank shall be a contrasting color to the finish coat as approved by the Owner. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 20 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. Exterior and exposed caulking color shall be approved by the Owner. 4. Apply caulk in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation and as follows: a. Apply to flanges and dresser sleeves on pipes and valves after abrasive blasting or hand cleaning. Caulk shall be installed in the joints at a minimum of 1/2 inch deep filling the joints level but not outside or above the surfaces between the flanges and/or between the dresser-sleeves and pipe shall be filled. b. After application of the finish coat on the interior of the reservoir, apply caulking to seal roof laps, skip welded roof rafters, around bolts and on bolt threads and other areas not seal welded. 2.05 COLOR SELECTION A. Contractor shall submit drawdowns for Owner’s review and approval of final color selection for all exterior coating systems. B. Use a multi-color system coating for any surface receiving more than one coat. Each coat shall be tinted differently from the preceding coat in a manner that will allow the various coats to be easily distinguished. Colors shall generally be from light to dark shades, but the Contractor may have the option to select tint shades to insure coats will receive adequate coverage without bleeding or otherwise showing through the preceding coat. C. Piping and equipment shall be color coded in accordance with the requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) or as indicated above. 2.06 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. Abrasive materials used shall be non-carcinogenic when properly used, properly graded, be sharp, have proper angularity, and be clean and free of contaminants including lead, chromium, cadmium, arsenic, chlorides, dirt, oil, etc., such as steel grit or approved equal. B. All expendable abrasives shall meet SSPC-AB 1 and all abrasives shall meet the requirements of SSPC-AB 1, Class A for silica content with less than 1 percent silica by weight before blasting. C. Steel grit shall meet the requirements of SSPC-AB 3, for new and re-manufactured steel abrasives. Any steel grit used on this Project shall be sampled before use by the Owner’s representative and the Contractor. Contractor shall have the samples sent to a laboratory for atomic absorption testing for total lead, cadmium, chromium and arsenic. The steel grit shall not be used until the results of the atomic absorption testing are submitted to the Owner and indicate that the total lead levels are less than 1000 ppm (<0.1 percent). Test shall be used for abrasives used in both shop and field blasting. D. The grade shall be of such size as to achieve an acceptable anchor pattern or surface profile as required by the Coating Manufacturer. E. Silica sand shall not be used as a blast abrasive. F. Re-used abrasive shall meet SSPC-AB 2, Specification for Cleanliness of Recycled Ferrous Metallic Abrasives. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 21 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall be handled and applied in accordance with the Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. No coatings shall be applied while water is in the reservoir. C. All coating material for the exterior topcoat shall be mixed from one batch number. Batching should occur so that the shelf life extends beyond the end of the Project. D. All blasting and coating equipment shall be in first class condition and comply with all recommendations of the Coating Manufacturer and these specifications. The Owner reserves the right to have the Contractor immediately repair, modify or remove equipment functioning poorly or creating a nuisance as determined by the Owner. E. Do not apply any coating to machinery, piping, or other surfaces before testing has been completed and systems approved. Any damage to coatings resulting from subsequent corrective procedures shall be stripped back to bare metal and repainted with the appropriate paint system as directed by the Engineer. F. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation shall be coated prior to installation, or shall be coated and approved in stages as the Work is installed. G. At least 7 days shall be allowed for drying of finished surfaces before any machinery can be placed into service. H. Do not apply coating over nameplates or other identification plaques. Mask such plates and keep protected. Remove tape and polish nameplates after painting is complete. I. Coating application procedures shall conform to the standards of craftsmanship as discussed in the Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1 “Good Painting Practice”. J. All thinning shall be as per the Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations. Use only those thinners expressly approved by the Manufacturer for the coatings used on this Project. All thinners used with interior surface coatings shall be those tested and approved by NSF in conjunction with the NSF approved coating materials. Do not allow thinners to be stored in unmarked containers at any time. K. Proper illumination equipment shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with SSPC Guide 12. Explosion-proof lights and electrical equipment shall be provided. Whenever required by the Owner’s representative and/or Owner, the Contractor shall provide additional illumination and necessary supports to cover all areas to be inspected. The level of illumination for inspection purposes shall be determined by the Owner’s representative or Owner. Project lighting shall not interfere with existing residences or schools. Complaints from adjacent residential neighbors shall require Contractor to modify lighting plan to aleve complaint. Project lighting is considered subsidiary work relating to various bid items of the Contract. L. The Contractor shall provide covers and plugs for the intake, discharge and drain piping at the point where the pipe enters the water compartment to prevent debris, or any other foreign matter from entering the water mains. The covers and plugs shall remain in place from beginning of the job until just prior to filling the reservoir for disinfection. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 22 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B M. Grating or grills shall be securely attached to all openings not otherwise secured at the end of work each day until work commences again. Gratings or grills shall be used on all openings until the reservoir is secured for service. Grates or grills shall be of at least 1/4- inch wire mesh, with a minimum of two square inch mesh openings and a maximum of six square inch openings, to allow adequate free air passage and reservoir protection. N. The Engineer shall approve surfaces for application of coatings at each stage. Any material that is coated prior to the Engineer’s approval shall be stripped back to bear metal and repainted. O. Cleaning and coating shall be scheduled such that dust and other materials from adjoining work will not contaminate wet or newly coated surfaces. P. Roof plates shall be jacked off of rafters during abrasive blasting and during coating operations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Shop Surface Preparation: Clean and degrease surfaces prior to abrasive blasting per SSPC- SP 1. Proposed method shall be documented in the coating plan. Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting as specified and apply shop prime coat. Shop primed steel plates shall not have primer extended within 4 inches along all edges to be welded. All primer within 4 inches of an area to be welded shall be removed prior to welding. Welding of painted services will not be allowed. B. Field Surface Preparation: After erection and prior to touch-up priming, remove all surface contamination including dirt, dust, oil, and other foreign matter per SSPC-SP 1. All weld slag, spatter, rough welds and other sharp or rough areas shall be removed. All rusted, abraded and unpainted areas shall be abrasive blast cleaned as specified. Touch up prime coat with primer as specified. C. All applicable equipment shall be electrically grounded as required and shall have clean operating gauges, moisture traps, etc. D. Effective oil and water separators combined with after coolers or deliquescent dryers shall be used in compressed air lines serving abrasive blasting operations to remove detrimental oil and moisture from the air. Compressors may be tested periodically by the Owner’s representative for oil and water contamination of compressed air per ASTM D4285. All compressor units found to produce unacceptable amounts of oil and or water shall be replaced with a compressor that is acceptable. E. If the following conditions exist or are prevalent, surface preparation and coating shall be delayed or postponed until conditions are favorable. Each day’s coating shall be completed in time to permit the film sufficient drying time prior to damage by atmospheric conditions or changes. No surface preparation shall begin or coating applied: 1. When the surface, air or material is below or above the Manufacturer’s printed instructions. 2. When surfaces are wet or damp. 3. During weather conditions of rain, snow, fog or mist. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 23 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. When the air and steel temperature is less-than or equal to 5o F above the dew point temperature. 5. If the relative humidity is above 85 percent. 6. When it is expected that the air and/or surface temperature will be below or above the Coating Manufacturer’s recommended temperatures within 4 hours after applications of coating, minimum. Coating manufacturer may require additional time between application and temperature and weather changes. F. All pre-assembled shop primed items shall be prepared in accordance with these specifications and inspected by the Owner’s representative before and after priming. G. For both immersion and non-immersion service, all sharp edges and welds shall be ground smooth to a rounded contour and all weld splatter shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. H. Weld profiles shall conform to NACE RP0178, Profile ‘D’. I. Abrasive Blasting: 1. Blasting abrasive may be left on the tank floor while painting the interior roof and walls provided no paint is applied to the walls within 10 feet of the floor. 2. Shrouding or recovery of all blast material will be mandatory during all exterior blasting. 3. The TCEQ has established, under Regulation I, Control of Air Pollution and Visible Emissions from Particulate Matter, Standard 30 TCEQ 111.131, 111.133, 111.135, 111.137, and 111.139 titled “Abrasive Blasting of Water Storage Tanks Performed by Portable Operations”. All Work shall be performed in accordance with these regulations and are hereby made part of this Section by reference. Questions and information regarding these regulations should be addressed to: Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P.O. Box 13087 Austin, Texas 78711-3087 (512) 908-1000 4. The Contractor shall contain all waste and process discharge in accordance with the accepted methods for the process and materials that are in abatement. 5. Air filtration/dust collectors shall be used in conjunction with the dehumidification and/or ventilation equipment during blasting operations. 6. Where abrasive blast cleaning will not remove or properly prepare metal surfaces, hand and/or power tool cleaning shall be used to remove such conditions as weld splatter, laminations and radius-sharp edges. Hand tool or power tool shall be used on areas less than 2 foot diameter or smaller or on corners and edges of the reservoir and its internal support members. 7. All abrasive blast equipment shall be equipped with, including but not limited to the following: a. Noise reducing devices. b. Hose coupling safety devices. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 24 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. Electrical grounding devices. d. Moisture traps and filters. e. Fresh air hoods for all blasters. f. ”Dead Man” switches on all blast hoses. g. Air Dryers. J. Surface profile shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s printed requirements. K. The adequacy of the preparation of surfaces shall be determined by comparing the surface with SSPC VIS 1, SSPC VIS 3, SSPC VIS 4 and NACE RP0178. 3.03 APPLICATION A. After abrasive blast cleaning, dust and spent abrasive shall be removed from the surfaces by air blasting and brush sweeping. The prime coat shall be applied as soon as possible after the blasting and surface cleaning is completed, inspected and approved by the Inspector. B. Blasted surfaces shall be coated before rust forms on the surface. All blasted surfaces shall be coated to within 6 inches of the edge of a blasted area. No visible rust shall be coated under any circumstances, including rust bloom or if discoloration has occurred, regardless of elapsed time between blasting and coating. C. Provide mist coat as recommended by the Coating Manufacturer. D. The Contractor shall apply each coat at the rate and in the manner specified by the Coating Manufacturer, except as may be modified herein. If material has thickened or must be diluted for application, coating shall be built up to the same dry film thickness as specified for each coat of the complete system. E. Maximum and minimum DFT shall be per the supplied Coating Manufacturer’s printed requirements and as required by this Section. F. The Contractor and painting technicians shall be responsible application of coating system and shall have current applicator certifications from the Coating Manufacturer. Submit certifications with coating submittal. Manufacturer shall certify that coating system is compatible with the tank’s cathodic protection system. G. No coating shall be used which has an expired shelf or pot life. H. Coating shall be applied by skilled workmen and shall be brushed out or sprayed evenly, without runs, crazing, sags, or other blemishes. I. Sand between coats to remove over spray and dry fall. J. Apply the first coat to the surface, including cutting in around edges, before the second coat is applied. The second coat and any successive coats shall not to be applied before notifying the Owner’s field representative and obtaining approval. Each coat shall be tested before the successive coat is applied. K. The coating curing period shall be adjusted to compensate for less than adequate weather conditions, as recommended by the Coating Manufacturer, for complete curing of the entire coating system. The full drying time recommended by the manufacturer shall be allowed. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 25 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B L. Coating shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner to facilitate proper inspection control. M. Where a roller or brush is used to apply the coating, additional coats may be necessary to achieve the recommended dry film thickness and/or to achieve total coverage of the underlying surface. Coated surfaces shall be totally free of all roller nap, roller marks, brush bristles and brush marks. N. When using conventional coating spray equipment for coating operations, effective oil and water separators combined with after coolers or deliquescent dryers shall be used in compressed air lines to remove detrimental oil and moisture from the air. Separators shall be placed as far as practical from the compressor. Compressors may be tested periodically by the Owner’s representative for oil and water contamination of compressed air. Testing shall follow ASTM D4285 “Standard Test Method of Indicating Oil and Water in Compressed Air”. All compressor units found to produce unacceptable amounts of oil and or water, as determined by results of ASTM D4285 test data and interpretation of data by the Owner’s representative shall be replaced with a compressor that is acceptable. O. To the extent possible, the interior and exterior of all piping entering through the walls of the reservoir tank shall be blasted and recoated the same as their respective reservoir walls. The interior of piping entering through the reservoir floor shall be blasted and recoated the same as the interior of the reservoir. Methods of recovering blast material from the inside of the pipes shall be submitted and approved by the Owner. P. Protect adjacent materials from damage, including over spray or spillage. Provide drop cloths or other protective tarps to cover floors, equipment or other adjacent materials. 3.04 STRIPE COAT A. Stipe coat shall be applied by brush and thinned according to written Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations and applied to all welds, weld seams, tack welds (new and old), edges, bolts, rivets, ladder rails and rungs, seamed corners, joints of any kind and locations where brackets, lugs and other difficult to coat surfaces exist. Stripe coat on all welds and weld seams shall extend 2 inches minimum above, below and beyond all welded sections. B. Stripe coat shall occur in coating system layering as stated in Coating Schedule. C. Stripe coat is accomplished by moving the brush back and forth in a scrubbing motion working primer into all crevices. Stripe coat shall be performed with a high quality bristle brush using primer that has been thinned according to manufacturer’s instructions. Bristles left on the surface shall be removed before the coating dries. If bristles are discovered after the coating has dried, the bristle shall be removed, the coating removed, and the area correctly re-coated at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Stripe coating shall be tinted such that it can be easily distinguished from the other coats. 3.05 FINISH A. All primer, intermediate and finish coats shall be inspected visually and shall be free of all sags, runs, bubbles, drips, waves, laps, unnecessary brush marks, over spray, environmental contaminants or other physical defects, including shadows, and be uniform in color, texture and gloss. All coatings shall be applied in a professional manner to achieve the specified dry Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 26 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B film thickness (DFT) leaving a smooth and uniform coating. Sand between coats to remove over spray and dry fall. B. Finish coat shall have a uniform color and texture. Any “bleed through” will not be accepted and Contractor shall provide additional coatings as required to provide a uniform color. 3.06 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES A. The Contractor shall take every precaution available while cleaning and coating the reservoir and pedestal to avoid dusting or spraying the reservoir property, nearby residences and vehicles with either blast debris or over-spray coating. Shrouding is mandatory for exterior abrasive blasting and for spray application of coatings. All shrouding, containment and disposal of waste will be in conformance with TCEQ Requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for properly loading, securing, transporting and disposing of all waste. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s representative, modifications or repairs are necessary to the shroud or ground cover apparatus to provide improved containment of blasting or coating operations, blasting and coating operations shall stop until the Owner’s representative indicates to the Contractor that adequate repairs are complete. C. Prior to any surface preparation, the ground surrounding the reservoir and pedestal shall be covered with tarps or a similar ground cover that will allow for recovery of paint scraps and blast media. Adequate protection of all areas surrounding the tank shall be provided during coating application. D. The Contractor is responsible for complete cleanup of any and all areas contaminated by blast debris. E. The Contractor is responsible for any and all damages to on-site facilities, residences, vehicles and/or public health, including any fines or penalties resulting from improper containment during blasting or coating of the reservoir and pedestal. F. If present at the Site, all security equipment (light poles, camera poles, microwave beam poles, etc.) shall be protected by construction of temporary fences or barricades around above ground devices (4 feet shall remain clear of construction materials and activities around all security equipment devices). 3.07 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Promptly remove trash and debris resulting from painting operation from the Site. Remove drop cloths, masking tapes and other protective coverings. Remove paint spills, splatters, overlap of paint from adjacent material and other defects. Spot paint nicks and other defects. B. Remove paint containers and waste products. Thoroughly clean paint storage rooms, removing spilled paint from walls and floors. 3.08 ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall observe all surfaces of the reservoir with the Owner within 24 months after the reservoir work has been accepted for Substantial Completion and placed in service. If an observation date has not been established within 24 months after the reservoir has been placed in service, the anniversary observation shall be considered waved, except in the Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 27 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B event the Owner is unable to remove the reservoir from service due to extremely long dry climate conditions or otherwise adverse weather conditions or due to unexpected breakdowns in the distribution system. The date of anniversary observation may be extended for a period of time not to exceed 24 months beyond the date of Final Completion and acceptance of the work. B. If failures in any portion of the reservoir surface, exceeds 5 percent of that portion, as determined by the Owner, then for that portion, the entire coating system shall be completely removed, re-coated and re-tested in accordance with the specifications herein. In the event any portion of the reservoir surface requires repair, partial or complete, a second anniversary observation shall be made unless the Owner otherwise deems it not to be necessary. If subsequent anniversary observations are made, time stipulations, coating removal, repair; re-testing requirements shall be the same as provided for in this Specification. Each subsequent repair will have a warranty observation to occur within 24 months after the repair is completed. C. The Owner will isolate the reservoir from the distribution system and drain the reservoir. The Contractor shall open, clean out, high-pressure water wash and rinse the tank prior to the anniversary observation. After observation of the tank is complete and repair work accepted by Owner, the Contractor shall follow disinfection procedures specified. Disinfection of the tank, after anniversary observation, shall be by Owner as described above should Contractor meet cleanliness requirements. D. The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate equipment including, lighting, ventilation, rigging, cable climbers, mirrors, inspection equipment, and sufficient man- power to clean, disinfect and move equipment and tools around the reservoir, etc., as may be necessary to facilitate complete observation of all interior surfaces. The Contractor shall bear all costs of the anniversary observation and shall incorporate such costs into his bid. E. Any location, including but not limited to locations where a coating has peeled off, bubbled, blistered, chipped, or cracked, etc., or where pinholes and/or holidays are present and locations where rusting or corrosion is evident, will be considered a failure or defect of the coating system and shall be repaired as required. Repairs will be made at areas or locations where coating failures are found, even though metal surfaces may be protected a cathodic protection system. F. Methods of testing for coating failure which, may or may not be evident, shall include, but not be limited to, adhesion tests, film thickness measurement, holiday testing, etc. Testing may be non-destructive or destructive. The Contractor, at his expense, shall repair all areas where destructive tests are performed. G. The anniversary repair work shall be completed within an agreed time period as determined by the Owner and Contractor. All repairs shall be made as per the Coating Manufacturer’s written repair work instructions or that which is approved and acceptable to the Owner and completed within 90 calendar days of the anniversary observation. Holiday testing will be used to check all reservoir interior coating repairs, including the interior roof. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 22 PLUMBING Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Meters & Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 05 19-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 22 05 19 METERS & GAUGES FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 W ORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pressure gauges and cocks. Dial gauges shall indicate pressure on a graduated dial by means of a pointer utilizing an elastic element (Bourdon tube or coil), and actuating linkage as necessary for indicating pressure. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures”. A. Submit a complete list of the proposed meters, gauges, and appurtenances specified herein along with their specific location of use on the project, model numbers, product data sheets and shop drawings. B. Record Data shall include: 1. Product Data Sheets 2. Catalog Cut Sheets C. Provide product information in O&M Manual. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. PRESSURE GAUGES 1. The gauges shall be the Manufacturer's standard commercial product. The gauges shall be new and shall embody the design characteristics stated for the respective class, size, type, etc. scheduled herein. Gauges 4 inch and smaller shall be glycerin filled with bronze or brass cases. Gauge larger than 4 inch shall be glycerin filled with stainless steel cases. Inlet shall be 1/4" size with bottom or back connections as indicated. 2. Class 1 gauges shall be pressure-indicating. Class 2 gauges shall be vacuum gauge-designed for vacuum indications. Class 3 gauges, shall indicate pressure or vacuum. 3. Gauges shall be as manufactured by Marshalltown Instruments, Ashcroft (Dresser Industries), Weksler, or approved equal. B. PULSATION DAMPENERS: At each pressure gauge, furnish and install a pulsation dampener, Mid- West Model 150, Vari-Damp Pulsation Dampener, Or approved equal. C. GAUGE COCKS: Gauge cocks for isolating standard product gauges shall be heavy duty brass with tee handle and male and female ends for 1/4" bottom threaded connections. 200 psi minimum pressure rating. Gauge and sample cocks and nipples for gauges will be provided by Merit Brass or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Provide tap and connecting piping to install the pressure gauges. Connection shall comprise of brass or bronze nipples, fittings and bronze gauge cock. Install the gauge and protect the gauge until project acceptance by the Owner. Gauges shall only be connected to piping using welded on bosses or “thread- o-lets”. Direct tapping of piping will not be accepted. Attachment 3Item 12 Meters & Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 05 19-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.02 SCHEDULES The pressure gauges to be furnished as part of the pumping system are listed below. The list does not include the gauges to be furnished as part of the mechanical or plumbing equipment. The list has been prepared to facilitate takeoff and may or may not include all pressure gauges necessary, which is the responsibility of the Contractor. GAUGE LOCATION CLASS DIA. SIZE PRESSURE RANGE NUMBER REQ Riser Pipe 1 3 1/2"0-100 psi 1 LPP Prosper EST Top Landing 6” Drain Line Piping (Altitude Gauge)1 3 1/2” 0-230 Feet of Water 0-100 psi 1 Altitude Range shall be in 2-foot and 1 psi maximum graduations. efer to Drawings and Instrumentation Specifications for instruments not included in this Section END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Piping and Appurtenances 22 10 00.01 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 22 10 00.01 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING AND APPURTENANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install miscellaneous piping, fittings, and appurtenances. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Installation Details 3. Product and Engineering Data. 4. Warranty 1.03 GUARANTEES A. The product shall have a 2-year warranty from acceptance in accordance with the front end contract documents. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE COUPLINGS A. Dresser style pipe couplings where shown on the Plans shall be Dresser Industries, Smith- Blair, Romac or approved equal, for same pressure rating as adjoining pipe. Couplings shall comprise a steel center band, steel gland rings, gaskets, and bolts. Provide thrust harness in accordance with AWWA Manual M11 where shown on the Plans. Couplings shall be AWWA C219 compliant and suitable for joining the respective pipe type and materials. B. Victaulic style couplings shall be in accordance with AWWA C606. Pipe shall have shouldered or collared ends for positive thrust anchorage. C. Split-sleeve mechanical couplings shall consist of housing, gasket assembly, bolts and nuts, and end rings as required for restraint. Couplings shall be Depend-O-Lok as manufactured by Brico Industries, Inc., or an approved equal. Coupling housing shall be manufactured from ASTM A36 Carbon Steel. Couplings installed underground shall be FBE (fusion bonded epoxy) coated and receive a Bitumastic coating. D. Where Victaulic couplings or restrained Dresser type couplings are shown on the Drawings for water service pipes, split-sleeve “F by F” type couplings will be allowed, provided the split-sleeve coupling is suitable for the pressures and thrust requirements, and fits in the space available for coupling. Where unrestrained Dresser couplings are shown, split-sleeve “F by E” type couplings will be allowed. E. All couplings shall be suitable for minimum of 200 psig working pressure. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Piping and Appurtenances 22 10 00.01 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. All hardware associated with the couplings and appurtenances shall at a minimum be Type 304 stainless steel. Coating shall be fusion bonded epoxy (FBE). 2.02 RESTRAINED FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTERS AND DISMANTLING JOINTS A. Restrained flange adapters shall be used as indicated in lieu of threaded or welded flanged spool pieces. Flanged adapters shall be made of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and have flange bolt circles that are compatible with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 (350#/Class). All connection hardware shall be stainless steel. B. All hardware associated with the couplings, adapters, and appurtenances shall at a minimum be Type 304 stainless steel. Coating shall be fusion bonded epoxy (FBE). C. Restraint for flange adapter shall consist of a plurality of individual actuated gripping wedges to maximize restraint capability. Torque limiting actuating screws shall be used to ensure proper initial set of gripping wedges. Adaptors shall be epoxy coated and lined. D. The flange adapters shall be capable of deflection during assembly or permit lengths of pipe to be field cut to allow a minimum 0.6 inch gap between the end of the pipe and the mating flange without affecting the integrity of the seal. E. For installations adjacent to valves, and where specifically shown on the Drawings restrained dismantling joints shall be used in lieu of flange adapters in order to enable equipment removal and reinstallation without moving other connecting piping. Additional flanges shall be provided on piping accordingly to enable dismantling joint installation. F. The flange adapters and dismantling joints shall be suitable for minimum of 200 psig service and manufactured by Smith-Blair, EBAA Iron, Romac Inc. or approved equal. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Except where otherwise indicated or specified, expansion joints shall be single arch spool type with control unit. Expansion joints shall be fabricated of synthetic elastomers and fabric with metallic reinforcement. Joints shall be provided with split stainless steel retaining rings. Flanges and retaining rings shall be drilled to match standard 125-pound ANSI B16.1. 2.04 MODULAR MECHANICAL EXPANDING RUBBER SEAL The pipe to existing wall penetration closures shall be “Link-Seal” as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation - Belleville, Mich. 48111. Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking EPDM links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening. Links shall be loosely assembled with stainless steel hardware to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a composite pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide an absolutely water- tight seal between the pipe and wall opening. The seal shall be constructed so as to provide electrical insulation between the pipe and wall, thus reducing chances of cathodic reaction between these two members. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Piping and Appurtenances 22 10 00.01 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.05 PIPE SUPPORTS A.Adjustable pipe supports under valves and piping shall be Grinnell Figure 264 or approved equal, comprising cast iron saddle, threaded nipple, and reducer assembly with extra strength steel pipe and floor flange. For special sizes and shapes of valves, saddle shall be fabricated steel to fit valve or piping being supported. Submittals shall include the design loading and spacing as applicable to the specific pipe size/s, finishes, and welding fabrication and installation shop drawings for review and approval. Valves shall be supported individually. All pipe support systems shall at a minimum have a G90 hot dipped galvanized finish. 2.06 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Copper pipe for water service shall be Type “K” hard-drawn copper tubing. Connections shall be made using cast brass or copper sweat fittings and Sil-Fos or approved equal hard solder. Union adaptors shall be used at ends of copper lines and at connections to equipment so that piping can be disconnected without unsoldering the joints. B. Joints in copper piping shall be soldered with ANSI/ASME B32, Grade 95TA solder. Before making up joints, copper shall be cleaned to bright metal with emery cloth and treated with nonacid type flux. 2.07 FLEXIBLE BALL JOINT A. Flexible Ball Joints shall be EBAA Iron, Inc. Flex-900 Flexible Ball Joint or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Piping shall be carefully handled and installed to prevent damage to the pipes. Potable water lines shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 33 10 13 “Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution.” The Contractor shall furnish aluminum sleeves for lines passing through walls, floors, beams, roof slabs, etc. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Lines shall be tested for leaks. Leaks and defects shall be repaired or replaced, and re-tested until no leaks or defects are discovered. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational electrical systems, as specified herein. B. This Section, as well as Division 1, concerns all other Sections in Division 26, and shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS' QUALIFICATIONS Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, trained and experienced in their crafts, and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division. A licensed Journeyman shall be on site at all times when electrical work is being performed. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. B. WORKMANSHIP Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1.Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 2.Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details in AutoCAD format. 3.Complete interconnection and point to point wiring diagrams in AutoCAD format for all field control and instrumentation wiring between instruments, electrical equipment, starters, VFDs, etc.. A hard copy shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the final AutoCAD files being submitted. Interconnection/wiring diagrams shall include cable numbers, wire tags, actual equipment terminal strip numbers, etc. 4.The Contractor shall provide a monthly report to the Owner/Engineer for review stating that the Master Electrician has been to the job site and thoroughly reviewed the work. The report shall be signed by the Master Electrician and include the data and time the Master Electrician was on site. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 5.Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the shop drawings, submittals, spare part lists, schematics, final wiring diagrams with any changes made during start-up and maintenance procedures. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 6.Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment specifications, the following information shall be included for motors: a.Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified b.Make and motor type c.Brake horsepower of the motor d.Locked rotor current at full load e.Motor efficiency at full load (3-phase motors only) f.Starting torque g.Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (3-phase only) h.Speed of the motor at full torque i.Full load current j.Service factor 7.The Contractor shall: a.Prepare, and keep up-to-date, the Record Drawings and detailed construction drawings; b.Record the exact locations of each of these differences, sizes and details of the Construction Work as executed, with cross-references to and other requirements on the Record Drawings. c.Keep the Record Drawings on the Work Site; d.Upon completion of the Work, or at such other time as may be determined by the Engineer, submit the Record Drawings and copies to the Owner’s Representative in accordance with the Owner’s Requirements. e.Underground Interference drawing showing all underground duct banks, ground rods, ground conductors, pipes, piers, vaults, manholes, pull boxes, etc. that clearly identifies the location and routing of these systems. All interferences shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention. f.Provide revised drawings in AutoCAD noting any changes made to equipment during start-up. 8.The Contractor shall provide an 11x17 wall mounted copy of the one-line diagram in the electrical room as follows: a.The copy shall be in AutoCAD format, black and white and shall include all changes to the sheet from addenda, field orders and change orders. b.The copy shall be framed in a picture frame with plexiglass. The copy of the sheet shall lay flat against the glass without any wrinkles and other material necessary for the copy to lay flat shall be provided within the picture frame. 1.04 STANDARDS A.Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes, ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Local utility companies Local Electrical Ordinance Rural Electrification Association (REA) Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) B. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. C. Contractor shall submit the company names of the electrical contractor with the bid documents. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Follow the Manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials. Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Major electrical equipment shall be stored indoors and space heaters energized where applicable. Equipment that will be stored indoors for an extended period of time and that do not have space heaters shall have a 100 watt incandescent light placed in it and energized to eliminate the build-up of condensation in the equipment. Coordinate with equipment manufacturer for storage requirements. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A.Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the work. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed. Final location shall be as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans, the Contractor shall before proceeding with the work prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer's review and approval. D. Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a different size, the contractor shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no cost to the owner. E. All enclosures for equipment unless specifically identified otherwise shall be NEMA 1, 14 gauge steel enclosures for indoor air conditioned areas and not exposed to a hazardous locations; NEMA 12, 304 stainless steel enclosures for indoor ventilated areas; or NEMA 4, FRP for rooms housing Chlorine; or NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for exterior applications and all other locations. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION A.Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the roof, exterior walls and floors. B. Install stainless steel sleeves for each conduit passing through floors. Extend sleeves 1-1/2" above the floor slab and grout watertight. The sleeve sizes shall permit the subsequent insertion of a properly sized conduit or raceway. C. Install PVC, pipe sleeves around the conduit and raceway which pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls. The inside diameter of the sleeves shall be at least 1/2" greater than the outside of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed into these sleeves, fill the annular space between the pipes and sleeves with mastic. The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be maintained. All below grade penetrations shall utilized Link-Seal. D. Submit location drawings and obtain Engineer approval prior to installing conduit penetrations through slabs, beams, and walls. Install stainless steel pipe sleeves around the conduit and raceway which pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls. The inside diameter of the sleeves shall be at least 1/2" greater than the outside of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed into these sleeves, fill the annular space between the pipes and sleeves with mastic. The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be maintained. E. Install steel reinforced concrete foundations below floor mounted battery banks, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and other floor mounted electrical equipment. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Concrete foundations shall not be less than 4" high. Neatly chamfer top edges. Concrete foundations shall be 6" wider and 6" longer than the base of the equipment being installed. Concrete shall be in accordance with Division 03, and shall be reinforced with a minimum of 6" x 6" #6 welded wire mesh. F. Route all conduits parallel to building lines, columns, or steel route conduits near to columns and roof beams. 2.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.03 PAINTING A. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 09. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless specifically indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation, re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment and raceway systems clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable condition for painting. 2.04 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING A.Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner’s representative, utility companies and Owner’s facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C. Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents, or to the conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the existing conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro-mulched with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery, ground cover, or plants as existed. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to weather conditions, contractor shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90-day year warranty on new turn and landscaping. E. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or as- built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.05 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. 2.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST A.Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install and test 600 volt wires and cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular wiring systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: TESTING Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended values. Megger tests shall be performed by a testing company with a minimum of 10 years experience. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Low voltage wire 2. Ground wire 3. Shielded cable 4. Terminations and Connections 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ICEA S-19-81/NEMA WC-3 Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy ICEA S-61-402/NEMA WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy NFPA 70 National Electrical Code ANSI/TIA/EIA 606A Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B UL 83 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables UL 1063 Machine Tool Wires and Cables ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wires ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium, Hard, Soft 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. B. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. C. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges, damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. D. Do not drop reels from any height. E. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the wire and cable. F. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat. G. Provide moisture protection by using manufacturer’s standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-healing end caps applied to both ends of cable. Do not remove end caps until cables are ready to be terminated. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Wires and cables shall be soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98% pure copper, UL83 and UL1063 listed, rated 600 volts and certified for continuous operation at maximum conductor temperature of 90 Celsius in dry locations and 75 Celsius in wet locations B. Conductors #8 or larger shall be stranded and conductors #14 shall be stranded. Utilize single conductors. C. Except for control, signal and instrumentation circuits and as specifically indicated on the plans the minimum conductor permitted is #12. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.02 WIRE MARKING 1. Wire marking shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code Article 310 and shall be printed on the wire insulation at 2 foot intervals. The printing method used shall be permanent and the color shall sharply contrast with the jacket color. 2. Wire marking shall include the U.L. label and necessary identification, including the Manufacturer, the number of conductors, size, conductor insulation type, sun- resistance, and other pertinent information. 2.03 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. SINGLE CONDUCTOR CABLES: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type XHHW-2 insulation. Wire shall be water tank tested and approved as machine tool wire, in accordance with National Machine Tool Builders Association. Wire in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. Conductors 38 or larger and conductors #14 shall be stranded. Wire shall be manufactured by Southwire, Okonite, Encore, General Cable, or Houston Wire & Cable. B. GROUND WIRE: Ground wire shall be Class B stranded tin-plated conductor without insulation in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulator as specified for low voltage wire. C. PAIRED SHIELDED CABLE: Individually and overall shielded minimum 18 gauge, 7/28 stranded, tinned copper conductors with .021" extruded PVC; .004" nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non-hygroscopic core tape, 100% coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and .050" minimum extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383 and shall be suitable for wet location and cable tray rated. Cables shall be manufactured by Alpha, Okonite, General Cable, Southwire, Belden, or Houston Wire & Cable. 2.04 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES A. CONNECTORS, COMPRESSION, COPPER, 600 VOLT: As manufactured by Burndy, Thomas & Betts, or Ideal Industries; of the appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards; two (2) holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 kcmil or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. All compression connectors shall be long-barrel type, no exceptions. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. 600 VOLT PLASTIC TAPE: Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company, No. 35.WIRENUTS: Silicone-based pre-filled spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering; UL listed for damp and wet locations. Wirenut shall meet requirements of UL 486D for Sealed Wire Connector Systems and shall be manufactured by Ideal Industries, Inc model 63, or as manufactured by ITT or Panduit. Wirenut shall be spring insulated, properly sized and resistant to vibration may be used for No.12 through No.10 solid gauge conductor for lighting and branch circuits only. C. SPLIT BOLTS: Kearney, Burndy, or Ilsco; shall be usable for connecting conductors which are both copper, both aluminum or one copper and one aluminum. Split bolts shall have a spacer between the two conductors, which it connects. D. MECHANICAL SET SCREW CONNECTOR: Blackburn HPS, ADR-ALCUL, GP or GT, Burndy or Ilsco; consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. E. RUBBER TAPE: Scotch 2210. F. VINYL TAPE: Scotch 88. G. ARC PROOFING TAPE: 3M “Scotch 77 Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape”. Fireproofing shall be done with a half-lapped layer of arc proofing tape, anchored at each end with a double wrap of 3M “Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Electrical Tape”. H. INSULATING RESIN: Scotch 3576, 3577, or 3578. I. POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS: Ferraz Shawmut, Ilsco or Allen-Bradley; rated for 600 VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.02 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place in accordance with the NEC and these specifications. Exception: Only flexible connections to motors shall be permitted to be installed after the installation of the remainder of the raceway system. The installation of these conductors shall be limited to exposure to damage for a maximum of one (1) week prior to installing flexible connection and making final terminations. Any conductors exposed to damage (i.e. not installed in raceway) longer than one (1) week shall be subject to rejection by the Owner and/or Engineer. If rejected, the cables shall be removed, discarded, replaced, reinstalled and retermination at the Contractor’s expense. 2. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 3. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the plans shall be in its own conduit. 4. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed, wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. 5. Except for hand-pulled conductors into raceways, all wire and cable installation shall be installed with tension-monitoring equipment. Where conductors are found to have been installed without tension-monitoring, the conductors and cables shall be immediately removed from the raceways, permanently identified as rejected material, and removed from the jobsite. New conductors and cables shall be reinstalled, tagged and raceways resealed, all at the Contractor’s expense. 6. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. Where pulling compound is used, use only UL listed compound compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway involved. 7. Where single conductors and cables in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means such as arc and fireproofing tapes, bundle throughout their exposed length all conductors entering from each conduit with nylon, self-locking, releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 4 inches on center. 8. Properly support cables in accordance with the NEC and manufacturer’s recommendations in all raceways. Provide strain relief as required. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 9. Arrange wiring in cabinets and panels neatly cut to proper length, remove surplus wire, and bundle and secure in an acceptable manner. Identify all circuits entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein and in specification section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.” 10. Cap spare conductors and conductors not terminated, with the UL listed end caps. 11. Where conductors pass through holes or over edges in sheet metal, remove all burrs, chamfer all edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. 12. For conductors that will be connected by others, provide at least 6 feet spare conductors in free standing panels and at least 2 feet spare in other assemblies. Provide additional spare conductor in any particular assembly where it is obvious that more conductor will be needed to reach the termination point. B. SPLICES 1. Power Conductors: Splice in junction boxes or at outlets only for lighting and receptacle branch circuits. Splices for all other circuits shall be disallowed. All splices are subject to the Engineer’s approval. Obtain approval from Engineer before installing any splices. a. For existing installations, splices of 120V circuits shall use twist-on wire nuts. 2. Control and Instrumentation Conductors: No splicing of control and instrumentation conductors shall be permitted between terminal points except as specifically indicated on the plans. 3. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 4. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together. 5. For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. If a splice or tap is below 3' above the final grade, fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so that the resin encapsulates conductor and spring materials. Conductor splices and taps inside the MCC, VFDs, panels, etc. shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. 6. For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a split bolt type of connector or a mechanical, set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single half-lapped layer or rubber tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the original conductor insulation thickness is achieved. If splice or tap is below 3' above the finished grade, the tape or splice shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. TERMINATIONS 1. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp on type spade connector applied on the wire end, Panduit PanTerm or approved equal. 2. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as required for tapping conductors at their load connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral, and ground conductors. 3. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to the inch-pound requirements of the NEC and UL. 4. Use crimp connectors on all stranded conductors. 5. Soldered mechanical joints insulated with tape will not be acceptable. 6. SINGLE CONDUCTORS: Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment without straining. Light switches and receptacles shall be connected with pig-tails and crimp-on connectors. 7. PAIRED SHIELDED AND TRIAD SHIELDED CABLE: Ground paired shielded and triad shielded cables at the instrument panel or starter end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded and triad shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables and digital control cables. Each termination of paired shielded or triad shielded cable shall be coated with silicone jelly after termination. The shield of pair shielded cable and triad shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. Each conductor and shield shall be landed on its own terminal. Sharing of shield shall not be allowed. D. GROUNDING 1. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. All connections to ground rods shall be of the fused type utilizing an exothermic welding process. 2. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic boxes and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor, which it houses. Clean the metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. Grounding connections to motors shall be to the grounding stud, which shall be threaded into the stationary frame; Use Burndy KC Servit, or approved equal. The ground wire shall not be lugged to a mounting bolt. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Ground wire shall be uninsulated tin plated copper sized as shown on the plans in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulation as specified for low voltage wire. Provide and size bonding conductors in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 4. Provide a bare uninsulated ground wire to run the entire length of all cable trays. The contractor shall bond to each section and to every enclosure served by conductors routed through the cable tray system. E. TESTING 1. Testing: All testing required shall be per Specification Section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements”. 2. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports and submit to the Owner/Engineer prior to final inspection. 3. Tests and Inspections: a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. c. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1) Test procedures used 2) Test results that comply with requirements. 3) Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. d. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 26 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: A. Grounding materials, equipment and processes. B. Product Data: For each type of product supplied. C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 5 ohms. Add ground rods as required to bring resistance to 5 ohms and connect to grounding system. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GROUND RODS: Copper-clad having a diameter of 3/4" and a minimum length of 10'. Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. GROUND CABLES: Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98% conductivity. Ground wire shall be Class B stranded tin-plated conductor without insulation in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulator as specified for low voltage wire. C. CONDUIT GROUND FITTINGS: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI Burndy Corp., type NE or Thomas & Betts No. 3951 series. D. GROUND ROD BOXES: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read “ground rod” on lid. Brooks Precast Model. “3-RT” or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an AASHO HS-20 rating. E. EXOTHERMIC WELDING PROCESS: CADWELD MATERIALS – as manufactured by ERICO products or approved equal. 2.02 PROCESSES A. All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be exothermically welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations. The use of mechanical type connectors is not acceptable. B. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as listed in MIL 419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc. 2.03 GROUNDING SYSTEM Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduits, fittings, anchor supports, thermite process materials and equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. Grounding system shall be installed and sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors. B. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes. Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not less than 12" below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as not to break ground cables or connections. D. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, non- metallic materials. E. Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. F. Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare tinned copper cable, in all other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding conductor. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Provide grounding conductors as required per the NEC. G. Metal conduits stubbed up into switchgear, motor control center or other electrical equipment shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the equipment ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with applicable sections of the National Electrical Code. H. Provide exothermic weld connection for extension to existing stub-up ground conductors. I. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. 2. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. J. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. K. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install a copper bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. L. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1-1/2” or larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run in parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps. Contractor shall provide bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code. M. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduit systems, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. N. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized in accordance with NEC article 250. O. Run a grounding cable the full length of each cable tray section and bond to each cable tray section. Provide #1/0 bare copper in cable tray. P. Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and rod used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the Owner’s Representative. Q. Ground rod shall be installed such that the top of the ground rod is 6” below grade and enclosed by a ground rod box. R. Install #1/0 AWG bare tinned copper ground cable that follows the route of the underground duct banks on top of the duct bank envelop, but in no case is embedded in the concrete. Run ground through the manholes. Tie ground cable to pump station main grounding system at both ends. S. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a sufficient length of #12 wire with green-colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal at the receptacle. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with the test instrument manufacturer’s recommendation using the fall of potential method. Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. All test equipment shall be provided under this section and approved by the Engineer. D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. G. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater than five ohms. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to bring the resistance to five ohms. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures” and shall include Record Data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Attachment 3Item 12 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. ERICO International Corporation. d.GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: 304 stainless steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded stainless steel. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION Attachment 3Item 12 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for RIGID METAL CONDUIT as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with stainless steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RIGID METAL CONDUIT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. Attachment 3Item 12 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.03 CONCRETE BASES A.Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 53, “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete” for 3000 psi concrete. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 33.01 CONDUITS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete conduit system for each type of electrical system. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings to include cut sheets of each material to be used on the project. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ANSI 80.5 ANSI/NEMA FB 1 Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing NEMA TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: 1. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Single strip, helically wound, interlocking, aluminum. Liquid tight conduit shall have an extruded, polyvinyl jacket over the flexible metal. Acceptable product shall be Anaconda Type UA. B. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Heavy wall, aluminum alloy 6063; low temper number, tube, free from defects and manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.5 standards and U.L. listed. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Indalex, Allied and Wheatland. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. PVC COATED RIGID ALUMINUM: Meeting the requirements of rigid aluminum conduit; 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating, U.L. 6A listed. Manufactured in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW-C-581, ANSI C80.5 standards, ETL Verified PVC-001 and U.L. listed. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. D. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: Schedule 40 high impact, polyvinylchloride, in accordance with Fed. Spec. W-C-1094 and U.L. listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Carlon, Cantex, and Certainteed. E. FITTINGS AND CONDUIT BODIES: 1. RIGID METAL CONDUIT: Threaded type material to match the conduit, in accordance with ANSI/NEMA FB1 and as manufactured by Appleton Form 35, Killark "O" Series, Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or RACO. 2. FLEXIBLE AND LIQUID TIGHT FITTINGS: In accordance with ANSI/NEMA FB1; cadmium- plated, malleable aluminum body and nut; aluminum ferrule; insulated throat; integrally-cast, external ground lugs, as manufactured by Appleton "ST" series, Hubbel, OZ Gedney Type 4QL, or RACO. 3. PVC CONDUIT: Solvent-welded, slip-on joints, in accordance with NEMA TC3, as manufactured by Carlon, CertainTeed. 4. CONDUIT SEALS: Explosion-proof, rigid metal conduit fitting as defined by NEC Article 500, and as manufactured by Crouse Hinds fitting with Chico "X" Fiber and Chico "A" compound or Appleton fitting with Apelco fiber and compound. Seal shall be same material as conduit. F. ELBOW AND BENDS: Rigid, nonmetallic conduit system shall use PVC-coated rigid Aluminum for all bends. Meeting the requirements of rigid steel conduit; 40 mil PVC, exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. Other conduit systems shall use the same material as the conduit with which they are installed. G. BUSHINGS: High impact, thermosetting, phenolic insulation; 150 degrees C.; as manufactured by Appleton "BBUH", Blackburn, or OZ Gedney type A. H. GROUNDING BUSHINGS: Conduit grounding bushings shall consist of an aluminum, insulated throat conduit bushing with an attached aluminum set screw lug. Grounding bushing shall comply with Fed. Spec. W-F-408b and W-W-C-581d, UL Standards 514B and 467, and shall be Crouse Hinds Lazy Lug or approved equal. I. LOCKNUTS: Aluminum as manufactured by Appleton "BL", OZ Gedney, RACO, or Steel City. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B J. HUBS: 1. ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Cast aluminum, with broad flat surfaces with gripping teeth on both sides of conduit entry. Hub portion on exterior side of entry shall contain "O" ring for watertight seal of conduit entry. Hubs shall be Meyers Hub, Appleton or Efcor. K. CONDUIT THROUGH-WALL AND FLOOR SEAL: Malleable iron body with oversized sleeves, sealing ring, pressure clamp and rings and sealing grommet; hex head cap screw, as manufactured by OZ Gedney, type FSK. L. END BELLS: Threaded aluminum as manufactured by OZ Gedney type TNS. M. EXPANSION FITTINGS: Aluminum with aluminum bonding jumpers. Linear expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney Zx for rigid, use with aluminum conduit or Appleton "XJ" series. Combination linear and deflection expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney type AXDX. N. THREADED NIPPLES: As manufactured by Allied or Triangle. Aluminum Conduit nipples shall have two (2) independent sets of threads. Running threads shall not be used. Utilize the conduit union when joining two (2) fixed conduits in a continuous run. O. ACCESSORIES: Reducers, washers, etc., shall be cadmium-plated, malleable iron. P. CONDUIT DRAINS: Conduit drains shall be 316 stainless steel as manufactured by Crouse Hinds ECD Universal, or approved equal. Q. DUCT BANK SPACERS: Interlocking module spacers as manufactured by Formex, or approved equal. R. LINK SEAL: Link seal shall be modular, mechanical type, consisting of inter-locking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the space between the conduit and the wall opening. Link seal shall be suitable for use in a core-drilled and pre-cast wall openings and shall be manufactured by Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc. or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Conduit types shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: 1. BURIED CONDUIT: PVC Schedule 40 or PVC coated rigid aluminum unless noted otherwise. 2. ABOVE GRADE CONDUIT: Rigid Aluminum unless noted otherwise. 3. PVC COATED RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Shall be used for all underground conduit bends 45° or more where the conduit ultimately terminates to aluminum conduit; and for conduit stub-ups through concrete and concrete wall penetrations. 4. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: May be used in all locations. PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit shall be used in corrosive environments or where in contact with concrete. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 5. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: May be used in non-hazardous locations, installed single or grouped either underground or encased in concrete. 6. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT: Shall only be used to equipment in non- hazardous locations not subject to physical damage or excessive temperatures, requiring vibration isolation unless otherwise indicated, 6’-0” maximum length. The bending radius shall be in accordance with Chapter 9, Table 2 of the NEC and shall not deform or alter the flex jacket. 3.02 GENERAL A. Size conduits as required by the National Electrical Code for the number and sizes of wires to be drawn into the conduit. Above grade conduit less than ¾” shall not be used unless specified otherwise. Below Grade conduit shall not be less than 1”. B. Conduit stubbed up under free standing enclosures, such as motor control centers shall be PVC, stubbed up 1" above the finished floor level, and shall have a PVC bell terminator solvent welded onto each conduit end. C. Underground conduit shall be concrete capped. Straight runs of conduit which is below the finished grade shall be rigid PVC. Unless otherwise indicated, all other conduit shall be rigid aluminum. D. At the transition from underground and or from concrete, protect PVC conduit from mechanical damage by extending PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit a maximum of 12" and a minimum of 4" into the earth or concrete at the transition. For installations where the conduit does not penetrate concrete, provide a 12” wide housekeeping pad around conduit for transitions from underground to exposed conduit. E. Aluminum conduit, straps, and struts shall not be in direct contact with concrete or CMU walls, painted or not. Provide a rubber washer between the two materials. F. Aluminum conduit which penetrates into concrete shall be factory-coated with 0.20" of polyvinylchloride, per Spec. MIL-P-15147. G. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 3" from adjacent conduit and shall not be closer than 1" from any reinforcement bars. H. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade level, above concrete slab level, or for any exposed installations unless specified. Conduit shall not be placed horizontally in a concrete floor slab or a beam without the Engineer's written approval. I. Flexible metal conduit used for connecting light fixtures, i.e., fixture whips, shall be 1/2" as a minimum. Fixture whips shall contain only three conductors: one hot, one neutral, and one equipment grounding conductor. Other conduit types shall be 3/4" as a minimum. The inside surface of the conduit shall be reamed smooth after it has been cut. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B J. Provide conduit sizes as shown on the plans. Where hash marks are used to indicate the number of conductors in a conduit without indicating the conduit size, provide a 3/4" conduit for up to nine #12 conductors, and a 1" conduit for ten to 20 #12 conductors. K. Where conduits stub up through a floor slab from below finished floor level for multi-level structures, install a threaded fitting with PVC plug so that the top of the fitting is flush with the concrete or finished floor surface. L. Conduit system shall be swabbed clean prior to installation of conductors. M. Ground conduits in accordance with the National Electrical Code and Specification 26 05 26, “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems”. N. Contractor shall properly tape PVC coated aluminum conduit where it transitions to PVC conduit in underground concrete encased duct banks so that no aluminum conduit is in contact with concrete encasement. Tape shall be manufactured by Scotch or approved equal. Coordinate with tape manufacturer for type of tape to use for the installation. O. Conduit shall not penetrate the top of NEMA 3R and NEMA 4X enclosures. 3.03 UNDERGROUND A. Underground conduit shall be concrete capped. B. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 24” deep for medium voltage duct banks and 18" deep for low voltage duct banks to the top of the concrete encasement, and as shown on the plans, whichever is greater. Backfill buried conduit banks with material which is free from large rock, paving material, or large angular substance. Install underground conduit with the conduit duct bank dimensions shown on the plans. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at intervals to ensure that proper spacings are maintained. The concrete shall be red in color. Red dye for duct bank shall be mixed with concrete or the top of the duct bank shall be painted red. C. For installation of conduits to be used by Oncor Electric Delivery, coordinate with the utility for exact requirements D. Grade underground and outdoor conduits to drain free of condensation and moisture. Provide for automatic draining at lowpoints. Install horizontal runs of conduit to provide a natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect. E. Underground conduits shall drain to an underground structure with a floor drain, such as a manhole or a building basement. F. Install conduit drain assemblies in outside or underground conduits to provide for draining. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B G. Underground conduit bends shall have a minimum 2' bend radius for conduits 3” and smaller and a minimum 3’ bend radius for conduits 4” or greater in size. Underground conduit bends which are 45 degrees or more shall utilize PVC factory-coated rigid steel bends. H. Minimum size for underground conduits outside the building is 2”. I. Contractor shall install duct bank spacers a minimum of every 8 feet. J. Conduit shall slope uniformly at not less than 4” per 100’, or more than 60” per 100’ unless indicated otherwise on the plans or approved by the Engineer. Arrange duct banks to drain into manholes with no low pockets in the duct runs. The electrical contractor shall coordinate with the Contractor and the plans on the proposed grades for the site. 3.04 ROUTING AND SUPPORT A. Use the conduit route where shown on the plans. Route conduits that do not have a specified route in the most direct path between the two points, i.e. home runs shown with an arrow symbol. Route conduits parallel to building lines. Concealed conduits on the plans shall be below grade, within walls, or above ceilings. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise, route conduit through the roof with pitch pocket. Conduit shall not penetrate ductwork. Exposed conduit shall not be installed on the roof without the Engineer's prior approval. C. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid interference with other work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished walls, etc. Avoid crossing other work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 3" separation, except in crossing which shall be a minimum of 1". Conduits shall not be installed/concealed in water bearing walls. D. Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements, as shown on the plans. Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or screwed to the structure. The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on concrete walls and ceilings, but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces using mineralac-type hardware, strut channel clamps, or one hole straps with clamp backs. E. Provide expansion fittings at expansion, construction and seismic joints. Provide combination expansion/deflection fittings where conduits are concealed at these joints. F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use a conduit rack constructed of channels with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for an additional 25% conduit. G. Parallel runs of conduit shall have bends and offsets made at the same point such that the angle of bend is the same in each conduit and the conduits remain parallel throughout the run. Conduits not installed in this manner shall be removed and reinstalled at the Contractor’s expense. Conductors that are installed shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B H. Conduits installed in parallel shall be arranged such that crossings are eliminated. I. Rigid aluminum conduit systems shall utilize aluminum straps, clamps and strut channel. Coated rigid steel conduit shall utilize PVC factory coated or fiberglass straps, clamps and thread rods, etc. as manufactured by Robroy. J. Nuts, bolts, concrete anchor bolts and other metallic fasteners shall be stainless steel. K. Install conduit other than PVC with threaded couplings and other threaded fittings. Threadless, or clamp type fittings shall not be used on metallic conduit. Rigid aluminum conduit shall have each set of threads coated with an oxidation inhibitor, Ilsco, De-Ox, ITT Noalox, Blackburn Contax or approved equal. L. Use PVC coated, rigid steel, factory elbows for bends in PVC conduit unless indicated otherwise. M. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. N. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per the National Electrical Code. O. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. P. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per the National Electrical Code. Q. Install a pulling string in empty (spare) conduit, except sleeves and nipples, and leave for future pulling as applicable. 3.05 TERMINATIONS A. Use threaded hubs for termination of conduits. Locknut termination of conduits shall not be used on this project. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.03-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 33.03 OUTLET BOXES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install outlet boxes. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Steel City Series 600 1.03 SUBMITTALS No submittals required for Section 26 05 33.03, “Outlet Boxes”. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ANSI/NEMA OS 1 Sheet steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. ANSI/NEMA OS 2 Non-metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Provide boxes with plaster ring where required. Boxes for installation in masonry walls shall be special square corner masonry type. Furnish boxes with proper covers and device plates. Boxes shall be non-metallic in accordance with ANSI/NEMA 0S 2. B. CAST BOXES: Cast feralloy metal, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs. Use cast boxes for damp and outdoor installation. Boxes shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION; COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes in the locations shown on the Plans, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. Attachment 3Item 12 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.03-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify locations of boxes and outlets prior to rough-in. Outlet locations may be modified to accommodate changes in door swings, space changes or to clear other interferences that arise or from job modifications. Make such modifications at no cost to the Owner as a matter of job coordination. Coordinate job conditions and notify the Engineer of discrepancies before proceeding with the installation of the work. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction blocked in place, and secured. Set wall boxes flush with the finish. Install extension sleeves as required to extend boxes to finished surfaces. C. Unless otherwise noted, location of outlet boxes shall be as follows: Equipment or Outlets Elevation *(A.F.F.) Toggle switches 4'0" Receptacles 1'6" Equipment or Outlets Elevation *(A.F.F.) Flow/Level Transmitters 5'5" Circular Chart Recorder 5'5" Motor starters 5'0" Control stations 4'0" Manual starters 5'0" Thermostats 4'0" Telephone outlets 1'6" Circuit protective devices 6'6" to top of enclosure * Above Finished Floor. D. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors in accordance with other sections of the specifications. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6" separation, except provide minimum 24" separation in acoustic-rated walls. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one (1) device is installed together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. E. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. Attachment 3Item 12 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.03-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. G. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices. H. Aluminum conduit shall use cast aluminum boxes. Cast aluminum boxes shall not be in direct contact with concrete or CMU walls, painted or not. I. Drilling through the back of the outlet box for mounting purposes is not allowed. J. Wall mounted outlet boxes shall be installed with an air gap behind the boxes. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.04-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 33.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pull and junction boxes. The contractor shall be responsible for sizing all pull boxes and junction boxes per the National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 314 and all other relevant sections of the NEC. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results For Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Appleton B. Bryant C. Crouse Hinds D. Hoffman E. Hubbell F. O Z Gedney G. Raco H. Rob Roy 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals and shall include the following shop drawings: B. Pull and Junction Boxes C. Pull and Junction Boxes Sizing Calculations: Detailed calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer with the pull and junction boxes’ initial submittal. Submittals submitted without sizing calculations shall not be accepted. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) ANSI/NEMA OS 1 Sheet steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports NEC National Electrical Code Attachment 3Item 12 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.04-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Exposed wall recessed pull and junction boxes shall be 304 stainless steel. Pull boxes in floors shall be of galvanized malleable cast iron, with gasketed covers. Exposed pull boxes or junction boxes installed outdoors, per NEMA 250 shall be weatherproof and shall be provided with watertight gasketed covers fastened with stainless steel screws. B. NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for all locations. C. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Metal construction conforming to National Electrical Code and ANSI/NEMA OS 1. Provide hinge type for sheet metal boxes of 12" or larger in any dimension. D. FLUSH-MOUNTED PULL BOXES: Provide overlapping covers with flush-head cover retaining screws. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for electric power, control and communication systems. B. Install pull boxes and junction boxes where required by the National Electrical Code and wherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties. C. Install pull boxes in interior conduit at not more than 100' apart when conduit runs are not broken by junction or outlet boxes. D. Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried. E. Do not install boxes back to back in walls and provide a minimum of 6" separation, except in acoustic-rated walls, provide 24" separation. F. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that is connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12" of box. G. Junction boxes shall have terminal strips/distribution blocks for splicing conductors where approved by the Engineer or as shown/specified on the plans. Terminal strips shall be 600V, NEMA rated manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Phoenix Contact or approved equal. Distribution blocks shall be per Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Equipment 26 05 50-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 50 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work in this section. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Heat Trace 1). Installation information 2). Bill of Material 3). Weight of Enclosure 4). Product data sheets 5). Overall outline dimensions, both plan and elevations. 6). Project specific heat trace calculations. 7). Project specific interconnection/wiring diagram for heat trace system. 2. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: a. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the shop drawings, submittals, spare parts lists, schematics, and maintenance procedures. b. Manuals shall be prepared by the Equipment Manufacturer and shall also incorporate appropriate final certified shop drawings and test data. Any changes made during startup and testing in the field shall be included in the final O&M manuals. Manuals may be manufacturer's standard instructions, but shall be supplemented as necessary to cover any special feature not included in standard material. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Equipment 26 05 50-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. Heat Tracing O&M shall include all field modifications and routing information for all heat trace systems. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. HEAT TRACE SYSTEM 1. Heat Trace System: Automatic self-regulating, UL listed, with tinned copper braid, able to crossover itself without overheating, parallel circuit design, able to be cut to length at job site, flat and flexible for easy installation, corrosion and chemical resistant, complete with power connection kits, splice kits, end seal kits and necessary accessories for a complete operating installation. Chromalox and Nelson are approved heat trace manufacturers. a. Heat Tracing Integrated Temperature Controls: Chromalox Ambient Sensing Integrated Temperature Controls Type RTAS-EP, NEMA 4X. Power connection box 3W/ft SRL self-regulating heat trace shall operate on 120 VAC. b. Heating cable: Self-Regulating Freeze Protection, Industrial Grade, 16 AWG Buss Wire. Chromalox Type SRL3-1C. 2. Heat trace shall be installed using Fiberglas Tape with pressure sensitive thermosetting silicone adhesive ¾: wide. Strap heat trace at no more than 1’ intervals. Pipe shall be clean of all dirt and debris prior to installing Fiberglass Tape. Tape shall be wrapped completely around the pipe (one piece) and overlap at least 1”. 3. Weather resistant “Caution Electrical Heat Trace” labels shall be placed on the outside of the insulation protection 4. Insulation shall completely cover the pipe and heat trace. 5. Heat trace shall be installed per manufacturers recommendations 6. All outside exposed air release valves, instrumentation piping, chlorine dioxide piping, drain line, pressure indicators, and sample taps shall be heat traced and insulated 7. Piping with taps for instrumentation shall be lined with 3W/ft SRL heat trace and wrapped with insulation to the instrument. 3.00 EXECUTION Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Equipment 26 05 50-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Make all electrical connections to all equipment specified. Install equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and the plans. If neither is available, install the equipment using recognized practices of the electrical industry and trade. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of the installation, perform continuity tests and functional checkout to assure the proper operation of all equipment. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B.Section Includes: 1.Identification for raceways. 2.Identification of power and control cables. 3.Identification for conductors. 4.Underground-line warning tape. 5.Warning labels and signs. 6.Instruction signs. 7.Equipment identification labels. 8.Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B.Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with ANSI A13.1. B.Comply with NFPA 70. C.Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D.Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E.Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A.Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.02 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. B.Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: 1.Tags relying on adhesives or tapes-on markers are not acceptable. 2.Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. 3.Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AVWG and larger consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. 4.Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number (e.g. LA3-23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). 5.Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an “S” suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a “T” suffix. 6.Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 2.03 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. 2.04 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A.Tape: 1.Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2.Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3.Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B.Color and Printing: Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2.Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3.Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. C.Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D.Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. E.Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1.Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2.Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.05 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A.Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1.Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2.Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3.Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B.Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C.Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D.Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E.Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with stainless steel mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F.System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. G.Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. H.Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. I.Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A.Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1.Emergency Power. 2.Power. 3.UPS. B.Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1.Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded, service and branch-circuit conductors. a.Color shall be factory applied. b.Colors for 120/240V Circuits: 1)Phase A: Black 2)Phase B: Red 3)Neutral: White 4)Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green C.Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. D.Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2.Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3.Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 4.Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 5.Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 6.Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. E.Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. F.Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels. 1.Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2.Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3.Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4.For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a.Power transfer switches. b.Controls with external control power connections. G.Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. H.Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1.Labeling Instructions: a.Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b.Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c.Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d.Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2.Equipment to Be Labeled: a.Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b.Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c.Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d.Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e.Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f.Enclosed switches. g.Enclosed circuit breakers. h.Enclosed controllers. i.Push-button stations. j.Power transfer equipment. k.Contactors. l.Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. m.Battery-inverter units. n.Battery racks. o.Power-generating units. p.Monitoring and control equipment. q.UPS equipment. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 73.01 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION General: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR prepare a short circuit and protective device coordination study, and an arc flash hazard analysis for the electrical power system as shown on the plans. NO EQUIPMENT IS TO BE ENERGIZED UNTIL THE POWER SYSTEM STUDIES HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, THE PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND BREAKERS HAVE BEEN SET PER THE SHORT CIRCUIT AND RELAY COORDINATION STUDY AND THE ARC FLASH LABELS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED ON THE EQUIPMENT. NO EXCEPTIONS. UShort Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis The studies shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor monitoring devices for setting by the CONTRACTOR. The Studies shall include settings for all protective relays and electric system monitoring. The Contractor shall obtain any needed data or information for the electrical equipment from Contract Documents, various suppliers, and from conducting his own field investigations. A. Scope: 1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all pertinent information necessary for the successful completion of the Short Circuit and Relay Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis. All cable and raceway data, data from all new Switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, and separately mounted fuses, starters or circuit breakers shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. Obtain all existing or new protective device information to include all present settings. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain any needed data or information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, the Electric Utility and from conducting his own field investigations. The data obtained shall be organized and submitted to the ENGINEER to show that all the necessary data gathering work has been done. 2. Calculations shall utilize actual X/R and three phase short circuit values obtained by the CONTRACTOR from the Electric Utility. The use of infinite bus fault current calculation is not acceptable. Contact COSERV STEVE CARRIGAN (940) 365-4830. 3. The studies shall include both scenarios: under normal power and under generator power. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase and phase-to-ground calculations. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic devices are not acceptable. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. The study shall assume all motors operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors identified as "standby" shall not be included. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at the electrical equipment busses. The Study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents available and system impedances as obtained from the Electric Utility. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the Study is not acceptable. Study shall use actual motor X/R and subtransient reactance data obtained from equipment suppliers. 5. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine appropriate relay settings. The study shall include all electrical equipment provided under this contract and any up-stream equipment that has an impact on the coordination study. The study shall show transformer damage curves, generator damage curves, cable short circuit withstand curves and motor curves. Include all medium and low voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards, motor control centers, starters, and panelboards main circuit breakers. Complete the short circuit study down to the main breaker or main lugs on all panelboards. Panelboard branch circuit devices need not be consid- ered. The phase over current and ground-fault protection shall be included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier’s equipment (such as soft starters, switchgear) shall be in included. Include the last protective device in the Electric Utility’s system feeding each facility being considered. 6. Provide Time-Current Curves on 11X17 log-log paper. Do not put more than one branch of protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a one-line diagram and the names of each protective device in the branch. Use the names designated in the Contract Documents. Include motor and transformer damage curves, and cable short circuit withstand curves. Coordination study time-current curves (11x17 log-log type) including the instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings associated with each breaker. Organize the curves as specified here in. Ground fault time current curves shall be on a separate sheet. 7. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of the fault bracing of all bus from the panelboard level up to the main Switchgear or protective device. Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. 8. Provide arc flash hazard analysis in accordance with the applicable NFPA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. 9. The studies shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 10. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER's attention. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 11. Use industry standard short circuit software, SKM CAPTOR and DAPPER or an equal approved by the ENGINEER. 12. The report shall include a comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the inter- rupting capacity of the equipment that is protecting that bus. 13. The report shall include all data that was used as input to the report. This data shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data, etc. 14. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Utility for electrical data required for the studies. 15. The studies shall include and model the different operating configurations that may be encountered at the pump station. This includes different transformers operating individually with various main and tie breakers open and closed. The studies shall clearly identify the particular operating configuration being evaluated. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. UReferenceU UTitle IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems NFPA 70E Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace IEEE 1584 IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations NEC National Electrical Code 1.03 SCHEDULE A. The report shall be provided to the ENGINEER NO LATER THAN 60 days before the equipment is shipped to the Work site. SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AT THE JOBSITE UNTIL THE STUDY HAS BEEN COMPLETED, SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Shop Drawings: 1. Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. 2. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis a. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. b. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges & clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a) Blue to indicate up to 4 cal/cm 2 b)Brown to indicate >4 cal/cm2 to 8 cal/cm2 c) Yellow to indicate >8 cal/cm 2 to 25 cal/cm2 d) Orange to indicate >25 cal/cm 2 to 40 cal/cm2 e) Red to indicate Above >40 cal/cm 2 B. Provide six (6) bound color copies of the completed studies to be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Each hard copy of studies shall be bound in a 3-ring binder. C. The Contractor shall redo the Power System Studies if any changes are made during the field testing checkout and/or start-up. The Contractor shall submit the Power System Studies for Engineer Approval. The Studies shall include an updated copy of the color copy Arc Flash Labels. D. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. 1.Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide a short-circuit and relay coordination study load flow and motor starting study, and arc flash hazard analysis on the electrical power distribution system, as specified. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242, IEEE 1584, ANSI, and the NEC and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for all equipment. The coordination studies shall use the data from the manufacturer of protective devices. 2.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. The studies shall be performed by the by an electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. 2.03 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all data needed to perform the study. B. As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following: 1. One-Line Diagram: a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct- acting trips, fuses, etc. b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices. c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers. Use the ratings (ie. Impedence, X/R, etc.) of the actual transformers being provided where available. d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay. e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient reactances. Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators and synchronous reactances of all generators. Obtain data on the actual equipment being provided. Generic or average data numbers are not acceptable. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and induction motors. Provide short circuit studies using each source of power separately. The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the fault if the greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit calculations shall include emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and emergency power sources described here in. 1) Show short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus. Provide the same data in tabular from. g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors, etc shall be included. h. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, if applicable. i. One-Line showing available fault current at each bus all the way down to the 208Y/120V panelboards. 2. Impedance Diagram: a. Available MVA or impedance from the utility company. b. Local generated capacity impedance. c. Bus impedance. d. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. e. Cable impedances. f. Equipment impedances. g. System voltages. h. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solidly grounding, or no grounding). i. Motor contribution assuming the new and existing motors as shown on the plans all running at the same time. 3. Calculations: a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case. b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. c. A discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment method of calculation and formulas used such that all calculations can be verified manually by the ENGINEER, with recommendations as required for improvements to the system. d. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER and recommendation made for improvements. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 1. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with aid of a digital computer. a. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing, but still maintain a low incident energy level. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 2.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. The study shall be performed in accordance with the NEC and all applicable OSHA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. B. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all adjustable time-current devices such that the trip settings lower the arc flash exposure and minimizing the clearing time. However, the CONTRACTOR shall adjust the time-current devices to avoid nuisance tripping. C. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize fault current values from the short circuit analysis to determine the Incident energy, limited approach boundary, restricted approach boundary, and appropriate PPE required. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide project specific arc-flash labeling. The arc-flash labeling shall be placed on the outside of the cover of the switchgear, motor control centers, combination motor starters, panelboard, switchboard, distribution panel, and all electrical panels, etc. such that it can be read without opening the electrical equipment. Mount arc- flash labels a maximum of 6’-6” AFF, include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide arc-flash labeling on all existing panelboards, switchboards, distribution panel, etc. where breakers are added or work is performed in or on the electrical equipment. E. Arc Flash Labels shall be chemical resistant, UV resistant, water resistant, scratch resistant, and made of 3.0 mil vinyl tape as manufactured by DuraLabel, Brady or approved equal. The lettering shall be performed by thermal transfer print. 1. Arc Flash labels and label lettering shall be sized large enough to be legible at a distance outside the hazard area. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-8 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Arc Flash Labels shall be placed on the door(s) of the room if the hazard area reaches or extends beyond the electrical room door(s). 3. The arc flash label shall include a DANGER header when the incident energy is above 40cal/cm2, and a WARNING header for all other incident energy levels. F. To ensure a safe workplace, and that the labeling meets NEC, OSHA, IEEE, and NFPA requirements, use specialized arc flash software to calculate protection boundaries. These protection boundaries shall include the Flash Protection Boundary, Limited Approach Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary. G. The arc-flash analysis shall be based on calculated fault from the Short Circuit Study at each respective bus. The arc-flash software program shall be used to calculate the available arcing fault at each bus in the system, the resultant flash protection boundary based on the applicable protective device operating times and the associated incident energy that workers may be exposed to at the specified working distances. H. The report shall include the following information: Arc-flash evaluation table, arc-flash and shock hazard label definitions, arc-flash evaluation information, arc-flash and shock hazard labels and definitions of terms used in the arc-flash hazard analysis. I. Arc Flash labels shall be similar to the following example: END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-9 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Attachment A SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST SPECIFICATION: 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Prior to sending submittal fill out checklist and verify all of the following information is included and clearly identified by highlighting, circling or other method. The items below are the minimum required and the Engineer may require additional information. 2. Indicate any substitutions or deviations from the specification and provide additional information as required per Specification 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures.” 3. Sign form prior to submittal and include with submittal. Submittals provided without “Submittal Checklist” will be returned without review. CHECK BOX IF ITEM HAS BEEN ADDRESSED: The studies shall use actual X/R and short circuit values obtained by the Contractor from the Electric Utility. Provide Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. The sheet with the TCC’s shall include a sketch of the circuit the curve is associated with. Show the maximum fault value on the TCC and include the transformer and cable damage curves. Provide Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges & clothing classifications down to the 120V panel. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03. The report and one-line shall include the cable tags and equipment labels indicated in the contract documents. The report shall include all data that was used in the report. This data shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data, etc. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-10 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Provide a technical data sheet for the arc flash label being provided. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. Provide Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. CONTRACTOR NOTES/COMMENTS TO ENGINEER: STATEMENT: I have reviewed and certify that the submittal is complete and that the submittal is legible, accurate, and complete in a clear, easily understood manner. Signature: Date: END OF ATTACHMENT A Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install contactors. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results For Electrical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 30 00, Submittals and shall include: 1. Project specific control schematic/diagram for lighting contactors. Submittals without a project specific control schematic/diagram will be rejected and not approved. Diagram shall be done in CAD. Handwritten diagrams are not acceptable. 2. Product Data Sheet 3. Bill of Material 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. STANDARDS: The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 2. NEMA ICS 2 C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Equipment shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following manufacturers: 1. Lighting contractors: a. Allen-Bradley b. Cutler-Hammer c. General Electric d. Square D 2. Photocells: a. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. b. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. c. Square D; Schneider Electric. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES A. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A. 1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off. 2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure. 2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with fusible switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Contactor shall be the number of poles required, rated 30 amps at 480VAC. See plans for more information. Lighting contactors shall be Square D Class 8903 Type L, or approved equal. 480V contactors shall have a 30A, 2 pole circuit breaker rated for 65,000 AIC. Where shown on the plans, the lights shall be fed from this circuit breaker through the contactor. Lighting contactors shall be mounted in a NEMA 1, 12 gauge steel enclosure suitable for indoor installation. See control schematics in plans for more details. Coil operating voltage shall be as indicated on plans. 3. Indicating Lights, Switches, and Pushbuttons: Heavy duty and oil tight (30 mm); Square D Class 9001 or approved equal. Pilot lights shall be push to test (LED type) and shall be Square D SK or approved equal. 4. Provide a print pocket pouch with the control schematic drawings on the inside of the Lighting Contactor door. The control schematic drawings shall be the final version of the drawings and shall include any field revisions made during start-up. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Furnish and install photocells where indicated on the plans. Cells shall face a northerly direction. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.02 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A.Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory installed vibration isolators. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according with Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. 3. Externally visible, permanent nameplates shall be provided to identify each switch, indicating light, etc. Equipment and terminal blocks shall be suitably identified. This shall include items on the back side of doors and panel mounted items. Nameplates shall be black with white lettering and attached with stainless steel screws. B. Label contactors with a unique designation. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wiring devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Products shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Pass & Seymour 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: A. Shop Drawings for Wiring Devices: Cut sheets of all devices indicating model being provided, NEMA configuration, rating, color, etc. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in its entirety: NEMA WD-1 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices NEMA WD-6 Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements UL 943 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters NFPA 70 National Electrical Code Attachment 3Item 12 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. WALL SWITCHES: For general use, totally enclosed industrial type, specification grade, rated for 120/277 VAC and 20 amps. Approved wire connection to switches shall consist of inserting wire into back wiring hole and tightening terminal screw until wire is tightly griped by clamping mechanism inside switch body. Side wiring shall not be allowed. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in accordance with the NEC. B. MOTOR RATED SWITCHES: HP rated switches approved for motor control or disconnect service when controlling or disconnecting motor loads in excess of 1/4 HP; 20 amp switches for loads exceeding 10 amps. C. WEATHERPROOF SWITCHES: Fitted with a single switch as specified, and weatherproof cover with spring door cover; gray in color for all areas. D. RECEPTACLES: For general use shall be U.L. approved, hospital grade heavy duty duplex grounding type 20 ampere 125 volt heavy duty phosphor bronze contacts. Terminal screws shall be large head, deep slotted #8-32 brass, backed out, color coded for polarity identification, and shall accept up to 10 AWG wire. Side wiring shall not be allowed. 1. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING, INDOOR: GFCI receptacle shall include visible indication of ground fault condition. Feed-through feature shall not be used. Install GFCI device at each location indicated. GFCI circuit breaker shall not be permitted. 2. ISOLATED-GROUND RECEPTACLES: Isolated-ground receptacles shall be listed and labeled as isolated-ground type. Receptacle body shall be orange in color. Isolation- ground shall be integral to the receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 3. WEATHER RESISTANT RECEPTACLES: Weather resistant receptacles shall be listed as weather resistant type in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 4. WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES: a.Weatherproof receptacles shall be hospital grade, 20 ampere, 125 volt and shall be listed as weather resistant type in accordance with the National Electrical Code and shall include a weatherproof device cover. 1)Weatherproof Duplex Receptacle: Provide GFCI duplex receptacle with weatherproof cover. 2)Weatherproof Single Receptacle: Provide a cast box fitted with a single receptacle and threaded cap with a weatherproof cover. b.Weatherproof device covers shall be heavy duty and have a NEMA 3R rating while receptacle is in use with die cast aluminum construction as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Model No. CKMUV or approved equal. Attachment 3Item 12 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE COVER PLATES: The cover plate color shall be 302/304 stainless steel for all areas, unless otherwise indicated or required by the NEC. Screw heads shall have color to match plate. Provide telephone cover plates which are the same as above, except with a single bushed pole for the telephone cable. 1. Mark power/receptacle outlets with voltage, phase, panel name and circuit number. 2. Identify all wall switches, disconnect switches, etc. with nametags, circuit served and panel origin, nametags shall be approved by the ENGINEER/OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. Receptacle and light switch cover plates shall be Pass & Seymour, or approved equal, custom laser engraved plates. 3. Identify all push-button stations with their function and equipment served. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Attachment 3Item 12 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, dirt and debris. E. Install switches, wall-mounted duplex receptacles and telephone outlets at the heights specified in Section 26 05 33.03, “Outlet Boxes”, unless indicated otherwise on the plans. F. Switches installed at one (1) location shall be ganged together under one (1) cover plate. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test wiring devices to insure electrical continuity of grounding. Energize the circuit to demonstrate compliance with the requirements. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 108 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, design, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete lightning protection system for the elevated tank in accordance with UL 96A, NFPA 780. Lightning protection system shall be tied to the site’s grounding system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. Listing of the manufacturer in the lightning protection section of the current edition of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Electrical Construction Materials List will be accepted as compliance with this requirement. B. All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight and construction to suit the application where used in accordance with UL, NFPA, NEC code requirements for this type structure and as per manufacturer's recommendations. Class I sized components may be utilized on roof levels 75 feet and below in height. Class II sized components are required for roof levels over 75 feet in height. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings a. Specifications b. Catalog Sheets for All Products Provided c. Shop drawings showing type, size and location of all equipment, grounds, cable routings, details, etc. 2. Continuity Test Report 3. Copy of U.L. Master Label for the Facility 1.04 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”, for all standards which apply to this section. NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems UL 96A Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems LPI 175 Lightning Protection Institute Standard of Practice Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials used in connection with the installation of the lightning protection systems shall be approved for lightning protection systems by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. No combination of materials shall be used that form an electrolytic couple of such a nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. When unusual conditions exist which would cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors, conductors with suitable protective coatings or oversize conductors shall be used. If a mechanical hazard is involved, the conductor size shall be increased to compensate therefore, or suitable protection shall be provided. The conductors may be protected by covering them with molding or tubing preferably made of wood or nonmagnetic material. If metal tubing is used, the conductor shall be electrically connected to it at its upper and lower ends. B. All equipment used shall be new and of a design and construction to suit the application in accordance with UL 96A requirements and shall be so marked. 2.02 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. CONDUCTORS - Copper conductors manufactured of copper grade ordinarily required for commercial electrical work generally designated as being 98 percent conductive when annealed. Down conductors of copper cable for installations other than towers shall weigh not less than 187.5 pounds per thousand feet and the size of any wire of this cable shall not be less than No. 17 AWG (0.045 inch). Down conductors shall be tinned. The thickness of any copper ribbon or strip shall be not less than No. 16 AWG (0.051 inch). B. AIR TERMINALS - Air terminals shall be tapered to a blunt point. The rod shall be of solid copper, 1/2 inch in diameter. Air terminals and support shall be designed over 24 inches to handle a 75 pound per square foot wind load. All air terminals shall be supported by a suitable brace, with guide(s) not less than one-half the height of the air terminal. Air terminals shall be located in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 780 and UL 96A. Air terminals shall extend at least ten inches above the object or area they are intended to protect. Air terminals shall be placed around the perimeter of flat or gently sloping roofs at intervals not exceeding 20 feet. C. FASTENERS - Fasteners shall be of the same material as the conductor base material or bracket being fastened, or other equally corrosion resistant material. Galvanized or plated materials shall not be used. D. FITTINGS - Fittings/bonding devices, cable splicers, and miscellaneous connectors shall be suitable for use with the installed conductor and shall be copper, bronze or aluminum with bolt pressure connections to the cable. Cast or stamped crimp type fittings shall not be used. Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. Aluminum material may be used where the installation of dissimilar metals creates problems. The Contractor shall field verify all materials involved in the total installation and shall install system in accordance with all applicable NFPA and U.L. codes and standards. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The shop drawings shall indicate the extent and general arrangement of the lightning protection system. If any departures from the shop drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Engineer. Lightning protection systems for all applications shall conform to National Fire Protection Association Code No. 780 and the NEC, whichever is more stringent. B. Installation shall be performed by a certified master installer. Installer shall provide an Underwriters' Laboratories Master Label for the facilities. C. Air terminals shall be provided on the highest projections and at intervals not exceeding 20 feet along the perimeter top surface. Air terminals shall extend at least 10 inches above the object or area that they are intended to protect. Air terminals shall be connected to the lightning protection system when specifically authorized by the Engineer. D. Roof and down conductors shall be stranded and shall meet the requirements given in NFPA 780. Roof and down conductors shall maintain a horizontal or downward course. No bend in a roof or down conductor shall form an included angle of less than 90 degrees, nor shall it have a bend radius of less than eight inches. Conductors shall be routed external to buildings and six feet or more from power or signal conductors. Down conductors shall be routed outside of any structure and shall not penetrate or invade that structure. All down conductors except one may be provided with a screw type connector as described in UL 96 where lightning protection system testing may be required. Down connectors shall be supported from and secured to the building exterior using one hole straps of copper or bronze at maximum intervals of three feet. E. Guards shall be provided for down conductors located in or next to driveways, walkways or other areas where they may be displaced or damaged. Guards shall extend at least six feet above and one foot below grade level. Guards shall be metal pipe. Metal guards shall be bonded to the down conductor at both ends. Bonding jumpers shall be of the same size as the down conductor. Crimp type fittings shall not be used. Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Metallic bodies, on or below roof level, that are subject to induced charges from lightning include exhaust fans, radio towers, HVAC units, ladders, railings, antennas, roof drains, plumbing, vents, metal coping, metal flashing, gutters, downspouts, small metal wall vents, door and window frames, metal balcony railings, and in general any isolated metallic body within six feet of an exposed lightning protection system element. When these metallic bodies have a metal thickness of 3/16 inch or greater, they shall be bonded to the nearest main lightning protection system conductor with UL approved fittings and conductors meeting the requirements of NFPA 780. These bonding fittings shall provide surfaces of not less than three square inches. Provisions shall be made to prevent corrosive effects introduced by galvanic action of dissimilar metals at bonding points. If the metal parts of these units are less than 3/16 inch thick, additional approved air terminals, conductors and fittings, providing a two way path to ground from the air terminals shall be installed. G. If metallic, the mast of roof mounted antennas and obstruction lightning shall be bonded to the nearest roof or down conductor using UL approved fittings and conductors. The bonding jumpers shall be of the same size and material as the roof or down conductor to which they are connected. Provide as a minimum a path to ground at each corner of the building. H. Aluminum material may be used where the installation of dissimilar metals creates problems. The Contractor shall field verify all materials involved in the total installation and shall install system in accordance with all applicable NFPA and U.L. codes and standards. I. The lightning protection system for the ground storage tank shall consist of installing air terminals at 20 foot intervals along the perimeter top surface of the tank and anywhere else on the top of the tank that is required by UL, NFPA and LPl. Air terminals shall extend at least 10 inches above the tank. Air terminals shall be connected together with a cable ring conductor. “Down” conductors shall extend from the cable ring conductor down the side of the tank to the earth connecting to the ground rods or ground electrode plates. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The lightning protection system will be inspected by the Engineer to determine conformance with the requirements of this specification. No part of the system shall be concealed until so authorized by the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for the “Lightning Protection System” installation to assure compliance with contract requirements, and shall maintain records of his quality control for all construction operations. A copy of these records and Contractor tests, as well as records of corrective action taken, shall be furnished to Owner’s Representative, as directed by the Engineer. C. Contractor shall obtain an Underwriters' Laboratories Master Label for the facility. 1. Upon completion, an application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for inspection and certification. 2. Cost for UL inspection and associated costs to obtain the UL Master Label shall be paid for by the Contractor. Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Testing of Continuity of all Conductors - A copy of these records and tests, as well as the records of corrective action taken, shall be furnished to Owner’s Representative, as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 50 00 LIGHTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install light fixtures, complete with lamps, ballasts, drivers and other incidentals. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards. B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. D. LED: Light-emitting diode. E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section01 33 00, Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. Product data sheets for fixtures, lamps and photocells, arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 6. Performance curves for light fixtures. 7.Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Ship light fixtures inside protective cartons and keep packaged until installed. Deliver lamps to the job site in the original packing cases and sleeves. B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Provide cold weather ballasts in fixtures which are subject to temperatures below 32 degrees F. B. Provide special mounting, enclosures and fire-safing, as required by the authorities having jurisdiction so that the integrity of the U.L. listed ceiling assembles is maintained. C. Provide U.L. labels where fixtures are subject to moisture. Provide DL or WL label on fixtures required for the location. D. Contractor shall verify voltages with ballasts and power supplies prior to ordering fixtures. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide lighting fixtures as shown on the drawings and specified on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. Where a fixture type designation is omitted from the plans, the Electrical Bidder shall contact the Engineer prior to bid to determine the fixture type intended. Also refer to related drawings and verify quantity and location of fixtures prior to bid. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. All lighting fixtures shall be furnished complete with all supports, mounting accessories and trim pieces required for installation and type of ceiling, wall (interior or exterior), pole or roof construction. C. LED Fixtures shall be UL 8750 listed. D. LED fixtures shall be tested to verify lumen output and color properties, and shall be measured in accordance with IES LM-79. Lumens maintenance shall be tested and measured in accordance with IES LM-80. Lumen maintenance projections shall be in accordance in IES TM-21. The system shall be rated at L70/B50 for not less than 50,000 hours. E. Equal fixtures approved prior to bid shall not be accepted unless provided in writing from the Engineer prior to bid. If equals are approved by the Engineer in writing, the Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing, as an official submittal to the Engineer for approval, the following: 1. Foot-candle calculations for all rooms. The calculations shall include maximum illumination level, minimum illumination level, average illumination level, light loss factor, etc. 2. Energy compliance form showing compliance the applicable Energy Code as required by the authority having jurisdiction. The manufacturer shall be responsible for filling the forms out completely, signing the energy compliance form and be responsible for meeting all applicable requirements of the compliance requirements, no exceptions. 2.02 MATERIALS A. PLASTIC LENS: Lens for fluorescent fixtures shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum thickness of 0.125". B. PHOTOCELL: Fully adjustable from two (2) to 50' candles with SPST contacts; rated 1500 watts at 120 VAC. Cells shall have a built in time delay of five (5) seconds. C. BALLASTS: Ballast for fluorescent lamps shall be high power factor, dual protected, Class P, one (1) or two (2) lamps as required, unless otherwise specified on the plans; manufactured in accordance with CBM standards, ETL certified, U.L. approved, and sound rated "A"; protected by a built-in, resetting, thermal protector. Ballasts for high intensity discharge lamps shall be high power factor, potted and encapsulated. The starting current shall not exceed the running current. Ballast shall be compatible in design to the specified lamps. Fluorescent ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance and by the manufacturer of the light fixture for Hi-Intensity ballasts. D. EXIT LIGHTS: Single or double face unit as required for each location, with arrows to clearly define the path of egress and which flash at a rate not exceeding five (5) hertz. Provide Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B battery-powered exit lights if the exits lights are not served with an emergency power source E. LEDs 1. LED Manufacturer shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process such as Optibin® to ensure color temperature consistency from fixture to fixture. F. LED DRIVERS 1. LED fixtures shall be complete with high power factor type driver of voltage indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. Design and construction shall conform to UL standards. Sound rating shall be class 'A'. 2. Drivers shall have a power factor of no less than .9, total harmonic distortion of no more than 20%, and transient withstand capacity per ANSI C62.41, Category A. 3. Driver shall be Class 2, meet the requirements of UL 1310, and be operated in constant current mode. 4. Driver shall have inherent protection against short circuit, over-voltage, over current, and over-temperature; and tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide the lighting fixtures, as specified and scheduled on the plans. If a type designation is omitted, verify the fixture selection with the Engineer before installation. B. Check the architectural finishes and provide fixtures with proper trim, frames, support hangers and other hardware required to coordinate with the proper finishes, regardless of the specified or scheduled catalog number, prefixes and suffixes. C. Fixtures which are tandem-mounted and recessed in gypsum board or plaster ceilings shall be yoke-mounted. D. Test and aim flood lights, when dark outside to provide a uniform and widespread, illuminated area. Direct units as indicated or instructed by the Engineer to prevent objectionable glare. E. Furnish and install photocells where indicated on the plans. Cells shall face a northerly direction. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Furnish and install exit lights where scheduled and indicated on the plans. Locate fixtures on the ceiling or wall, as required by the Engineer. Provide relays and the necessary wiring to provide a flashing exit light system upon the activation of a fire alarm. Install exit lights in accordance with Paragraph (Q)(2) of the Handicapped Accessibility Act of Texas. G. Furnish and install a complete exterior lighting control system, as indicated on the plans. Provide materials and equipment to properly interface timing devices and photocells with relays and contactors so that a complete and satisfactory operating system is rendered. H. Test and aim linear LED logo lights, when dark outside to provide a uniform and widespread, illuminated area. I. Test and aim pole mounted metal halide logo lights, when dark outside to provide a uniform and widespread, illuminated area. 3.02 CLEAN AND ADJUST Immediately before final inspection, clean all fixtures, inside and out, including plastics and glassware. Adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surfaces. Replace broken or damaged parts. Lamp and test all fixtures for electrical, as well as, mechanical operation. 3.03 SPARE PARTS A. Lamps: Furnish at least one of each type. B. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: Furnish at least one of each type. C. Ballast: Furnish at least one of each type. D. Globes and Guards: Furnish at least one of each type END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Soils for Earthwork 31 05 13 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 31 05 13 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section of the specifications describes the various classes of Earth Fill. All of the classes of Earth Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Earth Fill used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications. This Section does not include specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill. Specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill are included in other sections of the specifications and/or shown on the drawings. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Soil materials shall be classified into the appropriate class of Earth Fill shown below according to ASTM D2487 “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)” or other appropriate methods as designated by the Engineer. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS A. Class 1 Earth Fill: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. B. Class 2 Earth Fill: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH and CL materials with a coefficient of permeability less than or equal to 1.0 x 10-7 cm/sec, a liquid limit greater than or equal to 30, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 15, and more than 50 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. C. Class 3 Earth Fill: Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP-SM, SC, and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials. D. Class 4 Earth Fill (Select Fill): Consist of materials which are classified as SP, SC, CL, or dual classifications thereof, which have a liquid limit less than or equal to 35, a plasticity index of a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 15, and a maximum of <70 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. E. Class 5 Earth Fill: Consist of materials classified as SP or SP-SM which have a plasticity index less than or equal to 4 and a maximum of 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. F. Class 12 Earth Fill: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. G. Pavement Subbase/ Flexible Base: Flex base shall be TxDOT Item 247, Type A, Grade 1-2 compacted to 98-100% maximum density and optimum moisture content per ASTM D1557. Attachment 3Item 12 Soils for Earthwork 31 05 13 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Clearing and Grubbing 31 11 00 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform operations in connection with clearing, grubbing, and disposal of cleared and grubbed materials. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE; DEFINITIONS A. Clearing: Clearing is defined as the removal of trees, shrubs, bushes, and other organic matter at or above original ground level. B. Grubbing: Grubbing is defined as the removal of stumps, roots, boards, logs, and other organic matter found at or below ground level. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Mark areas to be cleared and grubbed prior to commencing clearing operations. The Owner’s Representative shall approve clearing and grubbing limits prior to commencement of clearing operations. B. Trees and shrubs outside of the clearing limits, which are within 10 feet of the clearing limits, shall be clearly marked to avoid damage during clearing and grubbing operations. C. Remove trees and brush outside the clearing limits, but within the immediate vicinity of the work, upon receipt of approval by the Owner’s Representative, when the trees or brush interfere with the progress of construction operations. Trees shown in plans to be protected shall not be removed. D. Clearly mark trees and shrubs within the clearing limits, which are to remain, and protect the trees and shrubs from damage during the clearing and grubbing operations. E. The clearing limits shall not extend beyond the project limits. F. Establish the clearing limits as follows: 1. Excavations plus 5 feet beyond the top of the excavation. 2. Concrete structures plus 10 feet beyond the edge of the footing. 3. Roadways, runways, taxiways, and parking areas plus 5 feet beyond the edge of pavement or R.O.W. limits. 4. Underground utility trench top width plus 8 feet. G. Establish the grubbing limits as follows: 1. Concrete structures plus 2 feet beyond the edge of the footing. Attachment 3Item 12 Clearing and Grubbing 31 11 00 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Roadways, runways, taxiways, and parking areas plus 1 foot beyond the edge of pavement. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Clearing: Clearing shall consist of the felling, cutting up, and the satisfactory disposal of trees and other vegetation, together with the down timber, snags, brush, rubbish, fences, and debris occurring within the area to be cleared. B. Grubbing: 1. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps and roots larger than 1 inch in diameter. 2. Extend grubbing to the depth indicated below: In the case of multiple construction items, the greater depth shall apply. a. Footings: 18 inches below the bottom of the footing. b. Walks: 12 inches below the bottom of the walk. c. Roads and Taxiways: 18 inches below the bottom of the subgrade. d. Parking Areas: 12 inches below the bottom of the subgrade. e. Concrete Structures: 18 inches below the bottom of the concrete. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Completely remove timber, logs, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the Owner’s property. Disposal of materials in streams shall not be permitted and no materials shall be piled in stream channels or in areas where it might be washed away by floods. Timber within the area to be cleared shall become the property of the Contractor, and the Contractor may cut, trim, hew, saw, or otherwise dress felled timber within the limits of the Owner’s property, provided timber and waste material is disposed of in a satisfactory manner. Materials shall be removed from the site daily, unless permission is granted by the Engineer to store the materials for longer periods. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 31 23 10 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete structural excavation, filling, backfilling, and compacting; to provide protection to equipment and cuts; to include backfill material; the construction or installation of cofferdams, and other similar facilities which may be necessary to perform excavations and/or backfilling; to include the necessary pumping, bailing, or associated drainage; to remove and dispose of surplus materials, cofferdams, and debris; and to provide final grading, as required. B. The work does not include excavation, filling, and backfilling for utility lines, manholes, vaults, valve boxes, and related structures. Work shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 23 33 “Trenching and Backfill.” 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Submit qualifications of independent testing laboratory for approval. 2. Backfill material classifications. Provide certification by an approved independent testing laboratory. 3. Compaction test results. Provide compaction test results within 24 hours. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The following publications, referred to hereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification as if written herein in their entirety: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM D698 Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) ASTM D1556 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method ASTM D6938 Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D4253 Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table ASTM D4254 Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density B. Any other testing required by these specifications and not specifically referenced to a standard shall be performed under ASTM or other appropriate standards as designated by the Engineer. Attachment 3Item 12 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. References herein or on the drawings to soil classifications shall be understood to be according to ASTM D2487, “Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)” unless indicated otherwise. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deposit material to be used for backfill in storage piles at points convenient for handling of the material during the backfilling operations. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Review subsurface investigations. A limited subsurface investigation has been performed by the Engineer. A Technical Memorandum summary report from the investigation is included in Appendix B Geotechnical Report. Boring logs and related subsurface data may be found in the report. However, the precise profile of soil and rock strata beneath this site is not known. B. Review the site and determine the conditions which may affect the structural excavation, prior to the commencement of the excavation. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Earth Backfill: Structural backfill shall be Class 4 Earth Fill as specified in Section 31 05 13 “Soils for Earthwork.” B. Structural Aggregate Backfill: Not Used C. Lean Concrete Backfill: Lean concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 53 “Cast-In- Place Concrete.” D. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be Class 12 Earth Fill as specified in Section 31 05 13 “Soils for Earthwork.” E. Compacted Select Fill: Fill shall be Class 4 Earth Fill as specified in Section 31 05 13 “Soils for Earthwork.” F. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and 5 to 15 percent passing No. 200 sieve; maximum plasticity index of 7; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C33 for fine aggregates. 2.02 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT A. Compaction equipment shall conform to the following requirements and shall be utilized as specified herein. 1. Pneumatic Rollers: Pneumatic rollers shall have a minimum of four wheels equipped with pneumatic tires. The tires shall be such size and ply as can be maintained at tire pressures between 80 and 100 pounds per square inch for a 25,000-pound wheel load during roller operations. The roller wheels shall be located abreast and be designed so that each wheel will carry approximately equal load in transversing uneven ground. The Attachment 3Item 12 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B spacing of the wheels shall be such that the distance between the nearest edges of adjacent tires will not be greater than 50 percent of the tire width of a single tire at the operating pressure of a 25,000-pound wheel load. The roller shall be provided with a body suitable for ballast loading such that the load per wheel may be varied, from 18,000 to 25,000 pounds. The roller shall be towed at speeds not to exceed 10 miles per hour. The character and efficiency of this equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2. Vibratory Rollers: Vibratory rollers shall have a total static weight of not less than 20,000 pounds, with at least 90 percent of the weight transmitted to the ground through a single smooth drum when the roller is standing in a level position. The diameter of the drum shall be between 5 and 5-1/2 feet and the width between 6 and 9 feet. The unsprung weight of the drum, shaft, and internal mechanism shall not be less than 12,000 pounds. The frequency of vibration during operation shall be between 1100 and 1500 i.e., and dynamic force shall not be less than 40,000 pounds at 1400 i.e. No backing of the vibratory roller will be allowed on the embankment unless the vibrating mechanism is capable of being reversed. Self-propelled and towed vibratory rollers shall be operated at speeds not exceeding 3 miles per hour and 1-1/2 miles per hour, respectively. 3. Power Hand Tampers and Vibratory Plate Hand Compactors: Compaction of material in areas where it is impracticable to use a roller or tractor shall be performed with approved power hand tampers, vibratory plate hand compactors, or other approved equipment. Approval shall be based upon performance in a test section. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clear and grub the area to be excavated prior to the start of excavation in accordance with Section 31 11 00 “Clearing and Grubbing.” 3.02 EXCAVATION A. When footing concrete or masonry is to rest upon rock, remove the rock to a depth sufficient to expose sound rock. Level off or cut the rock to approximate grades, and roughen the area. When footing concrete or masonry is to rest on an excavated surface other than rock, take care not to disturb the bottom of the excavation, and do not make final removal of the foundation material to grade until just before the concrete or masonry is placed. Foundation material shall be protected, after exposure, with a concrete seal slab. B. When the material encountered at footing grade is found to be partially rock or incompressible material, but otherwise satisfactory for the foundation, remove the incompressible material to a depth of 6 inches below the footing grade and backfill with compacted select fill. C. For footings where the soil encountered at established footing grade is an unstable material, use the following procedure unless other methods are specified: Remove unstable soil. Carry the excavation at least 1 foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. Replace the unstable soil with compacted select fill. Place in uniform layers at a suitable Attachment 3Item 12 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B depth for compaction. Wet each layer if necessary and compact by rolling or tamping to provide a stable foundation for the structure. D. When unfeasible to construct a stable footing as outlined above, construct footing by the use of special materials, such as flexible base, cement stabilized base, cement stabilized backfill, or other material, as directed by the Engineer. E. Perform excavation to permit surfaces to be brought to final line and grade within plus or minus 0.1 foot. Restore over-break at the Contractor’s expense. In general, perform excavation in open-cut from the surface of the ground and at the line and grade indicated. F. The sides of the excavation, from the bottom of the excavation to the top of the ground shall be supported in accordance with OSHA requirements. Maintain the supports throughout construction. Remove supports after the completion of the work. 3.03 DEWATERING OF SITE A. Pumping or bailing from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in a manner which precludes the possibility of movement of water through or alongside any concrete being placed. No pumping or bailing shall be permitted during the placing of structural concrete, or for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter, unless from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work by a water-tight wall. Pumping or bailing during placement of seal concrete shall be only to the extent necessary to maintain a static head of water within a cofferdam. Do not start pumping or bailing to de-water a sealed cofferdam until the seal has aged at least 36 hours. 3.04 PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL A. General: 1. Backfill excavated spaces and areas not occupied by the permanent structure, except that no backfill shall be placed against any structure until the concrete has reached its 28-day compressive strength or 7 days whichever is longer. Do not place backfill adjacent to support walls until the top slab has been in place at least 4 days. 2. Take care to prevent wedging action when placing backfill around structures. If backfill is to be placed on two or more sides of the structure or facility, simultaneously place the backfill on all sides to avoid uneven loading on the structure. 3. Do not permit rollers to operate within 3 feet of structures. 4. Maximum placement lifts measured in the loose condition are as follows: a. 8 inches when heavy compaction equipment is used. b. 4 inches when hand-directed compaction equipment is used. 5. Subgrade preparation for slab-on-grade: B. Moisture Control: 1. General: The materials in each layer of the fill shall uniformly contain the amount of moisture within the limits specified below necessary to obtain the maximum dry density for the soil. Compact Class 1 and Class 2 Earth Fill with a moisture content of at or within 5 percentage points wet of optimum moisture content. Compact Class 3, Class 4, Attachment 3Item 12 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B and Class 5 Earth Fill with a moisture content within 2 percentage points dry to 5 percentage points wet of optimum moisture content. The moisture content ranges specified above for the various classes of earth fill represent maximum upper and lower limits of the particular range. Determination of the maximum dry density-optimum moisture shall be by one or more of the following ASTM procedures D 1556 or D 6938. Completely cohesionless materials which are to be compacted to a specified relative density shall be at a moisture content which will allow use of the specified compaction equipment and consistent achievement of the specified density. 2. Moisture Control During Placement: After spreading the soil, adjust the moisture content of the soil if necessary by either aeration or the addition of water to bring the moisture content within the range specified. Uniformly distribute the moisture content throughout the layer of soil to be compacted. In order to accomplish this distribution, thoroughly mix the layer of soil by disking, harrowing, or by the use of a power-driven pulverizer. Should the surface of a previously compacted layer become dry due to exposure to the elements, appropriately wet surface of the compacted layer prior to placing the succeeding layer of soil, and properly disk or harrow the surface. Should a layer of soil be over wet, allow the layer to dry to a proper moisture content prior to compacting. Should the surface of a layer become smooth and hard, roughen the surface by scarifying, and wet the surface if necessary prior to placing the next layer of soil. Reprocess any layer which becomes damaged by weather conditions to meet the specification requirements. There shall be no additional payment made for such reprocessing. C. Compaction: 1. Compaction shall be by power hand equipment or rubber tired equipment, provided the rubber tired equipment does no damage. Compaction by power hand equipment or rubber tired equipment shall be completed such that there will be a 24-inch overlap by roller compaction. 2. Compact the Class 1 and Class 2 Earth Fill zones by a minimum of eight passes with a tamping roller. Compact the Class 3, Class 4, and Class 5 Earth Fill zones by a minimum of eight passes with a tamping roller or by a minimum of four passes with a tamping roller, followed by a minimum of four passes with a pneumatic roller. A vibratory roller shall be required if the material is sandy and if requested by the Engineer. A pass shall consist of one trip over the area being compacted. The front and rear axle rollers on self-propelled models shall only be considered as one pass per trip. The initial and final area to be rolled shall each have eight passes. Stagger passes between the initial and final area in order to establish overlapping with at least eight passes at all locations. Approve the exact method based upon the test section. Dumping, spreading, sprinkling, and compacting may be performed at the same time at different points along a section where there is sufficient area to permit these operations to proceed simultaneously. 3. Areas of the fill being compacted with power hand tampers or vibratory plate hand compactors shall receive a minimum of eight passes of the equipment with an overlap of 50 percent of the equipment base plate width. 4. The in-place density of Class 1 through Class 5 Earth Fill shall not be less than 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698, Standard Proctor. In areas cut underneath roadways and parking areas scarify and re-compact the top 8 inches of the Attachment 3Item 12 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 10 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B subgrade within the specified moisture content, to not less than 98 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698, Standard Proctor. 5. Compact cohesionless materials, on which it is not practical to control the density by proctor methods, to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D4253. At the discretion of the Engineer, an alternate method of determining the maximum density may be used which has been correlated with methods ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254. 6. Flex base materials shall be compacted to 98% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. 7. If necessary, to achieve the specified density, increase the number of passes of the compaction equipment, and/or modify the weight of the compaction equipment. 8. Regardless of the density achieved, the number of passes of the compaction equipment shall not be less than eight. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor is responsible for the costs involved in providing an approved testing laboratory to perform quality control testing of backfill operations. The testing laboratory shall make tests of in-place density in accordance with ASTM Standards. The testing laboratory shall monitor backfill operation continuously or at intervals acceptable to the Owner and Engineer at structures. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the testing laboratory before backfill operations begin. 1. Unless noted otherwise, in-place density tests shall be conducted at a rate of one test per 1500 square feet for every lift. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Flowable Fill 31 23 23.33 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 31 23 23.33 FLOWABLE FILL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to place and mix a flowable mortar fill, consisting of Portland cement, fine aggregate, fly ash, and water in the proper proportions as specified hereinafter. Controlled Low-Strength Material (Flowable Fill) shall be used to bed and backfill around piping and utilities where indicated. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria; Concrete Proportions and Consistency: 1. Concrete shall be proportioned to give the necessary workability and strength and shall conform to the following governing requirements: 28-Day Compressive Strength-psi Min. Cement Pounds Per Cu. Yd. Fine Aggregate Pounds Per Cu. Yd. Max. Water Pounds Per Cu. Yd. Max. Fly Ash Pounds per Cu. Yd. 70-150 50 2720 290 150 2. Fluidity of the flowable mortar shall be measured by the Corps of Engineers flow cone method, according to their specification CRD-C611-80. Prior to filling the flow cone with flowable mortar, the mixture shall be passed through a 1/4-inch screen. Time of efflux shall be approximately 12 seconds. B. Factory Testing: The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the material. A trial mix shall be designed by an independent testing laboratory, retained by the Contractor. The testing laboratory shall submit verification that the materials and proportions of the trial mix design meets the requirement of the specifications. Concrete mix additive such as “Darafill” manufactured by Grace Construction Products or equal products may be required to achieve the low strength and the flowability requirements. In lieu of trial mix design, Contractor may submit a mix design used successfully in previous similar work, for similar materials for approval by Engineer. The Contractor shall not make changes in materials, either in gradation, source, or brand, or proportions of the mixture after having been approved, except by specific approval of the Engineer. C. Pre-Job Testing: Pre-job testing for excavatability with actual equipment and intended configuration of concrete sample is required. The testing equipment and configuration of concrete sample shall be determined by the Owner’s representative. D. Owner Testing: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to achieve and maintain the quality of material required by this Section of the specifications. However, the Owner may secure the services of an independent testing laboratory to verify the quality of the concrete. The Owner shall have the right to require additional testing, strengthening, or replacement of concrete which has failed to meet the minimum requirements of this Section. Attachment 3Item 12 Flowable Fill 31 23 23.33 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Submit trial mix design on material. 1.04 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A. Materials shall meet recommendation for mix design and placement, as published by National Ready Mixed Concrete Association. B. The applicable provisions of the following references and standards shall apply to this Section as if written herein in their entirety. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C40 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete 2. Federal Specifications (Fed Spec): a.COE – (CRD-C611-80). 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: Portland cement conforming to the specifications and test for Type I Portland cement of the American Society for Testing and Materials, Designation C-150. B. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate consisting of natural, washed and screened sand having clean, hard, strong, durable, uncoated grains complying with the requirements for ASTM C33. The sand shall generally be of such size that all will pass a 3/8-inch sieve, at least 95 percent pass a 1/4-inch screen and at least 80 percent pass a No. 8 sieve. Aggregate shall not contain strong alkali, or organic material which gives a color darker than the standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM Specification Designation C40. C. Fly Ash/Pozzolans: Fly ash shall be an ASTM C618, Class “C” fly ash. The fly ash may be used in controlled low-strength material. D. Water: Water for concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other harmful impurities. Water which is suitable for drinking or for ordinary household use will be acceptable for concrete. Where available, water shall be obtained from mains of a waterworks system. E. Additive: “Darafill” may be required to meet these specifications. 2.02 MIXES A. In the determination of the amount of water required for mix, consideration shall be given to the moisture content of the aggregate. The net amount of water in the mix will be the amount added at the mixer; plus the free water in the aggregate; and minus the absorption Attachment 3Item 12 Flowable Fill 31 23 23.33 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B of the aggregate, based on a 30 minute absorption period. No water allowance shall be made for evaporation after batching. B. The methods of measurement of materials shall be such that the proportions of water to cement can be closely controlled during the progress of the work and easily checked at any time by the Owner’s representative. To avoid unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency, the aggregate shall be obtained from sources which will insure a uniform quality and grading during any single day’s operation and they shall be delivered to the work and handled in such a manner that the variation in moisture content will not interfere with the steady production of concrete of reasonable degree of uniformity. Sources of supply shall be approved by the Owner’s representative. C. All material shall be separately and accurately measured. Measurement may be made by weight or by volume, as determined by the Contractor; however; all equipment for measurement of materials shall be subject to approval by the Owner’s representative. D. The proportions of the mix shall be such as to produce material that can be placed readily into the void area without spading or vibrating, and without segregation or undue accumulation of water or laitance of the surface. E. When additive is contained in the concrete mix, the additive ingredients, proportions and placement of the additive shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall give the Owner’s representative sufficient advance notice before starting to place material in any area, to permit inspection of the area, and preparation for pouring. B. Conduct the operation of depositing and compacting the material so as to form a compact, dense, impervious mass. C. Flowable mortar shall be uniformly placed to the depth shown on the plans. The fill shall be brought up uniformly to the top of excavation elevation. Placement of mortar fill shall then cease and the fill protected from traffic for a period of 72 hours. D. The material shall be placed against undisturbed trench walls, and shall not be placed on or against frozen ground. E. Material shall be placed in lifts or other measures shall be taken to prevent pipe flotation. Material shall be allowed to harden before placing next lift. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform operations in trenching, pipe bedding, backfilling, clearing, grubbing and site preparation; handling, storage, transportation and disposal of excavated material; pumping and dewatering; preparation of subgrades; protection of adjacent property; fills, grading; and other appurtenant work. Trenching, backfilling, and pipe embedment procedures shall be in full compliance with Section 31 23 33.14 “Trench Safety.” Earth removed from excavations and which is not required for backfill shall be removed from the Site by the Contractor at his own expense, unless arrangements are made with the Owner through his representative to allow disposal on Site. If permitted, the Contractor shall dump and spread excess earth in a manner agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner. Excavations, other than trench excavation, are not part of this Section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Classification: 1. Excavations shall include material of whatever nature encountered, including but not limited to clays, sands, gravels, conglomeritic boulders, weathered clay shales, rock, debris and abandoned existing structures. Excavation and trenching shall include the removal and subsequent handling of materials excavated or otherwise handled in the performance of the Work. 2. Bidders must satisfy themselves as to the actual existing subsurface conditions prior to the submittal of a proposal to complete the proposed Work. 3. Trench excavation shall consist of excavation to the lines and grades indicated, required for installation of the pipe, pipe bedding, backfill, and to accommodate trench safety systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Sieve analysis on embedment materials. 2. Test results indicating soil resistivity for embedment material used on metal pipe. 1.04 STANDARDS A. The following publications, referred to hereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this Section to the extent indicated by the references thereto: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate ASTM C125 Standard Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates ASTM C131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C535 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Lost Angeles Machine ASTM D448 Standard Classification for Size of Aggregate for Road Bridge Construction ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3) ASTM D1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method ASTM D2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) ASTM D4253 Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table ASTM D4254 Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density ASTM D6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM G57 Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using the Wenner Four-Electrode Method B. Any other testing required by these specifications and not specifically referenced to a standard shall be performed under ASTM or other appropriate standards as designated by the Engineer. C. Reference herein or on the Drawings to soil classifications shall be understood to be according to ASTM D2487, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Excavated materials to be used for backfill may be deposited in stockpiles at points convenient for rehandling the material during the backfilling process. The location of stockpiles shall be within the limits of construction easements or public right-of-way. The location of stockpiles is subject to the approval of the Owner or the Owner’s representative. Keep drainage channels clear of stockpiled materials. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Place no embedment or backfill material during freezing weather or upon frozen subgrades or previously placed frozen embedment or backfill materials. Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete for Backfill, Blocking, Cradling and Encasement: Unless other strength requirements are designated, concrete used shall be 1500 psi as specified in Section 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.” B. Class 1 Earth Fill: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. C. Class 3 Earth Fill: Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP-SM, SC, and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials. D. Class 12 Earth Fill: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. E. Class 3 Aggregate Fill (rigid piping): Composed of durable particles of crushed stone, angular, tough durable particles, free from thin, flat and elongated pieces of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12 percent. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 7: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/4”100 1/2”90-100 3/8”40-70 No. 4 0-15 No. 8 0-5 F. Class 10 Aggregate Fill (flexible pipe utilities only): Consists of washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements and tests of “Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates”, ASTM C33. The gradation as included in ASTM C33 is as follows: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/8”100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing No. 30 25-60 No. 50 10-30 No. 100 2-10 1. Class 10 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45 percent passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. G. Cement: Type I Portland Cement. H. Flowable Fill: Flowable fill shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 23.33 “Flowable Fill.” I. Modified Flowable Fill: Modified flowable backfill in areas of possible future excavation shall consist of a mixture of native soils or manufactured materials, cement and/or fly ash, air entraining material and water which produces a material with unconfined compressive strength of between 250 and 450 psi after 28 days. Any materials used shall be primarily granular, with a plasticity index less than 12 and with 100 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve. The flowable mixture shall be mixed in a pub mill, concrete mixer, or transit mixer and shall have a minimum slump of 5 inches. The flowable mixture must be allowed to set prior to the placement of any overlying materials. Modified flowable backfill in permanent areas such as abandoned pipe closures shall contain the same materials and have an unconfined compressive strength greater than 250 psi after 28 days. J. Utility Detection Tape: Utility pipe detection tape, green in color for sewer, blue in color for water, with black non-degradable printing reading “CAUTION SANITARY SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW” or “CAUTION WATER LINE BURIED BELOW” shall be installed over all PVC, HDPE, or fiberglass pipelines 8 inches and larger. The tape shall be bright-colored, continuous-printed plasticized aluminum tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6 inches wide by 5 mils thick. Detection tape must be installed above the pipe zone, 12 inches above pipe. K. Tracer Wire: All piping shall be installed with a continuous, insulated TW, THW, THWN or HMWPE insulated copper, 10 gauge or thicker wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line tracer. The wire shall be installed along the entire length of pipe. The insulation color shall match the color of the pipe being installed. Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved splice caps and water proof seals. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable. 2.02 MIXES; SAND-CEMENT BACKFILL A. A minimum sand and cement mixture of 25 parts sand and 2 parts cement will be required. 1. Fine Sand: 25 Cubic Feet. 2. Cement: 2 Bags (minimum). 3. Water: Optimum moisture. Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. Sand shall be free of any cohesive material and shall meet the following gradation and plasticity index requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1”100 1/2”95-100 No. 40 80-100 C. PI and LL Amounts: 1.Plasticity Index: 10 Maximum. 2. Liquid Limit: 25 or less. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Site: 1. Clear sites of logs, trees, roots, brush, tree trimmings and other objectionable materials and debris which are to be occupied by pipe trenches, and grub stumps. Designate material not salvaged for reuse as surface material as spoiled and dispose of material in accordance with Paragraph 3.01.E, Disposal of Spoil Material. 2. Do not remove trees outside of the required working area unless their removal is authorized in writing by the Engineer and with the approval of the local governing authority. Adequately protect the trees left standing from permanent damage by construction operations. Standing trees may be trimmed where necessary to facilitate construction, but only with written authorization from the Engineer. B. Dewatering: 1. Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of surface and ground water entering the excavations, trenches, or other parts of the Work. Keep each excavation dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the proposed pipe is installed. Maintain the proper procedures necessary to protect against damage to the proposed Work from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other water related causes. 2. Dewater excavations which extend down to or below ground water elevation by lowering and keeping the ground water level a minimum of 2 feet below the bottom of the excavation. 3. Divert surface water or otherwise prevent water from entering excavated areas to the fullest extent possible without causing damage to adjacent property. 4. Provide and maintain any piping or conduit necessary to facilitate drainage. Do not alter area drainage patterns to the extent that adjacent property and landowners become threatened with localized flooding and/or water damage. Should such a situation occur, Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing the damage at no additional cost to the Owner. C.Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities: 1. Prior to the start of construction, communicate with the representatives of the local utility companies, including the oil, gas, telephone and communications companies, and local water and sewer utilities operating in the location of the proposed construction area. Seek the utility companies’ assistance in locating existing facilities to avoid conflicts during construction. The location, number, depth, and owner of utilities indicated are for information purposes only, and all utilities and structures may not be shown or may not be in the location shown. 2. Where construction endangers adjacent structures, utilities, embankments and/or roadways, the Contractor shall, at this own expense, carefully support and protect such structures so that no damage occurs throughout the construction process. In case damage should occur, the Contractor shall be responsible for restoring the damaged structure to a condition acceptable to the Owner of that structure and shall bear all cost of such reparations. 3. Repair or replace damaged street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, fences, drainage structures, or other such facilities to the satisfaction of the Owner. Structures shall be returned to a condition equal to or better than the original condition and of same or better material and quality. D. Blasting: Blasting shall not be allowed in any instance. E. Disposal of Spoil Material: 1. Suitable material from excavations which meets the requirements for pipe backfill material as indicated, except stripping excavation, may be reused. Designate the remaining excavated materials as spoiled material and dispose of material off the Site in accordance with all applicable laws, ordinances, and codes. Contractor shall be responsible for the storage, transportation, and deposition of spoiled material and shall be responsible for acquiring the necessary permits, and the payment of fees and duties at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. No burning of materials shall be permitted on the Site. 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. General: The trenches shall be excavated to the alignment and depth indicated or as necessary for the proper installation of the pipe and appurtenances. Brace and dewater the trench if necessary so that the workmen may work therein safely and efficiently. Any specific requirement listed in Paragraph [3.00], Execution, may be modified as necessary to meet OSHA requirements. However, if trench widths are wider than indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining and furnishing the proper class of embedment and piping for the installation with no additional compensation to the Contractor. B. Trench Width: The trench widths shall be as shown on the Drawings. Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Pipe Foundation Subgrade: 1.Excavate the trench to an even grade to permit the installation of the pipe so that the full length of the pipe barrel is supported on the proper depth of bedding material. The entire foundation subgrade area in the bottom of the excavations shall be firm, stable material, and the material shall not be disturbed below required grade except as described in this Section. Where the character of the subgrade material is such that proper subgrade cannot be obtained at the elevation indicated, deepen the excavation to a satisfactory subgrade material. 2. Remove the material until a firm, stable, and uniform bearing is reached and the subgrade brought back to the required grade with the specified bedding material compacted in place or with lean concrete material. The expense of replacing any unsatisfactory subgrade shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Correcting Faulty Grade: Should any part of the trench be excavated below required grade, correct the trench with bedding material, thoroughly compacted, or with lean concrete, at no additional compensation to the Contractor. E. Care of Surface Material for Reuse: If local conditions permit reuse, keep surface material suitable for reuse separate from the general excavation material. F. Trenching Methods: The use of any suitable trench digging machinery is permitted except in places where such operations may cause damage, above or below ground, in which case, employ hand methods. G. Pipe Clearance in Rock: Remove ledge rock, rock fragments, shale, or other rock to provide proper clearance for bedding materials. Provide adequate clearance for properly jointing pipe laid in rock trenches at bell holes. 3.03 BACKFILL A. Bedding within Pipe Zone: 1. Concrete Cradle, Encasement or Concrete Arch: Where indicated, install the pipe in concrete cradle, encasement, or concrete arch. Take precautions to prevent pipe movement or deflection during construction. Where pipes are placed below structures, completely encase pipes in 1500 psi concrete, and extend up to bottom of structure. 2. Concrete Blocking: Place blocking to rest against firm undisturbed trench walls. The supporting area for each block shall be at least as great as that indicated and shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust, including water hammer, which may develop. Each block shall rest on a firm undisturbed foundation of trench sides and bottom. B. Aggregate Fill Bedding: 1. After the trench has been cut to the depths indicated, install bedding geotextile material below the bedding layer, bring up the bedding layer to a point slightly above grade in maximum 4-inch lifts and uniformly compact to the density indicated. Form bell holes and scoop out a trough to grade so that the pipe is uniformly supported by the embedment material. Lay and joint the pipe. Bring up the embedment material in maximum 4-inch lifts on either side of the pipe to the elevation above the pipe shown on the Drawings. Uniformly compact the pipe as indicated. Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. After moisture is gone from the embedment material, place utility detection tape and backfill and compact the remaining backfill by tamping or other appropriate methods. Water jetting shall not be permitted. 3. Install utility detection tape and tracer wire. C. Compaction Requirements: 1. Compact earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill in maximum 4-inch lifts with pneumatic rollers or power hand tampers and make a minimum of eight passes. 2. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill in maximum 4-inch lifts with vibratory rollers or vibratory plate power hand compactors and make a minimum of eight passes. 3. The acceptability of the compaction equipment shall be based upon the results of a test section. Compact earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698, Standard Proctor. 4. Compact Class 1 and 2 earth fill at a moisture content within minus 0 to plus 5 percentage points of the optimum moisture content. Compact the remaining classes of earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill at a moisture content within minus 2 to plus 5 percentage points of optimum moisture content. The moisture ranges listed above are minimum and maximum limits. A tighter moisture range within these limits may be required to consistently achieve the specified density. 5. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill on which it is not practical to control the density by “Proctor” methods to a minimum of 75 percent relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D 4254, or at the discretion of the Engineer, by a field compaction mold method correlated to ASTM D4253 and D 4254. 6. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill at a moisture content within a range that accommodates consistent placement and compaction to the minimum relative density specified above. 7. The Owner will arrange and pay for density and moisture testing. The testing frequency and methods shall be as requested by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing requirements on cohesionless bedding where testing is not practical because of limited space between the pipe and trench walls, however, the minimum number of passes of the compaction equipment specified above shall be achieved. 3.04 FINISHING A. Grade and rake areas smooth and even which do not receive any type of paved surface, to allow drainage to drain away from the structures and toward the roads and streets or the natural drainage course. Break up large clods of earth and remove rocks, trash or debris near the surface. B. Finish the top portion of backfill beneath established sodded (lawn) areas with not less than 6 inches of topsoil corresponding to, or better than, that underlying adjoining sodded areas. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Attachment 3Item 12 Trenching and Backfill 31 23 33 - 9 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Compact backfill and appropriate embedment material to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density at a moisture content of 0 to plus 5 percent of optimum for backfill and at optimum for sand-cement embedment as determined by ASTM D698, Standard Proctor. B. Make periodic tests of compaction for conformance with this Section by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid for by the Owner. Contractor shall pay for re-testing until acceptable test results are obtained. 3.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove surplus pipeline materials, tools, rubbish and temporary structures and leave the construction site clean, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Trench Safety 31 23 33.14 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 31 23 33.14 TRENCH SAFETY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This specification consists of the basic requirements which the Contractor must comply with in order to provide for the safety and health of workers in a trench. This specification is for the purpose of providing minimum performance specifications, and the Contractor shall develop, design, and implement the trench safety system. The Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility for the adequacy of the trench safety system and providing “a safe place to work” for the workman. B. Should the trench safety protection system require wider trenches than specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs associated with determining adequacy of pipe bedding and class, as well as, purchase and installation of alternate materials. 1.02 STANDARDS A. The following standard shall be the minimum governing requirement of this specification and is hereby made a part of this specification as if written in its entirety. 1. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Excavations (29CFR Part 1926), U.S. Department of Labor, latest edition. B. Comply with the applicable Federal, State, and local rules, regulations, and ordinances. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project specific Trench Safety Plan sealed by an Engineer licensed in Texas, as Record Data. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Lime Soil Stabilization 31 32 13.19-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 31 32 13.19 LIME SOIL STABILIZATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to treat subgrade by pulverizing, adding lime, mixing, and compacting the mixed material to the required density conforming with the lines, grades, and typical section(s) as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with requirements and recommendations in the Geotechnical Report. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE; AMOUNT OF LIME A. The percent of lime to be used shall be as indicated on the Drawings, and within this Section, for the depth of subgrade treatment specified and shall be verified during construction according to Paragraph 1.03. In no case shall less than 6 percent by weight be applied. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM C25 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime, and Hydrated Lime ASTM C110 Methods for Physical Testing of Quicklime, Hydrated Lime, and Limestone 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standards: TxDOT Test Method No. 121-E, Part II 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; HYDRATED LIME A. Type A, Hydrated Lime: 1. Hydrated Lime shall consist of a dry powder obtained by treating quicklime with enough water to satisfy its chemical affinity for water under the conditions of its hydration. This material is to consist essentially of calcium hydroxide or a mixture of calcium hydroxide and a small allowable percentage of calcium oxide, magnesium oxide, and magnesium hydroxide (1, 2, and 3 are determined by procedures given in ASTM C25). 2. Calcium and Magnesium Oxides: Min. 90 percent. Attachment 3Item 12 Lime Soil Stabilization 31 32 13.19-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Carbon Dioxide: a.If sampled at place of manufacture: Max. 5 percent. b. If sampled at any other place: Max. 7 percent. 4. Non-Hydrated Lime Content, percent by weight: a. CaO: Max. 5 percent. 5. The percent by weight of residue retained shall conform to the following requirements, as determined by procedures given in ASTM C110: a. Residue retained on a No. 6 (3360-micron) sieve: None. b. Residue retained on a No. 10 (2000-micron) sieve: Max. 1.0 percent. c. Residue retained on a No. 30 (590-micron) sieve: Max. 2.5 percent. 6. Specifications for Type A apply specifically to the normal hydrate of lime made from “high-calcium” type limestone. Hydrated lime for stabilization purposes shall be, as provided in the governing specifications, mixed with water to form a slurry. B. Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry: 1. Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry, shall be a pumpable suspension of solids in water. The water or liquid portion of the slurry shall not contain dissolved material in sufficient quantity and/or nature injurious or objectionable for the purpose intended. The solids portion of the mixture, when considered on the basis of “solids content,” shall consist principally of hydrated lime of a quality and fineness sufficient to meet the following requirements as to chemical composition and residue. 2. Chemical Composition: The “solids content” of the lime slurry shall consist of a minimum of 90 percent by weight of calcium and magnesium oxides. 3. Residue: The percent by weight of residue retained in the “solids content” of lime slurry shall conform to the following requirements: a. Residue retained on No. 6 (3360-micron) sieve: Max. 0.0 percent. b. Residue retained on No. 10 (2000-micron) sieve: Max. 1.0 percent. c. Residue retained on No. 30 (590-micron) sieve: Max. 2.5 percent. d. Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry, shall conform to one of the following two grades: 1). Grade 1: The “Dry Solids Content” shall be at least 31 percent by weight of the slurry. Attachment 3Item 12 Lime Soil Stabilization 31 32 13.19-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2). Grade 2: The “Dry Solids Content” shall be at least 35 percent by weight of the slurry. 4. When Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry, is specified, the Contractor shall select, prior to construction, the grade to be used and shall notify the Engineer in writing before changing from one grade to another.  2.02 MIXES; LIME SLURRY A. The approximate mix for lime slurry is 1 ton of lime to 533 gallons of water which gives a 31 percent lime solution, and 1 ton of lime to 445 gallons of water which gives a 35 percent solution. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper prosecution of the Work shall be on the Site prior to the beginning of construction operations. Use slurry tanks equipped with agitation devices to slurry hydrated lime on the Project. The Engineer may approve other methods of slurry application. B. Machinery, tools, and equipment used on the Project shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. It is a primary requirement of this Section to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth, and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. Regulate the sequence of Work, use the proper amount of lime, maintain the Work, and rework the courses as necessary to meet these requirements. B. Prior to beginning any lime treatment, construct and shape the roadbed to conform to the typical sections, lines, and grades as indicated on the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. 3.02 TREATMENT OF SUBGRADE A. Treatment: Excavate material to be treated to the secondary grade (proposed bottom of lime treatment) and remove or window to expose the secondary grade. Correct any wet or unstable materials below the secondary grade by scarifying, adding lime, and compacting until it is of uniform stability. Spread the excavated material to the desired cross-section. If the Contractor elects to use a cutting or pulverizing machine that will remove the subgrade material accurately to the secondary grade, and pulverizing machine at the same time, he will not be required to expose the secondary grade or window the material. However, the Attachment 3Item 12 Lime Soil Stabilization 31 32 13.19-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Contractor shall be required to roll the subgrade before using the pulverizing machine and correct any soft areas that this rolling may reveal. This method will be permitted only where a machine is provided which will insure that the material is cut uniformly to the proper depth and which has cutters that will place the secondary grade to a smooth surface over the entire width of the cut. The machine shall be of such design that a visible indication is given at all times that the machine is cutting to the proper depth. B. Application: 1. Spread lime slurry only on that area on which the mixing operation can be completed the same working day. 2. Accomplish the application and mixing of lime with the materials by the method hereinafter described as “Slurry Placing,” unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. C. Slurry Placing: 1. Method: a. Apply Lime Slurry, with a lime percentage not less than that applicable for the grade used. The distribution of lime at the rate shown on the Drawings, or as adjusted and directed by the Engineer resulting from the soil-lime proportioning test requirements in Paragraph 1.03, shall be attained by successive passes over a measured surface of roadway until the proper moisture and specified lime content have been achieved. The distributor truck shall be equipped with an agitator which keeps the lime and water in a uniform mixture. b. It is anticipated that the rate of application of lime shall not be less than 4.5 pounds of lime per square yard per inch of depth of compacted subgrade, or a total of 27 pounds per square yard for a 6-inch depth of treated compacted subgrade. This is approximately a 6 percent mixture of lime by typical dry weight of the subgrade material, which may vary according to the laboratory tests. Actual application rates shall be determined per Paragraph 1.03, but in no case shall less than 6 percent by weight be applied. 2. Mixing: a. Thoroughly mix the material and lime by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and continue mixing until a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from clods or lumps. Materials containing plastic clay or other materials which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application, brought to the proper moisture content, and left to cure 1 to 4 days as directed by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer. Keep the material moist during the curing period. Attachment 3Item 12 Lime Soil Stabilization 31 32 13.19-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. After the required curing period, uniformly mix the material by approved methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, reduce the clods in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying, or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that when all non-slaking aggregates obtained on the No. 4 sieve are removed, the remainder of the material meets the following requirements when tested dry by laboratory sieves: 1). Minimum passing 1-inch sieve: 100 percent. 2). Minimum passing No. 4 sieve: 60 percent. c. During the interval of time between application and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of 6 hours or more, or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing, will not be accepted for payment. 3. Compaction: Begin compaction of the mixture immediately after final mixing and in no case later than 3 calendar days after final mixing. Aerate or sprinkle the material as necessary to provide optimum moisture. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until the entire depth of the mixture is uniformly compacted as indicated or specified by the Engineer. The compacted mixture shall have a uniform density of not less than 95 percent of Standard Proctor Density as measured by ASTM D698. After each section is completed, such tests as are necessary shall be made by the laboratory as required by the Engineer. If any portion fails to meet the density or the depth specified, rework that portion as necessary to obtain the specified density and depth of lime treatment required. D. Finishing, Curing, and Preparation for Surfacing: After the mixture has been adequately compacted, shape the surface to the required line, grades, and cross-sections, and then thoroughly roll with a pneumatic or other suitable roller sufficiently light to prevent hairline- cracking. The completed section shall then be moist-cured for a minimum of 2 to 7 days before further courses of material or pavement are added or any traffic permitted. In cases where subgrade treatment or subbase sets up sufficiently to prevent objectionable damage from traffic, such layers may be opened to light traffic 2 days after compaction. If the completed section has not been covered by other courses of material or pavement in 7 days, seal the completed section by an application of AC-20 asphalt at the rate of 0.10 gallons per square yard. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain the completed soil-lime base within the limits of the Contract, in good condition, satisfactory to the Engineer as to grade, crown, and cross-section until such time as the surface course is constructed. At the Contractor’s expense, immediately repair irregularities or other defects that occur. Repairs are to be made in a manner to ensure restoration of a uniform surface and durability of the portion repaired. Attachment 3Item 12 Lime Soil Stabilization 31 32 13.19-6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Rigid Paving Repair 32 01 29 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 32 01 29 RIGID PAVING REPAIR 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to repair and resurface pavement. This section shall govern for the repair or replacement of pavement or other improved surfaces damaged or destroyed in performing the construction of water and sewer lines. Construction of such projects below pavement subgrade is covered by Section 31 23 33 “Trenching and Backfill.” 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Proposed material list and sources as record data. 2. Experience record of proposed paving subcontractor as record data. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT), Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges, latest edition. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not place materials when, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, weather conditions are unsuitable. Do not place concrete when the temperature is 40 F and falling. Concrete may be placed when temperature is above 35 F and rising. Do not place asphalt or asphaltic concrete when the temperature is below 50 F and falling. Asphalt or asphaltic concrete may be placed when temperature is above 40 F and rising. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Pavement: 1. Concrete: 3000 psi conforming to Section 03 30 00 “Cast-In-Place Concrete.” 2. Reinforcing Steel: Of the same size and spacing as in the existing concrete pavement unless otherwise indicated. New billet steel, deformed bars, conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. Asphalt Pavement: 1. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete: a. HMAC Surface Course: Conforming to TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 340, Type D. Attachment 3Item 12 Rigid Paving Repair 32 01 29 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. Asphaltic Materials Used in the Mix: Conforming to TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 300. The grade of asphalt shall be AC-10. Other grades of asphalt will be considered if weather conditions or mix design appear to warrant a change. c. Aggregate: Conforming to TXDOT Standard Specification, Item 340.2. d. Prime Coat: Conforming to TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 300, Grade MC-30, or an appropriate asphalt emulsion. e. Tack Coat: Cut-back asphalt RC-250 or MC-30 conforming to TXDOT Standard Specification, Item 300 unless otherwise approved by the Owner’s Representative. 2. Two-Course Surface Treatment: Conforming to TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 316. Asphaltic materials shall conform to TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 300, AC- 10 for hot weather and AC-5 for cooler weather. Aggregates shall conform to TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 302. First course shall be Grade 1 and second course shall be Grade 2 (TXDOT Table 2 Aggregate Gradation Requirements). 3. Flexible Base: Of the depth and to the extent shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on plans, flexible base shall be one or more of the following listed options: a. Flexible Base Material: Conforming to TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 247, Type A, B, C, or D, Grade 1 or Grade 2. b. Full Depth Asphaltic Concrete: Conforming to TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 340, Type A (Coarse Base), B (Fine Base), or C (Coarse Surface). 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Concrete Pavement: Cut pavement in parallel straight lines a minimum of 1 foot outside trench walls on each side to permit pavement removal before trench excavation. Make cuts by sawing partial pavement depth to avoid cutting reinforcing steel. After concrete pavement is broken up and removed, cut off existing reinforcing steel to provide a minimum of 30 bar diameters lap with new reinforcing steel on each side and bent back to clear the trench for excavation and pipe laying. B. Asphalt Pavement: Cut paved surface in parallel straight lines outside trench walls prior to trench excavation. Before pavement replacement has begun, make additional straight line cuts and remove pavement a minimum of 1 foot outside trench walls. C. Subgrade: The subgrade, including granular trench backfill, shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative before any base or pavement surface is replaced. Moisten, reshape, and re-compact subgrade as necessary to receive the base material. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Pavement Replacement: 1. Install reinforcing steel on the approved subgrade and securely tie in place. Bend down existing reinforcing into proper position and securely tie each bar to new reinforcing bars. Support and tie reinforcing to steel bar chairs or other suitable supporting devices. Attachment 3Item 12 Rigid Paving Repair 32 01 29 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B New reinforcement shall be of equal size and spacing to existing steel, unless otherwise indicated. Install substantial forms to proper grade at pavement edges. 2. Rapidly deposit concrete on the subgrade in successive batches and distribute to the required depth and for the entire width of the pavement by shoveling or other approved methods. Do not use rakes in handling concrete. The placing operation shall be continuous. Level the concrete, as soon as placed, and then struck off and screed to such elevation above grade that when consolidated and finished the surface of the pavement shall be at the proper elevation. Tamp the entire surface and consolidate the concrete so as to insure maximum compaction and a minimum of voids. 3. After final floating and while the concrete is still workable, finish the surface to provide a uniform surface of gritty texture by brooming, use of belting, burlap drags or other approved methods. 4. Cure the concrete with an approved curing compound or other approved means. Concrete pavement shall not be opened to traffic until it has gained sufficient strength to withstand traffic without damage unless approved protective devices are provided. Concrete pavement at an age of 7 days or a strength of 2000 psi may be opened to traffic. B. Flexible Base: 1. Where the base course exceeds 6 inches in thickness, construct the flexible base in two or more courses of equal thickness. Wet, manipulate, and compact material to 95 percent maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. Where deemed necessary by the Owner’s Representative, apply a uniform application of prime coat asphaltic material to the surface of the prepared subgrade, applied at a rate of not less than 0.30 gallon per square yard of surface. 2. Where plant mix asphalt material is used for base, construction shall be in accordance with TXDOT Standard Specifications, Item 351, as applicable to small areas. C. Asphalt Pavement Replacement: 1. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete: Apply prime coat to base or tack coat base as indicated. Coat contact surfaces of pavement edges and structures with asphalt before any pavement is placed. Do not place pavement until the Owner’s Representative has approved the base. Hauling or transporting of the material to the project site, placing, compaction, and shaping shall be in accordance with TXDOT Standard Specification Item 340.6 as applicable for small areas. After final compaction of the pavement, no vehicular traffic of any kind shall be permitted until the pavement has cooled and hardened for at least 6 hours. Smooth the finished surface course, upon completion of final rolling true to grade and cross-section. Immediately correct low or defective areas by cutting out the faulty areas and replacing with fresh, hot mixture. Compact the area to conform to the remainder of the pavement. 2. Two-Course Asphalt Surface Treatment: On the approved surface of the finished base, asphalt at the rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gallons per square yard shall be applied by an approved distributor so operated to result in a uniform, proper distribution at the correct temperature. Immediately cover the surface with No. 1 aggregate, distribute at a rate of one cubic yard per 80 square yards, broom as necessary for uniform distribution, and roll with a flat wheel roller of ample weight. Make a second Attachment 3Item 12 Rigid Paving Repair 32 01 29 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B application of asphalt in the manner specified for the first application, at a rate of 0.30 to 0.40 gallon per square yard. Make the second application with No. 2 aggregate at a rate of one cubic yard per 110 square yards and process as specified for the first application. After the work has been completed, there should be a slight excess of aggregate on the surface. D. Other Improved Surfaces: Where water, storm drains, or sewer lines to be constructed traverse or cross through gravel surfaced public roads or shoulders, or private dirt or gravel driveways or parking areas, replace the surface with a quality material, workmanship and at a thickness at least equal to the existing surfaces. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Aggregate Base Courses 32 11 23 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform operations in connection with the construction of flexible base. Flexible base shall consist of a foundation for a road surface or for other courses. Construct the flexible base foundation course as specified herein in one or more courses in conformance with the typical sections, lines, and grades indicated in the plans. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Sieve analysis liquid and plastic limits and plasticity index of the material to be used as record data. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM C131 Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Course Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM D2217 Practice of Wet Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle-Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants ASTM D4318 Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Deliver materials in approved vehicles. Stockpile materials in locations that are acceptable to the Owner’s Representative and shape to drain. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Base; General: 1. The materials shall be crushed or uncrushed as necessary to meet the requirements hereinafter specified, and shall consist of durable coarse aggregate particles mixed with approved binding materials. The material shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. 2. Should the Contractor elect to produce the material from local pits, secure the material from the sources approved by the Owner’s Representative. The pits as utilized shall be Attachment 3Item 12 Aggregate Base Courses 32 11 23 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B opened in such a manner to immediately expose the vertical faces of the various strata of acceptable material and unless otherwise directed, the material shall be secured in successive vertical cuts extending through the exposed strata, in order that a uniform mixed material will be secured. B. Types: 1. Unless the type of material to be used is specified on the plans, the Contractor may use any one of the following types, provided the material proposed for use by the Contractor meets the requirements set forth in the specification test limits tabulation. 2. Type A: Crushed Limestone: a. The material shall be obtained from approved sources, shall be crushed, and shall consist of durable particles of limestone mixed with approved binding materials. The material shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative at the source. The processed material when properly slaked and tested by standard laboratory methods shall meet the following requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1-3/4”100 3/8”40-80 No. 4 25-60 No. 40 15-35 b. The material when tested under “The Wet Ball Method for Determining the Disintegration of Flexible Base Materials” shall not develop more than 50 percent soil binder. c. Materials passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as “Binder” and shall meet the following requirements: 1). The liquid limit shall not exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM D423. 2). The plastic limit shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM D424. 3). The plasticity index shall not exceed 12 nor be less than 4 when calculated in accordance with ASTM D424. 4). The preparation of samples for testing according to ASTM D4318 and shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2217. 5). Materials retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have a percent wear of not more than 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C131. 3. Type B: Processed Gravel: a. The materials shall be obtained from approved sources and shall consist of durable particles of gravel mixed with approved binding materials. The material shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative at the source. The processed material when properly slaked and tested by standard laboratory methods shall meet the following requirements: Attachment 3Item 12 Aggregate Base Courses 32 11 23 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-3/4”40-80 No. 4 40-80 No. 4 25-60 No. 40 15-35 b. Materials passing the No. 4 sieve shall be known as “Binder.” The portion of material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as “Soil Binder” and shall meet the following requirements: 1). The liquid limit shall not exceed 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. 2). The plastic limit shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM D4318. 3). The plasticity index shall not exceed 10 when calculated in accordance with ASTM D4318. 4). The preparation of samples for testing according to ASTM D4318 and shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2217. 5). Materials retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have a percent wear of not more than 55 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C131. 4. Type C: Bank-Run Gravel: a. The materials shall be obtained from approved sources and shall consist of durable particles of gravel mixed with approved binding materials. The material shall be free from thin or elongated pieces, lumps of clay, soil, loam, or vegetable matter. The material shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative at the source. The processed material when properly slaked and tested by standard laboratory methods shall meet the following requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1-3/4”95-100 No. 4 25-70 No. 40 15-35 b. Materials passing the No. 4 sieve shall be known as “Binder.” The portion of material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as “Soil Binder” and shall meet the following requirements: 1). The liquid limit shall not exceed 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. 2). The plastic limit shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM D4318. 3). The plasticity index shall not exceed 10 when calculated in accordance with ASTM D4318. Attachment 3Item 12 Aggregate Base Courses 32 11 23 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4). The preparation of samples for testing according to ASTM D4318 and shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2217. 5). Materials retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have a percent wear of not more than 55 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C131. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. In conformance with the typical sections, lines, and grades indicated, excavate and shape the road bed. Remove unstable or otherwise objectionable material from the subgrade and replace with approved material. Fill holes, ruts, and depressions with approved material. Sprinkle the subgrade, if necessary, and reshape and roll to the extent directed in order to place the subgrade in an acceptable condition to receive the base material. The surface of the subgrade shall be smooth and conform to line, grade, and typical sections. Prepare sufficient subgrade in advance to insure satisfactory prosecution of the work. B. Utilize material excavated in the preparation of the subgrade in the construction of adjacent shoulders and slopes or otherwise disposed of as directed. Secure any additional material required for the completion of the shoulders and slopes from sources indicated or designated by the Owner’s Representative. C. Immediately before placing the base course material, check the subgrade for conformance with the grade and typical sections indicated. The surface of the subgrade shall not show deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in 5 feet in cross-section, nor 1/2 inch in 16 inches longitudinally. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Number of Courses: Where the base course exceeds 6 inches in thickness, construct the base course in two or more courses of equal thickness as indicated on the typical section. B. Placing Types A, B, and C: Spread and shape the material deposited on the subgrade the same day. Move the material at least once from the original position in which it is deposited. In the event of inclement weather or other unforeseen circumstances which render impractical the spreading of the material during the first 24 hour period, scarify and spread the material as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Sprinkle the material, if directed, and then blade, drag, and shape to conform to the typical section as indicated. Correct or replace and remove areas and “nests” of segregated course or fine material with well graded material as directed by the Owner’s Representative. If additional binder is considered desirable or necessary after the material is spread and shaped, furnish and apply material in the amount directed by the Owner’s Representative. Carefully incorporate such binder with the material in place by scarifying, harrowing, brooming, or by other approved methods. C. First Course (Types A, B, and C): Sprinkle the course as necessary and compact to the extent necessary to provide not less than the percent density as hereinafter specified under “Density.” In addition to the requirements specified for density, compact the full depth of the flexible base to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. After each section and course of flexible base is complete, the independent testing laboratory shall make tests of the material. If the material fails to meet the density Attachment 3Item 12 Aggregate Base Courses 32 11 23 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B requirements, rework the material as necessary to meet the requirements. Throughout this entire operation, maintain the shape of the course by blading, and smooth the surface upon completion in conformity with the typical sections, lines, and grades indicated. On the surface of which pavement is to be placed, correct any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross-section and in a length of 16 inches measured longitudinally by loosening, adding, or removing material, reshaping, and re-compacting by sprinkling and rolling. Immediately correct irregularities, depressions, or weak spots which develop by scarifying the areas affected, adding suitable material as necessary, reshaping, and re-compacting by sprinkling and rolling. Should the base course, due to any reason or cause, lose required stability, density, and/or finish before the surfacing is complete, re-compact and refinish the base course at the Contractor’s sole expense. D. Succeeding Courses (Types A, B, and C): Use the same construction methods as prescribed for the first course. Prior to placing the surfacing on the completed base, “dry cure” the base to the extent directed by the Owner’s Representative. E. Density: The density of the flexible base material shall not be less than 95 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. Perform testing of densities of compacted base in accordance with a method approved by the Owner’s Representative. F. Curb and Gutter: Place and compact paving types with flexible base under the curb and gutter at the same time and in the same operation as the flexible base under the pavement. Place the flexible base in 6-inch maximum courses. Place and compact the first course under both the curb and gutter and the pavement. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform operations in connection with the construction of hot mix asphaltic concrete (HMAC) base course, leveling-up course and surface course or any other combination of these courses. Construct the pavement on the previously completed and approved subgrade, base, or existing pavement. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Use the services of an independent testing laboratory to prepare a mix design to comply with Texas Department of Transportation, Standard Specification Item 340 or may use a previously prepared mix design meeting the specification requirements with satisfactory substantiation of experience with the mix. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Mix design as record data. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Hot mix asphaltic concrete (HMAC) pavement shall conform to the requirements of the current Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT), Standard Specification for “Dense- Graded Hot Mix Asphaltic “, Item 340. B. Asphaltic material shall comply with Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT) Standard Specification Item 300. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Haul the asphaltic mixture to the job site in tight vehicles previously cleaned of foreign materials. Arrange the dispatching of vehicles so that all material delivered shall be placed and all rolling shall be completed during daylight hours. In cool weather, or for long hauls, canvas covers may be required. The inside of the truck body may be given a light coating of oil, if necessary, to prevent the asphaltic mixture from adhering to the body. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not apply prime coat when the air temperature is below 50 F and falling, but may be applied when the air temperature is above 40 F and rising, the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Do not place asphaltic material when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative are not suitable. B. The asphaltic mixture shall be at a temperature between 225 and 350 F when dumped from the mixer. The Owner’s Representative shall determine the temperature, within the above Attachment 3Item 12 Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B limitations. The mixture when dumped from the mixer shall not vary from the selected temperature more than 30 F. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aggregate: Conform to TXDOT Standard Specification Item 340. The Type “B” mixtures and at least three bins when producing Type “D” mixture. These bins shall contain the following sizes of aggregate, in percentages by weight or by volume, as applicable. 1. Gradation for base course or leveling-up course shall comply with Type B listed as follows: a. Type “B” (Fine Graded Base Course): Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight or Volume 1”98-100 3/4”84-98 5/8”75-95 3/8”60-80 No. 4 40-60 No. 8 29-43 No. 30 13-28 No. 50 6-20 No. 200 2-7 VMA percent minimum 12 The asphaltic material shall form from 3.5 to 7 percent of the mixture by weight unless specified otherwise on the plans. 2. Gradation for surface course shall comply with Type D listed as follows: a.Type “D” (Fine-Graded Surface Course): Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight or Volume 1/2”98-100 3/8”85-100 No. 4 50-70 No. 8 35-46 No. 30 15-29 No. 50 7-20 No. 200 2-7 Attachment 3Item 12 Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B VMA percent minimum 14 The asphaltic material shall form from 4 to 8 percent of the mixture by weight unless specified otherwise on the plans. B. Asphaltic Materials: Comply with TXDOT Standard Specification Item 300. In general, the grade of asphalt shall be AC-10. Other grades of asphalt shall be considered if weather conditions or mix design appear to warrant a change. Prime coat shall comply with TXDOT Standard Specification Item 300, Grade MC-30. Tack coat shall meet the requirements of cutback asphalt RC-250. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. The equipment necessary for the construction of the hot mix asphaltic concrete pavement shall be on the project site and shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative as to condition before the Contractor shall be permitted to begin construction operations on which the equipment is to be used. Equipment shall be maintained in good repair and operating condition. B. Spreading and Finishing Machines: 1. The spreading and finishing machine shall be of a type approved by the Owner’s Representative and capable of producing a surface that shall meet the requirements of the typical cross section and surface test. 2. Rollers: a. Pneumatic Tire Roller: The roller shall consist of not less than seven pneumatic tire wheels, running on axles in such a manner that the rear group of tires shall cover the entire gap between adjacent tires of forward group; mounted in a rigid frame; and provided with a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The front axle shall be attached to the frame in such a manner that the roller may be turned within a minimum circle. The tire shall afford surface contact pressures up to 90 pounds per square inch or more. The roller shall be so constructed as to operate in both forward and a reverse direction with suitable provisions for moistening the surface of the tires while operating; and shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. b. Two-Axle Tandem Roller: The roller shall be an acceptable power-driven, steel- wheel tandem roller weighing not less than 8 tons. The roller must operate in forward and reverse directions; contain provisions for moistening the surface of the wheels while in motion; and shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. c. Three-Wheel Roller: The roller shall be an acceptable power-driven, all steel three wheel roller weighing not less than 10 tons. The roller must operate in forward and reverse directions; contain provisions for moistening the surface of the wheels while in motion; and shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. d. Vibratory Steel Wheel Roller: If approved for use by the Owner’s Representative, this roller shall have a minimum weight of 6 tons. The compactor shall be equipped with amplitude and frequency controls and shall be specifically designed to compact Attachment 3Item 12 Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B the material on which it is used. The roller shall be operated in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Straightedges: The Contractor shall provide acceptable straightedges for the surface testing. Satisfactory templates shall be provided as required by the Owner’s Representative. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prime Coat: Apply a uniform coat of prime coat asphaltic material to the surface of the prepared subgrade, sub-base, or base, applied at a rate of not less than 0.30 gallon per square yard of surface. Apply a thin uniform coat of the prime coat material to contact surfaces of gutters, manholes, and other structures. B. Tack Coat: Thoroughly clean the surface of the asphalt base course and apply a uniform coat of tack material meeting the requirements for cutback asphalt RC-250.Apply a tack coat when the surface to be paved is Portland cement concrete, brick, or asphaltic pavement. Apply the tack coat using sprayer at a rate not exceeding 0.05 gallon per square yard surface. Paint contact surfaces of curbs, gutters, vertical faces, and other structures in actual contact with asphaltic mixes with asphaltic material to provide a closely bonded, water-tight joint. C. Compacted Thickness of Asphaltic Concrete Surface Courses and Base Courses: 1. Surface Course: The compacted thickness or depth of the asphaltic concrete surface shall be as indicated on the plans. Where the plans indicate a depth or thickness of the surface course greater than 2 inches compacted depth, same shall be placed in multiple courses of equal depth, each which shall not exceed 2 inches compacted depth. A tack coat is required between any of the multiple courses, and applied at the rate specified. 2. Base Course: The compacted thickness or depth of each base shall be as indicated. Where the plans indicate a depth or thickness of the course greater than 4 inches, same shall be accomplished by constructing multiple lifts of approximately equal depth, each of which shall not exceed these maximum compacted depths. An additional tack coat is required between any of the multiple lifts, and applied at a rate specified. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Place the asphaltic mixture on an approved base course with the previously specified spreading and finishing machine in such a manner that, when properly compacted, the finished course shall comply with the maximum thickness requirements, shall be smooth, of uniform density and meet the requirements of the typical cross-sections and the surface test. During the placing and spreading of the asphaltic material, take care to prevent the spilling of the material onto adjacent pavement, gutters, or structures. B. In small areas, which are inaccessible to the spreading and finishing machine, hand spreading may be authorized by the Owner’s Representative, provided an acceptable surface can be obtained. Attachment 3Item 12 Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.03 COMPACTION A.Rolling with the three-wheel and tandem rollers shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the surface course, overlapping on successive trips by at least half the width of the rear wheels. Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different in length. Rolling with the pneumatic tire roller shall be done as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Rolling shall continue until no further compression can be obtained and all roller marks are eliminated. The motion of the rollers shall be slow enough at all times to avoid displacement of the asphaltic surface material. If displacement should occur, correct the situation at once by the use of rakes and fresh asphaltic mixtures. The roller shall not be allowed to stand on the surface course when it has not been fully compacted and allowed to cool. To prevent adhesion of the surface to the roller, the wheels shall be kept thoroughly moistened with water, but an excess of water shall not be permitted. Rollers must be in good mechanical condition. Take the necessary precautions to prevent the dripping of gasoline, oil, grease, or other foreign matter on the surface course while the rollers are in motion or when standing. In areas where surface course cannot be compacted with the roller, hand tamps, lightly oiled, shall be used to secure the required compaction. B. With approval by the Owner’s Representative, the vibratory steel wheel roller may be substituted for the three-wheel roller and tandem roller. Each course, after final compaction, shall contain from 5 to 9 percent air voids determined by TXDOT Test Method TEX207-F and TEX-227-F. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Surface Tests: The finished surface of the pavement after compression shall be smooth and true to the established line, grade, and cross-section. When tested with a 16-foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline of the roadway, the finished surface shall have no deviation in excess of 1/16 inch per foot from the nearest point of contact. The maximum ordinate measured from the face of the straightedge shall not exceed 1/4 inch at any point. Any point in the pavement surface not meeting these requirements shall be immediately corrected. B. Pavement Thickness Test: Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance and final payment shall be made, pavement thickness test shall be made by the Owner or his authorized representative unless otherwise specified in the special provisions or in the plans. The number and location of tests shall be at the discretion of the Owner’s Representative. The cost for the initial pavement thickness test shall be at the expense of the Owner. In the event a deficiency in the thickness of the pavement is revealed during normal testing operations, subsequent tests necessary to isolate the deficiency shall be at the Contractor’s expense. The cost for the additional coring test shall be at the same rate charged by commercial laboratories. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Decorative Metal Gates 32 31 19 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 32 31 19 DECORATIVE METAL GATES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal rolling gates. 2. Gate operators. 3. Personnel access swing gates. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete” for concrete bases for gate operators, drives, and controls and post concrete fill. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product. B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, design calculations and attachments to other work. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. The Engineer’s general review and approval shall not relieve the gate manufacturer of his design responsibility. Design calculations and record drawings shall be sealed by a licensed professional engineer registered in the State of Texas. C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified. 1. Provide Samples 12 inches in length for linear materials. 2. Provide Samples 12 inch X 12 inch square for bar grating and sheet or plate materials. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For gates. 1. Include analysis data indicating compliance with performance requirements and design data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Texas responsible for their preparation. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals. Attachment 3Item 12 Decorative Metal Gates 32 31 19 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: The fabricator shall have at least 10 years’ experience in the installation of automated gates and operators. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Include 3 foot length of gate complying with requirements. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 HORIZONTAL-SLIDE GATES A. Gate Configuration: Single leaf cantilever style. 1. Type: Rolling, automated, with v-track including concrete strip per manufacturers recommendations. B. Gate Frame Height: 8 feet. C. Gate Opening Width: 24 feet. D. Gate Material: 1. Steel material for roll gate components (i.e. rails, diagonals, angles and uprights), shall be commercial steel with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. 2. Ornamental wall panel material shall be 12 Ga. “PBU” metal panels by ABC Roofing. Inc. or approved equal. Material for rails shall be at a minimum HSS 5” x 5” x 1/4” for horizontal rails and at a minimum HSS 2” x 2” x 1/4” for upright and diagonal rails - increase as required by design. All ancillary rails, angles and additional materials shall be sized in accordance with design. 3. Ornamental picket material shall be 1” square x 14 Ga. Tubing. Picket spacing shall be 4- 5/8” clear. Material for toprails, uprights and diagonals rails shall be 2” square x 12 Ga. Material for the bottom rail shall be 2” x 4” x 11 Ga. Posts shall be a minimum of 4” square x 11 Ga. E. Gate Fabrication: 1. Steel panels, rails, uprights and angles shall be precut to specified lengths. Diagonals shall be precut to specified lengths and angles. Frame materials shall be joined by welding. 2. Loads a. Completed gates shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 200 lb. load applied at midspan without permanent deformation. b. Gate to adhere to wind loads capable of withstanding the effects of loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592. Attachment 3Item 12 Decorative Metal Gates 32 31 19 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. The manufactured roll gates shall be subjected to the paint requirements below: 1).Industrial coating suited for exterior applications: a). Prime Coat b). Intermediate Coat c). Final Top Coat b. Color to be selected by Owner. Table 1 – Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 1,000 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units). 2.02 GATE OPERATORS A.Gate Operators: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Chamberlain Liftmaster commercial operator SL595101U; or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amazing Gates of America LLC. b. Apollo Gate Operators. c. AutoGate, Inc. d. Begley Automated Gate Systems. e. Byan Systems, Inc. f. CAME Americas Automation LLC. g. Chamberlain Group, Inc. (The). h. DoorKing, Inc. i. Eagle Access Control Systems, Inc. j. FAAC USA. k. Gates That Open, LLC. l. HySecurity. Attachment 3Item 12 Decorative Metal Gates 32 31 19 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B m. Tymetal Corp. n.USAutomatic Inc. o. Viking Access Systems. B. Provide factory-assembled automatic operating system designed for gate size, type, weight, and operation frequency. Provide operation control system with characteristics suitable for Project conditions, with remote-control stations, safety devices, and weatherproof enclosures; coordinate electrical requirements with building electrical system. 1. Provide operator designed so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator. 2. Provide operator with UL approval. 3. Provide electronic components with built-in troubleshooting diagnostic feature. 4. Provide unit designed and wired for both right-hand/left-hand opening, permitting universal installation. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. UL Standard: Manufacturer and label gate operators to comply with UL 325. E. Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic gate operators on gates that must provide emergency access. F. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, within installed environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate rating or considering service factor. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and the following: 1. Voltage: 115 V Single Phase. 2. Horsepower: Not less than 1-1/2. 3. Enclosure: Totally enclosed. 4. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 F (40 C) and at altitude of 3300 feet (1005 m) above sea level. 5. Service Factor: 1.0 for totally enclosed motors. G. Gate Operators: Concrete base mounted and as follows: 1. Hydraulic Rolling Gate Operators: a. Duty: commercial/industrial. b. Gate Speed: Minimum 45 feet per minute. c. Frequency of Use: 10 cycles per hour. d. Operating Type: Wheel-and-rail drive with manual release. e. Hydraulic Fluid: Of viscosity required for gate operation at ambient temperature range for Project. f. Locking: Hydraulic in both directions. H. Remote Controls: Provide the following remote-control device(s): Attachment 3Item 12 Decorative Metal Gates 32 31 19 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Commercial Keypad: Coordinate access key code setup with the Owners representative. 2.Emergency Access – as required by authority having jurisdiction. I. Vehicle Loop Detector: System includes automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay and loop detector designed to hold gate open until traffic clears, reverse gate, and open gate for exit. System includes electronic detector with adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator light designed to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit a signal activating the gate operator. System includes number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of placement, as recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer for function indicated, at location shown on Drawings. J. Obstruction Detection Devices: Provide each motorized gate with automatic safety sensor(s). Activation of sensor(s) causes operator to immediately function as follows: 1. Action: Reverse gate in both opening and closing cycles, and hold until clear of obstruction. 2. Action: Stop gate in opening cycle and reverse gate in closing cycle, and hold until clear of obstruction. 3. Internal Sensor: Built-in torque or current monitor senses gate is obstructed. 4. Sensor Edge: Contact-pressure-sensitive safety edge, profile, and sensitivity designed for type of gate and component indicated, in locations as follows. a. Along entire gate leaf leading edge. b. Along entire gate leaf trailing edge. K. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop gate at fully retracted and fully extended positions. L. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick-disconnect release of operator drive system of the following type, permitting manual operation if operator fails. Design system so control- circuit power is disconnected during manual operation. 1. Type: As required by authority having jurisdiction. M. Operating Features: 1. Digital Microprocessor Control: Electronic programmable means for setting, changing, and adjusting control features with capability for monitoring and auditing gate activity] Provide unit that is isolated from voltage spikes and surges. 2. System Integration: With controlling circuit board capable of accepting any type of input from external devices. 3. Master/Slave Capability: Control stations designed and wired for gate pair operation. 4. Automatic Closing Timer: With adjustable time delay before closing and timer cutoff switch. 5. Open Override Circuit: Designed to override closing commands. Attachment 3Item 12 Decorative Metal Gates 32 31 19 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 6. Reversal Time Delay: Designed to protect gate system from shock load on reversal in both directions. 7. Maximum Run Timer: Designed to prevent damage to gate system by shutting down system if normal time to open gate is exceeded. 8. Clock Timer: 24-hour programmable for regular events. N. Accessories: 1. Battery Backup System: Battery-powered drive and access-control system, independent of primary drive system: a. Fail-Safe: Gate closes and remains closed until power is restored. b. Fail-Secure: Gate cycles on battery power, then fail-safe when battery is discharged. 2. Fire box, as required by authority having jurisdiction. 3. Instructional, Safety, and Warning Labels and Signs: According to UL 325 4. Equipment Bases/Pads: Precast concrete, depth not less than 12 inches, dimensioned and reinforced according to gate operator component manufacturer’s written instructions. 2.03 SWING GATES A. Gate Configuration: Single Leaf gate, including 4’ sidewalk approach on both sides of gate. B. Gate Frame Height: 96 inches. C. Gate Opening Width: 42 inches. D. Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square steel tubing with a minimum 1- 1/2 by 1-1/2 inches and a minimum of 1/8-inch wall thickness. E. Infill: Comply with requirements for horizontal gate. F. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate. Contractor to provide padlock. Owner to determine number of access keys required. G. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use. 1. Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing 2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel. H. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #3 - partially dressed weld with splatter removed. I. Metallic-Coated-Steel Finish: High-performance coating. J. Steel Finish: Primed and Shop painted. K. Install personnel access swing gate north and adjacent to horizontal rolling gate. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Attachment 3Item 12 Decorative Metal Gates 32 31 19 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet (152.5 m) or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.03 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates according to manufacturer’s written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. 3.04 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION A. General: Install gate operators according to manufacturer’s written instructions, aligned and true to fence line and grade. B. Excavation for Concrete Bases: Hand-excavate holes for bases in firm, undisturbed soil to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate operator component manufacturer’s written instructions and as indicated. C. Concrete Bases: Cast-in-place or precast concrete, depth not less than 12 dimensioned and reinforced according to gate operator component manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Connect to equipment operated by detector. E. Comply with NFPA 70 and manufacturer’s written instructions for grounding of electric- powered motors, controls, and other devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Automatic Gate Operators: Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Adjust operators, controls, safety devices, and limit switches. 1. Hydraulic Operators: Purge operating system, adjust pressure and fluid levels, and check for leaks. Attachment 3Item 12 Decorative Metal Gates 32 31 19 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Lubricate hardware, gate operators, and other moving parts. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner’s personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 32 84 23 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide skilled labor, materials, and equipment for a complete operable landscape irrigation system as specified herein. Provide an irrigation system designed by a licensed Landscape Irrigator employed by the Contractor installing the system. B. Provide a design and install an approved landscape irrigation system for trees, shrubs and turf as indicated on the landscape drawings, and as directed herein. C. Provide connections to city water main, meters, and backflow preventers as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and the TCEQ standards and regulations. D. Coordinate and pay for fees, taps, and all other associated costs associated with new irrigation supply main installations prior to beginning construction. Include these costs in the original bid. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers of irrigation specialties shall be experienced in the production of this type of equipment. Manufacturers not listed below or in this Section may be approved if submitted to and approved by the A/E prior to bidding. Refer to Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for substitution requirements. 2. Recognized manufacturers are as follows: a. Rainbird Corporation. b. Hunter Industries. c. Weathermatic. d. Leit Dig Corporation. B. Installer’s Requirements: 1. Contractor’s irrigators, technicians, and installers shall be licensed by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and remain in good standing throughout the Project. At least one licensed landscape irrigator or technician shall be on the Site during construction at all times providing on-site supervision of the installation of the irrigation system and shall provide their TCEQ irrigators license card when requested by the Owner or Architect/Engineer’s (A/E) representative. Design of the irrigation shall be Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B performed by a licensed landscape irrigator, holding a current license in good standing by the TCEQ. 2. Install products in compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Do not install products which are out of compliance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations without obtaining written consent from the A/E’s licensed irrigator prior to installation. Failure to comply may result in the Contractor being required to remove and re-install systems or components at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Design of the pipe system shall be based on a 5-foot per second (FPS) maximum velocity. The Contractor shall replace piping which exceeds this velocity at his own expense. a. The landscape irrigation contractor is required by this Section to provide a complete design and installation of the system where a complete design is not provided on the Drawings, the requirements of the Texas Administrative Code, Title 30, Environmental Quality; Chapter 344, Landscape Irrigation; shall be strictly complied with, including but not limited to Rule 344.61, as modified by the currently effective TCEQ rules. 4. Provide a manual drain valve at low points in mainline. Provide a turf box and a minimum of 10 lbs. of pea gravel at the base of the drain box. 5. Provide automatic drain valves for each Station. Provide a turf box and a minimum of 20 lbs. of pea gravel at the base of the drain box. 6. Provide freeze and rainstats for entire system. Rainstats shall be non-clog type, with override by-pass switch or restraints. Provide wind stat where the prevailing wind exceeds 15 mph. 7. Irrigation system shall be compatible to and coordinated with new and existing landscape. 8. The installation of drip Irrigation systems shall comply with the manufacturer’s requirements. 9. Wiring of controllers, weather stations, and valves shall comply with the manufacturer’s instructions and the National Electric Code (NEC). Bury conductors to the weather station from the controller in rigid electrical conduit. Provide adequately selected and sized conductors (wiring), minimum of 14 gage wiring, thermostat wire shall not be used for low voltage systems or valves. 10. Provide concrete thrust blocks or approved piping restraints on all pressure mains and piping exceeding 85 psig at 90-degree elbows and bullhead tees. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 11. Provide metal location tape affixed to on all piping in sleeves beneath concrete drives and walks. Provide threaded caps on both ends of sleeves installed for future use and include metal location tape. Extend sleeves a minimum of 12 inches beyond concrete on both sides. 12. Polyethylene tubing shall not exceed 12 inches in length from rigid pipe. Provide no more than one poly flex tube per sprinkler. 13. Pipe and Poly tubing shall be buried beneath the compacted soil. Mulch layers are not acceptable bury material. Pipe and tubing shall be buried below the frost line and no shallower than 6 inches beneath compacted soil, or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. 14. Products of like nature shall be of the same manufacturer in the following categories: a. Controllers. b. Weather stations. c. Valves. d. Sprinklers. e. Drip irrigations systems. f. Root zone watering systems. g. Drain valves. h. Freeze, wind, and rainstats. i. Turf boxes, valve boxes and meter boxes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Manufacturer’s product data for the following: a. Controllers. b. Sprinkler heads and nozzles. c. Drip irrigation systems. d. Root zone watering systems. e. Electric, manual and drain valves. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B f. Rain, freeze, or wind stats and moisture sensors. g.Pipe and fittings. h. Wiring, watertight connectors, conduit, pull boxes. i. Turf and valve vaults or boxes. j. Backflow preventers. k. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all products. l. Controller scheduling. B. Shop Drawings include the following: 1. A scale drawing (minimum 1 inch = 20 feet) indicating: a. Sprinkler heads. b. Drip irrigation systems. c. Root zone watering systems. d. Controller location, type, and weather station input data. e. Valve locations with zone identification for electric globe valves. f. Pipe (and sleeve) locations with sizes. Provide flow capacities in gallons per minute (GPM) and velocities in feet per second (FPS) for all sprinkler pipe. g. Rainstats, freezestat locations with mounting details. h. Wiring routing, details of wet connections in valve boxes. i. Landscape features; e.g. trees, shrub and turfed areas, perennials and annual beds. j. All site features affecting the irrigation system; e.g. transformers, walks, drives, structures, curbs, easements, utilities. k. The direction of true north, and the prevailing wind in miles per hour. C. As-built drawings shall be true, scaled drawings with every deviation from the Shop Drawings legibly indicated, including all amendments, addendums, and Change Orders. All pipe and main components shall be exactly to scale or dimensioned from a fixed measuring point. D. Provide a copy of the current TCEQ Irrigators License card for every person that will be on the Site or designing, installing or supervising the installation with the Shop Drawings. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.04 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A.Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the regulations, codes, and ordinances of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. All fees, permits, and inspections shall be secured by and paid by the Contractor. 3. Comply with the requirements of the Texas Administrative Code, Title 30.Part 1, Chapter 344, Subchapter D. B. References: 1. Materials and methods of the following referenced standards and specifications of the latest edition form a part of this Section as applicable: a. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS) Standard. b. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). c. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). d. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver manufactured products to the Site in the original cartons or other protective coverings. Products shall remain packaged until ready for installation. Store piping on wood runners raised above grade. Security and protection from the elements are the Contractor’s responsibility. Protect ends of piping to prevent dirt and debris from entering throughout the installation. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Verify, at the Site, the exact location of all existing underground utilities before beginning construction. Contact the utility companies prior to excavation for line locations and notification. Hand excavate trenches and valve box vaults near existing utilities. Repair or pay for repairs to damaged utilities without cost to the Owner. B. System Layout: Layout the system prior to installation. Drive surveyor’s flags or stakes in the ground to indicate the location of the sprinkler heads and other major components of the system. Stakes or flags with color-coded tops shall be used to identify location of mains and risers. In the event that layout conflicts with trees or other obstructions, adjust as necessary. Remove all flags from the Site after installation is accepted. 1.07 GUARANTEES, OR WARRANTIES Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Materials, equipment, and workmanship furnished under this Contract shall be guaranteed for a period of 1 year from the date of acceptance. The Installer is responsible to submit warranty cards to the manufacturers on the behalf of the Owner for products. Provide a copy of the warranty cards submitted with a certification that the cards and warranties have been submitted. B. The guaranty shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Materials and workmanship of the irrigation system. 2. Compliance with the manufacturer’s design and installation recommendations. C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner or his authorized representative of failure of any part of the guaranteed equipment, material or workmanship during the guaranty period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced promptly with new parts, by and at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall acknowledge his responsibility under these guaranty provisions by letter with the as built drawings, stating that the equipment, materials, and workmanship referred to herein are guaranteed and stating the inclusive dates of the guaranty period, and contact information for emergency repairs. The warranty period begins on the date of written acceptance of the irrigation system by the Owner, or the Owner’s authorized representative. D. All Work under this Contract shall not be finally accepted until expiration of the guaranty period. During this period, the irrigation contractor is responsible for the Work until final acceptance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: Pipe shall be permanently marked with the ASTM classification number, pipe size, and manufacturer’s name. B. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe and Fittings: 1. PVC Pipe Up to 3-Inch Diameter: a. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21 and SDR 26. b. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2467, Schedule 80. C. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. PVC Pipe 3-Inch Diameter and Above: a.Elastomeric Gasket Joint: Pipe shall be to dimensional requirements of ASTM D1785/2665, Schedule 40 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 hydrostatic test pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified, or it may be pipe conforming to requirements of ASTM D2241, elastomeric joint. D. PVC cement Joints shall be made up using purple primer and clear solvent cement meeting the requirements of ASTM D2564; the joint assembly shall be made in accordance with ASTM D2588 and manufacturers recommendations. 2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Provide Backflow preventers in accordance with the AHJ requirements of the Project; manufacturers of acceptable products follow. B. Double Check Backflow Preventers: 1. Double Check Backflow Preventer (DCV) 2 Inches and Smaller: ANSI/ASSE 1015; complete unit of two independently acting check valves, two ball valves, strainer and four test cocks, bronze or iron body with bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall comply with AWWA Standard C506. a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: 1). Cla Val Co.: D 2 (1 1/2 inches and smaller). 2). Watts: 700 or 757 series. 3). Hersey: FDC. 4). Febco: 805Y. 5). Wilkins: 550. 2. Double Check Backflow Preventer 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: ANSI/ASSE 1015; complete unit of two independently acting check valves, two ball gate valves, and four test cocks, bronze or iron body with bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall comply with AWWA Standard C506. a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: 1). Cla Val Co.: D (2 inches and larger). 2). Watts: 700. 3). Hersey: 2. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4). Febco: 805Y. 5).Wilkins: 550. C. Reduced Pressure Principle: 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer 2 Inches and Smaller: ANSI/ASSE1013; complete unit of two independently acting check valves together with an automatically operating pressure relief valve, two ball valves, strainer, and four test cocks, bronze or iron body with bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall comply with AWWA Standard C506. a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: 1). Cla Val Co.: RP-2 (2 inches and smaller). 2). Watts: 900. 3). Hersey: FRP-II. 4). Febco: 825Y. 5). Wilkins: 575. 2. Reduced Pressure Principle (RPZ) Backflow Preventer 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: ANSI/ASSE 1013; complete unit of two independently acting check valves together with an automatically operating pressure relief valve, two gate valves, and four test cocks, bronze or iron body with bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall comply with AWWA Standard C506. a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: 1). Cla Val Co.: RP-1 (2 inches and larger). 2). Watts: 900. 3). Hersey: 6CM. 4). Febco: 825. 3. Pressure Vacuum Breaker: a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: 1). Cla Val Co.: RP-1 (2 inches and larger). 2). Watts: 900. 3). Hersey: 6CM. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-9 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4). Febco: 825. 5).Wilkins: 575. 2.03 VALVES A. Ball Valves: 1. Ball Valves 2 Inches and Less: Rated 150 PSIG, PVC Type 1, with EPDM O rings, Single Union serviceable type, Made in the USA, a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1). NDS. 2). Apollo. 3). American Valve. B. Control Valves (Zone Valves): 1. Control (Zone) Valves for Dig Leit Systems: Glass filled poly propylene body cover with stainless steel spring and nylon exhaust fitting. Diaphragm shall be nylon reinforced Buna N molded with heavy Buna N seat to form an integral unit. Valve shall be packless, without sliding seals, and completely serviceable without removing body from pipeline, with bolted (stainless steel bolts) top. Design shall be “normally closed”, requiring solenoid to be energized to open valve, thereby causing automatic closure in event of power failure. Solenoid shall comply with Class II National Electric Code and when operating require a maximum of 0.23 amperes, 3.0 watts at 24 volts AC. Solenoid shall be integrally mounted in valve cover and molded in epoxy to form a corrosion and moisture proof unit with exposed metal components of non-corrosive material. Flow control shall be brass with O ring seal and adjustable from outside the valve for permanent throttling or complete closing of valve. a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: 1). Rainbird PESB with LEIT adapters as specified below. 2. Control (Zone) Valves: Electric remote control valve, normally closed 24 VAC 50/60 Hz (cycles/sec) solenoid actuated globe pattern design pressure rating shall not be less than 200 psi (13,8 Bars). Heavy-duty glass-filled UV-resistant nylon body with stainless steel studs and flange nuts; nylon reinforced nitrile rubber diaphragm. Internal and external manual open/close control (internal and external bleed). Fully-encapsulated, one-piece solenoid with captured plunger and a removable retainer. Provide brass flow control stem for accurate manual regulation and/or shut-off of outlet flow where required and for drip or shrub irrigation systems. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-10 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Note to Specifier: For 2 wire systems, substitute the solenoid specified above with the following] 3. Provide field decoder compatible with the valve and surge protectors as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.04 DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEMS A. Provide Rain Bird low volume dripline irrigation products including Control Zone Kits, XFS Dripline, compatible fittings, Pressure Regulating Quick Check Basket Filter and Low Volume Emission Devices, indicators. B. Control zone kit assemblies for dripline irrigation zones must include control valve, filtration, and pressure regulation components sized to meet the hydraulic demands and flow requirements of the zones that they service. C. Rain Bird XFS Sub-Surface Copper-Colored Dripline with Copper Shield™ Technology and pressure-compensating inline emitters. 1. Available Rain Bird XFS Sub-Surface Copper-Colored Dripline model numbers for POTABLE water systems; dual layered, copper colored dripline tubing with emitter flow rates and spacing as recommended by the licensed irrigator for the Contractor. a. Rain Bird XFS-06-12; 0.6 GPH (2,3 lph) emitters spaced 12 inches (30,5 cm) on- center. b. Rain Bird XFS-06-18; 0.6 GPH (2,3 lph) emitters spaced 18 inches (45,7 cm) on- center. c. Rain Bird XFS-09-12; 0.9 GPH (3,4 lph) emitters spaced 12 inches (30,5 cm) on- center. d. Rain Bird XFS-09-18; 0.9 GPH (3,4 lph) emitters spaced 18 inches (45,7 cm) on- center. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer Substitutions: a. Netafim. b. Hunter. 2.05 CONTROLLER – ELETRICAL POWERED, STANDARD PROGRAMMING A. Controller (Electric Power) [Standard Controller]: Surface [or pedestal] mounted weatherproof solid state non - volatile memory automatic sprinkler controller capable of operating 24-VAC electric remote control valves via an integral transformer. Controller shall be equipped with a 365 day calendar, 24-hour programmable clock; each station capacity shall be adjustable up to 60 minutes each including a long timing program, where drip Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-11 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B systems are installed. Changes to station timing and program start time shall be easily made without interfering with the set program. Multi cycle programming with a minimum of four independent programs, independent day schedule options, seasonal adjustment. Controller shall be equipped with a manual start program for activation of a semi-automatic watering cycle. Provide rain sensor override. Controller housing shall be weatherproof injection molded hi impact plastic with locking hinged cover. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers (Basic Controller and Cabinet): a. Rainbird: ESP-LXME. b. Hunter: ACC2. c. Weathermatic: Mark “400” series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird: ESP-LX. b. Hunter: ACC. c. Weathermatic: LM “Lawnmate” series. B. Two Wire Controllers: 1. Two wire decoder based microelectronic hybrid controller, fully automatic, plug in modular expansion modules, weather sensor override, 0-12 hour station timing, seasonal adjustment 0-300 percent for every station, four separate independent programs, Cycle-Soak programming. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rainbird ESP-LXD. b. Hunter. c. Weathermatic. C. Evapotranspiration (ET) Based Controller: Surface [or pedestal] mounted weatherproof solid state non - volatile memory automatic sprinkler controller capable of operating 24-VAC electric remote control valves via an integral transformer. Water Efficient, ET programming central controller. Controller shall be capable of calculating daily evapotranspiration values and able to adjust the station run times commensurate with the landscaping requirements. ET Based Controller systems shall include an automatic local weather station as a part of the package. Data from appropriate sensors shall be used to calculate daily reference evapotranspiration (ET0). Daily ET0 which is multiplied by an appropriate crop factor (KC) to provide an estimate of daily crop evapotranspiration (ETC) enabling the controller to predict Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-12 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B the date of the next irrigation. The required method to calculate ET0 is the Penman- Monteith approach which requires weather stations to be fitted with measurement sensors for solar radiation, air temperature (maximum and minimum), relative humidity, and wind speed. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rainbird. b. Hunter. c. Weathermatic. D. Controller – Ambient Light Sensing or Solar Powered: Programmable, self-contained, advance ambient light powered water-management irrigation controller. Non-volatile memory, liquid crystal display, power provided by an internal, ultrahigh efficiency photovoltaic module and microelectronic energy management system fueled by ambient light. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Leit Model 4000. 2. Provide the following compatible manufacturers appurtenances with this controller: a. LEIT Model SKIT 8821-4 switch type weatherproof adapter. b. LEIT stainless steel enclosure model ENCL 4000. c. LEIT MCOL 4000L mounting pole. d. Valve adapter, or 160HE-XXX inline valve (3/4-inch to 2-inch) LEIT Key, 1600HE solenoid actuator, and mounting column. 2.06 SENSORS AND WEATHER STATIONS: A. Rain Sensor: Aluminum or PVC mounting bracket, thermoplastic housing, interrupts circuit to common or pump relay in controller. Adjustable in 1/8-inch increments, automatic reset, 5-year warranty, 24 VAC. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird: Rain-Check. b. Hunter. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-13 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. Weathermatic: B.Freeze Sensor: Aluminum or PVC mounting bracket and housing. Temperature setpoint 39 F with a temperature differential of plus 1 C, 5-year warranty, 24 VAC. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird. b. Hunter. c. Weathermatic. C. Wireless Rain/Freeze Sensor: Aluminum or PVC mounting bracket, thermoplastic housing, interrupts circuit to common or pump relay in controller. Adjustable in 1/8-inch increments, automatic reset. Temperature set-point 39 F with a temperature differential of plus 1 F. Provide with receiver. Five-year warranty, 24 VAC. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird: WR2. b. Hunter. c. Weathermatic. D. Soil Moisture Sensor System: 24-VAC override, microelectronic sensor system including moisture control panel, probes, bedding compound, wire splice kits. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird: Aquamiser. b. Hunter. c. Weathermatic. E. High Flow Sensor: High flow sensor shuts down system if an overflow condition occurs. Provided with interface panel, which is not required for IMMS controllers. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird: G-FS series. b. Hunter: Flow-Clik. c. Weathermatic. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-14 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Sensor Bypass Switch: LED active status switch, U.L. approved for exterior weatherproof applications. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rainbird. b. Hunter. c. Weathermatic. G. Weather Stations: Accurately measures, wind, rain, temperature, solar radiation, and relative humidity and computes Evapotranspiration (ET) to 0.01 inches, compatible with controller, weather computer scans sensors and recalculates weather changes every second, all electronic weather station design with non-volatile memory which retains configuration and weather data across power outages, diagnostic port and computer LEDs for troubleshooting and configuration and plug & play; factory programmed site-specific configuration. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rainbird. b. Hunter. c. Weathermatic. 2. Note: To be furnished with the controller and certified by the controller manufacturer to be compatible. H. High Flow Shut Off Valve: High flow shut off valve, 1/2-inch or 3/4-inch, PVC with threaded inlet/outlet maximum 0.5 psig operating pressure loss. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird. b. Hunter. c. Weathermatic. 2.07 SPRINKLERS, SPRAY NOZZLES AND QUICK COUPLERS A. Pop Up, Spray Abs Sprinkler Heads: Body high impact ABS plastic, pop up minimum of 4 inches with a stainless steel retraction spring removable filter screen. Nozzles shall be interchangeable between bodies and of the same manufacture as the body. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-15 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a.Rainbird: 1800 PRS (Spray nozzles) 1800 SAM P45 (rotary stream nozzles). b. Hunter: PRS30 (Spray nozzles) PRS40 (Rotary stream nozzles). c. Weathermatic. B. Nozzles: Matched precipitation ABS nozzles. 1. Fixed Spray Nozzles: a. Rainbird U series. b. Hunter Pro-spray fixed. c. Weathermatic. 2. Adjustable Nozzles: a. Rainbird HE-VAN series. b. Hunter 4 – 17A series. 3. Rotary Stream: a. Rainbird R Van. b. Hunter MP Rotator. c. Weathermatic. C. Rotary Gear Drive Sprinklers: High impact molded ABS plastic body, sealed gear drive assembly, full and adjustable arc design. ABS riser, minimum of 4-inch pop up, stainless steel retraction spring, riser seal and wiper, matched precipitation nozzles. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Small areas: 1). Rainbird: 3500 series (ABS). 2). Hunter: SRM Series. 3). Weathermatic. b. Medium to Large Areas: 1). Rainbird: Falcon 6504. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-16 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2). Hunter: I20. 3).Weathermatic. D. Bubblers: Heavy duty high impact ABS plastic body with integral pressure compensating regulator, and integral ABS nozzle. Minimum 6-inch pop-up height with a heavy duty stainless steel retraction spring and removable filter screen. Nozzles to be interchangeable between bodies and of the same manufacture as the body. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird: 1400 Series. b. Hunter: PCB Series. E. Quick Coupler Valves (QCV): 1-inch threaded inlet and 1-inch coupler outlet, all brass construction two-piece unit consisting of a coupler water seal valve assembly and a removable upper body to allow spring and key track to be serviced without shutdown of main. Lockable vinyl lids with spring for positive closure on key removal. Lid shall be purple in color or state “Not for Drinking”. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Rainbird: RC Series. b. Hunter: HQ Series with rubber covers. c. Weathermatic. F. Swing Joint Riser: PVC construction ASTM D2464 Type I double joint “O” ring and buttress threads at each swivel joint, inlet/outlet socket threads ASTM D2467/D2464. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Hunter: SJ Series. b. Rainbird: TSJ Series. c. Spears: 5800 Series. G. Polyethylene “Cut Off” Risers: Polyethylene “cut off” risers; 1/2 inch by 3 inches, 1/2 inch by 6 inches or 3/4 inch by 3 inches, 3/4 inch by 6 inches with 1/2-inch cut offs. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rainbird: Riser Co. b. Hunter. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-17 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. Weathermatic. H.Polyethylene Tubing: Flexible in 20-inch, 50-inch, and 100-inch coils with adapters compatible to the tubing. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Hunter: HFT-100, including HSBE fittings. b. Rainbird: “Swing Pipe”, Series SP-20, including fittings. c. Weathermatic. 2.08 SWING JOINT RISER A. PVC construction ASTM D2464 Type I double joint “O” ring and buttress threads at each swivel joint, inlet/outlet socket threads ASTM D2467/D2464. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: a. Hunter: SJ Series. b. Rainbird: TSJ Series. c. Spears: 5800 series. 2.09 VALVE BOXES, BACKFLOW PREVENTER BOXES, AND ENCLOSURES A. Turf Box, Individual Shut-Off Valve Box: 1. 9-inch diameter, heavy duty polyester resin, fiberglass and calcium carbonate with stainless steel hex head bolts and washer, ANSI/SCTE – 77 Tier 8, ASTM C857 A-8. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1). Oldcastle Fibretyte FL08. B. Meter and Backflow Preventer Box: 1. Heavy Duty Polymer concrete, nominal 30 inches x 48 inches (or as required to fit BFP) with flush two-piece lid, ANSI/SCTE 77 Tier 15, ASTM C857 - A-12. a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models: 1). Oldcastle: 3048. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-18 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Location Tape: Plastic, 2 inches wide with a foil liner for location by means of a magnetic locator, such as “Terra foil” Model D as manufactured by Griffolyn Company; Houston, Texas. Color shall be blue, having lettering which reads “WATER LINE BELOW”. To be installed above main line. B. Wire Connections: All wire connections to be installed in valve boxes only. Do not bury any splices without a valve box. All wire connections shall be with proper size wire nut and sealed with 3M #DBY 6 Scotchcast kit. All wire splice kits must be UL approved. C. Direct Bury, Low Voltage Electrical Wire: Type UF 314 single stand copper with 4/64-inch thick PVC insulation, UL approved for direct burial. Minimum wire shall be #14GA. D. Pea Gravel: ASTM D448, ASTM C33, and ASHTO M43, minimum diameter of 1/8 inch and maximum of 3/4 inch, no more than 3 percent of pea gravel shall pass through a No. 3 sieve. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Trenching shall be such that pipe is buried below the frost line, or a minimum of 36 inches below grade; over excavate 6 to 8 inches minimum for rock, and backfill with clean sand bed before laying pipe. Lay pipe to allow for expansion and contraction. Backfill with compacted clean sandy loam, and the remainder, rock free excavation material and topsoil. Mechanically tamp trench to 90 percent proctor to 2 inches above surrounding grade. B. Excavation for backflow preventer shall be 18 inches minimum to the top of the backflow preventer. Provide 12 inches of washed pea gravel beneath backflow preventer. Provide brick supports to hold backflow preventer and valve box, rest brick on undisturbed soil. Valve box shall not rest on pipe entering or exiting, provide 3-inch minimum clearance all around pipe. Valve box shall be level with the surrounding grade. C. Cut pipe clean with pipe cutters, remove burrs or foreign matter from pipe before assembly. Apply colored primer to both the pipe and fitting and then apply compatible PVC cement to the pipe. Home pipe to the fitting and hold in place for a minimum of 45 seconds until pipe has set in place. Replace pipe and fittings which slide during this time, do not re use fittings. D. Install each electrical globe valve and series of wire splices in a separate turf box. Bury box level with surrounding grade, install valves level and plumb. E. Each branch sprinkler supply system shall be automatically drainable at the low point, with a spring loaded ball drip valve, designed for lawn sprinkler service, and draining into a 12-inch excavation containing pea gravel. Dry well and gravel shall be provided by the Contractor. Top of gravel shall be below valve at drain point. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-19 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Provide manual drain valves on main lines, with opening for drain into a 12-inch pea gravel sump. Manual drain valves shall be in a valve box with the top flush with finished grade. G. Subsurface dripline shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. H. Installation of Sprinklers and Risers: 1. Install sprinkler specialties in strict accordance to the manufacturer’s published instructions. 2. Electrical Wiring: a. Install a separate colored wire from the automatic controller to each solenoid valve. Run a common neutral from the controller to each solenoid valve common wire shall be continuous white color. Provide 12-inch expansion coils in each valve box. b. Make splices with 3M DBY or DBR 6 wire connection kits. Strip end of wire, twist together, twist wire nuts in place and install into sealant container. All splices must be installed in valve boxes. c. Install wiring in trenches alongside the piping. Provide a minimum of 12 inches of coverage for wiring installed in separate trenches. Where several wires are installed in close proximity to each other, bundle the wiring and tape securely at 10- foot intervals. Wiring installed under driveways, parking lots or pavements, shall be in PVC sleeves. d. Ground system in accordance with the National Electric Code. e. Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test meggar and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to the requirements of the irrigation control manufacturer. 3. Installation of the Irrigation Controller: In accordance with the manufacturers published instructions. Weather proof all exterior connections. All wiring above ground to be installed in conduit. Mount controller 48 inches AFG. Mount freeze and rain sensors per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.02 FLUSHING AND TESTING A. Schedule testing with Owner’s Representative a minimum of 3 days in advance of testing. B. Provide clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct line flushing and testing procedures. C. Recommended Dripline and Emitter Lateral Flushing Procedures. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-20 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Flush the system every 2 weeks for the first 6 weeks and check the water that is flushed out for cleanliness. Establish a regular system flushing schedule for the future based on results from the initial 6-week flushing schedule. 2. Flush the system completely after any repairs are made and monitor system operation closely under regular system flushing schedule. 3. Check the pressure at the supply and flush headers on a regular basis and compare with the pressure readings taken after installation. D. Recommended Dripline and Emitter Lateral Leakage Testing Procedures: 1. Subject installed dripline tubing and emitter lateral piping to water pressure equal to specified operating pressure for 10 minutes. Test with control zone components and dripline flush valve components installed. 2. Partially backfill buried pipe and tubing to prevent movement under pressure. Expose couplings, fittings, and valve components. 3. Visually inspect valve assemblies and fittings for leakage and replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat test until test segment is free from leaks. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. Recommended Dripline and Emitter Lateral Operational Testing Procedures. 4. Activate each dripline and emitter lateral control zone valve in sequence from controller. Provide either one additional person with radio or use handheld remote to activate remote control valves from controller. Manually activating remote control valve using manual bleed mechanism at remote control valve is not an acceptable method of activation. Owner’s Representative will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and leakage. 5. Replace or adjust defective valve, fitting, dripline segment, emitter lateral segment, or appurtenance to correct operational and coverage uniformity deficiencies. 6. Repeat test(s) until each dripline or emitter lateral test segment passes testing procedures. Repeat tests, replace components, and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to Owner and/or Owner’s Representative. E. Testing and Operation: 1. Before piping is pressure tested, sufficient backfill shall be installed around the piping to contain the piping under pressure. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer. The entire piping system shall be placed under full pressure and left for 24 hours with pressure gauge attached, then pipe joints shall be examined for leaks. Cut out and Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-21 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B remake any defective joint and re test until the system performs without leaks or loss of pressure in excess of 5 percent. 2. Place the system into operation and test each section individually. Examine the operation of spray heads, and during a time when wind velocity is normal, observe the pattern of water produced by the heads. The complete system shall give full and adequate coverage to the area being watered. 3. At time of final inspection, all hydrostatic tests must have been satisfactorily completed. The entire system shall then be operated in the presence of the Engineer’s authorized representative, and must operate in a satisfactory manner conforming to the operating requirements of the manufacturer. 4. All conditions of the Contract Documents shall be met before calling for final testing. All costs for re testing due to failure to meet these conditions will be borne by the irrigation contractor including time and materials of the required inspection team. F. Adjustments: 1. Check each sprinkler head for proper operation. 2. Adjust pressure on adjustable pressure valves by attaching a pressure gauge assembly to the solenoid valve pressure regulator, and adjust pressure as necessary. 3. Adjust all components so that water runoff and overspray is reduced. 4. The irrigation contractor shall personally notify the Owner’s representative and Contractor at least 72 hours in advance of all final testing and inspections. The system will be tested, pressurized, and adjusted by the irrigation contractor before calling for final testing and inspection. The system will not be considered complete without certification by the A/E’ licensed Irrigator. 5. At time of final inspection, all hydrostatic tests must have been satisfactorily completed. The entire system shall then be operated in the presence of the Engineer’s authorized representative, and must operate in a satisfactory manner, with uniform coverage of the areas which are to be sprinkled. 6. All conditions of the Contract Documents shall be met before calling for final testing. All costs for re testing due to failure to meet these conditions will be borne by the irrigation contractor including time and materials of the required inspection team.\ Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-22 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.03 MAINTENANCE A.In addition to the installation of the irrigation system, furnish a period of maintenance for the system equal to the warranty period. Maintenance will consist of the following: 1. After the lawn has been established and grass achieved a good stand, return to the Site and adjust height of sprinkler heads to conform to grass height. 2. Clean and adjust heads two separate times 3 months apart the first year. 3. After 11 months, return to the Site and adjust height of shrubbery risers to conform to plant growth. 3.04 IRRIGATION WATER SCHEDULES A. For manually adjusted controllers the Contractor shall furnish an estimated water schedule for the irrigation system for the entire year, each month. The report shall include estimated operating time, days, and frequency of watering for each zone, total run time per week and total water usage per week. This report should be based on 1 inch of precipitation per week, based on information obtained in Toro pamphlet 490 1358 “EVAPOTRANSPIRATION”, or an auditors recommendations. B. ET based controllers shall be programmed to automatically operate within the window of opportunity provided by the Owner, and automatically function. C. Adjust the root zone watering system to provide 25 gallons of water per week per tree. 3.05 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT A. The purpose of guarantee/warranty is to ensure that Owner receives irrigation materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in thorough and careful manner. B. Contractor is responsible for providing guarantee/warranty of irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects for period of 1 year from formal written acceptance by Owner’s Representative. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape, utilities, structures, and site features damaged by settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to premises caused by defective items. Make repairs within 7 days of notification from Owner’s Representative. C. Replace damaged items with new and identical materials, using methods specified in Contract Documents or applicable codes. Make replacements at no additional cost to Contract Price. D. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment, and replacements made during guarantee/warranty period. Attachment 3Item 12 Landscape Irrigation 32 84 23-23 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. Maintain irrigation system for duration of 30 calendar days from formal written acceptance by Owner’s Representative. Make periodic examinations and adjustments to irrigation system components in order to achieve the most efficient and uniform application of water. F. Following completion of Contractor’s maintenance period, Owner will be responsible for maintaining system in working order during remainder of guarantee/warranty period, for performing necessary minor maintenance, for protecting against vandalism, and for preventing damage after landscape maintenance operation. 3.06 OWNER TRAINING A. Prior to final acceptance, Contractor shall provide a minimum of 4 hours or as long as required by the Owner to demonstrate to the Owner the proper operation of all irrigation system equipment and controls provided under this Section. B. After completion of the demonstration, submit to the Architect/Engineer a “Demonstration Certificate of Completion” signed by the Owner and the Contractor indicating that the demonstration of the irrigation system equipment and controls has been completed. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Topsoil Placement and Grading 32 91 19.13 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 32 91 19.13 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to place topsoil, free from rock and foreign material in areas designated to receive sodding or seeding. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. General: The topsoil shall be fertile loam, easily cultivated and free from objectionable material, and shall have a relatively high erosion resistance and be readily able to support the growth of the planting, seeding, or sodding specified on the plans. B. Sources: 1. The topsoil may be obtained from the right-of-way at sites of proposed excavation, or it may be obtained from sources outside the right-of-way, secured by the Contractor, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. 2. Topsoil required in addition to salvaged topsoil from the project shall be secured from approved off-site borrow sources. Excavated material from construction which is suitable for topsoil shall be salvaged and used before any topsoil is obtained from borrow source. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Stockpile topsoil material at locations approved by the Owner’s Representative. Remove any trash, wood, brush, stumps or other objectionable materials prior to placement. The source and stockpile areas shall be kept drained and in a neat and presentable condition. Place and spread topsoil to a uniform depth to provide 6-inch compacted depth, while maintaining drainage in areas to be seeded or sodded. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Hydro-Mulching 32 92 13 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 32 92 13 HYDRO-MULCHING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, material, equipment and incidentals necessary to prepare the ground, furnish and install fertilizer and hydro-mulching seed or a mixture of seed of the kind specified in areas disturbed by the construction operations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Texas Testing Seed Label. 2. Specification of fertilizer to be used. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provision of the following standard shall apply as if written here in its entirety: 1. Texas Seed Law. 1.04 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall fertilize and reseed any area which fails to survive for a period of 1 year from the date the project is accepted by the Owner. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Seed used must carry a Texas Testing Seed label showing purity and germination, name, type of seed, and that the seed meets all requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season’s crop and the date of analysis shown on each tag shall be within 9 months of the time of delivery to the project. Each variety of seed shall be furnished and delivered in separate bags or containers. B. Seed: The specified seed shall equal or exceed the following percentages of purity and germination: Common Name Purity Germination Common Bermuda Grass 95%90% Gulf Coast Annual Rye 95%90% C. Mulch: The mulch shall be natural cellulose fiber mulch produced from grinding clean, whole wood chips, or fiber produced from ground newsprint with a labeled ash content not to exceed 7 percent. The mulch shall be designed for use in conventional mechanical planting, hydraulic planting of seed or hydraulic mulching of grass seed, either alone or with Attachment 3Item 12 Hydro-Mulching 32 92 13 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B fertilizers and other additives. The mulch shall be such that, when applied, the material shall form a strong, moisture-retaining mat without the need of an asphalt binder. D. Fertilizer: Pelleted or granulated type fertilizer of the composition for the season of the year at which applied shall be used: 1. Early season (April 1-June 1) 21-0-0. 2. Normal season (June 1-Sept 1) 10-10-5. 3. Late season (Sept 1-Nov 1) 6-12-12. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. After the areas disturbed by construction operations have been backfilled and completed to the original pre-construction lines and grades shown on the plans and as provided for in other items of this contract, perform hydro-mulch seeding in accordance with the requirements hereinafter described. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cultivation: Cultivate areas to be seeded to a depth of at least 4 inches. Cultivate the seedbed sufficiently to reduce the soil to a state of good tilth when the soil particles on the surface are small enough and lie closely enough together to prevent the seed from being covered too deep for optimum germination. Cultivation of seedbed will not be required in loose sand where depth of sand is 4 inches or more. Maintain the cross-section previously established throughout the process of cultivation and any necessary reshaping shall be done prior to any planting of seed. B. Planting Season and Application Rates: Perform planting between the dates specified for each type except when specifically authorized in writing. The seeds planted per acre shall be of the type specified with the mixture, rate, and planting dates as follows: 1. Common Bermuda Grass - hulled, 20 pounds per acre - February through August or a combination of. 2. Common Bermuda Grass - unhulled, 15 pounds per acre and Gulf Coast Annual Rye - unhulled, 15 pounds per acre - August through February. 3. Apply fertilizer uniformly at the average rate of 400 pounds per acre. C. Hydro-Mulch (Cellulose Fiber) Seeding: Uniformly distribute the fertilizer, seed or seed mixture, in the quantity specified over the areas to be seeded. Mechanical equipment shall be such that all varieties of seed as well as fertilizer may be distributed at the same time, provided that each component is uniformly applied at the specified rate. When seed and fertilizer are to be distributed as a water-slurry, apply the mixture to that area to be seeded within 30 minutes after all components are placed in the equipment. Upon completion of planting the seed, spread cellulose fiber mulch uniformly over the area at the following rates: 1. Sandy soils with 3:1 slope or less: min. 2000 lb./acre. 2. Sandy soils with greater than 3:1 slope: min. 2300 lb./acre. Attachment 3Item 12 Hydro-Mulching 32 92 13 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Clay soils with 3:1 slope or less: min. 2500 lb./acre. 4.Clay soils with greater than 3:1 slope: min. 3000 lb./acre. 5. The rates are given in dry weight of mulch per acre. A mulching machine, approved by the Owner’s Representative, shall be equipped to eject the thoroughly wet mulch material at a uniform rate to provide the mulch coverage specified. D. Maintenance: Water the planted area at such times as necessary for a period of 1 year after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. Fertilize and reseed any area which fails to survive for a period of 1 year from the date the project is accepted by the Owner. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 33 UTILITIES Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.02 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 05 01.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE & FITTINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install ductile iron pipe and fittings, including taps, connections, and appurtenances as required for a functional system as indicated herein. Unless otherwise noted, all above grade exposed pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be flanged while below grade piping, fittings and appurtenances shall be mechanical joint or push on joints. Trenching, backfilling, and pipe embedment shall be as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with Section 31 23 33 “Trenching and Backfill.” 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory Testing: The manufacturer shall perform all tests as required by AWWA C151. Welded outlets shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 250 psi for a period of 1 hour. No leakage shall be allowed. B. Experience Requirements: Pipe shall be the product of a manufacturer who has a minimum of 10 years’ successful experience manufacturing pipe of the particular type specified and the total pipeline shall be the product of one pipe manufacturer. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years’ successful experience in the design and manufacturing of pipe joints of similar design, working pressure, pipe diameter and wall thickness as specified. C. Owner Testing and Inspection: 1. Pipe may be subject to inspection by an independent testing laboratory, which laboratory will be selected and retained by the Owner. Representatives of the laboratory or the Engineer shall have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation or progress, and the pipe manufacturer shall provide proper facilities for access and for inspection. The pipe manufacturer shall notify the Owner in writing, at least 2 weeks prior to the pipe manufacture so that the Owner may advise the manufacturer as to the Owner's decision regarding tests to be performed. Material and pipe which are discovered to be defective, or which do not conform to the requirements of this Section shall be subject to rejection at any time prior to final acceptance of the pipe. After final acceptance, each joint of pipe shall be stamped as approved by the laboratory. 2. It is anticipated that production of pipe shall be done over a normal period of time and without "slow-downs" or other abnormal delays. In the event that an abnormal production time is required, and the Owner is required to pay excessive costs for inspection, then the Contractor shall be required to reimburse the Owner for such laboratory costs over and above those which would have been incurred under a normal schedule of production. D. Pipe Classification: Pipe manufacturer shall manufacture the pipe to meet the installation conditions, cover depth, and bedding and backfill requirements as shown on the Drawings or specified and furnish the correct class of pipe to meet these conditions. If additional requirements are required, pipe manufacturer shall coordinate their requirements with the Contractor. Attachment 3Item 12 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.02 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. Pipe and fittings shall be permanently marked with the following information: Manufacturer, date; Size, type, class, or wall thickness; production standard (AWWA, ASTM etc.) F. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be as manufactured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company Inc; American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Clow Water System Company/ McWane Ductile, or approved equal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Layout Drawings and Record Data: Catalog data, including dimensions of new pipe and fittings and recommendations for handling and storage; details of lining and coating; thrust restraint provisions; hydrostatic pressure test plan and results; affidavit stating the pipe furnished complies with AWWA C151, AWWA C104, AWWA C110, AWWA C111, and these specifications; mill certificates, including chemical and physical test results for each heat of metal, if requested during pipe manufacturing operations; record drawings, including a schematic location-profile and a tabulated layout schedule, referenced to the pipeline stationing. 2. Shop Drawings: Mechanical joint connections; connections to differing pipe materials. 3. Certified Test Data: Certified Test Reports from the manufacturer’s testing facility or an Owner approved testing laboratory; results of factory hydrostatic tests; pipe and fitting certification for conformance to ANSI/NSF 61. Prior to shipment submit affidavit of compliance with the AWWA and ASTM standards and requirements of this specification. 1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 31 23 33 “Trenching and Backfill.” 1.05 STANDARDS A. Except as modified herein, the applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards: AWWA C104 Standard for Cement Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings AWWA C105 Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping AWWA C110 Standard for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings AWWA C111 Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings AWWA C150 Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe AWWA C151 Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe AWWA C153 Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service AWWA C600 Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints Attachment 3Item 12 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.02 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Standard: SSPC SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 3. All ductile iron pipe and fittings for potable water systems shall conform to American National Standards/National Science Foundation (ANSI/NSF) Standard 61 and must be certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Handling and storage of pipe and fittings shall comply with AWWA C600 and the manufacturer’s recommendations. It is desired that the pipe be hauled direct from the pipe plant to the right-of-way and strung along the pipeline route, thus avoiding rehandling of the pipe and the possibility of damage thereto. Where fully loaded truck and trailer cannot operate along the pipeline route, pipe may be unloaded at access points along the route and brought to the trench side by approved methods; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the pipe is undamaged at the time of laying. 1.07 GUARANTEES A. The product shall be warranted and guaranteed per the General Conditions of the Specifications. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1. Ductile iron pipe shall be made of ductile iron in accordance with AWWA C151. At a minimum all ductile iron pipe shall be thickness Class 53 per AWWA C150. All ductile iron pipe shall also have a minimum working pressure as indicated on the Drawings. Pipe shall be rated for pressure in accordance with AWWA C151 for pressure class of pipe as indicated. Standard joint length shall be 18 to 20 feet. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA C115. 2. Pipe manufacturer shall manufacture the pipe to meet the installation conditions, cover depth, and bedding and backfill requirements as shown on the Drawings or specified and furnish the correct class of pipe to meet these conditions. B. Fittings: 1. Fittings shall be ASTM A536 ductile iron or ASTM A48 cast iron in accordance with AWWA C110. AWWA C153 fittings may be allowed only for specific applications where C110 fittings do not practically fit and only upon acceptance by Engineer, Engineer’s decision in this regard will be final. Fittings shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi, unless specified otherwise. 2. Factory welded outlets may be used in lieu of tee fittings for 18-inch and larger tee fittings. Factory welded outlets shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi. Factory welded outlets may not be used near sources of vibration, such as pump stations or roads. Attachment 3Item 12 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.02 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Joints for Pipe and Fittings: 1.Joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C110, AWWA C111, and AWWA C151. Standard joints for ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be mechanical joints for buried applications and flanged for aboveground/exposed applications. Where indicated, joints shall be mechanical joint, flanged, or grooved. 2. Flanged joints shall have pressure ratings equal to or greater than adjacent pipe. Flange pattern shall match pattern of valve, fitting, or appurtenance to be attached. Flanges on ductile iron pipe shall be ductile iron. Unless noted otherwise flanges shall be ductile iron flat face type meeting ANSI B16.42 Class 150 and matching ANSI B16.1 Class 125 bolt pattern and suitable for 250 psi working pressure at normal operating temperature. Nuts, bolts and hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel per ASTM F593 and F594 for non-submerged applications. Hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel for submerged (upto 1 ft above liquid surface) applications. 3. Where indicated, grooved joints in accordance with AWWA C606 shall be used. Grooved joints shall be flexible unless indicated otherwise. All grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be of a single domestic manufacturer. D. Flange Adapters and Dismantling Joints: 1. All flange coupling adaptors and dismantling joints shall be suitable design, per manufacturer, for the pipe material and intended service. Gasket materials shall at a minimum match specified material for the connecting pipe joint gaskets. Flanges for adapters shall be a suitable class meeting or exceeding the required piping system pressure ratings. 2. Flange coupling adaptors for plain end piping shall be Dresser Style 127 or 128, or similar models by Smith Blair Or equal. 3. Where shown or noted on the Drawings, restrained flexible couplings, flange adaptors and dismantling joints shall be provided. Dismantling joints shall be as manufactured by Viking-Johnson, Romac Industries Style DJ400 Or approved equal. Tie rods and hardware shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations, material shall match the specified flange hardware materials. E. Provisions for Thrust: 1. Thrust at bends, tees, plugs, or other fittings shall be resisted by restrained joints. If thrust cannot be accommodated using restrained joints, thrust blocking or concrete anchors to restrain thrust may be used on a case-by-case basis when approved by the Engineer. 2. Restrained joints shall be used for a sufficient distance from each bend, tee, plug, or other fitting to resist thrust which will be developed at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purpose of thrust restraint, design pressure shall be 1.5 times the design working pressure class indicated. 3. The length of pipe with restrained joints to resist thrust forces shall be determined by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with Thrust Restraint Design for Ductile Iron Pipe, Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association using the following parameters: a. Laying condition equal AWWA C600 Type 4 bedding. Attachment 3Item 12 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.02 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. If polyethylene encasement is used, restrained length shall be doubled to account for reduced soil to pipe friction resistance. 4. Where indicated and where required for thrust restraint, joints shall be restrained. Restrained joints shall be mechanically interlocking joints. Restrained joints shall be U.S. Pipe "TR Flex", American Ductile Iron Pipe "Flex Ring", or Clow Corporation "Super- Lock". Restraining fittings using set screws, restraining gaskets, gripper type glands, and field-cuts of restrained joints shall be Mega-Lug, or approved equal. Field welding shall not be allowed. Restrained joints shall be capable of sustaining the design pressure as specified herein. F. Coating: 1. Coat the exterior of the pipe and fittings with a 1 mil bituminous coating in accordance with AWWA C110 and AWWA C151, unless specified otherwise. 2. In addition to the factory applied asphaltic coating, all buried ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have a tube-type polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA C105. Polyethylene encasement shall be 8 mils thick. Both ends of the pipe shall be thoroughly sealed with adhesive tape or plastic tie straps at the joint overlap. Place circumferential wraps of tape at 2-foot intervals along the barrel of the pipe to minimize the space between the encasement and the pipe. 3. Unless otherwise specified all exposed or submerged piping shall be painted per the applicable systems specified in Division 09. Unless specified otherwise apply coatings in the shop with hold-backs as required at pipe and fitting ends for satisfactory installation of joint connections in the field. Field coating shall be compatible with shop coating material. Field repair of damaged shop coating shall receive prior approval from Engineer and if in the opinion of the Engineer the coating damage is beyond repair the pipe shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. All flange bearing surfaces shall be uncoated. G. Lining: Ductile iron pipe and fittings except air piping shall have a cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104 and bituminous seal coat. Thickness of lining shall be as specified in AWWA C104. Air piping shall not be lined. H. Flexible Joint Couplings: 1. Flexible joint couplings shall be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair Style 411, Romac Style 400, or approved equal, unless otherwise shown. 2. Restraint systems for aboveground flexible coupling applications shall be a system consisting of restraining tie-rods with harness lugs mounted on the flanged ends of FLxPE pipe sections joined by the flexible coupling. Restraining glands will not be acceptable in lieu of ductile iron pipe flanges. The harness lug and restraint system shall be suitable for maximum system pressures. 3. Provide restrained flexible joint couplings or restrained flexible joints on all pipes connecting to concrete structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. Couplings shall be designed and coated for buried service for exterior exposed and buried applications. Restrained flexible couplings shall be restrained Dresser or approved equal. Restrained flexible joints shall be U.S. Pipe "TR Flex", American Ductile Iron Pipe "Flex Ring", Clow Corporation "Super-Lock", or approved equal. Attachment 3Item 12 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.02 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. All restraint systems and hardware shall be stainless steel. I.Gaskets: Gaskets shall be approved by the Pipe Manufacturer for the intended service. Flange Gaskets shall be EPDM for all joints; full face type for flanges per AWWA C111 to provide positive sealing for flanged ductile iron joints. Gasket materials shall exhibit excellent compatibility with the process fluid. Materials for potable water service shall be NSF61 certified. Thickness shall be 1/8” unless otherwise noted. Gaskets for air piping, fittings, valves, etc. shall be high temperature resistant type, suitable for a temperature of 230 F or higher if required by the equipment and/or service application. Gaskets for air service shall be Viton Or PTFE as suitable for the intended service. J. Insulated Connections: Flange insulating kits, manufactured by PSI or equal, shall be provided at joints between dissimilar metals. Where insulated connections are indicated, the pipe manufacturer shall furnish dielectric insulation gaskets, sleeves, and two plastic washers for each bolt. Insulating kits shall be PSI Linebacker by GPT Industries, Insulket or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install ductile iron pipe, fittings, specials, valves, and hydrants in accordance with AWWA C600 and the Specifications. Trenching and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 33 “Trenching and Backfill.” Before lowering into the trench, inspect each joint of pipe. Pipe will then be accepted, rejected, or repaired. B. Pipe Laying: Lower pipe, fittings, and special castings into trench by crane or other suitable method. Do not roll in or "dump" into the trench. Handle pipe and fittings with belts, slings, or other equipment designed to prevent damage to the pipe and coating. Remove dirt and trash that may be in the barrel of the pipe, on the spigot or in the bell while the pipe is suspended. Keep the pipe clean during the laying operation and free of sticks, dirt, and trash, and at the close of each operating day seal the open end of the pipe with a gasketed night cap. Do not lay pipe in water. C. Pipe Alignment: Install pipe and fittings to the line and grade indicated. In areas where the line and grade indicated cannot be achieved using standard manufactured bends and fittings, make slight adjustments by deflecting joints. Joint deflections may not exceed the lesser of the maximum deflections stipulated in AWWA C600 or 75 percent of the manufacturer’s maximum recommended deflection. Resolve any conflicts with existing utilities and structures. D. Pipes through rigid walls shall have mechanical sleeve seals consisting of modular bolted synthetic rubber sealing elements, Link Seal by Thunderline Corporation, or equal. Pipe penetrations through water retaining structure walls shall be cast in place with a fabricated minimum 2-inch pipe collar. E. Joint Making: 1. Jointing Mechanical Joint Pipe: a. Joint this type of pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, with uniform torque on bolts. Attachment 3Item 12 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.02 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. After carefully cleaning both spigot and bell and after slipping the follower ring and gasket over the spigot end, slip the spigot into the bell. Apply a lubricant to the spigot to assist in assembly. c. Carefully seat the gaskets by hand to be even in the bell at all points. d. After drawing up the follower ring to uniform bearing against the gasket, insert the bolts and tighten by hand in pairs using bolts opposite each other. e. Tighten the nuts to hold the required pressure. Extension wrenches or pipes over wrench handles shall not be permitted. Use 10-inch ratchet wrenches to tighten the nuts to a uniform torque. f. The finished joint shall be watertight. 2. Making Flanged Joints: Erect flanged pipe in accordance with the controlling dimension as specified. Thoroughly clean each piece of flanged pipe to remove dirt, rust, grease, and other foreign matter. Thoroughly wire brush flanged faces to ensure even bearing for gaskets and mating flanges. Place full face gasket, use drift pins to align holes, and tighten flange bolts, each in turn, at a uniform torque around the joint. Finished joints shall be watertight. 3. Making Push-On Joints: a. The jointing of this type of joint shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The procedure for jointing shall be generally as follows: 1). Thoroughly clean and dry the spigot and bell before starting the assembly of the joint. Wipe the gasket clean with a cloth. 2). Place the gasket into the gasket seat in the bell. 3). Apply a thin film of lubricant to the surface of the gasket that will come in contact with the entering pipe spigot. If necessary, also apply lubricant to the spigot. 4). Make the joint by exerting sufficient force on the entering pipe so that its plain end will move past the gasket to the seat of the bell. 5). If restrained joints are used, orient pipe to permit ease of assembly. Place locking device after installation of spigot into bell. 4. Making Grooved Joints: a. Grooved joints shall be fabricated and installed per AWWA C606. b. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. c. Gaskets used with grooved joints shall be verified as suitable for the intended service. d. Install all grooved joint products in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest installation instructions. 5. Making Split-Sleeve Coupling Joints: Attachment 3Item 12 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.02 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B a. Exterior surfaces of the pipe shall be clean, smooth and free from weld beads, seams, scars, indentations, roll marks, exterior coatings and flat spots. b. Install split-sleeve couplings in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest installation instructions. F. Polyethylene Encasement: Wrap bituminous coated ductile iron pipe in polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA C105. Repair or replace encasements which have tears, rips, or punctures in the polyethylene wrap. G. Painting: Paint piping which is submerged or exposed to the atmosphere in accordance with Section 09 96 00.01 “High-Performance Coatings.” 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform a hydrostatic test as specified in Section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements.” B. Disinfect the piping system as specified in Section 33 10 13 “Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution.” END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.07 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 05 01.07 LOW HEAD REINFORCED CONCRETE CULVERT, STORM DRAIN, AND SEWER PIPE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install reinforced concrete pipe and/or conduits or drainage lines, including pipe fittings, connecting drain lines to curb inlets, joints, connections to new or existing pipe or headwalls, manholes etc., to the lines and grades indicated. Pipe and fittings shall be of the classes, sizes, and dimensions indicated. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Physical Test Requirements: 1. The acceptability of the pipe shall be determined by the results of the three edge bearing test for the load to produce the 0.01-inch crack and the ultimate load; by such material tests as are required in ASTM C76, ASTM C506, or ASTM C507; by absorption tests on selected samples from the wall of the pipe; and by inspection of the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. Three edge-bearing tests for the 0.01-inch crack only shall be performed on 0.8 percent of the pipe joints. Three edge bearing tests for both the 0.01-inch crack and the ultimate load shall be performed on 0.2 percent of the pipe on two joints. B. Protection: Protect storm drainage pipe from damage before, during, and after installation until backfill is complete. Protect the Work and materials of other trades. In event of damage, make all necessary repairs and replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Workmanship and Finish: 1. Pipe shall be free from fractures, large or deep cracks, defects that indicate imperfect manufacturing, surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture, damaged ends that would prevent making a satisfactory joints, any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and extending for a length of 12 inches or more. . The ends of pipe shall be perpendicular to the walls and centerline of the pipe within the limits of variations. 2. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. Rejected pipe shall be plainly marked by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe which meets the requirements of these specifications. Remove rejected pipe immediately from the Site. 3. In event of accidental damage during handling or minor imperfections, make the necessary repairs and replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. The Engineer may accept pipe with repairs that are sound, properly finished, and cured in conformance with pertinent specifications. D. Pipe Marking: The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe by the pipe manufacturer: Attachment 3Item 12 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.07 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. The class or D-load of pipe, 2.ASTM Specification Designation, 3. The date of manufacture and identification of plant, 4. The name or trademark of the manufacturer, 5. Diameter of the pipe, 6. Pipe to be used for jacking and boring, and 7. Pipe orientation. Where elliptical reinforcement is used one end of each section or joint of pipe shall be clearly marked during the process of manufacture or immediately thereafter on the inside and the outside of opposite walls to show the location of the “Top or “Bottom” of the pipe as it should be installed. Markings shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. “Top” and “Bottom” markings are not required on pipe having such an external shape that the correct position of the top and bottom is obvious. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Manufacturer’s Product Data sheets as Record Data. 2. Manufacturer’s layout drawings, recommended joint material placement, and joint tolerances. 3. Test reports as Record Data. 4. Material certificates as required in reference standards for storm drainage pipe as Record Data. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than specified herein. Piping shall meet the following standards and shall be a part of this Section as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM C76 [C76M]Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe [Metric]. ASTM C497 [C497M]Standard Methods of Testing Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile [Metric]. ASTM C506 [C506M]Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe [Metric]. ASTM C507 [C507M]Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe [Metric]. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Attachment 3Item 12 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.07 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. General: Except as modified herein, materials, manufacture, and design of concrete pipe shall conform to ASTM C76 for Circular Pipe. 2.02 MIXES A. Mix concrete in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit mixed concrete shall not be acceptable for use in precast concrete pipe. 2.03 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be of the Class indicated. The shell thickness, the amount of circumferential reinforcement, and the strength of the pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C76 for Circular Pipe Wall B, C506 for Arch Pipe, or C507 for Elliptical Pipe, except as modified herein. 2. Pipe shall be machine made by a process which provides uniform placement of zero slump concrete in the form and compaction by a mechanical device to provide a dense concrete in the pipe. 3. Variations in diameter, size, shape, wall thickness, reinforcement, placement of reinforcement, laying length, and the permissible underrun of length shall be in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe. 4. Pipe sizes larger than 60 inches in diameter shall be manufactured using two lines of circular reinforcement. 5. Minimum Wall Thickness: Where Class III pipe of sizes larger than 60 inches in diameter are specified, the manufacturer may at its option furnish pipe manufactured with either Wall “B” or Wall “C” minimum thicknesses and the applicable minimum Steel area as listed for circular cages in Table II of Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe, ASTM C76 (C 76M), provided tests strength requirements for Class III pipe are satisfactorily met. 6. Joints: Pipe to be placed along curves shall consist of whatever pipe lengths or beveled end joints of pipe or combination thereof that are required to place the pipe on the designated centerline curve with no more than one-half of the tongue length of the pipe exposed from its normally closed joint position. The amount of bevel, “drop” or shortening of the pipe length by the bevel shall not exceed the amount shown below for the pipe sizes indicated. Pipe Diameter Maximum Amount of Bevel or Drop* 12” to 27” inclusive 3.1875” 30” to 51” inclusive 5” 54” to 84” inclusive 6” 90” to 96”6.5” * Or manufacturer’s recommendation, whichever is less Attachment 3Item 12 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.07 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Jointing Materials: Use any of the materials described herein for the making of joints, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Furnish a manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for all jointing materials except mortar. 1. Cold applied preformed plastic gaskets. The gasket sealing the joint shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler and shall contain no solvents, irritating fumes, or obnoxious odors. The gasket joint sealer shall not depend on oxidizing, evaporating, or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive strength, and shall be supplied, to extruded rope form of suitable cross-section and size as to fill the joint space when the pipes join. The size of the plastic gasket joint sealer shall be in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and sufficient to squeeze out the gasket materials on the inside or outside around the complete pipe joint circumference. The gasket joint sealer shall be protected by a suitable removable two piece wrapper. 2. Expanded cellular rubber gaskets shall be produced from a blend of nitrile and vinyl polymers meeting the physical requirements of ASTM D1056, Class 2C1. 3. The two piece wrapper shall be designed so that 1/2 may be removed longitudinally without disturbing the other 1/2 to facilitate application as noted below. 4. The chemical composition of the gasket joint sealing compound shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with the test methods shown. Composition Test Method Bitumen (Petroleum plastic content) (% by weight) ASTM D4 50-70 Ash-Inert Mineral Matter (% by weight)AASHO Designation T-111 30-50 Volatile Matter at 325 F (% by weight) ASTM D6 2.0 Max. 5. The gasket joint sealing compound when immersed for 30 days at ambient room temperature separately in 5 percent solution of caustic potash, a mixture of percent hydrochloric acid, a 5 percent solution of sulfuric acid, and a saturated H2S solution shall show no visible deterioration. 6. The physical properties of the gasket joint sealing compound shall meet the following requirements: Property Test Method Typical Analysis Specific Gravity at 77 F ASTM D71 1.20 Min. 1.35 Max. Ductility at F (cm) Min.ASTM D113 5.0 Min. Softening Point at 77 F Min.ASTM D36 320 F Min. Flashpoint C.O.C. degrees F ASTM D92 600 F Fire Point C.O.C. degrees F ASTM D92 625 F Penetration 32 F (300 gms) 60 sec.ASTM D217 75 Min. 77 F (150 gms) 5 sec.ASTM D217 50 Min. 120 Max. 115 F (150 gms) 5 sec.ASTM D217 150 Max. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.07 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and place in position the necessary batter boards, string lines, plummets, graduated poles, etc., laser equipment, targets and incidentals for establishing and maintaining the lines and grades. The batter boards and location stakes must be protected from possible damage or change of location. 1. Lay pipe and fittings and joint in a dry trench. Excavate trenches to the lines, grades, and alignment indicated in accordance with Section 31 23 33 “Trenching and Backfill [Utilities].” Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner’s representative, start the laying the pipe on the prepared foundation at the outlet or downstream end with the spigot or tongue end of the pipe joint pointing downstream and proceed with laying pipe toward the inlet or upstream end with each abutting section of pipe properly matched, true to the established lines and grades. Approved facilities shall be provided for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe into the trench without disturbing the prepared bedding foundation or the sides of the trench. Carefully clean the ends of the pipe before the pipe is placed in the trench. As each length of pipe is laid, protect the open end and prevent the entrance of earth or bedding material. Fit and match the pipe so that when laid in the prepared bedding it forms a smooth, uniform conduit. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing, or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing, is used, lay the pipe in the trench so that the markings “Top” or “Bottom” are not be more than 5 degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, pipe that is not in alignment or that shows excessive settlement after laying. 2. Lay multiple lines of pip with the centerlines of the individual barrels parallel. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, use the following clear distances between the outer surfaces of adjacent pipes (for arched or elliptical pipe use the equivalent diameter to determine clear distance requirements). Minimum Clear Distance between Pipes Equivalent Diameter (inches) Min. Clear Distance (inches) 18 9 24 11 30 13 36 15 42 17 48 19 60 to 84 24 3. At changes in pipe sizes in the conduit line, except at manholes, provide a pipe collar. The locations of the collars are to be provided where indicated and their costs are to be included in the price bid for furnishing and installing reinforced concrete pipe. No extra payment will be made for the installation of concrete pipe collars. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.07 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. Furnish and install shop or field fabricated wyes, tees, crosses, or bends where indicated or designated by the Engineer. Fittings in which the largest pipe is less than 24 inches in diameter shall be shop-fabricated. Fittings in which the larger pipe is 24 inches in diameter or increasingly larger in size, may be field-fabricated. Care shall be taken in the fabrication that the concrete walls of the pipe are broken back only enough to provide the required finished opening. Join the reinforcing mesh or bars in each pipe by bending, twisting, or spot welding. Wipe concrete or mortar over the reinforcing wires connecting the two pipe joints, compact by light blows, shape to the contour of the pipe barrels, lightly brush finish, and cure under wet burlap. 5. When conduit lines terminate at locations which do not include connection to drainage structures, plug the end of the pipe with a field cast or precast unit. 3.02 CURING A. Cure pipe in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe. 3.03 CONCRETE PIPE JOINTING A. Make joints using cold-applied preformed plastic gaskets as follows: 1. Apply with brush a suitable primer of a type recommended by the gasket joint sealer manufacturer to the tongue and groove joint surfaces and the end surfaces and allow to dry and harden. Do not apply primer over mud, sand, or dirt, or sharp cement protrusions. Clean and dry surfaces prior to application of primer. 2. Before laying the pipe in the trench, attach the plastic gasket sealer around the tapered tongue or tapered groove near the shoulder or hub of each pipe joint. Remove the paper wrapper from one side only of the two piece wrapper on the gasket and press it firmly to the clean, dry pipe joint surface. Do not remove the outside wrapper until immediately before pushing the pipe into its final position. 3. When the tongue is correctly aligned with the flare of the groove, remove the outside wrapper on the gasket and pull or push the pipe home with sufficient force and power (back hoe shovel, chain hoist, ratchet hoist, or winch) to cause the evidence of squeeze out of the gasket material on the inside or outside around the complete pipe joint circumference. Remove any joint material that pushed out into the interior of the pipe that would tend to obstruct the flow. (Pipe shall be pulled home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times.) Backfilling of pipe laid with plastic gasket joints may proceed as soon as the joint has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. Take special precautions in placing and compacting backfill to avoid damage to the joints. 4. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 F, store plastic joint seal gaskets either in an area warmed to above 70 F, or artificially warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Apply gaskets to pipe joints immediately prior to placing the pipe in the trench, then make connections to previously laid pipe. 3.04 CONNECTIONS AND STUB ENDS A. Make connections to existing pipes, storm drains, or appurtenances as shown on the Drawings. Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if necessary to eliminate Attachment 3Item 12 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.07 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B drainage pockets created by the connections. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. B. Finish stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the Drawings by installing watertight plugs into the free end of the pipe. C. Fill lift holes with concrete, mortar, or precast concrete plugs after the pipe is in place. 3.05 BACKFILL A. After the pipe has been placed, bedded, and jointed as specified and approved by the Owner or his authorized representative, backfilling shall be done in accordance with Section 31 23 33 “Trenching and Backfill [Utilities].” END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Low Head Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 33 05 01.07 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Attachment 3Item 12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.09 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 05 01.09 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, appurtenances, and fittings to the diameters indicated for water supply and wastewater pressure piping. Trenching, backfilling, and pipe embedment shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 33 “Trenching and Backfill.” 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certification: Domestic water piping shall be approved by the Underwriters Laboratory and shall be accepted by the State Fire Insurance Commission for use in water distribution systems. PVC water pipe shall bear the seal of approval (or “NSF” mark) of the National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratory for potable water pipe. B. Design Criteria: The maximum allowable load for PVC pipe installations shall produce a maximum deflection of 4 percent. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Certified Test Reports from the Manufacturer’s testing facility or an approved testing laboratory. 2. Manufacturer’s data on piping and jointing methods as Record Data. 3. Thrust restraint lengths and lay schedule as Shop Drawing. 4. Submit specific data sheets for pipe and fittings tailored to the project clearing indicating the sizes, dimensions, and components proposed for use annotating the specific project applications. Manufacturer’s published product data sheets shall be tailored accordingly by supplier for submission 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety. PVC piping and fittings shall be in full compliance with the applicable standards and specifications for each type of plastic pipe involved. Pipe may be rejected for failure to comply with any requirement of this Section. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM D1785 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2467 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80 ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings Attachment 3Item 12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.09 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B ASTM D3139 Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM F1674 Standard Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with PVC Pipe 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards: AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings AWWA C605 Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water AWWA C900 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 through 60 Inches for Water Transmission and Distribution 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Store PVC material so that there is no exposure to sunlight. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pipe: 1. 4 to 12 inches: Class 235 (DR18) C900 with cast iron outside dimensions Potable water lines, 235 psi rating, color blue 2. 14 to 42 inches: 14” to 42” PR 165 (DR-25) C905 with cast Iron Outside dimensions Large diameter transmission mains, color blue B. PVC Pressure Piping: 1. Smaller than 4 inches in size shall be Type 1, Grade 1, rigid Polyvinyl Chloride, Schedule 80 pipe conforming to ASTM D1785. Pipe shall be manufactured from PVC compounds conforming to ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. 2. For pipe 3 inches in diameter and smaller, joints shall be glued. Threaded joints shall not be used. 3. For pipe larger than 3 inches in diameter, joints shall be bell and spigot push-on type as specified in ASTM D3139 for buried pipe. Threaded joints shall not be used. 4. Aboveground PVC piping shall be Schedule 80 in accordance with ASTM D1785 with socket welded joints conforming to ASTM D2467. Solvent cement shall be in accordance with ASTM D2564. Solvent cement shall be industrial grade exhibiting excellent compatibility with process fluids and suitable for operating pressures and PVC pipe pressure ratings. Primers shall be per cement manufacturer’s recommendations. Solvent cement shall be by Oatey or equal. Attachment 3Item 12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.09 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 5. Where flanged joints are shown on Drawings provide PVC flanges for pipe and fittings. PVC flanges shall be single piece, suitable for solvent cementing to pipe and shall be suitable for a minimum working pressure of 150 psig. Two-piece (Van-Stone) style flanges will not be acceptable. Provide full face Viton or EPDM gaskets with 1/8-in thickness. Gasket materials shall exhibit excellent compatibility with process fluid. Bolts, nuts and hardware for flanged joints shall be ASTM F593 and F594 Type 304 SST. C. Fittings: For buried pipe applications 3- through 24-inch cast ductile iron and conforming to AWWA C110 or C153, American National Standard Specification for Gray Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings. Fittings smaller than 12 inches in diameter shall be of the short body design, ASA Class 250. Fittings for piping smaller than 4 inches shall be PVC in accordance with ASTM D2467. For aboveground PVC pipe installations fittings shall be Schedule 80 per ASTM D2467. D. Thrust Restraint: Thrust restraint devices shall be Mega-lug or approved equal and shall be factory tested and pressure rated in accordance with ASTM F1674. 1. Joint restraint devices shall be designed specifically for use with PVC pipe of the joint type and pressure rating specified. 2. Restrained joints shall be used for a sufficient distance from each bend, tee, plug, valve or other fitting to resist thrust which will be developed at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purposes of thrust restraint, working pressure shall be 200 psi. Design pressure shall be 1.5 times the design working pressure of 200 psi or the pipe pressure class indicated. 3. The length of pipe with restrained joints to resist thrust forces shall be the sole responsibility of and determined by the Pipe Manufacturer using the following parameters: a. Laying condition equal to AWWA C605 Type 3 bedding. b. No thrust restraint contribution shall be allowed for pipe in casing. c. Soil density = 100 pcf. d. Place concrete blocking (1500# concrete) at bends, tees, crosses, valves, and plugs in the pipe line. Rest blocking against firm undisturbed trench walls E. Expansion Joints: For exposed PVC pipe applications sizes ½-in through 6-in provide expansion joints of the telescoping type with EPDM seals as manufactured by Spears Mfg., Plastinetics, Inc; Flexikraft; ASAHI America Or equal. At a minimum provide one expansion joint with 6-in travel per 50 foot of linear pipe run whether shown on Drawings or not. Expansion in smaller piping shall be accommodated with expansion loops. 2.02 MARKINGS A. The Pipe Manufacturer shall mark the piping with the size and appropriate AWWA/ASTM Standard designations as applicable. Attachment 3Item 12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.09 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pipe, fittings, and specials to the lines and grades indicated. Begin installation at the main supply line valve and make connections where indicated. B. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, and specials into the trench to avoid damage to the pipe and/or fittings. Keep the pipe clean during laying operations, and seal the pipe against the entrance of objects at the close of each operating day. C. Place thrust restraint fittings at bends, tees, crosses, valves, and plugs in the pipe line in accordance with approved Shop Drawing lay schedule and Paragraph 2.01.D. D. Buried ductile iron fittings shall be double wrapped in 8mm high density polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA C105, repair or replace encasements which have tears, rips or punctures in the polyethylene wrap. E. The minimum cover for 1- to 4-inch PVC piping shall be 36 inches. For 6-inch PVC piping and larger, the minimum cover shall be 48 inches. F. The following minimum horizontal clearances shall be maintained between crossing lines: Water line/new sanitary or reuse sewer line separation. When new sanitary sewers or reuse waterlines are installed, install lines no closer to potable waterlines than 9 feet in all directions. Wastewater lines that parallel potable waterlines must be installed in separate trenches. Where the 9-foot separation distance cannot be achieved, the following guidelines shall apply: G. Where a sanitary sewer parallels a potable waterline, construct the sewer of PVC meeting ASTM specifications with a pressure rating for both the pipe and joints of 150 psi. The vertical separation shall be a minimum of 2 feet between outside diameters and the horizontal separation shall be a minimum of 4 feet between outside diameters. The wastewater line shall be located below the waterline. H. Where a sanitary sewer line crosses a waterline, construct the sewer of PVC with a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi, an absolute minimum distance of 6 inches between outside diameters shall be maintained. In addition, the sewer shall be located below the waterline where possible and one length of the wastewater pipe shall be centered on the waterline. I. Where a sewer crosses over a waterline construct all portions of the sewer within 9 feet of the waterline of PVC pipe with a pressure rating of at least 150 psi using appropriate adapters. J. Solvent cement joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D2855. For solvent weld joints, cut square and smooth the ends of the plastic pipe and wipe clean. Apply primer and solvent cement to the outside of the pipe and the inside of the fitting socket with a small brush. Immediately push the coated surfaces snugly together and rotate the pipe approximately one-half turn to insure uniform distribution of the cement. Remove the excess cement by wiping. Cement shall be of type which welds plastic surfaces together. Cement shall be as recommended by the Pipe Manufacturer and shall be compatible with the chemical conveyed. Primer shall be used whenever recommended by the Manufacturer. Attachment 3Item 12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.09 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Solvent cement welded joints shall not be made when the ambient temperature is 40F and falling. 3.02 FIELD CONTROL HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. Perform hydrostatic testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements.” 3.03 PURGING OF WATER LINES A. Purge, sterilize, and test the constructed water lines in accordance with Section 33 10 13 “Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution.” 1. During construction operations, maintain the installed surfaces of the system, which come in contact with the City’s water supply, in a sanitary condition. 2. Every effort must be made to keep the inside of the pipe, fittings, and valves free of loose foreign matter. 3. Should the Contractor’s carrier be required to transport potable water to the job site for main testing, sterilize tankage and piping, including pumps used to transport or transfer potable water into the main. B. When the entire pipeline or selected sections have been completed and are ready for use, disinfect the line or section according to the following procedures: 1. After purging and flushing, sterilize the system in accordance with procedures in Section 33 10 13 “Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution.” 3.04 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Make service connections in accordance with AWWA Manual M23 “PVC Pipe - Design and Installation” and the instructions from the Manufacturer. Use a service clamp or saddle to connect 2-inch and smaller services to PVC pipe sizes 4 to 12 inches. Use a ductile iron tapped tee to connect 3-inch service connections. 3.05 FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Heat tracing: Provide heat trace as directed on the Drawings and areas vulnerable to freezing. Heat trace shall be installed under the insulation. Insulation and heat tracing shall be suitable design for PVC piping, and shall be provided in accordance with the Electrical and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not enclose or cover any Work until inspected. Attachment 3Item 12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.09 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.07 SCHEDULES Joint Type Service Diameter (in.)Type Min. Design Pressure Buried Exposed 0-2 Sched.80 300 psi FL, SW 2-1/2, 3 Sched.80 300 psi SW SW, FL, THD 4-12 Sched. 80 200 psi SW SW, FL Water 4-12 C900 150 psi PO N/A SW – Solvent Weld, THD – Threaded, PO – Push-On, FL – Flanged END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Pipelines Crossing [Highways, Streets and Railroads By Boring, Tunneling Or Open Cut]33 05 23.33 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 05 23.33 PIPELINE CROSSING [HIGHWAYS, STREETS AND RAILROADS BY BORING, TUNNELING OR OPEN CUT] 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pipe casings or tunnel liners by boring, tunneling or open cut as specified. This section sets forth the requirements for utility lines crossing roadways or railroads using bore, tunneling, or open cut. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Tunnel Liner Plate: The tunnel liner plate shall be designed by the Manufacturer in accordance with the methods and criteria as specified in AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Section 26. Soil parameters shall be determined by the Tunnel Liner Plate Manufacturer. The tunnel liner plate shall be designed to allow a maximum deflection of 3 percent. The thickness of the tunnel liner plate specified herein is the minimum acceptable and shall be increased as necessary to obtain adequate joint strength, stiffness, buckling strength, and resistance to deflection. 2. Casing Insulators: Casing insulators shall be designed by the Manufacturer to adequately support and electrically isolate the carrier pipe within the casing pipe under all conditions. Number and location of spacing insulators shall be determined by the Manufacturer to protect carrier pipe from damages. One insulator shall be placed within 2 feet of ends of casing. B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation shall be by a competent, experienced contractor or sub-contractor. The installation contractor shall have a satisfactory experience record of at least 3 years engaged in similar work of equal scope. C. Performance Requirements: Lateral or vertical variation in the final position of the pipe casing or tunnel liner from the line and grade established by the engineer shall be permitted only to the extent of 1 inch in 10 feet, provided that such variation shall be regular and only in the direction that will not detrimentally affect the function of the carrier pipe. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop drawings of the tunnel liner plate and fasteners from the tunnel liner plate manufacturer. Shop drawings shall include calculations for the design of the tunnel liner plate. Shop drawings are for record purposes only and will not be reviewed or approved by the Engineer. 2. Provide shop drawings of casing insulators including sketches of insulators with material components and dimensions and proposed locations of insulators. Attachment 3Item 12 Pipelines Crossing [Highways, Streets and Railroads By Boring, Tunneling Or Open Cut]33 05 23.33 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.04 STANDARDS A.American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Standards: AASHTO M190 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 1993 B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A135 Electric – Resistance – Welded Steel Pipe ASTM A139 Electric – Fusion (Arc) – Welded Steel Pipe (NPS4 and Over) ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A449 Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs ASTM A568/ A568M Steel, Carbon, and High Strength, Low Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled for Commercial Quality ASTM C76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe ASTM D4254 Test Method for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards: AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS; PERMITS AND EASEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Where the work is in the public right-of-way or railroad company right-of-way, the Owner will secure the appropriate permits or easements. The Contractor shall observe regulations and instructions of the right-of-way Owner as to the methods of performing the work and take precautions for the safety of the property and the public. Negotiations and coordination with the right-of-way Owner shall be carried on by the Contractor, not less than 5 days prior to the time of his intentions to begin work on the right-of-way. B. Comply with the requirements of the permit and/or easement, a copy of which is included in the Appendix. The work within the Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT) shall comply with TXDOT specifications. If required by the Right-of-Way Owner, obtain Protective Liability Insurance in the amount required by the particular company or other insurance as is specified in the permit at no additional cost to the Owner. Acquire a permit, agreement, or work order from the right-of-way Owner as is required. C. Construction along roads and railroads shall be performed in such manner that the excavated material be kept off the roads and railroads at all times, as well as, all operating equipment. Construction shall not interfere with the operations of the roads and railroads. Attachment 3Item 12 Pipelines Crossing [Highways, Streets and Railroads By Boring, Tunneling Or Open Cut]33 05 23.33 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Barricades, warning signs, and flagmen, when necessary and specified, shall be provided by the Contractor. E. No blasting shall be allowed. Existing pipelines are to be protected. The Contractor shall verify location and elevation of any pipe lines and telephone cable before proceeding with the construction and plan his construction so as to avoid damage to the existing pipe lines or telephone cables. Verification of location of existing utilities shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor. 1.06 OPTIONS A. Casing Material: Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor may use steel pipe, reinforced concrete pipe, or tunnel liner plate where bore and/or tunnel is specified. Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor may use steel pipe or reinforced concrete pipe where open cut casing is specified. The material specification for casing pipe and tunnel liner are the minimum acceptable. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to insure the materials used are of sufficient strength for the installation method chosen and the soil conditions encountered. B. Bore and Tunnel Methods: Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor may use boring, jacking, tunneling for the installation method of casing material. Tunnel liner plate shall not be used where bore or jack methods are used. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to insure the methods used are adequate for the protection of workers, pipe, property, and the public. Provide a finished product as required. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Pipe: Steel casing pipe shall have a minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi. Casing shall meet ASTM A36, ASTM A568, ASTM A135, ASTM A139, or approved equal. Pipe shall be coated and lined in accordance with AWWA C210 or approved equal. Pipe joints shall be welded in accordance with AWWA C206. After pipe is welded, coating and lining shall be repaired. Unless specified otherwise, the minimum wall thickness of steel casing pipe shall be as follows: Casing Diameter Wall Thickness 4” to 24”0.25” 25” to 42”0.375” 43” to 60”0.50” B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Pipe casing shall conform to ASTM C76 and shall be of the size, class and length specified. Pipe shall be a minimum of Class IV for 42-inch and smaller diameters and a minimum of Class V for diameter larger than 42 inches. 2.02 MIXES A. Cement Mortar: Consisting of 1 part cement to 2 parts clean sand with sufficient water to make a thick workable mix. Attachment 3Item 12 Pipelines Crossing [Highways, Streets and Railroads By Boring, Tunneling Or Open Cut]33 05 23.33 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. Pressure Grout Mix: Comprised of 1 cubic foot of cement and 3.5 cubic feet of clean fine sand with sufficient water added to provide a free flowing thick slurry. If desired to maintain solids in the mixture in suspension, 1 cubic foot of commercial grade bentonite may be added to each 12 to 15 cubic feet of the slurry. 2.03 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. Tunnel Liner: Manufactured by Armco Steel Corp., and Commercial Shearing, Inc. B. Casing Insulators: Use casing insulators for any type of carrier pipe. Insulators shall consist of pre-manufactured steel bands with plastic lining and plastic runners. Insulators shall fit snug over the carrier pipe and position the carrier pipe approximately in the center of the casing pipe, to provide adequate clearance between the carrier pipe bell and the casing pipe. Fasteners for insulators shall be stainless steel or cadmium-plated. Insulators shall be as manufactured by Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing Company or Pipeline Seal and Insulators, Incorporated or Perry Equipment Corporation. C. Mortar Bands: Concrete cylinder pipe and mortar coated steel pipe may have thickened outside mortar bands in lieu of casing insulators. Mortar bands shall be properly position the pipe within the casing or tunnel liner. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Excavation and Backfill of Access Pits: 1. Do not allow excavation over the limits of the bore or tunnel as specified. Trench walls of access pits adjacent to the bore or tunnel face shall be truly vertical. Shore the trench walls as necessary to protect workmen, the public, structures, roadways, and other improvements. 2. Excavations within the right-of-way and not under surfacing shall be backfilled and consolidated by tamping in 6-inch horizontal layers to 95 percent of maximum density as measured by ASTM D698. Surplus material shall be removed from the right-of-way and the excavation finished to original grades. Backfill pits immediately after the installation of the carrier pipe is completed. If carrier pipe is not installed immediately after casing pipe installation, the Right-of-Way Owner may require the access pits be temporarily backfilled until installation of carrier pipe. 3. Where seeding or sodding is disturbed by excavation or backfilling operations, such areas shall be replaced by seeding or sodding as specified in Section 31 23 33.16 “Trenching and Backfill [Water Resources].” B. Installing Carrier Pipe In Casings: 1. Pipe to be installed within the casing or tunnel liner shall meet the requirements for this type of pipe as specified. Where indicated, place, align, and anchor guide rails and/or casing insulators inside the casing. If guide rails are used, place cement mortar on both sides of the rails. 2. Pull or skid pipe into place inside the casing. Lubricants such as flax soap or drilling mud may be used to ease pipe installation. Do not use petroleum products, oil or grease for Attachment 3Item 12 Pipelines Crossing [Highways, Streets and Railroads By Boring, Tunneling Or Open Cut]33 05 23.33 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B this purpose. If guide rails are used, install pipe and hold down jacks after installation of carrier pipe. 3. After installation of the carrier pipe, mortar inside and outside of the joints as applicable. 4. After carrier pipe installation is completed, seal or plug the ends of the casing. C. Free-Air System: 1. If required by OSHA standards, free-air systems shall be installed and maintained. 2. Installation of Pressure Grout Mix: a. Install pressure grout mix in the void space between the outside of the casing pipe or tunnel liner and the excavation. For bore or jacks with casing pipe, install pressure grout mix immediately upon completion of setting casing pipe. For tunnel liner plate, install pressure grout mix at the end of each work day or more often as conditions warrant. b. Unless specified otherwise, install pressure grouting through grout fittings for the casing pipe or tunnel liner plate 48 inches in diameter or larger. Grout fittings shall be fabricated into casing pipe and tunnel liner plate at a maximum spacing of 6 feet. Remove and plug grout fittings after pressure grouting. c. Install pressure grout from the low end for all crossings where grout fittings are not used. Seal the low end and pressure grout until grout is extruded from the opposite end. 3.02 CROSSINGS INSTALLED BY BORING A. Perform the boring from the low or downstream end unless specified otherwise. Bore the holes mechanically and use a pilot hole. By this method, an approximate 2-inch pilot hole shall be bored the entire length of the crossing and shall be checked for line and grade. This pilot hole shall serve as the centerline of the larger diameter hole to be bored. Place excavated material near the top of the working pit and dispose of material as required. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will be permitted only to the extent to lubricate cuttings. Jetting shall not be permitted. B. In unconsolidated soil formations, a gel-forming colloidal drilling fluid consisting of at least 10 percent of high grade carefully processed bentonite may be used to consolidate cuttings of the bit, seal the walls of the hole, and furnish lubrication for subsequent removal of cuttings and installation of the pipe immediately thereafter. C. In locations where the soil formation is other than consolidated rock, insert the casing pipe simultaneously with the boring operation. This requirement applies to all bored holes of 18 inches or greater in diameter. For smaller diameter bored holes, it is desirable that the casing be installed as the boring progresses, but because of differences in soil formations, the time for inserting the casing shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. In the event that caving sand or water bearing materials are encountered, insert the casing pipe simultaneously with the boring operation regardless of the diameter of the bored hole. In all cases, the security and integrity of the roadway is the primary concern. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for the continued integrity of the structure of the roadway Attachment 3Item 12 Pipelines Crossing [Highways, Streets and Railroads By Boring, Tunneling Or Open Cut]33 05 23.33 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B being crossed, whether or not a casing pipe is inserted simultaneously with the boring operation. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution 33 10 13 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 10 13 DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Disinfect the facilities for pumping, storing, or conveying potable water to comply with the standards for potable water of the regulatory agency of jurisdiction. Potable water is defined as any water that has been filtered, disinfected or otherwise treated to the meet regulatory standards (in the water treatment plant this includes the inside surfaces of the filters). B. Disinfect piping systems that are used to convey water, solutions, or chemicals to the potable water facilities. C. Test water from the disinfected system per regulatory standards to verify that water is acceptable. Repeat procedure if tests do not meet standards. D. For critical operations identified in Section 01 35 00 “Special Procedures” the Contractor shall plan and perform the repairs/work in a manner to allow the Bac-T samples to be taken by noon. In accordance with Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Chapter 290 regulations, disinfection must be performed when repairs are made to existing facilities and before new facilities are placed into service. When it is necessary to return the facility back to service as rapidly as possible, it is acceptable to increase the doses to 500 mg/l and the contact time reduced to 30 minutes. This Project will require the critical operations to be disinfected by 500 mg/l for 30 minutes followed by flushing prior to the sample being taken. The Owner will take the sample and have it tested. Contractor may also take a sample to be tested. Cost for failed tests and all associated re-disinfection, flushing shall be borne by the Contractor. Prior to the 30 minute test time, all new valves shall be fully closed and opened. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Liquid Chlorine: Meeting the requirements of AWWA B301. B. Calcium Hypochlorite: Meeting the requirements of AWWA B300. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 NEW FACILITIES A. New facilities shall be thoroughly disinfected in accordance with AWWA Standard C651 - Water Mains, C652 - Storage Facilities, C653 – Water Treatment Plants, and then flushed and sampled before being placed in service. Samples shall be collected and tested in accordance with the TCEQ Rules and Regulations, Chapter 290. B. During construction keep basins, pipe, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances free from dirt and debris. 1. Clean basins thoroughly before disinfection. Attachment 3Item 12 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution 33 10 13 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Seal the open ends of pipe with water-tight plugs when pipe is not being laid. 3.Pump water from trenches before removing the plug when water accumulates in the trench. C. Complete hydrostatic test of the line prior to disinfection. D. Wash the surfaces to be disinfected. 1. Flush pipelines. The minimum quantity of water used for flushing must exceed the capacity of the line to ensure that clean water has traversed the entire length of pipe. 2. Power wash the surfaces of basins and reservoirs using high pressure wash systems. E. Disinfect facilities per the following procedures of AWWA: 1. Water Mains: C651 - latest revision. 2. Water Storage Facilities: C652 - latest revision. 3. Water Treatment Plants: C653 - latest revision. F. Fill the system with potable water. Test the water to see that it meets the requirements of the regulatory agency of jurisdiction for potable water. Monitor the system for 2 days. If water test fails to meet the prescribed standards, repeat the disinfection process until water meets quality standards for disinfection. The Owner will provide the water for the initial test and disinfection, if subsequent tests are required, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for the water required. 3.02 REPAIRS OR CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES A. Clean and sterilize the interior surfaces of new piping, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances to be installed in an existing potable water system or connected to an existing system. B. Clean and sterilize the existing pipe or facilities for a minimum distance of 3 pipe diameters back from the ends of the pipe. Plug the ends of the line when work is not being performed on the pipe. C. Perform sterilization by swabbing each item with a concentrated chlorine solution. 1. Each piece is to be disinfected prior to being assembled for installation in the existing pipe. 2. Disinfect each piece just prior to assembly to help prevent re contamination. 3. Plug the ends of the assembly until a new item is to be added to the assembly. 4. Store disinfected materials on blocks to prevent contact with the ground. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION WATER A. Chlorinated water used in flushing and disinfecting pipelines prior to connection to the distribution system shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an acceptable manner. Chlorinated water must be “de-chlorinated” prior to disposal to eliminate adverse impacts to the surrounding environment. Water released to the environment shall meet all AWWA, EPA, and TCEQ regulatory requirements. Attachment 3Item 12 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution 33 10 13 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all of the applicable requirements of the TPDES General Permit TXG670000, issued by the TCEQ, regarding the discharge of hydrostatic test water. 2. The discharge must be to a splash pad or paved area, and may not be located within 300 feet of the intake for a domestic drinking water supply or 500 feet of any public or private water well. 3. An effluent water sample must be taken during the first hour of discharge at a location immediately near the point of discharge, and collected prior to commingling with storm water, wastewater, or other flows. 4. For discharges that extend beyond an hour in duration, a second sample must be taken of the last 10 percent of the effluent. 5. Sampling protocol, sample containers, holding times, preservation methods, and analytical methods must follow the requirements set forth in the general permit. 6. The effluent grab sample(s) must be analyzed for total residual chlorine by an accredited and certified laboratory. 7. Any noncompliance that endangers human health or safety, or the environment must be reported to the TCEQ in accordance with the general permit. 8. Any effluent violation which deviates from the permitted effluent limitation by more than 40 percent must be reported to the TCEQ in accordance with the general permit. 9. The Contractor must record all hydrostatic test water sample results on an approved DMR (EPA Form 3320-1). These monitoring records shall be retained for a period of 3 years from the date of the record and be readily available for review by the TCEQ upon request. See attached form B. With the written permission of the Owner of the system, chlorinated water may be disposed of in a sanitary sewer system if one is available. In the case of larger pipelines and the larger volumes of water involved, the Contractor will not be permitted to use the sanitary sewer system for disposal even if one is available. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution 33 10 13 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.13 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 12 16.13 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install miscellaneous valves. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment and materials furnished under this Section against defects in materials and workmanship and operational failure for a period of 2 year from the date of Owner acceptance. B. In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the first year of service, provided that the equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with good practice, the Manufacturer shall furnish and deliver a replacement for the defective part or parts at the Manufacturer’s own expense. Manufacturer is also responsible for equipment freight. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAP VALVES A. Flap valves shall be circular flange framed, with machined back flange for attachment to a flanged wall thimble. Body and flap shall be cast iron, ASTM A126-B. Resilient seat shall be neoprene or Buna-N bonded in a groove machined in the body. Hinge arms shall be high- tensile bronze, ASTM B584-C865 with two pivot points, an adjustable lower pivot with limited rotation and a threaded upper hinge post to adjust flap valve sensitivity. A lubrication fitting shall be supplied for each pivot. Hinge pins shall be silicon bronze, ASTM B98-C655 or Type 304 Stainless Steel. B. Flap valve shall be designed to open when differential head across the flap is 0.3 foot or less. C. Flap valve shall be: 1. Rodney Hunt Series FV-AC or 2. Approved equal. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.13 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.02 SOLENOID VALVES A.Solenoid valve shall be a two-position valve. Solenoid enclosure shall be water tight. The construction of the valve shall be brass with FPM seals. The valve shall be normally open, energize closed. Control voltage shall be coordinated with the control manufacturer. B. Solenoid valve shall be: 1. Cla-Val Model 636-03 without check feature 2.03 DIAPRAGHM VALVES FOR TANK ALTITUDE AND FLOW CONTROL SERVICE 1. Tank Control Valve Function a. The bidirectional valve shall enable controlling the influent to the tank from the pumps in the distribution system and outflow from the tank during varying system demands. Valve shall allow a controlled flow rate into the lower pressure zone and elevated storage tank in the water distribution system based on a user adjustable pilot control system and valve position. b. The valve can be opened or closed locally and remotely via the use of solenoid valves installed on the pilot system between the inlet/out sides and the top chamber. The valve will achieve controlled opening and closure without causing surges by utilizing the needle valves on the pilot system. c. In the open position the valve will allow flow into the elevated tank when the distribution pipeline side pressure is higher than or when it increases above the tank side pressure; Conversely when the tank side pressure is higher than the pipeline side pressure the tank will drain and maintain pressure in the distribution system. d. The valve will automatically shut off via a spring actuated altitude pilot when the tank reaches its maximum storage level. e. When the tank reaches a low level the valve will be completely open to allow filling. f. The remote adjustment of valve position shall be accompanied by a valve position and flow rate transmitter to enable monitoring and controlling the tank influent and effluent. The remote valve position and flow control system will enable intentional cycling the elevated tank in the lower pressure zone. g. The valve package shall enable flow, and valve position monitoring and control, both locally and from SCADA. h. Upon power and/or communications failure the valve shall fail in the ‘open’ position. Upon restoration of power the valve shall reset automatically to the last valve control position setpoint. 2. Electronic Position/Flow Control Valve a. Function The hydraulic control valve shall consist of dual 120VAC solenoid valves, with dual hydraulic pilots which alternately apply or relieve pressure to the diaphragm chamber to position the main valve to control flow locally or at a remote location. Flow shall be monitored based on a combination control logic involving the inlet and outlet pressure, and valve position transmitter feedback. Upon power failure or a remote Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.13 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B signal the main valve shall position itself open depending on the manual hydraulic settings. Valve shall come equipped with hydraulic tubing, opening/closing speed controls, shut-off cocks, check valves, and strainers for the pilot system. b. Hydraulic Conditions The valve shall be designed to operate under the following hydraulic conditions: Maximum Flow: 10.0 MGD (Adjustable) Minimum Flow: 1.0 MGD Maximum Pressure: 200 psi Minimum Pressure: 55 psi c. Electronic Control System, Panel Equipment and Pilot Controls The programmable logic (PID) controller shall be furnished with the valve by the valve manufacturer, but packaged separately for remote mounting. The electronic controller (Model VC-22D or equal) shall provide the interface between a remote computer system and a hydraulic control valve to provide remote electronic control operation of the valve. The electronic controller shall be supplied with pre- programmed valve application templates used to setup and configure the controller to match the desired function of the valve in the piping system. Flow shall be monitored based on a combination control logic involving the inlet and outlet pressure, and valve position transmitter feedback. Valve will measure flow rate, have a totalizer to measure cumulative flow, and have the ability to retransmit to SCADA with 4-20mA feedback signals and log data. Inlet and outlet pressures, valve position, and flow rate shall be displayed at, and relayed via controller to SCADA. Alarms for solenoids, and general valve failure shall be provided locally and at SCADA. Upon receiving the set-point command signal, the controller will signal the valve pilots to actuate and maintain the valve at the desired set point. Full manual control of control valve solenoids will also be provided on the controller panel for local control. The controller display shall be a color TFT screen to graphically display valve application with integral real-time system information. The display shall show current status, all transmitter readouts, and set point values in scalable engineering units. The operator interface shall consist of two rows of alphanumeric characters to display numeric values and units. Color-coded alarm, status and mode indicators shall inform the operator of operating conditions. Security key codes shall protect against undesired changes to the controller. All programming shall be menu driven. An IP-68 enclosure shall be provided to house the controller for environmental protection. An anodized aluminum mounting bracket suitable for mounting on pipe or wall shall be supplied as standard. The controller shall feature a multi-PID loop control with local or remote set point input. The controller shall include six (6) configurable analog inputs; six (6) dry contact digital inputs; four (4) 4-20mA analog inputs; and two (2) solid-state relays. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.13 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B The controller shall be enable configurable set point ramping to protect against system surges and shall also include a configurable flow totalizer. High speed logging data (1000Hz) shall be downloadable to a portable memory device such as a USB drive. Security codes shall be provided to protect against unauthorized changes. The electronic controller shall be capable of data retransmission to SCADA or similar control systems and shall be capable of generating and sending signal loss warnings and other configurable control actions. Alarm outputs shall be provided as standard rather than an optional feature. Each VC-22D controller enclosure and supporting AC/DC power supply conversion box enclosure (where required), come standard with their own individual universal bracket(s), allowing for versatile installation as follows: - System Piping (horizontally or vertically) - Panel / Cabinet (via DIN rail furnished by others. Clips for mounting to DIN rail to be supplied by Cla-Val - Band clamps Wall mounting Sufficient clearance around controller enclosure should be made for adequate access/wiring. Considerations should be made to comply with all the various local codes, standards and best practices Function Utilizing electronic digital control, solenoid pilots equipped onto the control valve(s) are actuated by electrical signals received from the Electronic Valve Controller which enables remote computer control over the diaphragm valve operations. The solenoids either add or relieve line pressure from the cover chamber of the diaphragm valve, causing it to open or close as directed by the Electronic Valve Controller. Each solenoid is controlled by a solid state relay with zero switching voltage. The total cycle time between each pulse shall be programmable. In either digital or analog control, the Electronic Valve Controller shall accept an analog 4-20mA feedback signal. Upon receiving the remote set-point command from the computer system or local command from the operator, the Electronic Valve Controller shall provide a digital signal or 4-20 mA analog signal to the appropriate pilot(s) and maintain the desired set-point value. When the feedback signal is within a programmable dead band zone, the appropriate electronic pilot(s) on the control valve will not activate; control valve will maintain position. When the feedback signal deviates from or approaches the set-point, the appropriate electronic pilot(s) will be activated, smoothly modulating the valve to its set-point. Preinstalled valve application templates allow the Electronic Valve Controller to be configured to perform a wide range of control valve functions, such as; pressure management, pressure reducing, pressure sustaining, rate of flow control, level control or valve position. The controller will have in addition to the control capabilities, a built-in totalizer with the following features: Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.13 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1). Scalable in either thousands or millions of gallons – from less than 1000 gallons to 10 billion gallons upper range 2). Retransmission of flow and/or total volume to SCADA system 3). Alarm output on preset volume 4). Volume (or batch) control using alarm output and optional Digital Input card 5). Reset to zero locally or remotely with Digital Input option 6). Security lockout feature prevents changes or resets of totalized flow 7). Digital Contacts shall be provided for multiple set points Power Converter Provide a self-contained device (Cla-Val EPC or equal) used to convert an AC power source to 24VDC to operate the Electronic Valve Controller (Cla-Val Model VC-22D or equal). The power converter shall also convert the 24VDC solenoid outputs from the VC-22D controller to 120 VAC; to operate control valves that are equipped with the AC solenoids. Power converter enclosure shall be IP-68 Submersible and shall be provided standard with an enclosure and mounting bracket Controller will be powered with a 120 VAC circuit as shown on Electrical Drawings. The controller shall be equipped to provide power, either 120VAC Or 24 VDC, to all electrical and control components on the valve. The controller package shall be complete with a power converter, transformer, and internal wiring as required. Controller shall be designed to accept, display, transmit, and relay I/O signals shown on electrical Drawings at a minimum. Power and signal wiring from the power converter to the valve shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the Electrical Drawings and the Manufacturer’s recommendations. The control equipment shall be installed in an NEMA 4X rated enclosure per Electrical Details. The Contractor shall coordinate provision of any ventilation or air conditioning as required to maintain the controller bearing enclosure temperature between 45 – 104 F. d. Manufacturer's Representative for Startup and Testing 1). The Manufacturer or his representative shall provide the services of a competent service technician for a minimum of 5 trips or more as required to ensure proper adjustment, installation, operation of the valve, and making field acceptance tests. 2). The technician shall instruct the Owner’s personnel on the proper care, maintenance, adjustment, and operation of the equipment and shall issue a written certification that the equipment has been properly installed and operates satisfactorily. 3). The technician shall be factory trained and have a minimum of 5 years of experience in the installation and adjustment of the subject valves. 3. Main Valve Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.13 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B The valve shall by hydraulically operated, single diaphragm-actuated and globe pattern. The valve shall consist of three major components: the body with seat installed, the cover with bearings installed and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve separating operating pressure from line pressure. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes are not permitted and there shall be no pistons operating the main valve or pilot controls. 4. Main Valve Body No separate chambers shall be allowed between the main valve cover and body. Valve body and cover shall be of cast material. Ductile Iron is standard and other materials shall be available. No fabrication or welding shall be used in the manufacturing process. Total shipping weight, in all respects, shall be equal to or greater than the Cla-Val Hytrol 100- 01 body. The valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc with a rectangular cross-section contained on three and one-half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable seat insert. No O-ring type discs (circular, square, or quad type) shall be permitted as the seating surface. The disc guide shall be of the contoured type to permit smooth transition of flow and shall hold the disc firmly in place. The disc retainer shall be of a sturdy one-piece design capable of withstanding opening and closing shocks. It must have straight edge sides and a radius at the top edge to prevent excessive diaphragm wear as the diaphragm flexes across this surface. No hourglass-shaped disc retainers shall be permitted, and no V-type or slotted type disc guides shall be used. The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic 303 stainless steel stem of sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum of a five-degree taper on the seating surface for a positive, drip-tight shut off. No center guides shall be permitted. The stem shall be drilled and tapped in the cover end to receive and affix such accessories as may be deemed necessary. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve separating operating pressure from line pressure. The flexible, non-wicking, FDA approved diaphragm shall consist of nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber compatible with the operating fluid. The center hole for the main valve stem must be sealed by the vulcanized process or a rubber grommet sealing the center stem hole from the operating pressure. The diaphragm must withstand a Mullins Burst Test of a minimum of 600 psi per layer of nylon fabric and shall be cycle tested 100,000 times to insure longevity. The diaphragm shall not be used as the seating surface. The diaphragm shall be fully supported in the valve body and cover by machined surfaces which support no less than one-half of the total surface area of the diaphragm in either the fully open or fully closed position. The main valve seat and the stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. The cover bearing and seat in 6” and smaller size valves shall be threaded into the cover and body. Valve seat in 8” and larger size valves shall be retained by flat head machine screws for ease of maintenance. The lower bearing of the valve stem shall be contained concentrically within the seat and shall be exposed to the flow on all sides to avoid deposits. To insure proper alignment of the valve stem, the valve body and cover shall be machined with a locating lip. No “pinned” covers to the valve body shall be permitted. Cover bearing, disc retainer, and seat shall be made of the same material. All necessary Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.13 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B repairs and/or modifications other than replacement of the main valve body shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline. The valve manufacturer shall warrant the valve to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of acceptance of the valve upon installation and testing in accordance with all applicable instructions. Electrical components shall have a one-year warranty. The valve manufacturer shall be able to supply a complete line of equipment from 1 1/4” through 36” sizes and a complete selection of complementary equipment. The valve manufacturer shall also provide a computerized cavitation chart which show flow rate, differential pressure, percentage of valve opening, Cv factor, system velocity, and if there will be cavitation damage. 5. Allowable Manufacturers The diaphragm valves shall be the models specified below as manufactured by Cla-Val Co. or approved equal. “Tying” of equipment into packages for the purpose of thwarting competition shall be considered to be in non-compliance with these specifications. Manufacturers shall price items under different subsections or take other measures necessary to provide for a competitive bid environment. 6. Valve Material Specification a. Electronic Pressure Sustaining/ Pressure Reducing/ Flow Control Valve/ Relief Override 1). Cla-Val Model No. 131-JA BCENSYKCKX w/ Hytrol 100-01 2). Valve Size: 18" 3). Main Valve Body and Cover: Ductile Iron ASTM A-536 4). Main Valve Trim: 303 stainless steel 5). End Detail: Flanged ANSI 150# 6). Pressure Rating: 250 psi max. working pressure 7). Temperature Range: -40 to +180 degrees F 8). Rubber Material: Buna “N” 9). Coating: Fusion bonded epoxy coating - average thickness of 5 to 7 mils 10).Exterior Tubing and Fittings: Stainless Steel 11).Desired Options: CDS6A Hydraulic Altitude Pilot; Two (2) NEMA 4X Limit Switches for Open/Closed Indication; One NEMA 6 Valve Position Transmitter (X117D); Two (2) 2-way 120/60 NC Solenoid Valves; One Power Converter (EPC) with 120 VAC – 24 VDC transformer with 110 VAC solenoid power outlets in IP68 enclosure; One DC Valve Controller (VC-22D) in NEMA 4 watertight enclosure. Attachment 3Item 12 Miscellaneous Valves 33 12 16.13 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Carefully handle and install valves in a manner that prevents damage to any part of the valves. Install valves in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Gate Valves 33 12 16.23 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 12 16.23 GATE VALVES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install gate valves and appurtenances, including valve boxes, operators, bolts, nuts and gaskets. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American-Flow Control. 2. M&H. 3. Mueller. 4. Clow. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Warranty 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards: AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints AWWA C500 Gate Valves for Water and Sewage Systems AWWA C509 Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewage Systems 1.05 GUARANTEES Attachment 3Item 12 Gate Valves 33 12 16.23 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. The product shall have a 2 year warranty from acceptance in accordance with the front end contract documents. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A. General: 1. Unless otherwise specified, gate valves greater than 24 inches in size shall be in strict accordance with AWWA C500. Gate valves shall be ductile iron body, double disc, parallel seat internal wedging type with non-rising stem. Unless otherwise specified, gate valves 3 through 24 inches in size shall be in accordance with AWWA C509, Resilient Wedge. Valves shall be suitable for a working pressure of 250 psig. 2. Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze, non-rising stem with wedge disc and screwed ends for 300-psi W.O.G. working pressure. Bronze gate valves shall be Crane No. 437, Mueller No. H 10914, or approved equal. 3. Gate valves 30 inches and larger shall be equipped with non-rising stem bypass valve and with spur-gears in enclosed oil or grease lubricated gear cases. Gear boxes shall be factory lubricated. Flanges shall conform to ANSI, Class 125 or 250. B. Gate: Gate for double disc valves shall be ductile iron with bronze mounted wedges and seats. Gate for resilient seated valves shall be ductile iron encapsulated with rubber-seat compound, EPDM bonded to the valve gate. C. Operators: Operators shall turn counterclockwise to open the valve. Exposed valves shall have handwheel operators unless otherwise designated. A directional arrow and the word “open” shall be cast on the handwheel. Valves for buried service shall have a 2-inch square nut operator and shall be installed with stainless steel extension stems where required to extend operating nut if deeper than 4 feet to within 12-inches of finished grade. Provide a cast iron valve box to enclose the operating stem. Valve box shall be three-piece extension type equal to Mueller No. 10380 or Clow F2450. Gearing shall be provided as required to limit the manual effort on the handwheel operator to 40 lbs at the maximum operating pressure (250 psig). D. Stem and Seal: The non-rising stem shall be bronze with inside screw. Shaft seal shall employ O-rings (EPDM) or V-type packing. E. Body and Hardware: Valve body and bonnet shall be ASTM A-536 ductile iron with Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and hardware. F. Flange or Mechanical Joint Ends: Where designated for aboveground service, valve shall have flanged joints with bolt and drilling pattern matching mating pipe flange; Valves for buried applications shall have mechanical joint with restraining glands in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C111. G. Coating: Gate valve shall have ANSI/AWWA C550 compliant fusion bonded epoxy (FBE) coatings. H. Service: Gate valves shall be ANSI/NSF 61 approved and listed as suitable for potable water service. Attachment 3Item 12 Gate Valves 33 12 16.23 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Carefully handle and lower buried valves into position to prevent damage to any part of the valves. Place the valve in the proper position with stem truly vertical and securely hold until connections have been made. Furnish bolts, nuts, and gaskets. The Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting the valve boxes to the proper length to conform with the ground surface. 3.02 BLOCKING UNDER GATE VALVE A. Gate valves 18 inches and larger which are buried shall rest on a concrete pad. Pad shall extend for the full width of the trench and from back of hub to back of hub (or flange). Care shall be taken to not interfere with the jointing. Concrete shall be minimum 2000-psi compressive strength. B. Buried gate valves upto 12-inch size shall be installed vertical, while 14-inch and larger gate valve shall be installed horizontal with the appropriate gearing. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of the equipment, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit shall be conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The unit shall be checked for general operation and leakage. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Gate Valves 33 12 16.23 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Attachment 3Item 12 Butterfly Valves 33 12 16.26 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 12 16.26 BUTTERFLY VALVES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install butterfly valves. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. DeZurik. 2. M&H. 3. CMB/K-Flo. 4. Pratt. B. Experience Requirements: The Manufacturer shall have had successful experience in manufacturing tight-closing, rubber-seated butterfly valves for this type service in the sizes indicated. The Manufacturer shall have at least 10 years’ experience in the manufacture of valves. C. Manufacturer’s Representative for Startup and Testing: The Valve Vendor or Manufacturer shall provide the services of a competent manufacturer’s representative for an indefinite period of time as required to insure proper adjustment, installation, and operation of the valve. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings (needed if electric actuators are used). 2. Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Warranty 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Fittings 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings Attachment 3Item 12 Butterfly Valves 33 12 16.26 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B ASTM A276 Standard Specifications for Stainless Steel Bars ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM B148 Standard Specifications for Aluminum Bronze Coatings 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards: AWWA C504 Standard for Rubber-seated Butterfly Valves AWWA C550 Standard for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 1.05 GUARANTEES A. The product shall have a 2 year warranty from acceptance in accordance with the front end contract documents. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. General: Butterfly valves supplied under this Contract shall be of the tight-closing, rubber seated type with rubber seats that are securely attached to the valve disc or body. Valves shall be bubble tight at rated pressures with flow in either direction and shall be satisfactory for applications involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity. Butterfly valves shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWWA C504 and AWWA C550. All valves for potable water service shall comply with NSF61 standards. B. Valve Bodies and Joints: Valve bodies shall be constructed of ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536, Grade 65/45/12. Valve class shall be suitable for the pressure class of the adjacent pipe in which it is installed, minimum 250 psig rated working pressure. Joints for aboveground valves shall be flanged joints with ANSI Class 125 lb. bolt drilling pattern with stainless steel hardware; joints for below ground valves shall be mechanical joint with restraining lugs and cor-ten cor-blue or stainless steel hardware. C. Valve Discs: Valve discs shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65/45/12. D. Valve Shafts: Valve shafts shall be turned, ground and polished, constructed of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276. Valve shafts may consist of a one-piece unit extending completely through the valve disc, or may be of the “stub shaft” type, which comprises two separate shafts inserted into the valve disc hubs. If of the “stub shaft” construction, each stub shaft shall be inserted into the valve disc hubs for a distance of at least 1-1/2 shaft diameters. The shaft shall be tightly connected to the disc using tapered or wedged keying devices. E. Valve Seats: Valves shall have EPDM or other synthetic rubber resilient seats to provide tight shut off at the pressure specified. The mating seat surface shall be ASTM A276, 18-8 stainless steel or a 95 percent pure nickel overlay. All valves shall have replaceable, adjustable seats. Valves 30 inches and larger shall have in-line replaceable seats. F. Valve Bearings: Valve shall be fitted with sleeve type bearings. Bearings shall be of corrosion-resistant and “self-lubricated” materials that will not deteriorate natural or synthetic rubber. Attachment 3Item 12 Butterfly Valves 33 12 16.26 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B G. Valve Shaft Seals: Where shafts project through the valve bodies for operator connection, a split-V or O-ring type shaft seal shall be provided. H. All components, including seats, seals and gaskets, for use with the system shall be suitable for 300 F service. 2.02 VALVE OPERATORS: A. General: The valve operator and gear box shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C504 and AWWA C540, and shall be arranged for horizontal or vertical valve shaft installation. B. Manual Operators: 1. Manual operators shall have all gearing totally enclosed and shall be pre-lubricated or grease packed. Operators shall be of the worm gear or travelling nut and link type with field adjustable stops to prevent over travel in the open or closed positions. The direction of the manual rotation shall be clockwise to close. 2. Operators for exposed valves shall be provided with a valve position indicator and a handwheel or chain and sprocket device. Provide chain and sprocket for valves greater than 6 feet above walking surface. 3. Operators for buried valves shall have an extended stem with a 2-inch square operating nut within 12 inches of the finished grade. Provide a cast iron valve box to enclose the operating stem. Valve operator gear box shall include a ground level position indicator. Valve box shall be three-piece extension type equal to Mueller No. 10380 or Clow F2450. For valves which are installed with the shaft vertical, provide a level gear for vertical operation of the operating nut. Stem extensions in valve box shall be stainless steel. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR AIR SERVICE A. Furnish lugged style butterfly valves for air service. Valves 10 inches and smaller shall have a ten position locking lever operator. Valves 12 inches and larger shall have a gear type hand-wheel operator. The valve shall be resilient seated, bubble-tight shut off. The valve shall be shipped loose for field installation. Valve seats and gaskets shall be suitable for operation in temperatures up to 300 F. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions and as shown on the Drawings and Details. Valve shaft shall be truly vertical or horizontal as indicated. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of the butterfly valves an acceptance test shall be conducted to verify the satisfactory operation of the valves. The valves must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. Attachment 3Item 12 Butterfly Valves 33 12 16.26 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants 33 12 19 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 12 19 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FIRE HYRANTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install fire hydrant and appurtenances, operators, bolts, nuts and gaskets. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Kennedy 2. American Flow Control/ Waterous 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Hydrant cut sheets and Certification of Compliance with AWWA C502 as record data. 1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” 1.05 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000-psi Tensile Strength ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM D2000 Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards: AWWA C111 Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints AWWA C502 Standard for Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants Attachment 3Item 12 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants 33 12 19 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE HYDRANTS A. General: Fire hydrants to be primarily installed as shown on the plans or furnished for general installation shall be three-way standard thread, dry-barrel, traffic model conforming to AWWA Standard for Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants, AWWA Standard C502. B. Supplementary Details: 1. Type of Shutoff: Compression type with the flow. Valve action shall provide positive shutoff at minimum closing torque. Wedge action closing gates shall not be permitted. Scissor type main valves shall not be permitted unless approved by the Owner’s Representative. 2. Inlet Connection: Mechanical joint unless otherwise specified. Inlet connection shall be for a 6-inch cast iron pipe with minimum net valve opening of 5-1/4 inches unless otherwise specified. 3. Delivery Classification: All main streamer nozzles shall have a nominal inside diameter of four inches with a Storz capped. 4. Bury Length: Ground to bottom of connection pipe shall be 4 feet, or as specified by the Owner’s Representative. 5. Harnessing Lugs: Furnished with the hydrants. 6. Nozzle Cap Gasket: Furnished on all nozzle caps; long life; black rubber; conforming to Rubber Products in Automotive Applications ASTM D2000 or equal. 7. Drain Valve and Outlet: Hydrants shall be equipped with two drain holes and provided with an automatic and positively operating, non-corroding drain or dip valve so as to drain the hydrant completely when the main valve is shut. 8. Direction to Open: Counterclockwise. The number of turns to open shall be in accordance with AWWA C502, Section 2.9.3. 9. Color Of Finish Paint Above Ground Line: After placement, the outside of the hydrant above the finished ground line shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with two coats of paint in accordance with Client Standards. 10. Operating and Cap Nuts per Client’s Standard. C. Breakable Type Hydrants: Breakable Or Sleeve Type Couplings: The barrel of the hydrant between the elbow and the top cap shall be made in two parts connected by a swivel flange or breakable flange which shall permit facing of the nozzles in any desired direction in increments of 45 degrees or less. The complete hydrant shall be of such design that when the hydrant barrel is broken through traffic collision or otherwise, it may be replaced without disturbing the bottom of the hydrant. 1. The materials used for gaskets between the upper and lower barrels and the base and nozzle section shall be compounded to conform to ASTM D2000. 2. Provision shall be made in the design of the stem to disconnect the stem from the hydrant parts above the standpipe break point in the event of traffic accidents. If breakable or sleeve type couplings are used, they shall have sufficient torsional strength Attachment 3Item 12 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants 33 12 19 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B so that a torsional failure of the stem shall occur at some point other than at the coupling. Design of the coupling shall be such that when the coupling is broken, no parts shall come loose and fall into the hydrant barrel, and the break shall not occur through the pins or bolts holding the coupling to the stem. D. Main Valve Seats: Designed so that incorrect positioning is impossible. E. Gaskets - Ground Line: The valve body flange gaskets shall be fabricated from “Accopac” CS- 301 manufactured by Armstrong Cork Company or an equal approved by Owner’s Representative prior to substitution. They shall be full face or ring type with the lower flange recessed to hold the gasket in place. F. Nozzle Cap Chains: In accordance with AWWA C502, Section 4.6.3.2. G. Flanges: All flanges other than break flanges shall be equipped with mechanical joints. Gland bolts shall be high-strength, low-alloy, corrosion-resistant steel conforming to ASTM A325, Type 3 or Cor-ten – Cor-blue. H. Operating Stems: The spindle of the operating stem and the stem nuts for hydrants having the operating threads located in the barrel or waterway shall be manganese bronze, Everdur or other high quality non-corrodible metal. Barrel bolts and nuts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A307, 60,000-psi tensile strength. I. All working parts in the waterway, except for sliding stem support mechanisms, shall be bronze-to-bronze or bronze-to-iron. J. O-Ring: Hydrant stem packing boxes, where needed, shall be provided with O-ring grooves and sealed with O-rings. O-rings shall be furnished in lieu of stem packing. They shall be of the double O-ring type designed so that the rubber rings shall move against a bronze, stainless steel or other non-corrodible metal surface. O-ring shall be in accordance with ASTM D2000. K. Extensions: Fire hydrants shall be designed to accept 6-, 12-, or 18-inch extensions. L. Hydrant Heads: Nozzle may be faced in any desired direction. M. Upperstem Thread Lubrication: Upperstem thread lubrication may be accomplished with oil or grease. When oil is used, it shall be in conjunction with a functional oil reservoir and an oil filler port. The hydrant shall be factory filled with a USP white mineral oil such as Lubriplate No. 3-V (SAE 20), Mobile Whiterex 425 or equal. Means for field check of oil lubrication level shall be provided. When grease is used, the hydrant shall be factory lubricated with food grade grease such as Lubriplate No. 630-AA (medium soft) or equal. Means for field lubrication without disassembly shall be provided. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hydrants at the locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Set hydrants truly vertical and securely brace with concrete until self- standing. Surround hydrants with a minimum of 7 cubic feet of washed gravel or stone. B. Install fire hydrants using special mechanical joint anchoring fittings. Install a flanged by MJ gate valve on the main line tee. Attachment 3Item 12 Water Utility Distribution Fire Hydrants 33 12 19 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Wrap and protect the gate valve, including bolts at joints, and the bottom of the fire hydrant with 8-mil polyvinyl to prevent direct contact with concrete blocking. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of the equipment, conduct an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Owner’s Representative. Check the unit for general operation and leakage. The unit shall perform in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative before final acceptance is made by the Owner. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Paint the fire hydrants to conform to the Owner’s color coding. Refer to Drawings and Details for additional information on the required finish. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 16 19.13 COMPOSITE ELEVATED WATER UTILITY STORAGE TANK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work performed under this Contract shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to design, construct, inspect and test a 2,500,000 gallon AWWA D107 composite elevated tank, foundation, internal and external tank piping, valves, architectural, and all appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The design shall be the product of one manufacturer. The composite elevated tank shall consist of a welded steel tank and concrete support structure. B. The Work shall also include, but shall not be limited to, all labor, materials and equipment necessary to design, construct, clean, paint and disinfect the water storage tank. C. Electrical power at the Site shall be in accordance with Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Work” and as indicated in Division 26. The Tank Manufacturer will be responsible for coordination and installation of water, sewer, communications, and electrical. D. A cathodic protection system is not included as part of the Project. E. System Description: 1. Elevated Tank: The Composite elevated tank shall consist of the following: foundation, reinforced concrete support structure, all internal and external piping ending at the flexible coupling located outside the pedestal wall, tank accessories, and a welded steel water tank. The support structure shall extend vertically from the foundation as a single circular concrete wall. A domed concrete slab shall be provided as structural support for the steel tank within the perimeter of the wall. A reinforced concrete ring beam shall be provided to connect the steel tank, concrete dome and concrete support wall. Dimensions shown may be adjusted to suit Tank Manufacturer’s standard tank shape up to the minimum dimensions shown on the Drawings and in the Specifications. 2. The tank, appurtenances, and all material exposed on the interior of the tank or in contact with stored potable water shall be resistant to degradation from the use of chlorine and chloramines. 3. All materials in contact with potable water shall comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act, NSF 61 and other federal, state, local, and provincial requirements. 4. Hydraulic Design Criteria: Base Bid Minimum Capacity Within Operating Range 2,500,000 Gallons Maximum Operating (Head) Range 40 Feet Elevations Overflow/Top Capacity Elevation 805.00 Feet AMSL Lower Capacity Elevation 765.00 Feet AMSL Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Pedestal Floor Elevation 598.00 Feet AMSL Inlet/Outlet Pipe Diameter 24 Inches Overflow Pipe Diameter 24 Inches Maximum Fill Rate 6,950 Gallons Per Minute Maximum Drain Rate (under normal operating conditions, tank manufacturer shall design based on broken pipe analysis as specified) 6,950 Gallons Per Minute 5. General Design: a.Design Loads: The steel tank, concrete support structure and foundation shall be designed to safely withstand loads acting separately or in load combinations as specified by the most current editions of AWWA D107, ACI 371R, and ASCE/SEI 7 for category IV structures. b. Foundation Design: 1). The concrete foundations shall be designed by the Tank Manufacturer and compatible with their proposed tank design. Foundations shall be constructed by the Tank Manufacturer or a Subcontractor directly supervised by the Tank Manufacturer in accordance with the drawings supplied. Foundations shall be of adequate size to properly distribute the bearing loads from the tank and to resist uplift due to wind forces. 2). The Tank Manufacturer shall design the foundations accounting for soils and subsurface conditions. The successful Tank Manufacturer shall satisfy himself as to the adequacy of the geotechnical report that is included with these Contract Documents, and its recommendations. The successful Tank Manufacturer shall acquire any additional soils and foundation data necessary for the final design at no additional cost to the Owner. 6. Architectural Improvements within the Pedestal: The interior layout of piping, electrical and other appurtenances have been provided within the drawings. The tank manufacturer is responsible for verifying and making any modifications required to provide a complete project as specified to account for varying pedestal diameters, layout of interior, etc. to facilitate the construction of the tank. Any revisions to the interior layout shall be approved by the Engineer and shall meet all applicable codes at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. The Work described in this Section shall be performed by an Elevated Tank Manufacturer that has a minimum of 10 years’ experience in composite tank design and construction. The Manufacturer shall have designed, constructed and commissioned a minimum of five composite elevated tanks of equal or greater capacity, all in Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B satisfactory operation for at least 5 years. These tanks shall be of the same design as described above. 2. Acceptable manufacturers are: CB&I Constructors, Inc., Caldwell Tanks, Inc., or Landmark Tank Structures. Other manufacturers may submit proposals only if they pre- qualify and show conformance with the specification criteria. Request for qualification with supporting documentation must be received in writing 14 days prior to bid date. Documentation shall include an experience list detailing the projects completed directly by the manufacturer that comply with this Section. Information to be submitted shall also include details of construction, concrete forming process and equipment including concrete support wall placement height, steel tank erection process, rustication pattern and quality control procedures. The Owner and/or Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability of the Tank Manufacturer. 3. Elevated tank design, concrete support structure construction and steel tank construction shall not be subcontracted. These items shall be performed by the Tank Manufacturer. 4. The Tank Manufacturer shall directly employ a full time Texas Licensed Professional Engineer with a minimum 5 years’ cumulative experience in the design and construction of composite elevated tanks as described in this Section. The engineer shall be in responsible engineering charge of the Work. 5. The tank manufacturer shall have in its employ for this Project a team consisting of a tank superintendent, project manager and foreman(s) each of whom shall have constructed a minimum of five (5) AWWA D107 tanks having a capacity of 1.0 MG or greater and have a minimum of 12 years’ experience in the construction of composite elevated tanks. 6. All welders employed on the Project shall be Tank Manufacturer’s employees and AWS D1.1 certified if welding structural steel and AWS D1.6 certified if welding stainless steel or ASME Section IX Certified as required by AWWA D107. Welders that have not had proof of certification submitted in accordance with the Specifications shall not be employed on the Project until such certification is submitted. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. The elevated tank shall be designed and constructed in compliance with applicable federal, state and local regulations. 2. Personnel safety equipment shall be provided in accordance with OSHA requirements and manufacturer’s documentation. C. Singular Responsibility: It is acknowledged that the successful design and construction of composite elevated storage tanks requires specialized and proprietary knowledge and skills. It is further recognized that successful performance of the tank requires that the earthwork preparation, foundation for the tank and the tank itself be considered an integrated system. Therefore, it is the express intent of this Section to create a singular responsibility for the design and construction of this integrated system required for composite elevated storage tanks. The design and construction of all aspects, including but not limited to, excavation, tank subgrade, fill placement beneath tank, tank foundation, foundation drainage systems, concrete support structure, inlet and outlet pipes, all piping and equipment inside the tank, welded steel tank, and pedestal and welded steel tank finishes must be performed by the Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Tank Manufacturer or his Subcontractor under the direct supervision of the Tank Manufacturer. 1.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 09 95 00 “Coatings for Water Storage Tanks” for coordination of Owner’s Representative Field Quality Assurance Coordination during coating operations. B. Owner’s Representative Field Quality Assurance Coordination for Concrete Placement 1. Observations shall be conducted by the Owner’s Representative. Final observations shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or their Representative and the Contractor’s superintendent. All materials and equipment used in the accomplishment of testing are subject to observation at any time by the Owner’s Representative. Periodic observation times will be agreed upon by the Owner’s Representative and Contractor, and approved by the Owner. 2. Contractor shall provide a schedule for anticipated: a. Observation of concrete reinforcement before all concrete pours. b. Observation of concrete pouring operations. c. Observation and recommendations for acceptance of each lift of the concrete pedestal. 3. Contractor will notify the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days prior to any required inspections and confirmed twenty-four (24) hours prior to inspection. Prior to scheduling an inspection, Contractor is responsible for reviewing work and verifying it is ready for inspection. Once scheduled, if the Owner’s Representative finds the project not ready for inspection any additional trips for re-inspection or inspection for retesting of failed tests shall be borne by the Contractor and deducted from the Contract Value by Change Order. Costs for additional inspection shall be billed at the rates indicated in the table below. Position Hourly Rate Principal in Charge 285 Project Manager 170 Project Engineer 170 Construction Manager 195 Resident Engineer 170 Resident Project Representative 130 Senior Resident Representative 170 Design Engineer 145 Engineering Technician 120 Clerk 115 Expenses will be billed at the actual cost multiplied by 1.15 Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Owner’s Representative Field Quality Assurance Coordination for Welding Operations 1.Observations shall be conducted by the Owner’s Representative and a third-party inspection company retained by the Engineer. Final observations shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or their Representative and the Contractor’s superintendent. All materials and equipment used in the accomplishment of testing are subject to observation at any time by the Owner’s Representative. Periodic observation times will be agreed upon by the Owner’s Representative and Contractor, and approved by the Owner. 2. Contractor shall provide a schedule for anticipated welding operations and shall notify the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days prior to any required inspections and confirmed twenty-four (24) hours prior to inspection. Prior to scheduling an inspection, Contractor is responsible for reviewing work and verifying it is ready for inspection. Once scheduled, if the Owner’s Representative finds the project not ready for inspection any additional trips for re-inspection or inspection for retesting of failed tests shall be borne by the Contractor and deducted from the Contract Value by Change Order. 3. Costs for additional inspection shall be billed at the following rates: Position Per Day Welding Inspector $104/hr Coating Inspector $104/hr Trip Charge $58/day Cost includes all travel expenses. Construction Contract Administration will be billed for actual effort per the rates established in the Table in Paragraph 1.03.B.3. 4. The Contractor shall not move or remove scaffolding, ladders or other fixtures necessary to provide proper observation until such work has been observed and approved by the Owner’s Representative. 5. Any work found to be deficient, damaged, or otherwise unacceptable shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. 6. Observation and/or acceptance of Contractor’s work by Owner’s Representative(s) in no way releases Contractor from any of the terms and conditions of the Contract Agreement. 7. Contractor will provide the inspection and testing of the tank and welds. The number and location of spot radiographs shall be in accordance with AWWA D-107 and must include the review of spot radiographs. The Owner’s Representative may provide additional testing and will review tests provided by the Contractor. All sets of radiographs will be taken at locations selected by the Owner’s Representative and developed while the Owner’s Representative is present. All developed film will then be the property of the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. The following Shop Drawings are required to be submitted prior to the start of tank construction: 1. Construction Drawings: a. Contractor may provide the submittal for the tank’s foundation separate from the rest of the construction drawings. All other drawings shall be all inclusive in one submittal. Partial submittals for tank design and components will not be accepted and will be returned without review. b. Drawings shall show all features of the Work, including the size and position of all structural components, interior layout of all floors, the required strength or grade of all materials, and construction tolerances. c. Foundation details shall also include excavation, soil protection and backfill. d. Reinforced concrete details shall include construction joints, openings and inserts. Reinforcement shall be clearly indicated on the structural drawings and identified by mark numbers that are used on the fabrication schedule. Location, spacing and splice dimensions shall be shown. Placement and fabrication details shall conform to ACI 318. e. Drawings of steel components shall show all details of welded joints and other connections. Standard weld symbols as listed in AWS A2.4 shall be used, unless joint details are shown. f. Provide a table showing capacity of the tank in gallons at all levels in 1-foot increments. g. Final construction drawings shall be sealed and signed by a Texas licensed professional engineer and submitted as Record Data prior to construction. C. The following Record Data are required to be submitted prior to the start of tank construction: 1. Signed and Sealed construction drawings, including all supporting details. 2. Construction Process: a. Provide design, detail drawings and procedures for the support structure, forming system. Details shall include location of form and construction joints, rustications and ties. Procedures shall include form removal criteria and minimum elapsed time for adjacent concrete placement. b. Provide shop and field weld procedures for all structural joints on the steel tank. c. Repair procedures that will be followed for correcting various types of surface defects during pedestal wall construction, i.e. discolorations, honey combing, etc. 3. Design Data: a. Provide a summary of the design and design calculations for the foundation, support structure, overflow weir, vent, tank and other components sealed and signed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. The codes and standards, methods of analysis, design coefficients, and resultant gravity, snow, wind, and seismic loads shall be documented. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. Product Data: a. Provide a separate concrete mix design for each specified concrete compressive strength indicated on the Tank Manufacturer’s drawings sealed and signed by a Texas licensed professional engineer as record drawings. b. Provide technical data and color Samples of all coating products. c. Provide manufacturer’s descriptive information for appurtenant equipment and accessories that are not detailed on the Drawings. d. Documentation must include certification of test results and other information required by ASTM A6 or ASTM A20 as applicable. 5. Reports/Certification: a. Provide documentation of all tests, inspections and certifications required by this Section. b. Provide certification that testing and inspection requirements of this Section have been performed and the results comply with the requirements of the Specifications. c. Foundation excavation report as inspected by a representative of the Tank Manufacturer’s geotechnical engineer prior to foundation construction. d. Provide report to document field measurements, and certify compliance or non- compliance with the tolerance requirements in Section 5.4.4.1 of AWWA D-107. e. Inspection of concrete reinforcement and embedment. f. Report on concrete sampling and testing during the project. g. Conformance to ASTM standards of concrete testing agency. h. Certification of NDT personnel. i. Certification of AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI). j. Welding Report(s) 1). Welding procedure specification for all welds on the tank. 2). Provide proof of AWS D1.1, AWS D1.6 and/or ASME Section IX certifications of all welders. Documentation shall include a current color photograph of the welder and welder performance qualifications. 3). Summary of visual and inspection of radiographs and other inspections, including location of tests on developed shell plate diagrams. 4). Identification of defective welds and a statement of action/procedure for repair. 5). Record of welders employed at each joint. k. Leak testing report. l. Settlement monitoring report. D. Certified Test Reports: Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Certified Test Reports shall be submitted to the Owner within seven (7) days of the test being performed. Failure to submit test reports may result in non-payment for those pay items. 2. Subgrade compaction report. 3. Concrete test reports during construction. 4. Tests on hardened concrete. 5. Welding test reports. 6. Settlement monitoring report. 7. Vacuum box testing report. E. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. Provide an O&M Manual with all operating instructions and maintenance procedures for the composite elevated tank, including but not limited to, complete drawings of the composite elevated tank, manuals and operating instructions for equipment, minimum maintenance and inspection instructions, repainting requirements, and control valve maintenance procedures. F. Paint and Artwork Mock-Up: 1. Provide Owner with a mock-up of the artwork design for approval prior to commencing paint work. Mock-up shall be to scale, color and indicate size of Logo and Lettering. Paint Samples of proposed colors shall also be submitted for Owner approval. 1.05 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following Specifications, Codes and Standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 303 Guide to Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete Practice ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete ACI 350 Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures ACI 371R Guide for the Analysis, Design, and Construction of Concrete Pedestal Water Towers AISC S335 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ASCE/SEI 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ASTM A123 Zinc Coatings on Iron and Steel Products Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 9 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B ASTM A240 Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels ASTM A285 Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel ASTM A774 Welded Stainless Steel Fittings ASTM A778 Welded Stainless Steel Tubular Products AWS A 2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe 6” and Larger AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe AWWA C220 Stainless Steel Pipe 4” and Larger AWWA C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities AWWA D102 Coating Steel Water Storage Tanks AWWA D107 Composite Elevated Tanks for Water Storage FAA 70/7460-1H Obstruction Marking and Lighting IBC [2015]International Building Code [2015] NACE RP0178 Standard Recommended Practice: Design, Fabrication, and Surface Finish of Metal Tanks and Vessels to be Lined for Immersion Service NFPA NEC National Electric Code NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems NSF 61 Standard for Drinking Water System Components OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards SSPC VIS-89 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel SSPC PA-1 Paint Application Specification 30 TAC, Chapter 290 Public Drinking Water 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Handling and Shipping: The Tank Manufacturer shall handle materials and fabricated components in a manner that will protect them from damage. Allow painted materials adequate cure time prior to stacking or shipping. B. Storage and Protection: Protect delivered materials and equipment from damage. Store in well-drained areas and provide blocking to minimize contact with the ground. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Permits and Easements: 1. Permits or licenses required for permanent structures, changes in existing facilities or advancement of the construction shall be secured and paid for by the Tank Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 10 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Manufacturer prior to the start of construction. These include building permits, code inspections, etc. 2. Airspace authority permits and site easements have been secured by the Owner prior to construction. Reference Appendix A for a copy of the permit. Contractor will be required to coordinate and permit any temporary structures or cranes exceeding the permitted height with the FAA. B. Access: Tank Manufacturer shall provide access to the Site as indicated on the Drawings. C. Working Conditions: 1. Safety and Health: The Tank Manufacturer shall comply with safe working practices and all health and safety regulations of OSHA, state and local health regulatory agencies and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Provide protective and lifesaving equipment for persons working at the Site. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Notification: The Contractor shall provide notification of the intent to start Work at least 7 days prior to commencing each major phase of the Work. 1.09 GUARANTEES A. Workmanship and Material Guarantee: The Tank Manufacturer shall guarantee the tank structure against defects in workmanship and material for a period of 2 years. If, within 2 years from final completion of the Project, workmanship or material is proven defective, the Tank Manufacturer shall repair such defects at their own expense. B. Design Warranty: The Tank Manufacturer shall warrant its design of the proposed facility to be structurally and functionally applicable to serve the intended use of the projected Work. Such intended use is exemplified by the criteria of design, workmanship, and material expressed by the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings prepared by the Engineer. The Owner’s or Engineer’s review of the Tank Manufacturer’s design, or the Owner’s acceptance and final payment for the Work shall not relieve the Tank Manufacturer of design responsibility. The Owner shall be the direct beneficiary of the warranty. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforced Concrete: 1. All structural concrete materials, foundations, and reinforcement shall comply with ACI 318 and ACI 371R, except as modified in this Section and are the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Driveways, mow strips, sidewalks, flumes, and other miscellaneous concrete items shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.” B. Steel Tank: Steel tank components, including steel plates, sheets, structural shapes and filler metals shall be in accordance with AWWA D107. 2.02 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 11 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Support Wall: Wall thickness shall be a minimum of 8 inches exclusive of any architectural relief provided such that the average compressive stress due to the weight of the structure and stored water is limited to 25 percent of specified compressive strength, but not greater than 1000 psi. A minimum total wall reinforcement of 0.15 percent vertically and 0.20 percent horizontally shall be distributed approximately equally to each face. A minimum of 1.00 percent vertical reinforcement shall be provided in the top 6 feet of the wall extending into the concrete ring beam. B. Tank Floor: The average compressive stress due to the weight of the structure and stored water shall not exceed 15 percent of the specified compressive strength, nor greater than 600 psi. Minimum total reinforcement in orthogonal directions shall be 0.40 percent distributed approximately equally to each face. Additional reinforcement shall be provided for stress caused by edge restraint effects. C. Openings: Openings 8 feet or wider used for vehicle access shall be strengthened against vehicle impact and local buckling by means of an internal buttress located on each side of the opening. The buttress shall consist of a thickened, reinforced concrete wall section that is integrally formed and placed with the support wall. The buttress section shall be not less than 3 feet wide and 6 inches thicker than the nominal wall dimension. 2.03 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE / STEEL TANK INTERFACE A. Interface Region: The geometry of the interface shall provide for positive drainage and not allow either condensation or precipitation to accumulate at the top of the concrete wall or ring beam. B. Ring Beam: The ring beam shall be reinforced concrete with a nominal width and height of at least two times the support wall thickness. Minimum radial reinforcement shall be 0.25 percent. Circumferential reinforcement shall be not less than 1.0 percent. C. Ring beam design shall consider unbalanced forces from the steel tank cone and concrete slab, load conditions varying with water level, eccentricity of loads resulting from design geometry, and allowance for variations due to construction imperfection and tolerance. 2.04 STEEL TANK A. General: The steel tank shall be all welded construction and shall be designed in accordance with applicable sections of AWWA D107. The required capacity and dimensions of the tank are noted on the Drawings and in this Section of the Specifications. B. Roof Support: All structural members supporting the roof of the steel tank shall be flat bar or sealed square tubular sections. I-beams or other sections with horizontal projections may be used if the nominal depth is 10 inches or greater. Support beams shall be seal welded to the underside of the roof plate along the entire length of the beam. C. Cone: For areas of the elevated tank where the water is supported by a steel cone, the Tank Manufacturer shall submit evidence that the design is based on a finite element shell analysis. The analysis shall include the effects of material and geometric non-linearities and residual stresses. The modeled imperfection shall not be less than as specified in AWWA D107. 2.05 ACCESSORIES Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 12 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. General: Accessories shall comply with the minimum requirements of the Specifications, Codes and Standards listed in this Section, current applicable safety regulations, and the operating requirements of the structure. B. Ladders: 1. Ladders shall be in accordance with AWWA D107, ACI 371R, and OSHA standards, except as modified in this Section. 2. Ladders that terminate at platforms or landings shall extend a minimum of 48 inches beyond the platform elevations. 3. Interior Pedestal Ladder – Ladders and landings must be provided from the top interior floor inside the base of the support wall to the upper walkway platform located below the tank floor. Ladder shall be galvanized steel. Include fall prevention system on ladder. 4. Tank Floor Manhole Ladder – Ladder shall be provided from upper platform to the tank floor manhole. Ladder shall be galvanized steel. Provide fall prevention system on ladder if required by OSHA based on height. 5. Tank Access Tube Ladder - Ladder shall be provided from the upper platform, through the access tube interior to the roof. Include fall prevention system on ladder. Ladder brackets located on the access tube exterior shall be reinforced at the access tube shell so that potential ice damage is confined to the ladder and bracket and not the access tube shell. Ladder shall be galvanized steel. 6. Tank Interior Ladder – Ladder shall be provided inside the tank and mounted on the exterior of the access tube. Ladder shall be 316 stainless steel. Include fall prevention system on ladder. C. Fall Prevention System: The complete system shall allow the worker to operate freely in a normal climbing position during ascent or descent. The device is to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions in such a manner to enable the worker to be attached to the device at all times during the climb without having to remove his hands from the ladder to operate the system effectively and to be able to easily pivot onto and off of work platforms or landings while safely attached to the device. 1. The system shall meet the following requirements: a. Approved fall prevention systems: 1) DBI/Sala - Lad-Saf Flexible Cable Ladder Safety System with cable, components, and hardware with guide rails spaced at 20-feet max. 2) FrenchCreek Production – TS Products Rigid Rail Climbing System 3) Pre-Approved Equal b. Provide 2 sleeves or trolleys for fall prevention system: 1) DBI/Sala Model 6116502 sleeve for 3/8-inch cable. 2) French Creek climbing trolley for Rigid Rail system. c. Provide two full body safety harnesses Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 13 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1) Harnesses shall meet applicable fall-arrest system standards, including OSHA, and ANSI, including ANSI Z359. 2) Harnesses shall be full body type and adjustable. 3) Harnesses shall include the following: a). Back D-ring. b). Center chest D-Ring c). Front center D-ring on waist belt for rail and vertical climbing systems. 4) Size shall be selected by the Owner. 5) Approved Manufacturers a). FrenchCreek Production b). Approved equal. d. Provide two lanyards 1) Lanyards shall meet applicable OSHA and ANSI standards, including ANSI Z359. 2) Lanyards shall be shock absorbing type with impact indicator. 3) Lanyard shall contract to 4’-6” and expand to 6-feet. 4) Lanyard shall be double leg with 100% flat steel rebar hook on leg end. 5) Approved Manufacturers a). DBI/Sala b). FrenchCreek Production c). Capital Safety d). Approved Equal e. Provide One weatherproof Saf-T-Climb Storage Box by North Safety or Approved Equal, to be located and installed as directed by Owner. 2. Materials: The cable/rail, hardware and all system components shall be of Type 316 stainless steel on the interior of the tank. All other locations may be Type 304 stainless steel. 3. All cables, components, brackets, etc. shall be on-site to complete installation. 4. The fall prevention system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions by a competent person. 5. Fall prevention system shall not be installed until all painting and/or construction has been completed on the tank. 6. Provide “CAUTION – Safety Equipment Required when Climbing Ladder” or similar signage near ladders requiring cable safety climb systems. Sign shall be PVC with minimum dimensions of 14”W x 10”H mounted to pedestal wall. Provide vinyl sticker on tank interior access hatch. D. Platforms: Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 14 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Intermediate Platforms: a. Provide intermediate inline platforms on the support wall ladder at maximum intervals shown on the Drawings. Platforms shall be a minimum 3 feet by 5 feet and provided with handrails, mid-rails and toe plates as required by OSHA standards. Grating shall be used for the walking surfaces. All components shall be galvanized steel. 2. Upper Platform: a. A 4-foot wide upper walkway platform shall be located at the top of the support wall to provide access from the support wall ladder to the roof access ladder located on the interior of the access tube. Platforms shall be provided with handrails, mid- rails and toe plates in accordance with OSHA requirements. Grating shall be used for the walking surface. All components shall be galvanized steel. Platforms shall be arranged for straight run ladder and operable without removing fall prevention equipment. Platform shall be designed to provide access the both pedestal vents for access to logo lighting system as indicated on the plans. Exact layout and location of the upper platform and location of the pedestal vents shall be approved by the Engineer. b. At the upper platform, provide one Rescue/Material handling davit arm and hoist with winch at pedestal ladder that will allow materials to be hoisted from the bottom of the ladder to the top of the top platform. Mast, davit arm and hoist must be portable. Provide permanent sleeve for mounting at top platform and two sleeves welded on top of tank that would allow portable hoist to be used over access tube and tank hatches. Approved Manufacturers: Miller Durahoist or Approved Equal. 3. Openings in platforms must include self-closing safety gates with adjustable tension spring. Gates are to be galvanized steel with safety decals. Gate size must be at least 30-inches wide. Approved Manufacturers: FabEnCo, Kee or Approved Equal. E. Support Wall Doors: 1. Personnel Door: a. Door frames shall be 14-gauge with concealed reinforcement at hardware locations. Expansion type anchors for existing openings shall be installed near the top, bottom and intermediate point of each jamb to rigidly secure the frame. Doors shall be 1- 3/4-inch thick insulated, reinforced, full, flush type with 16-gauge face sheets and concealed reinforcement at hardware locations. All edges shall be finished flush with watertight seams. Frame shall be galvanized. Shop applied finish for the door shall be baked on rust inhibitive primer. Field finish shall be compatible with the tank exterior and approved by Owner. Standard hardware shall be stainless steel and include three 4-1/2-inch-by-4-1/2-inch hinges, industrial duty closer and lockset keyed to the Owner’s requirements. b. Size, quantity and location of personnel door(s) shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2. Overhead Vehicle Door: a. Door installation shall be on the interior face of the support wall. The door frame shall be a steel plate fabrication detailed, fastened and reinforced to accept the Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 15 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B door. Frame shall be galvanized. Shop applied finish for the door shall be baked on rust inhibitive primer. Field finish shall be compatible with the tank exterior and approved by Owner. Operation shall be manual with a chain hoist. The curtain shall be formed of 22-gauge steel interlocking slats with end locks and wind locks designed for a wind loading of 20 psf. Torsion springs shall be mounted on a solid torsion rod, which is attached to an exterior mounted spring tension adjustment wheel. A 24-gauge steel hood shall be provided with a weather seal to protect the assembly. Steel brackets shall be installed to the interior face of the wall with expansion anchors, which enclose and support the counterbalance assembly with sealed bearings. Steel curtain guides are mounted to the brackets. The curtain, bottom bar, brackets, guides, hood, pipe and chain shall be galvanized. Provide with locking device. b. Size, quantity and location of vehicle door(s) shall be as shown on the Drawings. F. Tank Openings: 1. Floor: a. Provide a 36-inch diameter manhole through the tank floor. The manhole assembly shall include a 316 stainless steel hand wheel operator and threaded components. b. The manhole shall be operable from a ladder located on the upper platform and shall be designed to withstand the pressure of the tank contents without leakage. Upper platform shall provide for required clearances and landing space for manhole ladder per OSHA. Provide deflector plate at hatch ladder as required my OSHA. 2. Roof: a. Provide two access hatches on the roof of the tank. One hatch shall allow egress from the access tube to the roof. A second hatch, located adjacent to the first, shall allow access to the interior of the tank via the ladder mounted on the exterior of the access tube. Hatches shall be aluminum and lockable and shall have a clear opening of not less than 42” x 42”. b. Provide a 6-inch diameter aluminum vent with #16 stainless steel insect screen on the access tube hatch cover. c. Hatches shall be single leaf and constructed of stainless steel with 316 stainless steel hardware. Hatch shall be rated for a minimum live load of 150 psf. d. The access door shall be equipped with a 316 stainless steel with fixed exterior and interior handles and interior and exterior padlock staples. The door shall have stainless steel gas shocks to assist in opening the door and reducing the force during closing. A 316 stainless steel hold open arm with push/pull handle shall automatically keep the cover in its upright, open position. e. Hatch shall be installed on a minimum 4” concrete curb. Hatch lid shall have a minimum 2-inch overhang as required by TCEQ Chapter 290. Provide a neoprene gasket between steel curb and hatch. f. An EPDM rubber gasket shall be used to make a positive seal when the hatch is closed. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 16 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B g. Aluminum shall have a clear anodic finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. h. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. i. Manufacturer shall guarantee hatch against defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum of 10 years. j. Provide vinyl sticker indicating confined space warning on tank interior access hatch. k. Approved manufacturers: 1). Babcock-Davis. 2). Bilco Company. 3). Milcor, Inc. 4). U.S.F. Fabrication 5). Approved Equal G. Access Tube: 1. Provide a minimum 60-inch diameter centrally located access drywell through the steel tank to provide access to the tank roof from the upper walkway platform and to house future telecommunication cabling. 2. The access tube shall incorporate a 2-inch-by-2-inch channel to collect condensation that may form on the interior surface. A flexible 3/4-inch PVC hose complete with backflow preventer shall drain the channel to the overflow pipe. 3. Provide painted steel brackets and clamp system at maximum 10-foot vertical intervals for antenna, conduits and cable mounting within access tube. Brackets shall be drilled or fabricated to be compatible with standard conduit clamp systems. Installation and spacing shall be in accordance with OSHA ladder clearance and electrical code requirements. Reinforce access tube as required at the connections to support the weight of proposed and future conduits. H. Roof Railing: 1. Provide a 42-inch high roof guardrail with hand rails, mid rails, and toe plates in accordance with OSHA requirements and a minimum diameter of 24 feet or as required to enclose all roof accessories within the railing, except interior rigging access point. 2. Roof railing shall be a structurally designed appurtenance designed for mounting antennas and other loads as specified. Provide design calculations, design assumptions and design for rail with tank shop drawings. 3. Tank engineer shall assume four (4) future antennas to be mounted anywhere on the guardrail, weighing at least 32 lbs. with approximate dimensions of 36”x36”x12” and mounted just above the handrail height. I. Rigging Access: 1. Provide two – 30-inch x 30-inch square hatches near the top of the support wall. These openings shall be accessible from a platform and shall provide access to the exterior- rigging rail located at the tank/support wall intersection. The access opening shall be Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 17 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B provided with a hinged aluminum louvered vent with #16 stainless steel insect screen. Location of proposed openings shall be coordinated with logo lighting system junction boxes, 2 places. 2. One - 30-inch x 30-inch square opening shall be provided on the tank roof to provide access to the tank interior rigging rail. The opening shall have a minimum 4-inch curb. Provide a bolted steel cover with a 2-inch down turned edge and gasketed interface. Hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. J. Painters Rails: 1. Tank Interior Painter’s Rails: Provide permanently installed rails suitable for rolling trolleys at the interior of the tank near the tank wall/roof and access tube/roof connections. Rails shall be galvanized steel and painted in accordance with the interior coating system. 2. Pedestal Interior Painter’s Rail: Provide a painter’s rail at the interior top of the pedestal. Rail shall be accessible from the walkway via the upper platform. Rail shall be galvanized steel. 3. Pedestal Exterior Painter’s Rail: Provide an exterior painter’s rail at the base of the tank adjacent to the support structure and shall be accessible from the walkway via the upper platform and support wall rigging access. Rail shall be coated in accordance with the exterior coating system. K. Piping: 1. Inlet/Outlet Pipe: a. Provide a 24-inch inlet/outlet pipe that extends from the base of the support structure and connects to the tank as shown on the Drawings. The bottom capacity level of the tank's operating range shall be at or above the elevation of the outlet. All pipe material within the pedestal must be Schedule 10S, 304L stainless steel. All pipe material within the tank must be Schedule 10S, Type 316L stainless steel and coated with the interior coating system. b. The inlet/outlet pipe shall be designed to support all related static and dynamic loads. Galvanized steel brackets, guides and hangers shall be provided on the support wall and tank floor at a maximum of 20-foot intervals. c. The inlet/outlet pipe shall be designed and constructed to accommodate any differential movement caused by settlement and by thermal expansion and contraction over the range of extreme temperature differences expected for the support wall and pipe. The required flexibility shall be provided by an expansion joint located near grade in the vertical section of pipe. Electrical isolation gaskets shall be used between dissimilar pipe materials as needed. d. Provide an interconnect between inlet/outlet and overflow piping along with an isolation valve and stainless steel orifice plate designed to control drainage rate of water from the tank/riser pipe to grade via overflow piping. 2. Passive Hydrodynamic Mixing System (HMS): a. A complete Hydrodynamic Mixing System shall be supplied by the variable orifice nozzle manufacturer to maintain single source responsibility for the system. The Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 18 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B complete system shall be defined as all piping and appurtenances within the tank downstream of the tank penetration. Appurtenances include pipe, fittings, horizontal and vertical pipe supports, expansion joints, variable orifice duckbill check valves, and any other equipment specified within the Specifications. All metal equipment, piping and hardware inside of tank shall be 304 stainless steel. All components shall be NSF 61 Certified. All stainless steel within the tank shall be coated with interior coating system per Section 09 95 00 “Coatings for Water Storage Tanks.” 1). Approved Manufacturer(s): a). Tideflex Technologies. b). Landmark. c). Approved Equal. b. The HMS manufacturer shall be responsible for providing engineering installation drawings of the complete manifold piping system as supplied by the manufacturer. These drawings shall include plan view piping arrangement, sections and elevations as required, support bracket installation details, duckbill nozzle orientation details, and all dimensions required for locating the system within the specified dimensions of the tank. 1). Drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches. 2). Contractor shall include HMS information in the Operation and Maintenance Manual per Section 01 78 23 “Operations and Maintenance Data.” c. Design Calculations: 1). The HMS manufacturer shall include within the submittal package the following design calculations and reference information: a). Calculations showing the fill time required, under isothermal conditions, for the HMS system to achieve complete mix of the reservoir volume at minimum, average and peak fill rates. Complete mixing defined as 95 percent homogenous solution. The theory and equations used in calculating the mixing times must be as described in the Rossman, L.A. and W.M. Grayman (1999) reference. b). A representative Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) model evaluation of the proposed HMS system configuration applied within a reservoir of similar geometry. Model output documentation shall include all design variables applied for the simulation, plot of the 3-D geometry showing the mesh definition, velocity magnitude vector and contour plots at different cross- sections throughout the water volume, simulated tracer animations showing the spatial and temporal distribution of inlet water in real time during the fill cycle. c). Hydraulic curves for each inlet nozzle showing headloss, jet velocity, and effective open area all versus flow rate. d). Hydraulic calculations showing the resulting jet velocities of each inlet nozzle at minimum, average, and peak fill rates. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 19 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B e). Hydraulic calculations showing the flow distribution among all inlet ports at minimum, average, and peak fill rates. f). Manifold hydraulic calculations showing the total headloss of the HMS at minimum, average, and peak fill and draw rates. Headloss shall include all minor losses and headloss of nozzles and outlet check valves. g). Hydraulic curves for each outlet check valves showing headloss vs. flow. h). Calculations showing the terminal rise height of the jets that discharge at an angle above horizontal. The terminal rise height shall be calculated assuming 10 F and 20 F colder inlet water and calculated at minimum, average and peak fill rates. The theory and equations used to calculate the terminal rise height shall be included. d. If the calculations and supporting data provided do not show compliance with the hydrodynamic requirements of the system as interpreted by the Engineer or Owner, then the submittal shall be rejected. 3. Overflow Pipe: a. Provide a 24-inch overflow pipe. The top of the overflow shall be located within the tank at the overflow elevation. It shall run adjacent to the access tube and extend through the tank floor. The pipe shall run vertically beside the support wall to grade. A base elbow shall direct the overflows through the support wall, where the pipe shall be terminated with a flap valve. Refer to Section 33 12 16.13 “Miscellaneous Valves” for flap valve requirements. Pipe material within the pedestal must be Schedule 10S, Type 304L stainless steel. Pipe material within the tank must be Schedule 10S, Type 316L stainless steel and coated with interior coating system. b. The entrance to the overflow pipe shall incorporate a conical weir or weir box and be designed for the maximum inlet flow rate. The design shall be based on the water level cresting a maximum of 6 inches above the overflow elevation. Weir shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and coated with interior coating system. c. The overflow shall be designed to support all related static and dynamic loads. Galvanized steel brackets, guides and hangers shall be provided on the support wall and tank floor at intervals not exceeding 20 feet. The overflow, weir section, support brackets, and hangers within the tank shall be carbon steel and supported by the access tube. d. The overflow pipe shall be designed and constructed to accommodate any differential movement caused by settlement and by thermal expansion and contraction over the range of extreme temperature differences expected for the support wall and pipe. A layout with sufficient upper offset to accommodate differential movement is acceptable. If this method is not applicable, the required flexibility shall be provided by an expansion joint located near grade in the vertical section of pipe. 4. Tank Drain: A 6-inch diameter drain pipe shall penetrate the tank at the low point of the tank floor and connect to the overflow pipe. The drain inlet shall be fitted with a gate valve with handwheel accessible from the upper platform as shown in the Drawings. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 20 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Pipe material for the full extent of the drain shall be Schedule 10S, Type 304L stainless steel. 5. Ductile Iron Pipe Requirements: Ductile Iron Pipe in accordance with Section 33 05 01.02 “Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.” 6. Stainless Steel Pipe Requirements: Pipe and fittings shall be Type 304L/316L stainless steel fabricated from material meeting the requirements of ASTM A240 as indicated. Fabrication, inspection, testing, marking and certification of pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM A778 and A774 respectively. Backing flanges shall be in accordance with ASTM A285-C drilled to ANSI B16.5 Class 150. Pipe, fittings and welds shall be cleaned and passivated. L. Ventilation: 1. Tank Ventilation: a. Tank Vent shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The tank manufacturer to size roof ventilator to pass air so that the maximum fill/draw rate shall not develop pressure within the tank per the design parameters provided and a broken pipe analysis assuming a broken pipe immediately outside of the tank’s foundation. Broken pipe analysis shall be based on largest diameter inlet/outlet pipe with a break 5-feet beyond the pedestal wall. 1). Approved Manufacturer(s): a). AST Model Vent by Advance Tank and Construction Co. b). Newlin’s Welding and Tank Maintenance. c). Approved Equal. 2). Vent shall be constructed of Aluminum with #16 316 stainless steel insect screen, minimum diameter is 36-inches, meeting current AWWA and TCEQ standards. 3). Vent shall be securely fastened using 316 stainless steel hardware. 4). Vent shall be provided with a pressure/vacuum relief mechanism that will operate in the event that the vent fails. The mechanism shall be designed to return automatically to its original position after operation. The pressure/vacuum relief mechanism shall be located on the tank roof above the maximum weir crest elevation, and incorporated in the vent assembly. 5). Contractor shall include detailed calculations of vent sizing and broken pipe analysis with design calculations and Shop Drawings. 2. Support Structure Ventilation: The location and number of vents for ventilation of the concrete pedestal interior should conform to state and local building code requirements based on occupancy classification. Provide additional vents as required in addition to rigging access vents specified. Provide aluminum louvered vents with removable #16 stainless steel insect screens. Vents should be accessible from the interior ladders, platforms, or floors. M. Interior Floors: Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 21 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Slab on Grade: Provide a minimum 6-inch thick, 3500-psi concrete floor slab in the base of the support structure. The slab shall be supported per the geotechnical report and shall be reinforced with #5 reinforcing steel at 12-inch centers each way. Provide 1/2- inch expansion joint between floor slab and support wall and at pipes and supports that extend through the floor. Place cap strip and sealant over the expansion joint. The slab shall be sloped at 0.5 percent toward the truck door for drainage. 2. Structural Interior Pedestal Floor: a. Provide composite construction structural floors as indicated on the drawings. The design shall comply with applicable requirements of AISC S335 and IBC 2015. The 1st floor shall be designed for a minimum uniform live load of 250 psf or a minimum uniform live load of 150 psf plus a 20 kip axle load. b. The structural floors shall be a clear span design supported entirely by the concrete support wall or interior walls. The design of the floors and all loads transferred from the structural floors to the support wall shall be considered the responsibility of the tank manufacturer. The walls shall be strengthened as required in the vicinity of connections causing point load or eccentric conditions. Loads transferred from the structural floor(s) to the foundation shall be considered in the design of the foundation and/or slab on grade. c. Unless structural floor(s) and supports are isolated from the wall, loads on the wall caused by thermal stresses in these members shall be considered. An analysis of the lateral loading condition shall be performed and the wall strengthened accordingly. d. Provide openings in the structural floors for elevator shaft, stairway access, piping, conduits and other appurtenances. e. Provide design for all interior walls, ladders, stairways, elevator shaft and pit, and all other appurtenances as indicated in the drawings. N. Level Monitoring and Sampling: 1. Provide 3/4-inch stainless steel couplings welded to the inlet/outlet pipe a maximum of 5 feet above grade and above any tank control valve. Each coupling shall be provided with isolation stainless steel ball valves. a. Provide (1) coupling for pressure gauge. Provide pressure gauges as shown on the Drawings. Refer to Section 22 05 19 “Meters and Gauges.” b. Provide two couplings for future use. Plug valve with stainless steel or bronze plug. c. Provide one (1) coupling for sampling port with ball valve and ball valve type hose bid. Label sampling port as specified. 2. Provide additional monitoring and sampling lines within the access tube as indicated in the drawings. 3. Pressure Transducer: Provide 1-inch stainless steel threaded coupling welded to the tank drain pipe as assessable from upper platform with isolation stainless steel ball valve. Provide pressure transducer as shown on the Drawings and as indicated in Division 26. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 22 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B O. Lightning Protection: Provide a lightning protection system for the elevated tank as indicated in Section 26 41 13 “Lightning Protection for Structures.” P. Communications and Electrical Equipment: 1. Install antenna mounts on tank as required by Division 26. 2. Future antenna location openings in the tower pedestal and foundation shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. All openings shall include water tight, removable plugs. 3. Provide conduit hangers at 10 foot intervals adjacent to the pedestal access ladder. Length of conduit hangers shall be as required to provide adequate spacing between the quantity of conduits required for the project, 24-inch minimum. Provide flanged and/or plugged penetrations through the roof plate covering the access tube as shown in the plans. The anticipated conduits are as follows: a. Electrical and Future Conduits 1). 1 ea. 3” conduit 2). 2 ea. 2” conduits 3). 4 ea. 1” conduits 2.06 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING A. General: All Work shall be performed and all materials shall be provided in accordance with National Electric Code and the governing electrical, safety and inspection codes, regulations and ordinances. Refer to Division 26 additional requirements. 2.07 STEEL TANK PAINTING A. Refer to Section 09 95 00 “Coatings for Water Storage Tanks.” 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Review mill test certifications of all steel plate, structural components and reinforcement to ensure compliance with specification requirements. B. Inspections: Provide inspection of shop fabricated components in accordance with AWWA D107. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Foundation Excavation: The foundation bearing surface and excavation shall be inspected by a representative of the geotechnical engineer prior to foundation construction. Verification of the applicable design and construction recommendations is required. The geotechnical engineer shall be retained by the Tank Manufacturer. B. Environmental Conditions: Prior to performing any Work, verify the expected temperature, humidity and weather conditions are within the specified limitations for executing the Work. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 23 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Elevated Tank Components: After completion of each major component and prior to proceeding with the next stage of construction, verify that tolerance inspections and material quality control tests conform to the requirements as specified in this Section. 3.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION A. Reinforcement: Fabrication, placement, development and splicing of reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 318, ACI 371R, and ACI 117. B. Formwork: 1. Formwork design, installation and removal shall comply with the minimum requirements of ACI 318, ACI 371R, and ACI 117 and with the applicable recommendations of ACI 347. 2. Forming systems shall be designed with the provision of ties and bracing such that concrete components conform to the correct dimensions, shape, alignment and elevation without leakage of mortar. Formwork systems shall be designed to safely support all loading conditions. Embedded items shall be properly positioned and secured. Form surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign materials and coated with a release agent prior to placing reinforcement. C. Concrete: Concrete proportioning, production, placement, quality control and curing procedures shall comply with ACI 318, ACI 371R and ACI 117. Concrete shall satisfy the specific structural, durability and architectural requirements of the completed components. 1. Proportioning: The proportions of materials for concrete shall be established to provide adequate workability and proper consistency to permit concrete to be worked readily into the forms and around reinforcement without excessive segregation or bleeding. Unless otherwise specified, concrete without high range water reducer shall be proportioned to produce concrete slumps at the point of placement between 2 and 4 inches. If high range water reducer is used, concrete slump prior to addition shall be 3 to 4 inches. The slump, after addition of high range water reducer, shall be a maximum of 8 inches. Air shall be entrained to provide concrete with 3.0 to 6.0 percent air content. 2. Production: Concrete that arrives at the Project with slump below that suitable for placing, may have water added within the limits of the maximum permissible water- cement ratio. Maximum slump shall not be exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing time required. For concrete with site-administered high range water reducer, the pre-plasticized minimum slump requirement shall be attained as permissible by addition of water and mixing prior to the addition of the water reducer. a. Placement: Prior to concrete placement, all snow, ice, water or other foreign material shall be removed from the spaces that the concrete will occupy. Concrete shall be deposited in its final position in accordance with ACI 318 or ACI 350. These shall be moved at short intervals to prevent stacking of concrete. b. All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration while fresh concrete is still plastic so that the concrete is thoroughly worked into the corners of forms and around the reinforcement and embedded items to eliminate all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Internal vibrators shall be the Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 24 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B largest practical size that can be used in the Work and they shall be operated by competent workmen. D. Weather: 1. Concrete shall not be placed during precipitation or extreme temperatures unless protection is provided. 2. During cold weather the recommendations of ACI 306.1 shall be followed. 3. During hot weather the recommendations of ACI 305.1 shall be followed. 3.03 FOUNDATION A. Excavation: After verification of the foundation-bearing surface, provide a 2-inch thick concrete working slab within the lower excavation limits. Grade the Site to prevent runoff from entering the excavation. B. Concrete Construction: 1. For shallow foundations, reinforcement placed adjacent to a concrete working slab shall have a 2-inch minimum cover, and reinforcing steel shall be supported by precast concrete block, metal or plastic bar supports. 2. The sides of foundations shall be formed using any suitable system conforming to ACI 318. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces. Forms shall be provided on top sloping surfaces steeper than 2.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Straight form panels may be used to form circular foundation shapes. The minimum design radius shall be maintained at all sections. C. Finish: 1. Formed surfaces shall have a smooth form finish when exposed and a rough form finish when not exposed. 2. Unformed surfaces shall have a troweled finish when exposed and floated finish when not exposed. 3.04 CONCRETE SUPPORT STRUCTURE A. Architectural Concrete Construction: 1. The exposed exterior surface of the concrete support wall is designated architectural concrete. The concrete and formwork requirements of this Section shall be strictly enforced to ensure concrete of the highest practicable structural and architectural standard. Concrete proportioning, placing, and finishing shall be in accordance with the ACI 301, Chapter 18, except as modified by this Section. Formwork design, installation and removal shall comply with the minimum requirements of ACI 318, ACI 371R, ACI 117 and the applicable requirements of ACI 347, except as modified by this Section. 2. Attention shall be given to ensure the same concrete design mix is used throughout the support wall. The proportion, type and source of cement and aggregates shall not be changed. Uniform moisture content and placing consistency and finished concrete color shall be maintained throughout the entire support stucture. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 25 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Drop chutes shall be used in all wall concreting operations where concrete placement is 5 feet or greater in drop height. Concrete shall be placed directly inside the reinforcement cage. The concrete pour rate and placement procedures shall prevent aggregate segregation and form splatter with the resulting surface finish variations. 4. Support wall reinforcement shall be installed with plastic supports. Maximum spacing of supports for welded wire fabric shall be 5-foot centers, horizontal and vertically. 5. Forming systems shall be designed with the provision of ties and bracing such that concrete components conform to the correct dimensions, shape, alignment and elevation. Embedded items shall be properly positioned and secured. Form surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of concrete residue and coated with a release agent prior to placing reinforcement. Do not allow excessive release agent to accumulate on the form. Steel forms shall be coated with a non-staining, rust preventative form oil or otherwise protected. Rust stained steel formwork shall not be used. 6. The forming system for the pedestal wall shall be fully engineered and detailed with procedures to meet the increased demands of architectural concrete. The support wall shall be constructed with a jump form process using form segments prefabricated to match the wall curvature. Concrete pour height shall be a minimum of 4 feet and a maximum of 10 feet. Form panels shall extend the full height of the concrete pour using only vertical panel joints. Form system shall be designed to be secured to the previous wall pour. The space between the form and the previous pour shall be sealed to prevent grout leakage. Wall forms shall incorporate a positive means of adjustment to maintain dimensional tolerances specified. Wall forms shall be adjusted for vertical plumb and circularity and locked into position prior to concrete placement. Panels shall be designed for lateral pressures associated with full height plastic concrete head, and support and bracing shall be provided for construction related impact loads and wind loads. Working platforms that allow safe access for inspection and concrete placement shall be provided. Form surfaces shall be steel, plastic or fiberglass coated material. 7. The form system shall incorporate a uniform pattern of vertical and horizontal rustications to provide architectural relief to the exterior wall surface. Rustication strips shall be sealed to the form face to eliminate the grout leakage that results in broken corners, color variations and rock pockets. Broken edges and chamfers will not be accepted. All construction joints and panel joints shall be located in rustications. Vertical panel joints shall be sealed using closures which combine with the form pattern to eliminate grout leakage and panel joint lines. All joints shall be grout tight. The vertical and horizontal rustications shall be proportioned and combined to impart a symmetrical architectural pattern to the completed structure. Form ties shall be located in a uniform pattern. No architectural form treatment is required on the interior surface. 8. Support wall concreting shall be per the Tank Manufacturer’s standard procedures submitted to the Engineer. 9. Wall forms shall not be disturbed or removed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to prevent forming operations or environmental loads from causing surface damage or excessive stress. Form removal shall be based on early age concrete strength testing. The minimum concrete strength shall be established by the Tank Manufacturer, based on an analysis of stress at critical stages throughout the forming and concrete Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 26 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B operations. Early age concrete testing shall be in accordance with ACI 228.1R-89. Pull Out testing in accordance with ASTM C900-99, Maturity Method testing in accordance with ASTM C1074-93, or field cured cylinders compressive strength tested in accordance with ASTM C172 are the acceptable methods to determine early concrete strength. Contractor shall commit to removing the wall forms based on a standard time period to prevent discoloration or discontinuity of color based on a change in methodology. 10. The formwork system for the domed structural floor shall be designed to support all construction loads. Adequate shoring and bracing shall be provided to transfer loads without appreciable movements. Form surfaces shall be steel, plastic or fiberglass coated material. Shoring and forms for the structural dome slab shall remain in place until the concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry the floor weight without damaging deflections. 11. Concrete surfaces shall be protected in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 306 until the component attains 35 percent of the specified compressive strength. At this time, protection may be removed subject to the allowable temperature differential. A reasonable temperature differential shall be defined, based on component thickness and restraint conditions. B. Finish: 1. Provide a smooth form finish without rub for the interior and exterior support wall. Tie holes shall be plugged using grout on the interior and manufactured plugs on the exterior which match the color of the cured concrete as closely as possible. Provide an abrasive sweep blast to the exposed exterior concrete support wall surface. Abrasive blast shall be in accordance with TCEQ requirements and properly contained. 2. Review and acceptance of formed concrete surface will be made by the Owner or Owner’s Representative immediately upon form removal. Succeeding pours shall not be placed until the most recent wall pour has been stripped and the form surface approved. The Tank Manufacturer shall be responsible to inform the Owner’s Representative as to pour and form removal schedule at least seven (7) days prior to work and confirm schedule at least 48 hours in advance of work. Acceptable concrete surfaces should be aesthetically compatible with minimal color and texture variations and minimal surface defects when compared to adjacent panels, and the field mockup panel, when viewed at a distance of approximately 20-feet or as agreed upon by the Engineer and Contractor. Engineering effort required for revisiting and inspecting work due to Contractor work delays or improper scheduling shall be paid for by the Contractor. Effort and expenses will be billed per the rates established in Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions” and will be deducted from the contract value by change order. The Engineer shall not delay the Contractor by lack of attendance to inspect surfaces. 3. Concrete with surface defects exceeding limitations specified herein or not meeting the standard represented by the mock-up panel shall be repaired to meet that standard, or removed at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall submit repair procedures that will be followed for correcting various types of defects, i.e. discolorations, honey combing, etc. to the Engineer prior to the start of pedestal construction. 4. Provide a smooth form finish without rub for the interior dome slab. The unformed surface shall have a floated finish. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 27 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Dimensional Tolerances: 1.Support structure concrete construction shall comply with ACI 117 and the following: a. Support Wall Variation: Thickness -3% to +5% Diameter 0.4% ≤ 3 in. Vertical Alignment: In any 10 feet of height 1 in. In any 50 feet of height 2 in. Over total height 3 in. b. Tank Floor Variation: Slab floor thickness -3% to +5% Dome floor normal radius -6% to +10% Finish tolerance measured with a 5 ft. straightedge or radius board 3/4 in. c. Level Alignment Variation: From specified elevation 1 in. From horizontal plane 1/2 in. d. Offset Between Adjacent Forms: Exterior exposed surfaces 1/8 in. Interior exposed surfaces 1/4 in. D. Mock Up Panel: 1. A mock up panel of the basic concrete support structure shall be constructed using the proposed formwork, concrete, placement, and finishing methods. Minimum size will be 8 feet wide by 8 feet high. This panel shall be agreed upon by the Tank Manufacturer and Engineer as the reference standard with which to judge surface quality, appearance and uniformity of texture and color. Panel shall be evaluated at a distance of 20-feet from the panel face. 2. If the constructed panel does not meet expectations for color constancy, quantity and extent of bug holes, grout leakage, surface texture, or other defects, the Contractor shall construct additional mock panels until an acceptable quality is agreed upon. Contractor shall pay for all Engineering services and expenses for inspection and administrative effort required to inspect mock panels in excess of two panel reviews. Effort and expenses will be billed per the rates established in Section 00 73 00 “Supplementary Conditions” and will be deducted from the contract value by change order. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 28 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. This mock panel shall remain immediately adjacent to the tank concrete support structure so it may be compared to the actual support structure construction. The panel shall not be removed from the site until the Owner has accepted the entire tank. 4. Contractor shall report any proposed changes from procedures and materials used in the original Field Mockup to the Engineer. Engineer may request that a new mockup panel be constructed incorporating the revised procedures and materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Wall construction not meeting expectations, as compared to the mock panel, shall be repaired and/or removed and reconstructed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 STEEL TANK A. Welding: 1. Welding procedures and general welding requirements shall be in accordance with AWWA D107, Section 5.4, "Fabrication and Construction Requirements" and Section A.9.4 through A.9.5. 2. No structural welding is permitted to any steel embedded in hardened concrete, unless a weld procedure is utilized that will preclude damage to the concrete. B. Fabrication: Layout, cutting, forming, edge preparation and workmanship for steel tank components and fabrications shall be in accordance with AWWA D107, Section 5.4, "Fabrication and Construction Requirements.” C. Tank Erection: Steel tank erection procedures and general requirements shall be in accordance with AWWA D107, Section 5.4, " Fabrication and Construction Requirements .” D. Dome Lining: Domed tank floor shall be lined with steel plates that may be shaped to match the shape of the tank floor. Unformed steel liner plates that do not match the shape of the concrete floor may be used provided the liner plate is grouted after welding. The steel liner should be constructed with a 1-inch or larger grout space between the liner plate and the concrete member. Subsequent to testing, the void in the interface between the steel tank floor plate and the supporting structural concrete dome or slab shall be filled with a flowable grout mix using a procedure that removes entrapped air. Provide anchorage in areas where the grout pressure is sufficient to lift the plate. 3.06 TANK PAINTING A. Refer to Section 09 95 00 “Coatings for Water Storage Tanks.” 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All cost of testing required for the construction of the tank shall be borne by the Contractor. The results of all tests shall be submitted to the Owner within 7 calendar days of the test being completed. B. Soil and compaction testing for foundation and backfill will be provided by the Contractor. C. Concrete Testing and Inspection: 1. The evaluation and acceptance of concrete shall be in accordance with Section 5.6 of ACI 318 and ACI 117, except as modified in this Section. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 29 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. The first sample for concrete that is pumped shall be taken at the point of placement after the concrete has been pumped. After the first sample has been tested and certified to be within the specifications, subsequent samples may be taken from the truck. 3. Four cylinders shall be made from each Sample required. Two cylinders should be tested at 28 days for the strength test. One cylinder should be tested at 7 days to supplement the 28-day tests. The fourth cylinder is a spare to replace or supplement other cylinders. 4. Slump, air and compressive cylinder testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory. The Tank Manufacturer shall retain the independent laboratory and provide the Owner with copies of all test results within 7 days of completing the test. 5. The support wall radius, plumb and thickness shall be verified for each concrete lift at 45 degree intervals. An inspection report certified by the Tank Manufacturer shall be provided to the Owner at Project completion. D. Steel Tank Testing and Inspection: 1. All costs of tests required for the construction of the tank shall be borne by the Contractor. The results of all tests shall be submitted to the Owner within 7 calendar days of the test being completed. 2. Inspection procedures for the steel tank shall be as required by AWWA D107, Section 9, "Inspection and Testing." Radiographic inspection of full penetration butt-welded joints and all other welding tests shall be made by an independent inspection company retained by the Tank Manufacturer. Contractor shall submit the name of the company completing the tests. 3. Erection tolerance of the steel cone in the radial direction shall be measured. Provide field measurements at 30-degree intervals. 4. Weld joints of plate over the structural concrete floor shall be tested for leaks by vacuum box / soap solution testing, or equivalent method prior to grouting. E. Provide leak and settlement testing per AWWA D107. F. Piping Test Inspection: Refer to Section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements.” 3.08 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. The Site shall be kept in a clean and safe condition at all times. The Tank Manufacturer shall remove all construction equipment and debris at Project completion. B. Tank Disinfection: 1. Water and sufficient pressure for flushing, cleaning, initial testing and disinfection shall be supplied by the Owner at no cost to the Tank Manufacturer. Tank Manufacturer is responsible for coordination with Owner and all materials required to test and disinfect tank. Tank disinfection shall be in accordance with AWWA C652, Chlorination Method No. 2 or 3. Attachment 3Item 12 Composite Elevated Water Utility Storage Tank 33 16 19.13 - 30 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. After disinfection, the Tank Manufacturer shall arrange for bacteriological testing of water Samples from the tank. Failed tests will be supplemented by the Tank Manufacturer. The tank shall not be placed in service until bacteriological tests pass. 3. Disinfection of tank and piping shall be performed per Section 33 10 13 “Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution.” C. Refer to Section 09 95 00 “Coatings for Water Storage Facilities” for VOC Testing requirements. 3.09 WARRANTY INSPECTION A. The Owner and Contractor shall observe all surfaces of the reservoir within 11 to 23 months after the reservoir work has been accepted for Substantial Completion and placed in service to establish if remedial work is required. If the water utility is not able to remove the tank from service for the inspection or for any repair work, due to adverse weather conditions, drought or system limitations, the inspection or repair work may be delayed by the Owner for up to 16 months at no additional cost. All repair work shall be conducted within a schedule approved by the Owner. B. The Owner will isolate the reservoir from the distribution system and drain the reservoir. The Contractor shall open, clean out, high-pressure water wash and rinse the tank prior to the anniversary observation. After observation of the tank is complete and repair work accepted by Owner, the Contractor shall follow disinfection procedures specified. C. The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate equipment including, lighting, ventilation, rigging, cable climbers, mirrors, inspection equipment, and sufficient man- power to clean, disinfect and move equipment and tools around the reservoir, etc., as may be necessary to facilitate complete observation of all interior surfaces. The Contractor shall bear all costs of the anniversary observation and shall incorporate such costs into bid. D. The Owner will document the inspection in accordance with AWWA D107. E. Provide coating inspection per 09 95 00 “Coatings for Water Storage Tanks.” END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Storm Drainage Structures 33 49 00 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 33 49 00 STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This item shall govern for the construction of manholes, inlets, headwalls and other drainage structures, complete in place or to the stage detailed on the plans and the materials used therein, including excavation and backfill and storm drain connections. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The products shall meet the requirements of Section 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.” 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the standards listed in Section 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous Cast-In- Place Concrete” shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM C32-93(1999)e1 Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale) ASTM A48/ A47M-99 Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A536-99e1 Standard Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A27/ A27M-95(2000) Standard Specification for Steel Casings, Carbon, for General Application ASTM D-2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel Plate Loading ASTM D-3350 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Material ASTM F-477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ATM F-2306 Standard Specification for 12 to 60 inch Annular Corrugated Profile-Wall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Gravity Flow Storm Sewer and Subsurface Drainage Applications 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: HDPE High Density Polyethylene 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. Attachment 3Item 12 Storm Drainage Structures 33 49 00 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer’s written rigging instructions. D. Handle stormwater inlets Junction Boxes according to manufacturer’s written rigging instructions. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 2 days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner’s written permission. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manholes, Inlets, and Channel Linings: Constructed of Class A concrete; meeting the requirements of Section 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.” 2.02 MIXES A. Concrete: Mixed in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. 2.03 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C76 (ASTM C76M), with groove and tongue ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M), rubber gaskets. 1. Class III, Wall B. 2.04 CONCRETE A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A1064, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. C. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A1064, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. Attachment 3Item 12 Storm Drainage Structures 33 49 00 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 , deformed steel. 2.05 STORMWATER INLETS A. Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to utility standards. 2.06 PIPE OUTLETS A. Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers: Conforming to the dimension and materials shown on the plans. Covers and grates shall fit properly into frames, and seat uniformly and solidly. B. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides. C. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone according to NSSGA’s “Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control.” 1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-3, 2-inch screen opening. 2. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-4, 3-inch screen opening. 3. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-5, 5-inch screen opening. D. Filter Stone: According to NSSGA’s “Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control,” No. FS-2, No. 4 screen opening, average-size, graded stone. E. Energy Dissipaters: According to NSSGA’s “Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control,” No. A-1, 3-ton average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated. F. Brick: Of first quality, sound, hard-burned, perfectly shaped brick. Clay brick shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C32, Grade NA or equal. G. Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers: Conforming to the dimensions and materials shown on the plans. Covers and grates shall fit properly into frames, and seat uniformly and solidly. H. Steel Casting: Conforming to the requirements of ASTM A27 Grade 70-36 “Mild to Medium Strength Carbon Steel Castings.” Cast iron castings shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 30 “Gray Iron Castings.” Ductile iron castings shall conform to ASTM A536 Grade 60-40-18. I. Cast Iron: For supports, steps and inlet units shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown on the plans. The castings shall be clean and perfect, free from sand or blow holes, or other defects. Cast iron shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A48, Class 30, “Gray Cast Iron.” J. Timber: For temporary covers when used with stage construction shall be sound, new or used timber of minimum 3-inch nominal thickness, reasonably free of knots and warps. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in Sections 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.” Steps shall be cast into the wall the concrete is placed. Attachment 3Item 12 Storm Drainage Structures 33 49 00 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Construct manholes and inlets for precast concrete storm drain conduits as soon as practicable after conduits into or through the structure locations are completed. Cut conduits shall be cut neatly at the inside or outside face of the walls of the structures and pointed up with mortar. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer’s proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors. 3. Install piping below frost line. 4. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook.” 5. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI C310 and CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil.” END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 40 90 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A.General Requirements for Instrumentation. There are three areas of work in the Instrumentation Work in this project as described below: 1.The electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing all conductors, coax and conduit as required for a complete and operational system. 2.The Instrumentation System Contractor shall provide all hardware, software, and configuration and integration associated with the PLC based Instrumentation and Process Control system at the new 2.5 MG EST. Provide a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents. 3.The System Integrator Contractor shall provide all hardware, software and configuration and integration associated with updating the Owner’s Operator Work Station PLC and HMI to fully incorporate the 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank’s I/O. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.GENERAL: Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, and contract drawings, bring the matter immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. B.REFERENCE STANDARDS: 1.American Society of Testing Materials: A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service B 68 Seamless Copper Tube D 1047 Polyvinyl Chloride Jacket for Wire and Cable A 36 Specification for Structural Steel Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2.Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ). 3.American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 4.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Painting Specifications for weather exposure. 5.American Welding Society (AWS): Welding Code D 1.1-75. 6.Federal Specifications: Primer, Paint Zinc, Chromate, Alkyd Type, Fed. Spec. TT-P-645a. 7.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 8.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): National Electrical Code (NEC), 1990 edition. 9.Instrument Society of America (ISA): RP 3.1-1960 Flow Meter Installations, Seal and Condensate Chambers S5.1-1973 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification RP7.1-1956 Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B S7.3-1975 Quality Standard for Instrument Air RP18.1-1965 Specifications and Guides for the Use of General Purpose Annunciators S5.4-1976 Instrument Loop Diagrams S8.1-1968 Instrument Enclosures for Industrial Environments RP12.1-1960 Electrical Instruments in Hazardous Atmospheres RP20.1, 20.2 Specification Forms for Instruments S39.1-1972 Control Valve Sizing Equations S39.2-1972 Control Valve Capacity Test Procedures S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 10.American Petroleum Institute (API): API RP 550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems API RP 520 Recommended Practice for the Design and Installation of Pressure-Relieving Systems in Refineries 11.Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA): PM 20.1-1973 Process Measurement and Control Terminology RC5-10-1963 Resistance Thermometers 12.Underwriters' Laboratory (UL): Subject 13, Subject 1227. 13.Factory Mutual (FM). 14.American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 15.Supplement to C37.90-1971, Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus (IEEE Std. 313-1971), C37.90a-1974. 16.National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 17.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Tray Fire Tests, IEEE 383. 1.03 GUARANTEE A.GUARANTEE PERIOD: The Contractor shall provide guarantees as defined hereunder for a period of one year after final acceptance by the Owner. B.GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS FOR ANALOG DEVICES: Each device shall perform its intended function within the specified operating accuracy and repeatability without more than 12 adjustments for any consecutive period of 12 months. The availability of each device shall be not less than 98.0 percent for any consecutive period of six months. Downtime of analog devices affecting more than 8 loops shall be considered a system failure. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A.The System Integrator's personnel shall have a minimum of ten years of prior experience in furnishing, installation, testing, programming, debugging, start-up, and training for systems at least as large and similar to the one in this Contract. The system installer shall have employees who are qualified technicians for the duration of the contract. The Contractor shall submit for evaluation within one week of Notice to Proceed, his instrumentation systems installer's company resumes complete with company history, project lists, locations, Owner, costs, type of system installed, and references with phone numbers. Installers not meeting these qualifications shall not be accepted. As a part of this contract, the instrumentation system installers shall assume complete system responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all subsystems and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The Contractor shall actively be involved in control system integration industry for the last five years. The Contractor shall not act as a broker for the project; he shall provide and be responsible for all hardware, interfacing software, training, testing, and extended warranties. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A.The terms used in this specification conform to definitions in ISA S51.1, SAMA PMC 20.1- 1973 and RC 5-10-1963, except as modified below. 1.Device: An electronic or mechanical apparatus designed to perform a specific measurement or control function. 2.Equipment: The machinery used in a process, e.g., pumps, fans, etc. 3.Interchangeability error: The algebraic difference between the indication and true value of the measured variable as a result of exchanging a device with a replacement. 4.Loop: Any combination of interconnected transmitters, receivers, switches, alarms, indicators, controllers, computers, or final control elements. 5.Operating accuracy: Conformity of indicated value to accepted standard value or true value throughout specified operating conditions with a confidence level of 95 percent includes, but is not limited to, hysteresis, linearity, and operating influence of temperature, pressure, supply voltage, and transmitter power supply. Operating accuracy for loop is defined as root-mean-square (RMS) of individual device operation accuracies. 6.Process: A progressively continuing operation that consists of a series of controlled actions systemically directed toward a particular result, e.g., a process to mix, filter, heat, and/or cool air to a particular condition. 7.Response: The results of the act, or process of measuring the time difference between the time of a change in an input signal or a measured variable, and the time when the output, display, and final control element in the loop has changed to at least 60 percent of the change which should result from the input change. 8.Subsystem: A discrete subdivision of a system and an assemblage of parts, devices, or software modules designed to perform one or more of the specific tasks required for the system to accomplish its functions. 9.System: An assemblage of sometimes diverse parts, devices, or software modules serving a common set of measurement or control functions. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 10.Time resolution: The result of the act or process of rendering distinguishable events occurring at nearly the same time. Expressed as a measurement of time in seconds. 11.Unit: Any combination of equipment items interconnected in a predetermined manner, performing one or more controlled actions toward a particular result. A discrete subdivision of a process. 12.Concealed - Accessible: Out of general sight, but can be easily reached by removing panels or access doors. 13.Concealed - Inaccessible: Out of general sight and cannot be easily reached except by removing a permanent part of the building or using special tools. 14.Exposed: Open to general view without removing panels, access doors, or a permanent part of the building. 15.Field termination point: Termination of a run of raceway from an instrument panel to the vicinity of a field instrument. Field termination point is usually within five horizontal feet from the field instrument. 16.Analog device: Any sensor, transmitter, indicator, recorder, controller, computing relay, or control valve which transmits or receives an analog signal. Excludes the analog portion of a digital system or I/O subsystems. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A.SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: 1.Detail: Give sufficient detail to permit system configuration, installation, and wiring without reference to design drawings. Refer to Division 1 - General Provisions. 2.As a minimum, shop drawings shall include a bill of materials with original manufacturer's name and catalog number (re-labeled component information is not acceptable), original manufacturer's catalog cut sheets, front views, assembly drawings, nameplate schedules, electrical schematics, electrical connections diagrams, and piping connection diagrams. 3.Electrical, piping, and interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, complete with conduit, cable, and equipment designations, and shall include terminal identification information. 4.Include size of all conduits, pipe, cables, and conductors. 5.Physical arrangement drawings shall include operating and servicing clearance requirements, cooling requirements, electrical power requirements, and cabling information. 6.Operator console configuration drawings shall include specific location of all keys and pushbuttons. 7.Logic drawer drawings shall show used space and expansion space. 8.Show appropriate tag numbers on all product data. 9.Software specifications for all software provided in addition to existing standard software. a.Include fully annotated source listings, input-output requirements, memory requirements, timing and sequencing requirements, flow chart showing functions performed, operating sequences and decision points, required system configuration, list of known or anticipated limitations of software modules, list of malfunction procedures to be followed for recovering from operator error or other Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B malfunction, and description of how each module interfaces with calling and called programs. b.Provide proposed screen layouts showing modifications to existing screens, and new screens: Show all displays, inputs, outputs, recorders, alarms and indications along with the associated signal tag number. B.TECHNICAL MANUALS: 1.Supply six (6) sets of technical manuals with software specifications to Owner's Representative no later than the equipment shipment date. Each set shall be bound in a standard size, three-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic, hard-cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. 2.Each set of technical manuals shall include a general and detailed description, a theory of operation description, detailed schematic drawings, specifications, and installation, connection, calibration, operating, troubleshooting, preventive maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail with a clear and specific description of the steps the operators must take to perform each of the tasks and modes of operating specified. These manuals shall provide the Owner with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. Exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies, and accessory components shall be included together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. These manuals are in addition to all applicable requirements of Division 1 - General Provisions. C.SPARE PARTS LIST: 1.Contractor shall prepare and submit for Engineer's review a master spare parts list of all Division 40 items. All division 40 spare parts shall be turned over to the City at one time and stored into lockable cabinets. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 INFORMATION ON DRAWINGS A.The following information is indicated on the drawings: 1.Loop diagram on flow sheet for each control loop. Diagrams are schematic in nature and intended only as a guide to work to be performed. 2.Approximate location of primary elements, instrument panels, and final control elements. 3.Location of electrical distribution panel boards for instrument electrical power. 4.Location of equipment having alarms and equipment status contacts. 5.Location of equipment being controlled by system. B.The following information is not shown on drawings, but shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine, furnish, and coordinate with other divisions based upon systems specified. Show this information on project record drawings. 1.Instrument loop drawings per ISA S5.4 minimum, desired and optional items. 2.Detailed enclosure and instrument panel layouts, PLC enclosure layouts, Filter console layouts, fabrication details, and wiring diagrams. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.Detailed system configuration. 4.Raceway and cable routing for instrumentation wiring. 2.02 OPERATING CONDITIONS A.AMBIENT CONDITIONS: Provide equipment suitable for ambient conditions specified. Provide system elements to operate properly in the presence of radio frequency fields produced by portable RF transmitters with output of five watts operated at 24 inches from instruments in the presence of plant telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment, and in the presence of digital data transmission systems. B.FIELD LOCATIONS: Field equipment may be subjected to ambient temperatures from -5 to 50°C with direct radiation and relative humidity from 45 to 100 percent with condensation. C.POWER SUPPLY: Power supply will be 117 volts a-c, single-phase, 60-hertz commercial power. Voltage variations will be at least plus or minus 8 percent. Certain loops shall have integral power supply as specified in the Contract Documents. Power supplies shall be provided in the panels as specified in the Contract Documents or required for a complete system, plus one spare. 2.03 SPARE PARTS A.Supply spare parts as indicated in these Specifications. B.Spare parts shall become property of the Owner. 2.04 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.Provide equipment of solid-state construction utilizing second source semiconductors, unless otherwise specified. Derate components to assure dependability and long-term stability. Provide printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy, hand or wave soldered, of sufficient thickness to prevent warping. Coat printed circuit boards in field-mounted equipment with two mils of solderable conformal coating complying with MIL-I-46058B. Alignment and adjustments shall be noncritical, stable with temperature changes or aging, and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. Do not insert components of specially selected values into standard electronic assemblies to meet performance requirements. Use parts indicated in instruction manuals, replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading performance of completed assembly. B.Use test equipment and instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs suitable for purpose intended and rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the required accuracy of device being calibrated. Such test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to the National Bureau of Standards as applicable. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.05 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A.The instrumentation system Contractor shall provide the Owner's staff with all required training and operating procedures, at no extra cost to the Owner, in addition to In-Plant SCADA training specified in Section 40 90 02. The training schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner's Representative. Training shall include operating, testing, calibration and programming of the system, and simple troubleshooting of the system. The training shall include manuals which are specifically written for the system provided as described in Division 01 - General Provisions of these Specifications. B.The calibration, testing, and start-up of all the instruments whether existing or provided new, shall be done by the manufacturer's field technician/Engineer in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide a list of all manufacturers whose technicians will perform this work. The Contractor shall also provide a certified calibration report stating that each instrument shown or specified in the Contract Documents has been installed, tested and calibrated per manufacturer's recommendations and per these Contract Documents. C.Follow-up Services: After the acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall make four (4) trips to the project site for calibration and adjustment of all the instruments and devices, including the In-Plant SCADA system. The first trip shall be three months after acceptance of the complete system, and thereafter every three months for a total of four trips. These trips are in addition to all warranty items, and shall be at no extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the services of a trained technician for each trip with appropriate calibration and testing instruments. All defects shall be immediately remedied. The trips shall be coordinated with the Owner. D.All control software developed for this contract shall be delivered to the Owner stored on electronic media in a format suitable for installing on the existing equipment and new equipment installed under this contract. This includes all source code, complied code, link libraries, run-time libraries or other modules necessary to recreate an operational system in the event of a catastrophic failure or cessation of business by any of the Contractors. In addition, copies of all data bases and necessary associated files as configured after the final test shall be supplied on the same medium. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 40 90 01 INSTRUMENTATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment for complete instrumentation and controls. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1.Installation of equipment furnished under this contract. 2.Interconnections between equipment furnished under this contract. B.The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that instrumentation is an integrated system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who shall provide all the equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. C.Supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the instrumentation equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall be provided by the Contractor. Installation work shall conform to applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes. D.Coordinate the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel during construction, testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.GENERAL: Equipment shall be the Manufacturer's latest and proven design. Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. B.OPERATING VOLTAGE: Electrical components of the system shall operate on 120 volt, single-phase, 60 Hertz, except as otherwise noted in the specifications. C.POWER SUPPLIES: The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the instrument system from these energy sources shall be furnished with the instrumentation. D.INPUT/OUTPUT 1.In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems shown shall be 4-20 mA DC process measurement signals. Current loop isolators, current repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be furnished and installed as required to meet instrument specifications and to make instrumentation system fully operational. 2.Pair shielded cable, as specified in Section 26 05 10, LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES shall be used for all 4-20 mA DC loops. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A.Shop Drawings 1.Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication or shipment to the job. Equipment shall not be fabricated or shipped to the job before receipt of approved shop drawings from the Engineer. Submittals for approval shall include (1) component manufacturing data sheet indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by item number and nomenclature, (2) component drawing showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details, (3) a system piping schematic and wiring schematic each on a single drawing with full description of operation, (4) complete schematic diagram of each piece of electrical and electronic equipment including electrical valves and tolerances for each component. Component identification on the schematic shall be as described above. 2.Following approval, the manufacturer shall be responsible for preparation of the required sets of these drawings for distribution as indicated in Division 0 and Division 1 specifications. 3.Shop drawings submitted for all equipment furnished under this section of the specifications, shall be submitted at the same time in the same package. Partial submittals will not be reviewed. B.Sales bulletins and other general publications are not acceptable as submittals for approval. C.Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. Instrument panel wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 10, LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES shall be followed. 2.Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures 3.O&M manual shall include setup form for each instrument installed in the field. The setup form shall include the manufacturers name, model number, instrument location, instrument tag name, parameter settings, power supply location (panel circuit number), and full catalog ordering information. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ASTM A-126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings ASTM B-61 Specification for Steam and Valve Bronze Castings Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A.SPARE PARTS 1.Furnish all standard recommended spare parts as indicated in the Manufacturer's instruction manuals, for each component in the system. 2.Furnish two (2) of each different type and size of fuses. B.SPECIAL TOOLS: Furnish a kit which contains special size wrenches and other types of tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, aligning, and calibrating each piece of equipment. In addition, any piece of equipment (meter, test set, etc.) required by the Manufacturer to align, adjust, or otherwise calibrate any item under this section of the specification shall be furnished. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURES/PANELS A.Enclosures and panels as indicated on the plans and in this specification shall be furnished, installed, and wired. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X for outdoor environments and NEMA 1 enclosures for indoor environments, unless specifically stated otherwise. 2.02 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSMITTER A. Unit shall be a hydrostatic pressure sensor for level measurement of fresh water. Hydrostatic pressure sensor type continuous level measuring system consisting of level element, transmitter, and cable from level element to transmitter. The hydrostatic pressure sensor shall be equipped with permanent hermetically sealed cable probe. The hydrostatic pressure sensor shall be KPSI Series 30 submersible level transmitter. No substitutions shall be allowed. B. The submersible hydrostatic pressure sensor shall be connected to a remotely mounted monitoring/control device, Endress & Hauser Model RIA 261. C. Level system shall have an overall accuracy of ± 0.1% of full scale and shall operate on 4- 20mA loop power derived from the RTU. D. Transmitter shall contain solid state controls to operate transducer and to provide a 4 to 20 mA DC output signal in linear proportion to the level being sensed. Transmitter shall be provided with output indicator meter and shall have operating range of 14 to 140 degrees F. Transmitter scale range shall be as noted. Transmitter shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure, suitable for wall/rack mounting. E. Interconnecting cable between hydrostatic pressure sensor and the display shall be furnished with the unit with length as required. Cable shall be of one continuous length, no splicing allowed. Tag Service Range PIT-02 EST Level 0-40’ (Verify) Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.03 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER A.Pressure indicating transmitter shall be of the two wire capacitance sensing solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal proportional to the calibrated pressure range. The transmitter shall have 316 stainless steel wetted parts and Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitter shall have 1/4 NPT on flange process connection. The transmitters shall have an externally adjustable span and zero, an integral junction box and an accuracy of +/-0.25% of span, +/-0.25% stability of upper range limit. Pressure transmitter shall be provided with pressure indication. B.Range limits of transmitter shall be 0-50 to 0-300 psig. Each transmitter shall include an integrally or externally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Transient protector shall be Rosemount Model 470. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 3-valve manifold with NORMAL, ZERO, BLOCK, CALIBRATE and BLOWDOWN functions and shall be D/A PTM6 or approved equal. Transmitter shall have local indication of pressure. Transmitter shall be Rosemount 3051, Endress & Hauser with Hart protocol. No substitutions shall be allowed. Tag Service Range PIT-01 Pressure 0-150PSI 2.04 INTRUSION ALARM A.Hermetically sealed brushed anodized aluminum housing, Rhodium plated switch contacts, industrial wide gap magnetic contacts, UL listed, surface mount, 3’ stainless steel armored cable, Sentrol 2500 series. Provide with one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Wire each device requiring power so that when wires are removed from any one device, power is not be disrupted to any other device. Ground the case of each device either by mounting directly on a steel frame or by a third wire. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided during construction to assist the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; mounting, piping, and wiring one of each type of device, and the methods of protecting all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation, the services of the above service engineer shall be provided for calibration and start up of the equipment and for instructing the operating personnel. The Manufacturer shall provide sufficient service to place the system in satisfactory operation. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B.Check out and calibrate the system upon completion of the installation. C.Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certified statement of approval of the installation including his supplier's authorization for turning on energy to the system. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-1 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 40 90 02 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA AQUISITION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section specifies furnishing, installing, testing, and start-up operations of a complete control system as indicated in the Plans and as specified herein. The system shall be totally integrated with the existing SCADA system. The system shall be configured to operate over an open system architecture. B. System Components: The system will consist of the following major components and subsystems: 1. Local processing unit (LPU) control panel (PLC's inside). 2. Radio 3. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS). 4. Spare parts C. Coordinate with the Owner’s SCADA Contractor to provide all required hardware and PLC hardware and PLC programming necessary to interface with the existing system. D. SCADA Contractors shall be limited to the following: 1. D&H Automation: Contact: Herschel Henson (817) 205-9288 is the only acceptable Contractor for Town of Prosper water projects. E. Provide software programming to create new screens and modify existing screens on the existing Owner’s PLC system. F. Provide raceways, communication cables and conductors as required, installed and terminated for a complete and operational system, whether shown on Plans or not. G. Perform radio communication system programming and configuration for communication with the Owner’s PLC system. In addition, provide all software required to establish communication with the supplied hardware. H. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for wireless communications network operation or performance to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by other suppliers under other sections of these Specifications, shall be included whether or not they are shown on the Plans. These devices include, but are not limited to, power supplies, Ethernet converters, etc. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B I. Lightning/Surge Protection 1.Lightning/Surge protection shall be provided to protect the Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition system from induced surges propagating along the communications, signal and power supply lines. The protection systems shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the surge withstand level for the device they are protecting and be maintenance free and self-restoring. 2. All wiring, hardware, and connections means shall comply with the National Electrical Code and/or applicable local codes. 3. Lightning/Surge protection devices shall be mounted as close to the equipment they are protection as possible. Mounting guidelines will be followed as indicated in installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. Wires shall be attached by means of a cable-clamping terminal block activated by a screw. Connections shall be gas-tight, and the terminal block shall be fabricated on non-ferrous, non-corrosive materials. All wiring points and plug connections shall be “touch safe” with no live voltages that can make contact with a misplaced finger. 4. Panel mounted Lightning/Surge protection devices shall consist of two parts; a base terminal block and a plug protection module. Base shall directly connect to DIN rail. Base and plug shall have the ability to be coded to accept only the correct voltage plug. Field mounted Lightning/Surge protection devices shall be contained in NEMA 12 housings. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control functions shall include digital logic control, PID control, analog scaling and setpoint control, and peer to peer communications. B. Include all hardware, firmware, software, and application programming and configuration, as necessary, to make the system completely functional and operational in accordance with the Contract Documents. All necessary components and equipment which are not specifically described in the Contract Documents, but which are necessary to configure an operational distributed control system as described herein, shall be identified, furnished, and installed by the CONTRACTOR. The system provided shall be the vendor's standard; a prototype system will not be accepted. C. Owners existing system: a. HMI: Wonderware 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 2. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. b. ICS 1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control. c. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600V d. ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. e. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. f. ICS 19, Diagrams, Device Designations, and Symbols for Industrial Control and Systems. g. Publication No. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V maximum). 4. National Electric Code. 5. ISA Standards 6. IEC 2 KV Isolation test 7. IEEE472/ANSI C37-90A Surge withstand capability test. 8. IEEE 802.3 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 12. Joint Industrial Council (JIC) 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00. B. Loop diagrams shall be prepared according to ISA Standard ISA-S5 and using loop numbers provided. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Schematic ladder diagrams shall include all terminal blocks, hardware devices, software interlocks, software data links, and control. D. PLC panel layout, plans, elevations, sections, details, etc. E. A schedule defining all I/O, database reference, and point of origin or destination, and PLC system internal address. F. Software manuals shall be provided to configure the central system and technical review information. Provide sample program documentation from previous projects. G. Submit written description of functions, loops, and logic. H. Submit all SAMA Logic and Wiring Diagrams and ISA Logic Diagrams for all equipment requiring programming at the PLCs, with all set points and ranges indicated. I. Complete spare parts list with catalog and part numbers and quantities. J. Factory Test Reports K. Bill of materials showing product ordering information L. Software being submitted shall include the product information and version with the purchased license agreements. Licensed agreements shall show product key number, the number of points purchased, and length of purchase agreement. M. Integrator shall provide a second submittal that shall be approved prior to delivery to the job site and downloaded on the PLC system: 1. At least six weeks prior to start-up, submit detailed programming information consisting of ladder logic and proposed program code, complete input, output, relay, register and controller identification labels, memory allocation table, and written description of program operation. N. Radio Path Study a. Prior to purchasing any equipment associated with the elevated storage tank SCADA system, the contractor shall do a path study to determine a clear line of site and good reliable communication path year round between the elevated storage tank and the existing main Owner’s SCADA site. b. The radio path study shall include a summary page indicating the findings and recommendations. c. The radio path study shall include screen shots from the radio path software study. O. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. Instrument panel wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Conductors and Cables” shall be followed. 2. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures. 3. A schedule defining all I/O, database reference, and point of origin or destination, and PLC system internal address. 4. Submit written description of functions, loops, and logic. 5. Submit all SAMA Logic and Wiring Diagrams and ISA Logic Diagrams for all equipment requiring programming at the PLCs, with all set points and ranges indicated. 6. One software copy of actual program files burned on a CD/DVD with a PDF copy of program with descriptions and rung comments. 7. Provide hardcopy of PLC programming logic in O&M Manuals. 8. Hard Copy of software program including programs and rung comments 9. Provide a hard copy of the “as-built” wiring diagrams, panel layout, elevations, sections, details, and associated drawings in a separate binder. 10. One PDF copy and one AutoCAD (.dwg) copy of the “as-built” wiring diagrams, panel layout, elevations, sections, details, and associated drawings burned on a CD. a. Maximum file size is 5MB. If manual is greater than maximum allowable file size, provide individual files for each major section of manual. b. All files shall be compatible with the latest software version available. c. Filename shall identify the plant site, plant area, equipment manufacturer, and date equipment placed in service. i.e. WWTP-PC1-Manufacturer-200503.pdf. d. Provide a master Table of Contents which includes links to navigate to all the files on the CD. The chapter labels shall identify the information included in that chapter as well as its file name, i.e.: RTU Panel Layout. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B e. Each PDF file shall contain a table of contents at the beginning of the file which includes hypertext links or bookmarks to navigate the file contents per section/chapter. The chapter labels shall identify the information included in that chapter as well as its file name, i.e.: RTU Panel Layout. f. Scanned images of written documents are not acceptable. Document must allow character selection. Text within a file shall be transferable to other documents. g. Submit a preliminary version of the electronic format of the manual for review. Upon approval of the preliminary submittal, the Contractor shall provide 3 copies of the electronic manual to the Owner. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suppliers Qualifications: The complete system shall be configured, programmed, and installed by one qualified system supplier who is regularly engaged and qualified in designing and building instrument control systems. The systems company shall have been in existence under its own name for at least 10 years. Qualifications shall include five years of successfully providing similar systems, a qualified local area-based (D/FW metroplex) technical staff and design office, physical facilities, and personnel to complete the work specified, and competent service personnel to service and operate the equipment provided. The system suppliers shall assume complete systems responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all subsystems and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The installation supervisor shall have had experience in overseeing installation and start-up of at least three similar installations. The bidder shall submit, upon ENGINEER's request, complete company history, resumes of full time project manager for this project, other key full-time system analysts, programmers, technicians, and submit project list with costs, OWNER, contact person, phone number, etc. B. Tests: The complete system shall be assembled and tested at the job site. The OWNER'S representative and the ENGINEER'S presence will be required at the time of final testing at the system supplier's facilities. C. Standards: All applicable NEC, ISA, IEEE, NEMA, UL, ANSI, IEC, FCC, FM standards shall apply. All equipment shall be new and UL listed and labeled. D. Assembly, Storage, & Handling: The complete system, including all individual electronic component units, shall be assembled and stored in air-conditioned and heated facilities with low humidity. Once assembled and tested, the system shall be stored in air-conditioned and heated rooms. Ship the unit to job site only after the control room has been built and its HVAC system is in operation. E. Acceptable PLC Manufacturers: Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Control Microsystems SCADAPack. 2.No others approved. F. Acceptable SCADA Installers: 1. D&H Automation: Contact: Herschel Henson (817) 205-9288 2. No other approved. G. Acceptable Radio Manufacturers: 1. Freewave. 2. No others approved. H. Acceptable UPS manufacturer: 1. APC. 2. No others approved. 1.06 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES A. As a minimum, provide the following compatible spare parts, tools, and supplies as a part of this CONTRACT: 1. Two (2) each I/O modules for analog and discrete input/output signals. Each module to have 8 I/O points. 2. Two (2) spare 24 V. DC power supplies of the type furnished. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Equipment supplier and the CONTRACTOR shall warrant to the OWNER that the equipment delivered with reference to this specification complies with this specification. B. The equipment supplier and the CONTRACTOR shall warrant the equipment as to defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the project. Vendor shall include a copy of his special equipment warranty with the shop drawings. The warranty specified by this specification shall be exclusive, and in lieu of all other warranties whether written, implied, orally presented, or statutory. 2.00 PRODUCTS Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-8 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS A.The control system shall be configured using microprocessor-based programmable controllers for local process control functions. Each controller shall be equipped with central processing unit, power supplies and individual uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to perform logic control functions based on the program stored in memory and the status of inputs and outputs. Memory will be required such that there is a minimum of 20 percent spare, and will be non-volatile. Automatic shutdown feature shall be selectable such that the desired field condition will be the default condition in the event of power loss or system failure. Power supplies shall be provided for the process controller as required with built-in protection against short-circuits, overcurrent, and overvoltage. 1. The programmable controller shall be capable of complete control, including PID control, digital logic control, batch, and setpoint control. 2. The entire PLC system shall immediately shut down and annunciate the occurrence of any of the following abnormal circumstances: a. Memory parity error. b. Loss of signal communication between CPU and I/O's. c. Loss of logic power to any portion of the system. d. Halt or interruption of memory scan. e. Detection of any incomplete relay ladder rungs in memory. B. The PLC system shall accomplish the control requirements of the loop descriptions, and Contract Documents. C. The design application and installation of the PLC system shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.1. D. PLC programming shall be documented annotated in detail, and factory tested. 2.02 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) A. HMI shall utilize system monitor displays, mouse, and keyboard(s). Interface functionality shall include: 1. Graphics representing process 2. Individual process/equipment screens 3. Alarm screen 4. Display of real time and historical process trends Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-9 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 5. Set point parameters that are password protected 6.Graphic representation of plant operations with interactive status and measurement symbols 7. Annunciation 8. PLC Clock displays for monitoring time synchronization 9. Communication and network monitor screens 10. Navigational menus such as header/footer buttons B. The HMI and historian system shall report the following events: 1. All entries initiated by operator including the following: a. Console key changes b. Beginning and final values of setpoint and output changes c. Mode changes (i.e., auto to manual) d. Which console changes were made from e. Time change was made 2. Events: a. Description of event b. Time of event c. Resolution of 100 milliseconds maximum. 2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. The PLC system shall operate in: 1. Ambient conditions of 0-40°C temperature. 2. 0- 95 percent relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning. 3. Elevation: 1000’ above sea level. B. Environmental Controls: 1. Furnish circulation fans in solid state control system enclosures. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-10 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.04 INPUT/OUTPUT CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS: A.Outputs shall be fused: 1. External fusing shall be provided if output module does not possess internal fusing. 2. Fuses provided external to output model shall: a. Be in accordance with module manufacturer's specifications. b. Be installed at terminal block. B. Install bleeding resistors across input from field devices which leak current sufficiently to flicker input status light. C. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the I/O enclosure. D. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. E. Provide terminal blocks with continuous marking strip. F. Size terminals to accommodate all active data base points and spares. G. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. Stripping back twisted shielded pair and twisting together all the shields is not acceptable. H. PLC I/O arrangement: 1. Where the PLC is utilized to control multiple trains of equipment, the PLC components (I/O modules, power supplies, etc.) shall be assigned so that the failure of one component does not affect equipment on all trains. I/O modules shall be segregated on a train basis unless required otherwise for safety reasons. I. All PLC control system components shall be capable of meeting or exceeding electromagnetic interference tests per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2. J. Incorporate the following minimum safety measures: 1. Master Safety Relay: a. Cuts off power to I/O devices upon de-energization b. Multiple Master Safety Relays shall be available as required to provide ability to control separate designated blocks of the control program. 2. Watchdog Function to Monitor: Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-11 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B a. Internal processor clock failure b.Processor memory failure c. Loss of communication between processor and I/O modules d. Processor ceases to execute logic program e. Peer to Peer communication between PLCs. 3. Safety Function Wiring: a. Emergency shutdown switches shall not be wired directly into the controller. 4. An emergency power disconnect shall be placed in the power circuit feeding the power supply as a means of removing power from the entire PLC system. a. Capacitor shall be placed across the disconnect to protect against current outrush through trails. 5. Safe Wiring: a. Equipment failure mode shall be selected so that the loss of power or control signal to the equipment will result in the equipment either shutting down or operating safely. b. Activation of alarms and stopping of equipment shall result from the de- energization of control circuits, rather than the energization of control circuits. c. Low voltage control signal wires: 1). Place in conduit segregated for that purpose only 2). Twisted shielded wire pair 3). Not located in the same conduit or bundle with power wiring 6. Initial Safety Conditions: a. Utilize program module to dictate output states in a known and safe manner prior to running of control program. b. Utilize program each time PLC is re-initiated and the control program activated. 7. PLC Fault Relay: a. Placed in series with any other emergency stop conditions b. Opening of PLC Fault Contact: Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-12 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1). Upon unsafe or undesirable system operation, including: a).Loss of memory b). Processor fault c). Power supply fault d). Isolation failure e). Communications failure f). Scan time overrun g). Module failure 2). Results from de-energization of PLC fault relay 3). Causes Master Safety Relay to de-energize 8. Monitoring of Internal Faults and Display: a. Internal PLC system status and faults shall be monitored and displayed. Monitored items shall include: 1). Memory ok/loss of memory 2). Processor ok/processor fault 3). Battery ok/battery low 4). Power supply ok/power supply fault 5). Isolation failure 6). High CPU temperature 7). Scan time overrun 8). Module failure 9. Control of Programs: a. Protect access to PLC program loading with locked, key operated selector switches. 10. Effects of Failure: a. PLC system shall incorporate safe responses to the following failure effects: 1). Power losses, interruptions, excursions, dips, and transients. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-13 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2). Loss or corruption of memory 3).Information transfer corruption or loss 4). "Fail on" or "Fail off" of inputs or outputs 5). Unreadable signals 6). Addressing errors 7). Processor faults 11. Design PLC system with high noise immunity to prevent occurrence of false logic signals resulting from switching transients, relay and circuit breaker noise or conducted and radiated radio frequency interference. 12. Incorporate noise suppression and inductive load suppression design into input, output, and logic modules 2.05 COMPONENTS A. PLC System Central Processor Unit (CPU): 1. Completely solid state CPU designed to provide: a. Digital relay logic b. Analog loop control c. Other required control functions: 1). Counting 2). Floating point math computations 3). Timing 4). Analog Scaling 2. To provide communications with other control systems and man-machine interfaces as specified. 3. Memory: a. Flash non-battery ram. 4. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 60 days memory retention with fresh batter. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-14 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B a. Provide visual indication of battery status and alarm low battery voltage. b.Memory battery backup shall be capable of 14 days memory retention after the "Battery Low" indicating LED is on. 5. 20 percent minimum spare useable memory capacity after all required programming is in place and operating. 6. Capable of executing all control functions required by the Contract Drawings including digital and analog loops. 7. Built-in three-mode (proportional-integral-derivative) control capabilities. a. As directly selectable algorithms requiring no user knowledge of programming languages. 8. On line reconfigurable. 9. Lighted status indicators for "RUN" and "FAILURE." 10. Capable of manual or automatic control mode transfer from the HMI system or from within the control strategy. Transfer shall be bumpless and balanceless. 2.06 INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) MODULES A. Provide I/O system with: 1. I/O solid state boards with status lights indicating I/O status and board failure. 2. Electric isolation between logic and field device. 3. Individually fused outputs with blown fuses indication. 4. Capability of withstanding low energy common mode transient to 1500 V without failure. 5. Incorporate noise suppression design. 6. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge-withstand capability tests, per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1. 7. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS1 B. Discrete I/O Modules: 1. Interface to ON/OFF devices 2. I/O status indicator module front Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-15 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Voltage rating to match circuit voltage 4.Output current rating: a. Match maximum circuit current draw b. Minimum 1.5 A/point for 120 V AC applications 5. Individually fused with blown fuse indication. C. Analog I/O Modules: 1. Inputs to accept signals indicated on Drawings or Specifications 2. 16 bit resolution 3. I/O chassis supplied power for powering connected field devices 4. Isolated (differential) inputs and outputs 5. User configurable for desired fault response state 6. Provide output signals as indicated on Drawings and Specifications D. Spare I/O Modules: Each LPU-PLC shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare analog and 20 percent spare discrete I/O points installed and wired to terminal blocks, isolates, surge devices, and relays inside the LPU. 2.07 POWER SUPPLY UNITS: 1. Provide regulated power units: a. Designed to operate with PLC system and shall provide power to: 1). All components of PLC system 2). Two-wire or four-wire field instruments 3). Other devices as indicated on Drawings or Specifications b. Capable of supplying PLC system when all of the specified spare capacity is utilized c. Each power supply shall be sized such that it will carry no more than 75 percent of capacity under normal loads. 2. Electrical service to PLC system is 105 to 125 V, 60 HZ, +1 percent, 1 PH power. 3. Separate AC circuit breakers shall be provided for each power supply. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-16 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. If the PLC system is field expandable beyond the specified spare capacity, and if such expansion requires power supply modification, note such requirements in the submittals and allow room in the PLC system enclosure. 5. Provide integral battery backup to maintain 60 seconds upon loss of all AC power. This is required to ensure transient power surges and dips do not affect the operation of the PLC system. 6. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS1 7. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge-withstand capability tests per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1. 8. Power Distribution: a. Immune to transients and surges resultant from noisy environment. b. Shall provide constant voltage level DC distribution to all devices. 9. Provide UPS in the PLC enclosure. 2.08 HMI CENTRAL CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM A.The HMI central computer system shall be configured and programmed to maintain a real- time database of all input/output points within the system. The central system shall monitor and control the local process controllers; it will log selectable points within the system, and be capable of data management such that all data is available while monitoring concurrently. The system provided shall include the following features: 1. Multi -tasking Operating System 2. Data Collection of Analog and Digital I/O 3. Historical and Archival Data Logging 4. Alarming 5. Trending - Historical and Real-Time 6. Networking 7. Real-Time Multi-tasking 8. Event Processing - Control Strategy Initiation Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-17 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 9. Easily Configured Displays and Display Modification with Graphic icons. 10.Real-Time Display with Status Change Color Change Feature 11. Pre-emptive multitasking 12. Dynamic objects for configuring I/O devices 13. I/O Driver software for PLCs provided B. Data Collection: The real-time database shall be modified to manage an additional 1,000 points minimum in any combination of analog/digital I/O. C. Data Logging: Real-time database points shall be selectable for logging. D. Report Generation: Contractor shall develop or modify reports for up to two reports. 1. Alarm/event logs shall record all alarms immediately as they occur. The message is to include the time of the alarm, point name, and a description of the alarm. Time of the operator acknowledgment and return to normal are also to be recorded. Events, including operator log on, system control point change, and operator control functions, are also to be reported. 2. The system is to be equipped with a facility for time-generated reports such as alarm summary, shift log of events, etc. a. The following custom reports shall be generated: 1). Standard Format: a). User configurable b). Contain selected information from any log, event, or alarm list c). Capable of producing custom log report for periodic and on-demand printing of a list of process or calculated variables 2). Variable Format: a). User configurable b). Ability to include any system data including: (1). Calculated time based on averages (2). Totalizations (3). Minimum values Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-18 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B (4). Minimum times (5).Maximum values (6). Maximum times 3). Reports shall not require software programming to setup. 4). All data setup in reports shall be output to Microsoft Excel unless specified otherwise. E. Trending: Trend graphics are to be provided as either a stand-alone tool for analysis, or as a real-time recorder. Compression techniques shall be provided for automatic rescaling, optimal resolution, and time slot averaging to give the operator an efficient interface for analysis. Datapoints for trending are to be selectable directly from the database by scrolling through the tag database and selecting the desired points to trend. The trend facility is to provide the ability to generate reports to provide the operator with a hard copy of his analysis. F. Networking: Facilities shall be provided to network the system such that the real-time database generated within the system can be easily transferred to other computers for manipulation and analysis. G. Displays: Displays are to be accessible through the use of the mouse and/or touch screen. Status is displayed on the screen through the use of color and alphanumerics. The mouse and/or touch screen can change the status of a discrete device or the output value of an analog device. Displays shall be easily built or reconfigured through the use of an established library of symbols. The system shall be easily modified to change the values displayed, the format and arrangement of the display. Status colors changed within each display shall include tanks, line, rotating equipment, etc. H. The graphic displays shall have the following additional capabilities: 1. Utilize ISA symbols for devices 2. Have selectable colors 3. Utilize loop numbers, equipment numbers, and valve number 4. Devices shall dynamically change colors on status change 5. Graphics shall be pixel oriented 6. Level indication shall be dynamic 7. Have bar-graph capability Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-19 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 8. Have complete touch screen interface. 9.Graphic icon library. 2.09 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY A. The system supplier shall provide an Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for the programmable controllers, and control panels. The systems supplier shall size the UPS for the connected load plus 20% spare capacity. The UPS shall be equal to Liebert or Topaz, and shall have capacity to supply power for a period not less than two hours continuously for main computers and LPUs. 2.10 ENCLOSURES FOR PLC A. Housings: Each PLC with its UPS unit shall be housed in a separate free-standing NEMA 12 enclosures. B. The enclosure shall be equipped with a 120 volt grounded duplex receptacle and a switched service light free of RFI. All switches, fuses, terminal blocks, etc., shall have permanent nameplates or labels for identification. C. All equipment shall be mounted in such a manner that all maintenance may be accomplished with easy access through the door(s). 2.11 900 MHZ FREQUENCY HOPPING RADIO & ANTENNAS A. Radio: Freewave or approved equal. 1. Frequency range: 902–928MHz (Frequency Hopping) 2. Data transmission rate: 16 kbps-500 kbps (Adjustable) 3. Transmission power: max 1 W B. Yagi: Antenna shall be specifically designed for 902-928 MHz frequency band. The antenna shall Mounting casting shall permit horizontal or vertical polarization. Internal balun, coax feed and connectors shall be sealed in a foam potting system which prevents moisture penetration. Antenna shall be RAD-900-ANT-YAGI-10-N or approved equal. Antenna shall have a wind rating of 125 mph. 1. Frequency range: 902–928MHz (Frequency Hopping) 2. Gain (over dipole): 6 dBi 3. VSWR:1.5:1 Maximum Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-20 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. Impedance:50 ohms 5. Front-to-back ratio: 20 dB minimum 6. Input power rating: 100 watts 7. Polarization: H or V 8. Termination: N female 2.12 COAXIAL CABLE A. Coaxial cable shall meet the following requirements: Characteristic impedance:50 ohms Outer Conductor:Copper, annularly corrugated Inner Conductor:Copper Dielectric:Closed cell low loss foam Seal:Connector o-rings to seal out moisture 1. Coaxial cable shall be Times Microwave LMR type or approved equal. 2.Diameter of coaxial cable shall be sized as indicated on the drawings and so that feedline loss from the antenna-side of the coaxial surge suppressor to the antenna does not exceed 1dB for directional antennas and 2 dB for omni-directional antennas. Feedline losses shall be calculated at the operating radio frequency and shall include losses in cable and connectors. The minimum size coaxial cable provided from the panel to the antenna shall be ½” diameter unless larger size is shown on drawings. 3. All coaxial connectors shall be Type-N connectors. Connectors shall be manufactured by the same cable manufacturer which furnishes the coaxial cable. Connectors shall be Andrews Corporation Heliax cable connectors, or approved equal. All connectors shall be constructed of brass or be silver plated as recommended by manufacturer. Connectors shall have o-ring seal. 4. All connections shall be weatherproofed using 3M-brand cold shrink weatherproofing kit or approved equal cold shrink weather proofing kit. 5. Provide a pre-made cable assembly of Times Microwave LMR coaxial cable to connect from the radio antenna port to the radio-side of the coaxial surge suppressor. Provide straight or angled N-type connectors as necessary to route cable assembly within panel without exceeding manufacturer’s recommended bend radius. The pre-made cable Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-21 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B shall be assembled by the coaxial cable manufacturer and shall be shipped with a certification of assembly and testing. 6. Cable hangers shall be Andrews Hanger Model 42396A-5 for 7/8” cable or 43211A for ½” cable with Andrews Round Member Adapter Model 31670, or approved equal. The use of plastic tie wraps is not acceptable. 2.13 COAXIAL GROUNDING KIT A. Grounding straps shall be solid copper for high current handling. Construction shall be of the non-braided type. Grounding cable shall have field attachable grounding lug with a two- part tape system for weatherproofing. Grounding kit shall be Andrew Corporation or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. System equipment shall be installed where indicated in the Contract Documents. Power and signal connections between components shall provide the specified functions. Install according to equipment manufacturer's instruction. B. The system Supplier Contractor shall utilize their own printers, monitor's, and computers for programming, testing, and start-up. The use of the OWNER's computers, monitor's, or printers shall not be acceptable until the entire system has been installed, debugged, programmed, and operated to ENGINEER's satisfaction. 3.02 PROGRAMMING A. The loop descriptions and diagrams shown in the Contract Documents are functional only and do not attempt to specify detail program coding that may be required. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize this functional information to develop complete application programming for the PLC equipment provided under this CONTRACT. Programs shall be designed to provide fail-safe operation of equipment in case of PC logic or power supply failure. Fail-safe shall be defined as "stopped" for all drives and "closed" for valves, unless otherwise specified. Up to three graphic pages shall be required for the operator-interface, and will be developed via a menu-driven color graphics editor. Interrupting logic between the LPU and central computer system shall be required as per system sequence of operation. An additional 1 graphics shall be developed in the field in coordination with the OWNER and the ENGINEER. The graphics shall be sufficiently detailed to include all equipment, pipes, valves, solenoids, meters, switches, etc. Graphics shall include equipment tag numbers and display the current flow rates, levels, quantities, status, elapsed Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-22 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B time of equipment, etc. All such work shall be done at no extra cost to the OWNER. Before programming the graphics, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a set of drawings for ENGINEERS review. 3.03 DOCUMENTATION A. Following delivery to the site, the equipment manufacturer, in the presence of the ENGINEER, shall demonstrate operation of the complete system. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation for all application software. Documentation system shall be diagrams in ladder-rung or functional block format, and shall show all input devices to the left of the left "power rail" and all outputs to the right of the right "power rail." The diagrams shall show all device codes and functional description used in the project manual, and shall also show PLC address codes, element codes, and I/O assembly codes, modules numbers, and terminal numbers. 3.04 TESTS A. All elements of the SCADA system, both hardware and software, shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of the Specifications. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install the field instruments, PLC, remote input/output (RI/O), and interface equipment in a schedule to meet the construction sequencing. C. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Software Acceptance Tests (SAT) 2. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) 3. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT) 4. 30-Day Acceptance Test D. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied. E. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with Engineer-approved procedures and documented. Each specific test to be performed shall be described and a space provided after it for signoff by the appropriate party after its satisfactory completion. F. Copies of signoff test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required test documentation. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-23 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B G. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. Define these simulations techniques in the test procedure. H. Coordinate all testing with other Contractors, the OWNER, and the Engineer. I. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER will actively participate in many of the tests. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER reserves the right to test or retest any and all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the approved test procedures. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER reserves the right to observe and/or inspect the work during any phase. J. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. 3.05 SOFTWARE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. Prior to the start of the witnessed Software Acceptance Test (SAT), the entire system shall be installed on site, inspected and tested to ensure that it is fully operational and ready for the SAT demonstration testing. B. All panels and assemblies of the subsystem shall be completely installed except I/O signals to field elements or devices shall not be connected. The system shall be inspected and tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals and the Contract Documents. C. The PLC and subsystem primary elements, shall be interconnected and tested to ensure that the system is fully operational. The system shall be operated without signals leaving or entering from the field elements or devices for at least one week to verify that it is capable of continuous operation. Outputs to and inputs from the excluded primary elements shall be simulated. D. The system shall be tested, installed on site to demonstrate that it is operational and in conformance with the Contract Documents. E. Notify the Engineer and OWNER in writing a minimum of 30 days in advance of the proposed starting date for the Software Acceptance Test. At the time of notification, submit any revisions to the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer in the Project System Plan. F. The purpose of the test shall be to witness and verify the functionability, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. The system must operate continually for 24 hours without failure before the test shall be judged successful. Successful completion of this test shall be the basis for approval of the system. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-24 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B G. The Software Acceptance tests shall be performed on all the equipment installed including the HMI system, PLC panels and subsystems. The SAT shall be a two-part text procedure; Part I shall include the PLC sub-system to verify all I/O addresses and proper step sequence for all features. Part II shall add the HMI to verify all screen displays, addressing and report generation. H. Where hardware items are of standard manufacture and in current production, the manufacturer shall certify that applicable tests have been performed and met, in accordance with IEEE and ISA Standards, and be prepared to supply copies of data to Engineer upon request. Such statements shall accompany the equipment submittals called for in SUBMITTALS of this Section. Any assemblage of devices together with operating programs shall be tested together as provided herein. I. The various tests performed during Software Acceptance Test shall be designed to demonstrate that the hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The test conditions shall resemble, as closely as possible, actual conditions. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation shall be supplied at no cost to the OWNER. J. Some of tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Conduct online modifications to the database. 2. Demonstrate operability of the interfaces (hardware and software). 3. Demonstrate operability of the data communication network. 4. Demonstrate all system software functions specified. 5. Verify the displays and interactive capabilities of an operator's console. 6. Simulate selected normal and abnormal operating conditions to verify the performance of the monitoring and control functions. 7. Simulate every I/O point by opening or shorting digital inputs, inject appropriate signals into every analog input point, and measure the output signal from each analog output point. K. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and retested prior to completing the Software Acceptance Test. L. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer at the test site both before and during the Software Acceptance Test. 1. All drawings and specifications, addenda, and change orders. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-25 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Master copy of the test procedure. 3.List of the equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial number. 4. Design-related hardware submittals applicable to the equipment being tested. 5. Preliminary software documentation submittal. M. The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: 1. Testing and meetings: Nominally 8 hours per day; 24 hours per day if required to meet schedule. 2. Morning meetings to review the day's test schedule. 3. Evening meetings to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule. N. All test data and procedures followed during testing shall be logged, and certified copies of the logs shall be provided to the Engineer and OWNER. O. The Engineer will observe each test once on a pass-fail basis. The Engineer alone has the authority to determine if a test passes or fails. Only four (4) fifteen-minute windows per day will be allowed during the test procedure to make corrections to software and successfully pass a re-test. Otherwise, that test will be declared a failure. If a test fails, it will be put on a retest schedule. If other tests to follow rely on a particular test passing, then the following tests will also be placed on a retest schedule even though they were not tested before. Retesting shall not interrupt the test schedule. The CONTRACTOR may schedule retest days during the testing period, but not more than two per week. All retesting shall only occur on a day designated in the schedule or at the end of testing. P. All time and expense incurred by the Engineer and/or OWNER’S staff for all retests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and paid to the OWNER. Time and expense incurred shall be on a time and material basis tracked by the Engineer and OWNER for their own staff and presented to the CONTRACTOR on a periodic basis. Q. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite the correction of any deficiency discovered during testing. The CONTRACTOR shall have personnel from each trade to standby during the test period to immediately correct, or adjust any item of software or hardware or equipment causing a test to fail. 3.06 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. General: Prior to start-up, the installed system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and documented) that it is ready for operation. Download all database on job computers from Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-26 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B this test onwards. The OWNER and ENGINEER shall be notified when ORT starts. Copies of ORT forms that have been signed off by the CONTRACTOR shall be copied and sent to the OWNER and ENGINEER on a daily basis for record purposes only. No signature by the ENGINEER or OWNER is required for ORT forms. B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these specifications. Actual real-time signals generated from the field devices shall be used. Simulation of field signals shall not be permitted. This test is intended to actually operate the entire process and to find and correct all real-time operational deficiencies. 1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer- approved forms and checklists. a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following: 1). Project name 2). Loop number 3). Tag number for each component 4). Checkoffs/signoffs for each component a). Tag/identification b). Installation c). Termination - wiring d). Termination - tubing e). Calibration/adjustment 5). Checkoffs/signoffs for the loop a). Panel interface terminations b). I/O interface terminations c). I/O signal operation d). Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted e). Total loop operational Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-27 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 6). Space for comments 7).Space for signoff by Contractor b. Each active analog subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall include the following: 1). Project name 2). Loop number 3). Component tag number or I/O module number 4). Component code number analog system 5). Manufacturer (for analog system element) 6). Model number/serial number (for analog system) 7). Summary of functional requirements, for example: a). For indicators and recorders: Scale and chart ranges b). For transmitters/converters: Input and output ranges c). For computing elements: Function d). For controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID) e). For switching elements: Unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual) f). For I/O modules: Input or output 8). Calibrations; for example: a). For analog devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling b). For discrete devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points c). For controllers: Mode settings (PID) d). For I/O modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling 9). Space for comments 10).Space for signoff by the Contractor Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-28 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the Engineer and Owner upon request. 3. These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer will review the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. 3.07 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Once ORT has been completed and operational readiness has been confirmed, a witnessed Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with the Contract Documents. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and component-by- component basis. This test shall be scheduled and conducted only after the plant has been detected and resolved. B. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS except that the entire installed PICS shall be tested and all functions demonstrated. C. Simulation of field signals, or simulation of the response of the process, or the response of individual components, or the functions being monitored or controlled, shall not be permitted. Simulation may be permitted with the express permission of the ENGINEER. The decision to simulate is the ENGINEER's alone. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Contract Price the time necessary to wait for all process responses. D. Updated versions of the documentation called for under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during the test. In addition, one copy of the approved Instrumentation O&M Manual shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during testing. The approved schedule shall be followed strictly on an item-by-item basis. Combining of test items shall be at the discretion of the ENGINEER alone. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Control Price adequate time necessary to complete each test item one at a time. E. The daily schedule called for under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall also be followed during the Functional Demonstration Test. F. The Engineer will observe each test once on a pass-fail basis. The Engineer alone has the authority to determine if a test passes or fails. Only one (1) fifteen-minute window per day will be allowed during the test procedure to make corrections to software or to field equipment and successfully pass a re-test; otherwise, that test will be declared a failure. If a test fails, it will be put on a retest schedule. If other tests to follow rely on a particular test Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-29 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B which has failed, then the following tests will also be placed on a retest schedule even though they were not tested. Retesting shall not interrupt the test schedule. The CONTRACTOR may schedule retest days during the testing period, but not more than two per week. All retesting shall only occur on a day designated in the schedule or at the end of testing. G. All time and expense incurred by the Engineer and/or OWNER’S staff for all retests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and paid to the OWNER. Time and expense incurred shall be on a time and material basis tracked by the Engineer and OWNER for their own staff and presented to the CONTRACTOR on a periodic basis. H. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite the repair or correction of any deficiency discovered during testing. The CONTRACTOR shall have personnel representing each trade to standby during the test period to immediately correct, repair, or adjust any item of hardware, software or field equipment causing a test to fail. I. The system shall operate continuously for 100 hours without failure before this test will be considered successful. 3.08 30-DAY ACCEPTANCE TEST A. All database errors must be corrected prior to the start of the 30-Day Acceptance Test. The 30-Day Acceptance Test will not be considered successful until all database is correct. B. Any malfunction during the test shall be analyzed and corrections made by the Contractor. The Engineer and Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of the test. The cost of a retest shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR as specified. C. After completion of the Functional Demonstration Test and project Start-up, the Owner shall be responsible for operation of the entire System for a period of 30 consecutive days, under conditions of full operation, without single non-field repairable malfunction. D. During this test, Contractor personnel shall be present during startup and as required. The Contractor shall provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system and also are familiar with the overall plant process. E. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of the system. F. Any malfunction, during this 30 consecutive day test period, which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by the Contractor's personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered as a non-field-repairable malfunction. G. Upon completion of repairs, by the Supplier, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-30 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B H. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the Supplier shall perform repairs within 5 days or replacement within 30 days. I. Upon successful completion of the 30-Day Acceptance Test, approval of all as-built drawing and O&M Manuals, completion of all related Owner training, and delivery of all spare, expendable, and test equipment, the systems shall be considered substantially complete and the warranty period shall commence. 3.09 TRAINING A. Provide an integrated training program for the Owner's personnel at the jobsite. The Contractor shall submit a detailed training schedule and syllabus for approval. Tailor the training program to meet the specific needs of the Owner's personnel. Include training sessions, classroom and field, for managers, engineers, operators, and maintenance personnel. 3.10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING A. O&M training for each main and sub-system shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under the related Instrumentation specification sections. B. All training shall be given using only equipment identical to the equipment provided on this Contract or currently owned by the Owner. 3.11 ON-SITE SUPERVISION A. The Supplier shall provide, on-site, an experienced resident engineering manager to supervise and coordinate all of the on-site activities. This resident engineering manager shall be on-site as required during the total period to affect all the activities relating to the PICS. 3.12 START-UP AND TESTING TEAM A. The Supplier shall provide, on-site, a team of experienced engineering, technician, trades personnel, and software/configuring personnel during the total construction period to: 1. Thoroughly check the installation, termination, and adjustment of all the subsystems and their components. 2. Perform and complete all on-site tests. 3. Provide start-up assistance. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-31 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4.00 LOOP DESCRIPTIONS A.All alarms and changes in the system shall be recorded to display time, shift manager and time alarm acknowledged. Trend shall record display analysis, level, or flow and shall show date and time. Operator log in shall display date and time. All information shall be saved to an Excel spread sheet and all information shall be displayed on SCADA. Contractor shall coordinate with owner on instrumentation set points. B. This and the following section describe the process control narratives for the elevated storage tank site. The control narratives are not intended to be an exhaustive list of all components required to execute control strategies. Rather they are a supplement to the drawings, schedules, and other specification sections. C. Provide instrumentation hardware and software as necessary to perform control functions specified herein and as shown on drawings. D. Miscellaneous signals to be monitor via SCADA: 1. Intrusion alarm shall monitor if any of the two entrances at the bottom entrances to the tank. The following signals shall be monitored: a. 1 – pedestrian door b. 1 – truck door 2. Obstruction light test panel shall monitor the following signal: a. Obstruction light failure E. The UPS System shall send the following signals to be monitored via SCADA: 1. Utility Power Failure 2. Low Battery Power F. The Control Valve will be operated locally or remotely via the provided electronic controller. 1. Open, close and set position valve functions shall be local to the Control Valve and via SCADA. 2. Valve position feedback shall be indicated local to the Control Valve and at SCADA. 3. Remote enabled shall be sent to be monitored via SCADA. 4. The valve will send a discrete signal with the valve position. G. Level transmitter located near the bottom of the tank bowl monitors the level inside of the elevated storage tank. The level transmitter shall monitor the following signal: Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)40 90 02-32 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Tank Level 2.Low Level Alarm, set at: TBD 3. High Level Alarm, set at: TBD 4. Trend END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 APPENDIX A FAA DETERMINATION OF NO HAZARD TO AIR NAVIGATION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Mail Processing Center Federal Aviation Administration Southwest Regional Office Obstruction Evaluation Group 10101 Hillwood Parkway Fort Worth, TX 76177 Aeronautical Study No. 2018-ASW-12325-OE Prior Study No. 2018-ASW-2141-OE Page 1 of 4 Issued Date: 08/15/2018 Steve Glass Town of Prosper 121 W Broadway Prosper, TX 75078 ** DETERMINATION OF NO HAZARD TO AIR NAVIGATION ** The Federal Aviation Administration has conducted an aeronautical study under the provisions of 49 U.S.C., Section 44718 and if applicable Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations, part 77, concerning: Structure: Water Tank LPP 2.5 MG Elevated Water Storage Tank Location: Town of Prosper, TX Latitude: 33-13-49.09N NAD 83 Longitude: 96-51-06.13W Heights:600 feet site elevation (SE) 220 feet above ground level (AGL) 820 feet above mean sea level (AMSL) This aeronautical study revealed that the structure does not exceed obstruction standards and would not be a hazard to air navigation provided the following condition(s), if any, is(are) met: As a condition to this Determination, the structure is to be marked/lighted in accordance with FAA Advisory circular 70/7460-1 L Change 1, Obstruction Marking and Lighting, red lights - Chapters 4,5(Red),&12. Any failure or malfunction that lasts more than thirty (30) minutes and affects a top light or flashing obstruction light, regardless of its position, should be reported immediately to (877) 487-6867 so a Notice to Airmen (NOTAM) can be issued. As soon as the normal operation is restored, notify the same number. It is required that FAA Form 7460-2, Notice of Actual Construction or Alteration, be e-filed any time the project is abandoned or: _____ At least 10 days prior to start of construction (7460-2, Part 1) __X__ Within 5 days after the construction reaches its greatest height (7460-2, Part 2) This determination expires on 02/15/2020 unless: (a) the construction is started (not necessarily completed) and FAA Form 7460-2, Notice of Actual Construction or Alteration, is received by this office. (b) extended, revised, or terminated by the issuing office. (c) the construction is subject to the licensing authority of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and an application for a construction permit has been filed, as required by the FCC, within Attachment 3Item 12 Page 2 of 4 6 months of the date of this determination. In such case, the determination expires on the date prescribed by the FCC for completion of construction, or the date the FCC denies the application. NOTE: REQUEST FOR EXTENSION OF THE EFFECTIVE PERIOD OF THIS DETERMINATION MUST BE E-FILED AT LEAST 15 DAYS PRIOR TO THE EXPIRATION DATE. AFTER RE-EVALUATION OF CURRENT OPERATIONS IN THE AREA OF THE STRUCTURE TO DETERMINE THAT NO SIGNIFICANT AERONAUTICAL CHANGES HAVE OCCURRED, YOUR DETERMINATION MAY BE ELIGIBLE FOR ONE EXTENSION OF THE EFFECTIVE PERIOD. This determination is based, in part, on the foregoing description which includes specific coordinates, heights, frequency(ies) and power. Any changes in coordinates, heights, and frequencies or use of greater power, except those frequencies specified in the Colo Void Clause Coalition; Antenna System Co-Location; Voluntary Best Practices, effective 21 Nov 2007, will void this determination. Any future construction or alteration, including increase to heights, power, or the addition of other transmitters, requires separate notice to the FAA.This determination includes all previously filed frequencies and power for this structure. If construction or alteration is dismantled or destroyed, you must submit notice to the FAA within 5 days after the construction or alteration is dismantled or destroyed. This determination does include temporary construction equipment such as cranes, derricks, etc., which may be used during actual construction of the structure. However, this equipment shall not exceed the overall heights as indicated above. Equipment which has a height greater than the studied structure requires separate notice to the FAA. This determination concerns the effect of this structure on the safe and efficient use of navigable airspace by aircraft and does not relieve the sponsor of compliance responsibilities relating to any law, ordinance, or regulation of any Federal, State, or local government body. A copy of this determination will be forwarded to the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) because the structure is subject to their licensing authority. If we can be of further assistance, please contact our office at (817) 222-5929, or chris.shoulders@faa.gov. On any future correspondence concerning this matter, please refer to Aeronautical Study Number 2018- ASW-12325-OE. Signature Control No: 372199192-372878583 ( DNE ) Chris Shoulders Specialist Attachment(s) Frequency Data Map(s) cc: FCC Attachment 3Item 12 Page 3 of 4 Frequency Data for ASN 2018-ASW-12325-OE LOW FREQUENCY HIGH FREQUENCY FREQUENCY UNIT ERP ERP UNIT 901 902 MHz 7 W Attachment 3Item 12 Page 4 of 4 Sectional Map for ASN 2018-ASW-12325-OE Attachment 3Item 12 APPENDIX B GEOTECHNICAL REPORT Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 2711 N. Haskell Avenue, Suite 3300  Dallas, Texas 75204  214-217-2200  FAX 214-217-2201 www.freese.com TECHNICAL MEMORANDUM PROJECT DESCRIPTION This technical memorandum summarizes the results of the geotechnical investigation performed for the proposed Prosper 2.5 Million Gallon (MG) Elevated Storage Tank (EST). This work was provided under Freese and Nichols, Inc. (FNI) project number PRP17369, authorized by the contract with the Town of Prosper. The proposed EST will be constructed north of Fishtrap Road near the intersection of Fishtrap Road and Teel Parkway in Prosper, Texas (refer to Figures 1 and 2, attached). The EST will be a composite 2.5MG tank with a bowl diameter of 105 feet and a 54-foot diameter pedestal (plus or minus 5 feet for manufacturer-specific dimensions). The overall height of the EST will be approximately 207 feet above proposed grade. This geotechnical investigation was conducted to aid in the design of the proposed EST according to the following scope of service: Drill exploratory borings within the vicinity of the proposed EST to obtain soil and/or rock samples for field observation, testing, and classification; Perform laboratory tests on selected samples to determine soil classification and other pertinent engineering properties of the subsurface; Evaluate the collected data to determine a suitable foundation system(s) for support of the proposed EST; and Prepare a summary technical memorandum to document the findings and suggestions for inclusion in contract documents and specifications. This technical memorandum has been prepared based on our current knowledge and understanding of the proposed project. Changes in the design or location of the proposed EST, as described in this document, may require modification of the recommendations contained in this technical memorandum. This memorandum presents the results of the geotechnical investigation and analysis in a direct and abbreviated manner and is not intended to serve as a detailed geotechnical report. SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING The subsurface conditions were explored by drilling a total of four (4) borings to termination depths ranging from approximately 55 to 65 feet below the existing ground surface within the vicinity of the proposed EST, as shown on Figure 2 (Boring Location Map) included with this memorandum. The actual boring locations were not surveyed; however, the estimated geodetic coordinates have been included on the Boring Location Map and the boring logs for reference. The drilling was performed on February 1 and 2, 2018, by Texplor of Dallas, Inc. using a CME-55 truck-mounted drilling rig. Mr. Ron Randall of Geoscience Consultants International, LLC supervised the drilling and logged the TO:Mike Hagan, P.E., Sagar Khole, P.E. FROM:Holly Saez, P.E. SUBJECT:Geotechnical Investigation PROJECT:PRP17369 – 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank DATE:August 14, 2018 QC:Mike Shiflett, P.E. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. TEXAS REGISTERED ENGINEERING FIRM F-2144 08/14/2018 Attachment 3Item 12 Geotechnical Investigation – Prosper 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank August 14, 2018 Page 2 of 8 Project No. PRP17369 borings. Borings B-01 and B-03 were drilled “dry” using hollow-stem augers. Boring B-02 was drilled “dry” using continuous flight augers until a depth of 45 feet where rotary wash drilling was introduced. Boring B-04 utilized rotary wash techniques to obtain NX-size rock core samples. Push tubes and a split-spoon sampler were used to collect samples within the borings. The split-spoon sampler was used in conjunction with the Standard Penetration Test (SPT). The Texas Cone Penetrometer (TCP) test was performed to evaluate the rock consistency in situ. The borings were observed for indications of subsurface water entry during drilling and were checked for accumulated water before being backfilled with soil cuttings. Laboratory testing was performed on selected samples by Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. These samples were selected by FNI as being generally representative of specific subsurface strata encountered within the borings. Testing was performed to allow for material classification according to the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) and to evaluate pertinent engineering properties of the materials. These tests include moisture content, Atterberg limits, percentage passing a no. 200 sieve, unconfined compression tests, absorption pressure swell, and consolidation tests. The results of these tests are presented on the boring logs and individual test reports included with this memorandum. Tests to determine chloride concentration, soil resistivity, soil pH, and sulfate concentration were also performed to evaluate corrosion potential and the results are presented in Table 2 in the Soil Corrosion Potential section of this memorandum. The boring logs were prepared from the field logs and represent a generalized interpretation of the stratigraphy encountered within each boring based on field descriptions, in situ testing, and laboratory test results. Stratigraphy lines shown on the logs correspond to the approximate boundary between strata. In situ, this transition can be, and is often, gradual. The boring logs are included with this memorandum along with a key to the symbols and terms used on the logs. GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Geology and Stratigraphy The project site is mapped within the Eagle Ford geologic formation, according to the Geologic Atlas of Texas. The Eagle Ford formation typically consists of residual clay overlying shale bedrock. The clays are generally expansive, often jointed and blocky, and contain bentonite seams/partings. The bedrock weathers to form fine-grained materials with a clay-like structure that can exhibit significant expansive behavior. The shale is typically not as hard as other regional rock materials, such as limestone. The borings encountered residual overburden soils consisting of highly to moderately expansive clays and shaly clays (CH materials) underlain by shale. Table 1 summarizes the stratigraphy and is intended to represent the generalized stratigraphy used for the analysis, discussion, and recommendations in the following sections of this memorandum. Absorption pressure swell tests performed on the fat clays from samples collected within Borings B-01 and B-03 indicated a swell ranging from approximately 0.03 to 0.5 percent from in situ moisture contents and measured maximum swelling pressures ranging from about 200 to 530 pounds per square foot (psf). It should be noted that these samples had a high in situ moisture content when tested, which will underestimate the clay’s swell potential. Typically, clay will swell more when tested in dry conditions. The fat clays in the Eagle Ford shale are known to have a high swelling potential, as discussed further in the Expansive Soil Characteristics section. Attachment 3Item 12 Geotechnical Investigation – Prosper 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank August 14, 2018 Page 3 of 8 Project No. PRP17369 Table 1 – Generalized Stratigraphy Stratum Depth, feet1 Description 1 0-13 FAT CLAY (CH): Brownish-gray, stiff, moist 85 ≤ P200 ≤ 97 70 ≤ LL ≤ 89 44 ≤ PI ≤ 60 1,600 ≤ UC ≤ 3,200 psf 2 13-50 SHALE (WEATHERED): reddish-yellow, pale brown and light gray, very soft rock, trace calcareous and gypsum deposits 85 ≤ P200 ≤ 94 85 ≤ LL ≤ 97 44 ≤ PI ≤ 64 91 ≤ γdry ≤ 113 pcf 1,400 ≤ UC ≤ 14,200 psf 12”/92 blows ≤ TCP ≤ 4.75”/100 blows 3 50+ SHALE (UNWEATHERED): gray, hard rock 116 ≤ γdry ≤ 118 pcf 23,400 ≤ UC ≤ 27,000 psf 4”/100 blows ≤ TCP ≤ 1.25”/100 blows 1. Depth range measured from existing ground surface Groundwater Groundwater observations were made during drilling operations and immediately after drilling. Seepage was encountered in Boring B-02 at a depth of 23 feet prior to rotary wash drilling. Seepage was not observed in Borings B-01 and B-03 during or after drilling and seepage was not observed in Boring B-04 prior to rotary wash drilling. However, these observations do not preclude the possibility of groundwater or seepage at the site. The occurrence of groundwater can vary due to many factors, such as seasonal changes, site topography, surface runoff, the layering and permeability of subsurface strata, utilities, and other factors not evident at the time of this investigation. These observations of groundwater and seepage have been made during the course of this investigation. A detailed groundwater study has not been performed, and long-term observations would be necessary to accurately evaluate groundwater levels and fluctuations. Expansive Soil Characteristics The project site includes expansive soil that will exhibit shrink and swell behavior as moisture fluctuations occur over the design life of the EST and appurtenant structures. The magnitude of the shrink/swell behavior is dependent upon the thickness of the expansive soil and the depth of the active moisture zone. Moisture fluctuations occur due to seasonal cycles but are also influenced by drainage conditions and site grades, landscaping, irrigation practices, vegetation, groundwater, and the presence of flatwork or other impervious barriers. The total magnitude of shrink/swell movements is difficult to predict due to the large number of variables affecting this behavior. An estimate of the potential expansive soil movement was made using a variety of sources, including the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Method 124-E published by TxDOT, laboratory index and swell testing, engineering judgment, and engineering experience. Based on this information, the estimated soil movement, or PVR, is approximately 5 to 7 inches for a full seasonal moisture cycle (dry condition) with an active zone of 20 feet. Clays within this dry range represent the condition where the shrinkage potential is least and swell potential is greatest. Recognize that these values are not an exact determination of movement and are only an indication of the potential movements due to expansive soil for seasonal moisture fluctuations. Actual movements may be significantly larger than estimated due to inadequate site grading, poor drainage, ponding surface water, and/or leaks in utility lines. Significant changes to existing site grades can also alter actual PVR movements by changing the thickness of the expansive soil and/or altering the depth of the active moisture zone. Attachment 3Item 12 Geotechnical Investigation – Prosper 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank August 14, 2018 Page 4 of 8 Project No. PRP17369 Soil Corrosion Potential Several samples of the on-site soils were tested to evaluate the corrosion potential of the soils on buried steel and concrete. The corrosion suite of testing included chloride concentration, resistivity, pH, and sulfate concentration. The results of the corrosion testing performed are summarized below in Table 2. Table 2 – Summary of Corrosion Tests Boring Sample Depth, ft Chloride Concentration, ppm Soil Resistivity, Ohm-cm pH Sulfate Concentration, ppm B-01 0-2 ------60 B-02 0-2 4.86 990 7.79 <16.6 B-03 4-6 ------27,200 B-04 0-2 ------80 B-04 4-6 65.8 737 7.81 7,730 Corrosion of steel can be evaluated based on chloride content, soil resistivity, and pH. Table 3 provides some general guidance concerning corrosion potential related to these items. Table 3 – Soil Corrosion Potential Corrosion Potential Chloride Concentration, ppm Soil Resistivity, Ohm-cm pH Mild --> 5,000 > 6.5 Moderate < 500 2,000 – 5,000 5.5 – 6.5 High > 500 1,000 – 2,000 4.5 – 5.5 Very High --0 – 1,000 0 – 4.5 Sulfate content can be used to estimate the potential for chemical attack of concrete based on the severity levels per American Concrete Institute (ACI) Building Code 318 shown below in Table 4. Table 4 – Sulfate Attack Potential Severity Sulfate Concentration, ppm Negligible < 1,000 Moderate 1,000 – 2,000 Severe 2,000 – 20,000 Very Severe > 20,000 The results of the corrosion testing suggest the on-site soils at the pump station site generally have negligible or mild corrosion potential based on measured chloride and pH levels and very high corrosion potential based on the resistivity levels measured. The resulting sulfate concentration levels vary, but results suggest injurious sulfate attack could be very severe. ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS General Discussion Based upon the borings drilled for this investigation, drilled shafts bearing within the underlying unweathered shale should be considered for support of the EST. Due to the anticipated loads, low strength, and potential expansive behavior of the overburden clay soils/weathered shale at the site, a shallow foundation system – spread/ring footing – is not recommended. The size of the footing bearing within the overburden soils would be quite substantial to accommodate the anticipated loads and is expected to be cost prohibitive. The potential for long-term consolidation of the clay/weathered shale is also a concern. Although it is the responsibility of the Tank Manufacturer to design a foundation system compatible with the proposed tank design, various parameters and suggestions are provided in the following sections to assist with the design. The foundation system must be adequately sized to properly distribute loads and resist lateral, overturning, and uplift forces. Attachment 3Item 12 Geotechnical Investigation – Prosper 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank August 14, 2018 Page 5 of 8 Project No. PRP17369 Drilled Shafts Design of Shafts Drilled shafts used to support the proposed EST should be straight-sided, steel reinforced concrete shafts bearing within the underlying shale and designed based on the parameters provided in Table 5. Table 5 – Drilled Shaft Design Parameters Design Item Design Value Shaft Type Auger-excavated, Straight-sided Bearing Stratum Description Unweathered Gray Shale Bearing Stratum Depth 50 feet below Existing Grade (Estimated) Minimum Penetration 5 feet into Unweathered Gray Shale Net Allowable End Bearing Pressure 20,000 psf Allowable Side Shear, Compression 2,500 psf within Bearing Stratum Allowable Side Shear, Tension 1,700 psf within Bearing Stratum Side Shear to Neglect With Casing: Depth of Casing Plus 2 feet Without Casing: Overburden Clays/Shales within Strata 1 and 2 Minimum Shaft Diameter 24 inches The design values have been selected to include a minimum factor of safety of three with regard to shear failure. Foundations designed based on these values should experience minor settlement due to loading when properly constructed, but it is recommended that the design account for one inch of potential settlement. The shafts should fully penetrate the weathered shale (Stratum 2 within Table 1) and bear within the underlying gray shale. The weathered shale will provide side shear resistance for the shafts but are not a suitable bearing material because of the potential for significant settlements. The depth of the shafts should be based upon the recommended penetration and not upon a predetermined elevation to account for potential variations in the depth of the bearing material. Shaft spacing will affect the design parameters presented in Table 5. For shafts with a center-to-center (c/c) spacing less than 3-shaft diameters, a reduction factor should be applied to the bearing pressure and side shear values. A reduction factor of 0.75 should be applied to shafts with a c/c spacing of 1-shaft diameter. For c/c spacing of at least 3 diameters, the factor is 1.0, and the reduction factor between these points can be linearly interpolated. For shafts with different diameters, the larger shaft size should govern. Structural components, such as grade beams or floor slabs, should be supported by and structurally tied to the drilled shafts. A minimum 12-inch void space should be provided below the beams or floor slabs to prevent expansive soil movements from applying pressure to the bottom of the foundation. If the void spaces are formed using cardboard carton forms, the forms should not be crushed or allowed to become wet before or during concrete placement. A vertical pre-cast panel should be provided along the edges of the void space to prevent the collapse of the surrounding soil into the void space. The void spaces should extend the full width of the grade beams and the full length between shafts. The shafts will be subject to uplift pressures from the expansive subgrade and will create tensile forces within the shafts. Accordingly, each shaft should be steel reinforced to withstand these forces. Although actual uplift forces vary with depth and moisture condition, steel reinforcement design for soil uplift pressures may be modeled using 1,500 psf acting over the entire shaft perimeter within the upper 15 feet of the clay/shale subgrade (based on existing site grades). The penetration of the shafts into the recommended bearing stratum should be adjusted as necessary to resist uplift forces caused by swelling of the expansive subgrade in combination with the anticipated loads from the EST. Attachment 3Item 12 Geotechnical Investigation – Prosper 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank August 14, 2018 Page 6 of 8 Project No. PRP17369 Installation of Shafts A Geotechnical Engineer should monitor the installation of the shafts to identify proper bearing material, adequate penetration of the shaft into the bearing material, and verify that the base and sides of the shaft excavations are free of loose cuttings. Seepage was encountered in one of the exploratory borings drilled for this investigation; therefore, if seepage occurs during construction, it may be possible to suitably limit its impact by scheduling the concrete placement to immediately follow the drilling. This approach will require rapid installation of reinforcing steel and concrete placement. Shafts should be completed as rapidly as possible after completion of excavation and observation of the shaft and no longer than 4 hours after completion of the excavation. Prolonged air exposure or inundation of the bearing surface with groundwater or seepage could deteriorate the bearing material and require adjustment of the shaft depth if delays or inundation occurs. Precautions are required during the placement of reinforcing steel and concrete to prevent loose soil and debris from falling into the excavation. The concrete should not be allowed to strike the reinforcing steel cage or the sides of the excavation during placement. Mushrooming of the shafts near or at the surface should not be allowed to prevent the formation of a horizontal surface that will be subject to expansive soil uplift pressures. Pedestal Floor Slab, Overflow Splash Box, and Mow Strip The potential shrink and swell movements of the expansive portions of the subgrade at this site pose a risk to structural components bearing within the clay, such as the pedestal floor slab, overflow splash box, and mow strip. Consideration should be given to the use of a structural floor slab for the pedestal floor in combination with the drilled shafts used to support the EST. The floor slab should be supported on grade beams structurally tied to the drilled shafts, and the minimum void space mentioned in the Drilled Shafts section should be maintained beneath the slab and grade beams between shafts. A vapor barrier is recommended beneath the floor slab for damp proofing. Over excavation and removal of the expansive clays is recommended for the areas below the overflow splash box and mow strip. The expansive clays should be replaced with non-expansive select fill meeting the material and compaction requirements detailed in the Earthwork section. Removing approximately 5 feet of the clay and replacing it with non-expansive select fill will reduce the PVR to approximately less than 4 inches. Removing approximately 10 feet of the clay and replacing it with non-expansive select fill will reduce the PVR to approximately less than 2 inches. To reduce the PVR to about 1 inch or less, approximately 15 feet of the expansive clay should be removed and replaced with non-expansive select fill. These depths should be considered from the existing ground surface and can be adjusted as necessary based on site grading. The proposed depth of the overflow splash box should also be considered with this approach. For example, if the bearing depth of the splash box is 4 feet, approximately 6 feet of the clay beneath the splash box should be removed and replaced to achieve the PVR reduction of 1-2 inches and approximately 11 feet to reduce the PVR to 1 inch or less. When non-expansive select fill is used, the upper foot of backfill adjacent to the structure should consist of compacted on-site clays. This will help prevent infiltration of surface water within the backfill zone by creating a clay cap at the surface. Pavement Concrete parking areas at the site will be supported upon the expansive subgrade previously discussed. Anticipated traffic volumes and loads are not available, but the majority of the traffic is expected to consist of relatively light loads from pickups and occasional moderately-heavy loads from maintenance vehicles. To help bridge potential movements of the clay subgrade, a minimum 8-inch thick reinforced concrete pavement section is recommended. Adequate joints and spacing should be provided to control shrinkage-related cracking, and load transfer dowels should be provided across construction joints. The recommended pavement thickness is intended to provide a sufficient thickness of structural materials such that wheel loads are widely distributed. While the Attachment 3Item 12 Geotechnical Investigation – Prosper 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank August 14, 2018 Page 7 of 8 Project No. PRP17369 pavement may be structurally adequate, it can still experience cracking and movement due to the expansive subgrade (5-7 inch estimated PVR). Expansive clays can be treated with hydrated lime to improve strength and workability, but considering the limited amount of pavement planned at this site, lime treatment may not be practical. An alternative to lime treatment is to create a pavement subbase using crushed stone base (flexible base). This will improve pavement support and create a non-pumping surface for construction of the pavement. The crushed stone layer should be a minimum of 8 inches thick (compacted). The use of an aggregate base should include a geotextile separation layer (TxDOT DMS-6200, Type 2) between the aggregate and supporting clay subgrade, which will help prevent soil intrusion from the subgrade into the rock base. Prior to placement of the geotextile and flexible base, the subgrade should be proof rolled to detect areas of soft and/or pumping soils. Proof rolling should be based on TxDOT Standard Specification Item 216. The entire pavement area should be proof rolled, with each succeeding pass offset by not greater than one tire width. Unsuitable soil should be undercut and reworked or otherwise improved in a manner that is suitable to the engineer. The Geotechnical Engineer should be present during proof rolling activities to assist with the identification of unsuitable soil. After proof rolling, a minimum of 8 inches of the subgrade should be moisture conditioned and properly compacted. This moisture-conditioned subgrade layer should be compacted according to the requirements in the Earthwork section. Moisture changes within the subgrade and subbase must be minimized. The pavement and surrounding grades must have positive drainage that quickly removes surface water. Routine maintenance must be performed on pavement joints and crack to prevent the infiltration of surface water below the pavement. Even with these precautions, some distress may still occur, which will require periodic maintenance. Earthwork Earthwork associated with the EST will consist of foundation support, the placement of backfill, and general site grading. The native clay soils will exhibit shrink/swell behavior with moisture fluctuations as previously discussed and should be limited to general site fill. The highly expansive clays should not be used as backfill below structures sensitive to expansive soil movements. Table 6 provides material, moisture, and density requirements for the materials recommended for this site. Fill should be placed in loose, horizontal lifts not exceeding about 8 inches; lift thicknesses should be reduced as necessary to achieve the specified in-place density. Table 6 – Material and Compaction Requirements Material Use Material Requirements Test Method Density Requirement* Moisture Requirement* General Fill On Site Clays No Organics Standard Proctor (ASTM D698)95%+Optimum to +3% Pavement Subbase Flexible Base TxDOT Item 247, Type A, Grade 1- 2 Tex-113-E 98%+-2% to +2% General Fill (Non-Expansive Select Fill) LL ≤ 35, 7 ≤ PI ≤ 15 -#200 Sieve ≤ 70% No Organics Standard Proctor (ASTM D698)95%+-1% to +3% *Based upon maximum dry density and optimum moisture content The material should be consistent with regard to type and moisture content. Clods should be processed and mixed, and water should be evenly applied, so that each lift has a uniform moisture and density. Each lift should be tested to confirm it has the specified moisture and compaction, with a minimum of three verification tests for every lift. Subsequent lifts should not be placed until the exposed lift has the specified moisture and density. Lifts placed during the grading operation should be harrowed after compaction and prior to placement of the subsequent lift in order to ensure proper bonding between lifts. Lifts failing to meet the moisture and density requirements should be reworked to meet the required specifications. The specified moisture content must be maintained until compaction of the overlying lift, or construction of overlying flatwork. Failure to maintain the moisture content could result in excessive soil movement and can also have a detrimental effect on overlying plastic concrete. The contractor must provide some means of controlling Attachment 3Item 12 Geotechnical Investigation – Prosper 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank August 14, 2018 Page 8 of 8 Project No. PRP17369 the moisture content (such as water hoses, water trucks, etc.). Maintaining subgrade moisture is always critical, but will require the most effort during warm, windy and/or sunny conditions. Density and moisture verification testing is recommended to provide some indication that adequate earthwork is being provided. However, the quality of the fill is the sole responsibility of the contractor. Satisfactory verification testing is not a guarantee of the quality of the contractor's earthwork operations. Surface Drainage Proper drainage is critical to the performance and condition of flatwork constructed around the proposed EST. Positive surface drainage must be provided that directs surface water away from the structure. If water is allowed to collect next to or below the flatwork, then undesirable soil movements can occur, and these movements can exceed values used in design. Adequate surface drainage should be maintained throughout construction and the life of the structure. IBC Seismic Site Class Seismic designs in Texas are typically based upon the criteria established in the 2015 International Building Code (IBC). The seismic design is based on the Site Class, as defined in Sections 1613.3.2, in accordance with Chapter 20 of ASCE 7. Based on the results of the site-specific borings, the average subsurface conditions correspond to Site Class “C,” as defined in in Table 20.3-1 – Site Classification within Chapter 20 of ASCE 7. LIMITATIONS This memorandum was prepared specifically for use by the Town of Prosper and Freese and Nichols, Inc. for this particular project and shall not be used for other projects or purposes. This work was performed in a manner consistent with the level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by other members of the engineering profession practicing in the same locality, under similar conditions, and at the date the services were provided. Freese and Nichols, Inc. makes no other representation, guarantee or warranty, express or implied, regarding the services, communication (oral or written), report, opinion, or instrument of service provided. The information and opinions contained in this memorandum are based on field observations, subsurface explorations, laboratory tests, and present knowledge of the proposed project. It is possible that soil, rock, or groundwater conditions could vary between or beyond the points explored. Paragraphs, statements, test results, boring logs, figures, etc., should not be taken out of context, nor utilized without a knowledge and awareness of their intent within the purpose of this memorandum. This memorandum, and any future addenda or reports regarding this site, may be made available to contractors and/or bidders to supply them with only the data contained herein regarding subsurface conditions and laboratory test results specific to the location and time noted. Contractors and/or bidders may not exclusively rely on interpretations, opinions, or conclusions contained in this memorandum. Verification of the subsurface conditions for purposes of determining difficulty of excavation, trafficability, etc., is the responsibility of the contractors and/or bidders. Because of the limited nature of any subsurface study, conditions encountered during construction may differ from those presented in this memorandum. In such event, the contractor should promptly notify the Town of Prosper so that Freese and Nichols, Inc. can confirm those conditions. -END OF MEMORANDUM- ATTACHMENTS 1. Figure 1 – Vicinity Map (1 page) 2. Figure 2 – Boring Location Map (1 page) 3. Boring Logs and Boring Log Legend and Nomenclature (12 pages) 4. Laboratory Testing (25 pages) Attachment 3Item 12 FN JOB NO PRP17369 FILE DATE SCALE 1:50,000 DESIGNED Holly Saez DRAFTED FIGURE 1 4055 International Plaza, Suite 200Fort Worth, TX 76109 - 4895Phone - (817) 735 - 7300 Vicinity Map/ 0 1 2Miles 3/13/2018 MPT ProsperVIC.mxd Legend !A Boring Locations ! PROJECT LOCATION Town of Prosper2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank Attachment 3Item 12 FN JOB NO PRP17369 FILE DATE SCALE 1:800 DESIGNED Holly Saez DRAFTED FIGURE 2 4055 International Plaza, Suite 200Fort Worth, TX 76109 - 4895Phone - (817) 735 - 7300 Boring Location Map/ 0 100 200Feet 3/13/2018 MPT ProsperBLM.mxd Legend !A Boring Locations Town of Prosper2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank Name Latitude Longitude B-01 33.230470 -96.851732B-02 33.230336 -96.851579B-03 33.230292 -96.851794B-04 33.230366 -96.851702 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank Access Drive Attachment 3Item 12 13/ 12.7 3 2 1.8 1 2.7 2.2 0.7 47 52 50 25 27 37 72 79 87 95 95 85 89 95 94 92 32 35 31 31 33 U-1 U-2 U-3 U-4 U-5 U-6 U-7 U-8 U-9 1.75 (P) 1.75 (P) 2.5 (P) 3.75 (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 42 50 63 58 42 50 63 75 71 FAT CLAY (CH), brownish-gray, stiff, moist(Residual Eagle Ford) -tan and light gray, stiff to very stiff, withtrace calcareous and iron oxide depositsbelow 6 feet SHALE, weathered, reddish-yellow, palebrown, and light gray, very soft (rockhardness), trace gypsum (Eagle Ford) -with few gypsum crystals at 18 feet EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Dry End of Drilling Dry At Time Of Drilling 0-65 feet - hollow stem augers. Boring backfilled with auger cuttings uponcompletion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 1 of 3 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/2/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230470 Longitude:-96.851732 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/2/2018 Drill Method:DRY w/ HSA 5 10 15 20 25 LOG OF BORING NO. B-01 Attachment 3Item 12 33/ 55/ 3.75.811322U-10 TCP U-11 TCP U-12 TCP U-13 TCP U-14 TCP U-15 50/3.25"50/2.5" 50/3.5"50/3" 50/2.5"50/2.25" 50/3"50/2" 50/2"50/1.5" 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 42 67 50 50 67 50 SHALE, weathered, reddish-yellow, palebrown, and light gray, very soft (rockhardness), trace gypsum (Eagle Ford)(continued) SHALE, slightly weathered, dark gray, soft(rock hardness), with a few smallconcretions (Eagle Ford) SHALE, unweathered, gray, hard (rockhardness) (Eagle Ford) EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Dry End of Drilling Dry At Time Of Drilling 0-65 feet - hollow stem augers. Boring backfilled with auger cuttings uponcompletion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 2 of 3 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/2/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230470 Longitude:-96.851732 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/2/2018 Drill Method:DRY w/ HSA 35 40 45 50 55 LOG OF BORING NO. B-01 Attachment 3Item 12 TCP TCP 50/2"50/1.75 50/2"50/1.5" SHALE, unweathered, gray, hard (rockhardness) (Eagle Ford) (continued) Total boring depth 65.0 ft. EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Dry End of Drilling Dry At Time Of Drilling 0-65 feet - hollow stem augers. Boring backfilled with auger cuttings uponcompletion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 3 of 3 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/2/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230470 Longitude:-96.851732 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/2/2018 Drill Method:DRY w/ HSA 65 70 75 80 85 LOG OF BORING NO. B-01 Attachment 3Item 12 13/ 5.4 2.7 1.4 2 44 45 51 26 30 41 70 75 92 96 85 91 89 97 33 33 34 30 U-1 U-2 U-3 U-4 U-5 U-6 U-7 U-8 TCP U-9 50/6"50/6" 1.75 (P) 1.75 (P) 1.75 (P) 2.25 (P) 3.75 (P) 4.5 (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 42 54 71 71 63 63 75 75 79 FAT CLAY (CH), brownish-gray, stiff, moist(Residual Eagle Ford) -pale brown and light gray, stiff to verystiff, with calcareous nodules below 5feet SHALE, weathered, reddish-yellow, palebrown, and light gray, very soft (rockhardness), trace gypsum (Eagle Ford) -with gypsum crystals at 18 feet -with gray layer at 24 feet EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE At time of drilling23 ft 0-45 feet - continuous flight auger; 45-55 feet - water rotary core. Boringbackfilled with auger cuttings upon completion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 1 of 2 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/1/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230336 Longitude:-96.851579 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/1/2018 Drill Method:CFA & Rotary Wash 5 10 15 20 25 LOG OF BORING NO. B-02 Attachment 3Item 12 33/ 45/ U-10 TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP 50/4"50/3.75 50/3.5"50/3" 50/1"50/1" 50/1"50/0.75" 50/0.75"50/0.50" 4.5+ (P) 79 SHALE, weathered, reddish-yellow, palebrown, and light gray, very soft (rockhardness), trace gypsum (Eagle Ford)(continued) SHALE, slightly weathered, dark gray,very soft (rock hardness) (Eagle Ford) SHALE, unweathered, gray, hard (rockhardness) (Eagle Ford) Total boring depth 55.0 ft. EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE At time of drilling23 ft 0-45 feet - continuous flight auger; 45-55 feet - water rotary core. Boringbackfilled with auger cuttings upon completion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 2 of 2 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/1/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230336 Longitude:-96.851579 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/1/2018 Drill Method:CFA & Rotary Wash 35 40 45 50 55 LOG OF BORING NO. B-02 Attachment 3Item 12 13/ 29.5/ 12.3 8 2.4 2.3 4.7 0.9 1.9 1.9 2 2.3 44 52 51 44 27 27 27 41 71 79 78 85 95 95 92 89 88 90 96 97 96 35 34 39 29 29 29 U-1 U-2 U-3 U-4 U-5 U-6 U-7 U-8 U-9 TCP 43/6"49/6" 1.75 (P) 1.75 (P) 3.0 (P) 3.25 (P) 4.0 (P) 4.5 (P) 4.5 (P) 4.5 (P) 4.5 (P) 42 50 63 67 71 58 58 67 75 FAT CLAY (CH), brownish-gray, stiff, moist(Residual Eagle Ford) -pale brown and light gray, with a fewcalcareous deposits below 4 feet -with a few iron-oxide deposits at 7 feet -very stiff below 8 feet SHALE, weathered, reddish-yellow, palebrown and light gray, very soft (rockhardness), very weak, trace gypsum(Eagle Ford) -with darker gray below 23 feet EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Dry End of Drilling Dry At Time Of Drilling 0-60 feet - hollow stem augers. Boring backfilled with auger cuttings uponcompletion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 1 of 2 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/2/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230292 Longitude:-96.851794 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/2/2018 Drill Method:DRY w/ HSA 5 10 15 20 25 30 LOG OF BORING NO. B-03 Attachment 3Item 12 50/ U-10 TCP U-11 TCP U-12 TCP U-13 TCP U-14 TCP U-15 TCP 50/4.5"50/3.25" 50/4"50/3.75" 50/5"50/4.5" 50/2"50/2" 50/2"50/1.5" 50/2"50/1.5" 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 42 67 50 42 50 67 WEATHERED SHALE, slightly weathered,dark gray, very soft (rock hardness)(Eagle Ford) (continued) SHALE, unweathered, gray, hard (rockhardness) (Eagle Ford) Total boring depth 60.0 ft. EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Dry End of Drilling Dry At Time Of Drilling 0-60 feet - hollow stem augers. Boring backfilled with auger cuttings uponcompletion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 2 of 2 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/2/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230292 Longitude:-96.851794 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/2/2018 Drill Method:DRY w/ HSA 35 40 45 50 55 60 LOG OF BORING NO. B-03 Attachment 3Item 12 13/ 15.6 6.7 3.2 5.6 2.8 0.8 1.6 2.7 2.3 2.5 47 53 60 64 25 33 29 33 72 86 89 97 97 95 96 94 90 86 98 91 96 34 37 30 33 31 U-1 U-2 U-3 U-4 U-5 U-6 U-7 U-8 U-9 2.0 (P) 2.25 (P) 3.0 (P) 2.5 (P) 2.25 (P) 4.5 (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.5+ (P) 4.25 (P) 46 63 58 58 42 71 67 75 67 FAT CLAY (CH), brownish-gray, very stiff,moist (Residual Eagle Ford) -pale brown and light gray, stiff below 4feet -with a few calcareous deposits to 8 feet SHALE, weathered, reddish-yellow, palebrown and light gray, very soft (rockhardness), with trace calcareous andgypsum deposits (Eagle Ford) -darker gray, with a few gypsum depositsbelow 23 feet EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Dry to coring At Time Of Drilling 0-35 feet - continuous flight auger; 35-65 feet - water rotary core. Boringbackfilled with auger cuttings upon completion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 1 of 3 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/1/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230366 Longitude:-96.851702 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/1/2018 Drill Method:CFA & Rotary Wash 5 10 15 20 25 LOG OF BORING NO. B-04 Attachment 3Item 12 31/ 45/ 1.6 1.3 1.5 2.4 7.1 13.4 11.7 13.5 112 116 117 118 21 18 18 18 U-10 SPT-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 14-25-33(58) 4.5+ (P) 50 73 95 88 100 65 95 77 90 SHALE, slightly weathered, gray, very soft(rock hardness) (Eagle Ford) SHALE, unweathered, gray, hard (rockhardness), with a few thin shell fossilsand small nodules (Eagle Ford) -with a few pyrite crystals at 48.5 feet -with 1/2 inch thick concretion layersfrom 58.5 to 59.5 feet EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Dry to coring At Time Of Drilling 0-35 feet - continuous flight auger; 35-65 feet - water rotary core. Boringbackfilled with auger cuttings upon completion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 2 of 3 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/1/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230366 Longitude:-96.851702 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/1/2018 Drill Method:CFA & Rotary Wash 35 40 45 50 55 LOG OF BORING NO. B-04 Attachment 3Item 12 1.916.611817C-16 100 90 SHALE, unweathered, gray, hard (rockhardness), with a few thin shell fossilsand small nodules (Eagle Ford)(continued) Total boring depth 65.0 ft. EL E V A T I O N , f t ST R A I N A T F A I L U R E , % UN C . C O M P R E S S I V E ST R E N G T H , t s f PL A S T I C I T Y I N D E X PL A S T I C L I M I T LI Q U I D L I M I T % P A S S I N G NO . 2 0 0 S I E V E UN I T D R Y W E I G H T , p c f WA T E R C O N T E N T , % TY P E BL O W C O U N T S HA N D P E N E - TR O M E T E R ( P ) / TO R V A N E ( T ) , t s f RE C O V E R Y , % RQ D , % SY M B O L DE P T H , f t MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SAMPLE Dry to coring At Time Of Drilling 0-35 feet - continuous flight auger; 35-65 feet - water rotary core. Boringbackfilled with auger cuttings upon completion of drilling and sampling. The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logsare subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report.Sheet 3 of 3 Water Observations:Remarks: Date Drilling Started:2/1/2018 Project Description:Lower Pressure Plane EST Project Location:Prosper, Texas Logged By:RR Rig Type:CME 55 Elevation: Hammer Type:Automatic Drilling Co.:Texplor of Dallas, Inc. Latitude:33.230366 Longitude:-96.851702 Project No.:PRP17369 Phase No.:**** Date Drilling Completed:2/1/2018 Drill Method:CFA & Rotary Wash 65 70 75 80 85 LOG OF BORING NO. B-04 Attachment 3Item 12 Copyright Freese and Nichols, Inc., Version 1.4 (September 8, 2014) BORING LOG LEGEND AND NOMENCLATURE Abbreviations U – Undisturbed Sample (tube) SPT – Standard Penetration Test NT – Not Testable A – Auger Sample TCP – Texas Cone Penetration NP – Non Plastic CS – Continuous Sample CFA – Continuous Flight Auger ATD – At Time of Drilling C – Rock Core HSA – Hollow Stem Auger AD – After Drilling General Terms Term Description Blow Counts Results from either the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) or the Texas Cone Penetration (TCP) test. Recovery Length of sample or core recovered divided by the total length pushed, driven, or cored (expressed as a %) Rock Quality Designation (RQD) Cumulative length of unfractured pieces of core material more than 4 inches in length divided by the total length of material cored (expressed as a percentage) Consistency of Cohesive Soil Description Comp. Strength, tsf Criteria SPT Blows TCP Blows Very Soft < 0.25 Sample sags under its own weight and is easily deformed 0 – 2 0 – 8 Soft ≥ 0.25 – < 0.5 Easily pinched between fingers and remolded with light finger pressure > 2 – 4 > 8 – 20 Medium Stiff ≥ 0.5 – < 1.0 Imprinted easily with fingers and remolded with firm finger pressure > 4 – 8 N/A for TxDOT Stiff ≥ 1.0 – < 2.0 Imprinted with strong finger pressure or indented easily with fingernail > 8 – 15 >20 – 40 Very Stiff ≥ 2.0 – < 4.0 Light imprint from finger or light indent with fingernail > 15 – 30 > 40 to 80 Hard ≥ 4.0 Difficult to indent with fingernail > 30 >80 Apparent Density of Cohesionless Soil Description SPT Blow Count Texas Cone Blow Count Very Loose 0 – 4 0 – 8 Loose > 4 – 10 > 8 – 20 Medium Dense > 10 – 30 > 20 to 80 Dense > 30 – 50 80 to ≥ 5” Very Dense > 50 0” to < 5” Textural Adjectives Textural Item Description Pit Pinhole sized openings Vug Small openings up to 4 inches in size Cavity Opening larger than 4 inches Honeycomb Numerous and grouped pits and vugs Vesicle Small openings in volcanic rocks Soil Structure Description Criteria Stratified Alternating layers of varying material/color with layers ≥ 1/4-inch thick Laminated Alternating layers of varying material/color with layers < 1/4-inch thick Fissured Breaks along definite planes with little resistance Slickensided Fracture planes appear polished or glossy; shows movement direction Blocky Cohesive soil that can be broken into small, angular lumps Lensed Inclusion of small pockets of soil that is different from dominate type Homogenous Same color and appearance throughout Moisture Condition Description Criteria Dry Absence of moisture, dusty, dry to the touch Moist Damp but no visible water Wet Visible free water Page 1 of 2 Attachment 3Item 12 Copyright Freese and Nichols, Inc., Version 1.4 (September 8, 2014) BORING LOG LEGEND AND NOMENCLATURE Rock Hardness Descriptors Grade Approx. Comp. Strength, tsf Approx. TCP Range Field Test Very Soft < 10 - 100 >6” Can be peeled with pocket knife, crumbles under firm blows of geological hammer Soft 100 - 500 4” - 6” Can be peeled with pocket knife with difficulty, indented by firm blows of geological hammer Hard 500 - 1000 1” - 5” Cannot be peeled with pocket knife, can be fractured by single firm blow of hammer Very Hard 1000 - 2000 0” - 2” Specimen requires more than one blow of geological hammer to fracture it Extremely Hard > 2000 0” Specimen requires many blows of geological hammer to fracture it Degree of Rock Weathering Description Criteria Unweathered No evidence of chemical or mechanical alteration Slightly Weathered Slight discoloration of surface or discontinuities; < 10% volume altered Weathered Discoloring evident; 10 to 50% of volume altered Highly Weathered Entire mass discolored; alteration through majority of rock Decomposed Rock reduced to soil consistency with some rock-like texture Page 2 of 2 Rock Bedding Structure Description Criteria Laminated < 3/8 inch Very Thinly Bedded 3/8—1 inch Thinly Bedded 1 inch—4 inches Moderately Bedded 4 inches—1 foot Thickly Bedded 1 foot—3 feet Very Thickly Bedded 3– 10 feet Massive > 10 feet Soil Column Graphic Symbols* Graphic Represented Soil Types Graphic Represented Soil Types Fat Clay, Fat Clay with sand, Sandy Fat Clay Well-Graded Sand or Poorly-Graded Sand; little to no fines Lean Clay, Lean Clay with sand, Sandy Lean Clay, Silty Clay Clayey Gravel, Gravel-Sand-Clay Mixtures Inorganic Silt and Organic Silt Silty Gravel, Gravel-Sand-Silt Mixtures Clayey Sand, Clay-Sand Mixtures Well-Graded Gravel or Poorly-Graded Gravel; little to no fines Silty Sands, Sand-Silt Mixtures Fill with Significant Debris or Deleterious Material Rock Column Graphic Symbols* Graphic Represented Rock Types Graphic Represented Rock Types Limestone, Shaly/Marly Limestone, Limestone with Shale Marl, Marl with Limestone, Marl with Shale Shale, Shale with Limestone Sandstone, Shaly Sandstone, Sandstone with Shale Mudstone Generic Bedrock Symbol * Combined graphics may be used for dual classifications. Not all graphics represented. Refer to lithology description for soil classification or rock type. Attachment 3Item 12 Initial Final 79 202 345.6 27 35 44 52 118.13 123.54 95 87.48 85.79 GORRONDONA & ASSOCIATES, INC. ABSORPTION PRESSURE SWELL TEST RESULTS Project Name:Lower Pressure Plane EST Liquid Limit = Load Applied (psf) : Material Description:Olive FAT CLAY (CH) Project No. :PRP17369 Boring No.:B-01 Sample Depth (ft.):8-10 Date Tested:2/12/2018 Soil Classification Properties: Maximum Measured Absorption Swell Pressure = 346 psf Swell for Change in Moisture from Initial to Final = 0.08 % Plastic Limit = Moisture Content (%) = Plasticity Index = Wet Unit Weight (pcf) = % Passing #200 Sieve = Dry Unit Weight (pcf) = 0 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 10 100 1000 Sw e l l , % Swelling Pressure, psf Attachment 3Item 12 Initial Final 78 202 202 27 39 50 51 115.80 123.28 92 83.37 82.19 GORRONDONA & ASSOCIATES, INC. ABSORPTION PRESSURE SWELL TEST RESULTS Project Name:Lower Pressure Plane EST Liquid Limit = Load Applied (psf) : Material Description:Olive FAT CLAY (CH) Project No. :PRP17369 Boring No.:B-03 Sample Depth (ft.):8-10 Date Tested:2/12/2018 Soil Classification Properties: Maximum Measured Absorption Swell Pressure = 202 psf Swell for Change in Moisture from Initial to Final = 0.03 % Plastic Limit = Moisture Content (%) = Plasticity Index = Wet Unit Weight (pcf) = % Passing #200 Sieve = Dry Unit Weight (pcf) = 0 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 10 100 1000 Sw e l l , % Swelling Pressure, psf Attachment 3Item 12 Initial Final 85 202 532.8 41 31 38 44 120.16 125.07 89 91.63 86.85 GORRONDONA & ASSOCIATES, INC. ABSORPTION PRESSURE SWELL TEST RESULTS Project Name:Lower Pressure Plane EST Liquid Limit = Load Applied (psf) : Material Description:Olive FAT CLAY (CH) Project No. :PRP17369 Boring No.:B-03 Sample Depth (ft.):13-15 Date Tested:2/12/2018 Soil Classification Properties: Swell for Change in Moisture from Initial to Final = 0.49% Maximum Measured Absorption Swell Pressure = 533 psf Plastic Limit = Moisture Content (%) = Plasticity Index = Wet Unit Weight (pcf) = % Passing #200 Sieve = Dry Unit Weight (pcf) = 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 10 100 1000 Sw e l l , % Swelling Pressure, psf Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-01 Sample Number: U-2 Depth: (2.0-4.0) ft. Description: LL = 72 PI = 47PL = 25 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 0.990 0.495 12.7 1.00 32.4 118.4 89.4 N/A N/A 2.77 5.73 2.07 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Axial Strain, % 0 5 10 15 20 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-01 Sample Number: U-6 Depth: (13.0-15.0) ft. Description: LL = 87 PI = 50PL = 37 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 2.669 1.334 3.0 1.00 30.5 124.3 95.3 N/A N/A 2.78 5.73 2.06 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1 2 3 4 Axial Strain, % 0 1.5 3 4.5 6 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-01 Sample Number: U-7 Depth: (18.0-20.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 2.179 1.090 2.0 1.00 31.1 123.6 94.2 N/A N/A 2.78 5.73 2.06 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1 2 3 4 Axial Strain, % 0 1 2 3 4 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Bulge Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-01 Sample Number: U-8 Depth: (23.0-25.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 0.716 0.358 1.8 1.00 33.3 122.2 91.6 N/A N/A 2.76 5.73 2.08 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 Axial Strain, % 0 1 2 3 4 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-01 Sample Number: U-10 Depth: (33.0-35.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 5.852 2.926 3.7 1.00 21.6 136.8 112.5 N/A N/A 2.74 5.71 2.08 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1.5 3 4.5 6 Axial Strain, % 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2017 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-02 Sample Number: U-4 Depth: (6.0-8.0) ft. Description: LL = 75 PI = 45PL = 30 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 1.451 0.725 5.4 1.00 32.6 118.1 89.1 N/A N/A 2.77 5.73 2.07 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Axial Strain, % 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-02 Sample Number: U-7 Depth: (18.0-20.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 1.996 0.998 2.7 1.00 29.7 125.3 96.5 N/A N/A 2.77 5.73 2.07 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1 2 3 4 Axial Strain, % 0 1 2 3 4 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Bulge Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-03 Sample Number: U-2 Depth: (2.0-4.0) ft. Description: LL = 72 PI = 45PL = 27 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 0.974 0.487 12.3 1.00 34.7 118.4 87.9 N/A N/A 2.77 5.73 2.07 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 Axial Strain, % 0 5 10 15 20 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-03 Sample Number: U-4 Depth: (6.0-8.0) ft. Description: LL = 79 PI = 52PL = 27 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 1.868 0.934 8.0 1.00 34.3 121.5 90.4 N/A N/A 2.74 5.73 2.09 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Axial Strain, % 0 5 10 15 20 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Bulge Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-03 Sample Number: U-6 Depth: (13.0-15.0) ft. Description: LL = 85 PI = 44PL = 41 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 1.933 0.967 2.4 1.00 30.3 123.7 94.9 N/A N/A 2.77 5.75 2.08 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Axial Strain, % 0 1.5 3 4.5 6 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-03 Sample Number: U-7 Depth: (18.0-20.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 2.042 1.021 2.3 1.00 28.7 124.6 96.8 N/A N/A 2.78 5.75 2.07 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1 2 3 4 Axial Strain, % 0 1 2 3 4 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/02/2018 Remarks: Bulge Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-03 Sample Number: U-8 Depth: (23.0-25.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 2.330 1.165 4.7 1.00 28.9 123.0 95.5 N/A N/A 2.78 5.74 2.06 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1 2 3 4 Axial Strain, % 0 1.5 3 4.5 6 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 01/02/2018 Remarks: Bulge Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: U-2 Depth: (2.0-4.0) ft. Description: LL = 72 PI = 47PL = 25 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 0.782 0.391 15.6 1.00 34.3 120.6 89.8 N/A N/A 2.74 5.74 2.09 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 Axial Strain, % 0 5 10 15 20 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: U-5 Depth: (8.0-10.0) ft. Description: LL = 89 PI = 60PL = 29 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 1.546 0.773 6.7 1.00 32.9 117.5 88.3 N/A N/A 2.78 5.74 2.06 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Axial Strain, % 0 5 10 15 20 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: U-6 Depth: (13.0-15.0) ft. Description: LL = 97 PI = 64PL = 33 GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 2.682 1.341 3.2 1.00 29.5 126.4 97.6 N/A N/A 2.78 5.73 2.06 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1 2 3 4 Axial Strain, % 0 1.5 3 4.5 6 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Bulge Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: U-7 Depth: (18.0-20.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 2.293 1.147 5.6 1.00 32.6 121.2 91.4 N/A N/A 2.78 5.74 2.06 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1 2 3 4 Axial Strain, % 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Shear Plane Failure Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: U-9 Depth: (28.0-30.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Shelby Tube Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 2.468 1.234 2.8 1.00 30.7 125.0 95.7 N/A N/A 2.75 5.74 2.09 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 1 2 3 4 Axial Strain, % 0 1.5 3 4.5 6 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: C-1 Depth: (40.5-42.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Rock Core Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 7.144 3.572 1.6 0.50 20.6 134.4 111.5 N/A N/A 2.01 4.40 2.19 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 Axial Strain, % 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: C-2 Depth: (48.2-49.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Rock Core Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 13.437 6.719 1.3 0.50 18.0 136.6 115.8 N/A N/A 2.03 4.38 2.16 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 5 10 15 20 Axial Strain, % 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: C-3 Depth: (50.7-52.0) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Rock Core Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 11.722 5.861 1.5 0.50 17.5 137.8 117.2 N/A N/A 1.97 4.41 2.24 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 5 10 15 20 Axial Strain, % 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: C-4 Depth: (56.0-57.3) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Rock Core Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 13.533 6.766 2.4 0.50 17.8 139.2 118.2 N/A N/A 2.01 4.35 2.16 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 5 10 15 20 Axial Strain, % 0 1 2 3 4 1 Attachment 3Item 12 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST Gorrondona & Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas Project No.: PRP17369 Date Sampled: 02/01/2018 Remarks: Figure Client:Freese and Nichols, Inc. Project:Lower Pressure Plane EST Location: B-04 Sample Number: C-5 Depth: (62.0-63.3) ft. Description: LL = PI = PL = GS= Type: Rock Core Sample No. Unconfined strength, tsf Undrained shear strength, tsf Failure strain, % Strain rate, %/min. Water content, % Wet density, pcf Dry density, pcf Saturation, % Void ratio Specimen diameter, in. Specimen height, in. Height/diameter ratio 1 16.592 8.296 1.9 0.50 17.4 138.1 117.6 N/A N/A 2.03 4.46 2.20 Co m p r e s s i v e S t r e s s , t s f 0 5 10 15 20 Axial Strain, % 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 1 Attachment 3Item 12 APPENDIX C TCEQ APPROVAL LETTER Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 A t t a c h m e n t 3 I t e m 1 2 A t t a c h m e n t 3 I t e m 1 2 1 Purchasing Department Addendum No. 1 Issued October 12, 2018 Bid No: 2019-04-B Bid Title: Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank Questions Deadline: 10/12/2018 @ 12:00 p.m. Bids Due: 10/18/2018 @ 2:00 p.m. Addendum #1 is issued by the Town of Prosper Purchasing Office. Please see the following for changes/additions/deletions to the specifications: Additions: N/A Changes: Complete replacement of Divisions 26 and 40 of the BID BOOK with the attached replacement Divisions to rectify document assembly/binding omissions found with the original BID BOOK Deletions: N/A Clarifications: N/A Vendors who may have already submitted a response and feel this addendum may change their response may pick up their submission and return it prior to October 18, 2018 @ 2:00 p.m. If picking up the submission is not feasible, any new response submitted by your firm will supersede one previously submitted. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum by initialing in the appropriate space on the Bid Proposal Form if you have not previously submitted a response. For questions regarding this addendum contact: January M. Cook, CPPO, CPPB Purchasing Agent (972) 569-1018 january_cook@prospertx.gov 10/11/2018 Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational electrical systems, as specified herein. B. This Section, as well as Division 1, concerns all other Sections in Division 26, and shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS' QUALIFICATIONS Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, trained and experienced in their crafts, and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division. A licensed Journeyman shall be on site at all times when electrical work is being performed. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. B. WORKMANSHIP Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and e quipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 2. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details in AutoCAD format. 3. Complete interconnection and point to point wiring diagrams in AutoCAD format for all field control and instrumentation wiring between instruments, electrical equipment, starters, VFDs, etc.. A hard copy shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the final AutoCAD files being submitted. Interconnection/wiring diagrams shall include cable numbers, wire tags, actual equipment terminal strip numbers, etc. 4. The Contractor shall provide a monthly report to the Owner/Engineer for review stating that the Master Electrician has been to the job site and thoroughly reviewed the work. The report shall be signed by the Master Electrician and include the data and time the Master Electrician was on site. 5. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the shop drawings, submittals, spare part lists, schematics, final wiring diagrams with any changes made during start-up and maintenance procedures. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 6. Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment specifications, the following information shall be included for motors: a. Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified b. Make and motor type c. Brake horsepower of the motor d. Locked rotor current at full load e. Motor efficiency at full load (3-phase motors only) f. Starting torque g. Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (3-phase only) h. Speed of the motor at full torque i. Full load current j. Service factor 7. The Contractor shall: a. Prepare, and keep up-to-date, the Record Drawings and detailed construction drawings; b. Record the exact locations of each of these differences, sizes and details of the Construction Work as executed, with cross-references to and other requirements on the Record Drawings. c. Keep the Record Drawings on the Work Site; d. Upon completion of the Work, or at such other time as may be determined by the Engineer, submit the Record Drawings and copies to the Owner’s Representative in accordance with the Owner’s Requirements. e. Underground Interference drawing showing all underground duct banks, ground rods, ground conductors, pipes, piers, vaults, manholes, pull boxes, etc. that clearly identifies the location and routing of these systems. All interferences shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention. f. Provide revised drawings in AutoCAD noting any changes made to equipment during start- up. 8. The Contractor shall provide an 11x17 wall mounted copy of the one-line diagram in the electrical room as follows: a. The copy shall be in AutoCAD format, black and white and shall include all changes to the sheet from addenda, field orders and change orders. b. The copy shall be framed in a picture frame with plexiglass. The copy of the sheet shall lay flat against the glass without any wrinkles and other material necessary for the copy to lay flat shall be provided within the picture frame. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes, ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Local utility companies Local Electrical Ordinance Rural Electrification Association (REA) Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) B. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. C. Contractor shall submit the company names of the electrical contractor with the bid documents. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Follow the Manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials. Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Major electrical equipment shall be stored indoors and space heaters energized where applicable. Equipment that will be stored indoors for an extended period of time and that do not have space heaters shall have a 100 watt incandescent light placed in it and energized to eliminate the build-up of condensation in the equipment. Coordinate with equipment manufacturer for storage requirements. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the work. B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed. Final location shall be as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans, the Contractor shall before proceeding with the work prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer's review and approval. D. Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a different size, the contractor shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no cost to the owner. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. All enclosures for equipment unless specifically identified otherwise shall be NEMA 1, 14 gauge steel enclosures for indoor air conditioned areas and not exposed to a hazardous locations; NEMA 12, 304 stainless steel enclosures for indoor ventilated areas; or NEMA 4, FRP for rooms housing Chlorine; or NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for exterior applications and all other locations. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the roof, exterior walls and floors. B. Install stainless steel sleeves for each conduit passing through floors. Extend sleeves 1-1/2" above the floor slab and grout watertight. The sleeve sizes shall permit the subsequent insertion of a properly sized conduit or raceway. C. Install PVC, pipe sleeves around the conduit and raceway which pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls. The inside diameter of the sleeves shall be at least 1/2" greater than the outside of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed into these sleeves, fill the annular space between the pipes and sleeves with mastic. The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be maintained. All below grade penetrations shall utilized Link-Seal. D. Submit location drawings and obtain Engineer approval prior to installing conduit penetrations through slabs, beams, and walls. Install stainless steel pipe sleeves around the conduit and raceway which pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls. The inside diameter of the sleeves shall be at least 1/2" greater than the outside of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed into these sleeves, fill the annular space between the pipes and sleeves with mastic. The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be maintained. E. Install steel reinforced concrete foundations below floor mounted battery banks, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and other floor mounted electrical equipment. Concrete foundations shall not be less than 4" high. Neatly chamfer top edges. Concrete foundations shall be 6" wider and 6" longer than the base of the equipment being installed. Concrete shall be in accordance with Division 03, and shall be reinforced with a minimum of 6" x 6" #6 welded wire mesh. F. Route all conduits parallel to building lines, columns, or steel route conduits near to columns and roof beams. 2.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.03 PAINTING A. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 09. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless specifically indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation, re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment and raceway systems clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable condition for painting. 2.04 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner’s representative, utility companies and Owner’s facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C. Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents, or to the conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the existing conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro-mulched with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery, ground cover, or plants as existed. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to weather conditions, contractor shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90-day year warranty on new turn and landscaping. E. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or as-built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. 2.05 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. 2.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. Attachment 3Item 12 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install and test 600 volt wires and cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular wiring systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: TESTING Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended values. Megger tests shall be performed by a testing company with a minimum of 10 years experience. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Low voltage wire 2. Ground wire 3. Shielded cable 4. Terminations and Connections 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ICEA S-19-81/NEMA WC-3 Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy ICEA S-61-402/NEMA WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy NFPA 70 National Electrical Code ANSI/TIA/EIA 606A Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure UL 83 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B UL 1063 Machine Tool Wires and Cables ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wires ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium, Hard, Soft 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. B. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. C. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges, damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. D. Do not drop reels from any height. E. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the wire and cable. F. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat. G. Provide moisture protection by using manufacturer’s standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-healing end caps applied to both ends of cable. Do not remove end caps until cables are ready to be terminated. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Wires and cables shall be soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98% pure copper, UL83 and UL1063 listed, rated 600 volts and certified for continuous operation at maximum conductor temperature of 90 Celsius in dry locations and 75 Celsius in wet locations B. Conductors #8 or larger shall be stranded and conductors #14 shall be stranded. Utilize single conductors. C. Except for control, signal and instrumentation circuits and as specifically indicated on the plans the minimum conductor permitted is #12. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.02 WIRE MARKING 1. Wire marking shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code Article 310 and shall be printed on the wire insulation at 2 foot intervals. The printing method used shall be permanent and the color shall sharply contrast with the jacket color. 2. Wire marking shall include the U.L. label and necessary identification, including the Manufacturer, the number of conductors, size, conductor insulation type, sun- resistance, and other pertinent information. 2.03 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. SINGLE CONDUCTOR CABLES: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type XHHW-2 insulation. Wire shall be water tank tested and approved as machine tool wire, in accordance with National Machine Tool Builders Association. Wire in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. Conductors 38 or larger and conductors #14 shall be stranded. Wire shall be manufactured by Southwire, Okonite, Encore, General Cable, or Houston Wire & Cable. B. GROUND WIRE: Ground wire shall be Class B stranded tin-plated conductor without insulation in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulator as specified for low voltage wire. C. PAIRED SHIELDED CABLE: Individually and overall shielded minimum 18 gauge, 7/28 stranded, tinned copper conductors with .021" extruded PVC; .004" nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non-hygroscopic core tape, 100% coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and .050" minimum extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383 and shall be suitable for wet location and cable tray rated. Cables shall be manufactured by Alpha, Okonite, General Cable, Southwire, Belden, or Houston Wire & Cable. 2.04 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES A. CONNECTORS, COMPRESSION, COPPER, 600 VOLT: As manufactured by Burndy, Thomas & Betts, or Ideal Industries; of the appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards; two (2) holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 kcmil or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. All compression connectors shall be long-barrel type, no exceptions. B. 600 VOLT PLASTIC TAPE: Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company, No. 35.WIRENUTS: Silicone-based pre-filled spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering; UL listed for damp and wet locations. Wirenut shall meet requirements of UL 486D for Sealed Wire Connector Systems and shall be manufactured by Ideal Industries, Inc model 63, or as manufactured by ITT or Panduit. Wirenut shall be spring insulated, properly sized and resistant to vibration may be used for No.12 through No.10 solid gauge conductor for lighting and branch circuits only. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. SPLIT BOLTS: Kearney, Burndy, or Ilsco; shall be usable for connecting conductors which are both copper, both aluminum or one copper and one aluminum. Split bolts shall have a spacer between the two conductors, which it connects. D. MECHANICAL SET SCREW CONNECTOR: Blackburn HPS, ADR-ALCUL, GP or GT, Burndy or Ilsco; consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. E. RUBBER TAPE: Scotch 2210. F. VINYL TAPE: Scotch 88. G. ARC PROOFING TAPE: 3M “Scotch 77 Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape”. Fireproofing shall be done with a half-lapped layer of arc proofing tape, anchored at each end with a double wrap of 3M “Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Electrical Tape”. H. INSULATING RESIN: Scotch 3576, 3577, or 3578. I. POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS: Ferraz Shawmut, Ilsco or Allen-Bradley; rated for 600 VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place in accordance with the NEC and these specifications. Exception: Only flexible connections to motors shall be permitted to be installed after the installation of the remainder of the raceway system. The installation of these conductors shall be limited to exposure to damage for a maximum of one (1) week prior to installing flexible connection and making final terminations. Any conductors exposed to damage (i.e. not installed in raceway) longer than one (1) week shall be subject to rejection by the Owner and/or Engineer. If rejected, the cables shall be removed, discarded, replaced, reinstalled and retermination at the Contractor’s expense. 2. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 3. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the plans shall be in its own conduit. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed, wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. 5. Except for hand-pulled conductors into raceways, all wire and cable installation shall be installed with tension-monitoring equipment. Where conductors are found to have been installed without tension-monitoring, the conductors and cables shall be immediately removed from the raceways, permanently identified as rejected material, and removed from the jobsite. New conductors and cables shall be reinstalled, tagged and raceways resealed, all at the Contractor’s expense. 6. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. Where pulling compound is used, use only UL listed compound compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway involved. 7. Where single conductors and cables in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means such as arc and fireproofing tapes, bundle throughout their exposed length all conductors entering from each conduit with nylon, self-locking, releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 4 inches on center. 8. Properly support cables in accordance with the NEC and manufacturer’s recommendations in all raceways. Provide strain relief as required. 9. Arrange wiring in cabinets and panels neatly cut to proper length, remove surplus wire, and bundle and secure in an acceptable manner. Identify all circuits entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein and in specification section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.” 10. Cap spare conductors and conductors not terminated, with the UL listed end caps. 11. Where conductors pass through holes or over edges in sheet metal, remove all burrs, chamfer all edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. 12. For conductors that will be connected by others, provide at least 6 feet spare conductors in free standing panels and at least 2 feet spare in other assemblies. Provide additional spare conductor in any particular assembly where it is obvious that more conductor will be needed to reach the termination point. B. SPLICES 1. Power Conductors: Splice in junction boxes or at outlets only for lighting and receptacle branch circuits. Splices for all other circuits shall be disallowed. All s plices are subject to the Engineer’s approval. Obtain approval from Engineer before installing any splices. a. For existing installations, splices of 120V circuits shall use twist-on wire nuts. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Control and Instrumentation Conductors: No splicing of control and instrumentation conductors shall be permitted between terminal points except as specifically indicated on the plans. 3. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 4. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together. 5. For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. If a splice or tap is below 3' above the final grade, fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so that the resin encapsulates conductor and spring materials. Conductor splices and taps inside the MCC, VFDs, panels, etc. shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. 6. For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a split bolt type of connector or a mechanical, set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single half -lapped layer or rubber tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the original conductor insulation thickness is achieved. If splice or tap is below 3' above the finished grade, the tape or splice shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin. C. TERMINATIONS 1. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp on type spade connector applied on the wire end, Panduit PanTerm or approved equal. 2. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as required for tapping conductors at their load connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral, and ground conductors. 3. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to the inch-pound requirements of the NEC and UL. 4. Use crimp connectors on all stranded conductors. 5. Soldered mechanical joints insulated with tape will not be acceptable. 6. SINGLE CONDUCTORS: Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment without straining. Light switches and receptacles shall be connected with pig-tails and crimp-on connectors. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 7. PAIRED SHIELDED AND TRIAD SHIELDED CABLE: Ground paired shielded and triad shielded cables at the instrument panel or starter end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded and triad shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables and digital control cables. Each termination of paired shielded or triad shielded cable shall be coated with silicone jelly after termination. The shield of pair shielded cable and triad shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. Each conductor and shield shall be landed on its own terminal. Sharing of shield shall not be allowed. D. GROUNDING 1. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. All connections to ground rods shall be of the fused type utilizing an exothermic welding process. 2. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic boxes and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor , which it houses. Clean the metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. Grounding connections to motors shall be to the grounding stud, which shall be threaded into the stationary frame; Use Burndy KC Servit, or approved equal. The ground wire shall not be lugged to a mounting bolt. 3. Ground wire shall be uninsulated tin plated copper sized as shown on the plans in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulation as specified for low voltage wire. Provide and size bonding conductors in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 4. Provide a bare uninsulated ground wire to run the entire length of all cable trays. The contractor shall bond to each section and to every enclosure served by conductors routed through the cable tray system. E. TESTING 1. Testing: All testing required shall be per Specification Section 01 40 00 “Quality Requirements”. 2. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports and submit to the Owner/Engineer prior to final inspection. Attachment 3Item 12 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 19-8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3. Tests and Inspections: a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry ha s been energized, test for compliance with requirements. b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. c. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1) Test procedures used 2) Test results that comply with requirements. 3) Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. d. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 26 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: A. Grounding materials, equipment and processes. B. Product Data: For each type of product supplied. C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 5 ohms. Add ground rods as required to bring resistance to 5 ohms and connect to grounding system. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GROUND RODS: Copper-clad having a diameter of 3/4" and a minimum length of 10'. Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. GROUND CABLES: Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98% conductivity. Ground wire shall be Class B stranded tin-plated conductor without insulation in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with green insulator as specified for low voltage wire. C. CONDUIT GROUND FITTINGS: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI Burndy Corp., type NE or Thomas & Betts No. 3951 series. D. GROUND ROD BOXES: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read “ground rod” on lid. Brooks Precast Model. “3-RT” or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an AASHO HS-20 rating. E. EXOTHERMIC WELDING PROCESS: CADWELD MATERIALS – as manufactured by ERICO products or approved equal. 2.02 PROCESSES A. All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be exothermically welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations. The use of mechanical type connectors is not acceptable. B. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as listed in MIL 419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc. 2.03 GROUNDING SYSTEM Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduits, fittings, anchor supports, thermite process materials and equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. Grounding system shall be installed and sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors. B. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes. Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not less than 12" below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as not to break ground cables or connections. D. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, non- metallic materials. E. Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. F. Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare tinned copper cable, in all other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding conductor. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Provide grounding conductors as required per the NEC. G. Metal conduits stubbed up into switchgear, motor control center or other electrical equipment shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the equipment ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with applicable sections of the National Electrical Code. H. Provide exothermic weld connection for extension to existing stub-up ground conductors. I. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. 2. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. J. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. K. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install a copper bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. L. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1-1/2” or larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run in parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps. Contractor shall provide bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code. M. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduit systems, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. N. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized in accordance with NEC article 250. O. Run a grounding cable the full length of each cable tray section and bond to each cable tray section. Provide #1/0 bare copper in cable tray. P. Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and rod used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the Owner’s Representative. Q. Ground rod shall be installed such that the top of the ground rod is 6” below grade and enclosed by a ground rod box. R. Install #1/0 AWG bare tinned copper ground cable that follows the route of the underground duct banks on top of the duct bank envelop, but in no case is embedded in the concrete. Run ground through the manholes. Tie ground cable to pump station main grounding system at both ends. S. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a sufficient length of #12 wire with green-colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal at the receptacle. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with the test instrument manufacturer’s recommendation using the fall of potential method. Attachment 3Item 12 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. All test equipment shall be provided under this section and approved by the Engineer. D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. G. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater than five ohms. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to bring the resistance to five ohms. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures” and shall in- clude Record Data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Con- crete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Attachment 3Item 12 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: 304 stainless steel hangers, clamps, and associated fit- tings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for at- tached structural element. 4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded stainless steel. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION Attachment 3Item 12 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for RIGID METAL CONDUIT as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in di- ameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with stainless steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RIGID METAL CONDUIT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of sup- ported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion an- chor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, trans- formers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforc- ing bars. Attachment 3Item 12 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.03 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 53, “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Con- crete” for 3000 psi concrete. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equip- ment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 33.01 CONDUITS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete conduit system for each type of electrical system. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings to include cut sheets of each material to be used on the project. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ANSI 80.5 ANSI/NEMA FB 1 Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing NEMA TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: 1. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Single strip, helically wound, interlocking, aluminum. Liquid tight conduit shall have an extruded, polyvinyl jacket over the flexible metal. Acceptable product shall be Anaconda Type UA. B. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Heavy wall, aluminum alloy 6063; low temper number, tube, free from defects and manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.5 standards and U.L. listed. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Indalex, Allied and Wheatland. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. PVC COATED RIGID ALUMINUM: Meeting the requirements of rigid aluminum conduit; 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating, U.L. 6A listed. Manufactured in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW-C-581, ANSI C80.5 standards, ETL Verified PVC-001 and U.L. listed. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. D. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: Schedule 40 high impact, polyvinylchloride, in accordance with Fed. Spec. W-C-1094 and U.L. listed. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Carlon, Cantex, and Certainteed. E. FITTINGS AND CONDUIT BODIES: 1. RIGID METAL CONDUIT: Threaded type material to match the conduit, in accordance with ANSI/NEMA FB1 and as manufactured by Appleton Form 35, Killark "O" Series , Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or RACO. 2. FLEXIBLE AND LIQUID TIGHT FITTINGS: In accordance with ANSI/NEMA FB1; cadmium - plated, malleable aluminum body and nut; aluminum ferrule; insulated throat; integrally-cast, external ground lugs, as manufactured by Appleton "ST" series, Hubbel, OZ Gedney Type 4QL, or RACO. 3. PVC CONDUIT: Solvent-welded, slip-on joints, in accordance with NEMA TC3, as manufactured by Carlon, CertainTeed. 4. CONDUIT SEALS: Explosion-proof, rigid metal conduit fitting as defined by NEC Article 500, and as manufactured by Crouse Hinds fitting with Chico "X" Fiber and Chico "A" compound or Appleton fitting with Apelco fiber and compound. Seal shall be same material as conduit. F. ELBOW AND BENDS: Rigid, nonmetallic conduit system shall use PVC-coated rigid Aluminum for all bends. Meeting the requirements of rigid steel conduit; 40 mil PVC, exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal and Perma-Cote. Other conduit systems shall use the same material as the conduit with which they are installed. G. BUSHINGS: High impact, thermosetting, phenolic insulation; 150 degrees C.; as manufactured by Appleton "BBUH", Blackburn, or OZ Gedney type A. H. GROUNDING BUSHINGS: Conduit grounding bushings shall consist of an aluminum, insulated throat conduit bushing with an attached aluminum set screw lug. Grounding bushing shall comply with Fed. Spec. W-F-408b and W-W-C-581d, UL Standards 514B and 467, and shall be Crouse Hinds Lazy Lug or approved equal. I. LOCKNUTS: Aluminum as manufactured by Appleton "BL", OZ Gedney, RACO, or Steel City. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B J. HUBS: 1. ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Cast aluminum, with broad flat surfaces with gripping teeth on both sides of conduit entry. Hub portion on exterior side of entry shall contain "O" ring for watertight seal of conduit entry. Hubs shall be Meyers Hub, Appleton or Efcor. K. CONDUIT THROUGH-WALL AND FLOOR SEAL: Malleable iron body with oversized sleeves, sealing ring, pressure clamp and rings and sealing grommet; hex head cap s crew, as manufactured by OZ Gedney, type FSK. L. END BELLS: Threaded aluminum as manufactured by OZ Gedney type TNS. M. EXPANSION FITTINGS: Aluminum with aluminum bonding jumpers. Linear expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney Zx for rigid, use with aluminum conduit or Appleton "XJ" series. Combination linear and deflection expansion fittings shall be OZ Gedney type AXDX. N. THREADED NIPPLES: As manufactured by Allied or Triangle. Aluminum Conduit nipples shall have two (2) independent sets of threads. Running threads shall not be used. Utilize the conduit union when joining two (2) fixed conduits in a continuous run. O. ACCESSORIES: Reducers, washers, etc., shall be cadmium-plated, malleable iron. P. CONDUIT DRAINS: Conduit drains shall be 316 stainless steel as manufactured by Crouse Hinds ECD Universal, or approved equal. Q. DUCT BANK SPACERS: Interlocking module spacers as manufactured by Formex, or approved equal. R. LINK SEAL: Link seal shall be modular, mechanical type, consisting of inter-locking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the space between the conduit and the wall opening. Link seal shall be suitable for use in a core-drilled and pre-cast wall openings and shall be manufactured by Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc. or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Conduit types shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: 1. BURIED CONDUIT: PVC Schedule 40 or PVC coated rigid aluminum unless noted otherwise. 2. ABOVE GRADE CONDUIT: Rigid Aluminum unless noted otherwise. 3. PVC COATED RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Shall be used for all underground conduit bends 45° or more where the conduit ultimately terminates to aluminum conduit; and for conduit stub-ups through concrete and concrete wall penetrations. 4. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: May be used in all locations. PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit shall be used in corrosive environments or where in contact with concrete. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 5. RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: May be used in non-hazardous locations, installed single or grouped either underground or encased in concrete. 6. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT: Shall only be used to equipment in non- hazardous locations not subject to physical damage or excessive temperatures, requiring vibration isolation unless otherwise indicated, 6’-0” maximum length. The bending radius shall be in accordance with Chapter 9, Table 2 of the NEC and shall not deform or alter the flex jacket. 3.02 GENERAL A. Size conduits as required by the National Electrical Code for the number and sizes of wires to be drawn into the conduit. Above grade conduit less than ¾” shall not be used unless specified otherwise. Below Grade conduit shall not be less than 1”. B. Conduit stubbed up under free standing enclosures, such as motor control centers shall be PVC, stubbed up 1" above the finished floor level, and shall have a PVC bell terminator solvent welded onto each conduit end. C. Underground conduit shall be concrete capped. Straight runs of conduit which is below the finished grade shall be rigid PVC. Unless otherwise indicated, all other conduit shall be rigid aluminum. D. At the transition from underground and or from concrete, protect PVC conduit from mechanical damage by extending PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit a maximum of 12" and a minimum of 4" into the earth or concrete at the transition. For installations where the conduit does not penetrate concrete, provide a 12” wide housekeeping pad around conduit for transitions from underground to exposed conduit. E. Aluminum conduit, straps, and struts shall not be in direct contact with concrete or CMU walls, painted or not. Provide a rubber washer between the two materials. F. Aluminum conduit which penetrates into concrete shall be factory-coated with 0.20" of polyvinylchloride, per Spec. MIL-P-15147. G. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 3" from adjacent conduit and shall not be closer than 1" from any reinforcement bars. H. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade level, above concrete slab level, or for any exposed installations unless specified. Conduit shall not be placed horizontally in a concrete floor slab or a beam without the Engineer's written approval. I. Flexible metal conduit used for connecting light fixtures, i.e., fixture whips, shall be 1/2" as a minimum. Fixture whips shall contain only three conductors: one hot, one neutral, and one equipment grounding conductor. Other conduit types shall be 3/4" as a minimum. The inside surface of the conduit shall be reamed smooth after it has been cut. J. Provide conduit sizes as shown on the plans. Where hash marks are u sed to indicate the number of conductors in a conduit without indicating the conduit size, provide a 3/4" conduit for up to nine #12 conductors, and a 1" conduit for ten to 20 #12 conductors. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B K. Where conduits stub up through a floor slab from below finished floor level for multi-level structures, install a threaded fitting with PVC plug so that the top of the fitting is flush with the concrete or finished floor surface. L. Conduit system shall be swabbed clean prior to installation of conductors. M. Ground conduits in accordance with the National Electrical Code and Specification 26 05 26, “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems”. N. Contractor shall properly tape PVC coated aluminum conduit where it transitions to PVC conduit in underground concrete encased duct banks so that no aluminum conduit is in contact with concrete encasement. Tape shall be manufactured by Scotch or approved equal. Coordinate with tape manufacturer for type of tape to use for the installation. O. Conduit shall not penetrate the top of NEMA 3R and NEMA 4X enclosures. 3.03 UNDERGROUND A. Underground conduit shall be concrete capped. B. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 24” deep for medium voltage duct banks and 18" deep for low voltage duct banks to the top of the concrete encasement, and as shown on the plans, whichever is greater. Backfill buried conduit banks with material which is free from large rock, paving material, or large angular substance. Install underground conduit with the conduit duct bank dimensions shown on the plans. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at intervals to ensure that proper spacings are maintained. The concrete shall be red in color. Red dye for duct bank shall be mixed with concrete or the top of the duct bank shall be painted red. C. For installation of conduits to be used by Oncor Electric Delivery, coordinate with the utility for exact requirements D. Grade underground and outdoor conduits to drain free of condensation and moisture. Provide for automatic draining at lowpoints. Install horizontal runs of conduit to provide a natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect. E. Underground conduits shall drain to an underground structure with a floor drain, such as a manhole or a building basement. F. Install conduit drain assemblies in outside or underground conduits to provide for draining. G. Underground conduit bends shall have a minimum 2' bend radius for conduits 3” and smaller and a minimum 3’ bend radius for conduits 4” or greater in size. Underground conduit bends which are 45 degrees or more shall utilize PVC factory-coated rigid steel bends. H. Minimum size for underground conduits outside the building is 2”. I. Contractor shall install duct bank spacers a minimum of every 8 feet. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B J. Conduit shall slope uniformly at not less than 4” per 100’, or more than 60” per 100’ unless indicated otherwise on the plans or approved by the Engineer. Arrange duct banks to drain into manholes with no low pockets in the duct runs. The electrical contractor shall coordinate with the Contractor and the plans on the proposed grades for the site. 3.04 ROUTING AND SUPPORT A. Use the conduit route where shown on the plans. Route conduits that do not have a specified route in the most direct path between the two points, i.e. home runs shown with an arrow symbol. Route conduits parallel to building lines. Concealed conduits on the plans shall be below grade, within walls, or above ceilings. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise, route conduit through the roof with pitch pocket. Conduit shall not penetrate ductwork. Exposed conduit shall not be installed on the roof without the Engineer's prior approval. C. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid interference with other work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished walls, etc. Avoid crossing other work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 3" separation, except in crossing which shall be a minimum of 1". Conduits shall not be installed/concealed in water bearing walls. D. Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements, as shown on the plans. Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or screwed to the structure. The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on concrete walls and ceilings, but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces using mineralac-type hardware, strut channel clamps, or one hole straps with clamp backs. E. Provide expansion fittings at expansion, construction and seismic joints. Provide combination expansion/deflection fittings where conduits are concealed at these joints. F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use a conduit rack constructed o f channels with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for an additional 25% conduit. G. Parallel runs of conduit shall have bends and offsets made at the same point such that the angle of bend is the same in each conduit and the conduits remain parallel th roughout the run. Conduits not installed in this manner shall be removed and reinstalled at the Contractor’s expense. Conductors that are installed shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. H. Conduits installed in parallel shall be arranged such that crossings are eliminated. I. Rigid aluminum conduit systems shall utilize aluminum straps, clamps and strut channel. Coated rigid steel conduit shall utilize PVC factory coated or fiberglass straps, clamps and thread rods, etc. as manufactured by Robroy. J. Nuts, bolts, concrete anchor bolts and other metallic fasteners shall be stainless steel. Attachment 3Item 12 Conduits 26 05 33.01-7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B K. Install conduit other than PVC with threaded couplings and other threaded fittings. Threadless, or clamp type fittings shall not be used on metallic conduit. Rigid aluminum conduit shall have each set of threads coated with an oxidation inhibitor, Ilsco, De-Ox, ITT Noalox, Blackburn Contax or approved equal. L. Use PVC coated, rigid steel, factory elbows for bends in PVC conduit unless indicated otherwise. M. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. N. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per the National Electrical Code. O. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entry of dirt and moisture. P. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduit to metal boxes, etc. in wet or damp locations per the National Electrical Code. Q. Install a pulling string in empty (spare) conduit, except sleeves and nipples, and leave for future pulling as applicable. 3.05 TERMINATIONS A. Use threaded hubs for termination of conduits. Locknut termination of conduits shall not be used on this project. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.03-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 33.03 OUTLET BOXES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install outlet boxes. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Steel City Series 600 1.03 SUBMITTALS No submittals required for Section 26 05 33.03, “Outlet Boxes”. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ANSI/NEMA OS 1 Sheet steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. ANSI/NEMA OS 2 Non-metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Provide boxes with plaster ring where required. Boxes for installation in masonry walls shall be special square corner masonry type. Furnish boxes with proper covers and device plates. Boxes shall be non-metallic in accordance with ANSI/NEMA 0S 2. B. CAST BOXES: Cast feralloy metal, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs. Use cast boxes for damp and outdoor installation. Boxes shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION; COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes in the locations shown on the Plans, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. Attachment 3Item 12 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.03-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify locations of boxes and outlets prior to rough-in. Outlet locations may be modified to accommodate changes in door swings, space changes or to clear other interferences that arise or from job modifications. Make such modifications at no cost to the Owner as a matter of job coordination. Coordinate job conditions and notify the Engineer of discrepancies before proceeding with the installation of the work. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction blocked in place, and secured. Set wall boxes flush with the finish. Install extension sleeves as required to extend boxes to finished surfaces. C. Unless otherwise noted, location of outlet boxes shall be as follows: Equipment or Outlets Elevation *(A.F.F.) Toggle switches 4'0" Receptacles 1'6" Equipment or Outlets Elevation *(A.F.F.) Flow/Level Transmitters 5'5" Circular Chart Recorder 5'5" Motor starters 5'0" Control stations 4'0" Manual starters 5'0" Thermostats 4'0" Telephone outlets 1'6" Circuit protective devices 6'6" to top of enclosure * Above Finished Floor. D. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors in accordance with other sections of the specifications. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6" separation, except provide minimum 24" separation in acoustic-rated walls. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one (1) device is installed together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. E. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. Attachment 3Item 12 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.03-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. G. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices. H. Aluminum conduit shall use cast aluminum boxes. Cast aluminum boxes shall not be in direct contact with concrete or CMU walls, painted or not. I. Drilling through the back of the outlet box for mounting purposes is not allowed. J. Wall mounted outlet boxes shall be installed with an air gap behind the boxes. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.04-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 33.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install pull and junction boxes. The contractor shall be responsible for sizing all pull boxes and junction boxes per the National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 314 and all other relevant sections of the NEC. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results For Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Appleton B. Bryant C. Crouse Hinds D. Hoffman E. Hubbell F. O Z Gedney G. Raco H. Rob Roy 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals and shall include the following shop drawings: B. Pull and Junction Boxes C. Pull and Junction Boxes Sizing Calculations: Detailed calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer with the pull and junction boxes’ initial submittal. Submittals submitted without sizing calculations shall not be accepted. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) ANSI/NEMA OS 1 Sheet steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports NEC National Electrical Code Attachment 3Item 12 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.04-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Exposed wall recessed pull and junction boxes shall be 304 stainless steel. Pull boxes in floors shall be of galvanized malleable cast iron, with gasketed covers. Exposed pull boxes or junction boxes installed outdoors, per NEMA 250 shall be weatherproof and shall be provided with watertight gasketed covers fastened with stainless steel screws. B. NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel for all locations. C. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Metal construction conforming to National Electrical Code and ANSI/NEMA OS 1. Provide hinge type for sheet metal boxes of 12" or larger in any dimension. D. FLUSH-MOUNTED PULL BOXES: Provide overlapping covers with flush-head cover retaining screws. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for electric power, control and communication systems. B. Install pull boxes and junction boxes where required by the National Electrical Code and wherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties. C. Install pull boxes in interior conduit at not more than 100' apart when conduit runs are not broken by junction or outlet boxes. D. Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried. E. Do not install boxes back to back in walls and provide a minimum of 6" separation, except in acoustic-rated walls, provide 24" separation. F. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that is connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12" of box. G. Junction boxes shall have terminal strips/distribution blocks for splicing conductors where approved by the Engineer or as shown/specified on the plans. Terminal strips shall be 600V, NEMA rated manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Phoenix Contact or approved equal. Distribution blocks shall be per Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Equipment 26 05 50-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID-NO.2019-04-B 26 05 50 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work in this section. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Heat Trace 1). Installation information 2). Bill of Material 3). Weight of Enclosure 4). Product data sheets 5). Overall outline dimensions, both plan and elevations. 6). Project specific heat trace calculations. 7). Project specific interconnection/wiring diagram for heat trace system. 2. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: a. Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain the shop drawings, submittals, spare parts lists, schematics, and maintenance procedures. b. Manuals shall be prepared by the Equipment Manufacturer and shall also incorporate appropriate final certified shop drawings and test data. Any changes made during startup and testing in the field shall be included in the final O&M manuals. Manuals may be manufacturer's standard instructions, but shall be supplemented as necessary to cover any special feature not included in standard material. c. Heat Tracing O&M shall include all field modifications and routing information for all heat trace systems. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Equipment 26 05 50-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID-NO.2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. HEAT TRACE SYSTEM 1. Heat Trace System: Automatic self-regulating, UL listed, with tinned copper braid, able to crossover itself without overheating, parallel circuit design, able to be cut to length at job site, flat and flexible for easy installation, corrosion and chemical resistant, complete with power connection kits, splice kits, end seal kits and necessary accessories for a complete operating installation. Chromalox and Nelson are approved heat trace manufacturers. a. Heat Tracing Integrated Temperature Controls: Chromalox Ambient Sensing Integrated Temperature Controls Type RTAS-EP, NEMA 4X. Power connection box 3W/ft SRL self-regulating heat trace shall operate on 120 VAC. b. Heating cable: Self-Regulating Freeze Protection, Industrial Grade, 16 AWG Buss Wire. Chromalox Type SRL3-1C. 2. Heat trace shall be installed using Fiberglas Tape with pressure sensitive thermosetting silicone adhesive ¾: wide. Strap heat trace at no more than 1’ intervals. Pipe shall be clean of all dirt and debris prior to installing Fiberglass Tape. Tape shall be wrapped completely around the pipe (one piece) and overlap at least 1”. 3. Weather resistant “Caution Electrical Heat Trace” labels shall be placed on the outside of the insulation protection 4. Insulation shall completely cover the pipe and heat trace. 5. Heat trace shall be installed per manufacturers recommendations 6. All outside exposed air release valves, instrumentation piping, chlorine dioxide piping, drain line, pressure indicators, and sample taps shall be heat traced and insulated 7. Piping with taps for instrumentation shall be lined with 3W/ft SRL heat trace and wrapped with insulation to the instrument. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Make all electrical connections to all equipment specified. Install equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and the plans. If neither is available, install the equipment using recognized practices of the electrical industry and trade. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Equipment 26 05 50-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID-NO.2019-04-B A. Upon completion of the installation, perform continuity tests and functional checkout to assure the proper operation of all equipment. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system com- ponents used in identification signs and labels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B A. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexi- ble label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.02 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. B. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: 1. Tags relying on adhesives or tapes-on markers are not acceptable. 2. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. 3. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AVWG and larger consisting of perma- nent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. 4. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number (e.g. LA3-23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). 5. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an “S” suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a “T” suffix. 6. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be ap- plied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 2.03 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. 2.04 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when ex- posed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. C. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive la- bels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless oth- erwise indicated. E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.05 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equip- ment. 2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient view- ing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with stainless steel mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous under- ground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use mul- tiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete enve- lope exceeds 16 inches overall. I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for sur- face preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system leg- end and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS. B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded, service and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 120/240V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black 2) Phase B: Red 3) Neutral: White 4) Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 4. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for pow- er, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 5. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 6. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in race- way. E. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direc- tion of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equip- ment in finished spaces. F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equip- ment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. G. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems un- less equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Attachment 3Item 12 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appro- priate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the en- closure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panel- board manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the trans- former, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f. Enclosed switches. g. Enclosed circuit breakers. h. Enclosed controllers. i. Push-button stations. j. Power transfer equipment. k. Contactors. l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. m. Battery-inverter units. n. Battery racks. o. Power-generating units. p. Monitoring and control equipment. q. UPS equipment. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 05 73.01 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION General: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR prepare a short circuit and protective device coordination study, and an arc flash hazard analysis for the electrical power system as shown on the plans. NO EQUIPMENT IS TO BE ENERGIZED UNTIL THE POWER SYSTEM STUDIES HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, THE PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND BREAKERS HAVE BEEN SET PER THE SHORT CIRCUIT AND RELAY COORDINATION STUDY AND THE ARC FLASH LABELS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED ON THE EQUIPMENT. NO EXCEPTIONS. UShort Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis The studies shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor monitoring devices for setting by the CONTRACTOR. The Studies shall include settings for all protective relays and electric system monitoring. The Contractor shall obtain any needed data or information for the electrical equipment from Contract Documents, various suppliers, and from conducting his own field investigations. A. Scope: 1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all pertinent information necessary for the successful completion of the Short Circuit and Relay Coordin ation Study, and Arc Flash Analysis. All cable and raceway data, data from all new Switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, and separately mounted fuses, starters or circuit breakers shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. Obtain all existing or new protective device information to include all present settings. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain any needed data or information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, the Electric Utility and from conducting his own field investigations. The data obtained shall be organized and submitted to the ENGINEER to show that all the necessary data gathering work has been done. 2. Calculations shall utilize actual X/R and three phase short circuit values obtained by the CONTRACTOR from the Electric Utility. The use of infinite bus fault current calculation is not acceptable. Contact COSERV STEVE CARRIGAN (940) 365-4830. 3. The studies shall include both scenarios: under normal power and under generator power. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 4. Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase and phase-to-ground calculations. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic devices are not acceptable. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. The study shall assume all motors operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors identified as "standby" shall not be included. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at the electrical equipment busses. The Study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents available and system impedances as obtained from the Electric Utility. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the Study is not acceptable. Study shall use actual motor X/R and subtransient reactance data obtained from equipment suppliers. 5. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine appropriate relay settings. The study shall include all electrical equipment provided under this contract and any up-stream equipment that has an impact on the coordination study. The study shall show transformer damage curves, generator damage curves, cable short circuit withstand curves and motor curves. Include all medium and low voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards, motor control centers, starters, and panelboards main circuit breakers. Complete the short circuit study down to the main breaker or main lugs on all panelboards. Panelboard branch circuit devices need not be considered. The phase over current and ground-fault protection shall be included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier’s equipment (such as soft starters, switchgear) shall be in included. Include the last protective device in the Electric Utility’s system feeding each facility being considered. 6. Provide Time-Current Curves on 11X17 log-log paper. Do not put more than one branch of protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a one-line diagram and the names of each protective device in the branch. Use the names designated in the Contract Documents. Include motor and transformer damage curves, and cable short circuit withstand curves. Coordination study time-current curves (11x17 log-log type) including the instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings associated with each breaker. Organize the curves as specified here in. Ground fault time current curves shall be on a separate sheet. 7. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of the fault bracing of all bus from the panelboard level up to the main Switchgear or protective device. Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. 8. Provide arc flash hazard analysis in accordance with the applicable NFPA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. 9. The studies shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 10. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER's attention. 11. Use industry standard short circuit software, SKM CAPTOR and DAPPER or an equal approved by the ENGINEER. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 12. The report shall include a comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the interrupting capacity of the equipment that is protecting that bus. 13. The report shall include all data that was used as input to the report. This data shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data, etc. 14. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Utility for electrical data required for the studies. 15. The studies shall include and model the different operating configurations that may be encountered at the pump station. This includes different transformers operating individually with various main and tie breakers open and closed. The studies shall clearly identify the particular operating configuration being evaluated. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. UReferenceU UTitle IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems NFPA 70E Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace IEEE 1584 IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations NEC National Electrical Code 1.03 SCHEDULE A. The report shall be provided to the ENGINEER NO LATER THAN 60 days before the equipment is shipped to the Work site. SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AT THE JOBSITE UNTIL THE STUDY HAS BEEN COMPLETED, SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis a. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. b. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges & clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a) Blue to indicate up to 4 cal/cm2 b) Brown to indicate >4 cal/cm2 to 8 cal/cm2 c) Yellow to indicate >8 cal/cm2 to 25 cal/cm2 d) Orange to indicate >25 cal/cm2 to 40 cal/cm2 e) Red to indicate Above >40 cal/cm2 B. Provide six (6) bound color copies of the completed studies to be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Each hard copy of studies shall be bound in a 3-ring binder. C. The Contractor shall redo the Power System Studies if any changes are made during the field testing checkout and/or start-up. The Contractor shall submit the Power System Studies for Engineer Approval. The Studies shall include an updated copy of the color copy Arc Flash Labels. D. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. 1. Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide a short-circuit and relay coordination study load flow and motor starting study, and arc flash hazard analysis on the electrical power distribution system, as specified. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242, IEEE 1584, ANSI, and the NEC and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for all equipment. The coordination studies shall use the data from the manufacturer of protective devices. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. The studies shall be performed by the by an electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. 2.03 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all data needed to perform the study. B. As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following: 1. One-Line Diagram: a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct- acting trips, fuses, etc. b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices. c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers. Use the ratings (ie. Impedence, X/R, etc.) of the actual transformers being provided where available. d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transform ers energizing each relay. e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient reactances. Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators and synchronous reactances of all generators. Obtain data on the actual equipment being provided. Generic or average data numbers are not acceptable. f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and induction motors. Provide short circuit studies using each source of power separately. The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the fault if the greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit calculations shall include emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and emergency power sources described here in. 1) Show short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus. Provide the same data in tabular from. g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors, etc shall be included. h. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, if applicable. i. One-Line showing available fault current at each bus all the way down to the 208Y/120V panelboards. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2. Impedance Diagram: a. Available MVA or impedance from the utility company. b. Local generated capacity impedance. c. Bus impedance. d. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. e. Cable impedances. f. Equipment impedances. g. System voltages. h. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solidly grounding, or no grounding). i. Motor contribution assuming the new and existing motors as shown on the plans all running at the same time. 3. Calculations: a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case. b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. c. A discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment method of calculation and formulas used such that all calculations can be verified manually by the ENGINEER, with recommendations as required for improvements to the system. d. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER and recommendation made for improvements. 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 1. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with aid of a digital computer. a. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing, but still maintain a low incident energy level. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 2.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. The study shall be performed in accordance with the NEC and all applicable OSHA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all adjustable time-current devices such that the trip settings lower the arc flash exposure and minimizing the clearing time. However, the CONTRACTOR shall adjust the time-current devices to avoid nuisance tripping. C. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize fault current values from the short circuit analysis to determine the Incident energy, limited approach boundary, restricted approach boundary, and appropriate PPE required. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide project specific arc-flash labeling. The arc-flash labeling shall be placed on the outside of the cover of the switchgear, motor control centers, combination motor starters, panelboard, switchboard, distribution panel, and all electrical panels, etc. such that it can be read without opening the electrical equipment. Mount arc-flash labels a maximum of 6’- 6” AFF, include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide arc-flash labeling on all existing panelboards, switchboards, distribution panel, etc. where breakers are added or work is performed in or on the electrical equipment. E. Arc Flash Labels shall be chemical resistant, UV resistant, water resistant, scratch resistant, and made of 3.0 mil vinyl tape as manufactured by DuraLabel, Brady or approved equal. The lettering shall be performed by thermal transfer print. 1. Arc Flash labels and label lettering shall be sized large enough to be legible at a distance outside the hazard area. 2. Arc Flash Labels shall be placed on the door(s) of the room if the hazard area reaches or extends beyond the electrical room door(s). 3. The arc flash label shall include a DANGER header when the incident energy is above 40cal/cm2, and a WARNING header for all other incident energy levels. F. To ensure a safe workplace, and that the labeling meets NEC, OSHA, IEEE, and NFPA requirements, use specialized arc flash software to calculate protection boundaries. These protection boundaries shall include the Flash Protection Boundary, Limited Approach Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary. G. The arc-flash analysis shall be based on calculated fault from the Short Circuit Study at each respective bus. The arc-flash software program shall be used to calculate the available arcing fault at each bus in the system, the resultant flash protection boundary based on the applicable protective device operating times and the associated incident energy that workers may be exposed to at the specified working distances. H. The report shall include the following information: Arc-flash evaluation table, arc-flash and shock hazard label definitions, arc-flash evaluation information, arc-flash and shock hazard labels and definitions of terms used in the arc-flash hazard analysis. I. Arc Flash labels shall be similar to the following example: Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-9 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B Attachment A SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST [F&N Project No.] SPECIFICATION: PROJECT NUMBER 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Prior to sending submittal fill out checklist and verify all of the following information is included and clearly identified by highlighting, circling or other method. The items below are the minimum required and the Engineer may require additional information. 2. Indicate any substitutions or deviations from the specification and provide additional information as required per Specification 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures.” 3. Sign form prior to submittal and include with submittal. Submittals provided without “Submittal Checklist” will be returned without review. CHECK BOX IF ITEM HAS BEEN ADDRESSED:  The studies shall use actual X/R and short circuit values obtained by the Contractor from the Electric Utility.  Provide Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. The sheet with the TCC’s shall include a sketch of the circuit the curve is associated with.  Show the maximum fault value on the TCC and include the transformer and cable damage curves.  Provide Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.  Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc.  Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges & clothing classifications down to the 120V panel. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03.  The report and one-line shall include the cable tags and equipment labels indicated in the contract documents.  The report shall include all data that was used in the report. This data shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data, etc. Attachment 3Item 12 Electrical Power System Studies 26 05 73.01-10 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B  Provide a technical data sheet for the arc flash label being provided.  A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. Provide Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis.  A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professiona l ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. CONTRACTOR NOTES/COMMENTS TO ENGINEER: STATEMENT: I have reviewed and certify that the submittal is complete and that the submittal is legible, accurate, and complete in a clear, easily understood manner. Signature: Date: END OF ATTACHMENT A Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install contactors. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results For Electrical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 30 00, Submittals and shall include: 1. Project specific control schematic/diagram for lighting contactors. Submittals without a project specific control schematic/diagram will be rejected and not approved. Diagram shall be done in CAD. Handwritten diagrams are not acceptable. 2. Product Data Sheet 3. Bill of Material 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. STANDARDS: The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 2. NEMA ICS 2 C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Equipment shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following manufacturers: 1. Lighting contractors: a. Allen-Bradley b. Cutler-Hammer c. General Electric d. Square D 2. Photocells: a. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. b. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. c. Square D; Schneider Electric. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES A. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A. 1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off. 2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure. 2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with fusible switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Contactor shall be the number of poles required, rated 30 amps at 480VAC. See plans for more information. Lighting contactors shall be Square D Class 8903 Type L, or approved equal. 480V contactors shall have a 30A, 2 pole circuit breaker rated for 14,000 AIC. Where shown on the plans, the lights shall be fed from this circuit breaker through the contactor. Lighting contactors shall be mounted in a NEMA 1, 12 gauge steel enclosure suitable for indoor installation. See control schematics in plans for more details. Coil operating voltage shall be as indicated on plans. 3. Indicating Lights, Switches, and Pushbuttons: Heavy duty and oil tight (30 mm); Square D Class 9001 or approved equal. Pilot lights shall be push to test (LED type) and shall be Square D SK or approved equal. 4. Provide a print pocket pouch with the control schematic drawings on the inside of the Lighting Contactor door. The control schematic drawings shall be the final version of the drawings and shall include any field revisions made during start-up. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Furnish and install photocells where indicated on the plans. Cells shall face a northerly direction. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.02 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory installed vibration isolators. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according with Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. 3. Externally visible, permanent nameplates shall be provided to identify each switch, indicating light, etc. Equipment and terminal blocks shall be suitably identified. This shall include items on the back side of doors and panel mounted items. Nameplates shall be black with white lettering and attached with stainless steel screws. B. Label contactors with a unique designation. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 24 16.02-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 24 16.02 LIGHTING AND BRANCH PANELBOARDS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install lighting and branch panelboards. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboards shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers: 1. Eaton 2. General Electric 3. Square D 4. No Approved Equal 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Bill of Material 2. Front Elevation with dimensions 3. Assembly ratings including short circuit ratings, continuous current and voltage 4. Cable terminal sizes 5. Cut sheet on circuit breakers and surge protective devices 1.04 STANDARDS Circuit breakers, molded case, and branch circuit shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the following standards as if written here in their entirety: A. Fed. Spec. W-C-375 B. NEMA AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their application. C. NEMA PB1 Panelboards 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Equipment shall be protected from damage. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 24 16.02-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.06 WARRANTY The manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 or later certified. B. Manufacturer shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall consist of a box, front, interior and circuit protective devices and shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA PB1 and bearing the applicable U.L. labels. B. Panelboards shall be four wire, three phase as scheduled or required. Panelboards shall be NEMA 4X 304L Stainless Steel for all locations and suitable for surface mounting. C. Panelboards shall contain sequence style busing and full capacity neutral, composed of an assembly of bolt-on, molded case, automatic breakers with thermal and an instantaneous, magnetic trip in each pole and a trip-free position separate from either the "On" and the "Off" positions. Two (2) and three (3) pole circuit breakers shall simultaneously open all poles. Circuit breakers, molded case and branch circuits shall be in accordance with Fed. Spec. W-C-375. D. The voltage rating, phase, number of wires and ampere rating shall be as indicated and scheduled on the plans. E. The panelboard box shall be fabricated of code gauge, galvanized sheet steel in accordance with U.L. standards and have turned edges around the front for rigidity and frontal clamping. Provide standard knockouts on the panel enclosures. F. The panelboard front shall be fabricated of sheet steel and finished with a baked on gray enamel over a rust inhibitor. Each front shall have a door mounted on semi-concealed hinges with a cylinder lock, an index card and a card holder. Panelboard locks shall be master keyed, with two (2) keys furnished for each panel board. Index cards shall be properly typewritten. G. The interior of the panelboard shall consist of a factory-assembled, rigid frame supporting the rectangular bus, the mains and the neutral bar. H. All busings shall be tin-plated copper and arranged for sequential phasing throughout. The bus bar shall be sized so that the temperature rise is limited in accordance with NEMA standards. The insulated neutral bar shall be located at the opposite end of the structure from the mains. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 24 16.02-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B I. Panelboards shall have either solderless lugs or a main circuit protective device as scheduled. Each enclosure shall have grounding lugs and uninsulated equipment grounding terminals. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers. B. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt in type. 14,000 AIC Fully Rated. Series rating of breakers is not acceptable. C. Single pole circuit breakers serving fluorescent lighting loads shall have the SWD marking. Circuit breakers serving air conditioning branch loads shall be U.L. listed as type HACR. D. Each circuit breaker used in the panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than the RMS symmetrical rating indicated on the plans for that panelboard. E. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer. F. The panelboard and circuit breaker interrupting capacities and rating shall be equal to or greater than the fault currents available to each panelboard. Series rating of breakers shall not be permitted. G. Circuit breakers installed in existing equipment shall match make and manufacturer of existing equipment where being installed. 2.03 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES A. For Panelboards 1. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, externally mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, third edition Type 2, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: a. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. b. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. c. Redundant suppression circuits. d. Redundant replaceable modules. e. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. f. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. g. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. h. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. i. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. j. Integral disconnect. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 24 16.02-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B k. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 120-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 200kA per mode. C. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. Surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. D. Protection modes and UL 1449 3rd edition VPR for 240V, single-phase, three-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Line: 1200 V for 240V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 240V. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the panelboard in accordance with applicable codes at each location indicated on the plans. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in the panelboard. All labeling shall be in accordance to Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wiring devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Products shall comply with the specifications and shall be by the following Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Pass & Seymour 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: A. Shop Drawings for Wiring Devices: Cut sheets of all devices indicating model being provided, NEMA configuration, rating, color, etc. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in its entirety: NEMA WD-1 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices NEMA WD-6 Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements UL 943 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters NFPA 70 National Electrical Code Attachment 3Item 12 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. WALL SWITCHES: For general use, totally enclosed industrial type, specification grade, rated for 120/277 VAC and 20 amps. Approved wire connection to switches shall consist of inserting wire into back wiring hole and tightening terminal screw until wire is tightly griped by clamping mechanism inside switch body. Side wiring shall not be allowed. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in accordance with the NEC. B. MOTOR RATED SWITCHES: HP rated switches approved for motor control or disconnect service when controlling or disconnecting motor loads in excess of 1/4 HP; 20 amp switches for loads exceeding 10 amps. C. WEATHERPROOF SWITCHES: Fitted with a single switch as specified, and weatherproof cover with spring door cover; gray in color for all areas. D. RECEPTACLES: For general use shall be U.L. approved, hospital grade heavy duty duplex grounding type 20 ampere 125 volt heavy duty phosphor bronze contacts. Terminal screws shall be large head, deep slotted #8-32 brass, backed out, color coded for polarity identification, and shall accept up to 10 AWG wire. Side wiring shall not be allowed. 1. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING, INDOOR: GFCI receptacle shall include visible indication of ground fault condition. Feed-through feature shall not be used. Install GFCI device at each location indicated. GFCI circuit breaker shall not be permitted. 2. ISOLATED-GROUND RECEPTACLES: Isolated-ground receptacles shall be listed and labeled as isolated-ground type. Receptacle body shall be orange in color. Isolation- ground shall be integral to the receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 3. WEATHER RESISTANT RECEPTACLES: Weather resistant receptacles shall be listed as weather resistant type in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 4. WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES: a. Weatherproof receptacles shall be hospital grade, 20 ampere, 125 volt and shall be listed as weather resistant type in accordance with the National Electrical Code and shall include a weatherproof device cover. 1) Weatherproof Duplex Receptacle: Provide GFCI duplex receptacle with weatherproof cover. 2) Weatherproof Single Receptacle: Provide a cast box fitted with a single receptacle and threaded cap with a weatherproof cover. b. Weatherproof device covers shall be heavy duty and have a NEMA 3R rating while receptacle is in use with die cast aluminum construction as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Model No. CKMUV or approved equal. Attachment 3Item 12 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE COVER PLATES: The cover plate color shall be 302/304 stainless steel for all areas, unless otherwise indicated or required by the NEC. Screw heads shall have color to match plate. Provide telephone cover plates which are the same as above, except with a single bushed pole for the telephone cable. 1. Mark power/receptacle outlets with voltage, phase, panel name and circuit number. 2. Identify all wall switches, disconnect switches, etc. with nametags, circuit served and panel origin, nametags shall be approved by the ENGINEER/OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. Receptacle and light switch cover plates shall be Pass & Seymour, or approved equal, custom laser engraved plates. 3. Identify all push-button stations with their function and equipment served. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Attachment 3Item 12 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, dirt and debris. E. Install switches, wall-mounted duplex receptacles and telephone outlets at the heights specified in Section 26 05 33.03, “Outlet Boxes”, unless indicated otherwise on the plans. F. Switches installed at one (1) location shall be ganged together under one (1) cover plate. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test wiring devices to insure electrical continuity of grounding. Energize the circuit to demonstrate compliance with the requirements. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 108 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, design, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete lightning protection system for the elevated tank in accordance with UL 96A, NFPA 780. Lightning protection system shall be tied to the site’s grounding system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. Listing of the manufacturer in the lightning protection section of the current edition of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Electrical Construction Materials List will be accepted as compliance with this requirement. B. All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight and construction to suit the application where used in accordance with UL, NFPA, NEC code requirements for this type structure and as per manufacturer's recommendations. Class I sized components may be utilized on roof levels 75 feet and below in height. Class II sized components are required for roof levels over 75 feet in height. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings a. Specifications b. Catalog Sheets for All Products Provided c. Shop drawings showing type, size and location of all equipment, grounds, cable routings, details, etc. 2. Continuity Test Report 3. Copy of U.L. Master Label for the Facility 1.04 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 26 05 00, “Common Work Results for Electrical”, for all standards which apply to this section. NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems UL 96A Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems LPI 175 Lightning Protection Institute Standard of Practice Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials used in connection with the installation of the lightning protection systems shall be approved for lightning protection systems by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. No combination of materials shall be used that form an electrolytic couple of such a nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. When unusual conditions exist which would cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors, conductors with suitable protective coatings or oversize conductors shall be used. If a mechanical hazard is involved, the conductor size shall be increased to compensate therefore, or suitable protection shall be provided. The conductors may be protected by covering them with molding or tubing preferably made of wood or nonmagnetic material. If metal tubing is used, the conductor shall be electrically connected to it at its upper and lower ends. B. All equipment used shall be new and of a design and construction to suit the application in accordance with UL 96A requirements and shall be so marked. 2.02 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. CONDUCTORS - Copper conductors manufactured of copper grade ordinarily required for commercial electrical work generally designated as being 98 percent conductive when annealed. Down conductors of copper cable for installations other than towers shall weigh not less than 187.5 pounds per thousand feet and the size of any wire of this cable shall not be less than No. 17 AWG (0.045 inch). Down conductors shall be tinned. The thickness of any copper ribbon or strip shall be not less than No. 16 AWG (0.051 inch). B. AIR TERMINALS - Air terminals shall be tapered to a blunt point. The rod shall be of solid copper, 1/2 inch in diameter. Air terminals and support shall be designed over 24 inches to handle a 75 pound per square foot wind load. All air terminals shall be supported by a suitable brace, with guide(s) not less than one-half the height of the air terminal. Air terminals shall be located in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 780 and UL 96A. Air terminals shall extend at least ten inches above the object or area they are intended to protect. Air terminals shall be placed around the perimeter of flat or gently sloping roofs at intervals not exceeding 20 feet. C. FASTENERS - Fasteners shall be of the same material as the conductor base material or bracket being fastened, or other equally corrosion resistant material. Galvanized or plated materials shall not be used. D. FITTINGS - Fittings/bonding devices, cable splicers, and miscellaneous connectors shall be suitable for use with the installed conductor and shall be copper, bronze or aluminum with bolt pressure connections to the cable. Cast or stamped crimp type fittings shall not be used. Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B E. Aluminum material may be used where the installation of dissimilar metals creates problems. The Contractor shall field verify all materials involved in the total installation and shall install system in accordance with all applicable NFPA and U.L. codes and standards. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The shop drawings shall indicate the extent and general arrangement of the lightning protection system. If any departures from the shop drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Engineer. Lightning protection systems for all applications shall conform to National Fire Protection Association Code No. 780 and the NEC, whichever is more stringent. B. Installation shall be performed by a certified master installer. Installer shall provide an Underwriters' Laboratories Master Label for the facilities. C. Air terminals shall be provided on the highest projections and at intervals not exceeding 20 feet along the perimeter top surface. Air terminals shall extend at least 10 inches above the object or area that they are intended to protect. Air terminals shall be connected to the lightning protection system when specifically authorized by the Engineer. D. Roof and down conductors shall be stranded and shall meet the requirements given in NFPA 780. Roof and down conductors shall maintain a horizontal or downward course. No bend in a roof or down conductor shall form an included angle of less than 90 degrees, nor shall it have a bend radius of less than eight inches. Conductors shall be routed external to buildings and six feet or more from power or signal conductors. Down conductors shall be routed outside of any structure and shall not penetrate or invade that structure. All down conductors except one may be provided with a screw type connector as described in UL 96 where lightning protection system testing may be required. Down connectors shall be supported from and secured to the building exterior using one hole straps of copper or bronze at maximum intervals of three feet. E. Guards shall be provided for down conductors located in or next to driveways, walkways or other areas where they may be displaced or damaged. Guards shall extend at least six feet above and one foot below grade level. Guards shall be metal pipe. Metal guards shall be bonded to the down conductor at both ends. Bonding jumpers shall be of the same size as the down conductor. Crimp type fittings shall not be used. Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Metallic bodies, on or below roof level, that are subject to induced charges from lightning include exhaust fans, radio towers, HVAC units, ladders, railings, antennas, roof drains, plumbing, vents, metal coping, metal flashing, gutters, downspouts, small metal wall vents, door and window frames, metal balcony railings, and in general any isolated metallic body within six feet of an exposed lightning protection system element. When these metallic bodies have a metal thickness of 3/16 inch or greater, they shall be bonded to the nearest main lightning protection system conductor with UL approved fittings and conductors meeting the requirements of NFPA 780. These bonding fittings shall provide surfaces of not less than three square inches. Provisions shall be made to prevent corrosive effects introduced by galvanic action of dissimilar metals at bonding points. If the metal parts of these units are less than 3/16 inch thick, additional approved air terminals, conductors and fittings, providing a two way path to ground from the air terminals shall be installed. G. If metallic, the mast of roof mounted antennas and obstruction lightning shall be bonded to the nearest roof or down conductor using UL approved fittings and conductors. The bonding jumpers shall be of the same size and material as the roof or down conductor to which they are connected. Provide as a minimum a path to ground at each corner of the building. H. Aluminum material may be used where the installation of dissimilar metals creates problems. The Contractor shall field verify all materials involved in the total installation and shall install system in accordance with all applicable NFPA and U.L. codes and standards. I. The lightning protection system for the ground storage tank shall consist of installing air terminals at 20 foot intervals along the perimeter top surface of the tank and anywhere else on the top of the tank that is required by UL, NFPA and LPl. Air terminals shall extend at least 10 inches above the tank. Air terminals shall be connected together with a cable ring conductor. “Down” conductors shall extend from the cable ring conductor down the side of the tank to the earth connecting to the ground rods or ground electrode plates. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The lightning protection system will be inspected by the Engineer to determine conformance with the requirements of this specification. No part of the system shall be concealed until so authorized by the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for the “Lightning Protection System” installation to assure compliance with contract requirements, and shall maintain records of his quality control for all construction operations. A copy of these records and Contractor tests, as well as records of corrective action taken, shall be furnished to Owner’s Representative, as directed by the Engineer. C. Contractor shall obtain an Underwriters' Laboratories Master Label for the facility. 1. Upon completion, an application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for inspection and certification. 2. Cost for UL inspection and associated costs to obtain the UL Master Label shall be paid for by the Contractor. Attachment 3Item 12 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Testing of Continuity of all Conductors - A copy of these records and tests, as well as the records of corrective action taken, shall be furnished to Owner’s Representative, as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO.2019-04-B 26 50 00 LIGHTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install light fixtures, complete with lamps, ballasts, drivers and other incidentals. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards. B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. D. LED: Light-emitting diode. E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section01 33 00, Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. Product data sheets for fixtures, lamps and photocells, arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. 6. Performance curves for light fixtures. 7. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. DELIVERY AND STORAGE Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO.2019-04-B A. Ship light fixtures inside protective cartons and keep packaged until installed. Deliver lamps to the job site in the original packing cases and sleeves. B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Provide cold weather ballasts in fixtures which are subject to temperatures below 32 degrees F. B. Provide special mounting, enclosures and fire-safing, as required by the authorities having jurisdiction so that the integrity of the U.L. listed ceiling assembles is maintained. C. Provide U.L. labels where fixtures are subject to moisture. Provide DL or WL label on fixtures required for the location. D. Contractor shall verify voltages with ballasts and power supplies prior to ordering fixtures. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide lighting fixtures as shown on the drawings and specified on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. Where a fixture type designation is omitted from the plans, the Electrical Bidder shall contact the Engineer prior to bid to determine the fixture type intended. Also refer to related drawings and verify quantity and location of fixtures prior to bid. B. All lighting fixtures shall be furnished complete with all supports, mounting accessories and trim pieces required for installation and type of ceiling, wall (interior or exterior), pole or roof construction. C. LED Fixtures shall be UL 8750 listed. D. LED fixtures shall be tested to verify lumen output and color properties, and shall be measured in accordance with IES LM-79. Lumens maintenance shall be tested and measured in accordance with IES LM-80. Lumen maintenance projections shall be in accordance in IES TM-21. The system shall be rated at L70/B50 for not less than 50,000 hours. E. Equal fixtures approved prior to bid shall not be accepted unless provided in writing from the Engineer prior to bid. If equals are approved by the Engineer in writing, the Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing, as an official submittal to the Engineer for approval, the following: 1. Foot-candle calculations for all rooms. The calculations shall include maximum illumination level, minimum illumination level, average illumination level, light loss factor, etc. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO.2019-04-B 2. Energy compliance form showing compliance the applicable Energy Code as required by the authority having jurisdiction. The manufacturer shall be responsible for filling the forms out completely, signing the energy compliance form and be responsible for meeting all applicable requirements of the compliance requirements, no exceptions. 2.02 MATERIALS A. PLASTIC LENS: Lens for fluorescent fixtures shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum thickness of 0.125". B. PHOTOCELL: Fully adjustable from two (2) to 50' candles with SPST contacts; rated 1500 watts at 120 VAC. Cells shall have a built in time delay of five (5) seconds. C. BALLASTS: Ballast for fluorescent lamps shall be high power factor, dual protected, Class P, one (1) or two (2) lamps as required, unless otherwise specified on the plans; manufactured in accordance with CBM standards, ETL certified, U.L. approved, and sound rated "A"; protected by a built-in, resetting, thermal protector. Ballasts for high intensity discharge lamps shall be high power factor, potted and encapsulated. The starting current shall not exceed the running current. Ballast shall be compatible in design to the specified lamps. Fluorescent ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance and by the manufacturer of the light fixture for Hi-Intensity ballasts. D. EXIT LIGHTS: Single or double face unit as required for each location, with arrows to clearly define the path of egress and which flash at a rate not exceeding five (5) hertz. Provide battery-powered exit lights if the exits lights are not served with an emergency power source E. LEDs 1. LED Manufacturer shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process such as Optibin® to ensure color temperature consistency from fixture to fixture. F. LED DRIVERS 1. LED fixtures shall be complete with high power factor type driver of voltage indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. Design and construction shall conform to UL standards. Sound rating shall be class 'A'. 2. Drivers shall have a power factor of no less than .9, total harmonic distortion of no more than 20%, and transient withstand capacity per ANSI C62.41, Category A. 3. Driver shall be Class 2, meet the requirements of UL 1310, and be operated in constant current mode. 4. Driver shall have inherent protection against short circuit, over-voltage, over current, and over-temperature; and tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide the lighting fixtures, as specified and scheduled on the plans. If a type designation is omitted, verify the fixture selection with the Engineer before installation. Attachment 3Item 12 Lighting 26 50 00 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO.2019-04-B B. Check the architectural finishes and provide fixtures with proper trim, frames, support hangers and other hardware required to coordinate with the proper finishes, regardless of the specified or scheduled catalog number, prefixes and suffixes. C. Fixtures which are tandem-mounted and recessed in gypboard or plaster ceilings shall be yoke-mounted. D. Test and aim flood lights, when dark outside to provide a uniform and widespread, illuminated area. Direct units as indicated or instructed by the Engineer to prevent objectionable glare. E. Furnish and install photocells where indicated on the plans. Cells shall face a northerly direction. F. Furnish and install exit lights where scheduled and indicated on the plans. Locate fixtures on the ceiling or wall, as required by the Engineer. Provide relays and the necessary wiring to provide a flashing exit light system upon the activation of a fire alarm. Install exit lights in accordance with Paragraph (Q)(2) of the Handicapped Accessibility Act of Texas. G. Furnish and install a complete exterior lighting control system, as indicated on the plans. Provide materials and equipment to properly interface timing devices and photocells with relays and contactors so that a complete and satisfactory operating system is rendered. H. Test and aim linear LED logo lights, when dark outside to provide a uniform and widespread, illuminated area. I. Test and aim pole mounted metal halide logo lights, when dark outside to provide a uniform and widespread, illuminated area. 3.02 CLEAN AND ADJUST Immediately before final inspection, clean all fixtures, inside and out, including plastics and glassware. Adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surfaces. Replace broken or damaged parts. Lamp and test all fixtures for electrical, as well as, mechanical operation. 3.03 SPARE PARTS A. Lamps: Furnish at least one of each type. B. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: Furnish at least one of each type. C. Ballast: Furnish at least one of each type. D. Globes and Guards: Furnish at least one of each type END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 40 90 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. General Requirements for Instrumentation. There are three areas of work in the Instrumentation Work in this project as described below: 1. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing all conductors, coax and conduit as required for a complete and operational system. 2. The Instrumentation System Contractor shall provide all hardware, software, and configuration and integration associated with the PLC based Instrumentation and Process Control system at the new 2.5 MG EST. Provide a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents. 3. The System Integrator Contractor shall provide all hardware, software and configuration and integration associated with updating the Owner’s Operator Work Station PLC and HMI to fully incorporate the 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank’s I/O. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, and contract drawings, bring the matter immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. B. REFERENCE STANDARDS: 1. American Society of Testing Materials: A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service B 68 Seamless Copper Tube D 1047 Polyvinyl Chloride Jacket for Wire and Cable A 36 Specification for Structural Steel Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ). 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Painting Specifications for weather exposure. 5. American Welding Society (AWS): Welding Code D 1.1-75. 6. Federal Specifications: Primer, Paint Zinc, Chromate, Alkyd Type, Fed. Spec. TT-P-645a. 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): National Electrical Code (NEC), 1990 edition. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 9. Instrument Society of America (ISA): RP 3.1-1960 Flow Meter Installations, Seal and Condensate Chambers S5.1-1973 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification RP7.1-1956 Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test S7.3-1975 Quality Standard for Instrument Air RP18.1-1965 Specifications and Guides for the Use of General Purpose Annunciators S5.4-1976 Instrument Loop Diagrams S8.1-1968 Instrument Enclosures for Industrial Environments RP12.1-1960 Electrical Instruments in Hazardous Atmospheres RP20.1, 20.2 Specification Forms for Instruments S39.1-1972 Control Valve Sizing Equations S39.2-1972 Control Valve Capacity Test Procedures S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 10. American Petroleum Institute (API): API RP 550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems API RP 520 Recommended Practice for the Design and Installation of Pressure-Relieving Systems in Refineries 11. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA): PM 20.1-1973 Process Measurement and Control Terminology RC5-10-1963 Resistance Thermometers 12. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL): Subject 13, Subject 1227. 13. Factory Mutual (FM). 14. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 15. Supplement to C37.90-1971, Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus (IEEE Std. 313-1971), C37.90a-1974. 16. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 17. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Tray Fire Tests, IEEE 383. 1.03 GUARANTEE A. GUARANTEE PERIOD: The Contractor shall provide guarantees as defined hereunder for a period of one year after final acceptance by the Owner. B. GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS FOR ANALOG DEVICES: Each device shall perform its intended function within the specified operating accuracy and repeatability without more than 12 adjustments for any consecutive period of 12 months. The availability of each device shall be not less than 98.0 percent for any consecutive period of six months. Downtime of analog devices affecting more than 8 loops shall be considered a system failure. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. The System Integrator's personnel shall have a minimum of ten years of prior experience in furnishing, installation, testing, programming, debugging, start-up, and training for systems at least as large and similar to the one in this Contract. The system installer shall have employees who are qualified technicians for the duration of the contract. The Contractor shall submit for evaluation within one week of Notice to Proceed, his instrumentation systems installer's company resumes complete with company history, project lists, locations, Owner, costs, type of system installed, and references with phone numbers. Installers not meeting these qualifications shall not be accepted. As a part of this contract, the instrumentation system installers shall assume complete system responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all subsystems and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The Contractor shall actively be involved in control system integration industry for the last five years. The Contractor shall not act as a broker for the project; he shall provide and be responsible for all hardware, interfacing software, training, testing, and extended warranties. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. The terms used in this specification conform to definitions in ISA S51.1, SAMA PMC 20.1- 1973 and RC 5-10-1963, except as modified below. 1. Device: An electronic or mechanical apparatus designed to perform a specific measurement or control function. 2. Equipment: The machinery used in a process, e.g., pumps, fans, etc. 3. Interchangeability error: The algebraic difference between the indication and true value of the measured variable as a result of exchanging a device with a replacement. 4. Loop: Any combination of interconnected transmitters, receivers, switches, alarms, indicators, controllers, computers, or final control elements. 5. Operating accuracy: Conformity of indicated value to accepted standard value or true value throughout specified operating conditions with a confidence level of 95 percent includes, but is not limited to, hysteresis, linearity, and operating influence of temperature, pressure, supply voltage, and transmitter power supply. Operating accuracy for loop is defined as root-mean-square (RMS) of individual device operation accuracies. 6. Process: A progressively continuing operation that consists of a series of controlled actions systemically directed toward a particular result, e.g., a process to mix, filter, heat, and/or cool air to a particular condition. 7. Response: The results of the act, or process of measuring the time difference between the time of a change in an input signal or a measured variable, and the time when the output, display, and final control element in the loop has changed to at least 60 percent of the change which should result from the input change. 8. Subsystem: A discrete subdivision of a system and an assemblage of parts, devices, or software modules designed to perform one or more of the specific tasks required for the system to accomplish its functions. 9. System: An assemblage of sometimes diverse parts, devices, or software mo dules serving a common set of measurement or control functions. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 10. Time resolution: The result of the act or process of rendering distinguishable events occurring at nearly the same time. Expressed as a measurement of time in seconds. 11. Unit: Any combination of equipment items interconnected in a predetermined manner, performing one or more controlled actions toward a particular result. A discrete subdivision of a process. 12. Concealed - Accessible: Out of general sight, but can be easily reached by removing panels or access doors. 13. Concealed - Inaccessible: Out of general sight and cannot be easily reached except by removing a permanent part of the building or using special tools. 14. Exposed: Open to general view without removing panels, access doors, or a permanent part of the building. 15. Field termination point: Termination of a run of raceway from an instrument panel to the vicinity of a field instrument. Field termination point is usually within five horizontal feet from the field instrument. 16. Analog device: Any sensor, transmitter, indicator, recorder, controller, computing relay, or control valve which transmits or receives an analog signal. Excludes the analog portion of a digital system or I/O subsystems. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: 1. Detail: Give sufficient detail to permit system configuration, installation, and wiring without reference to design drawings. Refer to Division 1 - General Provisions. 2. As a minimum, shop drawings shall include a bill of materials with original manufacturer's name and catalog number (re-labeled component information is not acceptable), original manufacturer's catalog cut sheets, front views, assembly drawings, nameplate schedules, electrical schematics, electrical connections diagrams, and piping connection diagrams. 3. Electrical, piping, and interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, complete with conduit, cable, and equipment designations, and shall include terminal identification information. 4. Include size of all conduits, pipe, cables, and conductors. 5. Physical arrangement drawings shall include operating and servicing clearance requirements, cooling requirements, electrical power requirements, and cabling information. 6. Operator console configuration drawings shall include specific location of all keys and pushbuttons. 7. Logic drawer drawings shall show used space and expansion space. 8. Show appropriate tag numbers on all product data. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 9. Software specifications for all software provided in addition to existing standard software. a. Include fully annotated source listings, input-output requirements, memory requirements, timing and sequencing requirements, flow chart showing functions performed, operating sequences and decision points, required system configuration, list of known or anticipated limitations of software modules, list of malfunction procedures to be followed for recovering from operator error or other malfunction, and description of how each module interfaces with calling and called programs. b. Provide proposed screen layouts showing modifications to existing screens, and new screens: Show all displays, inputs, outputs, recorders, alarms and indications along with the associated signal tag number. B. TECHNICAL MANUALS: 1. Supply six (6) sets of technical manuals with software specifications to Owner's Representative no later than the equipment shipment date. Each set shall be bound in a standard size, three-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic, hard-cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. 2. Each set of technical manuals shall include a general and detailed description, a theory of operation description, detailed schematic drawings, specifications, and installation, connection, calibration, operating, troubleshooting, preventive maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail with a clear and specific description of the steps the operators must take to perform each of the tasks and modes of operating specified. These manuals shall provide the Owner with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. Exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies, and accessory components shall be included together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. These manuals are in addition to all applicable requirements of Division 1 - General Provisions. C. SPARE PARTS LIST: 1. Contractor shall prepare and submit for Engineer's review a master spare parts list of all Division 40 items. All division 40 spare parts shall be turned over to the City at one time and stored into lockable cabinets. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 INFORMATION ON DRAWINGS A. The following information is indicated on the drawings: 1. Loop diagram on flow sheet for each control loop. Diagrams are schematic in nature and intended only as a guide to work to be performed. 2. Approximate location of primary elements, instrument panels, and final control elements. 3. Location of electrical distribution panel boards for instrument electrical power. 4. Location of equipment having alarms and equipment status contacts. 5. Location of equipment being controlled by system. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. The following information is not shown on drawings, but shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine, furnish, and coordinate with other divisions based upon systems specified. Show this information on project record drawings. 1. Instrument loop drawings per ISA S5.4 minimum, desired and optional items. 2. Detailed enclosure and instrument panel layouts, PLC enclosure layouts, Filter console layouts, fabrication details, and wiring diagrams. 3. Detailed system configuration. 4. Raceway and cable routing for instrumentation wiring. 2.02 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. AMBIENT CONDITIONS: Provide equipment suitable for ambient conditions specified. Provide system elements to operate properly in the presence of radio frequency fields produced by portable RF transmitters with output of five watts operated at 24 inches from instruments in the presence of plant telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment, and in the presence of digital data transmission systems. B. FIELD LOCATIONS: Field equipment may be subjected to ambient temperatures from -5 to 50°C with direct radiation and relative humidity from 45 to 100 percent with condensation. C. POWER SUPPLY: Power supply will be 117 volts a-c, single-phase, 60-hertz commercial power. Voltage variations will be at least plus or minus 8 percent. Certain loops shall have integral power supply as specified in the Contract Documents. Power supplies shall be provided in the panels as specified in the Contract Documents or required for a complete system, plus one spare. 2.03 SPARE PARTS A. Supply spare parts as indicated in these Specifications. B. Spare parts shall become property of the Owner. 2.04 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment of solid-state construction utilizing second source semiconductors, unless otherwise specified. Derate components to assure dependability and long-term stability. Provide printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy, hand or wave soldered, of sufficient thickness to prevent warping. Coat printed circuit boards in field-mounted equipment with two mils of solderable conformal coating complying with MIL-I-46058B. Alignment and adjustments shall be noncritical, stable with temperature changes or aging, and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. Do not insert components of specially selected values into standard electronic assemblies to meet performance requirements. Use parts indicated in instruction manuals, replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading performance of completed assembly. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation General Provisions 40 90 00 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. Use test equipment and instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs suitable for purpose intended and rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the required accuracy of device being calibrated. Such test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to the National Bureau of Standards as applicable. 2.05 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. The instrumentation system Contractor shall provide the Owner's staff with all required training and operating procedures, at no extra cost to the Owner, in addition to In-Plant SCADA training specified in Section 40 90 02. The training schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner's Representative. Training shall include operating, testing, calibration and programming of the system, and simple troubleshooting of the system. The training shall include manuals which are specifically written for the system provided as described in Division 01 - General Provisions of these Specifications. B. The calibration, testing, and start-up of all the instruments whether existing or provided new, shall be done by the manufacturer's field technician/Engineer in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide a list of all manufacturers whose technicians will perform this work. The Contractor shall also provide a certified calibration report stating that each instrument shown or specified in the Contract Documents has been installed, tested and calibrated per manufacturer's recommendations and per these Contract Documents. C. Follow-up Services: After the acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall make four (4) trips to the project site for calibration and adjustment of all the instruments and devices, including the In-Plant SCADA system. The first trip shall be three months after acceptance of the complete system, and thereafter every three months for a total of four trips. These trips are in addition to all warranty items, and shall be at no extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the services of a trained technician for each trip with appropriate calibration and testing instruments. All defects shall be immediately remedied. The trips shall be coordinated with the Owner. D. All control software developed for this contract shall be delivered to the Owner stored on electronic media in a format suitable for installing on the existing equipment and new equipment installed under this contract. This includes all source code, complied code, link libraries, run-time libraries or other modules necessary to recreate an operational system in the event of a catastrophic failure or cessation of business by any of the Contractors. In addition, copies of all data bases and necessary associated files as configured after the final test shall be supplied on the same medium. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 40 90 01 INSTRUMENTATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment for complete instrumentation and controls. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Installation of equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between equipment furnished under this contract. B. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that instrumentation is an integrated system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who shall provide all the equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. C. Supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the instrumentation equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall be provided by the Contractor. Installation work shall conform to applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes. D. Coordinate the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel during construction, testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: Equipment shall be the Manufacturer's latest and proven design. Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. B. OPERATING VOLTAGE: Electrical components of the system shall operate on 120 volt, single-phase, 60 Hertz, except as otherwise noted in the specifications. C. POWER SUPPLIES: The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the instrument system from these energy sources shall be furnished with the instrumentation. D. INPUT/OUTPUT 1. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems shown shall be 4-20 mA DC process measurement signals. Current loop isolators, current repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be furnished and installed as required to meet instrument specifications and to make instrumentation system fully operational. 2. Pair shielded cable, as specified in Section 26 05 10, LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES shall be used for all 4-20 mA DC loops. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication or shipment to the job. Equipment shall not be fabricated or shipped to the job before receipt of approved shop drawings from the Engineer. Submittals for approval shall include (1) component manufacturing data sheet indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by item number and nomenclature, (2) component drawing showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details, (3) a system piping schematic and wiring schematic each on a single drawing with full description of operation, (4) complete schematic diagram of each piece of electrical and electronic equipment including electrical valves and tolerances for each component. Component identification on the schematic shall be as described above. 2. Following approval, the manufacturer shall be responsible for preparation of the required sets of these drawings for distribution as indicated in Division 0 and Division 1 specifications. 3. Shop drawings submitted for all equipment furnished under this section of the specifications, shall be submitted at the same time in the same package. Partial submittals will not be reviewed. B. Sales bulletins and other general publications are not acceptable as submittals for approval. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. Instrument panel wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 10, LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES shall be followed. 2. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures 3. O&M manual shall include setup form for each instrument installed in the field. The setup form shall include the manufacturers name, model number, instrument location, instrument tag name, parameter settings, power supply location (panel circuit number), and full catalog ordering information. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ASTM A-126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings ASTM B-61 Specification for Steam and Valve Bronze Castings Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. SPARE PARTS 1. Furnish all standard recommended spare parts as indicated in the Manufacturer's instruction manuals, for each component in the system. 2. Furnish two (2) of each different type and size of fuses. B. SPECIAL TOOLS: Furnish a kit which contains special size wrenches and other types of tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, aligning, and calibrating each piece of equipment. In addition, any piece of equipment (meter, test set, etc.) required by the Manufacturer to align, adjust, or otherwise calibrate any item under this section of the specification shall be furnished. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURES/PANELS A. Enclosures and panels as indicated on the plans and in this specification shall be furnished, installed, and wired. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X for outdoor environments and NEMA 1 enclosures for indoor environments, unless specifically stated otherwise. 2.02 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSMITTER A. Unit shall be a hydrostatic pressure sensor for level measurement of fresh water. Hydrostatic pressure sensor type continuous level measuring system consisting of level element, transmitter, and cable from level element to transmitter. The hydrostatic pressure sensor shall be equipped with permanent hermetically sealed cable probe. The hydrostatic pressure sensor shall be KPSI Series 30 submersible level transmitter. No substitutions shall be allowed. B. The submersible hydrostatic pressure sensor shall be connected to a remotely mounted monitoring/control device, Endress & Hauser Model RIA 261. C. Level system shall have an overall accuracy of ± 0.1% of full scale and shall operate on 4- 20mA loop power derived from the RTU. D. Transmitter shall contain solid state controls to operate transducer and to provide a 4 to 20 mA DC output signal in linear proportion to the level being sensed. Transmitter shall be provided with output indicator meter and shall have operating range of 14 to 140 degrees F. Transmitter scale range shall be as noted. Transmitter shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure, suitable for wall/rack mounting. E. Interconnecting cable between hydrostatic pressure sensor and the display shall be furnished with the unit with length as required. Cable shall be of one continuous length, no splicing allowed. Tag Service Range PIT-03 Tank Level 0-50’ Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.03 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER A. Pressure indicating transmitter shall be of the two wire capacitance sensing solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal proportional to the calibrated pressure range. The transmitter shall have 316 stainless steel wetted parts and Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitter shall have 1/4 NPT on flange process connection. The transmitters shall have an externally adjustable span and zero, an integral junction box and an accuracy of +/-0.25% of span, +/-0.25% stability of upper range limit. Pressure transmitter shall be provided with pressure indication. B. Range limits of transmitter shall be 0-50 to 0-300 psig. Each transmitter shall include an integrally or externally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Transient protector shall be Rosemount Model 470. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 3-valve manifold with NORMAL, ZERO, BLOCK, CALIBRATE and BLOWDOWN functions and shall be D/A PTM6 or approved equal. Transmitter shall have local indication of pressure. Transmitter shall be Rosemount 3051, Endress & Hauser with Hart protocol. No substitutions shall be allowed. Tag Service Range PIT-01 Inline Pressure 0-150PSI PIT-02 Inline Pressure 0-150PSI 2.04 INTRUSION ALARM A. Hermetically sealed brushed anodized aluminum housing, Rhodium plated switch contacts, industrial wide gap magnetic contacts, UL listed, surface mount, 3’ stainless steel armored cable, Sentrol 2500 series. Provide with one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Wire each device requiring power so that when wires are removed from any one device, power is not be disrupted to any other device. Ground the case of each device either by mounting directly on a steel frame or by a third wire. Attachment 3Item 12 Instrumentation 40 90 01-5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided during construction to assist the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; mounting, piping, and wiring one of each type of device, and the methods of protecting all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation, the services of the above service engineer shall be provided for calibration and start-up of the equipment and for instructing the operating personnel. The Manufacturer shall provide sufficient service to place the system in satisfactory operation. B. Check out and calibrate the system upon completion of the installation. C. Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certified statement of approval of the installation including his supplier's authorization for turning on energy to the system. END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 40 90 02 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA AQUISITION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section specifies furnishing, installing, testing, and start-up operations of a complete control system as indicated in the Plans and as specified herein. The system shall be totally integrated with the existing SCADA system. The system shall be configured to operate over an open system architecture. B. System Components: The system will consist of the following major components and subsystems: 1. Local processing unit (LPU) control panel (PLC's inside). 2. Radio 3. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS). 4. Spare parts C. Coordinate with the Owner’s SCADA Contractor to provide all required hardware and PLC hardware and PLC programming necessary to interface with the existing system. D. SCADA Contractors shall be limited to the following: 1. D&H Automation: Contact: Herschel Henson (817) 205-9288 is the only acceptable Contractor for Town of Prosper water projects. E. Provide software programming to create new screens and modify existing screens on the existing Owner’s PLC system. F. Provide raceways, communication cables and conductors as required, installed and terminated for a complete and operational system, whether shown on Plans or not. G. Perform radio communication system programming and configuration for communication with the Owner’s PLC system. In addition, provide all software required to establish communication with the supplied hardware. H. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for wireless communications network operation or performance to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by other suppliers under other sections of these Specifications, shall be included whether or not they are shown on the Plans. These devices include, but are not limited to, power supplies, Ethernet converters, etc. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-2 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B I. Lightning/Surge Protection 1. Lightning/Surge protection shall be provided to protect the Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition system from induced surges propagating along the communications, signal and power supply lines. The protection systems shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the surge withstand level for the device they are protecting and be maintenance free and self-restoring. 2. All wiring, hardware, and connections means shall comply with the National Electrical Code and/or applicable local codes. 3. Lightning/Surge protection devices shall be mounted as close to the equipment they are protection as possible. Mounting guidelines will be followed as indicated in installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. Wires shall be attached by means of a cable-clamping terminal block activated by a screw. Connections shall be gas-tight, and the terminal block shall be fabricated on non-ferrous, non-corrosive materials. All wiring points and plug connections shall be “touch safe” with no live voltages that can make contact with a misplaced finger. 4. Panel mounted Lightning/Surge protection devices shall consist of two parts; a base terminal block and a plug protection module. Base shall directly connect to DIN rail. Base and plug shall have the ability to be coded to accept only the correct voltage plug. Field mounted Lightning/Surge protection devices shall be contained in NEMA 12 housings. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control functions shall include digital logic control, PID control, analog scaling and setpoint control, and peer to peer communications. B. Include all hardware, firmware, software, and application programming and configuration, as necessary, to make the system completely functional and operational in accordance with the Contract Documents. All necessary components and equipment which are not specifically described in the Contract Documents, but which are necessary to configure an operational distributed control system as described herein, shall be identified, furnished, and installed by the CONTRACTOR. The system provided shall be the vendor's standard; a prototype system will not be accepted. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 2. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-3 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B b. ICS 1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control. c. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600V d. ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. e. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. f. ICS 19, Diagrams, Device Designations, and Symbols for Industrial Control and Systems. g. Publication No. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V maximum). 4. National Electric Code. 5. ISA Standards 6. IEC 2 KV Isolation test 7. IEEE472/ANSI C37-90A Surge withstand capability test. 8. IEEE 802.3 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 12. Joint Industrial Council (JIC) 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00. B. Loop diagrams shall be prepared according to ISA Standard ISA-S5 and using loop numbers provided. C. Schematic ladder diagrams shall include all terminal blocks, hardware devices, software interlocks, software data links, and control. D. PLC panel layout, plans, elevations, sections, details, etc. E. A schedule defining all I/O, database reference, and point of origin or destination, and PLC system internal address. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-4 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Software manuals shall be provided to configure the central system and technical review information. Provide sample program documentation from previous projects. G. Submit written description of functions, loops, and logic. H. Submit all SAMA Logic and Wiring Diagrams and ISA Logic Diagrams for all equipment requiring programming at the PLCs, with all set points and ranges indicated. I. Complete spare parts list with catalog and part numbers and quantities. J. Factory Test Reports K. Bill of materials showing product ordering information L. Software being submitted shall include the product information and version with the purchased license agreements. Licensed agreements shall show product key number, the number of points purchased, and length of purchase agreement. M. Integrator shall provide a second submittal that shall be approved prior to delivery to the job site and downloaded on the PLC system: 1. At least six weeks prior to start-up, submit detailed programming information consisting of ladder logic and proposed program code, complete input, output, relay, register and controller identification labels, memory allocation table, and written description of program operation. N. Radio Path Study a. Prior to purchasing any equipment associated with the elevated storage tank SCADA system, the contractor shall do a path study to determine a clear line of site and good reliable communication path year round between the elevated storage tank and the existing main Owner’s SCADA site. b. The radio path study shall include a summary page indicating the findings and recommendations. c. The radio path study shall include screen shots from the radio path software study. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-5 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B O. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. Instrument panel wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Conductors and Cables” shall be followed. 2. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures. 3. A schedule defining all I/O, database reference, and point of origin or destination, and PLC system internal address. 4. Submit written description of functions, loops, and logic. 5. Submit all SAMA Logic and Wiring Diagrams and ISA Logic Diagrams for all equipment requiring programming at the PLCs, with all set points and ranges indicated. 6. One software copy of actual program files burned on a CD/DVD with a PDF copy of program with descriptions and rung comments. 7. Provide hardcopy of PLC programming logic in O&M Manuals. 8. Hard Copy of software program including programs and rung comments 9. Provide a hard copy of the “as-built” wiring diagrams, panel layout, elevations, sections, details, and associated drawings in a separate binder. 10. One PDF copy and one AutoCAD (.dwg) copy of the “as-built” wiring diagrams, panel layout, elevations, sections, details, and associated drawings burned on a CD. a. Maximum file size is 5MB. If manual is greater than maximum allowable file size, provide individual files for each major section of manual. b. All files shall be compatible with the latest software version available. c. Filename shall identify the plant site, plant area, equipment manufacturer, and date equipment placed in service. i.e. WWTP-PC1-Manufacturer-200503.pdf. d. Provide a master Table of Contents which includes links to navigate to all the files on the CD. The chapter labels shall identify the information included in that chapter as well as its file name, i.e.: RTU Panel Layout. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-6 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B e. Each PDF file shall contain a table of contents at the beginning of the file which includes hypertext links or bookmarks to navigate the file contents per section/chapter. The chapter labels shall identify the information included in that chapter as well as its file name, i.e.: RTU Panel Layout. f. Scanned images of written documents are not acceptable. Document must allow character selection. Text within a file shall be transferable to other documents. g. Submit a preliminary version of the electronic format of the manual for review. Upon approval of the preliminary submittal, the Contractor shall provide 3 copies of the electronic manual to the Owner. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suppliers Qualifications: The complete system shall be configured, programmed, and installed by one qualified system supplier who is regularly engaged and qualified in designing and building instrument control systems. The systems company shall have been in existence under its own name for at least 10 years. Qualifications shall include five years of successfully providing similar systems, a qualified local area-based (D/FW metroplex) technical staff and design office, physical facilities, and personnel to complete the work specified, and competent service personnel to service and operate the equipment provided. The system suppliers shall assume complete systems responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all subsystems and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The installation supervisor shall have had experience in overseeing installation and start-up of at least three similar installations. The bidder shall submit, upon ENGINEER's request, complete company history, resumes of full time project manager for this project, other key full-time system analysts, programmers, technicians, and submit project list with costs, OWNER, contact person, phone number, etc. B. Tests: The complete system shall be assembled and tested at the job site. The OWNER'S representative and the ENGINEER'S presence will be required at the time of final testing at the system supplier's facilities. C. Standards: All applicable NEC, ISA, IEEE, NEMA, UL, ANSI, IEC, FCC, FM standards shall apply. All equipment shall be new and UL listed and labeled. D. Assembly, Storage, & Handling: The complete system, including all individual electronic component units, shall be assembled and stored in air-conditioned and heated facilities with low humidity. Once assembled and tested, the system shall be stored in air-conditioned and heated rooms. Ship the unit to job site only after the control room has been built and its HVAC system is in operation. E. Acceptable PLC Manufacturers: 1. Control Microsystems SCADAPack. 2. No others approved. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-7 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Acceptable SCADA Installers: 1. D&H Automation: Contact: Herschel Henson (817) 205-9288 2. No other approved. G. Acceptable Radio Manufacturers: 1. Freewave. 2. No others approved. H. Acceptable UPS manufacturer: 1. APC. 2. No others approved. 1.06 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES A. As a minimum, provide the following compatible spare parts, tools, and supplies as a part of this CONTRACT: 1. Two (2) each I/O modules for analog and discrete input/output signals. Each module to have 8 I/O points. 2. Two (2) spare 24 V. DC power supplies of the type furnished. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Equipment supplier and the CONTRACTOR shall warrant to the OWNER that the equipment delivered with reference to this specification complies with this specification. B. The equipment supplier and the CONTRACTOR shall warrant the equipment as to defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the project. Vendor shall include a copy of his special equipment warranty with the shop drawings. The warranty specified by this specification shall be exclusive, and in lieu of all other warranties whether written, implied, orally presented, or statutory. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-8 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS A. The control system shall be configured using microprocessor-based programmable controllers for local process control functions. Each controller shall be equipped with central processing unit, power supplies and individual uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to perform logic control functions based on the program stored in memory and the status of inputs and outputs. Memory will be required such that there is a minimum of 20 percent spare, and will be non-volatile. Automatic shutdown feature shall be selectable such that the desired field condition will be the default condition in the event of power loss or system failure. Power supplies shall be provided for the process controller as required with built-in protection against short-circuits, overcurrent, and overvoltage. 1. The programmable controller shall be capable of complete control, including PID control, digital logic control, batch, and setpoint control. 2. The entire PLC system shall immediately shut down and annunciate the occurrence of any of the following abnormal circumstances: a. Memory parity error. b. Loss of signal communication between CPU and I/O's. c. Loss of logic power to any portion of the system. d. Halt or interruption of memory scan. e. Detection of any incomplete relay ladder rungs in memory. B. The PLC system shall accomplish the control requirements of the loop descriptions, and Contract Documents. C. The design application and installation of the PLC system shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.1. D. PLC programming shall be documented annotated in detail, and factory tested. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-9 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.02 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) A. HMI shall utilize system monitor displays, mouse, and keyboard(s). Interface functionality shall include: 1. Graphics representing process 2. Individual process/equipment screens 3. Alarm screen 4. Display of real time and historical process trends 5. Set point parameters that are password protected 6. Graphic representation of plant operations with interactive status and measurement symbols 7. Annunciation 8. PLC Clock displays for monitoring time synchronization 9. Communication and network monitor screens 10. Navigational menus such as header/footer buttons B. The HMI and historian system shall report the following events: 1. All entries initiated by operator including the following: a. Console key changes b. Beginning and final values of setpoint and output changes c. Mode changes (i.e., auto to manual) d. Which console changes were made from e. Time change was made 2. Events: a. Description of event b. Time of event c. Resolution of 100 milliseconds maximum. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-10 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. The PLC system shall operate in: 1. Ambient conditions of 0-40°C temperature. 2. 0- 95 percent relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning. 3. Elevation: 1000’ above sea level. B. Environmental Controls: 1. Furnish circulation fans in solid state control system enclosures. 2.04 INPUT/OUTPUT CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS: A. Outputs shall be fused: 1. External fusing shall be provided if output module does not possess internal fusing. 2. Fuses provided external to output model shall: a. Be in accordance with module manufacturer's specifications. b. Be installed at terminal block. B. Install bleeding resistors across input from field devices which leak current sufficiently to flicker input status light. C. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the I/O enclosure. D. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. E. Provide terminal blocks with continuous marking strip. F. Size terminals to accommodate all active data base points and spares. G. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. Stripping back twisted shielded pair and twisting together all the shields is not acceptable. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-11 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B H. PLC I/O arrangement: 1. Where the PLC is utilized to control multiple trains of equipment, the PLC components (I/O modules, power supplies, etc.) shall be assigned so that the failure of one component does not affect equipment on all trains. I/O modules shall be segregated on a train basis unless required otherwise for safety reasons. I. All PLC control system components shall be capable of meeting or exceeding electromagnetic interference tests per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2. J. Incorporate the following minimum safety measures: 1. Master Safety Relay: a. Cuts off power to I/O devices upon de-energization b. Multiple Master Safety Relays shall be available as required to provide ability to control separate designated blocks of the control program. 2. Watchdog Function to Monitor: a. Internal processor clock failure b. Processor memory failure c. Loss of communication between processor and I/O modules d. Processor ceases to execute logic program e. Peer to Peer communication between PLCs. 3. Safety Function Wiring: a. Emergency shutdown switches shall not be wired directly into the controller. 4. An emergency power disconnect shall be placed in the power circuit feeding the power supply as a means of removing power from the entire PLC system. a. Capacitor shall be placed across the disconnect to protect against current outrush through trails. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-12 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 5. Safe Wiring: a. Equipment failure mode shall be selected so that the loss of power or control signal to the equipment will result in the equipment either shutting down or operating safely. b. Activation of alarms and stopping of equipment shall result from the de- energization of control circuits, rather than the energization of control circuits. c. Low voltage control signal wires: 1). Place in conduit segregated for that purpose only 2). Twisted shielded wire pair 3). Not located in the same conduit or bundle with power wiring 6. Initial Safety Conditions: a. Utilize program module to dictate output states in a known and safe manner prior to running of control program. b. Utilize program each time PLC is re-initiated and the control program activated. 7. PLC Fault Relay: a. Placed in series with any other emergency stop conditions b. Opening of PLC Fault Contact: 1). Upon unsafe or undesirable system operation, including: a). Loss of memory b). Processor fault c). Power supply fault d). Isolation failure e). Communications failure f). Scan time overrun g). Module failure 2). Results from de-energization of PLC fault relay 3). Causes Master Safety Relay to de-energize Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-13 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 8. Monitoring of Internal Faults and Display: a. Internal PLC system status and faults shall be monitored and displayed. Monitored items shall include: 1). Memory ok/loss of memory 2). Processor ok/processor fault 3). Battery ok/battery low 4). Power supply ok/power supply fault 5). Isolation failure 6). High CPU temperature 7). Scan time overrun 8). Module failure 9. Control of Programs: a. Protect access to PLC program loading with locked, key operated selector switches. 10. Effects of Failure: a. PLC system shall incorporate safe responses to the following failure effects: 1). Power losses, interruptions, excursions, dips, and transients. 2). Loss or corruption of memory 3). Information transfer corruption or loss 4). "Fail on" or "Fail off" of inputs or outputs 5). Unreadable signals 6). Addressing errors 7). Processor faults 11. Design PLC system with high noise immunity to prevent occurrence of false logic signals resulting from switching transients, relay and circuit breaker noise or conducted and radiated radio frequency interference. 12. Incorporate noise suppression and inductive load suppression design into input, output, and logic modules Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-14 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.05 COMPONENTS A. PLC System Central Processor Unit (CPU): 1. Completely solid state CPU designed to provide: a. Digital relay logic b. Analog loop control c. Other required control functions: 1). Counting 2). Floating point math computations 3). Timing 4). Analog Scaling 2. To provide communications with other control systems and man-machine interfaces as specified. 3. Memory: a. Flash non-battery ram. 4. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 60 days memory retention with fresh batter. a. Provide visual indication of battery status and alarm low battery voltage. b. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 14 days memory retention after the "Battery Low" indicating LED is on. 5. 20 percent minimum spare useable memory capacity after all required programming is in place and operating. 6. Capable of executing all control functions required by the Contract Drawings including digital and analog loops. 7. Built-in three-mode (proportional-integral-derivative) control capabilities. a. As directly selectable algorithms requiring no user knowledge of programming languages. 8. On line reconfigurable. 9. Lighted status indicators for "RUN" and "FAILURE." Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-15 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 10. Capable of manual or automatic control mode transfer from the HMI system or from within the control strategy. Transfer shall be bumpless and balanceless. 2.06 INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) MODULES A. Provide I/O system with: 1. I/O solid state boards with status lights indicating I/O status and board failure. 2. Electric isolation between logic and field device. 3. Individually fused outputs with blown fuses indication. 4. Capability of withstanding low energy common mode transient to 1500 V without failure. 5. Incorporate noise suppression design. 6. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge-withstand capability tests, per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1. 7. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS1 B. Discrete I/O Modules: 1. Interface to ON/OFF devices 2. I/O status indicator module front 3. Voltage rating to match circuit voltage 4. Output current rating: a. Match maximum circuit current draw b. Minimum 1.5 A/point for 120 V AC applications 5. Individually fused with blown fuse indication. C. Analog I/O Modules: 1. Inputs to accept signals indicated on Drawings or Specifications 2. 16 bit resolution 3. I/O chassis supplied power for powering connected field devices 4. Isolated (differential) inputs and outputs 5. User configurable for desired fault response state Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-16 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 6. Provide output signals as indicated on Drawings and Specifications D. Spare I/O Modules: Each LPU-PLC shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare analog and 20 percent spare discrete I/O points installed and wired to terminal blocks, isolates, surge devices, and relays inside the LPU. 2.07 POWER SUPPLY UNITS: 1. Provide regulated power units: a. Designed to operate with PLC system and shall provide power to: 1). All components of PLC system 2). Two-wire or four-wire field instruments 3). Other devices as indicated on Drawings or Specifications b. Capable of supplying PLC system when all of the specified spare capacity is utilized c. Each power supply shall be sized such that it will carry no more than 75 percent of capacity under normal loads. 2. Electrical service to PLC system is 105 to 125 V, 60 HZ, +1 percent, 1 PH power. 3. Separate AC circuit breakers shall be provided for each power supply. 4. If the PLC system is field expandable beyond the specified spare capacity, and if such expansion requires power supply modification, note such requirements in the submittals and allow room in the PLC system enclosure. 5. Provide integral battery backup to maintain 60 seconds upon loss of all AC power. This is required to ensure transient power surges and dips do not affect the operation of the PLC system. 6. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS1 7. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge-withstand capability tests per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1. 8. Power Distribution: a. Immune to transients and surges resultant from noisy environment. b. Shall provide constant voltage level DC distribution to all devices. 9. Provide UPS in the PLC enclosure. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-17 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 2.08 HMI CENTRAL CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM A. The HMI central computer system shall be configured and programmed to maintain a real- time database of all input/output points within the system. The central system shall monitor and control the local process controllers; it will log selectable points within the system, and be capable of data management such that all data is available while monitoring concurrently. The system provided shall include the following features: 1. Multi -tasking Operating System 2. Data Collection of Analog and Digital I/O 3. Historical and Archival Data Logging 4. Alarming 5. Trending - Historical and Real-Time 6. Networking 7. Real-Time Multi-tasking 8. Event Processing - Control Strategy Initiation 9. Easily Configured Displays and Display Modification with Graphic icons. 10. Real-Time Display with Status Change Color Change Feature 11. Pre-emptive multitasking 12. Dynamic objects for configuring I/O devices 13. I/O Driver software for PLCs provided B. Data Collection: The real-time database shall be modified to manage an additional 1,000 points minimum in any combination of analog/digital I/O. C. Data Logging: Real-time database points shall be selectable for logging. D. Report Generation: Contractor shall develop or modify reports for up to two reports. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-18 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Alarm/event logs shall record all alarms immediately as they occur. The message is to include the time of the alarm, point name, and a description of the alarm. Time of the operator acknowledgment and return to normal are also to be recorded. Events, including operator log on, system control point change, and operator control functions, are also to be reported. 2. The system is to be equipped with a facility for time-generated reports such as alarm summary, shift log of events, etc. a. The following custom reports shall be generated: 1). Standard Format: a). User configurable b). Contain selected information from any log, event, or alarm list c). Capable of producing custom log report for periodic and on-demand printing of a list of process or calculated variables 2). Variable Format: a). User configurable b). Ability to include any system data including: (1). Calculated time based on averages (2). Totalizations (3). Minimum values (4). Minimum times (5). Maximum values (6). Maximum times 3). Reports shall not require software programming to setup. 4). All data setup in reports shall be output to Microsoft Excel unless specified otherwise. E. Trending: Trend graphics are to be provided as either a stand-alone tool for analysis, or as a real-time recorder. Compression techniques shall be provided for automatic rescaling, optimal resolution, and time slot averaging to give the operator an efficient interface for analysis. Datapoints for trending are to be selectable directly from the database by scrolling through the tag database and selecting the desired points to trend. The trend facility is to provide the ability to generate reports to provide the operator with a hard copy of his analysis. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-19 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. Networking: Facilities shall be provided to network the system such that the real-time database generated within the system can be easily transferred to other computers for manipulation and analysis. G. Displays: Displays are to be accessible through the use of the mouse and/or touch screen. Status is displayed on the screen through the use of color and alphanumerics. The mouse and/or touch screen can change the status of a discrete device or the output value of an analog device. Displays shall be easily built or reconfigured through the use of an established library of symbols. The system shall be easily modified to change the values displayed, the format and arrangement of the display. Status colors changed within each display shall include tanks, line, rotating equipment, etc. H. The graphic displays shall have the following additional capabilities: 1. Utilize ISA symbols for devices 2. Have selectable colors 3. Utilize loop numbers, equipment numbers, and valve number 4. Devices shall dynamically change colors on status change 5. Graphics shall be pixel oriented 6. Level indication shall be dynamic 7. Have bar-graph capability 8. Have complete touch screen interface. 9. Graphic icon library. 2.09 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY A. The system supplier shall provide an Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for the programmable controllers, and control panels. The systems supplier shall size the UPS for the connected load plus 20% spare capacity. The UPS shall be equal to Liebert or Topaz, and shall have capacity to supply power for a period not less than two hours continuously for main computers and LPUs. 2.10 ENCLOSURES FOR PLC A. Housings: Each PLC with its UPS unit shall be housed in a separate free-standing NEMA 12 enclosures. B. The enclosure shall be equipped with a 120 volt grounded duplex receptacle and a switched service light free of RFI. All switches, fuses, terminal blocks, etc., shall have permanent nameplates or labels for identification. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-20 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. All equipment shall be mounted in such a manner that all maintenance may be accomplished with easy access through the door(s). 2.11 900 MHZ FREQUENCY HOPPING RADIO & ANTENNAS A. Radio: Freewave or approved equal. 1. Frequency range: 902–928MHz (Frequency Hopping) 2. Data transmission rate: 16 kbps-500 kbps (Adjustable) 3. Transmission power: max 1 W B. Yagi: Antenna shall be specifically designed for 902-928 MHz frequency band. The antenna shall Mounting casting shall permit horizontal or vertical polarization. Internal balun, coax feed and connectors shall be sealed in a foam potting system which prevents moisture penetration. Antenna shall be RAD-900-ANT-YAGI-10-N or approved equal. Antenna shall have a wind rating of 125 mph. 1. Frequency range: 902–928MHz (Frequency Hopping) 2. Gain (over dipole): 6 dBi 3. VSWR: 1.5:1 Maximum 4. Impedance: 50 ohms 5. Front-to-back ratio: 20 dB minimum 6. Input power rating: 100 watts 7. Polarization: H or V 8. Termination: N female 2.12 COAXIAL CABLE A. Coaxial cable shall meet the following requirements: Characteristic impedance: 50 ohms Outer Conductor: Copper, annularly corrugated Inner Conductor: Copper Dielectric: Closed cell low loss foam Seal: Connector o-rings to seal out moisture Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-21 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 1. Coaxial cable shall be Times Microwave LMR type or approved equal. 2. Diameter of coaxial cable shall be sized as indicated on the drawings and so that feedline loss from the antenna-side of the coaxial surge suppressor to the antenna does not exceed 1dB for directional antennas and 2 dB for omni-directional antennas. Feedline losses shall be calculated at the operating radio frequency and shall include losses in cable and connectors. The minimum size coaxial cable provided from the panel to the antenna shall be ½” diameter unless larger size is shown on drawings. 3. All coaxial connectors shall be Type-N connectors. Connectors shall be manufactured by the same cable manufacturer which furnishes the coaxial cable. Connectors shall be Andrews Corporation Heliax cable connectors, or approved equal. All connectors shall be constructed of brass or be silver plated as recommended by manufacturer. Connectors shall have o-ring seal. 4. All connections shall be weatherproofed using 3M-brand cold shrink weatherproofing kit or approved equal cold shrink weather proofing kit. 5. Provide a pre-made cable assembly of Times Microwave LMR coaxial cable to connect from the radio antenna port to the radio-side of the coaxial surge suppressor. Provide straight or angled N-type connectors as necessary to route cable assembly within panel without exceeding manufacturer’s recommended bend radius. The pre-made cable shall be assembled by the coaxial cable manufacturer and shall be shipped with a certification of assembly and testing. 6. Cable hangers shall be Andrews Hanger Model 42396A-5 for 7/8” cable or 43211A for ½” cable with Andrews Round Member Adapter Model 31670, or approved equal. The use of plastic tie wraps is not acceptable. 2.13 COAXIAL GROUNDING KIT A. Grounding straps shall be solid copper for high current handling. Construction shall be of the non-braided type. Grounding cable shall have field attachable grounding lug with a two- part tape system for weatherproofing. Grounding kit shall be Andrew Corporation or approved equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. System equipment shall be installed where indicated in the Contract Documents. Power and signal connections between components shall provide the specified functions. Install according to equipment manufacturer's instruction. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-22 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B B. The system Supplier Contractor shall utilize their own printers, monitor's, and computers for programming, testing, and start-up. The use of the OWNER's computers, monitor's, or printers shall not be acceptable until the entire system has been installed, debugged, programmed, and operated to ENGINEER's satisfaction. 3.02 PROGRAMMING A. The loop descriptions and diagrams shown in the Contract Documents are functional only and do not attempt to specify detail program coding that may be required. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize this functional information to develop complete application programming for the PLC equipment provided under this CONTRACT. Programs shall be designed to provide fail-safe operation of equipment in case of PC logic or power supply failure. Fail-safe shall be defined as "stopped" for all drives and "closed" for valves, unless otherwise specified. Up to three graphic pages shall be required for the operator-interface, and will be developed via a menu-driven color graphics editor. Interrupting logic between the LPU and central computer system shall be required as per system sequence of operation. An additional 1 graphics shall be developed in the field in coordination with the OWNER and the ENGINEER. The graphics shall be sufficiently detailed to include all equipment, pipes, valves, solenoids, meters, switches, etc. Graphics shall include equipment tag numbers and display the current flow rates, levels, quantities, status, elapsed time of equipment, etc. All such work shall be done at no extra cost to the OWNER. Before programming the graphics, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a set of drawings for ENGINEERS review. 3.03 DOCUMENTATION A. Following delivery to the site, the equipment manufacturer, in the presence of the ENGINEER, shall demonstrate operation of the complete system. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation for all application software. Documentation system shall be diagrams in ladder-rung or functional block format, and shall show all input devices to the left of the left "power rail" and all outputs to the right of the right "power rail." The diagrams shall show all device codes and functional description used in the project manual, and shall also show PLC address codes, element codes, and I/O assembly codes, modules numbers, and terminal numbers. 3.04 TESTS A. All elements of the SCADA system, both hardware and software, shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of the Specifications. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install the field instruments, PLC, remote input/output (RI/O), and interface equipment in a schedule to meet the construction sequencing. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-23 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Software Acceptance Tests (SAT) 2. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) 3. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT) 4. 30-Day Acceptance Test D. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied. E. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with Engineer-approved procedures and documented. Each specific test to be performed shall be described and a space provided after it for signoff by the appropriate party after its satisfactory completion. F. Copies of signoff test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required test documentation. G. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. Define these simulations techniques in the test procedure. H. Coordinate all testing with other Contractors, the OWNER, and the Engineer. I. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER will actively participate in many of the tests. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER reserves the right to test or retest any and all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the approved test procedures. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER reserves the right to observe and/or inspect the work during any phase. J. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. 3.05 SOFTWARE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. Prior to the start of the witnessed Software Acceptance Test (SAT), the entire system shall be installed on site, inspected and tested to ensure that it is fully operational and ready for the SAT demonstration testing. B. All panels and assemblies of the subsystem shall be completely installed except I/O signals to field elements or devices shall not be connected. The system shall be inspected and tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals and the Contract Documents. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-24 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B C. The PLC and subsystem primary elements, shall be interconnected and tested to ensure that the system is fully operational. The system shall be operated without signals leaving or entering from the field elements or devices for at least one week to verify that it is capable of continuous operation. Outputs to and inputs from the excluded primary elements shall be simulated. D. The system shall be tested, installed on site to demonstrate that it is operational and in conformance with the Contract Documents. E. Notify the Engineer and OWNER in writing a minimum of 30 days in advance of the proposed starting date for the Software Acceptance Test. At the time of notification, submit any revisions to the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer in the Project System Plan. F. The purpose of the test shall be to witness and verify the functionability, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. The system must operate continually for 24 hours without failure before the test shall be judged successful. Successful completion of this test shall be the basis for approval of the system. G. The Software Acceptance tests shall be performed on all the equipment installed including the HMI system, PLC panels and subsystems. The SAT shall be a two-part text procedure; Part I shall include the PLC sub-system to verify all I/O addresses and proper step sequence for all features. Part II shall add the HMI to verify all screen displays, addressing and report generation. H. Where hardware items are of standard manufacture and in current production, the manufacturer shall certify that applicable tests have been performed and met, in accordance with IEEE and ISA Standards, and be prepared to supply copies of data to Engineer upon request. Such statements shall accompany the equipment submittals called for in SUBMITTALS of this Section. Any assemblage of devices together with operating programs shall be tested together as provided herein. I. The various tests performed during Software Acceptance Test shall be designed to demonstrate that the hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The test conditions shall resemble, as closely as possible, actual conditions. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation shall be supplied at no cost to the OWNER. J. Some of tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Conduct online modifications to the database. 2. Demonstrate operability of the interfaces (hardware and software). 3. Demonstrate operability of the data communication network. 4. Demonstrate all system software functions specified. 5. Verify the displays and interactive capabilities of an operator's console. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-25 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 6. Simulate selected normal and abnormal operating conditions to verify the performance of the monitoring and control functions. 7. Simulate every I/O point by opening or shorting digital inputs, inject appropriate signals into every analog input point, and measure the output signal from each analog output point. K. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and retested prior to completing the Software Acceptance Test. L. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer at the test site both before and during the Software Acceptance Test. 1. All drawings and specifications, addenda, and change orders. 2. Master copy of the test procedure. 3. List of the equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial number. 4. Design-related hardware submittals applicable to the equipment being tested. 5. Preliminary software documentation submittal. M. The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: 1. Testing and meetings: Nominally 8 hours per day; 24 hours per day if required to meet schedule. 2. Morning meetings to review the day's test schedule. 3. Evening meetings to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule. N. All test data and procedures followed during testing shall be logged, and certified copies of the logs shall be provided to the Engineer and OWNER. O. The Engineer will observe each test once on a pass-fail basis. The Engineer alone has the authority to determine if a test passes or fails. Only four (4) fifteen-minute windows per day will be allowed during the test procedure to make corrections to software and successfully pass a re-test. Otherwise, that test will be declared a failure. If a test fails, it will be put on a retest schedule. If other tests to follow rely on a particular test passing, then the following tests will also be placed on a retest schedule even though they were not tested before. Retesting shall not interrupt the test schedule. The CONTRACTOR may schedule retest days during the testing period, but not more than two per week. All retesting shall only occur on a day designated in the schedule or at the end of testing. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-26 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B P. All time and expense incurred by the Engineer and/or OWNER’S staff for all retests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and paid to the OWNER. Time and expense incurred shall be on a time and material basis tracked by the Engineer and OWNER for their own staff and presented to the CONTRACTOR on a periodic basis. Q. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite the correction of any deficiency discovered during testing. The CONTRACTOR shall have personnel from each trade to standby during the test period to immediately correct, or adjust any item of software or hardware or equipment causing a test to fail. 3.06 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. General: Prior to start-up, the installed system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and documented) that it is ready for operation. Download all database on job computers from this test onwards. The OWNER and ENGINEER shall be notified when ORT starts. Copies of ORT forms that have been signed off by the CONTRACTOR shall be copied and sent to the OWNER and ENGINEER on a daily basis for record purposes only. No signature by the ENGINEER or OWNER is required for ORT forms. B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these specifications. Actual real-time signals generated from the field devices shall be used. Simulation of field signals shall not be permitted. This test is intended to actually operate the entire process and to find and correct all real-time operational deficiencies. 1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer- approved forms and checklists. a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following: 1). Project name 2). Loop number 3). Tag number for each component 4). Checkoffs/signoffs for each component a). Tag/identification b). Installation c). Termination - wiring d). Termination - tubing e). Calibration/adjustment Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-27 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 5). Checkoffs/signoffs for the loop a). Panel interface terminations b). I/O interface terminations c). I/O signal operation d). Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted e). Total loop operational 6). Space for comments 7). Space for signoff by Contractor b. Each active analog subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall include the following: 1). Project name 2). Loop number 3). Component tag number or I/O module number 4). Component code number analog system 5). Manufacturer (for analog system element) 6). Model number/serial number (for analog system) 7). Summary of functional requirements, for example: a). For indicators and recorders: Scale and chart ranges b). For transmitters/converters: Input and output ranges c). For computing elements: Function d). For controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID) e). For switching elements: Unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual) f). For I/O modules: Input or output Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-28 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 8). Calibrations; for example: a). For analog devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling b). For discrete devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points c). For controllers: Mode settings (PID) d). For I/O modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling 9). Space for comments 10). Space for signoff by the Contractor 2. Maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the Engineer and Owner upon request. 3. These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer will review the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. 3.07 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Once ORT has been completed and operational readiness has been confirmed, a witnessed Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with the Contract Documents. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and component-by- component basis. This test shall be scheduled and conducted only after the plant has been detected and resolved. B. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS except that the entire installed PICS shall be tested and all functions demonstrated. C. Simulation of field signals, or simulation of the response of the process, or the response of individual components, or the functions being monitored or controlled, shall not be permitted. Simulation may be permitted with the express permission of the ENGINEER. The decision to simulate is the ENGINEER's alone. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Contract Price the time necessary to wait for all process responses. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-29 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. Updated versions of the documentation called for under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during the test. In addition, one copy of the approved Instrumentation O&M Manual shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during testing. The approved schedule shall be followed strictly on an item-by-item basis. Combining of test items shall be at the discretion of the ENGINEER alone. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Control Price adequate time necessary to complete each test item one at a time. E. The daily schedule called for under SOFTWARE and OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall also be followed during the Functional Demonstration Test. F. The Engineer will observe each test once on a pass-fail basis. The Engineer alone has the authority to determine if a test passes or fails. Only one (1) fifteen-minute window per day will be allowed during the test procedure to make corrections to software or to field equipment and successfully pass a re-test; otherwise, that test will be declared a failure. If a test fails, it will be put on a retest schedule. If other tests to follow rely on a particular test which has failed, then the following tests will also be placed on a retest schedule even though they were not tested. Retesting shall not interrupt the test schedule. The CONTRACTOR may schedule retest days during the testing period, but not more than two per week. All retesting shall only occur on a day designated in the schedule or at the end of testing. G. All time and expense incurred by the Engineer and/or OWNER’S staff for all retests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and paid to the OWNER. Time and expense incurred shall be on a time and material basis tracked by the Engineer and OWNER for their own staff and presented to the CONTRACTOR on a periodic basis. H. The CONTRACTOR shall expedite the repair or correction of any deficiency discovered during testing. The CONTRACTOR shall have personnel representing each trade to standby during the test period to immediately correct, repair, or adjust any item of hardware, software or field equipment causing a test to fail. I. The system shall operate continuously for 100 hours without failure before this test will be considered successful. 3.08 30-DAY ACCEPTANCE TEST A. All database errors must be corrected prior to the start of the 30-Day Acceptance Test. The 30-Day Acceptance Test will not be considered successful until all database is correct. B. Any malfunction during the test shall be analyzed and corrections made by the Contractor. The Engineer and Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of the test. The cost of a retest shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR as specified. C. After completion of the Functional Demonstration Test and project Start-up, the Owner shall be responsible for operation of the entire System for a period of 30 consecutive days, under conditions of full operation, without single non-field repairable malfunction. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-30 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B D. During this test, Contractor personnel shall be present during startup and as required. The Contractor shall provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system and also are familiar with the overall plant process. E. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of the system. F. Any malfunction, during this 30 consecutive day test period, which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by the Contractor's personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered as a non-field-repairable malfunction. G. Upon completion of repairs, by the Supplier, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. H. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the Supplier shall perform repairs within 5 days or replacement within 30 days. I. Upon successful completion of the 30-Day Acceptance Test, approval of all as-built drawing and O&M Manuals, completion of all related Owner training, and delivery of all spare, expendable, and test equipment, the systems shall be considered substantially complete and the warranty period shall commence. 3.09 TRAINING A. Provide an integrated training program for the Owner's personnel at the jobsite. The Contractor shall submit a detailed training schedule and syllabus for approval. Tailor the training program to meet the specific needs of the Owner's personnel. Include training sessions, classroom and field, for managers, engineers, operators, and maintenance personnel. 3.10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING A. O&M training for each main and sub-system shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under the related Instrumentation specification sections. B. All training shall be given using only equipment identical to the equipment provided on this Contract or currently owned by the Owner. 3.11 ON-SITE SUPERVISION A. The Supplier shall provide, on-site, an experienced resident engineering manager to supervise and coordinate all of the on-site activities. This resident engineering manager shall be on-site as required during the total period to affect all the activities relating to the PICS. Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-31 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B 3.12 START-UP AND TESTING TEAM A. The Supplier shall provide, on-site, a team of experienced engineering, technician, trades personnel, and software/configuring personnel during the total construction period to: 1. Thoroughly check the installation, termination, and adjustment of all the subsystems and their components. 2. Perform and complete all on-site tests. 3. Provide start-up assistance. 4.00 LOOP DESCRIPTIONS A. All alarms and changes in the system shall be recorded to display time, shift manager and time alarm acknowledged. Trend shall record display analysis, level, or flow and shall show date and time. Operator log in shall display date and time. All information shall be saved to an Excel spread sheet and all information shall be displayed on SCADA. Contractor shall coordinate with owner on instrumentation set points. B. This and the following section describe the process control narratives for the elevated storage tank site. The control narratives are not intended to be an exhaustive list of all components required to execute control strategies. Rather they are a supplement to the drawings, schedules, and other specification sections. C. Provide instrumentation hardware and software as necessary to perform control functions specified herein and as shown on drawings. D. Miscellaneous signals to be monitor via SCADA: 1. Intrusion alarm shall monitor if any of the two entrances at the bottom entrances to the tank. The following signals shall be monitored: a. 1 – pedestrian door b. 1 – truck door 2. Obstruction light test panel shall monitor the following signal: a. Obstruction light failure E. The UPS System shall send the following signals to be monitored via SCADA: 1. Utility Power Failure 2. Low Battery Power Attachment 3Item 12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02-32 PRP17369 - FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B F. The Control Valve will be operated locally or remotely via the provided electronic controller. 1. Open, close and set position valve functions shall be local to the Control Valve and via SCADA. 2. Valve position feedback shall be indicated local to the Control Valve and at SCADA. 3. Remote enabled shall be sent to be monitored via SCADA. 4. The valve will send a discrete signal with the valve position. G. Level transmitter located near the bottom of the tank bowl monitors the level inside of the elevated storage tank. The level transmitter shall monitor the following signal: 1. Tank Level 2. Low Level Alarm, set at: TBD 3. High Level Alarm, set at: TBD 4. Trend H. The two inline pressure transmitters at the pedestal measure inline pressure from the pipe side, and inline pressure from the tank side. The pressure transmitters shall monitor the following signals: 1. Pipe Pressure 2. Low Pressure Alarm, set at: TBD 3. High Pressure Alarm, set at: TBD 4. Trend END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 1 Purchasing Department Addendum No. 2 Issued October 16, 2018 Bid No: 2019-04-B Bid Title: Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank Questions Deadline: 10/12/2018 @ 12:00 p.m. Bids Due: 10/18/2018 @ 2:00 p.m. Addendum #2 is issued by the Town of Prosper Purchasing Office. Please see the following for changes/additions/deletions to the specifications: Additions: N/A Changes: SPECIFICATION SECTION 09 95 00 Page 2 Paragraph 1.03C The entire paragraph is replaced by the following: Contractor shall hold current SSPC QP 1 certification for Field Application to Complex Industrial and Marine Structures. Contractor shall submit QP 1 certification documents as Record Data. SPECIFICATION SECTION 33 16 19.13 Page 1 Paragraph 1.01.E.4 The entire paragraph is replaced by the following: Hydraulic Design Criteria: Base Bid Minimum Capacity Within Operating Range 2,500,000 Gallons 10/15/2018 Attachment 3Item 12 2 Maximum Operating (Head) Range 40 Feet Elevation Overflow/Top Capacity Elevation 805.00 Feet AMSL Lower Capacity Elevation 765.00 Feet AMSL Pedestal Floor Elevation 597.50 Feet AMSL Inlet/Outlet Pipe Diameter 24 Inches Overflow Pipe Diameter 24 Inches Maximum Fill Rate 6,950 Gallons Per Minute Maximum Drain Rate (under normal operating conditions, tank manufacturer shall design based on broken pipe analysis as specified) 6,950 Gallons Per Minute SPECIFICATION SECTION 33 16 19.13 Page 15 Paragraph 2.05.F.1a The entire paragraph is replaced by the following: Provide a 30-inch diameter manhole through the tank floor. The manhole assembly shall include a 316 stainless steel hand wheel operator and threaded components. DRAWING C-4 The entire sheet is replaced by Sheet C-4 included with this addendum Deletions: 33 16 19.13 Page 21 Paragraph 2.05.M.2 Entire paragraph and sub-paragraphs are removed in their entirety from the contract. Clarifications: N/A Vendors who may have already submitted a response and feel this addendum may change their response may pick up their submission and return it prior to October 18, 2018 @ 2:00 p.m. If picking up the submission is not feasible, any new response submitted by your firm will supersede one previously submitted. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum by initialing in the appropriate space on the Bid Proposal Form if you have not previously submitted a response. For questions regarding this addendum contact: January M. Cook, CPPO, CPPB Purchasing Agent (972) 569-1018 january_cook@prospertx.gov Attachment 3Item 12 20 1 9 - 0 4 - B 09 / 2 6 / 2 0 1 8 42" x 42" ACCESS HATCHES 30" 1 A D D E N D U M N O . 2 M R H 1 0 - 1 6 - 1 8 Attachment 3Item 12 1 Purchasing Department Addendum No. 3 Issued October 16, 2018 Bid No: 2019-04-B Bid Title: Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank Questions Deadline: 10/12/2018 @ 12:00 p.m. Bids Due: 10/18/2018 @ 2:00 p.m. Addendum #3 is issued by the Town of Prosper Purchasing Office. Please see the following for changes/additions/deletions to the specifications: Additions: N/A Changes: SPECIFICATION SECTION 00 – Bid Proposal Form (Page 8) The entire page is replaced by the attached revision SPECIFICATION SECTION 01 29 00 Page 11 Paragraph 1.06.B.30 Bid Item B30 – SCADA System The entire paragraph is replaced by the following: Payment made at the lump sum price provided in the bid proposal and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and installation of the items indicated, including specific instrumentation equipment per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall procure and install SCADA panels, PLC, UPS system, radio and antenna equipment in accordance with the Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Integration and programming of Contractor installed SCADA components will be completed under a separate Town Contract with D&H Automation. Contractor will be responsible for all necessary coordination with D&H Automation to ensure necessary hardware, wiring and other components are provided to complete the separate integration and 10/16/2018 Attachment 3Item 12 2 programming. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, quality assurance and training associated with the work. Deletions: N/A Clarifications: N/A Vendors who may have already submitted a response and feel this addendum may change their response may pick up their submission and return it prior to October 18, 2018 @ 2:00 p.m. If picking up the submission is not feasible, any new response submitted by your firm will supersede one previously submitted. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum by initialing in the appropriate space on the Bid Proposal Form if you have not previously submitted a response. For questions regarding this addendum contact: January M. Cook, CPPO, CPPB Purchasing Agent (972) 569-1018 january_cook@prospertx.gov Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 8 BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK Bid Item A – 2.5 Million Gallon Elevated Storage Tank Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Total No. Cost Amount 1 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank 1 LS Bid Item B – Supporting Items 1 Mobilization 1 LS 2 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Erosion Control 1 LS 3 Site Preparation and Grading 1 LS 4 8’ Tall Ornamental Iron Fence, Personnel Access & Automated Vehicular Sliding Gate 775 LF 5 Ornamental Stone Fence Columns 15 EA 6 8’ Board on Board Wood Fence 245 LF 7 24” Ductile Iron (Class 300) Waterline, Fittings, Adapters and Appurtenances 240 LF 8 Connect to Existing 20” Waterline 1 EA 9 20-inch Butterfly Valve Assemblies 1 EA 10 24-inch Butterfly Valve Assemblies 2 EA 11 36” Steel Casing by Open Cut 28 LF 12 36” Steel Casing by Bore 57 LF 13 Trench Safety 190 LF 14 Fire Hydrant Assembly 1 EA 15 12” Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert 65 LF 16 8” Concrete Access Drive and Parking on Tank Site 325 SY 17 Gravel Access Road 515 SY 18 Concrete Apron 145 SY 19 Concrete Sidewalk and Walkways 95 SY 20 Hydromulch Seeding 8,950 SY 21 Block Sodding 6,100 SY 22 Trees and Planting 1 LS 23 Landscape Irrigation System 1 LS 24 Rock Rip-Rap 27 SY 25 Flowable Fill Encasement 25 LF 26 Project Signs 2 EA 27 Utility Markers 3 EA 28 Traffic Control Plan and Execution 1 LS 29 Tank and Site Electrical 1 LS 30 SCADA System 1 LS ADDENDUM NO. 3 Attachment 3Item 12 1 Purchasing Department Addendum No. 4 Issued October 17, 2018 Bid No: 2019-04-B Bid Title: Fishtrap 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank Questions Deadline: 10/12/2018 @ 12:00 p.m. Bids Due: 10/30/2018 @ 2:00 p.m. Addendum #4 is issued by the Town of Prosper Purchasing Office. Please see the following for changes/additions/deletions to the specifications: Changes: BID SUBMITTAL TIME AND DATE: Bid Submittal Time and Date throughout the documents is replaced by the following: Bids will be accepted until 2:00 P.M. on Tuesday, October 30, 2018 SPECIFICATION SECTION 01 29 00 Page 11 Paragraph 1.06.B.30 Bid Item B.30 – SCADA System The entire paragraph is replaced by the following: 30. Bid Item B30 – SCADA System Coordination a. DHS Automation shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and installation of the items indicated, including specific instrumentation equipment per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary conduit, wire, and installing of SCADA enclosures, in 10-17-18 10/17/2018 Attachment 3Item 12 2 addition to providing and pulling twisted shielded cable from SCADA RTU to top of EST for submersible transducer as per Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor will be responsible for all necessary coordination with DHS Automation to ensure necessary hardware, wiring, and other components are provided to complete the separate integration and programming. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, and quality assurance associated with the work. SPECIFICATION SECTION 00 – Bid Proposal Form (Page 8) The entire page is replaced by the attached revision and supersedes that presented in Addendum No. 3 SPECIFICATION SECTION 09 95 00 The entire specification section is replaced by the attached revision Additions: DRAWING E-3 General Note 7 added: “DHS Automation shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and installation of the items indicated per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary conduit, wire, and installing of SCADA enclosures, in addition to providing and pulling twisted shielded cable from SCADA RTU to top of EST for submersible transducer as per Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, and quality assurance associated with the work.” DRAWING E-4 General Note 11 added: “DHS Automation shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and installation of the items indicated per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary conduit, wire, and installing of SCADA enclosures, in addition to providing and pulling twisted shielded cable from SCADA RTU to top of EST for submersible transducer as per Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, and quality assurance associated with the work.” DRAWING E-5 General Note 8 added: “DHS Automation shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and installation of the items indicated per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary conduit, wire, and installing of SCADA enclosures, in addition to providing and pulling twisted shielded cable from SCADA RTU to top of EST for submersible transducer as per Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, and quality assurance associated with the work.” DRAWING E-6 Attachment 3Item 12 3 General Note 6 added: “DHS Automation shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and installation of the items indicated per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary conduit, wire, and installing of SCADA enclosures, in addition to providing an d pulling twisted shielded cable from SCADA RTU to top of EST for submersible transducer as per Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, and quality assurance associated with the work.” DRAWING E-7 General Note 2 added: “DHS Automation shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and installation of the items indicated per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary conduit, wire, and installing of SCADA enclosures, in addition to providing and pulling twisted shielded cable from SCADA RTU to top of EST for submersible transducer as per Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, and quality assurance associated with the work.” DRAWING PI-2 General Note 2 added: “DHS Automation shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and installation of the items indicated per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary conduit, wire, and installing of SCADA enclosures, in addition to providing and pulling twisted shielded cable from SCADA RTU to top of EST for submersible transducer as per Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, and quality assurance associated with the work.” SPECIFICATION SECTION 40 90 02 Page 1 Paragraph 1.01.A. – SCADA 1.01A entire paragraph is replaced by the following: “DHS Automation shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and installation of the items indicated per plans, RTU’s, programming, hardware, software, coordination with the Town’s SCADA system, SCADA antenna, testing, start-up, adjustments, and all other items related to the work. Contractor shall provide all necessary conduit, wire, and installing of SCADA enclosures, in addition to providing and pulling twisted shielded cable from SCADA RTU to top of EST for submersible transducer as per Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall remain responsible for the general execution, schedule, and quality assurance associated with the work.” Deletions: N/A Clarifications: N/A Attachment 3Item 12 4 Vendors who may have already submitted a response and feel this addendum may change their response may pick up their submission and return it prior to October 18, 2018 @ 2:00 p.m. If picking up the submission is not feasible, any new response submitted by your firm will supersede one previously submitted. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum by initialing in the appropriate space on the Bid Proposal Form if you have not previously submitted a response. For questions regarding this addendum contact: January M. Cook, CPPO, CPPB Purchasing Agent (972) 569-1018 january_cook@prospertx.gov Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 1 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 09 95 00 COATINGS FOR WATER STORAGE TANKS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to apply protective coatings to material and equipment as specified herein, including the preparation of surfaces prior to application of coatings. B. Protective coatings must be applied to the following surfaces: 1. Tank interior and exterior surfaces 2. Above grade piping and valves on the tank and above grade piping on the exterior of the tank. 3. Exterior electrical as determined by the Engineer during construction. 4. Stainless steel piping, ladders, etc. on the interior of the tank. C. The following shall not be coated and shall be protected from drips, overspray, etc. unless indicated otherwise 1. Stainless steel piping, materials and equipment, except those on the interior of the tank 2. Galvanized steel piping, materials and equipment 3. Aluminum materials and equipment 4. Ladder safety systems 5. Interior electrical items D. Special applications for painting include the following: Buried pipe and valves shall receive a shop applied protective coating as described in the appropriate section of the specifications. E. Contain, treat, and dispose of any dust, spray, drainage, or spillage resulting from coating operations. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to determine if the materials to be disposed of are classified as Hazardous Waste. Disposal of waste, hazardous or otherwise, must be in accordance with applicable regulations. The Contractor must be aware of and understand the regulations concerning disposal of waste generated by coating operations. 1.02 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor must acquaint himself with the hazards of the work including, but not limited to: corroded components, high wind velocity, fire potentials caused by sparks from Contractor’s torches, spark damage to property, and the proximity to overhead electrical lines, to residences, businesses, streets, etc. Failure to do so will not relieve the Contractor from all obligations described in the plans or specifications. B. Contractor must evaluate the tank for loads that will be added to the tank during surface preparation and coating operations, including loads for hanging scaffolding, abrasive blasting equipment on shell and roof, containment supports, rigging and all other loads. Contractor is responsible for all damages to the tank for improperly loading or overloading Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 2 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 the tank. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Products which comply with the Contract Documents and are manufactured by the following companies will be acceptable. Products from other coating manufacturers shall not be submitted and will not be considered. 1. Tnemec Company, Inc. 2. Carboline 3. The Sherwin-Williams Company 4. PPG 5. Akzo Nobel / International Paint, LLC B. Coating Contractor’s Qualifications 1. Must be qualified in this line of work and have a minimum of 10 years’ experience coating elevated potable water storage tanks and in the application of the protective coatings of the types specified herein. 2. Must have working knowledge of the applicable standards of OSHA, AWWA, NACE, SSPC, and compliance with the requirements of the Texas Commission for Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and other regulatory agencies for potable water supply systems and air quality standards. 3. NACE International Institute Contractor Accredited Program Certification AS-1 F (NIICAP AS-1 F) or SSPC-QP1 Certification is preferred, but not required for the project. If certified, include certification certificate with the experience documentation. 4. Coating Contractor must submit a tabulation of at least 10 (ten) projects of similar scope (elevated storage), size (1-million gallons or larger) and type of coatings completed by the company within the last 10 years. Projects must include current contact information for project references. 5. Documentation must be provided with the bid package and will be evaluated as part of the Prime Contractor’s experience. C. Contractor’s Superintendent/Foreman must have a minimum of 10 years’ experience with coating storage tanks. Superintendent/Foreman must be onsite while work indicated within this specification is underway. Submit a list of recent projects and names of references for those projects. D. The Contractor must provide workers who perform professional and quality work and who are experienced and knowledgeable in surface preparation, mixing and application of high performance coating systems. E. Coatings mock panels must be prepared and approved prior to surface preparation and coating work initiates. Mock-up must remain on site for the duration of the project. Mock panel must be stored in the same environment as the represented coating system. Panels are to be prepared with same methodologies, equipment and materials that will be applied to the tank. Two panels are required: Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 3 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 1. Exterior Panel: Provide 2’x2’ approved same of SSPC-SP6 surface preparation on one side, protected with a clear spray varnish. On opposite side, provide same surface preparation with approved exterior coating system showing each coat with mil thickness as specified. 2. Interior Panel: Provide 2’x2’ approved same of SSPC-SP10 surface preparation on one side, protected with a clear spray varnish. On opposite side, provide same surface preparation with approved exterior coating system showing each coat with mil thickness as specified. F. The Contractor’s painters that will be applying any high solids coatings for this project must be trained and certified by the Coatings Manufacturer for the application of the high solids coatings. Certification must occur at the project site, at the location where the coatings will be used and in the presence of the Owner’s representative. Applicators must be certified using a mock structure constructed on the site by the Contractor. Any new applicators added to the crew will need to be certified separately per this procedure. Mock structure will be constructed out of wood and incorporate: 1. Flat vertical wall made of plywood to simulate the shell. 2. Roof made of plywood to simulate coating the underside of the roof and roof to shell connection. 3. Rafters made of wood (4 minimum) attached to underside of the roof to simulate coating roof and rafter connections. 4. Contractor must provide geotextile fabric and backer rod and will demonstrate application of these on structure gaps and corners. G. Product Quality: 1. Use only the coatings specified in this Section. Use only those thinners and solvents recommended by the manufacturer, only in the amounts necessary to produce the manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate, and in amounts not exceeding the maximum quantities stated in the manufacturer’s literature. 2. The coating material must not show excessive settling in a freshly opened full can and must be easily re-dispersed with a paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state. It shall show no curdling, livering, caking, or color separation and must be free of lumps or skim surfaces. H. Testing: Protective coatings must be applied under quality control procedures, which include inspection of surface preparation and for each coat applied. Do not proceed with the next step until the Owner’s Representative has approved the previous step. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for testing for this specification, at no further cost to the Owner. The Owner’s Representative shall also make such tests, if it is considered necessary. Cooperate with the Owner, providing equipment, scaffolds, and other equipment as requested by the Owner’s Representative. I. Testing Equipment: Furnish the testing apparatus necessary for testing surface preparation, environmental conditions and coatings as specified. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 4 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 J. Testing Equipment: Contractor must furnish and have the following testing apparatuses on- site during construction for the Owner’s use: 1. One set of U.S. Department of Commerce thickness calibration plates, certified by the National Bureau of Standards, to test dry film thickness. 2. Wet-film thickness gauges. Provide two to Owner’s Representative. Each painter must keep one to test paint as it is applied. 3. One electronic dry-film thickness gauge capable or measuring 0-200 mils with calibration standards approved by the Bureau of Standards. 4. One Elcometer 319 Dewpoint Meter 5. One set of SSPC VIS 1, 3 and 4 - Visual Standards as applicable. K. The Contractor must schedule a construction conference prior to any field work being completed. The meeting will be onsite and will include the Owner, Contractor, painting superintendent, Engineer, Owner’s Representative and Coating Manufacturer’s Representative. At this meeting, the coating plan and schedule will be reviewed in detail. 1.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Surface Profile Testing 1. Provide a minimum of 3 sets of profile readings for the first 1,000 square feet. 2. Provide a minimum of 2 sets of profile readings for each additional 1,000 square feet. B. Wet Film and Dry Film Thickness Testing 1. Provide wet film tests during painting operations to assure proper thicknesses of coating are being applied. 2. The dry-film thickness for each coat must be tested and be in conformance with SSPC- PA-2 with a Type 2 Electronic Gauge. C. Holiday Testing 1. Contractor must conduct holiday testing in the presence of the Owner’s Representative. 2. Holiday Testing must be conducted using a wet sponge low voltage holiday detector for interior coatings with total DFT of 20 mils or less and high voltage holiday detector for coatings with a total DFT greater than 20 mils in accordance with ASTM D 5162. 3. A holiday test must be performed on the entire interior wet area of the tank, including all appurtenances, following the application of the final coat and after all work is completed inside of the reservoir. 4. During the wet sponge testing, defective areas must be marked for repair and re-tested after repair work has been completed. 5. All touched up pinholes and re-coated areas must be completely cured prior to re- testing for holidays. 6. Holiday testing and re-testing must continue until the interior surfaces are found to be holiday free. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 5 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 D. Contractor must monitor and record ambient climatic conditions and interior reservoir conditions during surface preparation and coating as follows: 1. Temperature of both the sunny side and shady side of the reservoir must be recorded periodically each day. The reservoir surface temperatures, relative humidity, dry bulb, wet bulb and dew point temperatures, both interior and exterior (as appropriate), are to be recorded at least every (3) three hours. 2. The dew point must be measured by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables or with an electronic climate monitoring system approved by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor must use a form approved by the Owner for recording this data. The completed forms must be kept on the job site at all times from the time coating is first applied until the coating system is complete. Cloud based reporting systems may be utilized with the Engineer’s approval. E. All work, including observations, must be recorded daily by the Contractor. A copy of each daily report/log must be placed in a file kept on the job site and submitted to the Owner at the end of each day. The reports must include the following: 1. Date 2. Project Manager’s Name 3. Contractor and Subcontractor name (where applicable) 4. Contractor’s and or Owner’s Representatives name (where applicable) 5. Project Name 6. Work Identification including: a. Type of work performed b. Location of work performed, indicated on generalized drawings of the reservoir, drawings must include estimated ft2 area blasted and/or painted and approximate percentage of total ft2 area of surface being prepared and painted. Generalized drawings must include: 1). Plan view of reservoir 2). Profile view of reservoir 3). Plate location 4). North arrow 5). Any other drawings that will help to indicate location of work performed 7. Time of day each portion of the work was started and finished 8. Weather conditions, including corresponding time of day, before during and after work begins including: a. Temperature (air and surface) b. Humidity/dew point c. Wind velocity/direction Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 6 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 d. Remarks and results of work 9. QC results for completed work, including: a. Compressed air blotter test performed at the start of each day and every four hours per ASTM D 4285. b. Surface preparation visual checks. c. Profile checks utilizing replica tape. d. Documentation of DFT’s and areas tested per SSPC PA-2, Type 2 Gauge. e. Locations of holidays, repairs and touchups required, including documentation of the repair completion. 10. Contractor signature F. Owner’s Representative Field Quality Assurance Coordination Contractor must provide a schedule for anticipated hold-points and must notify the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days prior to any required inspections and confirmed twenty-four (24) hours prior to inspection. Prior to scheduling an inspection, Contractor is responsible for reviewing work and verifying it is ready for a threshold inspection. Once scheduled, if the Owner’s Representative finds the project not ready for inspection any additional trips for re-inspection or inspection for retesting of failed tests shall be borne by the Contractor and deducted from the Contract Value by Change Order. G. Field Quality Assurance 1. Observations may be conducted by the Owner’s Representative and a third-party inspection company retained by the Engineer. Final observations must be performed in the presence of the Owner or their Representative and the Contractor’s superintendent. All materials and equipment used in the accomplishment of testing are subject to observation at any time by the Owner’s Representative. Periodic observation times will be agreed upon by the Owner’s Representative and Contractor, and approved by the Owner. 2. The Owner may conduct the tests and observations to verify the Coating Manufacturer’s data. If the coating testing results fall below the test requirements or visual observation, the Owner reserves the right to have the Contractor change coating materials and/or Coating Manufacturers to a coating that will meet all the stated requirements in this Specification. 3. All steps of the coating system will be subject to observation prior to progression to succeeding steps. Phases of observation must include, but not limited to: a. All welding repairs completed prior to painting. b. Containment erection completed (as required). c. Pre-cleaning (before surface preparation) survey of facilities to be primed. d. Prior to and during surface preparation e. Prime coating application. f. Stripe coating application. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 7 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 g. During and immediately after each coating application. h. Final coating observation. i. Holiday detection on interior of tank. j. Cure test of interior coating completed. k. Substantial Completion / Pre-disinfection. 4. The Contractor must not move or remove scaffolding, ladders or other fixtures necessary to provide proper observation until such work has been observed and approved by the Owner’s Representative. 5. Any work found to be deficient, damaged, or otherwise unacceptable must be repaired in accordance with the Coating Manufacturer’s latest written repair recommendations at no additional cost to the Owner. 6. Owner’s Representative will make every attempt to minimize damage to newly coated areas during observation activities, but any damage caused, regardless of by whom, must be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 7. Observation and/or acceptance of Contractor’s work by Owner’s Representative(s) in no way releases Contractor from any of the terms and conditions of the Contract Agreement. 8. The following test and observations will be performed during coating operations: a. Surfaces of all steel must first be cleaned and observed by the Contractor’s Superintendent to ensure that all grease, oil, and other foreign materials have been removed before coating. Any area found to be improperly cleaned, must be redone to the Owner’s Representative’s satisfaction. Final surface preparation must be as outlined in SSPC-SP1 through SP13 and WJ-1 through WJ-4, as specified. Prior to observation of all interior and exterior surfaces by Owner’s Representative, Contractor’s Superintendent must observe and confirm readiness for inspection. b. Surfaces of all ductile pipe and fittings must first be cleaned and observed by the Contractor’s Superintendent to ensure that all grease, oil, and other foreign materials have been removed before coating. Any area found to be improperly cleaned, must be redone to the Owner’s Representative’s satisfaction. Final surface preparation must be as outlined in NAPF 500, as specified. Prior to observation of all interior and exterior surfaces by Owner’s Representative, Contractor’s Superintendent must observe and confirm readiness for inspection. c. The pattern depth of the abrasive blasted surface must be as specified by the Coating Manufacturer’s written surface profile recommendations. The profile must be measured by a Testex Replica Tape. SSPC-VIS 1 and/or SSPC-VIS 3 must serve as guides and in arbitration to determine the degree of surface preparation. All prepared areas of the reservoir surface, interior and exterior, must be prepared as per SSPC visual standards. Prior to undertaking full-scale abrasive blasting operations, the Contractor must perform a test blast on both the exterior and the interior of the tank in the presence of the Engineer or Owner’s Representative and the coating manufacturer’s representative. The test section must be a minimum of five (5) feet high by five (5) Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 8 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 feet wide. The Engineer or Owner’s Representative and the manufacturer’s representative must verify that the surface cleanliness and profile meet the requirements of this specification before work can proceed. In the event the test section fails to comply with the requirements of this specification, the contractor shall be required to make suitable changes to the equipment and/or abrasive material and perform an additional test sections until compliance with the specification is demonstrated. d. Before and/or during blasting and coating operations, a field test of ventilation flow- rates must be performed by the Contractor to verify that the ventilation requirements are being provided as specified. Contractor must submit documentation of flow test results to the Engineer. e. Measurement of the dry film thickness must be made in accordance with SSPC-PA2 with a Type 2 Electronic Gauge. Measurements of the actual dry film thickness of the various coating layers applied must be made by the Owner’s Representative with assistance from the Contractor. Final film thickness measurements must be made at such locations as designated by the Owner and/or Owner’s Representative. f. Holiday testing must be conducted by the Contractor and observed by the Owner’s Representative. g. All coatings submitted must pass a 7-day chemical spot test to the following chemicals with no cracking, blistering or delamination. 1). 1,1,1 Trichloroethane 2). Methyl Ethyl Keytone (MK) 3). Ethanol 9. On days when blasting and/or coating is being performed, the Owner’s Representative must monitor and record ambient climatic conditions, and interior reservoir conditions as follows: a. Air temperature, steel surface temperature, humidity and dew point must be measured and recorded by the Contractor prior to beginning of blasting and prior to application of coating, daily. b. Surface temperature must be measured using a surface thermometer. c. Temperature of both the sunny side and shady side of the reservoir must be recorded periodically each day. The reservoir surface temperatures, relative humidity, dry bulb, wet bulb and dew point temperatures, both interior and exterior (as appropriate), are to be recorded at least every (3) three hours. d. The dew point must be measured by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables or by utilizing an electronic measuring device approved by the Engineer. 10. The Owner’s Representative must use a form approved by the Owner for recording this data. The completed forms must be kept on the job site at all times from the time surface preparation is initiated until the coating system is complete. The forms must be submitted as record data on a weekly basis until coating is complete. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 9 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals must be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.” B. The following Record Data is due prior to ordering coating and surface preparation materials: 1. Products and Manufacturer’s Information: a. Coating Manufacturer’s color selection literature for coating materials and caulk. b. Sample warranty document for products. c. Provide certification from the manufacturer that all coatings will not contain more than 0.06% by weight of lead in the cured coating for each coat applied. d. Coating Manufacturer’s Product Information and Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each coating and caulk material. Product Information must include the following: 1) The Manufacturer’s published instructions for use in specifying and applying all proposed coatings. 2) Application instructions written and published by the Coating Manufacturer. 3) All limitations, precautions and requirements that may adversely affect the coating, that may cause unsatisfactory results after the application or that may cause the coating not to serve the purpose for which it was intended, must be clearly and completely stated in the instructions. Limitations and requirements must include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: a) Surface preparation b) Method(s) of application c) Thickness of each coat (maximum and minimum DFT) d) Drying and curing time of each coat e) Time (minimum and maximum) allowed between coats f) Thinner and use of thinner g) Proper mixing of coating before application h) Weather limitations during and after application (temperature and humidity, time weighted) i) Physical properties of coating, including percent solids content by volume j) Equipment settings (air cap, fluid tip, equipment pressure settings, etc.) k) Pot life at various temperature and humidity conditions. l) Provide documentation that interior coating system is compatible with the cathodic protection system. C. The following Samples are required prior to ordering the materials: 1. Three (3) samples of selected exterior finish colors for approval on 6” x 6” swatches. Label each swatch with the manufacturer’s name, coating name/type, color name and number. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 10 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 D. The following Record Data is required prior to coating work: 1. Coating Plan: a. Anticipated coating process schedule by date, including dates when hold-point inspections are anticipated. Schedule must indicate detailed activities on a daily basis. b. Detailed procedures and schedule for all pre-cleaning, surface preparation and application of coating, including touch-up and repair procedures for all coating systems. c. Recoat schedule on the submitted coating materials. d. Data sheets complete with a graduated scale or curve, produced by the Coating Manufacturer, with curing characteristics and recommendations regarding complete coating curing. The data sheets and scales or curves must include specific cure times over a wide range of temperatures and humidity. e. Provide a written plan documenting how spent cleaning debris and/or paint over spray or droplets will be contained/confined to the jobsite and tank site during the surface preparation and coating application operations. Reasonable care must be exercised by the Contractor to prevent damage, nuisance, or hazardous conditions to adjacent or nearby property Owners. Include all materials and method to be used for protection of exterior surfaces, and allow for recovery and disposal of paint scraps and blast media. f. Provide written plan documenting how paint and/or abrasive damage to automobiles and property will be addressed, including a process for quick removal of the paint or abrasive, and how the work will be accomplished. (This must not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of setting claims for damage, but is intended to expedite and minimize said claims.) 2. Provide documentation on proposed containment system methods for blasting and coating operations. 3. Provide documentation on heating or dehumidification system (as required): 1). Calculations for dehumidification and ventilation requirements 2). Fans and their locations 3). Dimensions of equipment 4). Maximum capacities of equipment 5). Emission control devices 6). Method of filtration of exhausted tank air 7). EMD- continuous electronic monitoring device 4. Provide documentation on ventilation and filtration system: 1). Calculations for ventilation requirements 2). Fans and their locations 3). Dimensions of equipment Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 11 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 4). Maximum capacities of equipment 5). Emission control devices 6). Method of filtration of exhausted tank air 5. The Contractor must submit evidence of notification of the appropriate office of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) prior to abrasive blasting as required. Submit copies of any obtained permits. 6. Coating Manifest - Within 48 hours of coating delivery to the job site, the Contractor must record the batch number stamped on each coating container and submit a typed list to the Owner’s Representative. Minimum information required is listed below. a. Date of delivery to job site b. Name and signature of Superintendent recording the data c. List of batch number including corresponding coating identification, color, date of manufacture and volume of each container E. The following Certified Test Report(s) are required prior to coating work: 1. SDS sheets for all abrasive to be used on the project. 2. Certification and laboratory test results indicating recycled metallic abrasive per SSPC- AB 2 or 4 and atomic absorption test results. F. Provide the following Record Data during the construction of the project: 1. Letter from Coating Manufacturer confirming the surface preparation for both the interior and exterior surfaces prepared by the Contractor in the field are acceptable for the product(s) being applied. 2. On a weekly basis, submit: a. Contractor’s Daily Reports. b. Output from automatic real-time monitoring equipment from the previous week. 1.06 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety. Adhere to the latest standards and codes published by the following organizations. 1. ANSI (American National Standards Institute) ANSI/NSF Standard 61 Drinking Water Components 2. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) ASTM D 523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss ASTM D 610 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Rusted on Painted Surfaces ASTM D 2244 Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates ASTM D 3359 Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 12 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 ASTM D 4214 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films ASTM D 4285 Standard Test Method of Indicating Oil and Water in Compressed Air ASTM E 337 Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer ASTM E 84-03 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM D 4541 Standard Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Testing Adhesion of Applied Coating Using Portable adhesion Tester 3. AWWA (American Water Works Association) AWWA D100 Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage AWWA D102 Coating Steel Water Storage Tanks AWWA D107 Composite Elevated Tanks for Water Storage AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C222 Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipe and Fittings AWWA C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities 4. Consumer Product Safety Act, Part 1303 5. NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) NACE TPC2 Coating and Lining for Immersion Service: Chapter Safety, Chapter 2 Surface Preparation, Chapter 3 Curing, and Chapter 4 Inspection NACE SP0178 Fabrication Details, Surface Finish Requirements, and Proper Design Considerations for Tanks and Vessels to be Lined for Immersion Service NACE SP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates NACE SP0388 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection of Internal Submerged Surfaces of Carbon Steel Water Storage Tanks NACE RP0178 Plastic Weld Comparator NACE RP0287 Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces Using a Replica Tape 6. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF) NAPF 500-03 Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings 7. OSHA (Occupational Safety & Health Administration) 1915.35 Standards - 29CFR Painting 1926.62 Standards – 29 CFR Lead Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 13 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 8. SSPC (Society for Protective Coatings) SSPC-VIS 1 Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning SSPC-VIS 3 Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Power and Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC-VIS 4 Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Waterjetting SSPC Vol. 1 Good Painting Practices SSPC-AB1 Mineral and Slag Abrasives SSPC-AB2 Cleanliness of Recycled Ferrous Metallic Abrasives SSPC-AB3 Ferrous Metallic Abrasives SSPC-AB4 Recyclable Encapsulated Abrasive Media in a Compressible Matrix SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SSPC-SP WJ-1 Low-Pressure Water Cleaning (LP WC) water performed at pressures less than 34 MPa (5,000 psig) SSPC-SP WJ-2 High-Pressure Water Cleaning (HP WC) performed at pressures from 34 to 70 MPa (5,000 to 10,000 psig) SSPC-SP WJ-3 High-Pressure Waterjetting (HP WJ) performed at pressures from 70 to 210 MPa (10,000 to 30,000 psig) SSPC-SP WJ-4 Ultra High-Pressure Waterjetting (UHP WJ) performed at pressures greater than 210 MPa (30,000 psig) SSPC-PA-1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting SSPC-PA-2 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness with Magnetic Gages SSPC-PA-3 Guide to Safety in Paint Application SSPC-Guide 6 (CON) Guide for Containing Surface Preparation Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations SSPC-Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting SSPC-Guide 15 Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Nonporous Substrates 9. SSPC/NACE International Joint Standards SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP7/NACE 4 Brush - Off Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Near - White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP13/NACE 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete 10. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) 30 TAC Chapter 111, Subchapter A, Division 3 Abrasive Blasting of Water Storage Tanks Performed by Portable Operations Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 14 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 30 TAC Chapter 290 Subchapter D Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems B. In the event of a conflict between the published standards, codes, and this Section, the more stringent requirement shall govern. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver coating products to the Site in original unopened containers, with manufacturer’s label and batch number attached. Do not apply products until the Owner’s field representative has approved the product for use. B. Use one location at each site for the storage of coating products. Protect the floor from spills and other damage. Protect the products from extreme heat or cold. Keep containers covered. Keep the storage rooms clean of trash and debris. Dispose of oily or used rags daily. Take precautions to prevent fires. The storage of flammable liquids must comply with the City, State, or other fire codes. C. Storage of coatings and other products must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Coatings that have been damage or not stored properly must not be applied and must be removed from the site. D. All products and coatings that are not approved for the project must be removed from the site and must not be stored at the site. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL CONDITIONS: A. Do not apply coatings under conditions that are unsuitable for the production of good results. Remove trash and debris from enclosed buildings and thoroughly clean prior to application of coatings. Do not begin application of coatings in areas where other trades are working, or where construction activities result in airborne dust or other debris. Do not apply coatings in conditions which do not conform to the recommendations of the coatings manufacturer. B. Coatings shall only be applied when conditions fall within the parameters listed in the manufacturer’s printed data. C. Do not apply any coatings when weather conditions are unfavorable. In the event that climatic conditions are not conducive for best results, postpone application of coatings until conditions conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations and the provisions of this Section. D. Do not apply coatings to a wet or damp surface in wet or damp weather conditions, or when there is dust in the air. Surfaces exposed to direct sunlight must be shaded by awnings or other protective devices while coatings are being applied, if recommended by coating manufacturer. When necessary, provide temporary heating devices of a type that produces no fumes which will discolor the paint system. E. Heating and Dehumidification 1. Dehumidification equipment must be used to control the environment in the reservoir wet area during surface preparation, rehabilitation, coating application and coating Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 15 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 curing at no additional cost to the Owner, if acceptable environmental conditions cannot be met. If the Contractor cannot meet the required environmental conditions to apply the interior coating system per this specification and the coating manufacturer’s written recommendations, Contractor will cease operations until approved dehumidification equipment has been provided and acceptable environmental conditions are achieved. If coating system is applied without dehumidification or in conditions not acceptable by this specification and by the coating manufacturer’s written requirements, Contractor must fully remove coating system applied and replace per the Engineer’s direction. 2. Automatic real-time monitoring equipment must be provided. This equipment must be used when no Contractor personnel are on site. Monitoring equipment may be removed during abrasive blasting and coating operations, but environmental conditions must be checked and logged manually. 3. The Contractor must furnish all labor, materials, equipment, fabrication and quality control inspections, and all other incidentals required to control and maintain the environment of the reservoir within the parameters stated in this specification and must incorporate these and any other expenses into his bid. 4. The Owner reserves the rights, in the event the dehumidification equipment is not performing to the minimum requirements stated in this specification, to require the Contractor to modify and or add additional equipment to satisfy the conditions of this specification, at the sole cost to the Contractor. 5. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide adequate dehumidification equipment to meet this specification and Coating Manufacturer’s requirements. The Coating Manufacturer’s limits of surface temperature, tank inside air temperature and relative humidity requirements will govern, if more stringent than the requirements stated within this specification. 6. During abrasive cleaning and coating operations inside of the tank, the relative humidity of the air inside of the tank must not exceed 55%. During curing of the coating on the interior of the tank, the relative humidity of the air inside of the tank must not exceed 75%. F. Force Ventilation 1. Continuous forced fresh air ventilation must be provided from beginning of the reservoir interior wet area surface preparation through final coating operations and coating curing. 2. Forced ventilation must be supplied to the interior of the tank per the recoat time required by the coating manufacturer and at least 48 hours after the final coat has been applied. 3. Unless dehumidification equipment is used to provide ventilation of the reservoir interior, the roof vents and hatches must be kept open and clear. 4. All reservoir, pedestal, dry riser and dry well openings susceptible to emissions during blasting, cleaning, and coating operations must be properly fitted and secured with suitable dust collection devices to reduce the release of emissions. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 16 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 5. From the beginning of interior wet and/or dry coating application and until this coating is cured, the Contractor must monitor the air for the lower explosion limit (LEL) as published in the Coating Manufacturer’s product MSDS. 6. During coating curing and when no coatings are being applied inside the reservoir, the equipment must be sized so that it is capable of changing the volume of air inside the entire reservoir a minimum of 1.5 to 2.0 times per hour. 7. Throughout the duration of ventilation, containment of blasting abrasives, removed coating, and applied coatings must be maintained by use of proper filtration. 8. The ventilation system must be in accordance with AWWA D102 and submitted to the Owner. 9. Contractor is responsible for supplying, installing and maintaining the forced ventilation system. 10. Ventilation during interior abrasive blasting can be reduced to one (1) air exchange per hour. 11. The above ventilation requirements are minimum requirements. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that the flow rate provided throughout the tank meets the curing requirements of the Coating Manufacturer for the coating applied. Should additional ventilation be required by the Coating Manufacturer, the Contractor must furnish additional ventilation at his expense. G. Containment System 1. Contractor must provide containment methods, either full or partial, which allows for the containment of the environmentally sensitive waste, dust and paint over spray that will be generated during the abrasive blasting and painting operation. 2. Provide a minimum SSPC Guide 6 (CON) Class 3A containment system when dry abrasive blasting at the tank site. 3. Private residences and public areas exist within 500 feet of the water storage tank site. Emissions from abrasive blasting operations must be controlled as required by TAC 30, Chapter 111, Subchapter A, Division 3. 4. The ground surrounding the tank must be protected from all debris, emissions, dust, and other materials generated in the cleaning operations with a minimum of two layers of polyethylene covered with plywood or the same material used for the perimeter containment system. Provide documentation that these requirements have been adhered to. 5. Containment is not required when blasting on the interior of a completely enclosed tank (i.e. roof is in place) as long as no visible emissions are created. 6. The Contractor must ensure that no spent cleaning/blasting debris, dust, overspray, coating droplets, or emissions of any kind, escape to the atmosphere, the base of the tank, or adjacent buildings, private property, work sites, parking lots, etc. 7. The Owner reserves the right to stop work or require containment, additional containment or different containment methods if the Contractor’s operations create a nuisance beyond the tank site property line in the sole opinion of the Owner, the Engineer, the Owner’s Representative, any regulatory agency, or neighbor. All costs of Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 17 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 providing an adequate containment system must be included by the Contractor in the Base Bid. 8. The Contractor must be responsible for all materials that are used and for any apparatus used to contain dust emissions, debris, overspray, and coating droplets. The containment system attachments to the tank must be designed by a professional engineer (P.E.) registered in the State of Texas not to impose excessive loading on the tank. The Contractor must submit the P.E. designed, stamped, and signed details of the containment system on the tank. The containment system will place additional loads on the tank that the tank was not originally designed for. The Contractor must reinforce the tank as necessary to prevent permanent deformation and to assure that no damage occurs to the tank. Any damage to the tank as a direct or indirect result of the containment system must be repaired or sections replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Neither the Owner nor the Owner’s Engineer assumes any responsibility for the structural ability of the tank to support the containment system. 9. If complete containment of the tank is utilized to contain all cleaning dust, debris, emissions, paint droplets, and paint overspray, the complete containment must include a full bonnet. 10. If tarps are used as part of the containment system, the tarps must be an impervious, solid, flame-resistant material, reinforced with a fiber mesh and must allow as much light as possible to pass through the material. 11. If robotic or creeper-type cleaning devices are used, the robotic or creeper-type device must meet the same containment criteria as that of the types of containment (lack of emissions). All overspray and paint droplets must be contained on the tank site. 12. Review of the containment system for containing the spent cleaning dust, debris, emissions, overspray, and coating droplets must not warrant the structural integrity of the containment system and must not warrant the structural integrity of the tank to support the containment system. Nor shall review of the containment system warrant the ability of the system to contain spent cleaning dust, debris, emissions, and overspray. 13. Damage Contingency Plan: Prior to construction, the Contractor must present a written plan for review by the Owner and Engineer concerning how dust and debris damage to automobiles will be removed. Approval of this plan will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility of settling claims, but is intended as an avenue to expedite and minimize such claims. H. Visible Emissions 1. Contractor must control visible emissions and releases while dust producing activities are underway. 2. Visible emissions more than SSPC Guide 6, Level 1 (1% of the workday or 5 minutes in an 8-hour shift) are unacceptable. Sustained emissions of more than 1 minute, regardless of the total time of emissions for the day is unacceptable. If unacceptable emissions are observed, Contractor must shut down immediately and correct the situation and clean up any debris generated from the release to the satisfaction of the Engineer before continuing work. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 18 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 I. Dust Collection 1. Contractor must provide dust collection as required to prevent any visible emissions from entering the atmosphere as a result of the abrasive blasting operation. 2. For interior tank abrasive blasting, high volume fans and dust socks at manholes and vents must be provided as a minimum requirement. 3. The dust collection must be operated on the interior of the tank during all abrasive blast cleaning and until the area is clean enough for coating application. The Contractor shall be responsible for all sizing, design of ductwork, etc., based upon the Contractor’s operations, number of blasters, duration of blasting, etc. 4. The Contractor must take precautions to avoid a vacuum from developing inside of the tank. J. Working Conditions: 1. Provide adequate lighting at any location that coatings are being applied or testing is performed. Illumination must be of sufficient intensity to achieve acceptable results. Provide explosion-proof lighting when required. 2. Temporary ladders and scaffolds must conform to applicable safety requirements. Erect temporary scaffolds where needed to cover large areas. Provide ladders or scaffolding during testing procedures. 1.09 GUARANTEES A. Coating Manufacturer’s Warranty 1. Manufacturer’s written warranty must be submitted and accepted by the Engineer prior to approval of the coatings submittal. If the warranty does not substantially meet the requirements of this specification Contractor must provide an alternate coating manufacturer that will meet the requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Tank Coating Warranty a. Coating Manufacturer must issue to the Owner a 10-year warranty for the lining applied on the interior of the tank. The Manufacturer’s and the Contractor’s Representative must sign the Coating Manufacturer’s warranty stating that the lining was applied in accordance with these specifications and the Manufacturer’s recommendations. b. Coating Manufacturer must issue to the Owner a 10-year warranty for the coating applied on the exterior of the tank. The Manufacturer’s and the Contractor’s Representative must sign the Coating Manufacturer’s warranty stating that the coating was applied in accordance with these specifications and the Manufacturer’s recommendations. c. Attachment A included with this specification is a sample coating manufacturer’s warranty for the tank interior lining and exterior coating. All information, conditions and wording in the warranty are the requirements of the Owner and will be required for this project. Modifications of the wording will not be approved or accepted. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 19 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 3. Warranty of All Other Coatings Contractor must issue to the Owner a 2-year warranty for coating application workmanship for other coatings installed on the project unless specifically addressed by other specifications. The Contractor’s maintenance bond may be used to assure this work, but will require the Surety’s acknowledgement in writing prior to commencement of coating application on the project. 4. Warranty Work Contractor and Coating manufacturer must coordinate warranty work requested by the Owner at any time during warranty period. Owner is only required to contact Contractor to initiate warranty work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL COATING REQUIREMENTS A. All coatings must be free of heavy metals such as arsenic, barium, chromium, selenium, silver, lead, mercury and cadmium. B. All interior coatings and products used on interior wet surfaces (all surfaces within the tank bowl) must be certified by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), standard 61, for direct contact with potable water for the application and size of tank on the project. C. All coatings must be applied in strict conformance with the Coating Manufacturer’s published specifications and with this specification. D. To insure coating compatibility, Contractor must use products of a single Coating Manufacturer for all coatings applied to the reservoir and/or its components, unless prior approvals are obtained in writing from the Owner and the Coating Manufacturer. E. All materials must be delivered to the job site in original sealed containers with the date of manufacture and batch number stamped thereon by the Coating Manufacturer. Materials shall be subject to random observations by the Owner’s Representative at the job site. F. No coating submitted or used on this project must have a VOC (volatile organic content) in excess of 360 grams/liter or 3.0 lbs./gal. G. Primers factory-applied must be those specified. Notify manufacturers which shop prime coats will be required in order to be compatible with field-applied finish coats. Where equipment is purchased which has the manufacturer’s standard primer or a factory finish which is other than as specified in this section, remove the factory-applied paint system or apply passivators or other special coatings as required to make the surface compatible with the finish coat specified. H. No inorganic zinc-rich primers shall be permitted on the tank interior surfaces. 2.02 COATING SCHEDULES A. IW-03 Tank Interior Wet Coating System – 100% Solids Epoxy System Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 20 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 1. Interior wet surfaces, include the tank roof, shell, bottom, accessories, piping and appurtenances that are exposed to the stored water or its vapor. These include items constructed of stainless steel, such as ladders and piping. 2. Coating must be considered a “100% solids” coating (98 percent ± 2 percent solids) and must cover all edges, bridge all gaps and be monolithic and holiday free. Coating must comply with the performance requirements outline in ANSI/AWWA C210. 3. Surface preparation: a. Solvent Cleaning: SSPC-SP1 b. Abrasive Cleaning: NACE No. 2/SSPC-SP 10 – Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning. 4. Application Method(s): Spray. All weld seams, gaps, edges, bolts and difficult areas to coat must receive an initial stripe coat. 5. Full removal of preconstruction primer is required in accordance with NACE 2/SSPC-SP- 10. 6. Refer to Section 1.03 Quality Assurance for training and certification required for applicators. 7. Unsealed joints must be sealed with high solids lining system. Appropriately sized foam backer rod must be used as needed to fill spaces in unwelded joints. 25 mil thick high solids lining system must be sprayed behind backer rod and over backer rod once it is in place. Sharp edges must receive a single coat, then wrapped in geotextile fabric and then receive another coat. 8. NSF 61 certified system (including all thinners and additives) to be one of the following and of the same manufacturer of all other coating products used on this project: a. Sherwin-Williams Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Spray Stripe Coat Duraplate UHS, B62-210 Series* White Single Coat Duraplate UHS, B62-210 Series* 22 mils min. White * For pitted surfaces, provide Duraplate UHS Primer, B62H210 or B62L210 as recommended by the coating manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. *Sherplate PW Epoxy is an approved equal to the Duraplate UHS with a minimum DFT of 24 mils. b. Carboline Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Spray Stripe Coat Phenoline 341 Off White Single Coat Phenoline 341 24 mils min. Off White c. PPG Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 21 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 Spray Stripe Coat Novaguard 840 Cream Single Coat Novaguard 840 24 mils min. Cream *Amercoat 884 may be used as an additive as recommended by the coating manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. d. Tnemec Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat Epoxoline Series 22 4 - 6 mils Light Blue Spray Stripe Coat Epoxoline Series 22 Off White Finish Coat Epoxoline Series 22 18 - 20 mils Off White Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 24 mils min. e. AkzoNobel / International Paint, LLC Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Spray Stripe Coat Interline 975P Buff, White Single Coat Interline 975P 24 mils min. Buff, White B. ID-01 Tank Interior Dry System - Zinc Rich Primer/Epoxy/Epoxy 1. System applies to all interior dry surfaces of the finished structure that are not exposed to the elemental atmosphere, the stored water, or its vapor. These areas include, but are not limited to the interior of the access tube, interior of the steel pedestal, and the underside of a suspended bottom within the pedestal. 2. Finish coat shall be satin. 3. Surface Preparation: a. Solvent Cleaning: SSPC-SP 1 b. Abrasive Cleaning: NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning 4. Application Method(s): Spray or Roller. Brush must only be used for touch up and stripe coating. 5. Organic zinc-rich primer must be minimum 80% zinc by weight. 6. Preconstruction Priming a. Preconstruction priming must be in accordance with AWWA D102. Full removal of construction primer is not required if the primer is fully compatible with the specified paint system primer. A letter from the paint manufacturer certifying compatibility must be submitted with coating submittal. b. Weld seams and bare steel must be cleaned to NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. c. Areas with inadherent preconstruction primer or rusting must be cleaned to NACE No. 4/SSPC SP-7 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. d. A full field coat of the specified prime coat must be applied over the spot-cleaned bare steel and remaining preconstruction primer. 7. Three-coat system to be one of the following and of the same Manufacturer of all other coating products used on this project: Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 22 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 a. Sherwin-Williams Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Corothane I Galvapac 3 – 4 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Macropoxy 646* 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: Macropoxy 646* 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Macropoxy 646* 4 – 6 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 11 – 16 mils *Macropoxy 5500LT is an approved equal to the Macropoxy 646 PW. A single finish coat of 8-12 mils is acceptable in lieu of providing an Intermediate Coat. b. Carboline Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Carbozinc 859 3 – 5 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Carboguard 60 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: Carboguard 60 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Carboguard 60 4 – 6 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 11 - 17 mils c. PPG Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Amercoat 68HS 4 – 5 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Amerlock 2/400 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: Amerlock 2/400 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Amerlock 2/400 4 – 6 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 16 – 17 mils d. Tnemec Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: 90G-1K97 Tneme-Zinc 2.5– 3.5 mils Reddish Gray Stripe Coat: Epoxoline Series 141 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Finish Coat: Epoxoline Series 141 8.5 – 12.5 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 11 – 16 mils e. AkzoNobel / International Paint, LLC Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 23 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 Prime Coat: Interzinc 52 4 – 5 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Intergard 345 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: Intergard 345 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Intergard 345 4 – 6 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 – 17 mils C. EN - 02 Tank Exterior System – Zinc Rich Primer/Epoxy/Polysiloxane System 1. System applies to all exterior surfaces of the tank roof, shell, steel pedestal, legs, accessories, piping connecting to the tank and appurtenances that are exposed to the elemental atmosphere. 2. Finish coat shall be high gloss. 3. Surface Preparation: a. Solvent Cleaning: SSPC SP-1 b. Abrasive Cleaning: NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. 4. Application Method(s): Spray or Roller as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Brush must only be used for touch up and stripe coating. 5. Organic zinc-rich primer must be minimum 80% zinc by weight. 6. Preconstruction Priming a. Preconstruction priming must be in accordance with AWWA D102. Full removal of construction primer is not required if the primer is fully compatible with the specified paint system primer. A letter from the paint manufacturer certifying compatibility must be submitted with coating submittal. b. Weld seams and bare steel must be cleaned to NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. c. Areas with adherent preconstruction primer or rusting must be cleaned to NACE No. 4/SSPC SP-7 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. d. A full field coat of the specified prime coat must be applied over the spot-cleaned bare steel and remaining preconstruction primer. 7. Three-coat system to be one of the following and of the same Manufacturer of all other coating products used on this project: a. Sherwin-Williams Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 24 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 Prime Coat: Corothane I Galvapac 3 – 4 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Macropoxy 646 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: Macropoxy 646 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Sher-Loxane 800 4 – 6 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 10– 17 mils Logo: Sher-Loxane 800 4 – 6 mils T.B.D. b. Carboline Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Carbozinc 859 3 – 5 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Carboguard 60 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: Carboguard 60 3 – 5 mils Beige Finish Coat: Carboxane 2000 or 2100 3 – 7 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 9 – 17 mils Logo: Carboxane 2000 or 2100 3 – 7 mils T.B.D. c. PPG Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Amercoat 68HS 4 – 5 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Amerlock 2/400 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: Amerlock 2/400 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: PSX 800/805 Polysiloxane 4 – 7 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 – 18 mils Logo: PSX 800/805 Polysiloxane 4 – 7 mils T.B.D. d. AkzoNobel / International Paint, LLC Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Interzinc 52 4 – 5 mils Gray Stripe Coat: Intergard 345 2 – 3 mils Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: Intergard 345 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Interfine 979 4 – 7 mils T.B.D. Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 – 18 mils Logo: Interfine 979 4 – 7 mils T.B.D. D. SS - 01 Interior/Exterior Equipment, Pumps, Motors, Valves and Piping Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 25 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 1. System applies to Interior/Exterior Equipment, Pumps, Motors, Valves and Piping that are bare or shop primed with epoxy, alkyd, acrylic, or unknown primer type. System is not to be used for submerged piping, piping in vaults or piping with insulation. Above grade exterior piping attached to tank is to be prepared and coated per the tank’s specified exterior coating system. 2. Finish Coat Colors: a. Potable water piping and valves – Light Blue b. Valve hand wheels – Red. c. Overflow Drain Flap Valve – Gray 3. Finish coat shall be satin. 4. Surface Preparation: a. Steel Pipe and Fittings – Clean per SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning and then clean per NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. b. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings – Clean per NAPF 500-03-01, NAPF 500-03-04 and NAPF-03-05, with degree of cleanliness, Blast Clean No. 2. c. Field preparation of Shop Primed Surfaces: 1). Consult Engineer for surface preparation requirements for removal of asphaltic coatings. 2). Slag and weld metal accumulations and splatters not removed by the fabricator must be removed in the field by chipping or grinding. Sharp edges must be peened, ground or otherwise blunted. 3). Clean per SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning for steel applications. Clean per NAPF 500-03-01, Solvent Cleaning, for ductile iron applications. 4). Areas adjacent to welds or any area where shop primer has been damaged must be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning and SSPC SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning preparation and re-primed for steel applications. Clean in accordance with NAPF 500-03-02, Hand Tool Cleaning and NAPF 500-03-04, Power Tool Cleaning preparation and re-primed for ductile iron applications. All edges adjacent to damaged primer must be feathered. 5). If damage is too extensive or uneconomical to touch up or if the existing primer shows signs of wear or weathering, the entire item must be re-cleaned and coated in accordance with SSPC-SP7/NACE 4 - Brust Off Blasting using fine (30 to 100 mesh) abrasive for steel applications. Re-clean per NAPF 500-03-04, Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe and NAPF 500-03-05, Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings, Cleanliness Level No. 2 for ductile iron applications. Welds and irregular surfaces must receive a stripe coat of the specified primer prior to the application of the first field coat. 6). Provide final solvent cleaning as specified prior to coating. 7). 100 to 200 grit sandpaper must be used to roughen the surface and feather edges of the existing coating system. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 26 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 8). Motors, electrical, equipment name plates, labels, tags, site glasses, gauges, etc. must be protected from damage during abrasive blasting. 9). After application of the prime coat, apply caulking to fill flanged joints to be level. 5. Application Method(s): Spray or brush. Brush must be used for touch up and stripe coating. 6. Three-coat system to be one of the following and of the same Manufacturer of all other coating products used on this project: a. Sherwin-Williams Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Epoxy Mastic II 4 –6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: Macropoxy 646 Beige Intermediate Coat: Macropoxy 646 5 – 10 mils Beige Finish Coat: Hi-Solids Polyurethane 3 – 5 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 13 – 25 mils b. Carboline Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Carbomastic 15 4 – 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: Carboguard 60 Beige Intermediate Coat: Carboguard 60 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Carbothane 134HG 2 - 4 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 10 – 16 mils c. PPG Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Amerlock 2/400 AL 5 – 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: Amerlock 2/400 Beige Intermediate Coat: Amerlock 2/400 5 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Amercoat 450HS 2 – 3 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 – 15 mils d. Tnemec Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Chembuild Series 135 4 – 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: 73 Endura-Shield II 3 - 5 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 11 – 17 mils e. AkzoNobel / International Paint, LLC Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 27 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Interseal 670HS 4 – 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: Interseal 670HS Beige Intermediate Coat: Interseal 670HS 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Interthane 990 Series 2 - 5 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 10 – 17 mils E. SS - 02 Piping and Valves in Vaults and Under Insulation 1. System applies to Equipment, Valves and Piping that are bare or shop primed with epoxy, alkyd, acrylic, or unknown primer type. System is to be used for submerged piping, piping in vaults or piping with insulation at ambient temperatures. 2. Finish Coat Colors: a. Potable water piping and valves – Light Blue b. Valve hand wheels – Red. c. Overflow Drain Flap Valve – Gray 3. Finish coat shall be satin. 4. Surface Preparation: a. Steel Pipe and Fittings – Clean per SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning and then clean per NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. b. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings – Clean per NAPF 500-03-01, NAPF 500-03-04 and NAPF-03-05, with degree of cleanliness, Blast Clean No. 2. c. Field preparation of Shop Primed Surfaces: 1). Consult Engineer for surface preparation requirements for removal of asphaltic coatings. 2). Slag and weld metal accumulations and splatters not removed by the fabricator must be removed in the field by chipping or grinding. Sharp edges must be peened, ground or otherwise blunted. 3). Clean per SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning for steel applications. Clean per NAPF 500-03-01, Solvent Cleaning, for ductile iron applications. 4). Areas adjacent to welds or any area where shop primer has been damaged must be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning and SSPC SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning preparation and re-primed for steel applications. Clean in accordance with NAPF 500-03-02, Hand Tool Cleaning and NAPF 500-03-04, Power Tool Cleaning preparation and re-primed for ductile iron applications. All edges adjacent to damaged primer must be feathered. 5). If damage is too extensive or uneconomical to touch up or if the existing primer shows signs of wear or weathering, the entire item must be re-cleaned and coated in accordance with SSPC-SP7/NACE 4 - Brust Off Blasting using fine (30 to 100 mesh) abrasive for steel applications. Re-clean per NAPF 500-03-04, Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe and NAPF 500-03-05, Abrasive Blast Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 28 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings, Cleanliness Level No. 2 for ductile iron applications. Welds and irregular surfaces must receive a stripe coat of the specified primer prior to the application of the first field coat. 6). Provide final solvent cleaning as specified prior to coating. 7). 100 to 200 grit sandpaper must be used to roughen the surface and feather edges of the existing coating system. 8). After application of the prime coat, apply caulking to fill flanged joints to be level. 5. Application Method(s): Spray or brush. Brush must be used for touch up and stripe coating. 6. Three-coat system to be one of the following and of the same Manufacturer of all other coating products used on this project: a. Sherwin-Williams Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Epoxy Mastic II 4 –6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: Macropoxy 646 Beige Intermediate Coat: Macropoxy 646 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Macropoxy 646 4 – 6 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 – 18 mils b. Carboline Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Carbomastic 15 4 – 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: Carboguard 60 Beige Intermediate Coat: Carboguard 60 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Carboguard 60 4 – 6 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 – 18 mils c. PPG Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Amerlock 2/400 AL 5 – 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: Amerlock 2/400 Beige Intermediate Coat: Amerlock 2/400 5 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Amerlock 2/400 5 – 6 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 15 – 18 mils d. Tnemec Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 29 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Chembuild Series 135 4 – 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline Contrasting Color Intermediate Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 4 – 6 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 – 18 mils e. AkzoNobel / International Paint, LLC Coat Product DFT (mils) Color Prime Coat: Interseal 670HS 4 – 6 mils Aluminum Stripe Coat: Interseal 670HS Beige Intermediate Coat: Interseal 670HS 4 – 6 mils Beige Finish Coat: Interseal 670HS 4 – 6 mils Per 2.02.C.2 Minimum and Maximum DFT for System 12 – 18 mils 2.03 COATING REPAIR A. Coating repair materials will be as recommended by the coating manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. B. All repair materials in contact with potable water must be NSF 61 certified. 2.04 EPOXY FILLER AND SURFACER A. Product must be a high solids epoxy filler and surface for steel. Product does not need to be be NSF/ANSI Standard 61 certified if coated with a NSF certified coating system. B. Coating manufacturer must confirm that products are compatible with coating system. C. Approved Manufacturers/Products: 1. Tnemec - Series 215 Surfacing Epoxy. 2. Sherwin-Williams – Steel-Seam FT910 3. AkzoNobel / International Paint, LLC Ceilcote 610 4. As Approved by the Coatings Manufacturer and the Engineer. 2.05 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric Material must be a non-woven, 100% polypropylene fabric, with a “heat-set” on one side. Material to weigh 8 – 10 oz./yd2 and be approved by the coating supplier. 2.06 CAULK SCHEDULE IC – 01 Tank Interior/Exterior System A. Sika Flex 1A or Approved Equal. B. Product must be NSF 61 approved for contact with potable water. C. Color: Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 30 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 1. Caulking within the interior of the tank must be a contrasting color to the finish coat as approved by the Owner. 2. Exterior and exposed caulking color must be approved by the Owner. 2.07 COLOR SELECTION A. Contractor must submit drawdowns for Owner’s review and approval of final color selection for all exterior coating systems. B. Use a multi-color system coating for any surface receiving more than one coat. Each coat must be tinted differently from the preceding coat in a manner that will allow the various coats to be easily distinguished. Colors must generally be from light to dark shades, but the Contractor may have the option to select tint shades to insure coats will receive adequate coverage without bleeding or otherwise showing through the preceding coat. C. Piping and equipment must be color coded in accordance with the requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) or as indicated above. 2.08 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. Abrasive materials used must be non-carcinogenic when properly used, properly graded, be sharp, have proper angularity, and be clean and free of contaminants that would interfere with adhesion of coating, including lead, chromium, cadmium, arsenic, chlorides, dirt, oil, etc., such as steel grit or approved equal. B. All expendable abrasives must meet SSPC-AB 1 and all abrasives must meet the requirements of SSPC-AB 1, Class A for silica content with less than 1% silica by weight before blasting. C. New ferrous recyclable abrasive must meet SSPC AB 3 and AB 2. D. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous recycled abrasive must meet the requirements of SSPC-AB 2/4, for new and re-manufactured abrasives. Recycled abrasive used on this project must be sampled before use by the Owner’s Representative and the Contractor. Contractor must take samples in the presence of the Owner’s Representative. Every barrel or container of recycled abrasive must be tested. Contractor must have the samples sent to a laboratory for testing per SSPC AB 2/4 and for atomic absorption testing for total lead, cadmium, chromium, barium and arsenic. The recycled abrasive must not be used until the results of the atomic absorption testing, testing required by SSPC-AB 3/4 and chain of custody forms are submitted and accepted by the Engineer. Test results must indicate that the total lead levels are less than 1,000 ppm (<0.1%) to be allowed to be used on this project. Test must be used for abrasives used in both shop and field abrasive blasting. E. The grade must be of such size as to achieve an acceptable anchor pattern or surface profile as required by the Coating Manufacturer. F. Silica sand shall not be used as a blast abrasive. 3.00 EXECUTION Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 31 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 3.01 GENERAL A. All materials must be handled and applied in accordance with the Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. No coatings shall be applied while water is in the reservoir. C. All coating material for the exterior topcoat must be mixed from one batch number. Batching should occur so that the shelf life extends beyond the end of the project. D. All blasting and coating equipment must be in first class condition and comply with all recommendations of the Coating Manufacturer and these specifications. The Owner reserves the right to have the Contractor immediately repair, modify or remove equipment functioning poorly or creating a nuisance as determined by the Owner. E. Do not apply any coating to machinery, piping, or other surfaces before testing has been completed and systems approved. Any damage to coatings resulting from subsequent corrective procedures must be stripped back to bare metal and repainted with the appropriate paint system as directed by the Engineer. F. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation must be coated prior to installation, or must be coated and approved in stages as the work is installed. G. At least seven (7) days shall be allowed for drying of finished surfaces before any machinery can be placed into service. H. Do not apply coating over nameplates or other identification plaques. Mask such plates and keep protected. Remove tape and polish nameplates after painting is complete. I. Coating application procedures must conform to the standards of craftsmanship as discussed in the Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1 “Good Painting Practice”. J. All thinning must be as per the Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations. Use only those thinners expressly approved by the Manufacturer for the coatings used on this project. All thinners used with interior surface coatings must be those tested and approved by NSF in conjunction with the NSF approved coating materials. Do not allow thinners to be stored in unmarked containers at any time. K. Proper illumination equipment must be provided by the Contractor in accordance with SSPC Guide 12. Explosion-proof lights and electrical equipment must be provided. Whenever required by the Owner’s Representative and/or Owner, the Contractor must provide additional illumination and necessary supports to cover all areas to be inspected. The level of illumination for inspection purposes shall be determined by the Owner’s Representative or Owner. Project lighting must not interfere with existing residences or schools. Complaints from adjacent residential neighbors shall require Contractor to modify lighting plan to address complaint. Project lighting is considered subsidiary work relating to various bid items of the Contract. L. The Contractor must provide covers and plugs for the intake, discharge and drain piping at the point where the pipe enters the water compartment to prevent debris, or any other foreign matter from entering the water mains. The covers and plugs must remain in place from beginning of the job until just prior to filling the reservoir for disinfection. M. Grating or grills must be securely attached to all openings not otherwise secured at the end of work each day until work commences again. Gratings or grills must be used on all Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 32 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 openings until the reservoir is secured for service. Grates or grills must be of at least 1/4” wire mesh, with a minimum of two (2) square inch mesh openings and a maximum of six (6) square inch openings, to allow adequate free air passage and reservoir protection. N. The Engineer must approve surfaces for application of coatings at each stage. Any material that is coated prior to the Engineer’s approval must be stripped back to bear metal and repainted. O. Cleaning and coating must be scheduled such that dust and other materials from adjoining work will not contaminate wet or newly coated surfaces. P. Roof plates must be jacked off rafters as required to abrasive blast and coat between the rafters and roof plates. Contractor is responsible for any damages to the tank and structural members resulting from point loading or over jacking the roof. Contractor must use swivel or angle tips to allow abrasive blasting and coating between rafter and roof plates and other tight areas not accessible with straight tips. Q. Where inspection shows that the specified thickness is not developed, apply additional coats to produce the required dry film thickness. R. Stainless steel may be welded to the tank. Exterior coating system must be applied 6-inches onto any stainless steel materials welded to the tank. The stopping point on the stainless steel surfaces that are to be coated must be masked with painter’s tape. The tape must be removed after the coating has dried to a soft consistency, but before it is cured. S. The Contractor may install painter’s nipples in the roof of the tank for supporting staging on the interior of the tank. The nipples must remain a part of the tank after construction is complete. Nipples are to be constructed of 316 stainless steel and coated with the specified coating system. Contractor must submit shop drawings for the nipples, the location of the nipples and a narrative on how the nipples will be prepared for interior coatings. T. All applicable equipment must be electrically grounded as required and must have clean operating gauges, moisture traps, etc. U. Effective oil and water separators combined with after coolers or deliquescent dryers must be used in compressed air lines serving abrasive blasting operations to remove detrimental oil and moisture from the air. Compressors may be tested periodically by the Owner’s Representative for oil and water contamination of compressed air per ASTM D 4285. All compressor units found to produce unacceptable amounts of oil and or water must be replaced with a compressor that is acceptable. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Shop Surface Preparation Clean and degrease surfaces prior to abrasive blasting to SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning. Methods described in SSPC SP-1 include solvents, detergent/water, emulsions, and steam. Proposed method must be documented in the coating plan. Contractor must contain and properly dispose of all runoff and debris from cleaning. Prepare surfaces by abrasive blasting as specified and apply shop prime coat. Shop primed steel plates must not have primer extended within 4-inches along all edges to be welded. All primer within 4-inches of an area to be welded must be removed prior to welding. Welding of painted services will not be allowed. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 33 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 B. Field Surface Solvent Cleaning Clean and degrease surfaces prior to abrasive blasting to SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning. Methods described in SSPC SP-1 include solvents, detergent/water, emulsions, and steam. Proposed method must be documented in the coating plan. Contractor must contain and properly dispose of all runoff and debris from cleaning. Remove heavy deposits of grease or oil from the surface prior to any other surface preparation. Neutralize and flush chemical contamination prior to any surface preparation. All weld slag, spatter, rough welds and other sharp or rough areas must be removed. All rusted, abraded and unpainted areas must be abrasive blast cleaned as specified. Touch up prime coat with primer as specified. Contractor must contain and properly dispose of all runoff and debris from cleaning. C. If the following conditions exist or are prevalent, surface preparation and coating must be delayed or postponed until conditions are favorable. Each day’s coating must be completed in time to permit the film sufficient drying time prior to damage by atmospheric conditions or changes. No surface preparation shall begin or coating applied: 1. When the surface, air or material is below or above the Manufacturer’s printed instructions. 2. When surfaces are wet or damp. 3. During weather conditions of rain, snow, fog or mist. 4. When the air and steel temperature is less-than or equal to 5o F above the dew point temperature. 5. If the relative humidity is above 85%. 6. When it is expected that the air and/or surface temperature will be below or above the Coating Manufacturer’s recommended temperatures within four (4) hours after applications of coating, minimum. Coating manufacturer may require additional time between application and temperature and weather changes. D. All pre-assembled shop primed items must be prepared in accordance with these specifications and inspected by the Owner’s Representative before and after priming. E. For both immersion and non-immersion service, all sharp edges and welds must be ground smooth to a rounded contour and all weld splatter must be removed prior to abrasive blasting. Edges of metal to be coated must be rounded to a minimum of 1/16” radius of chamfered a minimum of 1/16” at an angle of 45-degrees. F. Weld profiles must conform to NACE RP0178, Profile ‘D’. G. Abrasive Blasting 1. Prior to extensive abrasive blasting operations, the Contractor must perform a test blast on both the exterior and interior of the tank in the presence of the Engineer or Owner’s Representative. Test section must be a minimum of 5-feet by 5-feet. The Engineer or Owner’s Representative must verify that the surface cleanliness and profile meet the requirements of the specification and meet the coating manufacturer’s requirements for the coating to be applied. If the test section does not meet the requirements, the Contract must make changes to the abrasive materials and methods to provide suitable blast. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 34 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 2. Abrasive blast only the amount of surface area which can be primed the same day or before any rust starts to form, whichever occurs first. Areas which are not painted the same day must be re-blasted on the day the prime coat is applied. 3. Blasting abrasive may be left on the tank floor while painting the interior roof and walls provided no paint is applied to the walls within ten (10) feet of the floor. 4. Shrouding or recovery of all blast material will be mandatory during all exterior blasting. The TCEQ has established, under Regulation I, Control of Air Pollution and Visible Emissions from Particulate Matter, Standard 30 TCEQ 111.131, 111.133, 111.135, 111.137, and 111.139 titled “Abrasive Blasting of Water Storage Tanks Performed by Portable Operations”. All work must be performed in accordance with these regulations and are hereby made part of this specification by reference. Contractor must provide written notification of activities to the Air Section Manager at the applicable TCEQ Regional Office and any local authorities having jurisdiction over abrasive blasting activities. Refer to 30 TAC 111.135(b). 5. The CONTRACTOR must contain all waste and process discharge in accordance with the accepted methods for the process and materials that are in abatement. 6. Air filtration/dust collectors must be used in conjunction with the dehumidification and/or ventilation equipment during blasting operations. 7. Where abrasive blast cleaning will not remove or properly prepare metal surfaces, hand and/or power tool cleaning must be used to remove such conditions as weld splatter, laminations and radius-sharp edges. Hand tool or power tool must be used on areas less than two (2) foot diameter or smaller or on corners and edges of the reservoir and its internal support members. 8. All abrasive blast equipment must be equipped with, including but not limited to the following: a. Noise reducing devices b. Hose coupling safety devices c. Electrical grounding devices d. Moisture traps and filters e. Fresh air hoods for all blasters f. ”Dead Man” switches on all blast hoses g. Air Dryers H. Surface profile must be in accordance with manufacturer’s printed requirements. I. The adequacy of the preparation of surfaces must be determined by comparing the surface with SSPC VIS 1, SSPC VIS 3, SSPC VIS 4 and NACE RP0178. J. The requirements for preparing carbon steel for painting apply to stainless steel, with the exception that the Contractor must not use metallic abrasives on stainless steel. 3.03 APPLICATION Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 35 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 A. After abrasive blast cleaning, dust and spent abrasive must be removed from the surfaces by air blasting and brush sweeping. The prime coat must be applied as soon as possible after the blasting and surface cleaning is completed, inspected and approved by the Inspector. B. Blasted surfaces must be coated before rust forms on the surface. No prepared surface will be allowed to receive a coating if “rust bloom” or surface discoloration has occurred. All blasted surfaces must be coated to within 6 inches of the edge of a blasted area. No visible rust must be coated under any circumstances, including rust bloom or if discoloration has occurred, regardless of elapsed time between blasting and coating. C. Provide mist coat if recommended by the Coating Manufacturer. D. The Contractor must apply each coat at the rate and in the manner specified by the Coating Manufacturer, except as may be modified herein. If material has thickened or must be diluted for application, coating must be built up to the same dry film thickness as specified for each coat of the complete system. E. Maximum and minimum DFT must be per the supplied Coating Manufacturer’s printed requirements and as required by this specification. DFT will be measured per SSPC-PA 2, Level 2 with an allowable measurement of spot DFT of: 1. Minimum DFT as specified, no less than the minimum specified will be accepted. 2. 120% of maximum DFT specified. F. The Contractor and painting technicians shall be responsible application of coating system and must have current applicator certifications from the Coating Manufacturer. Submit certifications with coating submittal. Manufacturer shall certify that coating system is compatible with the tank’s cathodic protection system. G. No coating shall be used which has an expired shelf or pot life. H. Coating must be applied by skilled workmen and must be brushed out or sprayed evenly, without runs, crazing, sags, or other blemishes. I. Sand between coats to remove over spray and dry fall. J. Apply the first coat to the surface, including cutting in around edges, before the second coat is applied. The second coat and any successive coats must not to be applied before notifying the Owner’s field representative and obtaining approval. Each coat must be tested before the successive coat is applied. K. The coating curing period must be adjusted to compensate for less than adequate weather conditions, as recommended by the Coating Manufacturer, for complete curing of the entire coating system. The full curing time recommended by the manufacturer shall be provided. L. Coating must be continuous and must be accomplished in an orderly manner to facilitate proper inspection control. M. Where a roller or brush is used to apply the coating, additional coats may be necessary to achieve the recommended dry film thickness and/or to achieve total coverage of the underlying surface. Coated surfaces must be totally free of all roller nap, roller marks, brush bristles and brush marks. N. When using conventional coating spray equipment for coating operations, effective oil and water separators combined with after coolers or deliquescent dryers must be used in Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 36 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 compressed air lines to remove detrimental oil and moisture from the air. Separators must be placed as far as practical from the compressor. Compressors may be tested periodically by the Owner’s Representative for oil and water contamination of compressed air. Testing must follow ASTM D4285 “Standard Test Method of Indicating Oil and Water in Compressed Air”. All compressor units found to produce unacceptable amounts of oil and or water, as determined by results of ASTM D4285 test data and interpretation of data by the Owner’s Representative must be replaced with a compressor that is acceptable. O. To the extent possible, the interior and exterior of all piping entering through the walls of the reservoir tank must be blasted and recoated the same as their respective reservoir walls. The interior of piping entering through the reservoir floor must be blasted and recoated the same as the interior of the reservoir. Methods of recovering blast material from the inside of the pipes must be submitted and approved by the Owner. P. Check for compatibility when applying coatings over existing coatings. Apply a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 square feet or as directed by the Engineer. Allow to cure one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D3359 in the presence of the Engineer. If adhesion does not meet the manufacturer’s published data, consult with the Engineer. 3.04 100% SOLIDS INTERIOR LINING SPECIAL SURFACE PREPARATION A. Coatings must not be applied to flash rusted surfaces or to existing coatings. B. All weld seams, gaps, edges, bolts and difficult areas difficult to coat must receive an initial spray applied stripe coat of the high solids coating just before application of the liner over the entire surface. C. Geo-textile fabric 1. Contractor must apply geo-textile fabric over sharp edges, areas of pitting as, over bolted and gasketed seams and other locations determined by the Engineer. 2. Contractor is to stripe coat the area to be treated. Place pre-cut length of fabric and press evenly into coating. “Heat-set” side of fabric is to be facing out, i.e. “fuzzy” side towards the steel. Fabric is to be embedded in the stripe coat and then encapsulated as the same time as the rest of the structure. Exposed fabric fibers, edges or other discontinuities are not acceptable. D. Backer-Rod In unsealed joints, corners and gaps, fill gaps with backer rod. Backer rod is to be packed into gaps after stripe coat of the area and then coated with final coat. E. Contractor must provide primer over pitted or corroded areas per the coating manufacturer’s recommendation and as approved by the Engineer. No separate pay. 3.05 STRIPE COAT A. Stripe coat must be applied by brush and thinned according to written Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations and applied to all welds, weld seams, tack welds (new and old), edges, bolts, rivets, ladder rails and rungs, seamed corners, joints of any kind and Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 37 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 locations where brackets, lugs and other difficult to coat surfaces exist. Stripe coat on all welds and weld seams must extend two (2) inches minimum above, below and beyond all welded sections. B. Stripe coat must occur in coating system layering as stated in Coating Schedule. C. Stripe coat is accomplished by moving the brush back and forth in a scrubbing motion working primer into all crevices. Stripe coat must be performed with a high-quality bristle brush using primer that has been thinned according to manufacturer’s instructions. Bristles left on the surface must be removed before the coating dries. If bristles are discovered after the coating has dried, the bristle must be removed, the coating removed, and the area correctly re-coated at no additional cost to the Owner D. Stripe coating must be tinted such that it can be easily distinguished from the other coats. 3.06 FINISH A. All primer, intermediate and finish coats must be inspected visually and must be free of all sags, runs, bubbles, drips, waves, laps, unnecessary brush marks, over spray, environmental contaminants or other physical defects, including shadows, and be uniform in color, texture and gloss. All coatings must be applied in a professional manner to achieve the specified dry film thickness (DFT) leaving a smooth and uniform coating. B. Prior to application of the intermediate and finish coats, exterior surfaces must be thoroughly waterjet cleaned to remove any surface contamination in accordance with the Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Sand between coats to remove over spray and dry fall. D. Finish coat must have a uniform color and texture. Any “bleed through” will not be accepted and Contractor must provide additional coatings as required to provide a uniform color at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Apply caulk in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. After application of the finish coat on the interior of the reservoir, apply caulking to seal roof laps, skip welded roof rafters, around bolts and on bolt threads and other areas not seal welded. 3.07 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES A. The Contractor must take every precaution available while cleaning and coating the reservoir and pedestal to avoid dusting or spraying the reservoir property, nearby residences and vehicles with either blast debris or over-spray coating. Shrouding is mandatory for exterior abrasive blasting and for spray application of coatings. All shrouding, containment and disposal of waste will be in conformance with TCEQ Requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for properly loading, securing, transporting and disposing of all waste. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, modifications or repairs are necessary to the shroud or ground cover apparatus to provide improved containment of blasting or coating operations, blasting and coating operations must stop until the Owner’s Representative indicates to the Contractor that adequate repairs are complete. C. Prior to any surface preparation, the ground surrounding the reservoir and pedestal must be covered with tarps or a similar ground cover that will allow for recovery of paint scraps and Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 38 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 blast media. Adequate protection of all areas surrounding the tank must be provided during coating application. D. The Contractor is responsible for complete cleanup of any and all areas contaminated by blast debris. E. The Contractor is responsible for any and all damages to on-site facilities, residences, vehicles and/or public health, including any fines or penalties resulting from improper containment during blasting or coating of the reservoir and pedestal. F. If present at the site, all security equipment (light poles, camera poles, microwave beam poles, etc.) must be protected by construction of temporary fences or barricades around above ground devices. Four feet must remain clear of construction materials and activities around all security equipment devices. G. Protect adjacent materials from damage, including over spray or spillage. Provide drop cloths or other protective tarps to cover floors, equipment or other adjacent materials. 3.08 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Promptly remove trash and debris resulting from painting operation from the Site. Remove drop cloths, masking tapes and other protective coverings. Remove paint spills, splatters, overlap of paint from adjacent material and other defects. Spot paint nicks and other defects. B. Remove paint containers and waste products. Thoroughly clean paint storage rooms, removing spilled paint from walls and floors. 3.09 ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION A. The Owner and Contractor shall observe all surfaces of the reservoir within 11 to 23 months after the reservoir work has been accepted for Substantial Completion and placed in service to establish if remedial work is required. If the water utility is not able to remove the tank from service for the inspection or for any repair work, due to adverse weather conditions, drought or system limitations, the inspection or repair work may be delayed by the Owner for up to 16 months at no additional cost. All repair work must be conducted within a schedule approved by the Owner. B. If failures in any portion of the reservoir surface, exceeds 5 percent of that portion, as determined by the Owner, then for that portion, the entire coating system must be completely removed, re-coated and re-tested in accordance with the specifications herein. In the event any portion of the reservoir surface requires repair, partial or complete, a second anniversary observation must be made unless the Owner otherwise deems it not to be necessary. If subsequent anniversary observations are made, time stipulations, coating removal, repair; re-testing requirements must be the same as provided for in this Specification. Each subsequent repair will have a warranty observation to occur within 24 months after the repair is completed. C. The Owner will isolate the reservoir from the distribution system and drain the reservoir. The Contractor must open, clean out, high-pressure water wash and rinse the tank prior to the anniversary observation. After observation of the tank is complete and repair work accepted by Owner, the Contractor must follow disinfection procedures specified. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 39 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 D. The Contractor must provide suitable and adequate equipment including, lighting, ventilation, rigging, cable climbers, mirrors, inspection equipment, and sufficient man- power to clean, disinfect and move equipment and tools around the reservoir, etc., as may be necessary to facilitate complete observation of all interior surfaces. The Contractor must bear all costs of the anniversary observation and must incorporate such costs into his bid. E. Any location, including but not limited to locations where a coating has peeled off, bubbled, blistered, chipped, or cracked, etc., or where pinholes and/or holidays are present and locations where rusting or corrosion is evident, will be considered a failure or defect of the coating system and must be repaired as required. Repairs will be made at areas or locations where coating failures are found, even though metal surfaces may be protected by a cathodic protection system. F. Methods of testing for coating failure which, may or may not be evident, must include, but not be limited to, adhesion tests, film thickness measurement, holiday testing, etc. Testing may be non-destructive or destructive. The Contractor, at his expense, must repair all areas where destructive tests are performed. G. The anniversary repair work must be completed within an agreed time as determined by the Owner and Contractor. All repairs must be made as per the Coating Manufacturer’s written repair work instructions or that which is approved and acceptable to the Owner and completed within 90 calendar days of the anniversary observation. Holiday testing must be conducted by the Contractor to check all reservoir interior coating repairs, including the interior roof. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 40 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 ATTACHMENT A - SAMPLE COATING MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY Coating Supplier Logo, Address and Contact Information Date PROJECT NAME: ____________________________________ OWNER: _____________________________ LOCATION: Project address CONTRACTOR: Paint Contractor 1. COATING SUPPLIER NAME INTERIOR COATING SYSTEM (The "SYSTEM") a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10 degree of cleanliness and obtain a 3.5 mil minimum angular anchor profile. b. Coating Products: _________________ at ___ mils minimum DFT when measured in accordance with SSPC -PA2, Level 2. 2. INTERIOR WET SURFACE WARRANTY: Coating Supplier Name, hereinafter called "Coating Supplier Name", warrants that the Coating Products were not defectively manufactured and therefore the System, if applied in accordance with Coating Supplier Name's specifications, will prevent delamination and corrosion (collectively, “Coating Problems”) of the surface on which the System is applied of more than one percent (1.0%) per year for ten (10) years from the date of application on the interior of the tank. 3. COATING SUPPLIER NAME EXTERIOR COATING SYSTEM (The "SYSTEM") a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6 degree of cleanliness and obtain a 2.0 mil minimum angular anchor profile. b. Coating Products: _________________ at ___ mils minimum DFT when measured in accordance with SSPC -PA2, Level 2. 4. EXTERIOR DRY SURFACE WARRANTY: Note to Specifier: Update warranty period required. For EN-02, provide a 10-year warranty. For EN-03, provide a 10-year warranty. Coating Supplier Name, hereinafter called " Coating Supplier Name ", warrants that the Coating Products were not defectively manufactured and therefore the System, if applied in accordance with Coating Supplier Name specifications, will prevent blistering, cracking or alligatoring and corrosion; (collectively, “Coating Problems”) of the surface on which the System is applied of more than one percent (1.0%) per year for ten (10) years from the date of application. The System will also not have a change of color of more than 12 CIE LAB units (measured as 12 Delta E) after ten (10) years. The System will also not have a loss of gloss Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 41 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 of more than 30 units after ten (10) years. Gloss to be measured by gloss meter in accordance with ASTM D523-89 w/60° geometry. The obligation of Coating Supplier Name under this warranty is limited as set forth below. The warranty period will not be extended for any event or occurrence including, but not limited to, repairs. 5. CONDITIONS TO BE CONSIDERED AS NORMAL MAINTENANCE: During each year of this warranty, Coating Problems not greater than the allowable percentage set forth in Paragraph 2 and 4 or other coating related issues related to the project shall be considered normal maintenance, correction of which shall be the responsibility of the Owner. 6. APPLICATION OF SYSTEM: Surface preparation and application of the System to all coated and related surfaces must be done in strict accordance with Coating Supplier Name’s then current Application Instructions of Coating Supplier Name. 7. CONDITIONS: This warranty is conditioned upon and will be invalidated by failure to strictly comply with the following conditions: a) A PRE-JOB conference, which was attended by the Owner, the Owner’s Representative, the site General Contractor, the selected Painting Contractor, and Coating Supplier Name, to ensure that all parties understood the written specification. b) Only Coating Supplier Name products, including thinners, were used as components of the System. c) The cure period required for the System was conformed to in all material respects with the optimum time, temperature and humidity stipulation of Coating Supplier Name as set forth in its Product Data Sheets. d) A Coating Supplier Name representative was permitted at all times requested, to observe all aspects of the surface preparation and system application work. e) The surface on which the System was applied was of a quality necessary for the System to provide the protection required. f) The Contractor has signed this warranty which confirms the surface has been prepared and the System has been applied in strict accordance with Coating Supplier Name’s recommendations and Application Instructions. g) The Owner has signed this warranty confirming that the work has been completed in accordance with the specifications of Owner and has been accepted. h) Coating Supplier Name must be notified within thirty (30) days of the date Coating Problems are observed and must be afforded opportunities to inspect any such areas, at such times as Coating Supplier Name may reasonably request. i) Coating Supplier Name has received full and timely payment of all Coating Supplier Name invoices both for materials supplied to the project and for any services rendered by Coating Supplier Name. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 42 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 j) After a claim has been made, the complainant has notified Coating Supplier Name about the environment to which all areas covered by this warranty have been exposed since the initial application including surface treating, washing and cleaning procedures, heating cycles and other data to re-construct the services history of the project. 8. EXCLUSIONS: In addition to limitations and exclusions set forth in other provisions, this warranty shall not apply to areas of Coating Problems which have resulted from damage during shipment or construction or from physical or mechanical abuse or from the failure to perform the normal maintenance, normal wear and tear, from welding, interior heating, or war, fire, explosion, catastrophe, or other acts of God, harmful chemicals, fuels or vapors, any event or service beyond a reasonable term of usage, or surface areas which because of their physical shape, characteristics or configuration, present special coverage difficulties. 9. COATING SUPPLIER NAME'S OBLIGATIONS: In the event the System does not provide the protection referred to in Paragraphs 2 or 4, as applicable to the systems, Coating Supplier Name’s sole obligation shall be to provide coating for the area where the Coating Problems occurred, by providing such Coating Supplier Name coating materials for up to a period of fifteen (15) years for the Interior Coating System or ten (10) years for the Exterior Coating System as may be necessary to correct the affected area, PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that Coating Supplier Name shall not be obligated to provide replacement coating materials having an aggregate value in excess of one hundred percent (100%) of the total sales price of the coating materials initially applied. At such time, if any, as Coating Supplier Name shall have supplied replacement coating material(s) with an aggregate value equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the total sales price of the coating materials initially applied, Coating Supplier Name’s obligation under this warranty shall be deemed to have been completely fulfilled. Repairs performed under this warranty shall neither extend the term of this warranty nor affect the allowable percentage specified herein. 10. LIMITATIONS OF COVERAGE: This warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive warranty given by Coating Supplier Name with respect to the System; all warranties and obligations not expressly set forth herein are excluded. By way of illustration and not limitation, any and all liabilities and obligations for consequential and incidental damages, including, but not limited to, damages for injuries to persons or to property, or breach of contract, or breach of implied covenant of good faith and dealing, or negligence, or strict liability, or for labor costs, or material costs not specifically provided for herein, or for other costs of repair work, or for loss of use or time or revenues or profits, or for any claims by third parties are expressly excluded from this warranty. 11. ARBITRATION: The parties hereto agree that all disputes and differences arising under this warranty shall be resolved by binding arbitration at the location indicated by the Owner. 12. GOVERNING LAW: This warranty shall be interpreted and construed under and in accordance with the laws of the State of __________. Attachment 3Item 12 Coatings for Water Storage Tanks 09 95 00 - 43 PRP17369 – FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B – ADDENDUM NO. 4 THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY AND CONSTITUTES THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF CONTRACTOR AND OWNER IN CONNECTION WITH THE SYSTEMS. THIS WARRANTY IS SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATIONS AND CONDITIONS DESCRIBED ABOVE AND SHALL NOT BE DEEMED TO INCLUDE ANY WARRANTY OF FITNESS OR MERCHANTABILITY WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WHICH ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED, AND COATING SUPPLIER NAME COMPANY SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY EXPRESSED HEREIN. THIS WARRANTY IS ISSUED TO THE OWNER ONLY AND IS NOT ASSIGNABLE OR TRANSFERABLE. PRESENTATION OF AN EXECUTED WARRANTY COPY TO COATING SUPPLIER NAME AT THE TIME OF CLAIM IS A CONDITION OF THIS WARRANTY. THIS WARRANTY CONTAINS A BINDING ARBITRATION PROVISION WHICH MAY BE ENFORCED BY THE PARTIES. COATING SUPPLIER NAME BY:_ __________________ Date: _________________ Date: _________________ Authorized Contractor Signature (Work performed in accordance with Coating Supplier Name recommendations) Date:__________________ Authorized Owner Signature (Work accepted as applied) END OF SAMPLE COATING MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY END OF SECTION Attachment 3Item 12 FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK BID NO. 2019-04-B PAGE 8 BID NO. 2019-04-B FISHTRAP 2.5 MG ELEVATED STORAGE TANK Bid Item A – 2.5 Million Gallon Elevated Storage Tank Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Total No. Cost Amount 1 2.5 MG Elevated Storage Tank 1 LS Bid Item B – Supporting Items 1 Mobilization 1 LS 2 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Erosion Control 1 LS 3 Site Preparation and Grading 1 LS 4 8’ Tall Ornamental Iron Fence, Personnel Access & Automated Vehicular Sliding Gate 775 LF 5 Ornamental Stone Fence Columns 15 EA 6 8’ Board on Board Wood Fence 245 LF 7 24” Ductile Iron (Class 300) Waterline, Fittings, Adapters and Appurtenances 240 LF 8 Connect to Existing 20” Waterline 1 EA 9 20-inch Butterfly Valve Assemblies 1 EA 10 24-inch Butterfly Valve Assemblies 2 EA 11 36” Steel Casing by Open Cut 28 LF 12 36” Steel Casing by Bore 57 LF 13 Trench Safety 190 LF 14 Fire Hydrant Assembly 1 EA 15 12” Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert 65 LF 16 8” Concrete Access Drive and Parking on Tank Site 325 SY 17 Gravel Access Road 515 SY 18 Concrete Apron 145 SY 19 Concrete Sidewalk and Walkways 95 SY 20 Hydromulch Seeding 8,950 SY 21 Block Sodding 6,100 SY 22 Trees and Planting 1 LS 23 Landscape Irrigation System 1 LS 24 Rock Rip-Rap 27 SY 25 Flowable Fill Encasement 25 LF 26 Project Signs 2 EA 27 Utility Markers 3 EA 28 Traffic Control Plan and Execution 1 LS 29 Tank and Site Electrical 1 LS 30 SCADA System Coordination 1 LS ADDENDUM NO. 4 Attachment 3Item 12 Page 1 of 2 To: Mayor and Town Council From: Pete Anaya, P.E., Deputy Director of Engineering Services Through: Harlan Jefferson, Town Manager Re: Town Council Meeting – December 11, 2018 Agenda Item: Consider and act upon authorizing the Town Manager to execute a Professional Services Agreement between Halff Associates, Inc., and the Town of Prosper, Texas, related to the design of the Prosper Trail/DNT Intersection Improvement project. Description of Agenda Item: This project involves design of improvements to the proposed intersections at Prosper Trail and the Dallas North Tollway (DNT). The full cross street roadway approach for ultimate conditions on the west side of the DNT ROW shall be extended approximately 100’ west of the intersection and then transition with the use of temporary pavement to the existing 2-lane improved section. The full cross street roadway approach for ultimate conditions on the east side of the DNT ROW shall be extended approximately 100’ east of the intersection and then transition to a 4-lane divided section to connect to the existing 4-lane section. Design improvements to be included are grading, paving, drainage, signage, pavement markings and construction traffic control. No sidewalks and/or proposed traffic signal modifications are included. Design work shall be performed as a single project for public bids using Town of Prosper standard construction contracts and specification format. Coordination will be performed with Collin County to ensure the proposed improvements are consistent with the County’s southbound frontage road construction project and traffic signal installation. Other project related work shall include subsurface utility investigation, survey for design, survey for ROW/easement parcel documents, and general coordination. At the August 27, 2016, Town Council meeting, the Town Council approved a list of qualified engineering firms, which included services for engineering design. Halff Associates, Inc., is included on the list. Budget Impact: The cost for the design work is $88,000 and is funded from the Town’s current Capital Improvement Plan in Account No. 750-5410-10-00-1830-ST. Funding for the construction of the project estimated at $900,000, is budgeted in FY CIP 2019-2020. Legal Obligations and Review: Terrence Welch of Brown & Hofmeister, L.L.P., has approved the standard Professional Engineering Services Agreement as to form and legality. Prosper is a place where everyone matters. ENGINEERING Item 13 Page 2 of 2 Attached Documents: 1. Professional Services Agreement 2. Location Map Town Staff Recommendation: Town staff recommends that the Town Council authorize the Town Manager to execute a Professional Services Agreement between Halff Associates, Inc., and the Town of Prosper, Texas, related to the design of the Prosper Trail/DNT Intersection Improvement project. Proposed Motion: I move to authorize the Town Manager to execute a Professional Services Agreement between Halff Associates, Inc., and the Town of Prosper, Texas, related to the design of the Prosper Trail/DNT Intersection Improvement project. Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Item 13 Prosper Trail & Dallas Parkway Intersection Item 13